REESE  LIBRARY 

or  i  HI: 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA.    ; 


Accessions  No. (fffiiOJv}.     C/.;.«  MJ.    ^ 

..^.      .  -i..    ^ 


ENGINEERING  CONTRACTS  AND 
SPECIFICATIONS 


INCLUDING 


A  Brief  Synopsis  of  the  Law  of  Contracts 

AND 

Illustrative  Examples 

OF   THE 

General  and  Technical  Clauses 

OF  VARIOUS   KINDS  OF 

Engineering  Specifications 

DESIGNED  FOR  THE  USE  OF  STUDENTS,  ENGINEERS,  AND  CONTRACTORS 

BY 

J.  B.  JOHNSON,  C.  E. 

PROFESSOR  OF  CIVIL  ENGINEERING,  WASHINGTON  UNIVERSITY,  ST.  Louis,  Mo. 

MEMBER  OF  THE  INSTITUTION  OF  CIVIL  ENGINEERS. 

MEMBER  OF  THE  AMERICAN  SOCIETY  OF  CIVIL  ENGINEERS. 

MEMBER  OF  THE  AMERICAN  SOCIETY  OF  MECHANICAL  ENGINEERS,  ETC. 


FIRST  EDITION. 
ENGINEERING  NEWS  PUBLISHING  CO.,  NEW  YORK 

1895- 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress  in  the  year  eighteen  hundred  and  ninety-five,  by 

J.  B.  JOHNSON,  C.  E., 
in  the  office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  Washington,  D.  C. 


Printed  and  bound  by 
E.  W.  STEPHENS, 

COLUMBIA,  MO. 


INDEX. 


PAGE. 

Abandonment  of 

contract.. . .  109,  295,  391 

Acceptance,  implied..     22 

Action,  right  of 63 

removal  of  statutory  bar  to.. 65 

Advertisements 67 

information  embodied  in..  67 

theory  of 68 

examples  of 71,  349,  367 

Agreement .  .  19 

failure  of,  by  mistake 22 

to  take  less  than  is  due   ...  .32 

Alteration  of  contracts 4& 

Appliances,  suitable 91,391 

who  must  furnish 376 

Assent,  mutual 19 

qualified 22 

Assignment  of  contract.  . .  108,  295 
Authority  of  engineer..    . .  96,  273 
Belts,   leather  driving,  specifi- 
cations for 251 

Bidders,  instructions  to. ..  v/  ....74 

Bids,  rejection  of 70 

Boilers,  water  tubular    (St. 
Louis),  complete 
specifications  for. . .  .300 

Bond,  proposal 84 

indemnity 413 

contract 299,  41 1 

combined    with    specifica- 
tions and  contract — 270 
Bonus   and    discount  based   on 

tests 296 

Breach  of  contract 58 

Bridge  masonry,  specifications 

for 170 

Bridge    renewals,    preliminary 

surveys  for 414 

Bridges    and    viaducts    of    iron 
and    steel,    complete 
specifications  for. . .  .330 
Bridge    superstructure,    specifi- 
cations for 233 

Bridging,  pile  and  trestle,  spec- 
ifications for .244 

Building,  Astor  hotel,  complete 
specifications  for  steel 
construction  of 398 


PAGE. 

Cancellation  of  contract,  .no,  295 
Cast  iron,  specifications  for ....  225 
Cement  concrete,  specifications 

for 150,355,383 

Cement   mortar,   specifications 

for...  148,  308,353,  383 
Changes  in  plans, 117,  275,  373,  390 
Classification,  engineer's,  final 

and  conclusive 96 

Coffer-dams,  specifications  for.  144 
Competency  of  parties  to  con- 
tract  9 

I'       of  individuals 9,  389 

in  governmental  relations.. .  .9 

of  corporations 10 

of  agents  n 

Completed    work,  examination 

of 115 

Completion,  time  of.. 90,  294,  372 
cleaning  up  after.  ..     112,  389 
Commencement  of 

work 90,  294,  372 

Condemned    material,  removal 

of 113,  376 

Consideration..   . .   30 

adequacy   of 31 

Contract   and    bond    combined 

with  specifications. ..270 

Contract  bond 411 

Contractor  not  released  by  sub- 
contracts  108 

Contractors, 

relations  to  each  other. ...  113 
to  keep  foreman  and  plans 

on  the  ground   ....    114 

definition  of 123,  373 

not     released    by    subcon- 
tracts  108 

to  furnish  working  plans.  .275 
Contracts, 

essential  elements  of 7 

two  general  classes  of 8 

in  breach  of  statute  law  ...  15 
opposed  to  public  policy. .  .17 
which  refer  to  arbitration. . .  17 

misrepresentation  in .24 

invalidity  of,  through  fraud. 25 
through  duress 29 


INDEX. 


PAGE. 
CONTRACTS. — Continued. 

through  undue  influence  30 

classes  of 36 

parole,  oral,  and  written..  .  37 

assignment  of 38 

notice  of,  necessary 39 

construction   of 40 

technical  terms  in 40 

rules  of  construction.. .  .41 

subsequent  changes  in 45 

illegal ..14 

breach  of 58 

manner  of  letting —77 

involving  specific  perform- 
ance         80,  296 

including  maintenance 

clauses 81 

abandonment  of 109 

cancellation  of no 

interpreted  by  engineer. . .  117 

subject  to  change 117 

documents  composing 123 

meaning  understood 123 

let  as  a  whole  or  in  parts. .  .77 

let  for  a  fixed  sum..   79 

let  in  specified  units 79 

specific     performance     re- 
quired.     80 

to  include  maintenance 81 

for  work   only 81 

subletting 390 

Damages  for  nonperform- 

ance 58*294 

for  delay 105,  295 

distinction   between    liqui- 
dated   damages    and 

penalties 59 

determination  of 97 

Dams,    earthen,    specifications 

for 142 

coffer,   specifications  for..  144 
stone,  specifications  for  ma- 
sonry for 164 

Boston    water  works,  com- 
plete     specifications 

for  dam  for 367 

Delay,  damages  for. 105,  295 

Difficulties,  unforeseen 105 

Discharge  of  contracts . .  .48 

by  agreement  49 

by  performance   50 

by  payment 52 

by  tender 52 

by  operation  of  law 54 

by  breach 54 

Disputes,  settlement  of 1 20 

Drainage,  provision  for....    ..114 

Drawings 401 

Duty  trials  of  pumping  engines.  291 
Earthen  dam,  specifications  for.i42 


PAGE. 

Earthwork,  specifications  for..  134 
Electrical  distribution  circuits, 

specifications  for — 264 
Electric  lighting  station,  speci- 
fications for 260 

Engineer  as  arbitrator 18,  401 

definition  of 123 

authority  of 

96>  273>372,  373?  389*  40 * 
Engine  house,  complete  speci- 
fications for 307 

Estimate,   final .95,297 

Estimates,  monthly 92 

provision  for  inquiring  in- 
to correctness  of 93 

percentage  reserved 94 

Examination  of  completed 

work 115,  390 

Excavation,  specifications 

for 134,  377 

boring  to  determine  char- 
acter of 374 

Excavations  under  water 138 

rock ..379 

specifications  for  measur- 
ing quantities  exca- 
vated   140,  378 

Explosives 380 

Extra  work 121,  390,  402 

Faults  to  be  corrected. ...   115,  389 

Final  estimates 95,297 

Finished  work,  protection  of..  105 

Foundation  work 380 

Frauds,  statute  of 43 

General  clauses  in  specifications. 90 
use  of  in  engineering  spec- 
ifications  124 

General    specifications  for  en- 
gineering work.    .   ..132 
Grading,  specifications  for.  134,  135 

Guarantee,  the 69 

Hotel  building,  Astor,  complete 
specifications  for  steel 
construction  0^1895)398 
Hours  of  labor,  limited  to  eight. 299 

Illegal  subject-matter 14 

Immoral  acts 16 

Indemnity  bond 413 

Instructions  to  bidders. .  . .   74,  349 
Leather   driving   belts,  specifi- 
cations for 251 

Legal  rights  waived   35 

Lettings,  division  of  work 77 

let  as  a  whole  or  in  parts. .  .77 
let  for  a  fixed  sum  or  per 

specified  units 79 

specific  performance  under. 80 
including  maintenance. ...  Si 
for  the  work  only Si 


INDEX. 


PAGE. 

Lumber,   rules    of   grading  by 
Southern  Lumber 
Manufacturers'  Asso- 
ciation  216 

general    rule   for    classify- 
ing   217,  314 

rules  for  grading  finishing. 219 

rules  for  grading  rough 221 

'•thoroughly  seasoned," 

specifications  for..  ..224 
Masonry,   stone,  specifications 

for.... 158,  309,  385,  386 

brick   384 

specifications  for,  for  stone 

dam 164,  381 

Masonry    lock    at    St.    Mary's 
Falls  canal,  complete 
specifications  for   ...348 
Material,  condemned,  removal 

of 113,  389 

Meaning  understood 123 

Measurements,  engineer's,  final 

and   conclusive.  .96,  273 
Measurements   not  guaranteed 

to  be  correct 1 16 

Monthly  estimates 93 

Nonperformance,  damages 

for 58,  294 

Offers,  qualified 22 

Painting  of  machinery 290 

Patents,  protection  against 

claims  for  use  of.  107,  295 
Pavement,  brick,  specifications 

for . .  .176 

asphaltum, specifications  for  178 
asphalt,  specifications  for. .183 
granite,  specifications  for..  185 

Paving 385 

Paving  brick,  specifications  for.  172 

Payments,  monthly 92 

final 95 

at    specified    stages  of  the 

work 297 

of  employees 392 

Performance, 

specific 62 

on  conditional  promises ....  51 

impossibility  of 53 

damages  for  imperfect 61 

Pile  and  trestle   bridging 244 

Piling-sheet 380 

Plastering 384 

Preliminary  estimates  of  quan- 
tities not  guaranteed 

to  be  correct 116 

Preliminary  surveys  for  bridge 

renewals 414 

Progress,  rate  of 90,  295 

Property    and   lives,  protection 

of 106,  389 


PAGE. 
Proposals,  blank  forms  of     .    .    76 

example  of 82,  369 

Proposal  bond 84,  365 

Protection  of  finished  work  105,  380 
of  property  and  lives. .  106,  296 
against  claims  for  use  of 

patents 107,  295 

Protective  work,  specifications 

for 145 

Public  traffic,  provision  for.  ...  114 
Pumping  engines   (St.  Louis), 
contract  and  specifi- 
cations for 271 

Pumps,  waterworks,  to  be    op- 
erated by  water  pow- 
er, specifications  for. 253 
Pump  well,  specifications  for.  .255 
Recovery    for    imperfect     per- 
formance  6 1 

Rejection  of  bids 70 

Remedies  for  breach  of  contract.58 
damages  for  nonperform- 

ance 58 

liquidated  damages  and  pen- 
alties     59 

recovery    for    imperfect  or 

incompleted  work.  . .  .61 

Remedy  of  party  defrauded 28 

Repairs,   reserving   percentage 

of  cost  for 94 

specifications  for 293 

Riprap 385 

Riveted  work,  specifications  for  232 
Rules,  for    grading   lumber  by 
Southern  Lumber 
Manufacturers'  Asso- 
ciation  216 

for  classifying  lumber.    . .  .217 
for  grading  finishing  lum- 
ber  219 

for  grading  rough  lumber. 221 
Sewer  pipe,  specifications  for. .  195 
Sewers,  brick    and  tile,  specifi- 
cations for 190 

Sewers,    tile,  specifications  for 

laying     198 

Sidewalks,  granitoid,  specifica- 
tions for 186 

Specifications, 

essential  features  of 126 

accompanying  complete  de- 
tail plans 137 

accompanying  general  plan 

only 13:* 

unaccompanied    by    plans, 

or  general 132 

Specifications,  engineering 

defined 86 

classes  of 86 

general  and  technical  clauses87 


INDEX. 


PAGE. 
Specificationsjgeneral  clauses  in88 

time  of  commencement, 
rate  of  progress,  and 
time  of  completion 
of  the  work 90 

as  to  the  character  of  the 
workmen  to  be  em- 
ployed  91 

suitable   appliances    to   be 

used.. 91 

monthly  estimates  of  work 
done  and  payments 
to  be  made 92 

provision  for  inquiring  into 
the  correctness  of  the 
monthly  estimates. .  .93 

reserving  a  certain  percent- 
age as  a  repair  fund 
for  a  stated  period 
after  completion 94 

conditions  of  the  final  esti- 
mate   95 

engineer's   measurements 
and  classifications 
final  and  conclusive.  .96 

determination  of   damages 
sustained  by   failure 
to  complete  the  work 
within  the  time  agreed 
upon  or  as  extended.  .97 

the  discharge  of  unpaid 
claims  of  workmen 
and  materialmen. ...  102 

no  claims  for  damages  on 
account  of  suspension 
of  work.  ...  . ,  .....  104 

no  claims  for  damages  on 

account  of  delay  ....  105 

no  claims  on  account  of  un- 
foreseen difficulties.  105 

protection  of  finished  work  105 

protection  of  property  and 

lives   .......      106 

protection    against   claims 

for  the  use  of  patents  107 

assignment  of  contract. . . .  108 

contractor  not  released  by 

subcontracts 108 

abandonment  of  contract. .  109 

cancellation  of  contract  for 

default  of  contractor.  1 10 

workmen's     quarters     and 
other  temporarybuild- 
ings   112 

cleaning  up  after  comple- 
tion   112 

removal  of  condemned  ma- 
terial  '  . .  . .  113 

relations  to  other  contract- 
ors   113 

provision  for  drainage  ....114 


PAGE. 

provision  for  public  traffic.  114 

contractor  to  keep  foreman 

or    head     workman, 

and  also  copy  of  plans 

and  specifications  on 

the  ground 114 

cost  of  examination  of  com- 
pleted work 115 

faults  to  be  corrected  at  any 
time  before  final  ac- 
ceptance ..  115 

surveys,  measurements,  and 
estimates  of  quanti- 
ties not  guaranteed 
to  be  correct  . . , . . . . 116 
the  contract  subject  to  inter- 
pretation and  change 
by  the  engineer  ....117 

settlement  of  disputes 120 

extra  work 121 

definition    of     "Engineer" 

anduContractor"  123,273 
documents   composing  the 

contract 123 

meaning  understood    123 

Specifications, technical  clauses  in. 
earthwork,  excavation,  and 

grading , 134 

grading 135 

excavations  under  water. . .  138 
for    measuring     quantities 
excavated  under  water 
by   weight    and    dis- 
placement     140 

earthen  dam 142 

coffer  dams 144 

protective  work 145 

cement  mortar 148 

cement  concrete 150 

stone 156 

stone  masonry ....  158 

stone    masonry    for    large 

stone  dam   164 

bridge  masonry ..170 

paving  brick .' 172 

brick  pavement 176 

asphaltum  pavement 178 

asphalt  pavement 183 

granite  pavement 185 

granitoid  sidewalks 186 

brick  and  tile  sewers 190 

sewer  pipe 195 

laying  sewer  pipe 198 

manufacture  and  delivery  of 

cast  iron  water  pipe. 202 

laying  water  pipe 210 

stop  valves 212 

rules  of  the  Southern  Lum- 
ber   Manufacturers' 
Association 216 


INDEX. 


PAGE. 

general  rules  for  classify- 
ing lumber 217 

rules  for  grading   finishing 

lumber. 219 

rules  for  grading  common 
boards  and  rough 
lumber  221 

standard  dimensions  of  the 
Southern    Lumber 
Manufacturers' Asso- 
ciation     223 

thoroughly  seasoned  lum- 
ber  224 

cast  iron. . .    225 

wrought  iron 227 

structural  steel 228 

tests,  inspection,  and  ac- 
ceptance of  medium 
structural  steel  ...  .  229 

riveted  work 232 

wrought  iron  and  steel  rail- 
road bridge  super- 
structure  233 

material  and  workmanship 

of  a  steel  stand-pipe. 241 

pile  and  trestle  bridging. .  .244 

steam  plant  for  a  small  elec- 
tric light  station ....  246 

leather  driving  belts 251 

pumps   to   be   operated  by 

water  power 253 

pump  well 255 

turbine  water  wheels  ...    .  258 

electric  lighting  station  in 

small  city 260 

electrical  distribution  cir- 
cuits for  light  and 

power 264 

Specifications,  complete 

contract  and  bond  combin- 
ed in  one  document.27o 

large  pumping  engines  (St. 

Louis) .   271 

water   tubular   boilers   and 

settings 300 

engine  house 307 

highway  bridges  and  via- 
ducts of  iron  and  steel33O 

masonry  lock  at  St.  Mary's 

Falls  Canal,  Mich... 348 

dam   No.  5,    Boston   water 

works,  1893 367 

steel  construction  of  Astor 

hotel,  1895 398 

form   of  contract   bond  or 

surety 411 

form  of  indemnity  bond. .  .413 
Specific  performance. ...  62,  296 
Stand-pipe,  steel,  specifications 

for 241 


PAGE. 

Statute  of  frauds 43 

agreements  not  to  be  per- 
formed in  one  year . .  .43 
when   value   is   more   than 

$50 44 

Steam  plant,  specifications   for 
for  small  electric 

light  station 246 

Steel,  structural,  specifications 

for 228 

tests  of 229 

inspection  of 229 

acceptance  of 229 

Steel    construction      of    Astor 
hotel    building,  New 
York,  1895, 
complete  specifications  for. 398 

Stone,  specifications  for 156 

Stone    dam,    specifications  for 

masonry  for 164 

Subject-matter,  illegal 14 

Surveys  for  bridge  renewals 414 

Surveys   not   guaranteed  to  be 

correct . 116 

Suspension  of  work 104,  298 

Tests, 

of  steel 229 

of  paving  brick 172 

of  pumping  engines 291 

of  boilers 306 

Tile,  sewer,  specifications  for. .195 

Trestles,  timber 244 

Unpaid  claims,  discharge  of...  102 
Valves,  stop,  specifications  for. 212 
Viaducts   and   bridges   of   iron 
and    steel,    complete 
specifications  for   .  . .  330 
Water   pipe,   specifications  for 
manufacture  and  de- 
livery of 202 

Water   pipe,    specifications  for 

laying 210 

Water  wheels,  turbine 258 

Water  works,  complete  specifi- 
cations for  dam  No. 
5,  Boston  water- 
works     .    . . .367 

Waiver  of  legal  rights 35 

Well,    pumping,   specifications 

for 255 

Work,  general  description 

of--    ••; 374,375 

suspension  of 104,298 

Workmanship 304,  338 

Workmen,  character  of 91,  389 

Workmen's  quarters 112 

Wrought  iron,  specifications 

for 227 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


PACK. 

Preface 3 

Key  to  Subscript  Initials 5 


PART  I. 

SYNOPSIS  OF  THE  LAW  OF  CONTRACTS. 
ART. 

1.  Introductory 7 

2.  Essential  Elements  of  a  Legal  Contract 7 

3.  Two  General  Classes  of  Contracts 8 

COMPETENCY. 

4.  Of  Individuals o, 

5.  In  Governmental  Relations 9 

6.  Of  Semi-Public  and  Private  Corporations 10 

7.  Of  Agents.    u 

LEGALITY  OF  THE  AGREEMENT. 

8.  Kinds  of  Illegal  Subject-Matter I4 

9.  Contracts  in  Breach  of  Statute  Law 15 

10.  Immoral  Acts. 16 

11.  Contracts  Opposed  to  Public  Policy 17 

12.  Contracts  Which  Refer  to  Arbitration 17 

13.  The  Engineer  as  Arbitrator 18 

THE  AGREEMENT. 

14.  Mutual  Assent 19 

15.  Qualified  Assent 22 

16.  Qualified  Offers 22 

17.  Implied  Acceptance 22 

18.  Failure  of  Agreement  by  Mistake 22 

19.  Misrepresentation  in  the  Contract : 24 

I 


II  TABLE    OF   CONTENTS, 

ART.  PAGE. 

20.  Invalidity  of  Contract  through  Fraud 25 

2 1 .  Remedy  of  Party  Defrauded 28 

22.  Invalidity  of  Contract  through  Duress 29 

23.  Invalidity  of  Contract  through  Undue  Influence 30 

THE  CONSIDERATION. 

24.  Consideration  Defined 30 

25.  Adequacy  of  Consideration 31 

26.  Agreement  to  Take  Less  than  is  Due 32 

27.  As  to  Waiver  of  Legal  Rights 35 

CONTRACTS  UNDER  SEAL. 

28.  Classes  of  Sealed  Contracts 36 

PAROLE  CONTRACTS. 

29.  Oral  and  Written  Contracts 37 

ASSIGNMENT  OF  CONTRACTS. 

30.  When  Assignment  Can  be  Made 38 

31.  Notice  of  Assignment  Necessary 39 

CONSTRUCTION  OF  THE  CONTRACT. 

32.  The  Original  Contract 40 

33.  The  Explanation  of  Technical  Terms  in  Contracts 40 

34.  Rules  of  Construction. .   41 

CONTRACTS  REQUIRED  TO  BE  IN  WRITING. 

35.  The  Statute  of  Frauds 43 

36.  Agreements  Which  can  not  be  Performed  within  One  Year.  43 

37.  Contracts  of  Sale  Where  the  Value  is  More  than    $50 44 

SUBSEQUENT  CHANGES  AND  AGREEMENTS. 

38.  The  General  Rule 45 

39.  Results  of  Alterations  of  the  Contract 46 

DISCHARGE  OF  CONTRACTS. 

40.  Methods  of  Discharge 48 

41 .  Discharge  by  Agreement 49 

42.  Discharge  by  Performance 50 

43.  Performance  on  Conditional  Promises 51 

44.  Discharge  by  Payment 52 

45.  Discharge  by  Tender 52 

46.  Kinds  of  Impossibility  Which  Will  Discharge  a  Contract. . .   53 

47.  Kinds   of  So-called    Impossibilities  Which  Will  not    Dis- 

charge the  Contract 53 

48.  Discharge  of  Contract  by  Operation  of  Law 54 

49.  Discharge  of  Contract  by  Breach 54 


TABLE   OF   CONTENTS.  Ill 

ART.  PAGE. 

REMEDIES  FOR  BREACH  OF  CONTRACT. 

50.  Results  of  a  Breach  of  Contract 58 

51.  Damages  for  Nonperformance 58 

52.  Distinction  between  Liquidated  Damages  and  Penalties 59 

53.  Recovery  for  Imperfect  or  Incompleted  Work. 61 

SPECIFIC  PERFORMANCE. 

54.  General  Rule  as  to  Specific  Performance   62 

DISCHARGE  OF  RIGHT  OF  ACTION  UNDER  A  CONTRACT. 

55.  The  Right  of  Action 63 

56.  Removal  of  Statutory  Bar  to  Right  of  Action 65 

PART  II. 

ENGINEERING  SPECIFICATIONS  AND  ACCOMPANYING 
DOCUMENTS. 

57.  General  Considerations 66 

ADVERTISEMENTS  . 

58.  Information  Embodied  in  the  Advertisement 67 

59.  The  Theory  of  Advertisements   68 

60.  The  Guarantee 69 

61.  Right  of  Rejection 70 

62.  Illustrative  Examples 71 

INSTRUCTIONS  TO  BIDDERS. 

63.  Preliminary  Information 74 

FORMS  OF  PROPOSALS. 

64.  The  Object  of  Blank  Forms  of  Proposals 79 

65.  Manner  of  Letting  the  Work ,    . .  77 

66.  Contract  Let  as  a  Whole  or  in  Parts 77 

67.  Contract  Let  for  a  Fixed  Sum  or  per  Specified  Units 79 

68.  Contract  Involving  a  Specific  Performance 80 

69.  Contract  Including  Maintenance 81 

70.  Contract  for  the  Work  Only 81 

71.  Proposal  for  Building  a  Dam,  Spillway,  etc 82 

72.  Proposal  Bond 84 

ENGINEERING  SPECIFICATIONS. 

73.  Engineering  Specifications  Defined   ...    86 

74.  Classes  of  Specifications 86 

75.  General  and  Specific  Clauses 87 

THE  GENERAL  CLAUSES  IN  SPECIFICATIONS. 

76.  List  of  Subjects  Treated  in  the  General  Clauses 88 

77.  Explanatory  Note    . ... 89 


IV  TABLE   OF   CONTENTS. 

ART.  PAGE. 

78.  Time  of  Commencement,  Rate  of  Progress,  and  Time  of 

Completion  of  the  Work go 

79.  As  to  the  Character  of  the  Workmen  to  be  Employed 91 

80.  Suitable  Appliances  to  be  Used 91 

81.  Monthly  Estimates  of  Work  Done  and  Payments  to  be  Made  92 

82.  Provision  for  Inquiring  into  the  Correctness  of  the  Monthly 

Estimates 93 

83.  Reserving  a  Certain  Percentage  as  a  Repair  Fund,  for  a 

Stated  Period   after  Completion 94 

84.  Conditions  of  the  Final  Estimate 95 

85.  Engineer's   Measurements   and    Classifications   Final     and 

Conclusive 96 

86.  Determination  of  Damages  Sustained  by  Failure  to  Com- 

plete  the  Work  within   the  Time  Agreed   upon,  or  as 
Extended 97 

87.  The  Discharge  of  Unpaid   Claims  of  Workmen  and  Mate- 

rialmen 102 

88.  No  Claims  for  Damages  on  Account  of  Suspension  of  Work. .104 

89.  No  Claims  for  Damages  on  Account  of  Delay 105 

90.  No  Claims  for  Damages  on  Account  of  Unforeseen  Diffi- 

culties  105 

91.  Protection  of  Finished  Work 10^ 

92.  Protection  of  Property  and  Lives 106 

93.  Protection  against  Claims  for  the  use  of  Patents 107 

94.  Assignment  of  the  Contract 108 

95.  Contractor  not  Released  by  Subcontracts 108 

96.  Abandonment  of  Contract 109 

97.  Cancellation  of  Contract  for  Default  of  Contractor no 

98.  Workmen's  Quarters  and  Other  Temporary  Buildings 112 

99.  Cleaning  up  after  Completion. 112 

100.  Removal  of  Condemned  Material 113 

101.  Relations  to  Other  Contractors 113 

102.  Provision  for  Drainage 114 

103.  Provision  for  Public  Traffic 114 

104.  Contractor  to  keep   Foreman  or  Head  Workman,  and  also 

Copy  of  Plans  and  Specifications  on  the  Ground 114 

105.  Cost  of  Examination  of  Completed  Work 115 

106.  Faults  to  be  Corrected  at  Any  Time  before  Final  Accept- 

ance     115 

107.  Surveys,    Measurements,    and   Estimates  of  Quantities   not 

Guaranteed  to  be  Correct . .  .  .  1 16 

108.  The  Contract  Subject  to  Interpretation  and  Change  by  the 

Engineer 117 

109.  Settlement  of  Disputes 120 

no.  Extra  Work .121 

in.  Definition  of  "Engineer"  and  "Contractor" 123 

1 12.  Documents  Composing  the  Contract 123 


TABLE   OF    CONTENTS,  V 

ART.  PAGE. 

1 13.  Meaning  Understood 123 

114.  The  Use  of  General  Clauses  in  Engineering  Specifications. .124 


PART  III. 

SPECIFIC  DESCRIPTIVE,  OR   TECHNICAL  CLAUSES  IN 
SPECIFICATIONS. 

115.  Essential  Features  of  Good  Specifications 126 

116.  Specifications  Accompanying  Complete  Detail  Plans 131 

117.  Specifications  Accompanying  a  General  Plan  Only 132 

118.  Specifications  Unaccompanied  by  Plans,  Known  Commonly 

as  General  Specifications 132 

ILLUSTRATIVE  SPECIFICATIONS  OF  VARIOUS  ELEMENTARY  PORTIONS  OF 
ENGINEERING  WORK. 

119.  Scope  and  Purpose 133 

SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  EXCAVATIONS  AND  EMBANKMENTS. 

1 20.  Earth-work,  Excavating,  and  Grading 134 

121.  Grading .135 

122.  Excavations    under  Water   138 

123.  Specifications  for  Measuring  Quantities  Excavated    under 

Water  by  Weight  and  by  Displacement   ... 140 

124.  Specifications  for  an  Earthen  Dam 142 

125.  Specifications  for  Coffer  Dams 144 

126.  Specifications  for  Protective  Work 145 

SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  CEMENT,  MORTAR,  CONCRETE,  AND  MASONRY. 

127.  Cement  Mortar ..148 

128.  Cement  Concrete 150 

129.  Specifications  for  Stone 156 

130.  Stone  Masonry 158 

131.  Specifications  for  Masonry  for  a  Large  Stone  Dam 164 

132.  Specifications  for  First-class  Bridge  Masonry 170 

SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  STREET  PAVEMENTS  AND  MATERIALS. 

133.  Specifications  for  Paving  Brick 172 

134.  Specifications  for  Brick  Pavements 176 

135.  Specifications  for  Asphaltum  Pavements 178 

136.  Specifications  for  Asphalt  Pavement 183 

137.  Specifications  for  Granite  Pavement 185 

138.  Specifications  for  Granitoid  Sidewalks . .    186 

SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  SEWERS. 

139.  Specifications  for  Brick  and  Tile  Sewers ....  190 

140.  Specifications  for  Tile  Sewer  Pipe 195 

141.  Specifications  for  Laying  Sewer  Pipe 198 


VI  TABLE   OF  CONTENTS. 

ART.  PAGE. 

SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  WATER  PIPE. 

142.  Specifications  for  the   Manufacture  and  Delivery  of  Cast 

Iron  Water  Pipe ...  202 

143.  Specifications  for  Laying  Water  Pipe 210 

144.  Specifications  for  Stop  Valves 212 

LUMBER  GRADING  AND  CLASSIFICATION. 

145.  Rules  of  the  Southern  Lumber  Manufacturers'  Association. 216 

146.  General  Rules  for  Classifying  Lumber 217 

147.  Rules  for  Grading  Finishing  Lumber 219 

148.  Rules  for  Grading  Common  Boards  and  Rough  Lumber.  ...221 

149.  Standard  Dimensions  of  the  Southern  Lumber  Manufactur- 

ers' Association 223 

150.  Specification  for  "Thoroughly  Seasoned"  Lumber ....224 

SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  IRON  AND  STEEL. 

151.  Specifications  for  Cast  Iron 225 

152.  Specifications  for  Wrought  Iron    227 

153.  Specifications  for  Structural  Steel 228 

154.  Tests,    Inspection,    and  Acceptance  of  Medium   Structural 

Steel 229 

155.  Specifications  for  Riveted  Work 232 

156.  Specifications  for  Wrought  Iron  and  Steel  Railroad  Bridge 

Superstructure 233 

157.  Specifications  for  the  Material  and  Workmanship  of  a  Steel 

Stand  Pipe 241 

MISCELLANEOUS  SPECIFICATIONS. 

158.  Specifications  for  Pile  and  Trestle  Bridging 244 

159.  Specifications  for  Steam  Plant  of  a  Small   Electric  Light 

Station 246 

160.  Specifications  for  Leather  Driving  Belts 251 

161.  Specifications  for  Pumps  to  be  Operated  by  Water  Power.  .253 

162.  Specifications  for  a  Pump  Well 255 

163.  Specifications  for  Turbine  Water  Wheels 258 

164.  Specifications  for  the  Installation  of  an  Electric  Lighting 

Station  in  a  Small  City 260 

165.  Specifications  for  Electrical  Distribution  Circuits  for  Light 

and  Power 264 


PART  IV. 

ILLUSTRATIVE  EXAMPLES  OF  COMPLETE  CONTRACTS 
AND  SPECIFICATIONS. 

166.  Contract  and  Bond  Combined  in  one  Document  with  the 

Specifications 270 


TABLE   OF   CONTENTS.  VII 

ART.                                                                                                                        PAGE. 
167  &  168.  Contract  and  General  Specifications  for  Large  Pump- 
ing Engines   271 

169.  Complete  General  Specifications  for  Water  Tubular  Boilers 

and  Settings 300 

170.  Specifications  for  an  Engine  House -3°7 

171.  General  Specifications  for  Highway   Bridges  and  Viaducts 

of  Iron  and  Steel 330 

172.  Specifications  for  Building  a  Masonry  Lock  at  St.   Mary's 

Falls  Canal,  Michigan 348 

173.  Specifications  and  Contract  for  Dam  No.  5,  Boston  Water 

Works,  1893 367 

174.  Specifications  for   the    Steel    Construction    of  the    Astor 

Hotel,  1895 398 

175.  Form  of  Contract  Bond  or  Surety 411 

176.  Form  of  Indemnity  Bond 413 

APPENDIX  A. 

Preliminary  Surveys  and  Examinations  for  Bridge  Renewals. . .  .414 


PREFACE. 


The  leading  American  Engineering  Schools  have  long 
needed  a  text-book  on  the  subject  of  the  Law  of  Contracts  and 
Engineering  Specifications.  In  the  absence  of  any  such  text, 
this  department  of  engineering  practice  has  received  scant  and 
meagre  treatment  at  the  hands  of  these  schools.  This  work  has 
been  written  primarily  to  serve  this  purpose.  After  it  was 
completed,  however,  it  seemed  to  the  author  it  might  prove  of 
value  to  the  profession  at  large  and  also  to  contractors,  espec- 
ially those  portions  of  it  treating  of  the  Law  of  Contracts  and 
of  the  General  Clauses  in  Specifications. 

While  the  author  makes  no  pretension  to  a  knowledge  of 
the  law,  yet  he  has  had  to  impart  instruction  on  this  subject  for 
many  years,  and  has  attended  lectures  in  this  field  in  the  St. 
Louis  Law  School  (a  department  of  Washington  University). 
He  has  tried  to  follow  strictly  the  recognized  authorities  in  all  he 
has  said  in  this  work,  and  while  he  thinks  his  synopsis  may  serve 
as  a  good  general  guide  to  the  fundamental  principles  of-the  sub- 
ject, he  recommends  that  the  reader  refer  all  important  particu- 
lar cases  to  his  attorney,  or  else  consult  the  standard  works 
themselves.  If  a  single  volume  is  desired  containing  a  general 
review  of  the  Law  of  Contracts,  the  layman  can  not  do  better 
than  obtain  that  of  John  D.  Lavvson,  of  the  Law  Department  of 
the  Missouri  State  University.  Another  similar,  and  perhaps 
better  work  for  the  young  lawyer,  is  that  of  J.  P.  Bishop; 
while  Parson's  three-volume  work  is  the  recognized  standard 
authority  for  the  lawyer. 

3 


4  PKEFACE. 

Since  this  work  is  designed  only  for  laymen,  however,  the 
author  may  well  quote  the  maxim  that  "the  man  who  is  his  own 
lawyer  has  a  fool  for  a  client."  The  brief  synopsis  of  the  law 
herein  given,  therefore,  is  not  intended  to  remove  the  necessity 
of  consulting  a  lawyer  on  all  important  matters,  but  only  to 
enable  one  to  steer  clear  of  some  of  the  legal  pitfalls  which  lie 
in  the  way  of  every  business  man  and  especially  of  engineers. 

Since  custom  has  laid  on  engineers  and  architects  the  duty 
of  writing  specifications  and  contracts,  it  is  well  for  them  to 
know  something  of  the  legal  ground  they  are  forced  to  traverse. 
The  first  part  of  this  work  is  intended,  therefore,  to  serve  as  a 
cautionary  warning  against  legal  entanglements,  rather  than  as  a 
counselor  or  guide  through  such  difficulties.  The  synopsis  of  the 
Law  of  Contracts  as  here  given  has  been  revised  by  a  very 
competent  legal  authority,  and  the  author  is  indebted  to  him 
for  many  valuable  suggestions  and  corrections.  It  probably 
will  not  mislead  one  into  trouble,  though  it  may  not  always 
point  the  way  out. 

The  author  also  wishes  to  acknowledge  his  indebtedness 
to  the  many  prominent  engineers  who  have  kindly  sent  him 
copies  of  their  latest  specifications  for  use  in  this  work,  and  he 
has  acknowledged  this  debt  in  the  body  of  the  book  by  append- 
ing to  each  quotation  the  initials  of  the  person  quoted.  A  key 
to  these  initials  is  given  on  page  6. 

The  illustrative  examples  of  engineering  specifications 
given  in  Part  III  are  selected  so  as  to  cover  a  wide  field  with 
as  little  repetition  as  possible.  They  are  not  given  to  be  blindly 
copied,  but  rather  as  illustrating  a  good  method  of  treating  the 
subject,  and  to  serve  as  patterns  as  to  manner  as  well  as  to 
matter.  As  the  best  engineers  seldom  copy  their  own  specifi- 
cations or  use  them  unchanged  a  second  time,  much  less  can 
one  safely  copy  unchanged  the  specifications  of  another.  In 
fact  the  writing  of  engineering  specifications  is  wisely  left  for 
engineers  of  large  experience,  but  as  the  younger  men  have  to 


.  PREFACE.  5 

enforce  them  and  serve  as  inspectors  under  them,  they  should 
in  all  cases  understand  fully  why  they  have  been  drawn  in  a 
particular  way. 

That  this  somewhat  crude  effort  may  serve  to  help  engi- 
neers and  architects  to  a  more  efficient  and  satisfactory  per- 
formance of  their  professional  duties,  is  the  hope  and  aim  of 

THE  AUTHOR. 


KEY  TO  SUBSCRIPT  INITIALS. 

The  following  gentlemen  have  kindly  furnished  the  author 
copies  of  their  specifications  from  which  he  has  freely  quoted 
in  parts  II  and  III.  In  every  case  he  has  appended  the  initials 
of  the  writer  of  the  specifications  used,  the  key  to  which  is  here 
given: 

Onward  Bates,  Engineer  Bridges  and  Buildings,  C.,  M.  &  St.  P. 

E'y,  Chicago,  111 O.  B. 

A.  P.  Boiler,  Consulting  Engineer,  New  York  City A.  P.  B. 

G.  Bouscaren,  Consulting  Engineer,  Cincinnati,  Ohio G.  B. 

Wm.  H.  Bryan,  Consulting  Engineer,  St.  Louis W.  H.  B. 

Col.  Wm.  P.  Craighill,  "Corps  of  Engineers  U.  S.  Army,  and 

Past  President  Am.  Soc.  C.  E W.  P.  C. 

J.  T.  Fanning,  Consulting  Engineer,  Minneapolis,  Minn J.  T.  F. 

Alphonse  Fteley,  Chief  Engineer  Aqueduct  Commission,  New 

York  City,  N.  Y A.  F. 

E.  A.  Fuertes,  Director  School  Civil  Engineering,  Cornell  Uni- 
versity, Ithaca,  N.  Y E.  A.  F. 

John  W.  Hill,  Consulting  Engineer,  Cincinnati,  Ohio J.  W.  H. 

M.  L.  Holman,  Water  Commissioner,  St.  Louis,  Mo M.  L.  H. 

Johnson  &  Flad,  Engineers,  St.  Louis,  Mo J.  &  F. 

Emil  Kuichling,  Chief  Engineer  Waterworks,  Rochester,  N.  Y.  E.  K. 

Milwaukee  City  Specifications M. 

George  S.  Morison,  Consulting  Engineer,  New  York  City,  N.  Y., 

President  (1895)  Am.  Soc.  C.  E G.  S.  M. 

W.  D.  Pence,  Instructor  in  Civil  Engineering,  Champaign,  111..  W.  D.  P. 
Pennsylvania  Railroad  Co.,  Wm.  H.  Brown,  Chief  Engineer, 

Philadelphia,  Pa P.  R'y. 

Col.  O.  M.  Poe,  Corps  of  Engineers,  U.  S.  Army O.  M.  P. 

St.  Louis  City  Specifications St.  L. 

Union  Pacific  Railway,  George  H.  Pegram,  Chief  Engineer, 

Omaha,  Neb U.  P.  R'y. 

J.  A.  L.  Waddell,  Consulting  Engineer,  Kansas  City,  Mo J.  A.  L.  W. 

6 


ENGINEERING  CONTRACTS  I  SPECIFICATIONS 

PART  I. 

BRIEF  SYNOPSIS  OF  SUCH    PORTIONS  OF  THE 

Law  of  Contracts 

AS  BEAR  ON  THE  CARRYING  OUT  OF 

ENGINEERING  OR  ARCHITECTURAL  CONSTRUCTION. 


1.  Introductory.     The  Law  of  Contracts  is  said  to  be 
as  simple  and  as  readily,  comprehended  by  the  layman  as  any 
department  of  the  law.     Two   standard   single  volume    works 
on  the  law  of  contracts  are  those   of  Bishop   and  of  Lawson,* 
to  which  the  reader  is  referred   for  a  more  complete  treatment 
of  the  subject,  and  from  which  the  following  synopsis  has  been 
principally  derived.     In  this  synopsis  only  such  rules  and  prin- 
ciples are  incorporated  as  may  be  profitably  presented  to  under- 
graduate  students    in  our    leading    engineering    schools.      The 
practicing  engineer  or  architect   may   also  find  them    valuable, 
however,  as    furnishing  to  him   certain   guiding  principles,  the 
recognition  of  which  will  frequently    enable  him  to  avoid  legal 
complications  and  inherent  weaknesses  in  the  drawing  of  speci- 
fications and  other  documents  pertaining    to  contracts.      This 
work    is   intended    to   emphasize    the   necessity    of    consulting 
competent  legal  authority    in  all  important   matters  rather  than 
to  enable  one  to  dispense  with  such  reliance. 

2.  Essential  Elements  of  a  Legal  Contract.    A 

contract  is  a  promise   to  do  or  to  refrain    from  doing  some    act 

*Thc  layman  will  probably  find  the 'work  of  Judge  Lawson  better  suited  to  his 
wants. 

7 


8  LAW  OF  CONTRACTS. 

which  the  law  will  enforce.  The  law  will  not  enforce  an  agree- 
ment unless  the  following  essentials  are  fulfilled. 

First.  The  parties  must  be  competent  to  make  the  agree- 
ment. 

Second.     The  subject-matter  must  be  lawful. 

Third.  The  parties  must  have  mutually  assented  or 
agreed  to  the  conditions  named,  or  they  must  have  been  of  the 
same  mind  and  intention  concerning  the  subject-matter. 

Fourth.  Except  in  the  case  of  sealed  contracts  there 
must  be  a  valuable  consideration. 

The  four  essentials  of  a  legal  contract,  therefore,  may  be 
grouped  under  the  four  words,  Competency,  Legality,  Agree- 
ment, and  Consideration. 

3.    Two  General  Classes  of  Contracts.    There  are 

in  general  two  kinds  of  contracts,  namely:  contracts  made 
under  seal,  called  sealed  contracts  or  specialties  (see  Art.  28), 
and  simple  written  or  oral  agreements  unaccompanied  with  the 
formality  of  a  seal,  called  parole  contracts. 

A  sealed  contract  is  a  written  agreement  signed  by  the 
parties,  the  signatures,  having  appended  to  them  what  is  com- 
monly known  as  a  seal.  Formerly  a  seal  consisted  of  "An 
impression  on  wax,  or  paper,  or  some  other  tenacious  substance 
capable  of  being  impressed."  Now,  however,  an  impression 
of  a  seal  on  the  paper  itself  is  commonly  construed  as  a  proper 
seal,  and  in  many  states  by  statute  a  mere  scroll  enclosing  the 
word  "seal"  made  opposite  the  name  of  the  signer  is  sufficient. 

Engineering  contracts  are  often  executed  under  seal, 
though  preferably  not,  while  the  bond  which  holds  the  sureties  for 
the  faithful  performance  of  the  work  by  the  contractor  must  be 
under  seal.  This  is  necessary  because  the  agreement  of  the 
bondsmen  to  become  responsible  for  the  faithful  performance 
of  the  contract  by  the  contractor  is  not  usually  supported  by  a 
valuable  consideration. 

The  principal  difference  between  a  sealed  contract  and  one 
not  under  seal  is  that  in  the  former  case  a  valuable  considera- 


COMPETENCY.  9 

tion  is  not  required  to  support  the  agreement,  while  in  the  lat- 
ter case  the  contract  is  invalid  unless  such  a  consideration  can 
be  shown  to  exist.* 

The  affixing  of  a  seal  to  a  signature  implies  a  special  care 
and  deliberation  on  the  part  of  the  signer,  more  than  can  be 
assumed  in  the  case  of  a  simple  signature.  It  is  for  this 
reason  that  a  consideration  is  not  required  to  support  a  sealed 
contract. 

The  mere  existence  on  the  document  of  a  printed  scroll 
or  word  "seal"  on  the  lines  provided  for  signatures  does  not 
constitute  a  sealed  document  unless  these  words  or  scrolls  were 
so  intended  by  the  signers. 


COMPETENCY. 

4.  Competency    of  Individuals.     A  sane  person 
who  has  attained  .his  majority  is  competent    to   make  any  legal 
agreement  or   contract.      The    disabilities   of  married   women 
in  the  matter  of  contracts  are  numerous,    but  will  not  here  be 
entered  upon.     Neither  will   any    reference  be  made  to  those 
disabilities  pertaining    to  aliens,  convicts,   infants,  insane    per- 
sons, and  drunkards. 

5.  Competency     in    Governmental    Eolations. 
The  national  or  any  state  government  may  become  a  party  to 
a  contract,  and  such  government  may  sue  on  its  contracts  and 
enforce  them,  but  the  converse  of  this  is  not  true.     Neither  the 
United  States  nor  any  state  can   be  sued  without  its  consent.^ 
The  only  remedy  for  a  person  who  seeks  the  enforcement  of  a 
contract  with  such  a  government  is  an  appeal  to  congress  or  to  the 
state  legislature.   Many  of  the  states  of  the  south  have  repudiated 

•bee  subject  of  Consideration,  Art.  24. 

f  The  state  may  consent  to  be  a  party  to  a  suit  in  order  to  hare  the  rights  of  the 
parties  passed  upon  by  the  courts. 


10  LAW   OF  CONTEACTS. 

their  contracts  in  the  matter  of  state  bonds,  issued  during  the 
periods  of  reconstruction,  and  the  bondholders  have  no  remedy. 
Neither  are  public  officers  who  negotiate  contracts  on  the  part 
of  the  state  personally  liable  on  contracts  made  in  their  own 
names,  when  these  are  signed  in  their  official  capacities.  This 
freedom  from  all  legal  necessity  to  carry  out  its  contracts  is  an 
essential  element  of  sovereignty,  and  applies  to  kings  and  other 
more  or  less  absolute  rulers  in  their  official  relations. 

All  public  corporate  governments,  subordinate  to  that  of 
the  state,  as  of  the  county,  or  township,  or  village,  or  city,  can 
be  sued  upon  their  contracts,  and  such  contracts  enforced  when- 
ever these  lie  within  their  legal  corporate  powers.  Thus  a 
county,  or  town,  or  city  can  not  repudiate  its  legal  obligations, 
as  the  state  has  the  privilege  of  doing,  but  these  obligations  can 
be  enforced  through  the  agency  of  the  courts.  For  instance, 
it  a  county  organization  should  wish  to  repudiate  a  particular 
issue  of  bonds,  which  have  been  issued  and  sold,  because  of 
some  real  or  fancied  grievance  connected  therewith,  and  if  the 
county  commissioners  who  represent  the  county  in  its  corporate 
capacity  should  refuse  to  levy  taxes  for  the  payment  of  the 
interest  or  principal,  the  courts  could  order  them  to  do  so,  and 
if  they  should  refuse  they  could  be  fined  and  imprisoned  for 
contempt.  In  some  cases  city  charters  have  been  repealed  by 
the  state  legislature  and  the  city  changed  into  a  "taxing  dis- 
trict" in  order  to  more  readily  enforce  orders  of  the  courts,  in 
requiring  them  to  fulfill  the  terms  of  some  legal  contract  or 
obligation. 

6.  Competency  of  Semi-Public  and  Private  Cor- 
porations. A  corporation  has  no  powers  for  entering  into  or 
performing  contracts  beyond  those  given  it  by  the  state  in  its 
charter.  Its  capacity  for  transacting  business,  however,  is  not 
limited  to  the  specific  privileges  granted  in  its  charter,  but  is  of 
necessity  extended  by  implication  to  include  such  other  powers 
as  may  be  necessary  for  the  complete  consummation  of  its  spe- 


COMPETENCY.  11 

cific  purposes.  For  instance,  if  a  corporation  requires  the  use 
of  certain  real  estate  for  the  transaction  of  its  business,  it  can 
evidently  buy  and  sell  such  property  when  this  is  intended  for 
its  own  uses.  It  may  also  borrow  money  and  issue  therefor 
various  kinds  of  obligations,  and,  in  fact,  it  may  make  any 
contract  which  it  is  lawful  for  an  individual  to  make,  provided 
such  contract  relates  to  a  subject  which  is  within  the  sphere  of 
its  operations. 

When  a  contract  or  agreement  on  the  part  of  a  corpora- 
tion does  not  fall  within  its  express  or  implied  powers,  it  is 
termed  ultra  vires,  and  such  contracts  can  not  be  enforced. 
The  official  acts  of  the  officers  or  agents  of  a  corporation  bind 
it  much  the  same  as  such  acts  would  bind  an  individual  when 
made  in  a  private  capacity,  and  this  applies  both  to  oral  and  to 
written  agreements,  unless  the  corporation  charter  specifically 
requires  certain  kinds  of  agreements  to  be  in  writing. 

7.  Contracts  by  Agents.*  A  contract  by  an  agent 
is  not  valid  unless  the  principal  is  himself  competent  to  enter 
into  a  contract.  On  the  other  hand,  a  contract  by  an  agent  is 
valid,  provided  the  principal  is  competent,  even  though  the 
agent  be  incompetent  to  enter  into  a  contract  as  a  principal. 
Thus  a  minor  may  be  a  competent  agent,  but  not  a  competent 
principal.  The  agent,  however,  must  have  no  adverse  interest 
from  that  of  his  principal  under  the  contract  negotiated.  For 
instance,  he  must  not  be  interested  on  both  sides  of  the  agree- 
ment, if  these  interests  are  supposed  to  be  adverse. 

The  legality  of  the  acts  of  an  agent  is  similar  to  the  legal- 
ity of  the  acts  of  a  corporation.  As  a  corporation  receives  its 
authority  for  the  transaction  of  a  particular  kind  of  business 
from  the  state,  and  its  capacity  in  the  formation  of  contracts  is 
limited  thereby  to  the  express  and  implied  powers  under  its 
charter,  so  an  agent  receives  his  authority  from  his  principal, 

*  An  engineer  or  architect  is  the  agent  of  the  owner  (person  or  corporation),  and 
as  such  has  the  express  powers  given  him  in  the  contract  itself  or  in  his  agreement 
with  his  employer,  and  also  many  customary  implied  powers. 


12  LAW   OF   CONTEACTS. 

his  legal  acts  are  limited  to  the  scope  of  the  authority  conferred 
upon  him  by  his  principal,  and,  as  in  the  case  of  a  corporation, 
he  will  be  justified  in  the  law  in  the  making  of  any  contract,  as 
agent,  which  may  prove  to  be  necessary  or  essential  to  the  car- 
rying out  of  his  more  specific  instructions,  or  for  the  transac- 
tion of  the  business  for 'which  he  has  received  special  authority. 

Unlike  a  corporation,  however,  an  agent  may  exceed  both 
his  express  and  implied  authority  in  the  making  of  a  contract, 
and  yet  this  contract  will  become  binding  on  the  ratification  of 
it  by  his  principal.  This  ratification  may  also  be  either  express 
or  implied,  an  implied  ratification  consisting  of  a  failure  to 
object  or  protest  or  to  annul  the  contract  on  learning  of  its 
existence,  or  of  acting  under  it  as  though  consent  had  been 
given. 

A  ratification,  whether  express  or  implied,  of  the  acts  of 
an  agent  operates  always  so  as  to  include  the  whole  of  the 
agent's  acts  pertaining  to  the  particular  transaction  in  question, 
and  can  not  operate  for  the  acceptance  of  a  part,  and  the  rejec- 
tion of  other  parts.  By  adopting  a  part,  the  principal  is  bound 
by  the  whole.  If  it  appear,  however,  that  the  express  or  implied 
ratification  was  due  to  a  mistake  of  fact,  the  principal  may 
repudiate  the  action  of  the  agent  on  learning  of  the  facts. 

If  the  agent  wishes  to  avoid  personal  responsibility  in  the 
entering  into  a  contract,  it  must  be  understood  by  the  other 
party  that  he  is  acting  as  an  agent,  and  not  in  his  own  behalf. 
He  may,  however,  enter  into  contract  in  his  own  name,  not  as 
an  agent,  when  in  fact  he  is  the  agent  of  another  party.  In 
this  case,  however,  the  other  party  to  the  contract  on  learning 
of  the  principal,  has  his  option  to  enforce  the  contract  against 
the  agent  or  against  the  principal  as  he  may  choose.  In  all 
cases  of  contracts  with  agents  the  other  party  to  the  contract 
must  know  of  the  agent's  authority  aside  from  the  agent's  own 
testimony  in  the  case,  as  this  latter  is  not  received  as  evidence 
of  the  fact.  Whatever  the  agent's  pretended  authority  may  be, 


COMPETENCY.  13 

if  it  should  prove  that  he  has  exceeded  both  his  express  and 
implied  authorization,  the  principal  is  at  liberty  to  repudiate 
his  acts,  and  the  other  party  to  the  contract  has  no  remedy 
except  against  the  agent  himself.  The  agent's  authority  is 
evidenced,  however,  by  the  usual  and  customary  transactions 
of  such  agent  which  have  been  accepted  by  his  principal,  and 
which  have  become  known  to  the  other  party  in  a  proposed  new 
contract.  Therefore  as  to  third  persons  the  authority  of  the 
agent  may  be  implied  from  previous  performances  of  similar 
acts  which  have  come  to  the  knowledge  and  received  the  consent 
of  the  principal. 

In  the  case  of  sub-agency,  or  of  the  appointment  of  an 
agent  by  an  agent  such  authorization  must  proceed  originally 
from  the  principal,  or  be  afterwards  ratified  by  him  before  the 
principal  can  be  bound  by  the  acts  of  the  sub-agent. 

In  order  that  an  agent  may  relieve  himself  from  responsi- 
bility in  the  signing  of  a  contract,  the  document  must  reveal, 
either  in  its  body  or  in  the  signature,  who  the  principal  is;  a 
mere  signing  of  a  contract  by  a  person  as  "agent"  will  not 
relieve  the  party  so  signing  from  personal  responsibility  unless 
the  document  does  reveal  the  principal. 

If  an  agent  enters  into  contract  in  a  matter  beyond  his 
express  and  implied  authorization,  he  becomes  personally  liable 
to  the  third  party,  unless  he  reveal  to  such  party,  at  the  time  of 
the  signing  of  the  contract,  the  exact  relation  between  himself 
and  his  principal  in  such  a  way  that  this  third  party  becomes 
aware  of  the  dubiousness  of  the  agent's  authority.  In  this  case 
the  principal  may  repudiate  the  act  of  his  agent  and  the  third 
party  will  not  be  able  to  hold  either  principal  or  agent  to  the 
contract.  If,  however,  the  agent  does  not  disclose  his  exact 
relations  with  his  principal,  and  assumes  authority  beyond  his 
authorization,  he  does  become  personally  liable  for  such  damage 
as  may  result  from  failure  of  performance  on  the  part  of  his 
principal. 


14  LAW   OF   CONTKACTS. 

The  principal  is  also  liable  for  all  the  frauds,  deceits,  and 
negligent  acts  of  his  agent  so  long  as  these  pertain  to  the  busi- 
ness he  is  authorized  to  perform.  In  this  case,  of  course,  the 
agent  himself  is  liable  both  to  his  principal  and  to  any  third 
party.  While  if  such  fraud  or  deceit  or  negligent  act  pertains 
to  matters  outside  the  scope  of  his  authority,  the  agent  alone  is 
liable. 

Acts  of  an  agent  continue  to  be  binding  upon  the  principal 
as  to  third  persons,  even  if  the  agent's  authority  has  been 
revoked  and  the  agency  ended,  until  such  termination  of  the 
agency  comes  to  the  knowledge  of  such  third  person.  This 
applies  to  all  kinds  of  continuous  agencies,  but  does  not  apply, 
of  course,  to  an  agency  for  the  performance  of  a  particular  act. 

The  death  of  the  principal  always  acts  to  terminate  the 
agency,  which  termination  occurs  at  the  instant  of  the  death  of 
the  principal.  This  nullifies  even  such  acts  of  the  agent  after 
the  death  of  his  principal  as  may  have  occurred  before  such 
death  came  to  the  knowledge  of  the  agent;  but  when  the  agent 
enters  into  contracts  for  his  principal  after  the  decease  of  the 
latter,  with  or  without  the  knowledge  of  such  decease,  the 
contract  is  void  as  against  the  estate  of  the  principal,  and,  gen- 
erally speaking,  as  against  the  agent  himself,  and  the  third 
party  is  without  remedy.  In  this  case  no  notice  of  the  termi- 
nation of  the  agency  is  required.  In  a  few  states,  however,  the 
rule  has  been  adopted  that  the  bona  fide  acts  of  the  agent  after 
the  death  of  his  principal  and  before  he  becomes  aware  of  the 
fact,  and  which  do  not  require  the  principal's  signature  are 
valid  in  favor  of  third  parties. 


LEGALITY  OF    THE    AGREEMENT. 

8.  Kinds  of  Illegal  Subject-Matter.  No  contract 
can  be  enforced  in  the  courts  which  involves  an  agreement  to 
perform  an  act  which  is  (a)  forbidden  by  statutory  law,  or  (£) 


LEGALITY.  15 

is  contrary  to  the  rules  of  common  law,  or  (c)  which  is  opposed 
to  public  policy. 

9.  Contracts  in  Breach  of  Statute  Law.  This 
subject  will  not  here  be  entered  upon  at  length.  It  may  be 
said,  in  short,  that  all  acts  which  are  expressly  prohibited  by 
statute  law,  or  all  acts  for  which  specific  penalties  are  attached 
in  national,  state,  or  municipal  laws,  if  made  the  subject  of  a 
contract,  such  contract  can  not  be  enforced.  Without  here 
mentioning  the  acts  which  would  be  criminal  or  immoral,  it 
may  be  well  to  call  attention  to  a  certain  class  of  contracts 
which  can  not  be  enforced  at  law  because  the  plaintiff  in  the 
suit  has  no  legal  standing  in  court.  Thus  where  the  state  stat- 
ute requires  a  diploma  or  license  for  the  practice  of  medicine 
or  surgery,  or  a  license  to  act  as  attorney  at  law,  or  as  a  sur- 
veyor, or  as  an  engineer,  a  person  not  having  such  legal  author- 
ization can  not  collect  in  the  courts  the  price  of  his  professional 
fees. 

Under  this  head  also  fall  agreements  to  pay  usurious  inter- 
est, which  in  some  states  involves  the  forfeiture  of  the  entire 
interest,  and  in  a  few  states  the  entire  contract  becomes  void 
even  to  the  sacrifice  of  the  principal. 

In  most  states  all  kinds  of  wagers  are  declared  unlawful  by 
statute  and  can  not  be  collected. 

While  all  contracts  for  fire  or  life  insurance  are  in  a  certain 
sense  wagers,  they  are  valid  and  lawful  when  the  person  for 
whose  benefit  the  insurance  is  made  can  be  shown  to  have  a 
suitable  interest  in  the  property  or  person  insured. 

In  all  states  where  Sunday  labor,  with  the  exception  of 
"works  of  necessity  and  charity,"  is  prohibited,  contracts  made 
on  Sunday  are  illegal  and  can  not  be  enforced. 

Where  contracts  in  breach  of  statute  law  have  been  fully 
executed,  in  other  words,  where  the  act  has  been  done  and  the 
compensation  received,  the  law  will  not  recognize  such  trans- 
actions for  the  purpose  of  annulling  them.  Thus,  in  the  case  of  a 


16  LAW   OF   CONTRACTS. 

wager  which  has  been  paid,  the  law  will  not  enforce  the  return 
of  the  money. 

10.  Immoral  Acts.  The  courts  will  not  enforce  an 
agreement,  the  object  of  which  is  forbidden  either  by  statute 
or  by. common  law,  or  which  in  law  may  be  regarded  as  immoral 
or  wrong.  Such  agreements  might  relate  to  such  subjects  as 
the  commission  of  crime ;  all  kinds  of  frauds  upon  creditors, 
either  by  way  of  fraudulent  assignments,  or  by  way  af  agree- 
ments with  certain  creditors  to  the  disadvantage  of  others ;  all 
kinds  of  transactions  under  false  pretenses,  as  the  selling  of 
articles  under  false  labels;  fraudulent  conveyance  of  real 
estate  to  defraud  creditors;  changes  in  contracts  after  they  have 
been  signed,  either  by  one  party  without  the  consent  of  the 
other,  or  by  the  two  principals  without  the  consent  of  the 
sureties;  all  acts  of  officers  of  corporations  in  their  official 
capacity,  in  furtherance  of  their  private  ends;  fictitious  bidding 
at  auctions  for  the  purpose  of  raising  the  bids  of  bona  fide  pur- 
chasers;  collusion  between  the  auctioneer  and  private  individ- 
uals to  defraud  owner,  and  the  like. 

The  particular  class  of  illegal  acts  in  this  category  which 
has  especial  interest  to  engineers,  is  that  referring  to  changes 
in  contracts  agreed  to  by  the  principals  without  the  consent  of 
the  sureties  or  bondsmen.  In  all  such  cases  if  the  changes  are 
material,  that  is  to  say,  if  they  are  such  as  may  be  said  to  have 
a  money  value,  then  if  these  changes  be  made  without  the  con- 
sent of  the  surety,  such  surety  can  no  longer  be  held  for  any 
damage  resulting  from  failure  of  his  principal  to  fulfill  his 
agreement.  Since  such  changes  are  almost  always  made  in  all 
contracts  after  they  are  signed  and  before  the  work  is  fully 
executed,  and  since  it  is  very  common  to  neglect  to  obtain  the 
consent  of  the  sureties  when  making  all  such  changes,  these 
sureties  or  bondsmen  are  nearly  always  relieved  from  liability 
in  the  manner  here  indicated.  Furthermore,  if  such  sureties 
are  consulted  in  regard  to  the  proposed  changes  and  they 


LEGALITY.  17 

should  not  choose  to  give  their  consent,  then  if  they  are  still  to 
be  held  for  the  fulfillment  of  the  contract  their  consent  to  such 
changes  must  be  purchased,  the  same  as  must  be  done  with  the 
principal  himself  as  provided  for  in  the  specifications  or  con- 
tract. Because  of  this  common  oversight  and  the  resulting 
relief  of  these  sureties,  or  of  their  opposition  to  allowing 
changes  to  be  made  in  case  they  are  consulted,  it  is  becoming 
customary  to  provide  some  other  kind  of  guarantee  of  fulfill- 
ment, other  than  that  of  personal  sureties. 

11.  Contracts  Opposed  to  Public  Policy.     These 
contracts  may  relate  to    all    such    acts   as  may  be  shown  to  be 
detrimental  to  the  public  welfare.     Such    as  acts  which  would 
tend  to  injure  the    public  service,  or  to    obstruct  the  course  of 
justice,  or  to  encourage  litigation,  or  as  have  an    immoral  tend- 
ency, or  as  will  restrain  the  freedom  of  trade,  or  as  will  dimin- 
ish   the    security    of  property  and    life.     As  such  contracts  in 
general  have  no  immediate  bearing  upon  the  work  of  engineers 
they  will  not  be  further  enlarged  upon  here.    There  is,  however, 
a  class  of  agreements  commonly  entered  into  by  the  principals 
to  an    engineering  contract  which  are    often  construed  in  the 
courts  as  against  the  public  policy,  which  will  be  discussed  in 
the  following  article. 

12.  Agreements    Which  Refer   to  Arbitration. 

The  following  discussion   of  this   subject  is  taken   bodily  from 
Lawson  on  Contracts,  being  article  318  of  that  work. 

4 'An  agreement  that  matters  which  have  arisen  or  may 
arise  between  the  parties  shall  be  referred  to  an  arbitrator  or 
arbitrators  is  not  binding  and  either  party  may  have  recourse 
to  the  courts  notwithstanding  it.  The  reason  of  the  rule  is  by 
some  traced  to  the  jealousy  of  the  courts  and  a  desire  to  repress 
any  attempt  to  encroach  on  the  exclusiveness  of  their  jurisdic- 
tion, and  by  others  to  an  aversion  on  the  part  of  the  courts 
from  reason  of  public  policy  to  sanction  contracts  by  which  the 
protection  which  the  law  affords  the  citizen  is  renounced. 

"But  when  a  contract  contains  a  condition  which  provides 
that  disputes  arising  out  of  it  shall  be  referred  to  arbitration, 

2 


18  LAW   OF   CONTRACTS. 

the  validity  of  such  a  condition  depends  upon  rather  a  fine  dis- 
tinction. Where  the  amount  of  damage  sustained  by  a 
breach  of  the  contract  is  to  be  ascertained  by  specified  arbitra- 
tion before  any  right  of  action  arises,  the  condition  is  good ; 
but  where  all  matters  in  dispute,  of  whatever  sort,  are  to  be 
referred  to  arbitrators  and  to  them  alone,  the  condition  is  ille- 
gal. The  one  imposes  a  condition  precedent  to  a  right  of 
action  accruing,  the  other  endeavors  to  prevent  any  right  of 
action  accruing  at  all.  As  well  put  by  an  English  judge: 
'If  a  tenant  covenant  that  he  will  cultivate  the  demised  land  in 
a  husband-like  manner  and  also  covenants  that  if  any  dispute 
shall  arise  in  respect  thereof  it  shall  be  referred  to  arbitration,, 
an  action  may  nevertheless  be  maintained  ;  but  where  the  cove- 
nant is  to  pay  such  damages  as  shall  be  ascertained  by  an  arbi- 
trator, no  action  will  lie  until  he  has  ascertained  them.' 

"The  principle  is  frequently  applied  in  the  United  States 
to  contracts  for  the  construction  of  buildings,  railroads,  canals 
and  other  works  involving  numerous  details.  These  contracts 
give  rise  to  many  questions  which  a  court  of  law  might  reasona- 
bly send  to  a  referee,  and  the  parties  may  agree  that  such  questions 
shall  be  determined  by  an  architect  or  engineer  or  by  arbitra- 
tors, and  that  such  determination,  or  a  bona  fide  effort  to 
obtain  it,  shall  be  a  condition  precedent  to  the  right  to  bring 
an  action  on  the  contract.  Contracts  of  insurance  usually  con- 
tain similar  clauses.  Thus  an  insurance  policy  provided  that, 
in  case  of  differences  arising  touching  any  loss  or  damage,  the 
matter  might  at  the  request  of  either  party  be  submitted  to 
impartial  arbitrators  whose  award  in  writing  should  be  binding 
on  the  parties  to  the  amount  of  such  loss  or  damage,  'but 
shall  not  decide  the  liability  of  the  company  under  this  policy;' 
also,  'it  is  furthermore  mutually  agreed  that  no  suit  or  action 
against  this  company  for  the  recovery  of  any  claim  by  virtue  of 
this  policy  shall  be  sustainable  in  any  court  of  law  or  chancery 
until  an  award  shall  have  been  obtained  fixing  the  amount  of 
such  claim  in  the  manner  hereinabove  provided.'  It  was  held 
that  no  suit  could  be  sustained  against  the  objection  of  the 
company  until  an  award  had  been  made,  although  neither  party 
previous  to  the  suit  had  requested  arbitration. 

But  it  must  be  expressly  stipulated  in  all  cases  that  the  award 
or  determination  is  a  condition  precedent  to  the  right  of  action 
en  the  contract,  or  the  agreement  to  arbitrate  will  be  of  no 
effect. 

Agreements  of  a  similar  nature  have  been  held  illegal,  as 
aiming  to  oust  the  jurisdiction  of  the  courts;  as,  for  example, 
a  provision  in  the  by-laws  of  a  benefit  association  that  the 
decision  of  the  officers  on  the  claim  of  a  member  shall  be  final 
and  conclusive.  And  parties  are  not  allowed  by  contract  to 
vary  the  procedure  in  the  courts  prescribed  by  statute.  In  Illi- 


AGREEMENT.  19 

nois  a  lease  contained  a  provision  that  the  landlord  should  have 
the  right  to  take  immediate  judgment  against  the  tenant  in  case, 
of  a  default  on  his  part  without  giving  the  notice  and  demand 
for  possession  and  riling  the  complaint  required  by  the  statute. 
It  was  held  that  such  a  provision  was  illegal." 

13.  The  Engineer  as  Arbitrator.  In  the  carrying 
out  of  engineering  and  building  contracts,  the  specifications  are 
usually  so  written  as  to  make  the  engineer  or  architect  an  arbitra- 
tor on  almost  all  questions  which  can  possibly  arise  under  the 
contract,  and  it  is  usual  to  specify  that  his  decisions  thereon 
shall  be  final  and  conclusive.  In  view  of  what  is  given  in  the 
previous  article  it  is  evident  that  such  a  clause  can  not  operate  to 
prevent  a  case  being  brought  before  the  courts  under  such  a  con- 
tract, but  when  it  has  been  so  brought  it  evidently  will  operate 
to  sustain  the  decisions  of  the  engineer  on  all  points  which  may 
be  construed  by  the  court  as  ^'•conditions  precedent'''  to  final 
settlement.  On  all  questions  of  fact,  however,  which  the 
court  can  pass  upon  as  well  as  the  engineer,  and  on  all  ques- 
tions of  law  the  court  would  retain  its  jurisdiction  notwithstand- 
the  agreement  of  both  parties  to  submit  all  questions  to  the 
arbitration  of  the  engineer,  whose  decisions  were  to  be  "final 
and  conclusive."  On  all  questions  which  the  engineer  is,  from 
the  circumstances  of  the  case,  especially  competent  to  deter- 
mine, as  to  quantities  and  classification,  as  well  as  all  questions 
which  are  more  or  less  matters  of  opinion  as  classification  of 
materials  and  perfection  of  work  done,  the  decision  of  the 
engineer  will  be  sustained  under  such  a  clause,  provided  it  be 
not  shown  that  he  has  acted  fraudulently  in  the  matter.  See 
Articles  85  and  108. 


AGREEMENT. 

14.     Mutual  Assent.     In  order  that  a  contract  shall  be 
binding  on  both  parties  to  an  agreement  it  must  have  been  under- 


20  LAW   OF   CONTEACTS. 

stood  and  assented  to  by  both  in  the  very  same  sense.  How- 
ever clear  the  agreement  would  appear  to  be  on  its  face,  if  it  can 
be  shown  that  the  proposition  was  not  mutually  understood  in 
the  same  sense  it  can  not,  in  general,  be  enforced.  It  must  not 
be  understood,  however,  that  all  pleas  of  having  misunder- 
stood the  plain  and  express  provisions  of  a  written  contract  will 
relieve  the  party  making  such  claim  from  liability  under  it.  In 
other  words  the  mental  agreement  is  evidenced  by  the  language 
used  in  expressing  such  agreement,  and  the  law  will  presume 
that  such  words  were  understood,  provided  their  meaning  is 
plain  and  evident.  Furthermore  whatever  a  man's  real  inten- 
tion may  be,  if  he  so  acts  as  to  lead  another  person  to  reasona- 
bly suppose  that  he  was  assenting  to  a  given  proposition,  and 
this  person  proceeds  on  this  assumption,  the  other  party  so  act- 
ing becomes  bound  by  the  proposition. 

The  agreement  is  not  consummated  until  each  party  has 
communicated  to  the  other,  either  orally,  by  letter,  or  by  overt 
acts,  his  intention  in  the  matter.  The  secret  or  mental  acceptance 
of  a  proposition  by  one  or  both  of  the  parties  to  it  does  not 
complete  a  legal  agreement,  until  this  mental  act  has  been 
communicated  to  the  other  party. 

A  person  making  an  offer,  whether  orally,  by  messenger, 
by  mail,  or  by  telegraph,  or  by  public  advertisement,  must 
allow  a  reasonable  time  for  its  acceptance,  provided  n6  time 
limit  is  stated  in  the  proposition.  If  the  acceptance  is  returned 
by  the  same  agency  used  in  sending  the  offer,  the  contract  is 
completed  at  the  time  such  acceptance  is  delivered  to  such 
agency,  whether  the  party  sending  the  offer  ever  receives  such 
acceptance  or  not.  A  person  is  bound  by  the  acts  of  the  agent 
of  his  own  selection,  and  the  failure  of  this  agent  to  deliver  to 
him  the  acceptance  does  not  operate  to  prevent  the  completion 
of  the  contract.  For  instance,  a  proposition  sent  by  mail  is 
accepted  at  the  time  the  letter  of  acceptance  is  deposited  in  the 
postoffice  or  letter  box,  and  a  proposition  sent  by  telegraph  is 


AGREEMENT.  .    21 

accepted  and  the  contract  completed  at  the  time  of  the  delivery 
of  a  telegraphic  reply  at  the  telegraph  office  or  to  a  telegraphic 
messenger. 

If  the  person  receiving  the  offer  wishes  it  to  remain  open 
for  a  definite  length  of  time,  longer  than  might  be  construed  a's 
reasonable,  if  no  time  is  specified,  he  must  pay  to  the  other 
party  something  which  may  be  construed  as  a  consideration  for 
the  privilege  of  acceptance  for  such  specified  time.  On  the 
other  hand,  the  party  accepting  can  withdraw  his  acceptance  if 
he  can  succeed  in  having  his  withdrawal  presented  to  the  first 
party  before  his  acceptance  has  been  received.  Thus  an  accept- 
ance by  mail  may  be  withdrawn  by  telegraph,  provided  the 
telegram  is  received  before  the  letter. 

A  mere  offer  may  be  withdrawn  at  any  time  before  it  is 
accepted,  unless  a  consideration  has  been  paid  for  the  privi- 
lege of  acceptance  for  a  definite  time  as  above  described.  A 
formal  notice  of  withdrawal  is  not  always  necessary,  as  when 
the  party  receiving  the  offer  becomes  aware  of  the  sale  of  the 
property  in  the  mean  time  to  another. 

When  an  offer  is  made  by  mail  or  telegraph  the  means 
used  for  communicating  the  offer  become  the  recognized  agent 
of  the  party  making  such  offer,  and  the  party  receiving  it  is  at 
liberty  to  accept  it  as  received,  even  though  a  mistake  may 
have  been  made  in  the  transmission  of  the  same.  .Thus  if  an 
offer  is  made  by  telegraph,  and  an  error  has  been  made  in 
transmitting  the  same,  the  erroneous  proposition  may  be 
accepted  either  by  mail  or  telegraph,  and  the  party  making 
such  offer  is  bound.  His  only  remedy  is  to  sue  the  telegraph 
company  for  damages.  This  is  because  the  party  making  the 
proposition  assumed  all  responsibility  for  the  correctness  of  the 
transmission  by  the  agency  selected  by  him. 

When  an  offer  has  been  made  and  no  consideration  paid 
to  keep  it  open  for  a  given  time,  it  is  supposed  to  stand  for 


22  LAW   OF   CONTEACTS. 

what  the  law  will  consider  a  reasonable  time,  the  actual  length 
of  time  depending  altogether  on  the  nature  of  the  transaction. 

15.  Qualified  assent.      Whenever  a  proposition  made 
by  one  party  is  accepted    by    another    with   any  kind  of  qualifi- 
cation or  change  of  the  conditions  or  wording  of   the   original 
proposition,    such    an  acceptance    is    simply   the    making  of  a 
counter  proposition  to  the  first  party,  and  does  not  constitute  an 
agreement  until  such  party  has   in   turn    assented   fully  to  the 
entire  proposition  as  last  stated,  and  if  he   again  assents  to  the 
proposition   with  further  changes   or  amendments,   it  becomes 
again  a  new  proposition,  which  must  be  agreed  to  by  the  second 
party,  before  it  becomes  binding  on  the  party  to  whom   it  is 
sent.      The  assent  which  finally  makes  of  the  offer  or  proposi- 
tion a  binding  contract,  is  the  full,  absolute,   and  unconditional 
acceptance  of  its  terms. 

16.  Qualified  Offers.     The  party  making  the  offer  has 
the  right  to  prescribe  in  it  the  time,  place,  form,   or  other  con- 
dition of  acceptance,  in  which  case  such  offer  can  be   accepted 
only  in  the  manner  prescribed.     This  privilege    on 'the  part  of 
the  proposer  does  not  enable  him  to  impose  the  condition,  how- 
ever, that  a  failure  to  receive  an  acceptance  by  a  certain  time 
will  be  construed  as  an  acceptance.     In  other  words,  he  may 
not  impose  the  conditions  of  refusal. 

17.  Implied  acceptance.      An  offer  may  be  accepted 
by  merely  acting  upon  it,  the  act  becoming  an  acceptance  from 
the  time  it  was  performed.     Thus  an  offer   to   purchase   goods 
may  be  accepted  by  simply  shipping  the  goods,    or  in  the  case 
of    a   published    offer  of   a   reward   for  the  apprehension  of  a 
criminal,  the   act  of     apprehending   is     construed   as   both   an 
acceptance  and  fulfillment  of  the  contract. 

18.    Failure  of  agreement  by  mistake.   The  parties 
to  an  agreement  are   bound  to  the   fulfillment  of   the   same    in 


AGREEMENT.  23 

accordance  with  the  plain  intent  and  meaning  of  the  language 
used,  whether  oral  or  written,  provided  the  meaning  of  this  lan- 
guage be  clear,  and  neither  party  is  allowed  to  plead  either 
carelessness  in  the  reading  of  the  terms  thereof  or  ignorance  of 
the  meaning  of  the  language  used.  It  goes  almost  without  saying, 
however,  that  apparent  or  evident  mistakes  in  the  use  of  Ian- 
gunge  will  be  corrected  by  the  court.  However,  the  following 
kinds  of  mistakes  will  lead  to  a  decision  that  no  contract  was 
really  entered  into  because  of  utter  failure  of  the  parties  to 
agree  to  the  same  thing. 

(a)  Mistake  concerning  nature  of  transacti 

as  where  a  person,  by  mistake,  signs  a  document  of  an  entir 
different  character  from  that  which  he  intended  to  sign,  as 
where  he  signs  a  bond  instead  of  a  petition,  or  a  .deed  instead 
of  a  lease,  the  two  documents  being  similar  in  form  and 
appearance.  In  such  cases  it  is  held  that  the  "mind  of  the 
signer  did  not  accompany  the  signature"  and  therefore  he  never 
agreed  to  such  a  proposition.  If  it  can  be  shown,  however, 
that  the  mistake  resulted  from  negligence  to  read  the  terms  of 
the  proposition,  and  that  while  the  signer  understood  in  a  gen-~ 
eral  way  the  character  of  the  document,  but  did  not  read  it 
over  carefully,  or  perhaps  did  not  read  it  at  all,  he  will  he  heltf 
to  the  contract  because  of  his  culpable  negligence.  This  only 
holds  where  the  plea  of  fraud  on  the  part  of  the  other  party  to 
the  contract  is  not  maintained. 

(b)  Mistake  concerning  person  with  whom  con- 
tract is  made,  as  "where  A  contracts  with  B,  thinking  that 
he  is  contracting  with  C,   there  can  obviously    be  no  contract,  . 
for  B  not  being  present  to  A's  mind,  A  can  not  be  a  consenting 
party  to  a  contract  with  B."     This,  of  course,   does    not  affect 
contracts  made  through  agents,  when  the  agency  is  declared. 

(c)  Mistake  concerning  Subject-matter  of  Con- 
tract.    If  the  parties  contracting  engage  themselves  concern-: 


24  LAW   OF   CONTRACTS. 

ing  a  thing  which  does  not  exist,  such  a  mistake  avoids  the 
contract,  because  of  the  nonexistence  of  the  subject-matter. 
This  applies  to  property  which  may  have  ceased  to  exist  before 
the  contract  is  signed,  although  both  of  the  parties  were  ignorant 
of  the  fact.  In  all  cases,  however,  where  the  existence  of  the 
subject-matter  is  in  the  mind  of  the  proposer  more  or  less  doubt- 
ful and  yet  the  offer  which  he  makes  is  unconditional,  he  can 
be  held  for  damages  resulting  from  failure,  even  though  the 
subject-matter  be  nonexistent. 

A  mistake  prevents  the  consummation  of  a  contract  also, 
where  each  of  the  parties  has  in  mind  a  different  subject-matter 
from  the  other.  This  applies  to  mistakes  which  may  be  con- 
sidered legitimate,  as  where  the  same  words  apply  with  equal 
force  to  different  things,  or  in  the  case  of  an  oral  contract 
where  the  language  was  clearly  misunderstood,  from  a  failure 
to  hear  the  words  which  were  really  spoken. 

The  remedy  for  a  contract  entered  into  under  a  mistake  is 
the  privilege  of  repudiating  it  on  the  part  of  the  person  who 
made  the  mistake,  or  the  privilege  of  recovering,  by  a  suit  at 
law,  part  payment  which  may  have  been  made,  it  being  under- 
stood that  the  contract  has  not  been  fully  executed  by  a  com- 
plete payment.  Or  the  case  may  be  brought  into  a  court  of 
equity,  and  justice  obtained  by  having  the  court  correct  the 
terms  of  the  agreement,  it  being  assumed  in  all  these  cases  that 
no  fraud  has  been  committed. 

19.     Misrepresentation  in  the  Contract.     In  order 

that  a  misrepresentation  of  facts  may  make  a  contract  invalid, 
it  must  have  been  made  with  a  fraudulent  intent.  The  mere 
falsity  of  a  statement  of  a  material  fact  in  the  contract,  however 
much  it  may  have  misled  the  other  party,  will  not  invalidate 
the  document,  unless  a  fraudulent  motive  accompanied  the 
misrepresentation.  It  is  necessary,  therefore,  to  prove  the 
motive  of  the  misrepresentation  before  the  validity  of  the  con- 
tract can  be  passed  upon. 


AGREEMENT.  25 

If,  however,  a  particular  term  in  the  contract  or  some 
integral  part  of  it  is  based  upon  a  misstatement  of  fact,  which 
term  or  integral  part  can  be  passed  upon  separr  tely  from  the 
body  of  the  contract,  such  a  misrepresentation  is  equivalent  to 
a  promise  by  the  party  making  it,  and  if  not  fulfilled  the  other 
party  can  recover  damages.  This,  however,  does  not  invalidate 
the  contract  as  a  whole. 

A  nondisclosure  of  fact,  is  equivalent  to  a  misrepresenta- 
tion of  fact,  provided  the  disclosure  properly  accompanied  the 
transaction. 

Fraudulent  misrepresentation  will  be  treated  in  the  follow- 
ing article. 

Contracts  for  insurance,  whether  marine,  fire,  or  life,  and 
contracts  for  the  purchase  of  stock  in  corporations,  also  con- 
tracts between  parties  occupying  intimate  and  confidential  rela- 
tions with  each  other  may  be  invalidated  by  misrepresentation 
of  fact,  which  would  not  invalidate  ordinary  business  or  engi- 
neering contracts.  (See  a  general  treatise  on  the  Law  of  Con- 
tracts for  these  cases.) 

20.  Invalidity  of  Contract  through  Fraud.  As 
a  general  rule  fraud  vitiates  all  contracts.  That  is  to  say, 
fraudulent  misrepresentation  by  one  party  enables  the  other  or 
injured  party  to  declare  the  contract  void  from  fraud,  or  he 
may  enforce  the  contract  against  the  defrauding  party,  at  his 
own  option.  The  defrauding  party,  however,  has  no  option  or 
privilege  in  the  way  of  declaring  the  contract  void.  In  other 
words,  should  he  find  that  the  contract  was  adverse  to  his  inter- 
ests, he  could  not  plead  his  own  fraudulent  act  to  his  own 
benefit. 

Fraud  in  the  sense  here  used  consists  in  a  "false  repre- 
sentation of  fact  made  by  the  party  who  is  charged  with  it,  with 
a  knowledge  of  its  falsehood,  or  in  reckless  disregard  whether 
it  be  true  or  false,  with  the  intention  that  it  shall  be  acted  upon 


26  LAW   OF   CONTRACTS. 

by  the  complaining  party,  and  actually  inducing  him  to  act 
upon  it  to  his  damage." 

"From  the  above  definition  the  following  essential  ele- 
ments of  fraud  may  with  profit  be  stated  separately :  (#)  A 
false  representation.  (£)  A  misrepresentation  of  fact,  (c) 
A  representation  made  by  the  party  charged,  (</)  Knowledge 
of  its  falsity  or  a  reckless  indifference  in  the  matter.  (<?)  An 
intention  that  it  shall  be  acted  upon  by  the  other  party,  (y)  A 
reliance  upon  it  by  the  other  party.  Qf)  Damage  to  the  party 
deceived."  Unless  each  and  every  one  of  the  above  essential 
elements  of  fraudulent  misrepresentation  be  proved,  the  con- 
tract can  not  be  avoided  on  the  score  of  fraud. 

The  false  representation  also  must  refer  to  some  material 
fact.  Furthermore  the  concealment  or  nondisclosure  of  a 
material  fact  in  an  active  manner,  that  is  to  say,  an  active  pre- 
vention of  the  disclosure  of  material  facts,  may  constitute  fraud- 
ulent misrepresentation. 

Where  the  one  party  knows  that  he  is  being  trusted  by  the 
other  party  and  relied  upon  for  the  disclosure  of  material  facts, 
as  is  the  case  when  a  contractor  relies  upon  the  engineer  or 
architect  to  disclose  to  him  the  material  facts  pertaining  to  the 
work  to  be  done,  this  rule  will  be  more  rigidly  applied  than 
when  no  such  confidence  is  imposed. 

A  concealment  of  the  real  value  of  goods  shipped  by 
express  or  freight,  or  by  other  agency,  in  order  to  obtain  such 
shipment  at  a  lower  rate,  is  a  fraudulent  misrepresentation. 

While  the  vendor  or  seller  of  an  article  is  not  obliged  to 
make  known  to  the  purchaser  the  defects  of  the  article,  when 
such  defects  can  be  discovered  by  the  buyer,  yet  a  deliberate 
hiding  of  such  defects  on  his  part  will  be  considered  a  fraudu- 
lent misrepresentation.  As  to  defects  which  can  not  be  dis- 
covered by  the  buyer,  the  vendor  is  bound  to  make  known  to 
him  such  defects  as  he  himself  may  be  aware  of.  / 


AGKEEMENT.  27 

While  known  false  representation  of  the  quality  or  defects 
of  an  article  made  by  either  seller  or  buyer,  for  the  purpose  of 
gaining  the  advantage  in  a  transaction  is  fraudulent,  the  pur- 
chaser, however,  is  not  obliged  to  disclose  his  knowledge  of 
the  real  value  of  an  article,  which  is  offered  to  him  below  its 
actual  value. 

On  questions  which  may  be  considered  matters  of  opinion 
rather  than  questions  of  fact,  misrepresentations  do  not  consti- 
tute fraud ;  only  misrepresentations  of  known  facts  fall  in  this 
category.  What  is  not  really  known  may  be  misrepresented 
without  invalidating  the  contract.  Neither  do  false  representa- 
tions of  future  intention,  or  of  questions  of  law,  constitute 
fraud. 

The  fraudulent  misrepresentation  must  have  been  made  by 
the  party  charged  or  by  his  agent,  or  with  his  connivance  and 
knowledge.  The  fraud  of  a  third  person  does  not  invalidate 
the  contract  between  two  others. 

The  misrepresentation  must  be  known  to  be  false.  Some- 
times a  contract  may  be  set  aside  because  of  violent  injustice 
resulting  from  a  false  representation,  which  was,  however, 
believed  to  be  true.  Frequently,  however,  a  party  may  make 
extravagant  statements  in  a  reckless  manner  for  the  purpose  of 
influencing  the  other  party  to  a  transaction,  not  knowing 
whether  his  statements  be  true  or  not.  In  such  a  case  the  will- 
ful negligence  or  recklessness  as  to  the  truth  of  his  positive 
statements  will  act  to  invalidate  the  contract,  provided  such 
statements  prove  to  be  false,  the  same  as  though  he  had  known 
them  to  be  false. 

The  false  statements  must  also  be  made  with  the  expecta- 
tion that  they  are  to  be  believed  and  acted  upon.  Extravagant 
affirmations  made  in  a  jocular  manner,  and  not  expected  to  be 
believed,  would  not  constitute  fraud. 

The  misrepresentation  must  be  accepted  as  true,  and  be 
acted  upon  before  the  fraud  is  perfected.  The  burden  of  proof 


28  LAW   OF   CONTRACTS. 

here  lies  upon  the  party  charging  fraud,  to  show  that  he  did 
really  act  upon  the  statements  made.  It  is  not  necessary  that 
he  shall  show  that  the  fraudulent  statements  formed  the  sole 
basis  of  his  action.  He  need  only  show  that  they  contributed 
materially  to  that  end,  and  that  the  action  would  not  have  been 
consummated  without  them. 

A  false  representation  as  to  one  of  several  material  matters 
in  a  contract  operates  to  vitiate  the  entire  agreement. 

The  party  claiming  fraud  must  also  show  that  some  actual 
damage  has  been  suffered.  It  would  not  be  sufficient  cause  for 
the  annulling  of  a  contract  to  show  that  one  was  fraudulently 
led  to  the  payment  of  a  just  debt,  since  no  damage  has  in  this 
case  been  sustained. 

21.  Remedy  of  party  defrauded.  Immediately  on 
discovering  the  fraud  the  party  defrauded  should  take  action, 
and  he  has  his  option  of  the  following  courses,  the  last  two 
being  remedies. 

(«)  He  may  enforce  the  contract  against  the  defrauding 
party,  or  take  no  action  whatever,  and  allow  the  contract  to  be 
enforced  against  himself.  If  he  does  not  take  action  on  dis- 
covery of  the  fraud,  he  will  be  supposed  to  have  consented  to 
the  enforcement  of  the  contract,  notwithstanding  such  fraud, 
and  he  will  lose  his  option  of  resisting  such  enforcement. 

(£)  He  may  at  once  give  notice  of  the  rescission  or 
rescinding  of  the  contract  on  his  part,  because  of  fraud  claimed 
to  have  been  perpetrated  by  the  other  party,  and  he  may  bring 
suit  to  recover  damages,  or  he  may  either  by  word  or  act  give 
evidence  to  the  other  party  of  his  intention  to  treat  the  contract 
as  null  and  void. 

(c)  If  it  be  practicable  to  reinstate  the  parties  in  their 
original  relative  relations,  he  may  sue  for  such  restoration. 
That  is  to  say,  if  goods  have  been  delivered,  they  may  be  recov- 
ered if  practicable. 


AGKEEMENT.  29 

Any  action  .under  the  contract  in  the  way  of  acknowledg- 
ing its  force  by  the  party  defrauded,  after  he  has  discovered  the 
fraud,  will  operate  to  make  the  contract  binding  upon  him,  as 
he  will  be  assumed  to  have  deliberately  forfeited  his  right  of 
rescission.  It  must  be  understood,  also,  that  he  can  not  con- 
sent to  the  operation  of  a  portion  of  the  contract  with  the  privi- 
lege of  rejecting  another  portion  of  it  to  which  the  fraud  may 
more  directly  relate.  Since  fraud  vitiates  the  entire  contract, 
the  defrauded  party  must  forfeit  his  privilege  of  rejection 
entirely  by  agreeing  to  its  terms  notwithstanding  the  fraud,  or 
he  must  reject  it  entirely  and  in  all  its  parts.  He  can  not 
obtain  the  benefit  of  a  part  and  reject  another  part. 

Outside  of  the  rights  described  above,  arising  under  the 
contract  itself,  the  defrauded  party  has  the  privilege  at  common 
law  of  bringing  action  for  deceit  to  cover  such  damage  as  he 
may  have  sustained  as  a  result  of  such  fraudulent  misrepresen- 
tation. This  action  is  in  addition  to  his  privilege  of  avoiding 
or  rescinding  the  contract  itself. 

Furthermore  a  party  defrauded  of  his  property  may  recap- 
ture it,  if  he  is  able  to  do  so  without  unnecessary  violence  and 
without  a  breach  of  the  peace,  without  recourse  to  the  law  and 
its  agencies. 

22.  Invalidity  of  Contract  through  Duress.  "A 
person  is  said  to  have  acted  under  duress  when  he  does  or 
promises  to  do  any  act  not  of  his  own  free  will,  but  in  conse- 
quence of  unlawful  physical  restraint  imposed  by  another,  or  in 
consequence  of  threats  made  by  another,  either  to  do  him  some 
great  bodily  harm,  or  to  unlawfully  destroy  his  property,  or 
deprive  him  of  the  same.  Promises  made  under  duress  will 
not  be  enforced,  and  money  paid,  or  property  transferred  under 
duress  may  be  recovered." 

Contracts  entered  into  under  duress  as  above  defined  are 
voidable  at  the  option  of  the  constrained  party,  the  same  as 


30  LAW   OF   CONTRACTS. 

though  fraud  had  been  perpetrated  upon  him.     The  contract  is 
not  voidable,  however,  at  the  option  of  the  other  party. 

23.  Invalidity  of  Contract  through  Undue  In- 
fluence. Where  the  parties  occupy  a  confidential  relation  to 
each  other,  or  from  long  association  and  other  peculiar  circum- 
stances affording  the  proper  and  sufficient  opportunities,  courts 
of  equity  take  cognizance  of  what  may  be  called  undue  influ- 
ence, which  may  act  the  same  as  fraud  in  persuading  the  person 
to  enter  into  an  unfair  and  unreasonable  contract.  Such  are 
the  relations  of  the  members  of  one  family,  or  those  of  guar- 
dian and  ward,  attorney  and  client,  priest  and  parishioner, 
physician  and  patient,  as  well  as  those  where  mental  weakness 
from  old  age  or  sickness  and  the  like,  furnish  suitable  oppor- 
tunities. 

The  remedies  in  the  case  of  undue  influence  are  the  same 
as  those  in  the  case  of  fraud,  except  lhat  the  influenced  party 
does  not  lose  his  rights  of  choice  of  remedies  by  delay  in 
action,  since  it  is  unfair  to  assume  that  such  a  party  can  sud- 
denly recover  his  normal  independence. 


CONSIDERATION. 

24.  Consideration  Defined.  All  business  contracts 
such  as  an  engineer  will  be  called  upon  to  enforce  must  always 
be  supported  by  a  valuable  consideration;  otherwise  they  are 
not  enforceable.  As  such  a  consideration  is  always  named  and 
specifically  determined  in  all  engineering  contracts,  it  is  not 
necessary  to  go  into  that  subject  here  very  fully. 

A  "valuable  consideration"  in  the  eyes  of  the  "law  is 
itsome  right,  interest,  profit,  or  benefit,  accruing  to  one  party ', 
or  some  forbearance,  detriment,  loss,  or  responsibility  given , 
suffered,  or  undertaken  by  the  other." 


CONSIDERATION.  31 

Such  a  consideration  is  necessary  to  enforce  a  written 
agreement  the  same  as  would  be  necessary  with  an  oral  agree- 
ment. 

A  contract  under  seal,  however,  does  not  require  a  con- 
sideration to  enforce  it.  This  is  the  principal  and  character- 
istic difference  between  contracts  under  seal,  and  ordinary 
written  or  oral  contracts,  both  of  which  latter  class  constitute 
what  is  known  as  simple  or  parole  agreements. 

It  is  not  necessary  that  the  consideration  be  named  in  the 
agreement,  or  that  the  fact  of  consideration  should  appear  in 
the  agreement;  it  is  only  necessary  that  there  shall  be  a  con- 
sideration in  fact. 

In  cases  of  promissory  notes  and  other  negotiable  paper, 
the  presumption  is  that  there  was  in  fact  a  consideration, 
whether  named  in  the  document  or  not,  and  the  burden  of 
proof  rests  upon  the  maker  of  the  note  to  show  that  there  was 
in  fact  no  consideration. 

In  the  states  of  California,  Iowa,  Indiana,  Kansas,  Ken- 
tucky and  Missouri,  an  agreement  made  in  writing  is  presumed 
by  statute  law  to  be  founded  on  a  consideration,  and  is  there- 
fore placed  on  the  same  basis  as  holds  generally  for  negotiable 
paper.  Here  again  the  burden  of  proof  rests  upon  the 
defendant  to  show  that  there  was  in  fact  no  consideration.  In 
both  the  above  cases  if  it  can  be  shown  that  the  promise  was 
not  supported  by  what  the  law  will  construe  as  a  valuable  con- 
sideration, the  agreement  or  contract  fails. 

A  promise  made  without  a  valuable  consideration  is  con- 
strued by  the  law  to  be  gratuitous,  and  not  enforceable,  even 
though  the  party  to  whom  it  was  made  has  acted  upon  it,  and 
has  sustained  serious  loss  or  damage  thereby. 

25.  Adequacy  of  Consideration.  It  is  not  neces- 
sary that  the  consideration  named,  or  implied,  or  shown  to 
exist  by  any  acceptable  evidence  shall  be  adequate  to  support 


32  LAW   OF   CONTKACTS. 

the  promise.  So  long  as  it  is  valuable  at  all,  in  the  sense 
defined  in  the  previous  article  it  will  support  the  full  promise. 
The  question  of  adequacy  of  consideration  will  not  be  allowed 
to  be  put  in  evidence  except  for  some  ulterior  purpose,  as  when 
it  is  attempted  to  prove  fraud. 

Here  the  law  seems  to  conflict  with  the  principles  of  right 
and  justice;  but  for  the  court  to  inquire  into  the  adequacy  of  a 
consideration  would  make  nearly  all  contracts  subject  to  litiga- 
tion and  the  freedom  and  rights  of  the  individual  would  be 
greatly  curtailed.  This  rule  as  to  adequacy,  however,  does  not 
apply  to  the  exchange  of  sums  of  money,  for  instance,  whose 
absolute  values  are  fixed  and  known.  In  this  case  the  consid- 
eration must  be  adequate  and  equal. 

When  the  consideration  is  grossly  inadequate,  suit  may  be 
brought  in  equity  and  the  courts  will  in  that  case  sometimes 
vary  the  terms  of  the  agreement  in  the  interest  of  justice. 

Neither  is  it  necessary  that  the  consideration  should  have 
any  assignable  money  value,  as  is  plainly  implied  in  the  defini- 
tion of  a  consideration  given  in  the  previous  article.  Thus 
mutual  promises  are  each  a  consideration  for  the  enforcement 
of  the  other,  but  when  the  promise  of  one  of  the  parties 
includes  no  more  than  it  was  already  his  legal  duty  to  perform, 
such  a  promise  will  not  support  a  promise  made  by  the  oppo- 
site party.  For  example,  if  A  owes  B  a  sum  of  money,  and 
interest  thereon  which  is  due,  and  A  promises  to  pay  B  the 
interest  if  he  will  extend  the  loan,  which  B  promises  to  do,  here 
B's  promise  to  extend  the  loan  is  not  supported  by  a  valuable 
consideration  and  is  therefore  not  enforceable.  Again  a 
promise  to  pay  to  a  public  officer  more  than  his  lawful  fee  for 
the  performance  of  a  public  duty,  is  not  enforceable. 

26.    Agreement  to  Take  Less  than  is  Due.    A 

very  common  case  in  the  execution  of  contracts  is  that  of  an 
agreement  by  one  of  the  parties  to  receive  or  accept  less  than 
the  contract  calls  for.  It  is  important  here  to  distinguish 


CONSIDERATION.  33 

between  sums  of  money  or  matters  which  are  in  dispute,  and 
sums  of  money  or  matters  which  are  not  in  dispute. 

If  one  of  the  parties  agrees  tp  accept  a  sum  of  money 
less  than  that  which  is  avowedly  due  him,  such  an  agreement 
is  not  enforceable,  because  of  failure  of  consideration,  unless 
some  condition  of  performance  accompanied  the  offer  which 
may  be  construed  as  a  consideration.  If,  however,  the  sum  of 
money  claimed  by  A  is  disputed  by  the  other  party  B,  and 
never  has  been  acknowledged  by  B  as  being  the  amount  owed, 
then  and  in  that  case  an  agreement  on  the  part  of  A  to 
accept  less  than  his  claim,  when  accepted  by  B,  is  enforceable. 
This  is  because  no  agreement  had  been  made  previous  to  this 
compromise  arrangement. 

Similarly  an  agreement  on  the  part  of  the  owner  to  accept 
a  less  amount  of  work  or  a  cheaper  construction  on  the  part  of 
the  contractor  than  that  contained  in  the  written  specifications 
is  not  enforceable,  unless  it  is  supported  by  some  further  act 
on  the  part  of  the  contractor,  or  by  a  corresponding  change  in 
the  price  of  the  work,  which  may  be  construed  as  a  considera- 
tion. If,  however,  the  original  contract  provided  for  such 
changes  as  these  by  agreement  without  further  consideration^ 
such  further  agreements  simply  modify  the  terms  of  the  origU 
nal  contract  and  become  a  part  thereof  without  a  new  considera-^ 
tion  being  required. 

Where  several  creditors  enter  into  a  mutual  agreement 
among  themselves  and  with  the  debtor  to  take  less  than  is 
acknowledged  to  be  due  them,  and  to  discharge  their  several 
debts,  such  an  agreement  is  held  to  rest  on  a  sufficient  consid- 
eration, since  these  mutual  promises  are  evidently  for  their 
mutual  benefit,  and  therefore  all  do  receive  a  valuable  consid- 
eration in  support  of  such  promises. 

If  it  is  desired  or  intended  that  an  agreement  shall  hold 
without    a    correspDnding1  consideration,    such     as    have    been 
referred  to  above,  it  is  only  necessary  to  execute  the  new  agree" 
3 


34  LAW   OF   CONTRACTS. 

ment  under  seal,  in  which  case  a  consideration  is  not  required. 

When  a  person  brings  suit  against  another  or  threatens  to 
do  so,  for  a  sum  of  money  claimed  in  good  faith  to  be  due, 
not  evidenced  by  a  note  or  promise  to  pay,  the  dismissal  of  such 
suit,  or  a  promise  not  to  bring  it,  is  a  sufficient  consideration  for 
a  promise  by  the  party  sued,  or  threatened  to  be  sued,  to  pay  to 
the  claimant  a  sum  of  money,  or  for  a  promise  to  do  any  other 
lawful  act. 

In  the  case  of  an  engineering  contract,  an  agreement  by 
the  parties  to  vary  the  terms  of  the  original  contract,  which 
variation  may  not  have  been  provided  for  in  such  contract, 
an  agreement  to  vary  the  conditions  in  one  particular  must 
be  supported  by  a  consideration  in  the  way  of  an  agree- 
ment to  vary  the  terms  of  the  original  contract  in  some 
other  particular  which  may  be  accepted  as  a  consideration,  or 
some  other  and  new  consideration  must  be  provided  for  in 
order  to  support  such  agreement.  Thus,  if  A  has  agreed  to 
build  a  house  for  B  in  accordance  with  certain  plans  and  speci- 
fications with  no  provision  for  changes  of  plan,  if  B  consents 
to  a  change  in  the  plans  by  which  the  cost  is  reduced,  without 
any  consideration  being  agreed  upon  or  mentioned  for  such 
change  of  plans,  B  has  the  privilege  of  changing  his  mind, 
and  of  enforcing  the  original  agreement,  since  the  second 
agreement  was  not  supported  by  a  consideration.  In  like 
manner,  should  A  consent  to  a  change  of  plans  without 
naming  a  consideration  he  can  not  be  held  to  such  an  agree- 
ment even  though  it  be  made  in  writing,  but  may  continue  to 
carry  out  the  original  agreement,  which  alone  is  binding.  In 
other  words,  all  subsequent  or  auxiliary  agreements  or  changes 
in  the  original  contract  not  provided  for  in  the  original  docu- 
ment are  in  fact  new  contracts  and  must  each  and  all  be  sup- 
ported by  a  consideration. 

Promises  or  contracts  which  have  been  fully  executed  can 
not  be  inquired  into  by  law,  as  to  whether  there  may  have  been 


CONSIDERATION.  35 

110  consideration.  Thus  money  which  has  been  paid  without 
consideration  can  not  be  recovered,  and  for  work  executed 
before  a  promise  to  pay  has  been  given  or  implied,  no  recovery 
or  compensation  can  be  obtained. 

Of  this  general  character  are  gifts  which  have  been  made, 
the  article  having  been  delivered  to  the  donee.  They  can  not 
"be  recovered,  neither  can  payment  for  them  be  enforced.  An 
exception  to  this  is  where  property  has  been  given  away  to 
defraud  creditors.  In  this  case  the  person  receiving  the  gift 
may  be  compelled  to  restore  it  to  the  creditor,  or  so  much 
thereof  as  will  discharge  the  creditor's  claim  against  the  donor. 

27.  As  to  Waiver  of  Legal  Rights.  An  apparent 
exception  to  the  general  rule  that  a  promise  must  be  supported 
by  a  consideration  is  an  agreement  to  waive  a  statutory  right  of 
defense.  Thus  "a  promise  to  pay  a  debt  barred  by  the  statute 
of  limitations,  or  by  a  discharge  in  bankruptcy,  though  made 
without  consideration  is  enforceable,  and  a  promise  by  an 
endorser  of  a  bill  or  note  to  pay  it,  although  the  endorser 
knows  that  he  has  been  released  from  all  liability,  from  the 
note  not  having  been  protested  when  due,  is  likewise  binding." 
In  these  cases  the  new  promise  is  equivalent  simply  to  waiving 
the  legal  rights  of  the  party,  after  which  the  old  promise  is 
again  restored  to  its  legal  status,  which  former  promise  was 
supported  by  a  consideration. 

"But  when  a  debt  has  been  canceled  by  the  act  of  the 
parties,  as  by  a  release  under  seal,  which  would  require  no 
consideration,  a  subsequent  promise  to  pay  the  debt,  notwith- 
standing the  release,  is  not  valid  unless  supported  by  a  consid- 
eration.'* In  this  case  the  former  promise  or  agreement  had 
been  obliterated  by  a  subsequent  release  under  seal,  and  hence 
a  new  contract  would  have  to  be  made. 


36  LAW   OF   CONTRACTS. 


CONTRACTS  UNDER  SEAL. 

28.  Classes  of  Sealed  Contracts.  While  any  con- 
tract may  be  executed  under  seal,  and  so  become  a  sealed 
contract,  under  the  common  law,  the  following  must  be  exe- 
cuted under  seal  to  become  binding,  namely:  (#)  Gratuitous 
promises.  (3)  Contracts  with  corporations,  (c)  Conveyan- 
ces of  real  estate.  (</)  Bonds. 

(#)  If  it  is  the  purpose  to  make  a  gratuitous  promise 
legally  binding  on  the  parties,  it  must  be  executed  under  seal, 
and  when  so  executed  the  absence  of  a  consideration  will  not 
invalidate  it. 

(<5)  The  common  law  rule  that  contracts  with  corpora- 
tions must  be  executed  under  seal  no  longer  obtains  in  the 
United  States.  Here  a  contract  entered  into  with  the  proper 
officers  of  a  corporation  is  valid  without  being  sealed,  the  same 
as  though  made  with  an  individual,  unless  the  charter  of  the 
corporation  specifically  requires  all  contracts  to  be  made  under 
seal. 

(c)  Deeds  and  mortgages  do  still  in  this  country  require 
the  presence  of  a  seal,  except  where  a  special  statute  pro- 
vides otherwise.* 

(</)  A  bond  is  an  instrument  under  seal  whereby  one 
acknowledges  himself  indebted  to  another  in  a  specified  sum, 
generally  but  not  necessarily  conditioned  on  the  performance 
of  some  act.  Thus  bondsmen  or  sureties  in  the  case  of  an 
engineering  contract  are  those  who  sign  an  obligation  or 
acknowledgment  of  indebtedness  in  favor  of  the  party  letting 
the  work,  in  a  specified  sum,  conditioned  on  the  faithful  exe- 
cution of  the  work  which  the  contractor  has  undertaken  to 
perform.  Such  an  instrument,  called  a  bond,  should  be  exe- 
cuted under  seal. 

*This  is  true  in  Ohio,   Indiana,  Iowa,   Kansas,  Nebraska,  Tennessee,  Texas, 
Dakota,  Kentucky,  and  Mississippi. 


PAROLE    CONTRACTS.  37 

The  significance  of  a  seal  is  losing  its  force  in  America. 
In  some  states  a  seal  no  longer  has  any  significance,  whatever, 
so  that  even  when  present  in  due  form,  it  does  not  import  a 
consideration,  but  such  consideration  must  be  proved  the  same 
as  for  a  simple  or  parole  contract.  The  plain  intent  of  the 
parties  is  the  controlling  factor.  The  rules  given  above  are 
the  common  law  rules  and  still  have  more  or  less  force  in  some 
states. 


PAROLE  CONTRACTS. 

L"^c 
29.    Oral  and  Written  Contracts.     All  contracts. 

either  oral  or  written,  not  executed  under  seal,  are  called  simple 
or  parole  contracts. 

An  oral  contract  has  all  the  force  of  a  simple  written  con- 
tract, but  it  is  subject  to  difficulties  in  the  way  of  establishing 
or  proving  its  terms,  which  a  written  contract  is  comparatively 
free  from.  A  large  proportion  of  the  litigation  arising  from 
the  nonfulfillment  of  contracts  is  caused  by  a  failure  to  reduce 
the  terms  of  the  contract  to  writing. 

An  oral  or  written  contract  can  be  modified  by  subsequent 
agreements,  and  such  subsequent  agreements  become  a  part 
of  the  original  contract.  A  written  contract,  however,  has 
this  advantage  over  an  oral  contract :  It  is  presumed  in  law 
to  embody  all  understandings  and  agreements  made  at  the  time 
of,  or  previous  to.  the  signing  of  the  contract.  No  oral  evidence 
can  be  admitted  therefore  as  to  agreements  or  understandings 
made  at  the  time  of  the  written  agreement  or  antecedent 
thereto  which  would  modify  its  terms.  Evidence  will  be 
received,  however,  as  to  oral  or  written  agreements  made  sub- 
sequent to  the  signing .  of  the  written  contract  which  may 
modify  its  terms. 


38  LAW  OF  CONTKACTS. 

It  is  allowable,  however,  to  admit  testimony  as  to  oral 
agreements  or  understandings  made  prior  to, or  contemporaneous 
with,  the  signing  of  the  contract,  for  the  purpose  of  proving 
fraud  and  deception. 

Such  evidence  may  also  be  introduced  for  the  purpose  o£ 
proving  duress  or  mistake  in  the  drafting  of  the  contract. 
It  can  not  be  introduced  for  the  purpose  of  modifying  its 
terms,  since  it  must  be  assumed  that  all  the  essential  or 
material  matters  in  the  agreement  were  embodied  in  the  written 
contract. 

Subsequent  oral  or  written  agreement  modifying  the  terms 
of  the  original  contract  requires  a  separate  and  distinct  consid- 
eration to  support  it,  unless  the  original  contract  contained 
special  provision  for  such  changes,  in  which  case  they  must  be 
made  in  accordance  therewith,  and  may  or  may  not  require  a 
new  consideration. 


ASSIGNMENTS  OF  CONTRACTS. 

30.  When  Assignments  Can  Be  Made.  All  con- 
tracts and  agreements  can  in  general  be  assigned  by  either 
party,  and  the  contract  enforced  by  the  assignee,  except  such 
contracts  or  agreements  as  involve  a  personal  trust  or  confi- 
dence in  one  or  both  of  the  parties.  Evidently  trust  and  confi- 
dence in  the  skill  or  professional  ability  of  another  can  not  be 
assigned,  and  when  such  trust  is  a  material  element  in  the  con- 
tract there  can  be  no  assignment.  Of  such  character  are  nearly 
all  kinds  of  personal  services,  except,  perhaps,  the  most  com- 
mon labor. 

All  building  and  engineering  contracts  are  assignable, 
unless  the  writings  themselves  contain  conditions  denying  such 
privilege.  It  is,  however,  common  to  insert  such  a  clause  in 
all  engineering  contracts  by  which  they  then  become  non- 
assignable. 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  THE  CONTRACT.         39 

31.    Notice  of  Assignment  Necessary.    While  an 

assignment  is  effectual  as  between  the  assignor  and  assignee, 
from  the  moment  it  is  made,  it  does  not  bind  the  other  party  to 
the  original  contract  until  he  has  received  notice  of  the  assign- 
ment. Without  such  notice  any  performance  on  his  part  in 
favor  of  the  original  party  or  assignor  releases  him  to  that  extent 
with  the  assignee.  It  is  necessary,  therefore,  to  give  prompt 
notice  of  all  assignments  to  all  the  parties  concerned.  After 
such  notice  has  been  given,  a-11  parties  become  bound  to  the 
assignee,  the  same  as  they  had  formerly  been  to  the  assignor. 

An  exception  to  the  rule  of  the  necessity  of  giving  notice 
obtains  in  the  case  of  what  is  called  negotiable  paper.  The 
transfer  of  such  contracts  is  not  called  assignment,  the  docu- 
ment itself  carrying  with  it  its  own  evidence  of  ownership. 
Such  documents  are  bills  of  exchange,  bank  checks,  promissory 
notes,  bills  of  lading,  certificates  of  deposit,  certain  kinds  of 
bonds  and  coupons,  warehouse  receipts,  and  bank  bills. 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  THE  CONTRACT. 

32.  The  Original  Contract.  An  original  written  con- 
tract is  presumed  to  embody  all  the  agreements  made  at,  or 
previous  to,  the  time  of  its  signing.  No  oral  evidence  will  be 
admitted  to  explain  or  supplement  the  terms  expressed  in  the 
written  contract,  provided  these  are  clear  and  plain.  It  is  per- 
missible, however,  to  modify  the  terms  of  any  written  contract 
by  subsequent  oral  or  written  agreements.  It  is  also  permissible 
to  submit  evidence  as  to  contemporaneous  oral  agreements 
which  supplement  or  explain  the  terms  imposed  in  the  contract, 
provided  these  be  not  inconsistent  with  the  terms  of  the  written 
document. 

Oral  evidence  is  also  admissible  to  explain  the  identity  of 
the  parties,  or  the  existence  of  an  agency,  the  identity  of  the 


40  LAW   OF    CONTRACTS. 

subject-matter,  and  the  sense  in  which  certain  unusual  or  tech- 
nical words  have  been  used. 

Oral  evidence  is  also  admissible  to  explain  any  latent 
ambiguity  in  the  instrument,  as  where  more  than  one  mean- 
ing may  be  given  to  a  word  or  phrase ;  but  in  the  case  of  a 
patent  ambiguity,  that  is  to  say,  an  ambiguity  apparent  on  the 
face  of  the  instrument  itself,  and  which  is  meaningless  without 
oral  explanation,  such  an  ambiguity  will  make  the  contract 
void. 

33.  The  Explanation  of  Technical  Terms  in  Con- 
tracts. In  all  cases  where  either  common  or  uncommon 
words  are  used  in  a  technical  sense,  or  in  a  sense  peculiar  to  a 
given  trade  or  business,  in  which  custom  has  given  to  such 
expressions  particular  and  definite  meanings,  oral  testimony  can 
be  received  for  the  purpose  of  explaining  the  real  meaning  of 
such  terms.  Furthermore,  the  meaning  which  the  law  will 
enforce  is  that  which  such  a  term  has  in  that  neighborhood,  or 
with  the  parties  to  the  contract.  In  such  cases  the  common 
usage  or  custom  will  fix  the  meaning  of  the  technical  words 
used. 

In  other  cases  oral  evidence  may  be  introduced  to  explain 
the  real  meaning  of  a  contract,  where  custom  or  usage  caused 
the  meaning  to  be  clear  to  the  parties  themselves  when  the 
contract  was  signed,  but  which  would  not  be  understood  by 
strangers  to  such  usages. 

In  order  that  a  contract  may  be  interpreted  in  the  light  of 
custom  or  usage,  such  custom  or  usage  must  be  certain,  defi- 
nite, and  uniform  in  that  district,  or  between  the  parties  to  the 
contract.  Unless  it  is  a  universal  'custom  or  usage  as  between 
the  parties,  it  can  not  be  received  as  positive  evidence  of  mean- 
ing. Furthermore  such  custom  and  usage  must  have  been 
continuous  and  uninterrupted  up  to  and  including  the  time  of 
the  transaction  in  question.  Thus  one  or  more  acts  do  not 


CONSTRUCTION  OF  THE  CONTRACT.         41 

establish  a  custom  as  between  the  parties,  and  a  few  illustra- 
tive examples  will  not  serve  to  establish  a  usage. 

Wheri  the  explanation  rests  upon  usage  in  the  neighbor- 
hood, such  usage  must  be  general  and  a  knowledge  of  it  must 
be  common,  so  that  it  may  have  been  presumed  to  have  been 
known  to  the  parties  to  the  contract. 

Such  custom  or  usage  must  be  reasonable,  and  must  have 
been  generally  assented  to,  and  complied  with  without  protest, 
in  order  to  become  binding  in  explaining  the  terms  of  a  contract. 

Such  custom  or  usage,  also,  must  not  be  repugnant  to  any 
of  the  express  terms  of  the  contract  itself,  neither  must  it  con- 
travene a  state  statute,  city  ordinance,  or  conflict  with  the  law 
of  public  policy. 

34.    Rules  of  Construction. 

1.  The  first  and  principal  rule  to  be  followed  in  the  con- 
struction of  contracts  is   to   ascertain   the   real   intention   of  the 
parties  at  the  time  the  contract  was  signed.     In  fact  all  rules 
are  merged  in  this  one,  and  have  for  their  object  the   determi- 
nation of  the  original  real  meaning  of  the  document. 

2.  In  arriving  at  this  real  meaning,  the  words  used   must 
be  understood  in  their   ordinary    and  popular   meaning,  when 
these  do  not  have  a  technical    significance,    as   indicated  in   the 
previous  article.      In  all  other  cases,  the    language   is  supposed 
to  mean  what  it  would  ordinarily  be  understood  to   mean  under 
the  given  circumstances  of  time  and  place,  and  as  between  the 
given  parties. 

3.  Furthermore  the  whole  instrument  must  be  looked  to, 
and  all    the    terms    thereof    made    effective    if   possible.      The 
whole    instrument  will    be    construed,  also,    in   construing   any 
latent  ambiguity  which  may  pertain  to  any  given  part.     Where 
more  than  one  document  enters  into  a  general   agreement  they 
shall   all  be  taken  into  account  in  the  construction  of  the  entire 


42  LAW   OF   CONTRACTS. 

contract.  Words  may  be  wholly  rejected  which  are  inconsist- 
ent with  the  manifest  intention  of  the  parties. 

If  a  portion  of  the  contract  is  printed  and  other  portions 
written,  the  latter  will  take  precedence  over  the  former,  when 
they  are  found  to  conflict. 

Where  both  general  and  specific  terms  have  been  used  in 
describing  the  same  thing,  the  agreement  will  be  limited  to  the 
scope  of  the  more  specific  terms,  and  may  not  be  applied  to  the 
more  general. 

Doubtful  words  will  be  construed  more  strongly  against 
the  party  who  used  them.  This  is  based  on  the  principle  that 
a  man  is  responsible  for  ambiguities  in  his  own  expressions. 
Thus  a  deed  is  construed  most  strongly^  against  the  grantor, 
and  a  clause  in  a  promissory  note  will  be  construed  most 
strongly  against  the  maker.  Such  a  prejudice,  however,  is 
exercised  against  either  party,  if  possible  to  avoid  it. 


CONTRACTS  REQUIRED  TO  BE  IN  WRITING. 

35.  The  Statute  of  Frauds.  In  the  year  1676  the 
English  Parliament  passed  "An  act  for  the  prevention  of  frauds 
and  perjuries"  which  has  become  common  law  for  this  country 
where  it  is  not  replaced  by  statutes  in  the  various  states  cover- 
ing the  same  ground.  In  either  case  where  reference  is  had  to 
the  original  English  enactment  or  to  the  corresponding  statutes 
in  the  various  states,  this  law  is  commonly  referred  to  as  the 
"Statute  of  Frauds."  The  object  of  such  a  law  is  to  prevent 
litigation  and  fraud  by  requiring  certain  kinds  of  contracts  to  be 
in  writing.  These  in  general  relate  to  the  official  acts  of  exec- 
utors or  administrators,  marriage  contracts,  to  the  sale  and 
transfer  of  real  estate,  to  agreements  which  can  not  be  per- 
formed inside  of  one  year,  and  other  contracts  for  the  sale  of 
goods,  wares,  and  merchandise  of  a  value  greater  than  $50. 


CONTRACTS   REQUIRED  TO  BE  IN   WRITING.  43 

As  only  the  last  two  of  these  pertain  to  the  character  of  the 
present  work  they  alone  will  be  discussed  here. 

36.  Agreements  Which  Can  Not  Be  Performed 
within  One  Year.     The  English  statute  provides   that   "no 
action  shall  be  brought  whereby  to  charge  any  person  upon  any 
agreement  that  is  not  to  be  performed   within   the  space  of  one 
year  from    the    making   thereof,    unless  the    agreement    upon 
which  such  action  shall   be   brought,  or  some   memorandum  or 
note  thereof,  shall  be  in  writing  and   signed   by  the  party  to  be 
charged  therewith,  or  some  other  person  thereunto  by  him  law- 
fully authorized."     That  is  to  say,   contracts  which  can  not  be 
performed  within  one  year   from   the  date   thereof   must  be  in 
writing.      This  is  construed  as  meaning  that  the  necessity  for  a 
written  contract  only  holds   when   the   performance   within  one 
year  is  demonstrably  impossible.      If  by  any   possibility  it  may 
be  fully  performed  within  one  year,  an  oral  contract  is  valid. 

Thus  a  contract  for  a  year's  service,  to  be  entered  upon  at 
a  future  time,  can  not  be  performed  within  one  year,  and  hence 
must  be  in  writing.  Or  in  the  absence  of  a  written  contract  to 
this  effect  an  oral  agreement  can  not  be  enforced,  and  either 
party  is  at  liberty  to  annul  the  contract  at  pleasure.  Where 
services  have  been  rendered,  however,  under  an  oral  contract 
which  by  this  clause  ought  to  have  been  in  writing,  the  party 
benefited  must  pay  for  them. 

Thus,  also,  a  contract  for  the  carrying  out  of  any  engi- 
neering construction,  if  it  plainly  can  not  be  completed  within 
one  year,  is  not  binding,  unless  it  be  in  writing. 

37.  Contracts  of  Sale  Where  the  Value  Is  More 

than  $50.  Another  clause  in  the  same  original  English  stat- 
ute reads  as  follows:  "No  contract  for  the  sale  of  any  goods, 
wares  or  merchandise,  for  the  price  of  ten  pounds  sterling  or 
upwards,  shall  be  allowed  to  be  good;  except  the  buyer  shall 
accept  part  of  the  goods  so  sold,  and  actually  receive  the  same, 


44  LAW   OF   CONTKACTS. 

or  give  something  in  earnest  to  bind  the  bargain,  or  in  part  of 
payment,  or  that  some  note  or  memorandum  in  writing  of  said 
bargain  be  made,  and  signed  by  the  parties  to  be  charged  by 
such  contract  or  their  agents  thereunto  lawfully  authorized." 

Similar  statutes  have  been  enacted  in  this  country  in  which 
the  limit  of  the  value  of  the  goods  sold  is  usually  placed  at  $50, 
while  in  Maine  and  in  New  Jersey  it  is  placed  at  $30. 
For  all  values  over  these  amounts  the  contracts  must  be  in 
writing  or,  as  stated  in  the  statutes,  the  buyer  must  give  proof 
of  his  agreement  by  accepting  and  receiving  a  portion  of  the 
same  or  by  part  payment  for  the  same. 

It  must  be  noted,  however,  that  a  contract  for  labor  is  not 
included  in  the  statute.  The  limit  of  value  here  used  applies 
not  to  individual  articles  but  to  the  sum  total  of  the  articles 
named  in  the  transaction. 


SUBSEQUENT    CHANGES    AND    AGREEMENTS. 

38.  The  General  Rule.  In  general  any  oral  or  written 
agreement  may  be  altered  at  pleasure  after  it  has  been  signed, 
when  this  is  done  by  mutual  consent.  Alterations  made  at  the 
time  of,  or  previous  to,  the  signing  of  the  instrument  become 
elements  in  the  original  contract. 

Any  change  by  mutual  consent  in  the  terms  of  an  agree- 
ment after  it  has  been  signed  makes  a  new  contract  out  of  the 
original  agreement,  and  because  of  this  a  surety  or  a  third  party 
to  the  agreement  not  consenting  to  the  change  is  released  from 
all  obligation.  The  new  contract  remains  good  as  to  those  who 
consent  to  the  change.  In  the  case  of  engineering  contracts 
where  it  is  common  to  have  sureties  or  bondsmen  who  guar- 
antee faithful  performance,  such  sureties  must  always  be  con- 
sulted and  their  consent  obtained  to  any  material  change  in  the 


SUBSEQUENT   CHANGES  AND   AGREEMENTS.  45 

original  contract  which  may  be  mutually  agreed  on  by  the 
principals.  In  default  of  such  reference  and  consent  on  the 
part  of  the  sureties,  they  become  discharged  from  all  liability. 

Even  though  the  written  contract  has  a  clause  forbidding 
any  oral  alteration  in  it,  and  declaring  that  no  change  shall  be 
made  in  it  except  in  writing,  such  a  provision  is  void,  and  the 
contract  may  be  altered  by  oral  agreement  notwithstanding. 
This  is  because  in  law  oral  and  written  agreements  are  of  the 
same  class,  both  being  simple  or  parole  contracts,  and  hence 
are  of  equal  force  and  effect.  An  agreement  in  writing,  there- 
fore, b}*  the  parties,  to  forfeit  their  legal  rights,  does  not  operate 
to  change  the  law  in  this  respect,  and  their  rights  can  not  be 
forfeited  by  such  an  agreement.  One  of  these  rights  is  the 
privilege  of  modifying  the  contract  by  oral  agreement. 

Where  contracts  are  illegal  except  when  they  are  in  writ- 
ing, as  under  the  Statute  of  Frauds,  it  follows  that  such  a 
written  contract  can  not  be  modified  by  oral  agreement,  since 
this  would  circumvent  the  law  as  applied  to  such  cases.  This 
also  applies  to  promissory  notes  and  other  commercial  paper. 
Oral  agreements  in  regard  to  them  are  invalid,  as  they  would 
work  injustice  to  innocent  parties. 

Written  contracts  executed  under  seal,  not  required  by  law 
to  be  so,  may  be  modified  or  altered  by  either  written  or  oral 
agreements,  but  when  this  is  done  the  w7hole  contract  is  reduced 
to  the  force  and  significance  of  a  simple  or  parole  agreement, 
and  no  longer  remains  a  specialty. 

Furthermore  this  can  only  be  done  in  the  case  of  a  sealed 
contract,  when  the  new  agreement  or  alteration  rests  upon  a 
new  and  separate  consideration.  Where  the  seal  is  required 
by  law,  alterations  must  also  be  made  under  seal.  If,  how- 
ever, all  the  parties  to  the  original  agreement  are  together,  and 
the  instrument  is  changed  by  the  principals  who  signed  and 
sealed  it,  in  the  presence  of  all,  .and  with  the  consent  of  all, 
the  alterations  are  valid. 


46  LAW   OF   CONTRACTS. 

39.     Results  of  Alterations  of  the  Contract.  This 

is  one  of  the  most  important  subjects  connected  with  the  execu- 
tion of  engineering  work.  Very  seldom  is  an,engineering  or 
architectural  project  constructed  strictly  in  accordance  with  the 
original  plans  and  specifications.  Usually  the  contract  itself 
provides  for  changes  in  plans  and  specifications,  and  in  general 
changes  must  be  made  in  accordance  with  such  provisions.* 

While  the  court  decisions  are  extremely  various  and  fre- 
quently directly  opposed  to  each  other  in  their  enforcements  of 
contracts  which  have  been  changed  more  or  less  after  they  have 
been  signed,  it  is  thought  the  following  is  a  fair  interpretation 
of  the  intent  of  most  of  the  authorities  in  passing  on  such  cases. 

(a)  Changes  in  the  contract  will  not  operate  to  annul  the 
original  contract  unless  such  was  the  plain  intent  of  the  parties, 
and  so  long  as  any  portion  of  the  original  contract  may  fairly 
be  construed  as  remaining  in  force. f 

(£)  In  general,  every  change  made  in  a  contract  after  it 
has  been  signed,  should  be  based  on  some  kind  of  a  legal  con- 
sideration. Thus,  if  a  change  is  made  which  involves  an  addi- 
tion to  the  cost  of  the  work,  it  should  be  accompanied  and  sus- 
tained by  a  corresponding  increase  in  the  compensation  or 
price,  or  by  a  corresponding  reduction  in  some  other  part  of 
the  work,  or  by  a  corresponding  accommodation  of  some  char- 
acter in  favor  of  the  other  party,  which  may  be  construed  as  a 
consideration  for  the  change  made.  Otherwise  the  change 
agreed  upon  can  not  be  enforced. 

(c)  Similarly,  if  the  parties  agree  to  a  less  performance 
than  that  required  by  the  contract,  unless  there  be  also  a  corre- 
sponding reduction  made  in  the  price,  or  some  other  accommo- 
dation to  the  other  party,  which  may  be  construed  as  a  consid- 

*One  exception  to  this  rule  is  given  in  the  previous  article,  where  the  contract  pro- 
vides that  changes  shall  be  made  only  in  writing. 

fit  is  sometimes  expressly  stipulated  in  the  original  specifications  that  subsequent 
changes  shall  not  operate  to  annul  those  portions  of  the  contract  with  which  these 
changes  are  not  in  conflict. 


SUBSEQUENT   CHANGES  AND    AGREEMENTS.  47 

eration,  the  agreement  can  not  be  enforced  against  the  party 
making  the  concession.  He  is  at  liberty  to  change  his  mind. 

(r/)  In  such  changes  as  are  mentioned  in  (3)  and  (c)  the 
law  will  not  inquire  particularly  as  to  the  adequacy  of  the  con- 
sideration, so  long  as  a  legal  consideration  may  be  shown  to 
exist. 

(2)  An  apparent  exception  to  the  above  rules  of  con- 
struction is  that  in  which  the  original  contract  provides  for 
changes  to  be  made  in  a  specific  manner,  and  without  further 
consideration.  Thus  it  is  sometimes  specified  and  agreed  upon 
that  the  character  of  the  materials  or  the  methods  described  in 
the  original  contract  may  be  changed  at  the  pleasure  of  the 
engineer  or  architect,  without  further  consideration.  In  this 
case  any  change  made  consistent  with  this  provision  would  not 
be  regarded  as  a  new  contract,  but  simply  as  a  sort  of  construc- 
tion of  the  old  agreement.  Under  such  a  clause,  however,  the 
law  would  not  allow  a  gross  injustice  to  be  worked  against  the 
contractor  in  the  way  of  violent  changes  which  would  greatly 
increase  the  cost  of  the  work,  and  which  evidently  were  not 
anticipated  by  the  parties  to  the  contract  at  the  time  it  was 
signed. 

(y)  In  all  cases  where  changes  have  been  made  in  a  coi\j- 
tract.  if  such  changes  involve  an  increase  in  the  time  required 
for  performance,  the  date  of  completion  of  the  work  fixed  by 
the  original  contract  will  be  extended  by  the  courts  for  a  period 
sufficient  to  cover  the  additional  time  required  for  the  changes 
made.  This  the  courts  will  do  whether  such  extension  of  time 
be  provided  for,  either  in  the  original  contract,  or  in  the  subse- 
quent agreement. 

(£•)  It  is  customary  to  include  in  the  original  specifica- 
tions a  clause  describing  the  manner  in  which  all  changes  in 
plans  and  specifications  may  be  made,  and  the  compensation 
for  the  same  determined.  In  this  case  changes  in  the  contract 
must  be  made  in  accordance  with  such  provision,  and  such 


48  JAW    OF   CONTKACTS. 

changes,  when  so  made,  are  binding  upon  the  contractor, 
whether  he  consent  or  not.  They  might  operate,  however,  to 
release  the  bondsmen. 

(^)  All  contracts,  except  those  required  by  law  to  be  in 
writing,  whether  sealed  or  unsealed,  can  be  modified  by  oral 
as  well  as  by  written  subsequent  agreement,  regardless  of  any 
provision  to  the  contrary  in  the  body  of  the  original  contract. 


DISCHARGE  OF  CONTRACTS. 

40.  Methods    Of   Discharge.     Any  contract  entered 
into  in  any   of   the    methods    heretofore    indicated    may  be  dis- 
charged and  the  parties  thereto  freed  from  all  obligations  there- 
under, in  any  one  of   the   following  ways:      I.   By  agreement. 
2.   By  performance.      3.   By  impossibility  of    performance.     4. 
By  operation  of  law.      5.   By  breach. 

41.  Discharge  by  Agreement.    Any  contract  which 
has  been  entered   into  by  mutual  agreement  may  evidently  by 
mutual  agreement  be  dissolved.     This   may  be  done,    (#)   by 
a  waiver  or  cancellation,  (<5)  by  a  substituted  agreement  between 
the  parties,  or  of  the  contract,  (c)  by  a  condition  in  the  contract 
itself. 

(«)  An  agreement  to  discharge  the  contract  must  be 
supported  .by  a  consideration  the  same  as  any  other  agreement. 
The  usual  consideration  in  this  case  is  the  mutual  release  from 
liabilities  under  the  original  contract. 

(£)  A  contract  may  be  discharged  by  the  substitution 
therefor  of  a  new  agreement,  the  consideration  in  this  case 
being  as  before  the  mutual  discharge  of  obligation  under  the 
previous  agreement.  This  new  agreement  may  be  either  oral 
or  written,  and  it  will  serve  to  replace  or  rescind  the  previous 
agreement  if  such  were  the  intention  of  the  parties.  This  is 


DISCHARGE    OF   CONTRACTS.  49 

true  whether  the  original  agreement  was  a  sealed  contract  or 
simply  a  parole  agreement.  If,  however,  the  original  contract 
was  required  by  law  to  be  in  writing  so  must  also  the  new  con- 
tract which  replaces  it. 

The  rescission  of  the  former  contract  may  be  implied,  as 
where  the  terms  of  the  latter  agreement  conflict  with  those  of 
the  old,  the  later  agreement  taking  precedence  and  discharging 
the  former.  The  intention  to  discharge  the  former,  however, 
must  be  clearly  implied  from  its  being  the  only  rational 
assumption  in  the  premises. 

The  contract  may  be  rescinded  by  the  substitution  of  a 
new  party  to  it  in  place  of  one  of  the  original  parties.  This 
may  be  done  only  where  all  parties  to  the  contract  are  agreed, 
this  agreement  being  either  express,  or  implied  by  subsequent 
acts. 

(c)  The  contract  may  contain  a  provision  for  its  own 
discharge  on  the  happening  of  some  event  or  contingency. 
This  contingency  may  be  the  nonfulfillment  of  some  specific 
clause  in  the  contract  itself,  or  on  the  occurrence  of  some  par- 
ticular event,  or  on  the  exercise  by  one  of  the  parties  of  an 
option  to  determine  it.  When  the  event  transpires  which 
forms  the  condition  of  the  discharge,  the  contract  is  thereupon 
rescinded. 

Engineering  contracts  sometimes  contain  a  clause  to  the 
effect  that  the  work  may  be  stopped  at  any  time  with  a  specified 
notice  at  the  option  of  the  party  paying  for  the  same. 

42.    Discharge  by  Performance.    The  usual  method 

of  discharging  a  contract  is  by  each  party  fully  performing  the 
duties  prescribed  for  him  in  the  agreement.  In  this  case  the 
performance  by  each  party  must  be  strictly  in  accordance  with 
the  terms  of  the  contract. 

In  engineering  work  it  is  seldom  that  the  work  is  done  in 
all  details  strictly  in  accordance  with  the  plans  and  specifica- 


50  LAW   OF    CONTRACTS. 

tions,  or  with  such  plans  as  authoritatively  modified  by  the 
engineer.  While  in  law  the  contract  requires  a  strict  and  full 
compliance  with  all  the  terms  of  the  agreement,  yet  in  equity  a 
substantial  compliance  is  accepted  in  place  of  a  full  and  com- 
plete performance.  Also  in  equity  an  imperfect  compliance  is 
often  taken  as  a  discharge  of  the  contract  subject  to  such  dam- 
ages as  would  equitably  compensate  for  the  degree  of  failure 
to  fully  and  completely  satisfy  the  agreement. 

One  of  the  essential  requirements  of  the  contract  is  the 
time  specified  for  the  completion  of  the  work,  when  this  is  so 
named  in  the  agreement.  When  no  time  limit  is  mentioned  in 
the  agreement,  the  element  of  time  is  not  deemed  to  be  of  the 
essence  of  the  contract,  but  performance  will  be  required 
within  a  reasonable  time.  When  a  specific  time  or  date  is 
given  for  completion,  a  court  of  equity  will  examine  as  to 
whether  the  intent  of  the  parties  was  to  determine  in  a  general 
way  the  time  when  performance  was  expected  or  whether  such 
limit  was  intended  to  be  a  specific  and  essential  part  of  the 
contract.  If  the  former  meaning  is  imposed  no  relief  can  be 
had  in  equity  for  nonperformance  within  the  specified  time. 

43.    Performance  on  Conditional  Promises.    In 

engineering  contracts  performance  on  the  part  of  the  owner  is 
usually  conditioned  on  a  previous  performance  on  the  part  of 
the  contractor.  On  the  other  hand,  the  owner  sometimes 
agrees  to  make  payments,  for  instance,  at  specified  stages  of 
the  work,  in  such  a  way  that  further  performance  on  the  part 
of  the  .contractor  may  be  conditioned  on  the  making  of  such 
payments  at  the  times  specified.  Performance  may  also  be 
conditioned  in  various  other  ways,  as  after  the  lapse  of  a  certain 
time,  or  upon  the  occurrence  of  a  particular  event  or  contin- 
gency which  may  be  uncertain,  or  on  the  acts  of  a  third  party, 
or  even  on  the  will  of  the  promisor.  In  this  last  case  it  is 
really  no  contract  at  all,  so  far  as  the  promisor  is  concerned. 
That  is  to  say,  while  he  can  enforce  it  against  the  other  party, 


DISCHARGE   OF   CONTRACTS.  51 

the  other  party  can  not  enforce  it  against  him.  Such  a  case  as 
this  last  is  where  one  party  agrees  to  do  work  to  another's  satis- 
faction. Here  the  party  performing  the  work  is  wholly  at  the 
mercy  of  the  party  to  be  satisfied,  and  the  plea  of  dissatisfaction 
relieves  him  from  liability.  Evidently  no  person  should  place 
himself  thus  at  the  mercy  of  another,  unless  he  can  rely  implic- 
itly upon  the  good  faith  of  the  other  party. 

A  common  instance  of  the  operation  of  a  "condition  pre- 
cedent" with  reference  to  a  third  party  is  where  a  contractor 
binds  himself  to  receive  payments  on  a  building  or  engineering 
work  only  on  the  certificate  of  the  architect  or  engineer.  With- 
out such  certificate  which  forms  a  "condition  precedent"  the 
owner  is  not  obliged  to  make  payment.  Before  the  contractor 
can  force  the  owner  to  pay  him  for  his  work,  in  the  absence  of 
such  a  certificate  from  the  architect  or  engineer,  he  must  be 
able  to  prove  that  the  architect  or  engineer  has  acted  fraudu- 
lently in  withholding  the  certificate,  or  that  he  has  acted  under 
gross  mistake,  and  in  bad  faith,  or  has  negligently  refused  to 
honestly  examine  the  work.  As  this  is,  of  course,  very  difficult 
to  establish,  the  refusal  of  the  architect  or  engineer  to  give  such 
certificate  commonly  acts  as  a  bar  to  payment  under  the  terms 
of  the  contract. 

Also  where  the  quality  or  quantity  of  the  work  to  be  done 
is,  by  the  terms  of  the  contract,  to  be  left  to  the  approval  of  a 
third  person,  such  as  the  engineer,  his  decision  in  the  premises 
is  binding  upon  both  the  parties. 

The  agreement  may  be  conditioned  upon  a  notice  being 
given  to  the  promisor,  as -where  the  engineer  is  required  to  give 
notice  to  the  contractor  to  begin  work  at  a  certain  time.  In 
this  case  the  proof  of  having  given  such  notice  is  necessary  to 
the  enforcement  of  the  contract. 

44.  Discharge  by  Payment.  The  discharge  of  a 
contract  by  full  payment  of  money  due  upon  it  requires  no 


52  LAW   OF   CONTRACTS . 

further  comment  in  this  connection.  This  subject  is  further 
amplified  in  the  works  on  the  "Law  of  Contracts,"  but  it  is 
not  necessary  to  elaborate  it  here. 

45.  Discharge  by  Tender.     When  the  performance 
of  a  contract  is  frustrated  or  prevented  by  the  act  of  the  party 
to  whom  the  performance    is    due    the    offering   to  perform  is 
called  a  tender.     As  applied  to  engineering    contracts,  if   the 
contractor    is    prevented    from   performance  by  the  owner,  the 
latter  subjects  himself  to  liability  on  a  suit   for   damages  sus- 
tained by  the  contractor  by  not  being  allowed   to  perform.     In 
other  words,  the  owner  breaks  the  contract  by  his  refusal  and 
subjects  himself  to  a  suit  for  damages,  the  same  as  in  any  other 
case  of  breach  of  contract,  while  the  contractor  stands  released 
from  all  further  obligation  under  the  contract,  his  tender  being 
construed  as- performance  so  far  as  he  is  concerned. 

46.  Kinds  of  Impossibility  Which  Will  Discharge 
a  Contract.      An  agreement  between  parties  to  do  what  both 
know  to  be  impossible  is  discharged  when  their  knowledge  of 
such    impossibility    is    shown,    but  where   the   impossibility  is 
known  only  to  one  of  the  parties,   he  is  liable  for  damages  to 
the  party  to  whom  it  is  unknown. 

Where  the  subject-matter  is  nonexistent,  or  has  ceased  to 
exist,  the  impossibility  of  performance  results  from  a  mutual 
mistake  of  fact,  and  the  contract,  is  discharged. 

Where  performance  is  rendered  impossible  by  what  is 
called  in  law  "an  act  of  God  or  of  the  public  enemy"  the  party 
so  contracting  is  excused.  By  "an  act  of  God"  as  used  in  law 
as  discharging  a  contract  is  meant  a  manifestation  of  the  powers 
of  nature  over  which  man  has  no  control,  such  as  fires  caused 
by  lightning  (but  not  by  accident  or  other  cause),  winds, 
floods,  sickness  and  the  like.  In  the  performance  of  engineer- 
ing contracts  unusual  difficulties  will  not  be  placed  in  this  cate- 


DISCHARGE   OF   CONTRACTS.  53 

gory,   so    long   as   they   are    by   any  possibility  under  human 
control. 

While  as  stated  above  an  "act  of  God  or  of  the  public 
enemy"  making  performance  impossible,  will  discharge  a  con- 
tract, yet  it  must  be  clearly  shown  that  such  "act  of  God  or  of 
the  public  enemy"  did  in  fact  render  the  performance  quite 
impossible,  and  not  simply  difficult  or  expensive.  Thus  if 
wind,  flood,  or  lightning  should  destroy  a  partly  completed 
engineering  work,  if  it  were  possible  to  re-erect  it  within  the 
time  specified,  the  contractor  would  be  held  to  full  performance. 

47.  Kinds  of  So-called  Impossibilities  Which 
Will  Not  Discharge  the  Contract.  "When  a  person  con- 
tracts to  do  a  given  act  he  pledges  himself  as  having  the  capac- 
ity to  do  it,  and  assumes  the  risk  of  being  prevented  from  per- 
forming his  contract  by  obstacles  or  accidents  ;  against  obstacles 
or  accidents  that  may  interfere  with  performance  ^£  should  pro- 
tect himself  by  contract.  Having  presumed  generally  to  do  a 
thing  he  can  not  allege  that  difficulties  and  obstacles  prevented 
him  from  fulfilling  his  contract,  although  they  did  in  fact  render 
the  doing  of  the  thing  by  him  impossible.  He  is  bound  to  do 
whatever  is  within  the  scope  of  any  -human  being  to  accom- 
plish." 

From  the  above  which  is  quoted  from  Judge  Amos  Thayer, 
of  the  United  States  Court  of  Appeals,  it  is  evident  that  if  a 
contractor  wishes  to  obtain  release  from  full  and  complete  per- 
formance for  certain  contingencies,  as  for  instance,  inability  to 
obtain  material,  or  to  place  sub-contracts,  or  to  get  the  sub- 
contractors to  comply  with  their  agreement,  or  to  provide 
against  labor  strikes,  whether  in  the  trades  or  on  the  railroads, 
or  against  the  inclemencies  of  the  weather  which  might  make 
performance  within  the  time  difficult  and  very  expensive,  or 
against  any  other  of  the  extraordinary  contingencies  which  may 
arise  to  prevent  performance  except  at  great  loss,  he  must 
evidently  provide  protection  for  himself  in  the  body  of  the  con- 


54  LAW   OF   CONTRACTS, 

tract.'  In  the  absence  of  such  a  protection  and  under  a  simple 
agreement  to  perform  certain  work  within  a  certain  time,  the 
law  will  hold  him  to  a  strict  compliance,  so  long  as  suck  com- 
pliance lies  'within  the  realm  of  human  possibility,  regardless 
of  expense. 

48.  Discharge  of  Contract  by  Operation  of  Law. 

There  are  various  methods  by  which  a  contract  may  be  dis- 
charged through  the  operation  of  the  law,  as  for  instance,  by 
merging  one  contract  into  another,  by  a  fraudulent  alteration 
of  the  written  agreement,  by  the  bankruptcy  of  one  of  the  par- 
ties, or  by  death.  In  the  case  of  the  death  of  one  of  the  parties, 
the  contract  is  discharged  only  when  this  is  made  a  condition 
in  the  contract,  or  when  performance  thus  becomes  impossible. 
It  will  become  impossible  when  the  performance  is  required  to 
be  of  a  personal  character,  as  contracts  for  services,  or  such  as 
require  professional  skill,  marriage  contracts,  and  the  like. 

49.  Discharge    of  Contract  by  Breach.    While 
any  material  breach  of  the  contract  on  the  part  of  either  of  the 
parties  furnishes  a  right  of  action  to  the  injured  party,  it  is  only 
in  exceptional  cases  that  such   a  breach   operates  to  discharge 
fully  the  other  party  from  his   obligations.     The  contract  will 
be  discharged  as  to  the  injured  party  by  a  breach  by  the  other 
party: 

(#)  When  one  of  the  parties  announces  his  positive 
renunciation  of  the  contract,  whether  this  be  previous  to  a  par- 
tial performance,  or  after  a  partial  performance.  In  this  case 
the  injured  party  is  entirely  relieved  from  further  obligation,  or 
in  other  words,  the  contract  is  discharged.  Suit  may  at  once 
be  entered  for  damages.  When  the  renunciation  is  only  par- 
tial, and  does  not  affect  a  vital  portion  of  the  agreement,  the 
contract  remains  in  force,  but  a  suit  for  damages  will  lie.  The 
injured  party  is,  however,  not  bound  to  treat  a  formal  renunci- 


DISCHAKGE   OF   CONTRACTS.  55 

ation  as  a  breach  of  contract,   but  may   insist  on   performance 
until  the  specified  time  has  elapsed. 

(£)  By  one  of  the  parties  making  it  impossible  for  him 
to  perform  his  agreement.  When  this  impossibility  ot  per- 
formance comes  to  the  knowledge  of  the  other  party,  he  may 
at  once  consider  the  contract  discharged,  and  may  enter  suit 
for  damages. 

(c)  By  such  a  failure  to  perform  in  case  of  a  "condition 
precedent"  or  failure  which  goes  so  to  the  root  of  the  matter 
that  a  recovery  of  damages  would  not  satisfy  the  agreement. 
When  the  performance  of  one  of  the  parties  is  clearly  made  a 
"condition  precedent"  to  performance  on  the  part  of  the 
other,  a  failure  to  substantially  perform  on  the  part  of  the  one 
operates  to  discharge  the  contract  as  to  the  other. 

In  engineering  contracts  a  "condition  precedent"  to  the 
final  payment  on  the  part  of  the  owner  is  usually  the  certificate 
of  performance  to  be  given  by  the  engineer  or  architect,  he 
being  a  third  party,  and  not  one  of  the  principals  to  the  agree- 
ment. In  this  case  a  failure  to  give  such  certificate  does  not 
operate  to  discharge  the  contract  between  the  principals,  but 
does  excuse  the  owner  from  making  a  final  payment  unless  it 
can  be  shown  that  the  engineer  or  architect  has  failed  to  per^. 
form  his  duties  in  this  respect. 

In  determining  whether  or  not  the  failure  to  perform  on 
the  part  of  the  contractor,  for  instance,  is  so  vital  as  to  operate 
to  discharge  the  contract  entirely  as  to  the  owner,  and  release 
him  from  all  obligation  to  pay  for  the  work  done,  we  may 
distinguish  between  divisible  and  entire  agreements.  A  con- 
tract or  agreement  may  be  considered  divisible,  when  a  fulfill- 
ment in  part  is  valuable  to  the  other  party  so  far  as  it  goes,  and 
when  a  failure  as  to  a  part  does  not  operate  to  destroy  the 
value  of  the  partial  performance.  Thus  a  contract  to  build 
two  houses  is  a  divisible  contract,  since  the  building  of  one 
would  be  a  satisfactory  performance  as  far  as  it  goes,  and  a 


56  LAW  OP  CONTRACTS. 

failure  to  build  the  second  would  not  operate  to  destroy  the 
value  of  the  first ;  whereas  a  contract  to  build  a  house  is  an 
entire  contract,  since  the  building  would  not  be  serviceable 
until  fully  completed. 

The  degree  of  failure  to  perform,  as  in  the  case  of  agree- 
ments by  contractors  and  builders,  which  will  operate  to  dis- 
charge a  contract  on  the  part  of  the  owner,  must  be  determined 
by  the  court  or  by  a  jury.  In  general  any  substantial  failure  to 
perform  an  indivisible  contract  will  operate  to  discharge  the 
contract.  If,  however,  the  work  done  or  goods  delivered  are 
accepted  and  used,  the  law  will  create  a  new  and  implied  con- 
tract on  the  part  of  the  recipient  and  beneficiary,  by  which  the 
party  supplying  the  service  or  goods  can  recover  a  fair  price 
for  the  same.  Such  recovery,  however,  not  being  under  the 
contract  or  in  accordance  with  its  terms. 

A  failure  in  minor  details  does  not,  as  a  rule,  discharge 
the  contract,  but  simply  furnishes  to  the  other  party  the  right 
to  obtain  damages  to  the  extent  of  the  failure.  It  is  very 
important  to  note,  however,  that  such  failures  which  give  to  the 
injured  party  only  the  right  to  recover  damages  must  be  in  their 
nature  insignificant,  and  of  small  relative  importance,  not  in 
any  sense  going  to  the  root  of  the  matter  or  affecting  the  value 
of  the  parts  which  have  been  satisfactorily  performed.  The 
law  is  very  severe  in  enforcing  agreements  literally  and  fully, 
especially  where  departures  have  been  made  intentionally  and 
perhaps  against  the  protest  of  the  other  party.  In  such  cases 
even  small  failures  to  comply  may  be  considered  as  a  discharge 
of  the  contract.  Where  the  contractor  has  evidently  acted  in 
good  faith,  much  larger  failures  to  perform  may  be  remedied  by 
a  payment  of  damages  instead  of  operating  to  discharge  the 
entire  contract. 

When  a  failure  to  perform  pertains  to  work  which  must 
either  be  accepted  and  used,  or  removed  at  great  expense,  as 
where  a  structure  is  built  upon  the  owner's  land,  if  such  struct- 


DISCHARGE   OF  CONTEACTS.  57 

ure  fails  materially  to  comply  with  the  terms  of  the  contract, 
such  failure  to  perform  will  operate  to  discharge  the  contract 
without  compensation  to  the  contractor,  even  though  the  owner 
does  accept  the  work  and  use  it.  In  this  case  the  owner  is 
not  at  liberty  to  refuse  to  accept,  since  this  would  involve 
him  in  great  additional  expense  and  delay.  It  is,  of  course, 
very  different  in  the  case  of  all  kinds  of  personal  or  movable 
property.  Here  a  refusal  to  accept  does  not  involve  the  owner 
in  any  additional  cost. 

When  a  contractor  has  shown  indifference,  dishonesty,  or 
incompetency  in  the  execution  of  his  contract,  resulting  in  a 
material  failure  to  perform,  and  this  work  is  the  building  of  a 
structure  upon  land  which  becomes  part  of  the  real  estate,  the 
owner  may  not  only  accept  and  use  the  structure  without  com- 
pensation to  the  builder,  but,  in  extreme  cases,  he  may  even 
decline  to  allow  such  builder  to  reconstruct  the  work,  even 
though  he  should  offer  to  do  so,  since  the  owner  thereby  has  no 
assurance  that  a  second  attempt  will  result  any  better  than  the 
first. 

While  the  law  gives  to  the  owner  such  remedies  as  those 
stated  above,  he  must  be  careful  not  to  act  in  such  a  manner  as 
to  imply  that  he  has  waived  his  legal  rights  in  the  premises. 
Thus  where  a  contract  is  to  be  performed  within  a  given  time, 
and  the  time  elapses  before  complete  performance,  if  the  owner 
urges  him,  or  requests  him  to  go  on  and  complete  the  work,  he 
thereby  waives  his  legal  remedies  for  noncompletion  within  the 
time,  so  far  as  a  discharge  of  the  contract  is  concerned.  He 
may,  however,  recover  damages  for  the  delay. 


58  LAW   OF   CONTRACTS. 

REMEDIES  FOR  BREACH  OF  CONTRACT. 

50.  Results  of  a  Breach  of  Contract.    When  a 
contract  has  been  broken,  or  not  fully  performed,  the  failure  to 
perform  may  result  either  («)  in  the  discharge  of   the   contract 
as  described  in  the  previous  article,  or  (£)  in  a  right  of  action 
by  the  injured  party  for  damages  sustained,    or  (c)    a  right   of 
action  to  enforce  specific  performance. 

The  two  remedies  by  which  one  either  obtains  damages  or 
enforces  specific  performance  will  be  discussed  in  the  two  fol- 
lowing articles. 

51.  Damages  for  Nonperformance.  The  foundation 

principle  of  damages  is  compensation.  Where  there  has  been 
a  partial  or  complete  failure  to  perform,  in  accordance  with 
the  agreement,  the  law  undertakes  to  require  the  party  so  fail- 
ing to  pay  to  the  injured  party  such  a  sum  as  will  cover  the 
actual  loss  in  money  value  which  he  has  sustained  on  account 
of  the  breach.  When  the  promise  was  the  payment  of  a  cer- 
tain sum  of  money,  nothing  more  than  this  sum  with  interest 
can  be  recovered.  Where  no  decided  loss  in  money  value  can 
be  shown,  the  injured  party  can  recover  only  a  nominal  sum. 
That  is  to  say,  "a  sum  of  money  such  as  may  be  spoken  of 
but  has  no  existence  in  point  of  quantity. " 

The  leading  case  in  determining  the  amount  of  damages 
which  can  be  collected  in  the  United  States  courts  is  that  of 
Hadley  v.  Baxendale.  In  this  case  the  court  laid  down  the  fol- 
lowing rules,  which  have  been  followed  in  all  the  United 
States  courts. 

''Where  two  parties  have  made  a  contract  which  one  of 
them  has  broken,  the  damages  which  the  other  party  ought  ta 
receive  in  respect  of  such  breach  of  contract  should  be: 

(i)  Such  as  may  fairly  and  reasonably  be  considered  as 
arising  naturally,  i.  e.,  according  to  the  usual  course  of 
things,  from  such  breach  of  contract  itself. 


REMEDIES   FOB   BREACH  OF  CONTRACT.  59 

(2)  Such  as  may  reasonably  be  supposed  to  have  been  in 
the  contemplation  of  both  parties   at  the  time  they  made  the 
contract,  as  the  probable  result  of  the  breach  of  it. 

(3)  Such  as  arose  out  of  the  special  circumstances  under 
which  the  contract  was  made,  "where  such   circumstances  were 
communicated  by  the  plaintiff  to  the  defendant. 

(4)  But,  if  these  special  circumstances  were  wholly  un- 
known to  the  party  breaking  the  contract,  he,  at  the  most,  can 
only  be  supposed  to  have  had  in  his  contemplation  the  amount 
of  injury  which  would  arise  generally,    not  affected  by  any 
special  circumstances. 

It  must  be  remembered  that  "damages  in  an  action  for 
breach  of  contract  are  always  by  way  of  compensation,  and  not 
a  punishment,  hence  the  plaintiff  can  never  recover  more  than 
such  pecuniary  loss  as  he  has  sustained,  nor  can  he  recover  for 
great  disappointment,  nor  injury  to  the  feelings,  or  vexation  of 
mind,  caused  by  the  breach."* 

The  party  who  is  injured  by  a  breach  of  contract  is 
required  to  make  reasonable  exertions  to  render  the  injury  as 
light  as  possible,  and  if  he  carelessly  or  indifferently  allows  the 
damage  to  be  unreasonably  large,  such  increase  falls  upon 
himself. 

52.    Distinction  between  Liquidated  Damages 

and  Penalties.!  "The  parties  to  a  contract  not  infrequently 
assess  the  damages  at  which  they  rate  a  breach  of  the  contract 
by  one  or  both  of  them,  and  introduce  their  estimate  into  the 
terms  of  the  contract.  This  is  perfectly  legal,  and  on  a  breach 
the  sum  agreed  upon  becomes  the  measure  of  damages;  as, 
for  example,  a  stipulation  in  a  building  contract  that  if  the 
building  is  not  completed  by  a  certain  day  the  contractor  will 
pay  a  certain  fixed  sum  for  each  day  or  week  or  month  he  is  in 
default,  or  an  agreement  in  a  contract  of  sale  that  a  certain 

*Breach  of  promise  of  marriage  is  an  exception  to  this  ruls. 
tThis  article  is  quoted  from  Lawson  on  Contracts. 


60  LAW   OF   CONTRACTS. 

sum  shall  be  deducted  from  the  purchase  price  if  the  quantity 
is  not  delivered  as  agreed.  These  are  called  '-liquidated 
damages. ' 

"But  the  parties  in  affixing  a  fixed  sum  for  the  nonper- 
formance  of  his  promise  by  one,  or  each  of  them,  may  have 
intended  not  to  assess  the  damages  at  which  they  rate  the  non- 
performance  of  the  promise,  but  to  secure  the  performance  by 
the  imposition  of  a  penalty  in  excess  of  the  actual  loss  likely  to 
be  sustained.  And  in  this  case,  the  amount  recoverable  is 
limited  to  the  loss  actually  sustained,  regardless  of  the  sum 
undertaken  to  be  paid  by  the  defaulter.  These  are  called 
'•penalties' 

"The  courts  will  always  construe  the  contract  in  harmony 
with  the  intention  of  the  parties,  and  without  regard  to  the 
terms  used.  If  the  general  effect  of  the  agreement  shows  that 
they  intended  to  provide  for  a  penalty  they  will  restrict  the 
recovery  to  the  actual  damages  incurred  although  the  words 
'liquidated  damages'  are  used  in  the  instrument.  So,  where 
the  parties  have  used  the  milder  term  'penalty,'  courts  have 
sometimes  held  that  the  stipulated  sum  was,  from  the  nature 
of  the  case,  to  be  considered  as  liquidated  damages  and  recov- 
erable in  full.  Whether  the  sum  mentioned  in  an  agreement 
to  be  paid  for  a  breach  is  to  be  treated  as  a  penalty,  or  as 
liquidated  and  ascertained  damages,  is  a  question  of  law,  to  be 
decided  by  the  judge,  upon  a  consideration  of  the  whole  instru- 
ment. Where  it  is  plain  that  the  parties  meant  the  sum  fixed 
to  be  liquidated  damages,  the  courts  will  not  interfere  to  frus- 
trate that  intention,  but,  if  it  be  doubtful,  upon  the  whole 
agreement,  whether  the  sum  named  was  intended  to  be  a  pen- 
'alty  or  liquidated  damages,  it  will  be  construed  to  be  a  penalty, 
it  being  the  tendency  of  the  courts  to  consider  the  contract  as 
creating  a  penalty  to  cover  the  damages  actually  sustained  by  a 
breach,  rather  than  liquidated  damages. 


REMEDIES  FOR  BEEACH  OF  CONTRACT.        61 

"Subject  to  the  principles  stated  in  the  last  section  the 
courts  have  adopted  certain  rules  of  construction,  in  the  case  of 
contracts  containing  promises  of  this  kind ;  which  are — 

*'i.  If  the  contract  is  for  a  matter  of  certain  value  and  a 
sum  is  fixed  to  be  paid  on  breach  of  it  which  is  in  excess  of 
that  value,  then  the  sum  fixed  is  a  penalty  and  not  liquidated 
damages. 

"2.  If  the  contract  is  for  a  matter  of  uncertain  value  and 
a  sum  is  fixed  to  be  paid  on  breach  of  it,  the  sum  is  recovera- 
ble as  liquidated  damages.  There  is  'nothing  illegal  or  unrea- 
sonable in  the  parties,  by  their  mutual  agreement,  settling  the 
amount  of  damages,  uncertain  in  their  nature,  at  any  sum  upon 
which  they  may  agree.' 

"3.  Where  the  contract  involves  several  distinct  matters 
of  various  kinds,  and  one  fixed  sum  is  stipulated  to  be  paid  for 
any  breach,  of  whatever  kind,  it  is  a  penalty  and  not  liquidated 
damages." 

53.    Recovery  for    Imperfect    or    Incompleted 

W^Ork.  As  stated  in  Art.  49,  recovery  can  be  had  under 
a  contract  for  partial  performance,  when  the  contract  may  be 
considered  as  divisible  or  severable.  That  is,  where  a  part  of 
the  agreement  may  be  entirely  fulfilled,  while  other  portions 
remain  unfulfilled.  In  this  case,  however,  while  the  party  in 
fault  may  recover  damages  for  the  work  done,  or  goods  deliv- 
ered under  the  divisible  contract,  he  is  always  liable  for  such 
damages  as  can  be  shown  to  have  resulted  from  his  failure  to 
completely  perform  his  agreement. 

When  the  contract  can  not  be  considered  divisible,  but 
must  be  looked  upon  as  one  and  entire,  recovery  can  not  be 
had  for  anything  short  of  a  substantially  complete  performance. 
That  is  to  say,  a  substantially  incomplete  performance  dis- 
charges the  contract  entirely,  as  stated  in  Art.  49,  and  even 
when  the  perfoimance  is  sufficiently  complete  to  prevent  dis- 
charging the  contract,  so  that  recovery  can  be  had  for  the 


62  LAW   OF    CONTRACTS. 

work  done,  the  owner  may  still  enter  a  claim  for  damages  for 
each  and  every  particular  in  which  the  performance  has  been 
incomplete.  Here  again  if  the  default  is  shown  to  be  a  willful 
neglect  or  refusal  to  comply,  the  law  is  construed  much  more 
severely  than  for  mere  oversights. 


SPECIFIC  PERFORMANCE. 
54.    General  Rule   as  to  Specific  Performance. 

Suits  to  enforce  specific  performance  can  not  always  be  main- 
tained, for  actions  can  be  brought  at  law  for  such  damages  as 
may  be  shown  to  have  resulted  from  a  breach  of  the  contract, 
or  from  a  total  failure  to  perform.  It  has  been  customary, 
however,  to  allow  specific  performance  to  be  enforced  in  cer- 
tain cases  where  suit  is  entered  in  a  court  of  equity,  but  even 
in  equity  specific  performance  will  not  be  enforced  where  a 
payment  of  damages  will  put  the  plaintiff  in  as  good  a  position 
as  if  the  agreement  had  been  actually  performed.  Also  if  an 
action  for  damages  would  not  lie,  neither  would  an  action  for 
specific  performance.  In  a  case  in  equity,  however,  many 
considerations  will  be  taken  account  of,  in  the  way  of  meting 
out  justice  to  the  parties,  which  could  not  be  considered  in  a 
case  at  law  upon  the  terms  of  the  contract  itself. 

Where  specific  performance  is  ordered  by  a  court  of 
equity,  the  same  court  will,  if  necessary,  enforce  its  decree 
either  by  a  mandate  enforcing  the  performance  named  or  by 
an  injunction  to  prevent  the  doing  of  the  contrary. 

Since  the  panics  to  an  engineering  agreement  can,  as  a 
rule,  be  fully  compensated  for  a  failure  to  perform  on  the  part 
of  either,  by  a  recovery  of  damages,  specific  performance  can 
not  ordinarily  be  enforced,  and  hence  this  subject  will  not  be 
further  discussed  in  this  connection. 


DISCHARGE    OF   RIGHT   OF  ACTION.  63 


DISCHARGE  OF  RIGHT   OF  ACTION   UNDER  A 
CONTRACT. 

55.  The  Right  Of  Action.  Upon  any  breach  of  a 
contract  there  arises  in  favor  of  the  injured  party  a  legal  right 
of  action  for  compensation.  "This  right  of  action  can  then 
*  not  be  discharged  by  any  payment  or  performance,  or  tender 
of  payment  or  performance,  by  the  promisor,  without  the  con- 
sent and  acceptance  of  ihe  promisee ;  for  the  promisee,  after 
breach,  becomes  entitled  to  the  compensation  or  remedy  pro- 
vided by  process  of  law,  and  is  not  bound  to  accept  any  tender 
or  offer  made  in  satisfaction  of  his  legal  rights."  This  right 
of  action  c;m  only  be  discharged  in  one  of  the  following  four 
ways:  (#)  By  a  Release  ;  (£)  By  an  Accord  and  Satisfaction ; 
(c)  By  a  Judgment;  (</)  By  Lapse  of  Time. 

(a)  A  Release  of  a  legal  right  of  action  consists  in  a  vol- 
untary agreement  to  discharge  a  claim,  and  is  only  valid  when 
supported  by  a  consideration  or  when  executed  under  seal. 
Otherwise  it  is  a  mere  unsupported  promise  which  binds  no 
one.  But  a  voluntary  delivery  to  the  debtor  of  tlie  evidence  of 
a  debt,  as  of  a  note  or  bond,  or  the  destroying  of  the  same, 
with  the  intention  of  discharging  the  debt,  does  operate  as  a 
4  release.  A  release  of  one  of  several  debtors,  jointly,  or 
jointly  and  severally,  liable  for  the  same  debt,  releases  all. 

(£)  Release  by  Accord  and  Satisfaction  consists  in  an 
agreement  on  the  part  of  the  creditor  to  accept  something  in 
satisfaction  of  his  claim,  accompanied  by  the  delivery  or  per- 
formance of  what  has  been  agreed  upon.  Here  the  execution 
of  the  agreement  is  the  satisfaction  referred  to  in  the  phrase 
"accord  and  satisfaction,"  the  agreement  to  accept  this  being 
the  accord.  It  should  be  noted  that  the  right  of  action  is  not 
discharged  until  this  agreement  or  "accord"  is  fully  executed 
when  "satisfaction"  has  been  rendered. 


64  LAW   OF   CONTRACTS. 

(c)  Release  by  a  Judgment.  Evidently  a  judgment 
obtained  through  a  suit  at  law  in  favor  of  the  plaintiff  dis- 
charges all  further  right  of  action  against  the  defendant  in  the 
case  so  adjudicated.  His  former  right  is  now  merged  in 
what  is  called  a  contract  of  record,  and  this  is  discharged  by 
the  payment  of  the  judgment,  or  by  such  satisfaction  as  can  be 
obtained  by  process  of  execution.  An  adverse  judgment 
against  the  plaintiff  does  not  discharge  the  obligation  or  'right 
of  action  unless  this  adverse  judgment  was  rendered  on  the 
merits  of  the  case.  Of  course  any  judgment  may  be  set  aside 
by  the  court  in  which  it  is  rendered,  or  set  aside  by  a  higher 
court,  in  which  case  judgment  may  be  entered  in  favor  of  the 
other  party  if  so  ordered,  or  the  parties  may  be  remitted  to  their 
original  positions. 


The  discharge  of  right  of  action  through  Lapse  of 
Time  is  in  virtue  of  certain  statutory  limitations  providing  that 
after  the  lapse  of  a  certain  period  of  time,  which  is  different  for 
different  kinds  of  contracts,  the  right  of  action  under  the  con- 
tract ceases  to  exist,  and  is  said  to  have  been  discharged  by 
lapse  of  time.  Even  in  the  absence  of  any  statutory  provision 
the  courts  will  not  allow  a  case  to  be  opened  on  a  contract 
which  has  long  stood  as  a  dead  letter.  In  the  common  law  the 
period  of  time  which  bars  the  right  of  action  is  commonly 
twenty  years.  This  will  apply  even  to  sealed  instruments,  and 
for  parole  agreements  this  time  will  be  shortened  and  dis- 
charged by  payment  presumed  for  shorter  periods. 

It  must  not  be  understood,  however,  that  the  courts  will 
allow  either  party  to  an  agreement  to  benefit  through  lapse  of 
time  from  a  fraudulent  contract,  although  the  lapse  of  an 
unreasonable  time  before  suit  is  entered  by  the  defrauded  party 
will  have  the  effect  of  affirming  the  contract.  In  other  words 
the  law  reasonably  requires  that  in  case  of  either  fraud  or 
breach  of  contract  a  prompt  recourse  to  the  courts  shall  be  had. 


DISCHARGE    OF   EIGHT   OF   ACTION.  65 

56.  Removal  of  Statutory  Bar  to  Right  of  Ac- 
tion. While  statutes  of  limitation  are  a  bar  to  a  right  of 
action  or  recovery  in  the  courts,  they  do  not  act  to  extinguish 
the  claim,  and  hence  notwithstanding  the  time  in  which  suit 
may  be  entered  has  elapsed,  the  right  of  action  may  be  revived 
by  (#)  a  promise  to  pay  the  debt;  (£)  a  subsequent  acknowl- 
edgment of  the  debt;  or  (c)  a  part  payment  of  the  debt. 
In  other  words,  any  acknowledgment  on  the  part  of  the  debtor 
of  the  existence  and  legitimacy  of  the  claim,  after  the  right  of 
action  has  been  barred  by  the  statute  of  limitations,  serves  to 
revive  the  claim  for  another  like  period.  This  acknowledg- 
ment of  the  existence  of  the  debt,  in  order  to  serve  to  revive  its 
legal  status  is  not  merely  a  recognition  of  the  fact  of  the  debt, 
but  must  consist  in  an  agreement  to  pay  the  debt. 

After  such  a  removal  of  the  bar  to  the  right  of  action,  suit 
may  be  entered  upon  the  original  contract  by  showing  that  the 
claim  has  been  revived  by  the  free  act  of  the  debtor.  In  other 
words,  the  debtor  has  here  waived  his  legal  rights  of  defense, 
and  such  a  waiving  of  his  rightsdoes  notrequire  a  consideration 
to  support  it,  as  was  shown  in  Art.  27, 
5 


PART  II. 

General  Clauses  in  Engineering  Speci- 
fications and  Accompanying 
Documents. 


67.    General  Considerations.    Nearly  all  the  works 

designed  by  engineers  and  architects  are  executed  by  other 
parties  called  contractors.  The  contractor  usually  buys  all  the 
materials  and  furnishes  all  the  labor  required  in  the  execution 
of  the  work,  as  designed,  and  he  agrees  to  do  this  within  a 
stated  time  and  for  a  fixed  sum.  To  insure  his  doing  this  sat- 
isfactorily certain  written  documents  are  prepared  and  signed 
by  both  parties,  that  is  lo  say,  by  the  man,  company,  or  corpo- 
ration having  the  work  done  and  who  is  to  pay  for  the  same, 
and  by  the  contractor,  or  the  man,  company,  or  corporation 
who  does  the  work  and  furnishes  the  materials. 

Standing  between  these  two  parties  to  an  agreement  is  the 
engineer  or  architect  who  has  planned  the  work  and  who 
usually  superintends  its  execution  and  assists  in  the  final  settle- 
ment between  the  parties  to  the  agreement.  Although  paid  by 
the  party  having  the  work  done  he  occupies  a  judicial  and  not  a 
partisan  position  and  he  is  expected  to  act  justly  and  fairly 
towards  both  parties. 

In  order  that  there  shall  be  no  misunderstanding  in  regard 
to  the  intentions  of  the  designer,  plans  are  usually  drawn  show- 
ing the  general  and  detail  features  of  the  work,  and  accom- 
panying these  there  is  a  written  description  of  the  work,  of  the 

materials  to  be  used,  of  the  time  and  manner  of  the  payments, 

66 


ADVERTISEMENTS.  67 

etc.  This  document  is  called  the  specifications.  The  draw- 
ings and  this  description  are  then  referred  to  as  the  plans  and 
specifications. 

In  order  to  get  open  and  general  competition  in  doing  the 
work  a  date  is  set  on  which  bids  will  be  received,  and  blank 
forms  of  proposals  are  prepared  by  the  engineer  which  can  be 
filled  out  by  the  bidders,  and  notices  or  advertisements  are 
inserted  in  the  papers  and  in  the  engineering  journals  calling 
the  attention  of  contractors  to  this  public  letting.  These  and 
other  accompanying  documents  will  be  discussed  in  the  order 
of  their  sequence  in  actual  practice. 


ADVERTISEMENTS. 

58.  The  advertisement  should  be  as  short  as  possible 
to  contain  the  necessary  information,  in  order  to  save  expense. 
It  should  usually  contain  the  requisite  information  on  the  fol- 
lowing subjects : 

(1)  A  title  indicating  the  kind  of  work  to  be  done. 

(2)  Place,  date,  and  hour  of  opening  the  bids. 

(3)  Person,  company,  or  corporation  letting  the  work. 

(4)  An  adequate  description  of  the  work,  with  especial 
reference  to  the  kind  and  quantity  (or  cost)  of  work  to  be  done. 

(5)  Conditions  of  payment,  if  these  are  peculiar. 

(6)  Instructions  as  to  where    to   obtain    plans,   specifica- 
tions and  blank  forms  of  proposals. 

(7)  Statement  as  to  amount  of  cash  or  of  certified  check 
or  of  bond  to  accompany  the  bid. 

(8)  A  reservation  of  the  right  to  reject  any  or  all  bids. 

(9)  Any  other  peculiar  feature,  as  the  letting  of  the  work 
in  parts  or  as  a  whole ;   bids  to  be  received  only  from  experienced 
contractors,  etc. 


68  GENEKAL   SPECIFICATIONS. 

59.    The  Theory  of  Advertisements.    The  object 

of  the  advertisement  being  to  secure  as  large  a  competition  as 
possible  from  responsible  bidders,  it  follows  that  the  informa- 
tion conveyed  in  it  shauld  be  such  as  not  only  to  attract  the 
attention  of  such  parties,  but  such  as  would  enable  them  to 
decide  whether  or  not  it  would  be  worth  their  while  to  submit 
a  bid.  A  prominent  title  indicating  the  general  character  of 
the  work  would  serve  to  attract  the  attention  of  contractors 
engaged  in  that  line  of  work.  It  is  a  common  practice  to  omit 
this  title,  with  the  result  that  one  is  obliged  to  read  nearly  the 
entire  advertisement,  which  is  usually  printed  in  small  type,, 
before  he  can  learn  what  the  nature  of  the  work  is.  It  is  usual 
also  to  announce  that  the  proposals  or  bids  which  are  to  be  sub- 
mitted shall  be  sealed,  with  the  implied  understanding  that  these 
seals  are  not  to  be  broken  until  the  bids  are  opened  at  the  place ^ 
date,  and  hour  named.  This  is  for  the  purpose  of  preventing  col- 
lusion and  fraud.  In  other  words  the  bids  are  to  remain  secret  and 
unknown  except  to  the  bidders  themselves  until  the  hour  arrives 
for  opening  them.  It  is  also  customary  to  state  that  these  bids 
or  proposals  shall  be  opened  in  the  presence  of  the  bidders,  in 
other  words  at  an  open  meeting  of  the  board,  or  committee,  or 
corporation,  or  council.  To  this  meeting  all  persons  are  free 
to  come  and  see  the  bids  opened,  and  to  hear  them  publicly 
read,  with  the  privilege  of  taking  down  the  prices  named  if 
they  choose. 

The  description  of  the  work  included  in  the  advertisement 
should  be  sufficient  to  enable  the  contractor  to  decide  whether 
or  not  it  was  of  such  a  character  as  he  would  be  willing  to 
undertake,  and  also  sufficient  to  enable  him  to  determine  the 
amount  of  work  to  be  done,  and  the  time  required  to  perform 
"it,  as  well  as  the  probable  approximate  cost  of  the  same,  and 
the  amount  of  capital  required  to  successfully  prosecute  it. 
The  advertisement  should  also  indicate  whether  or  not  the 
work  would  be  let  in  parts  or  only  as  a  whole.  If  it  may  be 


ADVERTISEMENTS.  69 

let  in  parts,  the  advertisement  should  indicate  what  the  lines  of 
division  are,  so  that  one  might  know  what  parts  he  was  at  lib- 
erty to  bid  upon.  It  is  customary  to  pay  for  contract  work  on 
monthly  estimates  of  the  engineer,  reserving  from  each  month's 
estimate  of  the  worth  of  materials  furnished  and  work  done  twenty 
or  twenty-five  per  cent,  until  final  completion.  This  enables  the 
contractor  to  carry  out  the  wrork  without  having  the  requisite 
capital  to  complete  the  work  with  his  own  means.  If  the  con- 
ditions of  payment  are  to  be  other  than  this,  thus  making  them 
unusual  and  peculiar,  such  conditions  should  be  stated  in  the 
advertisement. 

Having  drawn  the  attention  of  contractors  to  the  work 
and  given  them  the  necessary  information  to  enable  them  to 
decide  whether  or  not  they  would  wish  to  submit  bids  upon  the 
same,  it  remains  to  give  them  such  information  as  may  be  nec- 
essary to  enable  them  to  procure  promptly  the  necessary  plans 
and  specifications,  the  blank  forms  of  proposals,  and  informa- 
tion as  to  the  amount  and  kind  of  guarantee  which  they  must 
submit  with  their  bids  to  have  them  considered. 

60.  The  Guarantee.  The  object  of  the  guarantee  is 
always  to  insure  that  the  successful  bidder,  or  the  party  who  is 
given  the  contract,  will  sign  the  contract  for  doing  the  work 
and  furnish  the  requisite  bond  for  faithful  performance.  In 
other  words  this  guarantee  is  simply  an  assurance  of  his  good 
faith  and  honest  intentions  in  submitting  his  bid,  and  it  is  cus- 
tomary to  make  it  consist  of  cash  or  the  equivalent  of  cash  in 
the  form  of  a  bank  check  duly  certified  by  the  bank  as  being 
receivable  for  the  amount  stated.  This  check  is  to  be  made 
payable  to  the  party  letting  the  work,  or  his  agent,  and  is  to  be 
forfeited  to  such  party  in  case  the  bidder  fails  or  refuses  to 
enter  into  a  contract  for  the  performance  of  the  work  after  the 
award  has  been  made  to  him.  The  deposits  made  by  the 
unsuccessful  bidders  are,  of  course,  immediately  returned  to 
them,  and  that  of  the  successful  bidder  is  held  until  he  has 


70  GENEKAL   SPECIFICATIONS. 

entered  into  a  contract  as  above  stated,  after  which  it  is  also 
returned  to  the  owner.  Sometimes  it  is  considered  a  hardship 
for  the  bidders  to  have  to  make  this  cash  deposit  in  submitting 
their  bids,  in  which  case  the  bidders  are  asked  to  furnish  a 
bond  or  guarantee  signed  by  parties  known  to  be  responsible, 
binding  themselves  in  a  stated  sum,  which  sum  they  agree  to 
pay  if  the  bidder  named  therein  fails  to  enter  into  a  contract  for 
the  faithful  performance  of  the  work.*  Some  such  guarantee 
as  this  should  always  accompany  every  bid  received  in  open 
competition.  While  this  might  not  be  necessary  for  men  of 
known  business  integrity,  yet  in  an  open  competition  bids  will 
be  received  from  strangers,  and  without  this  kind  of  an  assur- 
ance of  honest  intention  the  successful  bidder  will  often  refuse 
to  enter  into  a  contract  on  the  basis  of  a  bid.  In  this  case  the 
handing  in  of  a  bid  would  involve  no  financial  responsibility, 
and  hence  bidders  might  carelessly  submit  bids  without  having 
taken  due  precautions  to  determine  the  cost  of  the  work,  and 
hence  might  have  made  a  price  altogether  too  low  and  one 
which  would  involve  serious  losses  on  their  part  if  they  would 
undertake  to  carry  out  the  work  for  the  sum  named.  In  case 
such  a  party  should  receive  the  award  and  then  after  more 
careful  investigation  learn  that  the  work  could  not  be  per- 
formed for  the  price  named  in  the  bid  he  would  decline  to  enter 
into  a  contract  and  the  letting  would  have  to  be  made  over  again. 
This  would  necessitate  readvertising  the  work,  and  a  consider- 
able delay,  in  addition  to  some  cost.  It  is  desirable  therefore 
always  to  require  a  certain  guarantee  of  good  faith  which  shall 
accompany  the  bid  itself,  and  which  shall  involve  considerable 
loss  to  the  bidder  if  he  declines  to  enter  into  a  contract  in  case 
the  work  is  awarded  to  him. 

61.     Eight  of  Rejection.     It   is   well    always    in    the 
advertisement  to  reserve  the  right  to  reject  any  or  all  bids,  for 

*Or  the  agreement  may  be  to  pay  the  difference  between  the  price  named  and  the 
contract  price  for  which  the  work  may  finally  be  let. 


ADVERTISEMENTS.  71 

if  this  is  not  done  the  fair  inference  is  that  the  contract  will  be 
let  to  the  lowest  bidder.  In  some  instances,  when  the  work  is 
done  under  state  or  city  auspices,  the  law  may  require  that  the 
contract  shall  be  let  to  the  lowest  bidder  if  let  at  all.  In  this 
case  the  advertisement  should  state  that  "the  right  is  reserved 
to  reject  all  bids,"  since  if  parties  should  not  choose  to  let  the 
work  to  the  lowest  bidder  their  only  recourse  would  be  to  reject 
all  the  bids  and  advertise  the  work  again.  If  the  parties  letting 
the  work  are  not  bound  by  this  legal  requirement,  and  if  they 
have  reserved  the  right  "to  reject  any  or  all  bids'*  in  the 
advertisement,  then  they  are  at  liberty  to  let  the  work  to  any 
of  the  bidders  without  subjecting  themselves  to  a  charge  of 
unfairness.  It  must  be  admitted,  however,  that  if  the  work  is 
not  let  to  the  lowest  bidder,  the  parties  letting  the  work  subject 
themselves  to  invidious  criticism,  and  they  should  have  very 
good  and  satisfactory  reasons  which  they  are  willing  to  produce 
in  defense  of  their  action,  in  order  to  clear  themselves  from 
blame  before  the  various  parties  interested  in  the  letting  of  the 
work. 

62.  Illustrative  Examples.  The  following  adver- 
tisements have  been  selected  from  the  current  journals  as  fairly 
embodying  in  suitable  form  the  requirements  as  above  stated. 
The  student  should  note  the  terse  and  condensed  style  of  these 
advertisements  in  which  the  greatest  possible  amount  of  valuable 
and  required  information  is  given  clearly  but  in  the  least  possi- 
ble space : 

CELINA,  OHIO,  WATER-WORKS — NOTICE  TO  CONTRAC- 
TORS.— Sealed  proposals  will  be  received  by  the  trustees  of  the 
water-works  of  the  village  of  Celina,  Ohio,  up  to  8  o'clock  P. 
M.  of  the  loth  day  of  April,  1895,  for  furnishing  the  materials 
and  constructing  a  system  of  water-works  for  said  village. 

There  will  be  required  about  773  tons  of  cast  iron  pipe ; 
about  18  tons  of  special  castings;  101  fire  hydrants;  76  valves 
and  boxes;  brick  pumping  station  and  chimney;  2  pumps  of  a 
combined  capacity  of  two  million  gallons  per  day ;  2  boilers ; 
a  steel  stand-pipe  16  feet  in  diam,eter  and  125  feet  high,  etc. 


72  GENEKAL   SPECIFICATIONS. 

Bids  will  be  received  for  furnishing  any  of  the  materials 
above  or  for  constructing  the  works  complete.  Proposals  must 
be  addressed  to  the  Secretary  of  the  Water-Works  Trustees, 
Celina,  Ohio,  and  must  contain  a  certified  check  or  its  equiva- 
lent, made  payable  to  said  secretary  in  an  amount  equal  to  two 
(2)  per  cent,  of  the  amount  of  the  bid. 

Plans  may  be  seen  and  specifications  and  blank  form  of 
proposal  procured  at  the  office  of  the  trustees,  Celina,  Ohio,  or 
at  the  office  of  the  engineers, ,  Buffalo,  N.  Y. 

The  right  is  reserved  to  reject  any  and  all  bids. 

•   ,  Pres., 

,  Sec., 


Trustees  of  the  Water-Works,  Celina,  Ohio. 
,  Buffalo,  N.  Y.,  Engineers. 


PROPOSALS  FOR  IRON  LATHING  AND  AREA  GRATINGS. — 
Office  of  Building  of  Library  Congress,  145  East  Capitol 
street,  Washington,  D.  C.,  November  12,  1894. — Separate 
sealed  proposals  for  furnishing,  delivering,  and  putting  in  place 
complete  the  iron  furring  and  lathing  required  for  the  ceilings, 
partitions,  etc.,  in  the  first,  second,  and  attic  stories,  and  for 
the  iron  gratings  and  tile  lights  required  for  the  areas  of  the 
Building  for  Library  of  Congress  in  this  city,  will  be  received 
at  this  office  until  2  o'clock  p.  M.  on  Tuesday,  the  2yth  day  of 
November,  1894,  and  opened  immediately  thereafter  in  presence 
of  bidders.  Specifications,  general  instructions  and  conditions, 
and  blank  forms  of  proposal  may  be  obtained  on  application  to 

this  office.  , 

Superintendent  and  Engineer. 


NOTICE  TO  SEWER  CONTRACTORS. — Sealed  proposals  for 
building  about  four  (4)  miles  of  pipe  sewers  in  sections  7  and 
8  of  the  Medford  sewerage  system  will  be  received  by  the  com- 
missioners of  sewers  at  their  office  until  4:45  P.  M.,  Saturday, 
March  30,  1895.  All  proposals  must  be  on  forms  furnished  by 
the  city  and  accompanied  by  a  check  of  five  hundred  (500) 
dollars  drawn  on  some  national  bank,  and  made  payable  to  the 
treasurer  of  the  city  of  Medford.  Some  approximate  quantities 
are  as  follows:  20.477  ^m*  ^*  °^  P*Pe  sewer;  18,081  en.  yds. 
of  earth  excavations  of  all  depths ;  67  manholes  aggregating 
578.2  vert.  ft.  Bricks,  pipe,  cement,  and  iron  work  will  be 
furnished  by  the  city.  Plans  may  be  seen,  specifications  and 
forms  of  contract  and  proposals  may  be  obtained  at  the  office 
of  the  commissioners.  Each  bidder  is  required  to  make  a 
statement  indicating  what  sewer  work  he  has  done,  and  to  give 
reference  that  will  enable  the  board  to  judge  of  his  business 


ADVERTISEMENTS.  73 

standing;  and  no  bid  will  be  received  in  case  the  bidder  has 
not  looked  the  work  over  on  the  ground.  The  commissioners 
reserve  the  right  to  reject  any  or  all  bids,  if  they  deem  it  to  the 

interest  of  the  city  so  to  do.  . 

Chairman  Commissioners  of  Sewers. 
,  Engineer,  Medford,  Mass.,  March  18,   1895. 


The  following  advertisements  are  given  as  examples  of 
extreme  brevity,  but  since  they  appeal  to  a  particular  class  of 
contractors,  accustomed  to  do  such  work,  they  perhaps  convey 
all  the  information  really  necessary  to  give  in  the  advertisement : 

To  BUILDERS. — Office  of  the  Light-House  Engineer, 
Eighth  District,  New  Orleans,  La.,  March  20,  1895.  Pro- 
posals will  be  received  at  this  office  until  2  o'clock  p.  M.,  Wed- 
nesday, the  ist  day  of  May,  1895,  for  furnishing  the  materials 
and  labor  of  all  kinds  necessary  for  the  construction,  erection, 
and  delivery  of  the  buildings  for  the  Brazos  River  Light  Sta- 
tion, Texas.  Plans,  specifications,  forms  of  proposal,  and 
other  information  may  be  obtained  on  application  to  this  office. 
The  right  is  reserved  to  reject  any  or  all  bids,  and  to  waive  any 

defects. ,  Major,  Corps  of  Engineers,  U.  S.  A., 

Light-House  Engineer. 


OFFICE  OF  ENGINEER,  Ninth  and  Eleventh  Lighthouse 
Districts,  Detroit,  Mich.,  March  25,  1895. — Sealed  proposals 
will  be  received  at  this  office  until  3  o'clock  P.  M.  of  Monday, 
the  1 5th  day  of  April,  1895,  for  furnishing  seven  skeleton  iron 
towers  for  Hay  Lake  Channel,  St.  Mary's  River,  Mich. 
Plans,  specifications,  forms  of  proposals,  and  other  information 
may  be  obtained  on  application  to  the  undersigned.  The  right 
is  reserved  to  reject  any  or  all  bids,  and  to  waive  any  defects. 

,  Major  Corps  of  Engineers,  U.  S.  A.,  Lighthouse 

Engineer. 


OFFICE  OF  THE  COMMISSIONERS,  D.  C.,  Washington,  D. 
C.,  March  28,  1895. — Sealed  proposals  will  be  received  at  this 
office  until  n  o'clock  A.  M.,  April  5,  1895,  for  grading  and 
regulating  streets  and  roads.  Blank  forms  of  proposals, 
specifications  and  all  necessary  information  may  be  obtained  at 
this  office. , , ,  Commis- 
sioners, D.  C. 

U.  S.  ENGINEER  OFFICE,  537  Congress  street,  Portland, 
Me.,  March  4,  1895. — Sealed  proposals  for  dredging  in  Har- 
risseckit  river,  Me.,  and  Bellamy  river,  N.  H.,  will  be  received 


74  GENEEAL   SPECIFICATIONS. 

here  until  3  P.  M.,  Monday,  April  15,  1895,  and  then  publicly 
opened.  All  information  furnished  on  application.  . 
,  Major  Engineers. 


PROPOSALS  FOR  CONSTRUCTION  of  dams  and  shore  protec- 
tions on  Upper  Mississippi  river,  between  Muscatine,  Iowa, 
and  New  Boston,  111.  U.  S.  Engineer  Office,  Rock  Island, 
111.,  March  16,  1895.  Sealed  proposals  will  be  received  here 
until  2  P.  M.,  April  15,  1895,  and  then  publicly  opened.  All 
information  furnished  on  application. 


U.  S.  ENGINEER  OFFICE,  Boston,  Mass.,  Feb.  25,  1895. 
Sealed  proposals  for  dredging  in  "The  Narrows,"  Boston 
Harbor,  Mass.,  will  be  received  here  until  noon,  April  2,  1895, 
and  then  publicly  opened.  All  information  furnished  on  appli- 
cation.  ,  Lt.  Col.  Eng'rs. 


INSTRUCTIONS  TO  BIDDERS. 
63.    Preliminary  Information.    A    description    of 

many  of  the  general  conditions  of  the  work  and  of  the  manner 
of  letting  it  may  well  be  grouped  together  and  printed  in  con- 
nection with  the  blank  forms  of  proposals.  This  information 
is  usually  placed  under  the  title  of  "Instructions  to  Bidders." 
A  fair  sample  of  such  preliminary  information  is  given  below. 
All  of  this  information  might  be,  and  often  is,  embodied  in  the 
specifications  themselves,  but  they  are  here  separated  for 
greater  clearness  in  the  analysis  of  the  various  documents 
involved  in  the  letting  of  an  engineering  contract : 

INSTRUCTIONS  TO  BIDDERS. 

FOR  A  WATER-WORKS  SYSTEM  AT  THE  U.   S.  MILITARY  POST    AT 
FORT  RILEY,  KAN. 

i.  No  bids  will  be  received  for  any  part  of  the  work 
herein  described  from  parties  who  can  not  show  a  reasonable 
acquaintance  with,  and  preparation  for,  the  proper  performance 
of  the  class  of  work  for  which  the  bid  is  submitted.  Evidence 
of  such  competency  must  be  furnished  if  desired. 


INSTRUCTIONS   TO   BIDDERS.  75 

2.  Proposals    must   be    made    on  the  blank  forms  to  be 
obtained  at  this  office. 

3.  Bids  will  be  received  as  follows: 

First.  On  wells  and  connections  complete  to  the  wall  of 
the  pump  pit.  Bidders  will  state  methods  which  they  propose 
to  use  in  sinking  wells. 

Second.  On  boiler,  coal  and  dwelling  house,  pump  pit 
and  reservoir  with  roof  complete. 

Third.  On  all  machinery  including  boilers,  furnaces, 
stack,  concrete  floor  in  boiler  and  coal  house,  pump,  connec- 
tions, suction  and  discharge  pipes  to  the  outside  of  p.ump  pit 
wall,  benches,  tools,  etc.  Bidders  must  state  what  kind  of 
pump  they  propose  to  furnish. 

Fourth.  On  the  pipe  system,  complete  with  hydrants 
and  valves,  and  to  include  the  following  items: 

(#)     Price  per  foot  for  eight  (8)  inch  mains. 

(£)     Price  per  foot  for  six  (6)  inch  mains. 

(c)     Price  per  foot  for  four  (4)  inch  mains. 

These  items  are  introduced  to  cover  any  slight  variations 
in  lengths  over  or  under  the  amounts  herein  specified,  and  con- 
tractors hereby  agree  to  such  extension  or  reduction  at  the 
prices  named. 

Bidders  may  make  in  addition  to  the  above  a  bid  for  the 
entire  work  complete. 

4.  Each  proposal    must   be    accompanied    by    a    written 
guaranty  in  the  sum  of  $2.000  (executed  strictly  in   accordance 
with  the  printed  instructions,    and   upon   the   blank  forms   fur- 
nished under  this  circular),  signed  by  two  responsible  persons, 
to  the  effect  that  if  the  proposal  is   accepted   within   sixty   days 
from  the  date  of  the  opening  of  the  proposals,  the   bidder  will, 
within  ten  days  after  being  notified   of  such   acceptance,   enter 
into  a  contract  and  give  bond  \vith  good  and  sufficient  sureties, 
and  that  in  case  of  failure  of  the   bidder   to   enter  into  contract 
and  give  bond,  they  will  pay  the  difference  between  the  amount 
of  his  bid    and   the   amount  for  which  contract  may  be   made 
with  another  party.* 

5.  The  amount  of  the  penalty  of  the  bond  to  be  furnished 
by  the  contractor  will  not  be  less  than  one  tenth  nor  more  than 
the  full  sum  of  the  consideration  of  the  contract. 

*In  place  of  this  it  is  more  common  to  require  the  bid  to  be  accompanied  by  a 
certified  check  (or  cash)  for  a  specified  sum,  to  be  forfeited  in  case  the  bidder  fails  to 
enter  into  contract  if  the  work  is  awarded  to  him. 


76  GENEBAL   SPECIFICATIONS. 

FORMS  OF   PROPOSALS. 

64.    The  Object  of  Blank  Forms  of  Proposals.  In 

order  to  insure  that  all  the  bidders  shall  submit  their  proposals 
on  exactly  the  same  items  and  estimate  prices  in  the  same  units, 
it  is  necessary  to  prepare  printed  blank  forms  to  be  used  by  all 
the  bidders,  these  forms  being  complete  in  all  respects  except  the 
prices  and  the  names  of  the  bidders.  So  important  is  it  to  have 
the  bids  exactly  comparable  in  all  respects  that  it  is  customary 
to  reject  all  bids  not  made  out  on  these  printed  forms  as  well 
as  all  bids  which,  though  made  on  the  printed  forms,  have 
changed  the  conditions  of  the  same  in  any  particular,  either  by 
erasures,  interlineations,  or  additional  conditions.  If  the  bid- 
der desires  to  submit  a  proposition  in  a  different  way  or  with 
other  conditions  than  those  stated  in  the  printed  form  he  should 
submit  his  bid  on  the  printed  form  without  correction  or  change 
and  then  append  to  his  bid  an  auxiliary  paper  embodying  such 
changes  as  he  would  wish  to  make,  and  the  price  he  would 
submit  if  these  changes  were  agreed  to.  In  this  way  he  com- 
plies strictly  with  the  requirements  by  submitting  a  bid  which 
is  regular  in  every  respect,  and  in  addition  submits  what  is 
practically  another  bid  on  a  modified  basis.  While  the  modi- 
fied bid  is,  of  course,  irregular,  and  would  not  be  considered  in 
conjunction  with  the  regular  bids,  it  would  give  to  the  parties 
letting  the  contract  the  information  which  he  desires  them  to 
have,  and  states  the  modifications  which  he  would  agree  to  if 
the  bid  were  let  to  him  on  the  basis  of  his  formal  and  regular 
proposal.  The  work  might  then  be  let  to  him  on  the  basis 
of  his  valid  proposal,  with  the  expectation  of  making  the 
terms  in  the  final  contract  in  accordance  with  the  bidder's 
amended  proposition.  If  the  parties  letting  the  contract,  how- 
ever, should  not  choose  to  do  this,  the  bidder  would  still  be 
bound  by  his  formal  or  regular  proposal.  The  importance  of 
making  the  bids  strictly  comparable  in  every  respect  is  so  very 


FOKMS   OF   PKOPOSALS.  77 

essential  to  fair  and  intelligent  treatment  of  the  bidders  them- 
selves, and  so  necessary  in  order  to  determine  which  is  really 
the  lowest  bid,  that  the  practice  of  preparing  and  supplying 
such  blank  forms  of  proposals  should  always  be  followed. 

65.  Manner  of  Letting  the  Work.  Before  such  forms 
can  be  prepared,  however,  several  questions  must  be  decided^ 
among  which  are  the  following: 

1.  Shall  the  work  be  let  as  a  whole,  or  shall  it  be  let  in 
parts. 

2.  Whether  let    as  a   whole  or    in  parts,    shall    bids  be 
received  for  fixed  sums  for  the  whole  or  for  the  several  parts,  or 
shall  they  be  received  on  a  basis  of  certain  suitable  units  of 
measurement.     As,  for  instance,  per  cubic  yard,  as  for  earth 
work,    per  perch  for  masonry,  per  pound  for  iron  work,  per 
square  yard  for  street  paving,   per  mile  for  railroad  rails  and 
ties,  or  per  lineal  foot  for  water  pipe  or  sewers,  etc. 

3.  Shall  the  work  be  let  in  such  a  way  as  to  involve  the 
payment    of  a   bonus    or  additional  sum  for  the  performance 
above  that  required,  and  a  corresponding  reduction  in  price  for 
a  failure  to  meet  the  requirements. 

4.  Shall  the  work  be  let  for  a  certain  price  for  the  origi- 
nal construction,  and  a  certain  price  per  annum  for  maintenance 
for  a  given  period. 

5.  Shall  the  contractor  be  required  to  furnish   all  materi- 
als and  perform  all  the  labor,  or  shall  the  principal  purchase  a 
portion  or  all  of  the  material  and  turn  it  over  to  the  contractor 
for  use  in  the  construction  of  the  work. 

66.  Contract  Let  as  a  Whole  or  in  Parts.    Some 
of  the  considerations  in  favor  of  letting  work  as  a  whole  rather 
than  in  parts  are : 

(«)  By  this  means  one  man  or  company  alone  is  respon- 
sible for  the  faithful  performance  of  the  work  both  as  to  quality 
and  as  to  time.  This  prevents  a  division  of  responsibility 


78  GENERAL   SPECIFICATIONS. 

which  is  always  bad,  and  in  the  case  of  carrying  out  contract 
work  is  often  the  cause  of  failure  to  have  the  work  completed 
within  the  time  specified,  without  being  able  to  locate  the 
responsibility  for  such  delay.  Where  there  are  several  con- 
tractors upon  the  same  piece  of  work,  each  may  so  stand  in  the 
way  of  another  that  the  work  may  be  greatly  delayed,  and  yet 
each  one  of  the  several  contractors  may  have  a  reasonable 
defense  which  would  shield  him  from  personal  liability. 

(6)  When  there  is  but  a  single  contractor  the  business  is 
concentrated  so  that  the  work  of  the  engineer  or  of  the  inspec- 
tors is  greatly  lessened  from  having  to  deal  with  one  man 
instead  of  many  separate  contractors. 

(c)  When  several  contractors  are  engaged  upon  the  same 
work  it  is  difficult  for  them  so  to  plan  their  parts,  in  time,  as  to 
avoid  a  certain  amount  of  delay  where  the  work  of  one  is 
dependent  upon  antecedent  work  of  another.  When  the  work 
is  done  by  a  single  contractor  he  can  arrange  to  avoid  such 
delays  as  are  almost  necessarily  incident  to  the  working  of  sev- 
eral contractors  in  sequence. 

(*£)  When  the  work  is  such  as  is  commonly  let  in  a  single 
contract,  or  in  other  words,  when  bids  can  be  received  from 
parties  who  have  been  accustomed  to  carry  out  all  parts  of  such 
a  work,  it  is  usually  more  economical  to  let  the  work  in  a  single 
contract  than  it  is  to  let  it  in  parts.  In  the  former  case  there  is 
but  one  man  to  reap  a  profit  from  the  construction,  whereas  if 
let  in  parts,  each  contractor  must,  of  course,  make  his  estimate 
in  such  a  way  as  to  allow  himself  a  reasonable  profit. 

Some  of  the  arguments  in  favor  of  letting  the  work  in 
parts  are: 

(«)  The  project  may  involve  constructions  of  such  differ- 
ent kinds  as  to  make  it  impracticable  for  one  contractor  to 
undertake  the  entire  work.  In  this  case  the  letting  in  parts  is 
necessary  to  a  skillful  performance. 


FORMS    OF   PEOPOSALS.  79 

(3)  Where  there  are  local  parties  who  are  competent  to 
execute  portions  of  the  work,  but  not  the  whole,  and  who  are 
anxious  to  bid  upon  such  portion,  it  may  be  wise  to  let  the 
work  in  parts  provided  it  is  reasonably  certain  that  competitive 
bids  can  be  received  on  all  the  parts.  Even  in  this  case  it  is 
desirable  also  to  receive  bids  upon  the  whole  work,  so  that  when 
the  bids  are  opened  it  will  appear  which  is  the  more  economical 
method  of  letting.  Even  when  it  is  reasonably  certain  in 
advance  that  the  contract  will  be  let  as  a  whole  it  is  often  wise 
to  receive  bids  on  the  parts  in  order  to  satisfy  local  demands, 
and  to  avoid  invidious  criticism  and  public  detraction.  This  is 
especially  true  in  the  case  of  public  works,  if  the  local  bidders 
who  wish  to  submit  proposals  on  parts  of  the  work,  but  who 
would  be  incompetent  to  bid  upon  the  whole,  are  shut  out  by 
receiving  bids  only  upon  the  entire  project. 

67.  Contract  Let  for  a  Fixed  Sum  or  per  Speci- 
fied Units.  When  the  work  to  be  performed  under  a  contract 
is  perfectly  definite  as  to  quantity,  it  is  best  to  let  the  contract 
for  a  fixed  sum.  When  either  the  quantity  of  work  to  be  done 
or  the  quality  or  kind  of  material  to  be  encountered,  as  in  exca- 
vations, is  more  or  less  unknown  and  indeterminate,  it  is 
necessary  to  let  such  parts  of  the  work  at  least,  in  terms  of 
some  suitable  unit  of  measurement.  Thus  in  the  case  of  exca- 
vation, the  kind  of  material  which  will  be  encountered  is  always 
more  or  less  uncertain,  and  the  quantities  to  be  moved  are 
usually  undetermined  in  advance.  In  various  other  lines  of 
work,  also,  the  exact  quantities  are  not  measured  or  computed 
in  advance  of  the  construction,  so  that  in  all  such  cases  it  is 
necessary  to  let  the  work  per  unit  of  measure.  It  is  often 
wise,  however,  to  assume  a  certain  definite  amount  of  work  of 
each  kind  to  be  performed,  and  let  the  contract  for  a  fixed  sum 
on  the  basis  of  this  assumption,  providing  for  variations  from 
these  amounts  in  the  blank  form  of  proposal  by  requiring  the 
bidder  to  state  not  only  a  fixed  sum  for  the  assumed  total,  but 


80  GENERAL   SPECIFICATIONS. 

also  a  price  per  unit  of  measure,  in  accordance  with  which  the 
quantities  assumed  as  the  basis  of  the  bid  may  be  either 
increased  or  diminished,  it  being  understood,  however,  that  the 
quantity  stated  is  approximately  the  amount  of  work  to  be 
performed.  In  this  way  it  becomes  known  in  advance  about 
what  the  work  is  to  cost,  and  if  the  quantities  are  changed 
somewhat  these  changes  do  not  become  a  source  of  contention 
between  the  parties. 

In  choosing  the  units  of  measure  which  shall  serve  as  the 
items  to  which  prices  are  to  be  affixed  by  the  bidders,  it  is 
necessary  to  select  and  describe  these  units  in  such  a  way  that 
they  can  not  be  misunderstood ;  thus  in  masonry  it  is  better  to 
use  the  cubic  yard  as  a  unit  rather  than  the  perch,  since  this 
latter  has  different  values  in  different  localities.  Also  it  should 
be  clearly  defined  in  the  proposal  itself  in  what  way  these 
measurements  should  be  taken,  as,  for  instance,  in  masonry, 
whether  all  openings  should  be  excluded,  and  in  tunnel  exca- 
vation that  the  measurement  should  include  only  the  material 
excavated  inside  the  given  sectional  boundaries,  and  in  water 
pipe  on  which  bids  are  received  per  foot  in  length  for  the 
various  sizes,  that  the  measurements  should  be  taken  on  the 
center  lines  of  such  pipes,  after  they  are  laid,  etc.  Also  in  the 
case  of  the  furnishing  of  materials,  machinery,  and  appliances, 
the  printed  proposal  should  indicate  where  the  material  is  to  be 
delivered  and  whether  or  not  the  machinery  is  to  be  erected. 
The  failure  to  make  the  proposal  clear  in  these  and  other 
minor  particulars  is  often  the  cause  of  serious  disagreements, 
provoking  delays,  and  some.times  of  considerable  expense. 

68.     Contract  Involving  a  Specific  Performance. 

When  machinery  is  purchased  on  the  basis  of  a  specific  per- 
formance, as  in  the  case  of  pumping  engines,  steam  boilers, 
steam  ships,  and  the  like,  where  a  specific  performance  is  made 
the  basis  of  the  contract  price,  it  is  customary  and  proper  to 
provide  for  specific  additional  sums  for  stated  percentages  of 


FOKMS    OF   PROPOSALS.  81 

excess  of  performance  over  and  above  that  which  forms  the 
basis  of  the  bid,  and  also  for  stated  deductions  from  the  con- 
tract price  for  given  percentages  by  which  the  performance 
fails  to  meet  the  standard.  In  this  way  the  contractor  is  fairly 
paid  for  accomplishing  more  than  he  agreed  to,  and  the  pur- 
chaser obtains  a  fair  reduction  in  price  for  any  failure  to  reach 
the  agreed  standard.  When  a  specific  performance  is  made 
the  basis  of  a  contract  without  these  agreed  premiums  and  dis- 
counts, the  purchaser  is  at  liberty  to  refuse  to  accept  the  work 
at  any  price,  in  case  of  even  a  paitial  failure  to  meet  the  speci- 
fied requirements;  while,  on  the  other  hand,  if  the  contractor 
has  far  exceeded  the  specifications,  he  gets  no  benefit  whatever 
for  the  enhanced  value  of  the  product.  A  specific  perform- 
ance, therefore,  when  made  the  basis  of  the  acceptance  of  a 
piece  of  contract  work  without  these  provisions  for  premiums 
and  discounts  is  a  very  onesided  and  unfair  contract,  and  its 
use  should  be -discouraged  by  engineers. 

In  all  cases  where  a  specific  performance  is  made  the  basis 
of  a  contract  price,  the  conditions  of  this  performance  should 
be  so  clearly  stated  in  the  specifications,  and  the  nature  of  the 
tests  to  determine  this  performance  so  distinctly  described  that 
no  misunderstanding  could  arise  when  the  time  comes  for  mak- 
ing these  tests.  These  descriptions  belong  in  the  specifications 
rather  than  to  the  proposals. 

69.  Contract    Including    Maintenance.     In    the 
cise  of  street  pavements,  especially  where  the  material  is  new 
or  untried,  it  is  common  to  require  the  contractor   to   maintain 
it  for  a  given  period,  at  a  stated  price  per  annum.     In  this  case 
this  maintenance  price  must  also  be  provided  for  in  the  pro- 
posal, as  well  as  the  price  charged  for  first  cost. 

70.  Contract  for  the  Work  Only.    It  is  often  wise 
for  the  principal  to  purchase  materials   himself  which   shall  be 


82  GENERAL    SPECIFICATIONS. 

used  by  the  contractor  in  the  carrying  out  of  the  work.  Thus 
the  principal  may  wish  to  use  a  particular  kind  .or  quality  of 
material  which  he  does  not  wish  to  describe  specifically  in  the 
specifications,  or  which,  if  described,  he  can  not  well  assure 
himself  that  the  contractor  will  furnish.  Especially  is  this  the 
case  with  such  materials  as  can  not  be  clearly  identified  by 
ordinary  methods  of  inspection  ;  as,  for  instance,  various  kinds 
of  paints,  cement,  iron  and  steel,  paving  brick,  besides  a  great 
number  of  specialties  in  the  line  of  manufactured  articles  and 
machines.  Or,  the  contractor  may  not  be  able  to  purchase  this 
material  on  as  favorable  terms  as  the  principal,  because  of  the 
greater  risk  involved  in  the  sale  of  this  material  when  the  con- 
tractor must  be  looked  to  for  payment.  Thus,  when  the  bid- 
ders are  informed  that  the  principal  will  furnish  materials 
which  would  otherwise  cost  the  contractor  large  sums  of 
money,  many  contractors  of  small  means  would  be  encouraged 
to  bid  upon  the  work,  who  otherwise  would  not  be  able  to 
handle  it.  For  these  and  other  reasons,  therefore,  it  is  fre- 
quently wise  for  the  principal  to  purchase  the  material  and  turn 
it  over  to  the  contractor  for  use  in  the  work. 

71.  Proposal  for  Building  a  Dam,  Spillway, 
Levee,  Outlet  Tunnel,  and  Overflow  Chamber. 

To  THE  FIRST  NEW  MEXICO  RESERVOIR  AND  IRRIGATION  Co.. 
ROSWELL,  NEW  MEXICO. 

Gentlemen: — The  undersigned  propose  to  do  all  the  work 
and  furnish  all  of  the  material  in  accordance  with  the  printed  form 
of  contract  and  specifications,  a  copy  of  which  is  herewith 

annexed,  and  bind ,  on  the  acceptance  of  this  proposal, 

to  enter  into  and  execute  a  contract  in  the  form  of  said  enclosed 
specifications  and  contract  for  the  execution  of  said  work  at  the 
prices  named  below,  to  wit: 
Excavation : 

(a)  Earth,  including  all  forms  of  soil,  or  clay,  per  cubic 
yard . 

(b)  Gravel  and  sand,   including  all  forms  and  combina- 
tions of  these  materials,  per  cubic  yard . 

(c)  Loose  rock  in  open  cut,  including  all  kinds  of  loose 
rock  not  requiring  blasting,  per  cubic  yard 


FORMS   OF   PEOPOSALS.  83 

Solid  rock  in  open  cut,   including   all   kinds  of  rock 

requiring  blasting,  per  cubic  yard . 

(e)  Rock  in  tunnel,  including  all  tunnel  work  to  the 
outer  line  of  the  lining  wall,  if  such  be  required,  other- 
wise to  the  lines  of  the  drawings,  per  cubic  yard . 

Fill: 

(#)     Earth,  clay,   gravel   or   sand,   not  rolled,  per  cubic 

(b)  Same  materials  spread  in  courses  and  rolled  dry,  per 
cubic  yard . 

(c)  Same    materials    spread   in  courses,    dampened    and 
rolled,  per  cubic  yard . 

(d)  Same  materials  spread  in   courses,    pulverized,  har- 
rowed, wet    down   and   rolled   thoroughly,  per  cubic 

(e)  Clay    and    gravel    mixed    in    layers,    harrowed,   wet 
down  and  rolled  thoroughly  (clay  puddle),  per  cubic 
yard . 

Loose  rock  dumped  or  thrown  in  as  in   temporary 

dam,  per  cubic  yard . 

Rip  rap  laid  on  face  of  dam,  per  cubic  yard . 

(//)  Facing  rock  laid  dry  with  close  joints  for  distance 
of  4  inches  from  surface  and  rammed,  per  cubic 

yard . 

Masonry : 

(<z)     Rubble  masonry  laid  in  Portland  Cement  Mortar,  as 

described,  per  cubic  yard . 

(3)     Masonry    lining   of   tunnel,  as    described,  per  cubic 

yard,  actual  volume . 

(c)     Dimension  stone  masonry,   laid  in  Portland  Cement 

Mortar,  as  described,  per  cubic  yard . 

Enclosed  is  a  certified  check  for  five  hundred  dollars; 
which  sum  is  to  be  forfeited  to  the  First  New  Mexico  Reservoir 
&  Irrigation  Co.  if  the  party  or  parties  making  this  proposal  fail 
to  enter  into  contract,  with  approved  securities,  within  fifteen 
days  after  the  contract  is  awarded  to  said  party  or  parties. 

Respectfully, 
(Signature  and  address  of  contractors.) 


ST.  Louis,  Mo., 1890. 

NOTE. — Each  bid  shall  be  placed  in  a  sealed  envelope  addressed  to 

" ,  President  First  New  Mexico  Reservoir  &  Irrigation  €o  ,"  care  of 

Consulting  Engineers, ,  St.   Louis,  Mo./'   and  shall  be 


indorsed  ''Proposal  for  building  Dam,  etc." 

The  First  New  Mexico  Reservoir  &  Irrigation  Co.  reserves  the  right 
to  reject  any  or  all  bids. 

J.  &F. 


84  GENERAL    SPECIFICATIONS. 

72.  Proposal  Bond.  In  lieu  of  a  cash  deposit  accom- 
panying the  bid  as  a  guarantee  of  good  faith  and  of  intention 
to  enter  into  contract,  if  the  same  be  awarded  to  the  party,  a 
bond  may  be  received,  duly  signed  and  certified,  which  will 
insure  either  the  signing  of  the  contract,  or  the  payment  of 
such  damages  as  may  result  from  a  failure  to  sign.  These 
damages  would  usually  be  measured  by  the  difference  between 
the  amount  named  by  the  party  furnishing  the  bond,  and  the 
sum  for  which  the  contract  might  finally  be  let,  and  this  is 
usually  named  as  the  amount  of  the  forfeiture  under  the  bond. 
It  is  the  usual  custom  of  the  United  States  Government  to 
require  a  bond  of  this  sort  rather  than  a  cash  deposit.  It  is 
evidently  a  less  hardship  upon  the  contractor  to  furnish  such  a 
bond.  The  following  is  the  form  of  this  document  as  used  by 
the  United  States  Government: 

PROPOSAL  BOND  OR  GUARANTY. 

We, ,    of ,   in  the  State 

of ,  and ,   of , 

in  the  State  of ,  hereby   guarantee    and   bind 

ourselves  and  each  of  us,  our  and  each   of   our  heirs,  executors 

and  administrators,  to  the  effect  that  if  the  bid  of 

herewith    accompanying,,  dated ,  1894,    for   furnishing 

all  materials  and  labor,  and  constructing  the  Power  House  and 
Office  Building  for  the  8oo-ft.  Lock  at  St.  Mary's  Falls  Canal, 
shall  be  accepted,  in  whole,  or  in  part,  within  sixty  (60)  days 
from  the  date  of  the  opening  of  proposals,  the  said  bidder — , 

will,  within  ten  (10)  days  after  being  notified 

of  such  acceptance,  enter  into  a  contract  with  the  United 
States  in  accordance  with  the  terms  and  conditions  of  the 
advertisement,  and  will  give  bond  with  good  and  sufficient 
sureties  for  the  faithful  and  proper  fulfillment  of  the  same. 
And  in  case  the  said  bidder —  shall  fail  to  enter  into  contract 
within  the  said  ten  (10)  days  with  the  proper  officer  of  the 
United  States,  and  furnish  good  and  sufficient  bond  for  the 
faithful  performance  of  the  same  according  to  the  terms  of  said 
bid  and  advertisement,  we  and  each  of  us  hereby  stipulate  and 
guarantee,  and  bind  ourselves  and  each  of  us,  our  and  each  of 
our  heirs,  executors  and  administrators,  to  pay  unto  the  United 
States  the  difference  in  money  between  the  amount  of  the  bid 
of  the  said  bidder — ,  and  the  amount  for  which  the  proper 
officer  of  the  United  States  may  contract  with  another  party  to 


FORMS   OF   PROPOSALS.  85 

furnish  .said  materials  and  labor  and  construct  the  Power  House 
and  Office  Building  as  specified,  if  the  latter  amount  be  in 
excess  of  the  former,  for  the  whole  work  covered  by  the 
proposal. 

WITNESSES  : 

,  [SEAL] 

.  [SEAL] 

Dated ,  1894. 

[Executed  in  triplicate.] 

JUSTIFICATION  OF    GUARANTORS. 

STATE  OF 


County  of- 


tss. 


I, ,  one   of    the  guarantors  named  in   the  within 

guaranty,  do  swear  that  I  am  pecuniarily  worth  the  sum  of 
forty  thousand  dollars,  over  and  above  all  my  debts  and 
liabilities. 

[Signature  of  Guarantor] 

Before  me, 
[Signature  of  Officer  administering  oath,  with  seal,  if  any] 


STATE  OF 

County  of- 


I, ,  one  of  the  guarantors  named   in  the  within 

guaranty,  do  swear  that  I  am  pecuniarily  worth  the  sum  of 
forty  thousand  dollars,  over  and  above  all  my  debts  and 
liabilities. 

[Signature  of  Guarantor] 

Before  me, 
[Signature  of  officer  administering  oath,  with  seal,  if  any.] 


CERTIFICATE. 

I, ,  do  hereby   certify  that , 

and ,  the  guarantors  above  named,  are  person- 
ally known  to  me,  and  that,  to  the  best  of  my  knowledge  and 
belief,  er.ch  is  pecuniarily  worth,  over  and  above  all  his  debts 
and  liabilities,  the  sum  stated  in  the  accompanying  affidavit 
subscribed  by  him. 

[Signature  of  certifying  official.] 

NOTE. — The  certificate  may  be  given  separately  as  to  each  guar- 
antor, and  modified  accordingly. 

U.  S.  ENG.  CORPS. 


86  GENEKAL    SPECIFICATIONS. 

ENGINEERING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

73.  Engineering  Specifications  Defined.     Engi- 
neering specifications  consist  of  a  series  of  specific  provisions 
each  one   of  which   defines  and  fixes  some  one  element  of  the 
contract.      These  clauses  relate,  in  general, 

First:     To  the  work  to  be  done. 

Second:  To  the  business  relations  of  the  two  parties  to 
the  contract. 

In  the  first  sense,  the  specifications  supplement  and  explain 
the  plans  (if  there  be  any)  and  define  the  character  of  the 
materials  and  the  methods  to  be  employed  on  the  work,  or  if 
unaccompanied  by  plans  they  embody  the  principles  and  rules 
in  accordance  with  which  the  plans  must  be  drawn  and  the 
work  executed.  In  this  sense  the  specifications  enable  the 
bidder  to  estimate  the  cost  of  the  proposed  work  and  after  the 
contract  is  let  they  serve  as  the  rules  of  inspection  and  accept- 
ance of  such  work. 

In  the  second  sense  the  specifications  define  the  rights  and 
duties  of  the  two  parties  to  the  contract  to  each  other  and 
embody  proper  provisions  for  changes  in  the  plans,  and  for  the 
settlement  of  disputes  which  may  arise ;  they  also  describe  the 
conditions  of  payment,  acceptance,  etc.,  etc. 

74.  Classes  Of  Specifications.     There  may  be  said 
to  be  three  general  classes  of  engineering  specifications: 

(#)     Specifications  accompanying  complete  detail  plans: 

(£)     Specifications  accompanying  a  general  plan  only. 

(c)  Specifications  unaccompanied  by  any  plan,  and  com- 
monly known  as  General  Specifications. 

All  of  these  classes  of  specifications  are  in  common  use 
and  each  has  its  own  particular  sphere  of  usefulness. 

(a)  Thus  when  the  design  is  novel,  or  when  the  engineer 
wishes  a  particular  design  carried  out,  he  usually  prepares  full 


ENGINEERING    SPECIFICATIONS.  87 

detail  plans,  or  drawings,  showing  how  all  parts  of  the  proposed 
work  shall  be  done. 

In  the  case  of  public  works,  also,  when  the  law  requires  the 
contract  to  be  let  in  open  competition,  and  also  specifies  that  it 
shall  be  let  to  the  lowest  bidder,  it  is  almost  necessary  to  pre- 
pare full  detail  plans  in  .order  to  avoid  an  inadequate  or  inferior 
design  being  put  into  competition  with  better  ones,  and,  from 
its  diminished  cost,  receiving  the  contract. 

(£)  If  the  engineer  can  limit  the  bidders  to  a  selected 
class  of  reliable  contractors,  who  have  reputations  to  lose  if 
they  should  do  inferior  work,  he  may  prepare  very  general 
plans  only  and  allow  the  contractor  to  make  the  details  to  suit 
himself,  in  accordance,  however,  with  certain  specific  require- 
ments as  given  in  the  specifications,  and  subject  to  the  approval 
of  the  engineer. 

(c)  If  the  engineer  is  indifferent  as  to  even  the  general 
design,  provided  the  finished  work  answers  equally  well  certain 
prescribed  demands,  as  given  in  a  set  of  general  specifications, 
he  may  not  prepare  any  plans  whatever,  but  leave  the  contrac- 
tor (who  must  now  also  be  chosen  by  the  engineer  or  only 
responsible  parties  allowed  to  bid)  to  use  any  design  he  may 
choose,  such  designs  to  be  submitted,  however,  with  his  bid, 
and  this,  together  with  the  general  specifications  to  form  the 
basis  of  the  contract. 

75.  General  and  Specific  Clauses.  Any  specifica- 
tion may  be  said  to  be  composed  of  two  kinds  of  clauses,  gen- 
eral and  specific. 

All  those  clauses  which  relate  to  the  business  portion  of 
the  contract,  or  which  go  to  define  the  relations  of  the  parties 
to  the  civil  contract  as  a  business  proposition,  may  be  said  to 
be  the  general  clauses. 

All  those  clauses  which  are  descriptive  of  the  engineering 
or  structural  features  of  the  design,  either  as  explanatory  of  the 


88  GENERAL   SPECIFICATIONS. 

plans,  or  of  the  materials  to  be  used,    or  of  the   methods  to  be 
employed,  may  be  called  the  specific  clauses. 

Since   the    general    clauses    are    common    to    all  kinds  of 
specifications.,  they  will  be  discussed  first. 


THE  GENERAL  CLAUSES  IN  SPECIFICATIONS. 

76.    The  General  Clauses  in  Specifications  may 

relate  to  any  or  all  of  the  following  subjects : 

(1)  Time  of  commencement,   rate   of  progress,  and  time 
of  completion  of  the  work. 

(2)  As  to  the  character  of  the  workmen  to  be  employed. 

(3)  Suitable  appliances  to  be  used. 

(4)  Monthly  estimates  of  work  done  and  payments  to  be 
made. 

(5)  Provision   for  inquiring   into   the   correctness  of   the 
monthly  estimates. 

(6)  Reserving  a  certain  percentage  as  a  repair  fund,  for 
a  stated  period  after  completion. 

(7)  Conditions  of  the  final  estimate. 

(8)  Engineer's    measurements    and    classifications    final 
and  conclusive. 

(9)  Determination    of  damages  sustained  by    failure  to 
complete  the  work  within  the  time  agreed  upon,  or  as  extended. 

(10)  The  discharge  of  unpaid  claims  of  work  men  and 
material  men. 

(n)     No  claims  for  damages  on  account  of  suspension  of 
work. 

(12)  No  claims  for  damages  on  account  of  delay. 

(13)  No  claims  on  account  of  unforeseen  difficulties. 

(14)  Protection  of  finished  work. 

(15)  Protection  of  property  and  lives. 


THE   GENERAL   CLAUSES   IN    SPECIFICATIONS.  89 

(16)  Protection  against  claims  for  the  use  of  patents. 

(17)  Assignment  of  contract. 

(18)  Contractor  not  released  by  subcontracts. 

(19)  Abandonment  of  contract. 

(20)  Cancellation  of  contract  for  default  of  contractor. 

(21)  Workmen's  quarters  and  other  temporary  buildings, 

(22)  Cleaning  up  after  completion. 

(23)  Removal  of  condemned  material. 

(24)  Relations  to  other  contractors. 

(25)  Provision  for  drainage. 

(26)  Provision  for  public  traffic. 

(27)  Contractor  to  keep  foreman  or  head  workman,  and 
also  copy  of  plans  and  specifications  on  the  ground. 

(28)  Cost  of  examination  of  completed  work. 

(29)  Faults    to    be    corrected    at    any   time   before    final 
acceptance. 

(30)  Surveys,  measurements,  and  estimates  of  quantities 
not  guaranteed  to  be  correct. 

(31)  The  contract  subject  to  interpretation   and   change 
by  the  engineer. 

(32)  Settlement  of  disputes. 

(33)  Extra  work. 

(34)  Definition  of  "Engineer"  and  "Contractor." 

(35)  Documents  composing  the  contract. 

(36)  Meaning  understood. 

77.  Explanatory  Note.  In  all  that  follows  on  the 
subject  of  specifications,  after  explaining  and  discussing  a  given 
subject,  one  or  more  illustrations  will  be  given  in  solid  type, 
from  actual  specifications,  together  with  the  initials  of  the 
author.  The  full  name  and  professional  engagement  of  the 
author  can  then  be  found  by  referring  to  the  Key  to  Personal 
References,  page  5.  In  general  the  latest  practice  only  of  the 
engineers  quoted  in  this  way  will  be  cited.  It  must  also  be 


90  GENERAL    SPECIFICATIONS. 

understood  that  in  every  case  the  gentlemen  so  quoted  have 
themselves  selected  the  sample  specifications  used  and  have 
consented  to  such  use. 

78.  Time  of  Commencement,  Rate  of  Progress, 
and  Time  of  Completion  of  the  Work.  It  is  usual  to 
make  the  time  of  commencement  of  the  work  as  soon  after  the 
signing  of  the  contract  as  is  thought  practical,  as,  for  instance, 
ten,  fifteen,  or  thirty  days,  depending  on  the  character  of  the 
work. 

The  rate  of  progress  is  specified  in  order  to  give  the  engi- 
neer authority  for  canceling  the  contract  if  the  rate  of  progress 
is  such  as  to  indicate  that  the  contractor  will  certainly  be  unable 
to  complete  the  work  on  time,  or  at  all.  Thus  he  may  be 
obliged  to  abandon  the  work  altogether,  or  he  may  choose  to 
do  so,  in  which  case,  if  rate  of  progress  is  specified,  the  parties 
of  the  first  part  need  not  wait  for  the  full  time  for  completion 
to  arrive  before  being  able  to  take  the  work  from  the  hands  of 
the  contractor  and  complete  it  by  hiring  the  labor  and  purchas- 
ing the  materials,  or  by  reletting  it  to  another  contractor. 

The  time  of  completion  is  nearly  always  stated,  and 
while  the  time  allowed  should  be  ample  it  should  be  only  such 
as  is  required  when  a  reasonable  degree  of  diligence  is  exer- 
cised on  the  part  of  the  contractor. 

If,  for  any  sufficient  reason,  the  contractor  is  delayed  in 
his  work,  for  reasons  beyond  his  control,  the  time  of  comple- 
tion is  usually  extended  by  the  principal  by  a  corresponding 
length  of  time,  and  then  this  extended  period  fixes  the  required, 
or  specified  date  of  completion. 

And  the  said  party  of  the  second  part  further  agrees  that 
he  will  commence  the  work  herein  contracted  to  be  done 
within  twenty  days  from  the  date  of  this  contract;  that  the  rate 
of  progress  of  his  work  shall  be  such  as,  in  the  opinion  of  the 
Engineer,  is  necessary  for  completion  within  the.  time  herein 
specified,  and  that  he  will  so  conduct  the  said  work  that  on  or 
before  July  i,  1899,  the  whole  work  covered  by  this  contract 
and  specification  shall  be  entirely  completed.  A.  F. 


THE   GENEKAL   CLAUSES   IN    SPECIFICATIONS.  91 

79.  As  to  the  Character  of  the  Workmen  to  be 

Employed.      In  order  to  secure  good  work  it  is   necessary  to 

• 
employ  skilled  workmen.      The  engineer   must   therefore  have 

some  control  over  the  character  of  the  labor  employed  by  the 
contractor.  This  is  obtained  by  specifying  that  only  skilled 
labor  shall  be  employed  and  giving  to  the  engineer  the  power 
of  discharge  over  any  laborer,  mechanic,  foreman,  or  superin- 
tendent employed  by  the  contractor  on  the  work.  It  is  also 
customary  to  provide  that  this  power  shall  extend  to  cases  of 
disobedience  of  instructions,  impudence  to  engineer  or  inspect- 
ors, drunkenness,  etc.,  as  shown  in  the  following  illustration: 

And  the  said  party  of  the  second  part  further  agrees  to 
employ  only  competent,  skillful  men  to  do  the  work ;  and  that 
whenever  the  Engineer  shall  inform  said  pony  of  the  second 
part  in  writing  that  any  man  on  the  work  is,  in  his  opinion, 
incompetent,  or  unfaithful,  or  disorderly,  such  man  shall  be 
discharged  from  the  work,  and  shall  not  again  be  employed 
on  it.  A.  F. 

80.  Suitable  Appliances  to  be  Used.    If  not  pre- 
vented by  a  special  clause  in  the  specifications,  contractors  who 
are  unprovided    with  suitable  mechanical  appliances  for  doing 
the  work  properly  will  often    undertake    to1  perform  the  work 
with   cheap    and   inadequate   means,   which   would    necessarily 
result  in  faulty  construction,   or  in    delaying  the    work.     It  is 
customary,  therefore,  to   prescribe   that  all   appliances  shall  be 
suitable    and    adequate  to    the    purpose,    and    subject    to    the 
approval    of  the  engineer.     It  is  not  wise,  however,  to  specify 
particular  methods  or  means  of  doing  the  work,  since  if    for 
any  reason    a    partial  failure  should  result,  the  contractor  will 
endeavor  to  obtain  personal   release  by  charging  failure  to  the 
specified  appliances  or  methods.      A  specification  like  the  fol- 
lowing is  therefore  recommended. 

The  contractor  is  to  use  such  methods  and  appliances  for 
the  performance  of  all  the  operations  connected  with  the  work 
embraced  under  this  contract  as  will  secure  a  satisfactory  quality 
of  work  and  a  rate  of  progress  which,  in  the  opinion  of  the 
engineer,  will  secure  the  completion  of  the  work  within  the 


92  GENEKAL    SPECIFICATIONS. 

time  herein  'specified.  If,  at  any  time  before  the  commence- 
ment, or  during  the  progress  of  the  work,  such  methods  or 
appliances  appear  to  the  engineer  to  be  inefficient  or  inappro- 
priate for  securing  the  quality  of  the  work  required  or  the  said 
rate  of  progress,  he  may  order  the  contractor  to  increase  their 
efficiency  or  to  improve  their  character,  and  the  contractor 
must  conform  to  such  order;  but  the  failure  of  the  engineer 
to  demand  such  increase  of  efficiency  or  improvement  shall  not 
relieve  the  contractor  from  his  obligation  to  secure  the  quality 
of  work  and  the  rate  of  progress  established  in  these  specifi- 
cations. A.  F. 

81.  Monthly  Estimates  of  Work  Done  and  Pay- 
ments to  be  Made.  It  is  customary,  in  all  kinds  of  engi- 
neering construction,  for  the  engineer  in  charge  to  estimate  at 
the  end  of  each  month  the  quantity  of  material  furnished  on 
the  ground,  and  of  work  done.  These  estimates  are  approxi- 
mate only  and  serve  as  a  basis  for  making  monthly  payments  to 
the  contractor.  It  is  customary  to  reserve  from  ten  to  twenty- 
five  per  cent,  of  these  monthly  estimates  until  the  final  comple- 
tion of  the  work.  By  means  of  these  monthly  payments  the 
contractor  is  enabled  to  carry  on  the  work  to  final  completion 
with  a  much  smaller  capital  than  would  be  required  if  no  pay- 
ments were  made  until  the  work  was  finished.  The  percentage 
reserved  from  the  monthly  payments  is  intended  to  serve  as  a 
guarantee  of  final  completion,  and  as  a  fund  to  draw  upon 
when  the  time  of  final  settlement  arrives,  for  the  payment  of 
damages  resulting  from  the  work  not  having  been  performed 
within  the  specified  time,  or  for  otner  purposes  as  indicated 
subsequently  in  these  general  specifications.  In  the  matter  of 
payment  for  materials  furnished,  but  not  incorporated  finally 
into  the  work,  it  is  usually  considered  safe  to  include  in  the 
monthly  estimates  all  materials  delivered,  either  upon  the 
ground,  that  is  to  say  along  the  line  of  the  work,  and  subject  to 
the  inspection  and  control  of  the  engineer,  and  also  to  pay  for 
materials  and  machinery  furnished  and  stored  where  they  are 
under  the  control  and  subject  to  the  inspection  and  approval  of 
the  engineer.  Of  course  no  material  would  be  included  in 


THE   GENERAL   CLAUSES   IN    SPECIFICATIONS.  93 

these  monthly  estimates  which  had  not  been  duly  inspected  and 
accepted.  The  following  is  a  CDinmon  form  for  this  speci- 
fication. 

In  order  to  enable  the  said  contractor  to  prosecute  the 
work  advantageously,  the  engineer  shall,  once  a  month,  on  or 
about  the  last  day  of  each  month,  make  an  estimate  in  writing 
of  the  amount  of  work  done,  and  materials  delivered  to  be 
used  in  the  work,  and  of  the  value  thereof,  according  to  the 
terms  of  this  contract.  The  first  such  estimate  shall  be  of  the 
amount  or  quantity  and  value  of  the  work  done  and  materials 
delivered  since  the  party  of  the  second  part  commenced  the 
performance  of  this  contract  on  his  part.  And  every  subse- 
quent estimate  (except  the  final  one)  shall  be  of  the  amount  or 
quantity  and  value  of  the  work  done  since  the  last  preceding 
estimate  was  made.  And  such  estimates  of  amount  and  quan- 
tity shall  not  be  required  to  be  made  by  strict  measurement  or 
with  exactness ;  but  they  may,  at  the  option  of  the  engineer,  be 
approximate  only. 

Upon  each  such  estimate  being  made  the  parties  of  the 
first  part  will  pay  to  the  party  of  the  second  part  the  following 
proportions  or  percentages  thereof,  to  wit: 

85  per  cent,  thereof  up  to  and  until  such  time  as  the  total 
estimated  value  of  the  work  done  and  materials  delivered  shall 
amount  to  $1,000,000. 

90  per  cent,  thereof  after  the  total  estimated  value  of 
such  wrork  and  materials  delivered  shall  have  amounted  to 
$1,000,000,  until  the  party  of  the  first  part  shall  have  fully 
and  completely  performed  this  contract  on  his  part. 

A.F. 

82.  Provision  for  Inquiring  into  the  Correct- 
ness of  the  Monthly  Estimates.  The  monthly  estimates 
made  by  the  engineer  acting  as  the  agent  of  the  party  of  the 
first  part,  may  be  held  to  be  binding  upon  this  party,  in  case 
he  has  either  made  a  mistake  in  the  quantity  of  work  done,  or 
material  furnished,  or  has  entered  into  collusion  with  the 
contractor,  and  rendered  false  returns.  Since  the  engineer  is 
the  agent  of  the  party  of  the  first  part,  his  acts  would  bind  his 
principal,  after  payment  had  been  made  on  the  same,  if  it  were 
not  expressly  provided  that  the  party  of  the  first  part  shall  not 
be  estopped,  or  prevented,  from  determining  by  other  means 


94  GENERAL    SPECIFICATIONS. 

the  amount  of  work  done  and  material  furnished.  In  other 
words  the  party  of  the  first  part  should  not  necessarily  be  bound 
by  either  the  monthly  or  final  estimates  rendered  by  his  agent, 
and  which  are  intended  to  serve  as  the  basis  of  payment.  It  is 
understood,  of  course,  that  the  contractor  always  has  this  privi- 
lege of  inquiry  and  proof  of  the  correctness  of  the  estimates. 
It  is  customary,  therefore,  to  insert  a  clause  like  the  following. 

And  it  is  hereby  expressly  agreed  and  understood  by  and 
between  the  parties  hereto  that  the  said  parties  of  the  first  part, 
their  successors  and  assigns,  shall  not,  nor  shall  any  depart- 
ment of  the  City  of  New  York,  be  precluded  or  estopped  by 
any  return  or  certificate  made  or  given  by  any  engineer, 
inspector,  or  other  officer,  agent  or  appointee  of  said  Aqueduct 
Commissioners,  or  of  said  parties  of  the  first  part,  under  or  in 
pursuance  of  anything  in  this  agreement  contained,  from  at  any 
time  showing  the  true  and  correct  amount  and  character  of  the 
work  which  shall  have  been  done  and  materials  which  shall 
have  been  furnished  by  the  said  party  of  the  second  part,  or 
by  any  other  persons  under  this  agreement. 

A.  F. 

83.  Reserving  a  Certain  Percentage  as  a  Repair 
Fund,  for  a  Stated  Period  after  Completion.  In 
order  to  provide  foi  inherent  defects  in  the  work  which  may 
not  appear  on  the  surface,  or  until  after  the  construction  has 
been  in  service  for  some  time,  it  is  often  desirable  to  retain  a 
portion  of  the  total  cost  of  the  work  for  a  specified  period 
of  time,  on  which  sum  the  party  of  the  first  part  is  authorized 
under  .the  specifications  to  draw  for  the  repairing  or 
correcting  of  any  and  all  faults  or  defects  which  may  become 
apparent  by  use  within  the  specified  period.  It  is  usual,  how- 
ever, to  give  the  contractor  the  privilege  of  making  such  repairs 
under  the  direction,  and  subject  to  the  approval,  of  the  engi- 
neer, in  place  of  having  the  engineer  make  such  repairs  and 
charge  them  against  the  reserve  fund.  This  clause  may  read 
as  follows. 

The    contractor   hereby    further    agrees    to    make    all    the 

needed  repairs  on  the  said  work  during  a  period  of months 

after  its  final  completion ;  and  he  hereby  further  agrees  that  the 


THE   GENEEAL   CLAUSES   IN    SPECIFICATIONS.  95 

party  of  the  first  part  is  authorized  to  retain  out  of  the  moneys 
payable,  or  to  become  payable,  to  him.  under  this  agreement, 
the  sum  of  five  per  cent,  on  the  amount  of  the  contract,  and  to 
expend  the  same,  or  so  much  thereof  as  may  be  required,  in 
making  the  aforesaid  repairs  to  the  satisfaction  of  the  engineer, 
if  within  three  days  after  the  delivery  or  mailing  of  a  notice  in 
writing  to  the  contractor,  or  his  agent  or  attorney,  he  or  they 
shall  neglect  to  make  the  aforesaid  needed  repairs;  and  he 
hereby  further  agrees  to  be  responsible  for  any  accident  that 
may  occur  on  account  of  the  defective  condition  of  the  work. 

E.  A.  F. 

84.     Conditions  of  the   Final  Estimate.     If,  in 

the  opinion  of  the  engineer,  the  contractor  has  completed  his 
work  in  all  respects  in  accordance  with  the  terms  of  the  con- 
tract, he  should  proceed  with  due  diligence  to  make  the  final 
estimate  of  all  quantities  in  the  several  clauses,  and  to  certify  to 
his  principal  the  amount  of  money  due  to  the  contractor,  and 
also  the  amounts  which  should  be  held  in  reserve  under  the 
various  clauses  of  this  character  in  the  specifications.  The 
party  of  the  first  part  thereupon  should  immediately  pay  to  the 
contractor  such  moneys  as  are  legally  due  him,  provided  this 
party  is  satisfied  that  the  final  estimates  submitted  by  the  engi- 
neer are  correct.  If  this  party  should  have  any  doubts  on  this 
point,  he  should  be  at  liberty,  under  the  specifications,  to 
inquire  further  into  the  correctness  of  such  estimates.  This 
portion  of  the  contract  may  be  stated  as  follows. 

It  is  further  mutually  agreed,  that  whenever  this  contract, 
in  the  opinion  of  the  engineer,  shall  be  completely  performed 
on  the  part  of  the  contractor,  the  engineer  shall  proceed  with 
all  reasonable  diligence  to  measure  up  the  work,  and  shall 
make  out  the  final  estimates  for  the  same  and  shall  certify  the 
same.  The  party  of  the  second  part  will  then,  excepting  for 
the  cause  herein  specified,  pay  to  the  contractor,  \vithin  —  days 
after  the  execution  of  said  certificate  the  remainder  which  shall 
be  found  to  be  due,  excepting  therefrom  such  sum  or  sums  as 
may  be  lawfully  retained  under  any  of  the  provisions  of  this 
contract:  Provided  that  nothing  herein  contained  shall  be  con- 
strued to  affect  the  right  hereby  reserved,  to  reject  the  whole  or 
any  portion  of  the  aforesaid  work,  should  the  said  certificate  be 
found  to  be  inconsistent  with  the  terms  of  this  agreement,  or 
otherwise  improperly  given.  E.  A.  F. 


96  GENERAL   SPECIFICATIONS. 

85.  Engineer's  Measurements  and  Classifica- 
tions Final  and  Conclusive.  In  order  to  avoid  disputes 
as  to  both  the  quantity  and  the  quality  of  the  work  done,  it  is 
customary  to  specify  that  the  measurements  and  classifications 
of  the  engineer  shall  be  final  and  conclusive,  and  binding  upon 
both  parties.  This  is  a  very  important  provision,  and  places  a 
great  responsibility  upon  the  engineer,  while  it  binds,  at  the 
same  time,  the  two  principals  to  the  contract,  and  forces  them 
to  submit  to  the  engineer's  decisions,  except  as  some  special 
provision  such  as  that  stated  in  article  81  allows  one  or  both  of 
the  parties  to  examine  into  the  correctness  of  the  engineer's 
estimates.  As  a  matter  of  course  either  party  is  always  at  lib- 
erty to  examine  questions  of  fact  and,  so  far  as  it  is  practicable, 
to  remeasure  quantities  at  subsequent  times.  Either  party  would 
be  at  liberty  in  case  of  a  suit  at  law  to  have  such  quantities 
remeasured  to  determine  such  question  of  fact,  but  so  far  as  the 
classification  of  the  material  is  a  matter  of  opinion  on  the  part 
of  the  engineer,  and  so  far  as  measurements  of  quantities  have 
become  impracticable  at  a  subsequent  period,  to  this  extent  a 
clause  such  as  is  here  proposed  binds  absolutely  both  parties  to 
the  contract.  Neither  party  now  has  any  release  from  the 
decision  of  the  engineer,  except  on  one  of  two  grounds : 

First.  Either  party  may  bring  a  suit  in  equity,  in  which 
case  the  terms  of  the  contract  are  not  made  the  basis  of  the 
suit ;  or 

Second.  Either  party  may  enter  a  plea  of  fraud  on  the 
part  of  the  engineer,  which,  if  sustained,  would  of  course 
vitiate  the  decisions  of  such  engineer.  Neither  of  these  grounds 
offers  much  encouragement  to  either  party.  A  case  could  not 
be  sustained  in  equity  contrary  to  the  terms  of  an  expressed 
written  agreement,  except  it  could  be  shown  that  gross  and 
violent  injustice  had  been  worked  by  a  strict  compliance  with 
its  terms.  Neither  is  it  desirable  in  a  civil  suit  to  enter  a  plea 
of  fraud,  since  this  is  very  difficult  to  maintain,  and  can  only  be 


THE   GENEKAL   CLAUSES   IN    SPECIFICATIONS.  97 

maintained  by  proving  the  moral  depravity  of  the  engineer.  A 
clause  such  as  the  following,  therefore,  if  incorported  in  a  con- 
tract and  agreed  to  by  both  parties  places  both  parties  abso- 
lutely at  the  mercy  of  such  engineer,  and  the  contractor  should 
never  submit  to  it,  if  he  has  reason  to  suppose  that  the  engi- 
neer is  likely  to  act  unfairly  toward  him  under  the  authority 
thus  granted  to  him.  As  a  rule,  however,  this  confidence 
which  is  reposed  in  the  engineer  by  both  parties  to  the  contract 
is  not  misplaced.  Although  the  engineer  is  paid  for  his  services 
by  one  of  the  parties  to  the  contract,  he  understands  that  his 
position  is  a  judicial  one,  and  not  that  of  an  advocate  or 
partisan,  and  that  it  is  his  business  to  see  that  justice  is  done 
to  both  of  the  parties.  The  clause  usually  reads  as  follows. 

It  shall  be  understood  and  agreed  by  the  parties  hereto, 
that  due  measurements  shall  be  taken  during  the  progress  of 
the  work,  and  the  estimate  of  the  engineer  shall  be  final  and 
conclusive  evidence  of  the  amount  of  work  performed  by  the 
contractor  under  and  by  virtue  of  this  agreement,  and  shall  be 
taken  as  the  full  measure  of  compensation  to  be  received  by  the 
contractor.  The  aforesaid  estimates  shall  be  based  upon  the 
contract  prices  for  the  furnishing  of  all  the  different  materials 
and  labor,  and  the  performance  of  all  the  work  mentioned  in 
this  specification  and  agreement,  and  when  there  may  be  any 
ambiguity  therein,  the  engineer's  instructions  shall  be  consid- 
ered explanatory,  and  shall  be  of  binding  force.  E.  A.  F. 

86.  Determination  of  Damages  Sustained  by 
Failure  to  Complete  the  Work  within  the  Time 
Agreed  upon,  or  as  Extended.  It  is  seldom  that  a  spe- 
cific performance  of  any  contract  can  be  enforced.  In  other 
words,  either  of  the  parties  to  almost  any  civil  contract  is  at 
liberty  to  break  the  same,  or  fail  to  carry  it  out,  for  which  fail- 
ure, however,  the  law  provides  that  the  party  breaking  the 
contract  shall  pay  a  penalty.  The  amount  of  this  penalty 
usually  remains  to  be  ascertained  after  the  contract  has  been 
broken,  and  when  the  time  of  settlement  arrives.  The  legal 
remedies  for  breach  of  contract  are  given  in  Arts.  49-53.  It 


98  GENERAL   SPECIFICATIONS. 

is  sufficient  to  remark  here,  that  in  determining  the  amount  of 
the  damages,  the  law  will  only  allow  the  actual  proven  dam- 
ages to  be  collected,  and  always  discourages  any  constructive, 
or  conventional,  or  arbitrary  estimate  of  such  damages.  In 
other  words,  the  damages  are  the  compensation  to  the  injured 
party,  requisite  to  repay  him  for  his  loss,  which  can  be  traced 
directly  to  the  breach  of  contract. 

While  damages  to  the  extent  of  the  actual  injury  sustained 
can  always  be  recovered,  by  a  suit  at  law,  in  the  case  of  a 
breach  of  contract,  it  is  customary  in  the  writing  of  engineering 
specifications  to  insert  one  or  more  clauses  defining  the  amount 
of  the  damages  which  it  is  agreed  by  the  parties  will  be  sus- 
tained in  case  of  certain  specific  failures  to  carry  out  the  con- 
tract ;  and  since  these  failures  are  assumed  to  be  on  the  part  of 
the  contractor,  and  since  money  is  usually  due  him  from  the 
other  party,  it  becomes  possible,  in  this  case,  to  remunerate  the 
injured  party  by  withholding  a  certain  sum  of  money  from  the 
contractor  who  is  guilty  of  the  breach  of  contract.  If  a  specific 
agreement  to  this  effect  be  entered  into  by  the  parties,  in 
advance,  the  compensation  for  the  injury  done  because  of  a 
specific  breach  of  the  contract,  may  be  recovered  by  simply 
withholding  such  a  sum  from  the  contractor,  and  paying  over 
to  him  in  final  settlement  the  remainder.  Because,  therefore, 
of  the  facility  with  which  such  a  settlement  can  be  accom- 
plished, and  also  to  further  provide  against  such  a  contingency 
arising  by  furnishing  to  the  contractor  a  sufficient  motive  to 
prevent  such  specific  breaches,  and  furthermore,  in  order  to 
avoid  a  suit  at  law  for  the  recovery  of  such  compensation,  it 
has  become  customary  to  insert  what  is  commonly  called  a 
"penalty  clause."  * 

While  recovery  can  be  had  by  a  suit  at  law  for  the  actual 
damages  sustained  for  any  breach  of  the  contract,  either  with 
or  without  a  specific  clause  to  this  effect,  the  penalty  or  dam- 

*The  reader  is  requested  to  refer  to  Arts.  51-53  for  a  discussion  of  the  legal  phases 
of  this  question* 


THE   GENERAL  CLAUSES   IN   SPECIFICATIONS.  99 

age  clause  in  the  specifications  usually  refers  to  one  or  more 
specific  kinds  of  breach  of  contract,  the  more  common  one 
being  that  of  failure  to  complete  the  work  within  the  time 
agreed  upon.  The  object  of  a  penalty  clause  covering  this 
particular  kind  of  breach  of  contract  is  rather  to  insure  comple- 
tion of  the  contract  within  the  time  specified  than  to  recover 
damages  for  a  failure  to  do  so.  For  this  reason  it  has  been 
commonly  supposed  if  a  heavy  penalty  were  provided  for  a 
failure  of  this  kind,  it  would  serve  as  a  strong  motive  to  the 
contractor  to  hasten  the  work.  This  being  the  object  of  such  a 
clause  it  has  been  common  to  specify  a  penalty  or  damage  of 
so  many  dollars  per  day,  for  each  and  every  day  elapsing  after 
the  date  agreed  upon  for  the  completion,  before  the  work  is 
finally  completed,  the  sum  so  named  being  often  a  very  extrav- 
agant one. 

There  are  several  ways  of  stating  this  clause,  some  of 
which  are  very  much  better  than  others.  The  following  are 
the  more  usual  forms : 

I.  Provision  for  a  specific  '"'•penalty."     When  a  specific 
4 'penalty"  is  named  for  either  a  particular  or  for  any  breach  of 
the  contract,  whether  this  sum  named  be  a  per  diem,  or  a  gross 
amount,  the  court  will  usually  construe  it  as  meaning  that  such 
a  sum  is  a  fund  provided   in  the  specifications  for  the  purpose 
of  meeting  such  damages  as  may  result  from  a  breach  of  the 
contract,  and  that  only  the  actual  damages  sustained  and  proved 
in  a  suit  at  law  can  be  recovered  from    such   fund.     In  other 
words,  a  penalty  clause  so  stated  has  little  or  no  force,  since 
the  law  provides  exactly  the  same  remedy  for  any  breach  of 
contract,  without  a  specific  agreement. 

II.  The  naming  of  a  per  diem,  or  gross  sum,  as  being 
the  "ascertained  and  liquidated  damages"  which  will  be  sus- 
tained by  the  injured  party  for  a   specific   breach    of    contract 
therein  named,  this  usually  being  for  failure   to  complete   the 
work  within  the  time  specified.     In  this  case  the  word  "penalty" 


100  GENEKAL   SPECIFICATIONS. 

is  not  used,  and  if  it  can  be  made  to  appear  on  trial  that  both 
parties  to  the  agreement  really  intended  that  the  sum  named 
should  be  forfeited  in  case  of  the  failure  therein  described,  and 
provided  further  this  sum  is  not  too  extravagant  and  unreason- 
able, and  provided  the  fact  of  failure  and  consequent  liability 
be  fully  established,  then  and  in  that  case  the  law  will  sustain 
the  damage  clause,  and  the  injured  party  will  be  allowed  to 
deduct  it  from  any  moneys  due  the  contractor,  or  if  this  fund 
be  insufficient,  he  may  even  sue  the  contractor  and  his  bonds- 
men and  recover  the  remainder.  The  following  is  a  good 
example  of  this  method  of  stating  such  a  clause : 

And  the  said  party  of  the  second  part  hereby  further 
agrees  that  the  said  parties  of  the  first  part  shall  be  and  they 
are  hereby  authorized  to  deduct  and  retain  out  of  the  moneys 
which  may  be  due  or  become  due  to  the  said  party  of  the  second 
part,  under  this  agreement,  as  damages  for  the  non-completion 
of  the  work  aforesaid  within  the  time  hereinbefore  stipulated 
for  its  completion,  or  within  such  further  time  as  in  accordance 
with  the  provisions  of  this  agreement  shall  be  fixed  or  allowed 
for  such  performance  or  completion,  the  sum  of  one  hundred 
dollars  per  day  for  each  and  every  day  the  time  employed  upon 
said  work  may  exceed  the  time  stipulated  for  its  completion,  or 
such  stipulated  time  as  the  same  may  be  increased,  as  herein- 
before provided,  which  said  sum  of  one  hundred  dollars  per 
day  is  hereby,  in  view  of  the  difficulty  of  estimating  such  dam- 
ages, agreed  upon,  fixed  and  determined  by  the  parties  hereto 
as  the  liquidated  damages  that  the  parties  of  the  first  part  will 
suffer  by  reason  of  such  default,  and  not  by  way  of  penalty. 

A.  P.  B. 

III.  An  agreement  that  the  engineer  shall  ascertain  and 
make  an  estimate  of  the  actual  damages  sustained  by  a  failure 
to  complete  the  work  within  the  time  specified  (or  for  other 
specific  breach),  and  naming  some  or  all  of  the  items  to  be 
included  in  such  estimate.  In  this  case  no  effort  is  made  in 
advance  to  determine  what  the  actual  damages  are,  and  the 
agreement  simply  consists  in  making  the  engineer  an  arbitrator 
to  act  for  both  the  parties,  in  determining  the  amount  of  the 
damage  as  a  question  of  fact.  This  is  probably  the  strongest 


THE   GENERAL   CLAUSES   IN   SPECIFICATIONS.         101 

method  of  stating  this  clause,  while  it  is   also  the  fairest  to  all 

parties  concerned. 

... 
Because    of    the   difficulty  in  proving  in  a  suit  at  law  the 

actual  damages  sustained  from  the  failure  to  complete  an  engi- 
neering contract  within  the  time  specified,  the  contractor  usually 
pays  very  little  attention  to  a  penalty  clause  stated  as  described 
above  in  form  I.  As  a  rule,  contractors  are  better  informed  a,s 
to  the  law  of  contracts  than  the  engineers  who  write  the  specifi- 
cations, and  when  this  clause  is  stated  as  first  described  the 
contractor  regards  it  lightly,  well  knowing  that  it  has  no  partic- 
ular significance.  When  stated  in  the  second  manner,  however, 
provided  the  sum  named  be  reasonable,  the  contractor  will  give 
it  much  greater  weight,  and  the  party  paying  for  the  work  can 
withhold  money  under  it  with  much  greater  assurance  of  being 
sustained  by  the  courts.  The  courts,  however,  have  a  repug- 
nance to  any  agreement  made  in  advance  as  to  questions  of 
fact,  which  in  the  nature  of  things  could  only  be  adequately 
determined  after  the  breach  had  transpired.  But  because  of 
the  difficulty  of  fixing  accurately  the  amount  of  such  damages, 
even  after  the  breach,  the  law  consents  to  a  previous  agreement 
upon  a  specific  sum,  provided  this  be  reasonable,  and  provided 
it  be  so  clearly  stated  thai:  the  parties  signing  the  contract  can 
not  have  misconstrued  it.  Concerning  the  last  method  given 
of  stating  this  clause,  the  law  also  has  a  repugnance  to  dele- 
gating the  authority  of  the  court  to  a  layman  in  the  person  of  an 
arbitrator.  When,  however,  the  question  at  issue  is  a  "condi- 
tion precedent"  to  settlement,  as  in  this  case  of  fixing  the 
amount  of  the  damages,  and  when  this  arbitrator  is  the  engineer 
in  charge  of  the  work,  who  is  evidently  the  most  competent 
person  to  estimate  the  amount  of  such  damage,  the  law  readily 
consents  that  he  should  act  in  such  capacity,  and  if  both  parties 
have  agreed  that  his  decision  should  be  final  and  conclusive  in 
the  premises,  there  would  seem  to  be  no  way  of  evading  his 
decision,  except  by  proving  that  it  was  fraudulent.  As  fraud 


102  GENERAL   SPECIFICATIONS. 

invalidates  nearly  all  agreements,  and  nearly  all  obligations,  if 
it  can  be  shown  that  the  engineer,  when  acting  in  the  capacity 
defined  in  this  clause,  has  knowingly  and  willfully  overestimated 
the  amount  of  the  damage ;  in  other  words,  if  it  can  be  shown 
that  he  acted  dishonestly  in  the  matter,  his  verdict  can  be  set 
aside  and  the  matter  can  come  before  the  court.  Otherwise 
the  court  will  rule  that  his  verdict  must  hold,  and  the  question 
can  not  be  opened.  As  it  is  very  difficult  to  establish  a  ques- 
tion of  motive,  and  as  the  burden  of  proof  rests  wholly  upon 
the  contractor,  it  would  seem  that  this  method  of  writing  the 
damage  clause  had  many  advantages.  The  following  is  a  fair 
example  of  such  a  clause. 

In  case  said  contractor  shall  fail  to  fully  and  entirely,  and 
in  conformity  with  the  covenants,  terms  and  agreements  of  this 
contract,  perform,  and  complete  said  work,  and  each  and  every 
part  and  appurtenance  thereof,  within  the  time  hereinbefore 
limited  for  such  performance  and  completion,  or  within  such 
further  time  as  may  be  allowed  by  said  Board  for  such  per- 
formance and  completion,  said  chief  engineer  shall  appraise 
the  value  of  the  direct  and  computable  damages  caused  to  said 
city  by  such  failure,  owing  to  the  disbursements  made  by  said 
city  on  account  of  the  further  employment  of  engineers,  inspect- 
ors and  other  employees,  including  all  disbursements  for  office 
rent,  transportation,  supplies,  and  other  matters  connected  with 
said  employment;  also  the  value  of  such  other  direct  and 
computable  damages  as  shall  be  caused  by  such  failure ;  and 
the  amount  so  appraised,  when  approved  by  said  Board,  shall 
be  deducted  by  said  Board  out  of  such  moneys  as  either  may  be 
due,  or  at  any  time  thereafter  become  due,  to  said  contractor 
under  and  by  virtue  of  this  contract,  or  any  part  thereof ;  and  in 
case  said  appraised  value  shall  exceed  the  amount  of  -said 
moneys,  then  said  contractor  will  pay  the  amount  of  such  excess 
to  said  city,  on  notice  from  said  Board  of  the  excess  so  due ; 
and  it  is  hereby  agreed  that  the  decision  of  said  chief  engineer 
as  to  the  said  appraisal,  when  approved  by  said  Board,*  shall 
be  final  and  binding  on  both  parties  to  this  contract. 

E.  K. 

87.  The  Discharge  of  Unpaid  Claims  of  Work- 
men and  Material  men.  The  laws  of  many  states  provide 
that  persons,  who  supply  either  labor  or  material  to  any  con- 

*It  may  or  may  not  be  wise  to  make  the  verdict  of  the  engineer  subject  to  the 
approval  of  his  principal. 


THE  GENERAL   CLAUSES   IN    SPECIFICATIONS.         103 

tractor  or  other  person,  to  be  used  in  the  construction  of  any 
building  or  other  permanent  work,  if  not  paid  by  such  party, 
may  file  a  lien  upon  such  completed  or  uncompleted  work,  this 
serving  as  a  kind  of  first  mortgage  upon  the  property,  under 
which  the  property  can  be  sold  and  the  claim  satisfied.  When 
such  a  law  obtains,  the  only  safe  course,  for  the  person  paying 
for  the  work,  is  to  satisfy  himself  before  he  fully  pays  for  the 
work  that  all  such  claims  have  been  liquidated,  or  he  may  if  he 
choose,  require  the  contractor  to  furnish  a  bond  which  may  be 
sued  upon,  either  by  himself,  or  by  such  material  man  or  labor- 
ing man  as  may  have  such  a  claim.  This  bond  to  be  large 
enough  to  cover  all  such  liabilities. 

When  the  party  paying  for  the  work  desires  to  satisfy  him- 
self that  such  claims  have  all  been  discharged  by  the  con- 
tractor, the  clause  may  be  written  as  follows: 

Said  contractor  further  agrees  that  he  will  pay  punctually 
the  workmen  who  shall  be  employed  on  the  aforesaid  work, 
and  the  persons  who  shall  furnish  material  thereunder,  and  will 
furnish  said  Board  with  satisfactory  evidence  that  all  persons 
who  have  done  work  or  furnished  materials  under  this  contract 
and  shall  have  filed  any  account  of  such  claims  with  said  Board, 
have  been  fully  paid,  or  are  not  entitled  to  any  lien  under  the 
laws  of  this  state;  and  in  case  such  evidence  be  not  furnished 
as  aforesaid,  such  amount  as  said  Board  may  consider  neces- 
sary to  meet  the  lawful  claims  of  the  persons  aforesaid,  shall 
be  deducted  from  the  moneys  due  said  contractor  under  this 
contract,  and  shall  not  be  allowed  until  the  liabilities  aforesaid 
shall  have  been  fully  discharged  and  the  evidence  thereof 
furnished  said  Board ;  and  if  such  evidence  is  not  furnished 
before  the  final  payment  under  this  contract  falls  due,  said 
Board  may  pay  such  claims  in  whole  or  in  part  to  the  person 
or  persons,  firm  or  corporation  claiming  the  same,  and  charge 
the  amount  thus  paid  to  said  contractor,  who  shall  accept  the 
same  as  payment  to  the  amount  thereof  upon  this  contract. 

E.K. 

When  the  party  paying  for  the  work  does  not  care  to  put 
himself  to  the  trouble  of  obtaining  the  information  as  to  the 
discharge  of  all  such  claims  by  the  contractor,  he  may  so  frame 


104  GENERAL    SPECIFICATIONS. 

the  wording  of  the  bond  that  it  will  cover  this  case  satisfactorily. 
In  this  case  this  portion  of  the  bond  may  read  as  follows:* 

The  said as    principal,    and and 

as  securities,  hereby  bind  themselves  and  their  respective  heirs, 
executors  or  administrators,  unto  the  City  of  St.  Louis,  in  the 

penal  sum  of dollars,  lawful  money  of  the   United   States, 

conditioned   that  in   the   event   the  said shall  faithfully 

and  properly  perform  the  foregoing  contract  according  to  all 
the  terms  thereof,  and  shall,  as  soon  as  the  work  contemplated 
by  said  contract  is  completed,  pay  to  the  proper  parties  all 
amounts  due  for  material  and  labor  used  and  employed  in  the 
performance  thereof,  then  this  obligation  to  be  void,  otherwise 
of  full  force  and  effect,  and  the  same  may  be  sued  on  at  the 
instance  of  a  material  man,  laboring  man,  or  mechanic,  for  any 
breach  of  the  condition  hereof;  provided,  that  no  such  suit 
shall  be  instituted  after  the  expiration  of  ninety  days  from  the 
completion  of  the  above  contract. 

88.    No   Claims  for   Damages    on    Account  of 

Suspension  of  Work.  When  the  work  contracted  for  is  of 
a  public  character,  as  for  a  city,  or  for  the  United  States  Gov- 
ernment, and  when  it  is  expected  to  continue  for  a  considerable 
period,  and  be  paid  for  by  appropriations  from  time  to  time, 
and  also  in  other  like  contingencies,  it  is  common  to  insert  a 
clause  to  the  effect  that  the  contractor  shall  make  no  claim  for 
damages  for  necessary  delays  he  may  experience  in  carrying 
out  the  work,  when  these  delays  are  caused  by  the  failure  of 
appropriations,  or  by  legal  proceedings,  and  the  like. 

On  ten  days  notice  the  work  under  this  contract  may, 
without  cost  or  claims  against  the  party  of  the  first  part,  be  sus- 
pended by  them  for  want  of  funds,  or  for  other  substantial 
cause.  Upon  receipt  by  the  contractor  of  the  order  for  the 
suspension  of  the  work,  all  the  materials  shall  be  piled  up 
compactly,  so  as  not  to  impede  travel  on  the  sidewalk  or  car- 
riageway, or  the  use  of  fire  plugs,  gas  or  water  stops,  and 
all  surplus  material  and  rubbish  shall  be  removed  immediately 
from  the  street.  When  the  party  of  the  first  part  shall  order 
the  work  to  be  resumed  the  contractor  shall  complete  the  same 
upon  the  terms  and  conditions  of  this  contract. 

E.  A.  F. 

*This  is  the  form  universally  adopted  in  all  contracts  made  by  the  City  of  St. 
Louis.  If  not  specifically  so  stated  the  material  man,  or  the  laboring  man  could  not 
sue  on  the  bond. 


THE   GENERAL   CLAUSES   IN    SPECIFICATIONS.         105 

89.  No  Claims  for  Damages  on  Account  of  De-    , 

lay.  In  order  that  the  party  of  the  first  part  shall  be  freed 
from  all  claims  which  may  be  set  up  by  the  contractor  for  dam- 
ages on  account  of  various  delays  and  hindrances  which  he  may 
have  experienced  in  carrying  out  the  work,  and  which  he  may 
make  appear  to  have  been  caused  directly  or  indirectly  by  the 
party  having  the  work  done,  or  by  other  contractors  upon  the 
work,  the  following  clause  is  often  inserted: 

The  contractor  shall  not  be  entitled  to  any  claims  for  dam- 
ages for  any  hindrance  or  delay  from  any  cause  whatever  in  the 
progress  of  the  work,  or  any  portion  thereof,  but  said  hindrance 
may  entitle  said  contractor  to  such  extension  of  time  for  com- 
pleting the  contract  as  may  be  determined  by  the  engineer, 
provided,  he  shall  have  given  notice  in  writing  of  the  cause  of 
the  detention.  E.  A.  F. 

90.  No  Claims  on  Account  of  Unforeseen  Diffi- 
culties.    In  case  it  is  the  purpose   of  the   contract  to  place 
upon    the    contractor    all    the   responsibility   for    contingencies 
which    may  arise    in    the  prosecution  of  the  work,  for  which 
greater  risk  the  party  having  the  work  done  will,  of  course,  pay 
in  the  increased  price   made   by   the   contractor  to   cover  such 
risk,  the  clause  may  be  written  as  follows: 

The  contractor  agrees  that  he  will  sustain  all  losses  or 
damages  arising  from  the  action  of  the  elements,  the  nature  of 
the  work  to  be  done  under  the  specifications,  or  from  any 
unforeseen  obstructions  or  encumbrances  on  the  line  of  the  work 
which  may  be  encountered  in  the  prosecution  of  the  same. 

E.  A.  F. 

91.  Protection   of  Finished  Work.    It  is  usually 
customary  to  hold  the  contractor  responsible  for  the  protection 
and  care  of  the    work    until    it    is    all    finally    completed    and 
accepted.     Even  such  portions  of  the  work  as  have  been  com- 
pleted and  provisionally  accepted  and  payments  made  upon  the 
same,  should  be  taken  care  of  and  fully  protected  by  the  con- 
tractor, until  the  entire  work  has  been  turned  over.     This  often 
entails  considerable  expense  upon  the  contractor,  and  when  dis- 


106  GENERAL   SPECIFICATIONS. 

putes  on  this  question  are  liable  to  arise,  it  is  well  to  insert 
such  a  clause  as  the  following: 

Contractors  will  be  held  responsible  for  any  and  all  mate- 
rials or  work  to  the  full  amount  of  payments  made  thereon,  and 
they  will  be  required  to  make  good,  at  their  own  cost,  any 
injury  or  damage  which  said  materials  or  work  may  sustain  from 
any  source  or  cause  Whatever,  before  final  acceptance  thereof. 

O.  M.  P. 

92.    Protection  of   Property   and   Lives.    It    is 

always  understood  that  the  contractor  shall  he  held  responsible 
for  all  damages  to  property  which  may  arise  from  any  fault  of 
his,  or  from  any  accident  which  may  occur  during  the  per- 
formance of  the  work.  He  is  also  held  responsible  for  all 
losses  of  life  or  limb,  and  for  all  personal  damages  which  may 
be  sustained  either  by  his  own  workmen  or  by  the  public,  by  or 
on  account  of  the  works  he  has  under  construction.  In  other 
words,  it  is  made  his  duty  to  protect  both  life  and  property,  so 
far  as  possible,  from  all  damage,  so  far  as  these  may  be  tracea- 
ble to  the  works  themselves.  If  this  responsibility  were  not 
specifically  placed  upon  the  contractor,  the  party  having  the 
work  done  would  often  be  obliged  to  sustain  the  loss,  since  he 
authorizes  the  execution  of  the  work,  and  the  contractor  is  his 
employee  or  agent.  This  clause  is  often  written  as  two  separate 
clauses,  one  referring  to  the  damage  to  property,  and  the  other 
to  the  damage  to  persons. 

Furthermore  the  wording  of  the  bond  is  usually  so  made 
as  to  cover  both  of  these  items,  so  that  in  case  the  damage  or 
loss  is  greater  than  could  be  repaid  by  the  amount  of  money  at 
any  time  due  the  contractor  when  the  accident  occurs,  suit  may 
be  brought  upon  the  bond  against  the  bondsmen  to  recover  the 
remainder. 

Inasmuch  as  claims  for  damages,  either  to  person  or  prop- 
erty, usually  manifest  themselves  in  the  form  of  suits  at  law 
against  the  party  authorizing  the  work  and  paying  for  the  same, 
and  not  against  the  contractor  himself,  it  is  common  to  assume 


THE   GENEBAL   CLAUSES   IN   SPECIFICATIONS.         107 

that  this  will  be  the  case  in  all  claims  for  damages,  and  to  word 
the  clause  accordingly.  The  following  clause  covers  all  of  the 
above  contingencies  in  an  acceptable  manner: 

Said  contractor  further  agrees  that  he  will  indemnify  and 
save  harmless  said  City  and  Board,  and  the  officers  and  agents 
thereof,  from  all  claims,  suits,  actions,  and  proceedings  of  every 
name  and  description,  which  may  be  brought  against  said  City 
or  Board,  or  the  officers  and  agents  thereof,  for  or  on  account 
of  any  injuries  or  damages  to  persons  or  property  received  or 
sustained  by  any  person  or  persons,  firm  or  corporation,  by  or 
from  said  contractor,  or  by  or  in  consequence  of  any  materials 
or  explosives  used  on  said  work,  or  by  or  on  account  of  any 
improper  material  or  workmanship  in  its  construction,  or  by 
or  on  account  of  any  accident,  or  of  any  other  act  or  omission 
of  said  contractor,  or  his  agents,  or  servants,  and  said  con- 
tractor also  agrees  that  so  much  of  the  money  due,  or  to  become 
due,  to  him  under  this  contract  as  shall  be  considered  necessary 
by  said  Board,  may  be  retained  by  said  Board  until  all  such 
suits  or  claims  for  damages,  or  otherwise,  as  aforesaid,  shall 
have  been  finally  settled  and  determined,  and  evidence  to  that 
effect  furnished  to  the  satisfaction  of  said  Board. 

E.  K. 

The  following  is  a  common  method  of  wording  this  clause, 
which  defines  the  contractor's  responsibility  without  referring 
to  suits  at  law: 

The  contractor  shall  put  up  and  maintain  such  barriers  and 
red  lights  as  will  effectually  prevent  any  accident  in  conse- 
quence of  his  work,  for  which  the  city  might  be  liable,  and  he 
shall  be  liable  for  all  damages  occasioned  in  any  way  by  his 
acts  or  neglect,  or  that  of  his  agents,  employees,  or  workmen. 

E.  A.  F. 

93.    Protection  against  Claims  for  the  Use  of 

Patents.  When  it  is  anticipated  that  patented  appliances  or 
methods  may  be  used  either  by  the  contractor  in  prosecuting 
the  work,  or  as  forming  a  part  of  the  completed  work  itself,  in 
order  that  the  party  authorizing  the  work  may  be  able  to  col- 
lect from  the  contractor  such  fees  as  he  may  be  forced  to  pay 
therefor,  a  special  clause  in  the  specifications  may  be  written 
to  cover  this  case.  This  clause  may  be  as  follows: 

All  fees  for  any  patented  invention,  article  or  arrange- 
ments that  may  be  used  upon  or  in  any  manner  connected  with 


108  GENEKAL   SPECIFICATIONS. 

the  construction,  erection,  or  maintenance  of  the  work,  or  any 
part  thereof  embraced  in  these  specifications,  shall  be  included 
in  the  price  mentioned  in  the  contract,  and  the  contractor  shall 
protect  and  hold  harmless  the  party  of  the  first  part  against  any 
and  all  demands  for  such  fees  or  claims,  and  before  the  final 
payment  or  settlement  is  made  on  account  of  the  contract,  the 
contractor  must  furnish  acceptable  proof  of  a  proper  and  satis- 
factory release  from  all  such  claims. 

E.  A.  F. 

94.  Assignment  of  the  Contract.*     If  it  is  the 
intention  of  the  party  letting  the  work  that  the  person  or  persons 
who   take    the    contract    shall    perform    the    work   themselves, 
without  subletting  it,  it  is  necessary  to  prescribe  that  this  shall 
be  done  in  order  to   insure  that    it  may   not  be   sublet.     One 
great  objection  to  the  subletting  of  contracts  is  that  the  sub- 
contractor   can    not    be    held    directly    by    the  principal,   since 
these  two  have  not  entered  into  contract.      The  principal  can 
only  hold  the  original  contractor,  and  all  dealings  with  the  sub- 
contractor must  be  through  him.     This  gives  rise  to  delays  and 
unsatisfactory    performance,    and  is  usually  prohibited  by  the 
specifications.      The    following  form  is  adequate  to  this  pur- 
pose: 

Said  contractor  further  agrees  that  he  will  give  personal 
attention  constantly  to  the  faithful  prosecution  of  the  work,  and 
will  not  assign  or  sublet  the  work  or  any  part  thereof,  or  any  of 
the  moneys  or  orders  payable  under  the  contract,  without  the 
previous  written  consent  of  said  board  endorsed  on  this  con- 
tract, but  will  keep  the  same  under  his  personal  control ;  that 
no  right  under  this  contract,  nor  to  any  moneys  or  orders  due 
or  to  become  due  hereunder,  shall  be  asserted  against  said  city 
or  board,  or  any  department,  officer,  or  officers  thereof,  by 
reason  of  any  so-called  assignment,  in  law  or  equity,  of  this 
contract,  or  any  part  thereof,  or  of  any  moneys  or  orders  paya- 
ble thereunder,  unless  such  assignment  shall  have  been  author- 
ized by  the  written  consent  of  said  board  endorsed  on  this 
contract ;  that  no  person  other  than  said  contractor  now  has  any 
claim  thereunder,  and  that  no  claim  shall  be  made  excepting 
under  this  specific  clause  of  this  contract,  and  under  that  clause 
relating  to  claim  of  workmen  and  materialmen.  E.  K. 

95.  Contractor  not  Released  by  Subcontracts. 
When    it    is    anticipated    that  a  portion  at  least   of  the    work 

•  See  Article  30. 


THE  GENERAL  CLAUSES   IN   SPECIFICATIONS.         109 

will  be  sublet  to  other  contractors,  and  when  in  the  nature  of 
things  this  is  advisable,  it  may  be  specified  that  such  subletting 
of  all  or  of  any  portion  of  the  work  in  no  wise  releases  the  con- 
tractor from  full  and  faithful  performance.  The  following 
specification  would  then  hold : 

No  subcontract  shall  under  any  circumstances  relieve  the 
contractor  of  his  liabilities  and  obligations  under  his  contract ; 
should  any  subcontractor  fail  to  perform  the  work  undertaken 
by  him  in  a  satisfactory  manner,  and  should  this  provision  be 
violated,  the  party  of  the  first  part  may  at  their  option  end  and 
terminate  such  contract.  E.  A.  F. 

96.  Abandonment  Of  Contract.  In  most  large  engi- 
neering contracts  it  is  wise  to  provide  for  the  emergency  of 
abandonment.  This  term  is  here  used  to  include  not  only 
deliberate  and  acknowledged  abandonment  of  the  work  on  the 
part  of  the  contractor,  but  also  such  violations  of  the  contract, 
either  in  the  letter  or  in  the  spirit,  or  such  unnecessary  delay  in 
its  execution  as  may  be  construed  as  a  virtual  abandonment  of 
the  contract,  so  far  as  its  express  fulfillment  is  concerned.  In 
such  cases  it  may  become  necessary  or  desirable  to  take  the  work 
out  of  the  hands  of  the  contractor  altogether,  and  to  hire  the 
necessary  labor  and  purchase  the  necessary  material,  and  com- 
plete the  work  under  the  direct  superintendence  of  the  engi- 
neer, charging  all  such  items  of  expense  against  the  contractor, 
and  providing  for  the  payment  of  the  same,  even  though  they 
should  exceed  all  moneys  due  the  contractor  on  the  completion 
of  the  work.  While  the  common  law  would  warrant  the  party 
paying  for  the  work  in  assuming  the  control  of  it,  and  charging 
the  cost  of  the  same  against  the  contractor,  in  case  of  his 
express  and  acknowledged  abandonment,  it  would  not  authorize 
the  engineer  in  assuming  control  of  the  work  because  of  delay 
or  other  violations  of  the  terms  of  the  contract,  A  provision 
such  as  the  following  may  therefore  be  inserted : 

Said  contractor  further  agrees  that  if  the  work  to  be  done 
under  this  contract  shall  be  abandoned,  or  if  this  contract  shall 
be  sublet  or  assigned  by  said  contractor,  or  any  of  the  moneys 


110  GENERAL    SPECIFICATIONS. 

or  orders  payable  thereunder  shall  be  assigned,  otherwise  than 
as  herein  provided,  or  if  at  any  time  said  chief  engineer  shall 
be  of  the  opinion,  and  shall  so  certify  in  writing  to  said  board, 
that  the  said  work  is  unnecessarily  or  unreasonably  delayed,  or 
that  said  contractor  is  willfully  violating  any  of  the  terms,  cove- 
nants and  agreements  of  this  contract,  or  is  not  executing  this 
contract  in  good  faith,  or  is  not  making  such  progress  in  the 
execution  of  said  work  as  to  indicate  its  completion  within  the 
required  time,  said  board  shall  have  the  power  and  right  to 
notify  said  contractor  to  discontinue  all  work  or  any  part  .thereof 
under  this  contract,  and  upon  such  notification  said  contractor 
shall  discontinue  said  work,  or^such  parts  thereof  as  said  board 
may  designate ;  and  said  board  shall  thereupon  have  the  power 
to  employ  by  contract,  or  otherwise,  and  in  such  manner  and  at 
such  prices  as  it  may  determine,  any  persons  and  obtain  any 
animals,  carts,  wagons,  appliances,  implements,  tools,  and 
other  means  of  construction,  which  it  may  deem  necessary  to 
work  at  and  be  used  to  complete  the  work  herein  described,  or 
such  part  thereof  as  said  board  may  have  designated;  also,  the 
power  to  use  such  appliances,  implements,  tools,  and  materials 
and  means  of  construction  of  every  description  as  may  be  found 
upon  the  line  of  said  work,  both  such  as  enter  into  the  com- 
pleted work,  and  such  as  are  necessarily  used  in  and  about  the 
same  in  the  course  of  construction,  and  to  procure  other  proper 
materials  for  the  completion  of  the  same ;  also  to  charge  the 
expense  of  all  of  said  labor,  materials,  animals,  carts,  wagons, 
appliances,  implements,  tools  and  means  of  construction  to  said 
contractor ;  and  the  expense  so  charged  shall  be  deducted  and 
paid  by  said  board  out  of  such  moneys  as  may  be  due  or 
become  due  at  any  time  thereafter,  to  said  contractor  under  this 
contract,  or  any  part  thereof.  In  case  such  expense  is  less  than 
the  sum  which  would  have  been  payable  under  this  contract  if 
the  same  had  been  completed  by  said  contractor,  it  is  agreed 
that  said  contractor  shall  be  entitled  to  receive  the  difference ; 
and  in  case  such  expense  shall  exceed  the  sum  which  would 
have  been  payable  under  this  contract  if  the  same  had  been 
completed  by  said  contractor,  then  said  contractor  shall  pay 
the  amount  of  such  excess  to  said  city,  on  notice  from  said 
board  of  the  excess  so  due.  It  is  further  agreed  that  neither  an 
extension  of  time,  for  any  reason,  beyond  that  fixed  herein  for 
the  completion  of  the  work ;  nor  the  performance  and  the  accept- 
ance of  any  part  of  the  work  called  for'by  this  contract,  shall  be 
deemed  to  be  a  waiver  by  said  city  of  the  right  to  assume  con- 
trol of  this  contract  for  the  reasons  and  in  the  manner  hereinbe- 
fore provided.  E.  K. 

97.    Cancellation  of  Contract  for  Default  of  Con- 
tractor.    In  the  previous  case  it  was  provided  that  under  cer- 


THE   GENEKAL  CLAUSES   IN   SPECIFICATIONS.        Ill 

tain  contingencies  the  party  of  the  first  part  would  be  warranted 
in  assuming  entire  control  of  the  work,  and  completing  it  under 
the  contract,  and  for  the  contractor.  His  agency  in  the  matter 
being  displaced  by  that  of  the  engineer,  because  either  of 
gross  violation  of  the  contract,  or  for  incompetency  or  unwill- 
ingness to  carry  it  out.  That  clause  provided,  therefore,  that 
the  engineer  should  under  such  contingencies  be  appointed  to 
carry  out  the  contract  with  the  party  of  the  second  part,  in  his 
stead,  the  contract  itself,  however,  still  remaining  in  force,  and 
the  final  settlement  to  be  made  in  accordance  with  its  terms. 

For  a  similar  set  of  contingencies  as  above  described,  the 
party  of  the  first  part  may  prefer  to  cancel  the  contract  alto- 
gether, and  instead  of  completing  the  work  under  the  super- 
vision of  the  engineer,  he  may  prefer  to  let  a  new  contract  for 
the  carrying  on  of  the  work.  To  do  this,  the  contract  itself 
must  be  rescinded  or  canceled,  and  in  order  to  give  the  party 
of  the  first  part  the  legal  authority  for  doing  this,  a  clause  such 
as  the  following  may  be  inserted.  Here  all  moneys  due  upon 
the  contract  at  the  time  the  contract  is  canceled  will  be  for- 
feited to  the  first  party.  See  article  49. 

In  lieu  of  the  exercise  of  the  power  hereinbefore  given,  in 
case  of  said  contractor's  default,  to  employ  workmen,  pur- 
chase tools  and  materials,  and  complete  the  work,  said  board 
reserves  the  right  and  option,  instead  thereof,  to  annul  and  can- 
cel this  contract  and  relet  the  work,  or  any  part  thereof,  and 
said  contractor  shall  not  be  entitled  to  any  claim  for  damages 
on  account  of  such  annulment,  nor  shall  such  annulment  affect 
the  right  of  said  city  to  recover  damages  which  may  arise  from 
such  failure  on  the  part  of  said  contractor  to  fulfill  the  terms  of 
this  contract.  And  in  case  of  such  annulment  all  moneys  due 
said  contractor,  or  retained  under  the  terms  of  this  contract, 
shall  be  forfeited  to  said  city,  and  be  paid  to  the  credit  of  the 
fund  for  extending  water  pipe  in  said  city;  but  such  forfeiture 
shall,  however,  not  release  said  contractor,  or  his  sureties  for 
the  fulfillment  of  this  contract,  and  said  contractor  and  his 
sureties  shall  be  credited  with  the  amount  of  the  moneys  so 
forfeited  toward  any  greater  sum  that  they  may  become  liable 
for  to  said  city  on  account  of  the  default  of  said  contractor. 

E.  K. 


112  GENERAL   SPECIFICATIONS. 

98.  Workmen's  Quarters  and  Other  Temporary 

Buildings.  It  is  usually  necessary  for  the  contractor  to  erect 
temporary  buildings  for  the  protection  of  his  tools  and  machin- 
ery, or  for  office  purposes,  and  sometimes,  when  the  work  is  at 
a  distance  from  boarding  house  facilities,  it  is  necessary  for 
him  to  provide  temporary  quarters  for  his  labor.  The  location, 
erection,  and  removal  of  such  temporary  structures  should  also 
be  subject  to  the  approval  of  the  engineer  in  charge.  If  tem- 
porary quarters  for  workmen  are  not  really  necessary,  it  is  best 
to  prohibit  them,  at  least  to  prohibit  their  erection  on  the  prop- 
erty belonging  to  the  party  of  the  first  part.  The  following  is 
an  example  of  such  a  clause: 

The  contractor  may  build  such  sheds,  storehouses,  etc., 
as  are  necessary  for  the  work,  but  the  location  of  such  sheds, 
etc.,  must  be  such  as  will  not  interfere  with  the  work  of  other 
contractors,  and  must  be  approved  by  the  Water  commissioner. 
No  buildings,  sheds,  or  tents  to  be  used  as  quarters  for  work- 
men or  teams  will  be  allowed  on  the  city  property.* 

M.  L.  H.  v 

99.  Cleaning  up  after  Completion.    In  nearly  all 

kinds  of  engineering  construction  the  grounds  surrounding  or 
along  the  line  of  the  work  are  necessarily  more  or  less  defaced 
and  encumbered  by  various  disturbances  of  the  surface,  or  by 
refuse  and  waste  material,  temporary  buildings,  etc.,  and  it  is 
usually  made  the  business  of  the  contractor  on  the  completion 
of  the  work  to  clear  up  the  grounds,  and  to  put  them  in  as  pre- 
sentable a  condition  as  practicable.  This  does  not  involve  any 
grading  or  removal  of  earth,  unless  it  be  the  excess  or  waste 
which  remains  on  the  natural  surface  from  his  own  excavations. 
It  does,  however,  include  the  cleaning  up  of  his  own  work, 
whether  it  be  buildings,  foundations,  masonry,  conduits,  pits, 
etc.  The  following  is  such  a  clause  written  to  cover  the  case 
of  waterworks  engine  pits : 

When  the  work  is  completed,  all  pits,  pipes,  chambers, 
conduits,  etc.,  shall  be  carefully  cleaned  out.  The  surround- 

*To  which  might  be  added  the  following:  Suitable  privy  conveniences  shall  be 
erected,  as  directed  by  the  engineer,  for  the  use  of  the  workmen,  and  their  use  is  made 
obligatory.  The  committing  of  nuisances  is  prohibited  ou  all  parts  of  the  premises. 


THE   GENERAL   CLAUSES   IN    SPECIFICATIONS.         113 

ing  grounds  shall  be  cleared  of  all  rubbish  caused  by  construc- 
tion, all  sheds,  etc.,  and  left  in  a  neat  and  presentable  condi- 
tion. M.  L.  H. 

100.  Removal  of  Condemned  Material.    When- 
ever any  material  which  has  been  brought  upon  the  ground  by 
the  contractor  has  been  inspected  and  rejected  by  the  engineer, 
or  his  assistants,  it  should  at  once  be  removed  from  the  line  of 
the  work,  in  order  to  prevent  its  use  when  the  engineer  or  his 
inspectors  are  not  present.      To  further  insure   against  the  use 
of    condemned    material    by    the    contractor,    it    is    sometimes 
specified  that  all  such  material  shall  be  stored  by  the  contractor 
in  a  specified  place,  where  it  shall  be  kept  under  lock  and  key, 
and  under  the  control  of  the  engineer  only.     In  case  the  con- 
tractor declines  to  remove  such   material   from   the   line   of  the 
work,  or  declines  to  take  out  any  defective  work,  there  should 
be  a  provision  authorizing  the  engineer  to  do  this  at  the  con- 
tractor's expense.     The  following  clause  may  be  used : 

Defective  work  and  material  may  be  condemned  by  the 
engineer  at  any  time  before  the  final  acceptance  of  the  work,, 
and  when  such  work  has  been  condemned  it  shall  be  imme- 
diately taken  down  by  the  contractor,  and  rebuilt  in  accordance 
with  the  plans  and  specifications.  When  defective  material 
has  been  condemned,  it  shall  be  at  once  removed  from  the  line 
of  the  work,  and  stored  as  directed  by  the  engineer,  or  other-v 
wise  disposed  of  to  his  satisfaction.  In  case  the  contractor 
shall  neglect  or  refuse  to  remove  or  replace  any  rejected  work 
or  material  after  a  written  notice,  within  the  time  designated 
by  the  engineer,  such  work  or  material  shall  be  removed  or 
replaced  by  the  engineer  at  the  contractor's  expense. 

M.  L.  H. 

101.  Relations  to  Other  Contractors.  Where  more 
than  one  contractor  is  expected  to  be   engaged  simultaneously 
upon  the  same  work,  it  is  well  to  insert  a  clause   in   the  specifi- 
cations defining  the  obligation  of   each  of   these   contractors   to 
the  others  in  certain  particulars  as  follows: 

The  contractor  is  required  so  far  as  possible  to  so  arrange 
his  work  and  to  so  dispose  of  his  materials  as  will  not  interfere 
with  the  work  or  storage  of  materials  of  other  contractors 

8 


114  GENEEAL   SPECIFICATIONS. 

engaged  upon  the  work.  He  is  also  required  to  join  his  work 
to  that  of  others  in  a  proper  manner,  and  in  accordance  with 
the  spirit  of  the  plans  and  specifications,  and  to  perform  his 
work  in  the  proper  sequence  in  relation  to  that  of  other  con- 
tractors, and  as  may  be  directed  by  the  engineer. 

M.  L.  H. 

102.  Provision  for  Drainage.    Where  the  natural 

surface  drainage  is  likely  to  be  interfered  with  by  the  work  of 
the  contractor,  it  may  be  specified  that  he  shall  maintain  pro- 
vision for  such  surface  drainage  during  the  progress  of  the 
work,  and  that  he  will  be  held  liable  for  all  damages  from  his 
neglect  to  comply  with  this  provision.  The  clause  may  read  as 
follows : 

If  it  is  necessary  in  the  prosecution  of  the  work  to  inter- 
rupt or  obstruct  the  natural  drainage  of  the  surface,  or  the  flow 
of  artificial  drains,  the  contractor  shall  provide  for  the  same 
during  the  progress  of  the  work  in  such  a  way  that  no  damage 
shall  result  to  either  public  or  private  interests.  For  any 
neglect  to  so  provide  for  either  natural  or  artificial  drainage 
which  he  may  have  interrupted,  he  shall  be  held  liable  for  all 
damages  which  may  result  therefrom  during  the  progress  of  the 
work. 

103.  Provision  for  Public  Traffic.    If  it  becomes 
necessary  in  the  prosecution  of  the  work  to  obstruct  the  public 
streets  or  sidewalks,    and  if   it   is  practicable   to  carry  on  the 
work  without  closing  these  streets  against  all  traffic  it  should  be 
specified  that 

The  contractor  shall  make  suitable  and  adequate  provi- 
sion for  the  safe  and  free  passage  of  persons  and  vehicles  by, 
over,  or  under  the  work,  while  in  progress.  Such  provision  to 
be  made  to  the  satisfaction  of  the  engineer. 

E.  A.  F. 

104.  Contractor    to   Keep    Foreman    or  Head 
Workman,  and  also  Copy  of  Plans  and  Specifications 
on  the  Ground.     Whenever  work  is  visited  by  the  engineer 
or    his    assistants    or    inspectors,    the    plans    and   specifications 
should  be  available  for  examination   and   if  instructions  are   to 
be  given  for   the  further  prosecution  of  the   work   or  for   any 
changes  or  corrections,  some  responsible  person  should  always 


THE   GENERAL   CLAUSES   IN    SPECIFICATIONS.         115 

be  present  who  is  authorized  to  receive  such  instructions  for  the 
contractor,  as  his  agent.  In  this  case  the  instructions  given  to 
this  agent' have  all  the  legal  force  which  they  would  have  if 
given  directly  to  the  contractor.  This  clause  may  read  as  fol- 
lows: 

At  all  times  when  work  is  in  progress,  there  shall  be  a 
foreman  or  head  workman  on  the  grounds,  and  also  copies  of 
the  plans  and  specifications.  Instructions  given  to  such  fore- 
man or  head  workman  shall  be  considered  as  having  been 
given  to  the  contractor. 

E.  A.  F. 

105.  Cost  of  Examination  of  Completed  Work. 

Whenever  the  engineer  desires  to  examine  work  which  has  been 
completed  in  whole  or  in  part,  this  examination  involving  the 
tearing  down  of  some  portion  of  the  work,  and  a  corresponding 
expense  both  in  taking  down  and  in  reconstructing  it,  it  is  only 
fair  to  provide  that  in  case  the  work  should  be  found  to  Have 
been  performed  in  accordance  with  the  contract,  the  cost  of 
tearing  down  and  rebuilding  should  be  paid  by  the  party  of  the 
first  part ;  but  if  it  should  be  found  that  the  work  had  not  been 
constructed  according  to  the  contract,  this  cost  should  fall  upon 
the  contractor.  The  following  is  such  a  clause : 

Whenever  required  by  the  water  commissioner,  the  con- 
tractor shall  furnish  all  tools  and  labor  necessary  to  make  an 
examination  of  any  work  completed  or  in  progress  under  this 
contract.  If  the  work  so  examined  is  found  to  be  defective  in 
any  respect,  or  not  in  accordance  with  this  contract  and  specifi- 
cations, the  contractor  shall  bear  all  expenses  of  such  examina- 
tion and  of  satisfactory  reconstruction. 

If  the  work  so  examined  is  found  to  be  in  accordance  with 
the  specifications  and  contract,  the  expense  of  examination  and 
reconstruction  will  be  estimated  to  the  contractor  at  a  fair  price 
to  be  determined  by  the  water  commissioner. 

M.  L.  H. 

106.  Faults  to  be  Corrected  at  any  Time  before 

Final  Acceptance.  It  should  usually  be  understood  between 
the  parties  that  no  act  of  the  engineer  or  of  the  inspectors  should 
be  construed  as  final  acceptance  of  any  portion  of  the  work, 
unless  it  is  specifically  so  declared  in  writing  by  the  engineer. 


116  GENEKAL    SPECIFICATIONS. 

Also  that  any  failure  to  detect  faulty  or  incomplete  perform- 
ance before  the  time  of  final  acceptance  should  not  be  con- 
strued as  an  acceptance  of  the  work.  After  the  final  accept- 
ance by  the  engineer,  the  contract  is  no  longer  binding  on  the 
contractor  in  the  way  of  requiring  specific  performance,  but  a 
reservation  may  be  entered  in  the  contract  in  accordance  with 
which,  if  any  defect  or  fault  should  subsequently  appear  which 
was  undetected  before  the  time  of  final  acceptance,  the  party 
of  the  first  part  should  have  the  right  to  recover  damages  for 
such  fault  or  defect.  A  clause  to  this  latter  effect  is  not  usu- 
ally inserted,  but  it  is  legitimate  if  the  circumstances  should 
seem  to  require  it.  The  circumstances  might  require  it  when 
the  work  is  of  such  a  character  that  faults  could  not  readily  be 
detected  until  the  works  had  been  put  in  operation.  The  fol- 
lowing is  an  example  of  such  a  combined  clause : 

Failure  or  neglect  on  the  part  of  the  engineer  or  any  of 
his  authorized  agents  to  condemn  or  reject  bad  or  inferior  work 
or  materials,  shall  not  be  construed  to  imply  an  acceptance  of 
such  work  or  materials  if  it  becomes  evident  at  any  time  prior 
to  the  final  acceptance  of  the  work  and  release  of  the  contrac- 
tor by  the  party  of  the  first  part ;  neither  shall  it  be  construed 
as  barring  the  party  of  the  first  part,  at  any  subsequent  time, 
from  the  recovery  of  damages  or  of  such  a  sum  of  money  as 
may  be  needed  to  build  anew  all  portions  of  the  work  in  which 
fraud  was  practiced  or  improper  material  hidden,  whenever 
found. 

107.  Surveys,  Measurements,  and  Estimates  of 
Quantities  not  Guaranteed  to  be  Correct.  It  is  not 
usually  possible  to  give  in  advance  complete  measurements, 
dimensions,  and  estimates  for  all  parts  of  the  work.  Especially 
is  this  true  of  the  more  detailed  dimensions.  It  should  always 
be  understood,  therefore,  that  the  contractor  must  be  responsi- 
ble for  the  proper  adjustment  of  the  dimensions  and  details  of 
the  different  parts  of  the  work  to  each  other  and  that  the 
dimensions  and  figures  given  on  the  plans  and  specifications 
are  always  subject  to  changes  during  the  progress  of  the  work. 


THE    GENERAL   CLAUSES   IN    SPECIFICATIONS.         117 

The  following  clause  refers  especially  to  the  construction  of  a 
steel  viaduct:* 

Contractors  are  also  required  to  check  all  leading  dimen- 
sions and  clearances  as  a  whole  and  in  detail,  the  fitting  of  all 
details,  and  to  become  responsible  for  the  exact  position  and 
elevation  of  all  parts  of  the  work,  which  will  only  primarily  be 
located  by  the  engineer  of  the  department  of  public  parks. 
They  will  maintain  their  own  field  engineering,  that  of  the  city 
being  for  the  purposes  of  original  lay-out,  inspection,  and 
checking.  The  contractor  must  provide  and  maintain  such 
facilities  for  the  engineer  or  his  assistants  as  he  may  require 
for  the  convenient  examination  and  inspeciion  of  the  work  in 
progress.  He  will  pay  the  cost  of  testing  all  material  in  labora- 
tories or  shops,  and  the  cost  of  such  mill  and  shop  inspection 
as  he  may  Ipe  called  upon  to  perform  in  addition  to  that  fur- 
nished by  the  engineer,  the  selection  of  such  laboratory  or 
inspectors  being  dictated  by  the  engineer,  to  whom  they  will 
report.  He  will  furnish  such  monthly  progress  photographs  as 
may  be  required  to  maintain  the  record.  A.  P.  13. 

108.  The  Contract  Subject  to  Interpretation  and 
Change  by  the  Engineer  in  the  Following  Particu- 
lars:! 

(«)     Where  meaning  is  obscure  and  uncertain. 

(£)  As  to  what  is  implied  beyond  that  which  is  specific- 
ally described. 

(c)  In  case  of  discrepancies  between  plans  and  specifica- 
tions. 

.(d)  In  case  changes  of  plans  or  methods  of  work  are 
afterwards  decided  upon. 

Since  the  engineer  is  the  author  of  the  specifications,  he 
evidently  is  the  proper  party  to  interpret  their  meaning.  It 
goes  without  saying  that  the  specifications  and  plans  should  be 
as  clear  and  definite  as  possible  in  all  particulars,  but  it  is 
quite  impossible  to  free  language  from  many  inherent  defects, 
neither  is  it  practicable  to  describe  minutely  and  in  detail  all 

*In  this  case  both  foundations  and  superstructure  formed  one  contract.  If  the 
ov/ner  should  prepare  the  foundations  he  must  guarantee  his  surveys  and  locations  to 
be  as  shown  on  the  drawings,  or  as  described  in  the  specifications.  In  this  case  pro- 
vision must  also  be  made  for  a  comparison  of  the  standards  of  length  used  by  the 
owner  and  by  the  contractor. 

f  See  Arts.  32,  33,  34,  38  and  39. 


118  ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

parts  of  the  work.  There  will,  therefore,  usually  be  some 
uncertainty  as  to  the  real  meaning  of  the  words  used  in  the 
specifications,  or  even  of  the  drawings  themselves,  and  many 
of  the  details  of  the  work  must  be  understood  by  implication, 
rather  than  described  in  either  the  specifications  or  the  plans. 

Occasionally  also  by  some  oversight  the  plans  and  specifi- 
cations will  not  agree.  This  usually  results  from  changes  of 
plan  after  one  or  the  other  has  been  drawn,  such  changes  being 
made  in  the  one  place  and  not  in  the  other.  As  a  rule  the 
specifications  control,  rather  than  the  plans,  and  the  figures  on 
the  plans  control,  rather  than  the  actual  dimensions  of  the 
drawings  when  taken  to  scale.  The  engineer  should,  however, 
be  at  liberty  to  determine  what  the  real  meaning  was  intended 
to  be  in  all  cases  of  discrepancies. 

Very  few  contracts  for  large  works  are  carried  out  from 
beginning  to  completion  without  changes  being  introduced  in 
both  the  plans  and  in  the  specifications  during  the  progress  of 
the  work.  These  changes  may  arise  from  a  newly  devised 
method  or  plan  which  may  be  considered  superior,  or  from 
unlocked  for  obstacles  met  with  in  the  work,  or  from  sugges- 
tions on  the  part  of  the  contractor  himself.  They  also  are 
frequently  made  in  order  to  reduce  the  cost  of  the  work,  and 
on  the  other  hand  are  sometimes  made  in  order  to  improve  its 
character.  It  should  be  understood,  therefore,  that  the  engineer 
has  the  privilege  of  making  such  changes  in  the  plans  and 
specifications  at  any  time.  *• 

So  far  as  the  engineer  may  add  to  the  plans  or  specifica- 
tions by  way  of  interpretation  of  their  true  meaning,  as  in  (#) 
and  (£),  such  supplementary  and  explanatory  matter  "should 
not  involve  any  change  in  the  contract  price. 

In  the  matter  of  discrepancies,  however,  between  plans 
and  specifications,  if  the  contractor  can  show  that  he  based  his. 
estimate  on  one  of  these  to  the  exclusion  of  the  other,  and  when 
interpreted  by  the  engineer,  he  finds  he  had  estimated  on  a  plan 


THE   GENERAL   CLAUSES   IN    SPECIFICATIONS.         119 

materially  cheaper  than  that  now  required,  it  would  be  but  just 
and  right  to  allow  him  the  difference  in  the  cost,  since  he  had 
the  right  to  suppose  that  the  plans  and  specifications  were  in 
accord. 

When  changes  are  introduced  in  the  plans  or  specifica- 
tions after  the  contract  is  let,  such  changes  create  a  new  con- 
tract, and  as  a  matter  of  course  there  must  be  a  new  agreement 
as  to  compensation.  Without  a  special  clause  authorizing  such 
changes  neither  party  could  change  the  terms  of  the  contract 
against  the  will  of  the  other  without  breaking  it.  Furthermore 
without  some  understanding  as  to  how  the  compensation  should 
be  determined  for  such  change  in  plans  or  specifications,  the 
party  of  the  first  part  would  be  at  the  mercy  of  the  contractor 
in  this  matter,  and  he  could  charge  an  extravagant  price  for 
such  changes,  and  there  would  be  no  remedy.  The  following 
is  a  suitable  clause,  covering  all  these  matters: 

Said  contractor  also  agrees  that  said  chief  engineer  shall 
decide  as  to  the  meaning  and  intent  of  any  portion  of  the  fore- 
going specifications,  or  of  the  plans,  where  the  same  may  be 
found  obscure  or  in  dispute;  and  said  chief  engineer  shall  have 
the  right  to  correct  any  errors  or  omissions  therein,  when  such 
corrections  are  necessary  to  the  proper  fulfillment  of  the  inten- 
tion of  said  plans  and  specifications ;  the  action  of  such  cor- 
rection to  date  from  the  time  said  chief  engineer  gives  due 
notice  thereof.  And  it  is  also  agreed  by  said  contractor  that 
said  board  may,  at  any  time,  make  any  changes  in  the  location, 
form,  dimensions,  grades,  and  alignments,  and  may  make  any 
variations  in  the  quantity  of  the  work  to  be  done,  as  exhibited 
in  the  advertisement  or  notice  of  letting  hereto  attached,  or  in 
the  form  of  proposal  or  bid  for  said  work,  and  may  entirely 
exclude  any  of  the  items  of  work  relating  to  said  quantities  at 
any  time,  either  before  the  commencement  of  the  work,  or 
during  its  progress,  without  thereby  altering  or  invalidating 
any  of  the  prices  herein  named,  or  this  contract  in  any  other 
respect;  should  such  action  diminish  the  amount  of  work  that 
would  otherwise  be  done,  no  claim  shall  be  made  for  damages 
on  the  ground  of  loss  of  anticipated  profits  on  work  so  dis- 
pensed with ;  and  should  such  action  be  taken  after  the  com- 
mencement of  any  particular  piece  of  work,  and  result  thereby 
in  extra  cost  to  said  contractor,  said  chief  engineer  shall  certify 
to  said  board  the  amount  to  be  allowed  therefor,  which  he  shall 


120  ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

consider  fair  and  equitable,  as  between  the  parties,  and  his 
decision,  when  approved  by  said  board,*  shall  be  final  and 
conclusive.  E.  K. 

109.  Settlement  Of  Disputes.!  While  the  contract 
lies  between  the  pr.rty  paying  for  the  work,  being  the  party  of 
the  first  part,  and  the  contractor  who  does  the  work,  being  the 
party  of  the  second  part,  the  contract  itself  is  administered  and 
enforced  by  the  engineer,  who  is  usually  employed  by  the  party 
of  the  first  part.  It  is  well  understood  also  that  the  engineer 
is  supposed  to  act  always  in  a  strictly  professional  and  admin- 
istrative capacity,  that  he  has  no  personal  interest  in  favor  of, 
or  against  either  party,  and  that  his  sole  object  is  to  see  that 
the  contract  is  faithfully  carried  out  in  accordance  with  its 
express  terms  and  real  meaning.  It  is  also  recognized  that  he 
is  the  most  competent  person  to  determine  all  differences  and 
disputes,  where  these  arise  between  the  parties  to  the  contract, 
or  between  two  or  more  contractors  engaged  upon  the  same 
work.  It  is  proper  and  right,  therefore,  that  he  should  be 
made  the  referee  in  all  cases  of  dispute  or  misunderstanding, 
and  that  his  position  as  arbitrator  should  be  made  final  and 
conclusive  in  the  premises.  If  it  be  expressly  agreed  upon 
between  the  parties  themselves  that  the  engineer  shall  act  in 
this  capacity,  then  his  decision  does  become  binding  and  final 
upon  the  parties,  even  to  the  exclusion  of  the  action  of  the 
courts,  unless  it  can  be  shown  that  the  engineer  acted  through 
prejudice,  or  ignorance,  or  fraud.  As  it  is  usually  very  diffi- 
cult to  establish  a  case  against  the  engineer  on  either  of  these 
grounds,  a  clause  such  as  the  following  usually  acts  to  settle  all 
disputes  and  to  keep  such  controversies  oufc  of  the  courts. 
Honesty  and  fairness  is  also  so  common  a  characteristic  of 
engineers  that  a  clause  such  as  the  following  is  nearly  always 
acceptable  to  both  parties,  and  very  seldom  results  in  injustice 
being  done  to  either  party. 

*This  decision   of  the   engineer  is  usually   made  final  and  conclusive  without 
approval  by  his  principal. 

fSee  articles  12  and  13. 


THE   GENERAL   CLAUSES   IN   SPECIFICATIONS.         121 

To  prevent  all  disputes  and  litigation,  it  is  further  agreed 
by  and  between  the  parties  to  this  contract,  that  said  chief 
engineer  shall  be  the  referee,  in  all  cases,  to  determine  the 
amount,  quality,  acceptability,  and  fitness  of  the  several  kinds 
of  work  which  are  to  be  paid  for  under  this  contract,  and  to 
decide  upon  all  questions  which  may  arise  as  to  the  fulfillment 
of  said  contract  on  the  part  of  said  contractor,  and  his  decision 
and  determination,  when  approved  by  said  board*  shall  be 
final  and  conclusive.  Said  contractor  shall  also  afford  all 
reasonable  facilities  for  access  to  his  work  to  any  other  parties 
or  contractors  who  may  be  doing  extra  work  or  be  working  on 
a  section  of  the  conduit  adjacent  to  his  own,  and  any  difference 
which  may  arise  between  two  contractors  in  regard'  to  their 
adjoining  work  is  to  be  adjusted  by  said  chief  engineer,  whose 
decision  in  the  matter  shall  be  final  and  binding  upon  both  par- 
ties, t  E.  K. 

110,  Extra  Work.  J  While  all  changes  in  plans  and 
specifications  have  been  provided  for  in  section  51,  it  is  well  to 
insert  a  special  clause  on  the  subject  of  extra  work.  It  is  com- 
mon for  contractors,  on  the  completion  of  a  piece  of  work,  to 
bring  in  a  bill  of  extras,  which  they  claim  represents  work 
which  they  were  asked  to  perform,  and  which  was  not  included 
in  the  plans  or  specifications,  and  which  was  not  specially  pro- 
vided for  by  particular  agreement  with  the  engineer  with  the 
corresponding  compensation  to  be  paid  for  it.  What  the  con- 
tractor's ideas  or  intentions  may  be  on  this  subject  does  not 
usually  develop  until  the  work  has  been  fully  completed 
and  the  time  of  final  settlement  has  arrived.  In  many  instances 
it  is  then  too  late  to  determine  the  exact  facts  concerning  this 
extra  work,  either  because  of  the  incompleteness  of  the  records, 

*  See  footnote,  page  — . 

f  In  the  opinion  of  the  author  of  this  work  it  is  doubtful  if  a  clause  such  as  is  here 
given  will  always  stand  in  a  court  of  law.  The  reader  is  referred  on  this  subject  to 
Arts.  12  and  13  in  the  Synopsis  of  the  Law  of  Contracts.  In  accordance  with  the  prin- 
ciples there  laid  down  it  would  seem  that  the  courts  will  only  sustain  such  a  clause  as 
the  above  when  it  can  be  shown  that  the  acts  of  the  engineer  taken  under  it  have  been 
such  as  a  court  could  properly  refer  to  an  expert  referee,  or  to  a  person  presumably 
more  competent  than  the  court  to  determine.  In  general  such  questions  would  be  such 
as  might  be  called  " Conditions  Precedent"  to  a  legal  settlement.  Such  "conditions 
precedent"  would  include  all  questions,  such  as  the  value  of  extra  work,  the  amount  of 
damages  actually  sustained  from  any  breach  of  the  contract,  the  extent  of  any  failures 
to  comply  with  the  contract,  and  all  matters  which  are  not  so  much  questions  of  fact  as 
questions  of  quantitative  and  qualitative  value,  which  can  only  be  estimated,  and  which 
the  engineer  is  presumably  competent  to  evaluate.  See  also  Art.  86. 

\  See  Articles  38  and  39. 


122  ENGINEERING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

or  because  of  the  impracticability  of  making  the  necessary 
measurements.  Such  a  bill  of  extras,  therefore,  brought  in  at 
the  time  of  settlement  is  always  the  source  of  a  certain  amount 
of  difficulty  and  irritation,  and  when  the  piece  of  work  extends 
over  a  considerable  length  of  time,  such  a  contingency  as  above 
described  should  be  prevented  by  requiring  all  such  bills  of 
extras  to  be  presented  from  month  to  month.  Furthermore,  it 
is  desirable  also  that  the  contractor  should  reveal  to  the  engi- 
neer his  intentions  in  regard  to  claims  for  extras,  before  such 
extra  work  is  executed.  In  this  case  if  he  will  not  accept  of  the 
price  fixed  by  the  engineer  for  doing  'such  u  ork  the  engineer 
should  have  the  privilege  of  letting  this  extra  work  to  another 
party.  In  this  way  extravagant  prices  for  such  work  could  be 
prevented,  and  disputes  avoided,  and  the  following  is  given  as 
a  good  example  of  such  a  clause,  on  a  piece  of  work  which 
extended  over  a  considerable  period  of  time  : 

No  claim  for  extra  work  shall  be  considered  or  allowed, 
unless  such  extra  work  shall  have  been  previously  ordered  by 
said  engineer,  in  writing.  The  claims  for  such  extra  work, 
when  so  ordered,  shall  be  presented  to  such  board  on  or  before 
the  1 5th  day  of  the  month  following  that  in  which  said  extra 
work  was  done,  otherwise  such  claims  during  that  month  will 
be  forfeited  and  waived.  In  case  any  extra  work  shall  be 
required  in  the  proper  performance  of  the  work  contemplated 
to  be  done  under  this  contract,  it  is  understood  that  said  board 
reserves  the  right  to  have  such  extra  work  done  by  any  other 
person,  firm,  or  corporation  than  the  said  contractor,  unless  an 
agreement  upon  the  prices  to  be  paid  for  such  extra  work  can 
promptly  be  reached  between  said  board  and  contractor.  Should 
said  extra  work  be  let  to  any  other  person,  firm;  or  corporation 
than  said  contractor,  said  contractor  further  agrees  that  he  will 
not,  in  any  way,  interfere  with,  or  molest  such  person,  firm,  or 
corporation,  and  that  said  contractor  will  suspend  such  part  of 
the  work  herein  specified,  or  will  carry  on  the  same  in  such  a 
manner  as  he  may  be  ordered  by  said  engineer,  so  as  to  afford 
all  reasonable  facilities  for  doing  such  extra  work;  but  said 
contractor  agrees  to  make  no  claim  for  damages,  or  for  any 
privileges  or  rights,  other  than  expressed  by  this  contract,  by 
reason  of  the  suspension  and  the  doing  of  such  extra  work, 
except  for  an  extension  of  time  to  perform  this  contract,  as  may 
be  certified  to  said  board  in  writing  by  said  chief  engineer,  and 
approved  by  said  board.  E.  K. 


THE   GENERAL   CLAUSES   IN    SPECIFICATIONS.         123 

111.  Definition  of  "Engineer"  and  "Contractor." 

While  it  is  not  at  all  necessary  as  a  rule  to  define  the  terms 
"Engineer,"  "Contractor,"  "Board,"  etc.,  it  is  usually  well  to 
insert  such  a  definition,  to  prevent  any  legal  quibble  in  case 
suit  is  brought  by  either  of  the  parties  to  the  contract.  In  this 
definition  also  the  agency  of  persons  acting  for  either  of  the 
principals  or  for  the  engineer  is  also  defined. 

Wherever  the  word  "engineer"  is  used   herein,  it  shall  be 

and  is  mutually  understood  to  refer  to and  to  his  properly 

authorized  agents,  limited  by  the  particular  duties  entrusted  to 
them. 

Wherever  the  word  "contractor"  is  used  herein,  it  shall  be 
and  is  mutually  understood  to  refer  to  the  party  or  parties  con- 
tracting to  perform  the  work  to  be  done  under  this  contract,  or 
the  legal  representatives  of  such  party  or  parties. 

E.  A.  F. 

112.  Documents  Composing  the  Contract.    While 
in    common   law   all  the   documents,    acts,    agreements,  public 
advertisements,  etc.,  w7hich  relate  to  or  serve  to  explain  the  full 
meaning  and  intent  of  the   contract,   are  made  portions  of  such 
contract,    it  is   well   also    to    specify    particularly    what    docu- 
ments combine  to  make  what  is   understood  by  the  parties  as 
"the    contract."       This  clause   is    frequently    inserted    in    the 
enacting  agreement,  which  may  or  may  not  precede  the  speci- 
fications proper.     It  is  here  inserted   as  a  clause  in  the  specifi- 
cations, but  perhaps  more  properly  belongs  in  what  is  sometimes 
designated  more  specifically    as  "the    contract."      The   clause 
may  read  as  follows : 

It  is  understood  by  the  contracting  parties  that  the  follow- 
ing documents  are  essential  portions  of  the  complete  contract: 
The  advertisement,  the  instructions  to  bidders,  the  proposal,  all 
drawings,  maps,  and  plans,  hereto  attached  or  herein  described, 
the  specifications,  specific  contract,  and  the  contractor's  bond. 

113.  Meaning  Understood.    It  is  not  unusual  for 
contractors    to   enter  a    plea,  either  during  construction  or   on 
final  settlement,  that  such  and  such   parts   of  the   specifications 
were  not  understood,  and  that  their  bids  were    made    under  a 


124  ENGINEEKINGr    SPECIFICATIONS. 

misapprehension.  To  prevent  the  making  of  such  a  claim  the 
following  may  be  inserted: 

Said  contractor  hereby  admits  that  he  has  read  each  and 
every  clause  in  this  contract,  and  fully  understands  the  mean- 
ing of  the  same,  and  hereby  agrees  that  he  will  comply  with 
all  the  terms,  covenants  and  agreements  herein  set  forth. 

E.  K. 

114.     The  Use  of  General  Clauses  in  Engineering 

Specifications.  While  the  general  clauses  here  described 
with  illustrative  examples  may  appear  to  the  reader  unneces- 
sarily voluminous,  their  purpose  and  effect  is  to  clearly  define 
the  business  relations  of  the  parties,  and  to  prevent  injustice 
being  done  to  either  party.  They  are  also  calculated  to  prevent 
litigation  and  delay  in  the  final  settlement,  and  if  they  are  able 
to  effect  these  ends  they  are  well  worth  inserting,  even  where 
the  work  to  be  done  is  relatively  small,  and  unimportant.  'The 
engineer  should  be  careful,  however,  that  all  such  clauses  are 
consistent  as  between  themselves,  and  it  is  best  also  to  make 
them  mutually  exclusive.  In  other  words,  the  same  thing 
should  not  be  described  or  defined  in  more  than  one  clause,  as 
repetitions  only  weaken  the  document.  Furthermore,  no  con- 
dition or  limitation  should  be  inserted  without  a  full  intention 
of  strict  compliance.  If  the  engineer  begins  to  relax  in  his 
requirements  in  one  particular,  the  contractor  will  not  bellow 
to  take  advantage  of  such  precedents,  and  to  claim  similar 
privileges  in  other  directions.  If  the  engineer  could  know  in 
advance  who  the  contractor  was  to  be,  many  of  the  clauses  here 
.offered  might  be  dispensed  with,  in  case  the  contractor  was 
known  to  be  thoroughly  honest  and  competent.  The  specifi- 
cations are  prepared  in  advance,  however,  and  it  is  wise  to 
assume  that  the  contractor  will  be  a  more  or  less  irresponsible 
party,  without  reputation  to  sustain,  and  whose  sole  object  is 
personal  gain.  It  must  also  be  understood  that  the  clauses 
here  given  are  offered  only  as  illustrative  examples,  and  not  to 
be  blindly  copied.  The  engineer  in  writing  the  specifications 


THE   GENERAL   CLAUSES   IN    SPECIFICATIONS.         125 

should  have  clearly  in  mind  \vhaf  the  business  relations  are 
intended  to  be,  and  make  his  general  clauses  consistent  with 
that  conception.  He  could  probably  consult  other  specifica- 
tions, or  the  clauses  as  given  above,  as  suggestions  and  to 
enable  him  to  avoid  omitting  some  essential  condition  which  he 
wishes  to  insert.  It  is  believed,  by  the  author,  that  the  clauses 
here  quoted  have  the  support  of  the  leading  members  of  the 
profession  in  this  country,  and  that  they  are  well  adapted  to 
determine  the  conditions  which  the  engineers  who  use  them 
desired  to  impose.  It  must  not  be  supposed,  however,  that  all 
these  general  clauses  would  ever  be  embodied  in  any  one 
specification. 


PART  III. 

Specific  Descriptive  or  Technical  Clauses 
in  Specifications. 

115.    Essential  Features  of  Good  Specifications. 

We  now  come  to  consider  that  portion  of  any  given  set  of 
specifications  which  relates  to  and  describes  the  work  itself. 
In  writing  specifications  of  this  kind,  the  following  require- 
ments should  be  complied  with : 

(#)  The  work  should  be  described  first  as  a  whole,  and 
then  in  detail. 

(£)  Every  portion  and  detail  of  the  work  should  be 
described  in  clear  and  simple  language  which  will  be  under- 
stood by  the  contractors  who  are  supposed  to  bid  on  the  work. 
These  descriptions  should  have  reference  to  the  ultimate  end  to 
be  accomplished  rather  than  to  the  means  and  methods  to  be 
employed.  It  is  usually  not  wise  to  specify  methods  unless  in 
the  opinion  of  the  engineer  some  particular  method  is  far 
preferable  to  any  other. 

(c)  The  clauses  in  the  specifications  should  be  made  so 
far  as  possible  mutually  exclusive.  That  is  to  say,  no  part  of 
the  work  should  be  specifically  described  in  more  than  one 
place.  Repetition  of  descriptions  tends  to  weaken  the  docu- 
ment. 

(</)  The  specifications  should  be  clear  in  the  matter  of 
indicating  what  is  absolutely  required  without  any  alternative, 
and  what  is  named  as  indicating  in  general  the  character  of  the 
product,  and  in  which  alternative  materials,  methods,  or  results 

will  be  allowed.     If   the  engineer  anticipates  that  some  clauses 

126 


TECHNICAL   CLAUSES   IN    SPECIFICATIONS.  127 

in  the  specifications  are  to  be  rigidly  insisted  upon,  while  others 
will  not  be  specifically  enforced,  this  intention  or  state  of  mind 
of  the  engineer  should  be  revealed  in  the  specifications  them- 
selves. In  other  words,  the  contractor  should  know  in  advance 
how  the  specifications  are  to  be  interpreted,  so  far  as  it  is  pos- 
sible to  give  this  information  in  the  specifications  themselves. 

(*)  The  last  named  requirement  demands  that  the  engi- 
neer should  be  so  familiar  with  all  the  details  of  the  work 
described,  from  actual  experience,  that  he  is  able  to  know  in 
advance  what  his  decision  will  be  in  the  various  contingencies 
which  may  arise  during  the  progress  of  the  work.  His  fore- 
sight in  this  particular  must  be  complete  and  distinct,  which 
can  only  be  the  case  when  the  engineer  who  writes  the  specifi- 
cations has  had  considerable  experience  in  carrying  out  practi- 
cally the  same  kind  of  work. 

(_/")  In  choosing  units  of  measure,  in  describing  the  work, 
to  be  used  for  determining  compensation,  only  specific  and 
definite  units  should  be  chosen,  or  they  should  be  so  defined 
as  to  admit  of  no  double  meaning.  For  instance,  to  say  that 
mortar  shall  be  composed  of  one  part  cement  to  two  parts  of 
sand  comes  very  far  from  defining  a  particular  ratio  of  ingre- 
dients. If  the  words  "by  weight"  be  added,  it  still  fails  to 
define,  inasmuch  as  wet  sand  is  much  heavier  than  dry;  or  if 
the  words  "by  measure"  be  used,  this  also  fails  to  define,  since 
cement  may  be  measured  in  the  original  package,  where  it  is 
thoroughly  compacted,  or  it  may  be  dumped  and  measured  in 
a  fluffy  condition,  in  which  it  occupies  some  50  per  cent,  more 
volume. 

(£•)  The  engineer  should  be  familiar  with  the  ordinary 
methods  employed  by  different  kinds  of  mechanics  and  should 
so  design  his  work  as  to  obtain  satisfactory  results  without 
requiring  a  much  higher  grade  of  work  than  is  customary  by 
the  mechanics  who  will  be  called  upon  to  execute  it.  It  is 
practically  impossible  with  the  most  thorough  supervision  and 


128  ENGINEEKING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

inspection  to  get  mechanics  to  vary  their  ordinary  practice 
materially.  The  failure  to  recognize  this  fact  often  leads 
engineers  to  specify  methods  or  results  which  are  practically 
unattainable,  and  this  leads  either  to  continual  violation  of  the 
specifications  and  its  accompanying  irritations  and  delays,  or  to 
an  abandonment  on  the  part  of  the  engineer  of  the  strict  inter- 
pretation of  his  own  specifications. 

(A)  In  the  matter  of  materials  it  is  customary  to  specify 
not  the  very  highest  and  best  the  market  affords,  but  such  a 
grade  of  material  as  would  be  satisfactory  in  service,  and  which 
can  be  supplied  by  the  standard  manufacturers  of  that  partic- 
ular product.  In  this  way  the  engineer  gets  the  benefit  of  a 
wide  competition,  and  of  a  correspondingly  low  price.  The 
minimum  requirements  for  materials  which  serves  as  a  criterion 
of  rejection  determines  very  largely  the  cost  of  the  work.  If, 
therefore,  the  engineer  in  preparing  his  design  bases  his  calcu- 
lations upon  what  might  be  commonly  known  as  good  or  first- 
class  materials,  with  a  minimum  limit  fairly  below  this  generally 
recognized  first-class  grade,  he  will  usually  obtain  a  material 
practically  as  good  as  the  market  affords,  without  being 
obliged  to  pay  an  extravagant  price  for  it,  and  without  suffer- 
ing from  the  delays  and  troubles  caused  by  the  rejection  of  a 
large  proportion  of  the  material  furnished.  To  base  a  contract 
on  the  very  highest  tests  known  of  a  given  material,  and  to 
require  this  extraordinary  quality  for  all  the  material  furnished 
is  extremely  unwise. 

(z)  If  possible  to  avoid  it,  it  is  best  not  to  specify  a  par- 
ticular manufactured  product  or  proprietary  article  by  name. 
If  this  is  done  at  all,  more  than  one  such  name  should  be  given 
if  possible,  and  others  admitted  if  shown  to  be  as  good  as  these 
to  the  satisfaction  of  the  engineer.  To  limit  the  materials  or 
articles  specified  to  that  of  a  single  manufacturer  subjects  the 
engineer  to  invidious  criticism  and  suspicion,  and  it  is  always 
wise  to  avoid  even  the  appearance  of  evil. 


TECHNICAL   CLAUSES   IN    SPECIFICATIONS.  129 

(/)  It  is  not  uncommon  to  specify  that  the  materials  fur- 
nished shall  be  of  well  known  brands,  or  the  products  of 
factories  or  works  of  established  reputation.  Similarly  it  is 
sometimes  specified  that  the  contractor  himself  must  show  a 
familiarity  with  the  work  he  proposes  to  perform.  Also  in  the 
matter  of  stone,  for  instance,  that  it  shall  be  taken  from  quar- 
ries which  have  been  in  long  use,  the  stone  from  which  by 
actual  use  is  known  to  have  good  weathering  qualities. 

(/£)  Before  writing  the  specification,  the  engineer  must 
also  have  a  clearly  defined  notion  as  to  the  amount  of  respon- 
sibility which  is  to  be  placed  upon  the  contractor.  If  the  engi- 
neer prescribes  the  plan,  the  materials,  and  the  methods  to  be 
employed,  he,  of  course,  assumes  all  responsibility  so  far  as 
these  are  concerned,  and  he  can  not  in  justice  make  the  con- 
tractor responsible  for  his  own  faults.  He  should  always  be 
ready  and  willing  to  take  upon  himself  such  responsibilities 
pertaining  to  the  design  as  properly  belong  to  the  designer. 
For  instance,  if  the  contractor  is  held  responsible  for  the 
results,  he  must  be  given  a  considerable  latitude  as  to  methods, 
and  if  the  engineer  prescribes  the  plan,  the  materials,  and  all 
the  methods  to  be  employed,  he  can  not  hold  the  contractor  for 
the  results,  or  for  the  successful  operation  of  the  project,  beyond 
the  simple  faithful  performance  of  the  work  prescribed.  In 
general  the  entire  responsibility  for  the  successful  operation  of 
the  work  should  rest  upon  the  engineer.  It  is  only  in  case  of 
extra-hazardous  undertakings,  which  are  largely  of  the  nature 
of  an  experiment,  in  which  no  well  defined  plan  is  outlined, 
that  the  contractor  is  left  comparatively  free  both  as  to  plan 
and  execution.  It  is  only  in  such  cases  that  the  engineer  is 
warranted  in  relieving  himself  of  all  responsibility,  and  placing 
the  same  wholly  upon  the  contractor.  There  are  cases  in 
which  contractors  have,  by  experience,  acquired  peculiar 
ability  to  perform  certain  kinds  of  hazardous  work,  and  who 

are  willing   to   undertake   the   same  under  a  guarantee  of  suc- 
9 


130  ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

cessful  execution,  under  which  circumstances,  any  engineer, 
even  of  high  repute  in  his  profession,  would  be  warranted  in 
letting  a  contract  and  putting  the  entire  responsibility  upon  the 
contractor. 

(/)  A  strong  reason  for  enforcing  specifications  literally 
and  rigidly,  instead  of  accepting  some  other  material  or  method 
which  possibly  may  be  "just  as  good"  is  to  be  found  in  the 
relation  the  engineer  and  owner  hold  to  other  contractors  who 
bid  upon  the  work.  It  is  to  be  presumed  that  these  other 
parties  have  based  their  estimates  on  a  strict  compliance  with 
the  specifications,  and  it  is  possible  that  the  lowest  bidder  has 
presumed  on  his  being  able  to  substitute  cheaper  materials  or 
methods  for  those  specified.  If  he  is  allowed  to  do  this  after 
the  contract  is  let,  it  is  evident  that  the  other  bidders  have  been 
discriminated  against  to  their  disadvantage  and  under  a  species 
of  fraud,  which  should  not  receive  the  encouragement  of  either 
the  engineer  or  of  the  owner.  It  is  difficult,  therefore,  to  see 
how  a  cheaper  grade  of  work  can  properly  be  accepted  in  lieu 
of  that  specified,  even  though  it  be  "just  as  good,"  without 
encouraging  this  practice  of  presuming  upon  a  cheaper  fulfill- 
ment, and  also  without  treating  the  other  bidders  unfairly. 
Other  things  being  equal,  therefore,  it  is  best  to  rigidly  enforce 
a  contract,  even  though  a  cheaper  material  or  method  might, 
in  the  opinion  of  the  engineer,  be  employed  with  equally  good 
results.  Or,  if  a  cheaper  compliance  is  allowed,  a  correspond- 
ing reduction  in  price  should  be  insisted  upon. 

The  above  are  some  of  the  numerous  controlling  ideas 
which  the  engineer  should  have  clearly  in  mind  in  the  writing 
of  a  set  of  engineering  specifications.  He  must  know  in  the 
first  place  exactly  what  he  wants,  and  then  try  to  so  describe  it 
that  others  can  not  mistake  his  meaning.  The  general  and 
detail  plans  are  usually  made  before  the  specifications  are 
written,  and  the  engineer  has  these  before  him  in  writing  the 
specifications,  and  makes  liberal  reference  to  them.  Since 


TECHNICAL   CLAUSES    IN    SPECIFICATIONS.  131 

they  are  also  a  part  of  the  specifications,  he  has  the  advantage 
of  a  double  language  in  which  to  present  his  ideas,  and,  if  he 
does  not  succeed  in  making  clear  to  the  proposed  contractors 
exactly  what  is  to  be  done,  he  should  feel  that  he  alone  is  to 
blame  for  any  misunderstanding. 

116.  Specifications  Accompanying  Complete 
Detail  Plans.  As  described  in  article  17,  we  have  in  general 
three  classes  of  engineering  specifications,  describing  the  work 
itself,  namely: 

Specifications  accompanying  complete  detail  plans. 

Specifications  accompanying  a  general  plan  only. 

Specifications  unaccompanied  by  any  plan,  and  commonly 
known  as  General  Specifications. 

When  the  specifications  are  accompanied  by  complete 
detail  plans,  these  plans  are  prepared  before  the  specifications 
are  drawn,  and  in  this  case  the  specific  descriptive  specifica- 
tions are  largely  composed  of  descriptions  of  the  materials  to 
be  used,  the  methods  of  manufacture  and  erection,  and  of  the 
results  to  be  accomplished,  or  of  the  tests  to  which  the  finished 
product  is  to  be  subjected.  Such  complete  detail  plans  are 
always  necessary  when  a  particular  and  definite  plan  is  to  be 
carried  out.  When  the  work  is  to  be  let  in  open  competition, 
and  to  the  lowest  bidder  it  is  also  usually  best  to  prepare  com- 
plete detail  plans  in  order  to  insure  that  the  bidders  will  all 
estimate  on  exactly  the  same  thing,  and  further,  to  insure  that 
the  final  product  will  be  satisfactory.  In  this  case  the  detail 
plans  must  be  duplicated  by  some  of  the  various  methods  of 
copying  drawings,  and  in  very  large  and  important  work 
frequently  by  photo-lithographing,  and  these  copies  of  the 
plans  submitted  along  with  the  specifications  to  the  various 
parties  wishing  to  bid  upon  the  work.  If  the  bidders  are 
expected  to  be  those  residing  in  the  immediate  vicinity,  it  is 
not  so  necessary  to  duplicate  these  drawings,  all  the  bidders 
being  asked  to  examine  the  drawings  in  the  office  of  the 


132  ENGINEEKING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

engineer.  In  this  case  the  drawings  usually  are  self-explana- 
tory even  to  the  extent  of  indicating  the  materials  to  be  used, 
so  that  the  written  specifications  need  not  describe  the  work  as 
to  its  form  and  dimensions,  but  are  only  descriptive  of  the 
work  in  a  general  way. 

117.  Specifications    Accompanying    a    General 

Plan  Only.  In  this  case  the  bidder  is  asked  to  submit  detail 
plans  for  the  work  in  submitting  his  bid,  the  specifications 
being  so  framed,  however,  as  to  reduce  all  designs  which  fully 
comply  with  these  requirements  to  a  common  standard  of 
value.  To  accomplish  this  purpose  the  engineer  must  be  able 
to  foresee  practically  all  the  various  designs  which  may  be 
submitted,  and  to  anticipate  all  the  advantages  in  economy 
which  are  likely  to  control  the  preparation  of  these  designs, 
and  to  make  such  requirements  in  the  specifications  as,  when 
complied  with,  will  in  his  opinion  give  products  of  equal  effi- 
ciency, capacity,  and  permanency.  In  this  way  the  engineer 
gets  the  advantage  of  the  experience  and  of  the  inventive  genius 
of  all  the  persons  bidding  upon  the  work,  with  the  chance 
that  he  may  secure  a  better  design  than  he  himself  would 
have  been  able  to  prepare,  and  also  one  which  may  cost  mate- 
rially less  than  his  own  design.  As  an  illustration  of  this 
kind  of  specification,  we  may  have  a  bridge  or  roof  truss  of  a 
particular  general  design,  the  outline  drawing  showing  simply 
the  general  dimensions,  and  the  location  of  the  members,  this 
fixing  the  general  style  of  truss,  which  for  some  particular 
reason  the  engineer  wishes  complied  with.  The  contractor  is 
then  asked  to  build  a  truss  on  these  general  lines  in  compli- 
ance with  the  accompanying  written  specifications. 

118.  Specifications  Unaccompanied  by    Plans, 
Known    Commonly    as  General  Specifications.    In 
this  case  no  plans  whatever   are  submitted,  but   only   the  most 
general  requirements  to  be  satisfied.     As,  for  instance,  in  the 
case   of  a  bridge,  the  total   span,  the   loads   to  be   carried,  the 


ILLUSTRATIVE    SPECIFICATIONS,    ETC.  133 

character  of  the  stream  to  be  bridged  (this  determining 
the  character  of  false  works  required,  and  often  determining 
the  character  of  the  superstructure  itself),  the  kinds  of 
materials  to  be  used  in  its  construction,  the  maximum  unit 
stress  allowed  in  the  various  parts,  etc.  Or  if  the  contract  is 
for  machinery,  the  specifications  may  define  the  amount  and 
kind  of  work  to  be  done,  which  fixes  the  capacity  of  the 
apparatus.  They  would  also  define  the  efficiency  or  economy 
of  operation  of  the  plant,  and  make  various  requirements  in 
regard  to  the  material  used,  and  methods  of  construction  which 
would  be  supposed  to  govern  its  permanency.  In  this  case,  as 
in  the  one  preceding,  the  engineer  must  have  constantly  in 
mind  in  writing  the  specifications  the  possibility  of  complying 
with  them  with  some  kind  of  cheap  product  which,  while 
fulfilling  the  letter  of  the  requirements  of  the  specifications, 
would  not  be  at  all  what  he  hopes  to  obtain,  or  what  would  be 
consistent  with  the  more  standard  forms  of  construction. 


ILLUSTRATIVE  SPECIFICATIONS  OF  VARIOUS 
ELEMENTARY  PORTIONS  OF  ENGI- 
NEERING WORK. 

119.  Scope  and  Purpose.  It  is  proposed  in  the  fol- 
lowing articles  to  give  illustrative  examples  of  what  is  consid- 
ered good  practice  jn  describing  many  of  the  more  common 
elements  of  engineering  construction.  The  practice  pursued 
in  discussing  the  general  clauses  in  engineering  specifications, 
of  first  considering  the  purpose  of  the  clause,  and  then  giving 
an  illustrative  example,  will  be  followed  here.  Frequently, 
howrever,  more  than  one  illustration  will  be  given,  and  the 
sources  from  which  they  are  obtained  will  also  be  indicated. 
It  is  thought  this  arrangement  will  serve  a  better  purpose  than 


134  ENGINEEKING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

to  give  a  series  of  complete  specifications  of  various  kinds  of 
engineering  work,  without  a  detailed  discussion  of  the  several 
clauses.  By  the  arrangement  here  used  duplication  of  parts  is 
avoided,  and  the  reasons  for  the  particular  descriptions  can  be 
given  in  their  proper  connection.  These  reasons  will  perhaps 
be  more  useful  to  the  young  practitioner  than  the  particular 
specifications  themselves. 


SPECIFICATIONS    ON   EXCAVATIONS    AND 
EMBANKMENTS. 

120.    Earth  Work,  Excavation,  and  Grading.  A 

specification  for  excavation,  or  grading,  should  satisfactorily 
cover  the  following  ground  : 

(«)     Location  and  general  description  of  the  work. 

(<£)  As  full  a  description  of  the  character  of  the  materials 
to  be  excavated  as  can  be  furnished. 

(c)  A  classification  of  the  materials  which  will  be 
employed,  and  the  methods  of  measurement. 

(d?)  A  description  of  the  lines  of  limits  of  excavation  and 
fill,  including  borrow  pits,  and  waste  banks. 

(tf)     The  disposition  to  be  made  of  the  excavated  materials. 

(y)  The  distance  to  which  the  material  is  to  be  trans- 
ported, commonly  included  under  the  general  head  of  "Haul.*' 

It  is  always  wise  for  the  engineer  to  determine  in  advance 
approximately  the  character  of  the  material  to  be  encountered 
and  to  give  to  the  contractor  the  benefit  of  such  information. 
It  is  not  wise,  however,  for  him  to  guarantee  the  quality  of  the 
material  to  be  as  indicated,  since  this  furnishes  to  the  contractor 
grounds  for  claims  which  the  engineer  will  find  it  difficult. to 
adjust.  The  character  of  the  material  is  usually  learned 
approximately  by  borings  along  the  line  of  the  work.  In  the 
case  of  railroad  work  it  is  not  customary  to  do  this,  but  from 


SPECIFICATIONS    ON    EXCAVATIONS,  ETC.  135 

the  general  knowledge  of  the  geologic  formations,   the  various 
kinds  of  materials  can  be  fairly  anticipated. 

The  specifications  should  be  very  explicit  and  clear  beyond 
all  possibility  of  doubt  in  the  matter  of  grades  or  classification 
of  materials  to  be  encountered,  and  the  methods  which  will  be 
used  in  measuring  the  quantities.  Innumerable  difficulties  are 
constantly  arising  in  the  carrying  out  of  engineering  specifications 
from  misunderstandings  on  these  points.  Materials  encountered 
in  excavation  are  not  only  various  as  to  quality,  but  all  grada- 
tions are  found,  so  that  it  is  practically  impossible  to  determine 
where  one  classification  or  kind  of  material  ends  and  another 
begins.  In  fact  two  engineers  will  often  classify  the  same 
materials  differently  under  the  same  specifications,  and  there  is 
no  possibility  of  determining  such  questions,  except  by  agreeing 
to  abide  by  the  decision  of  the  engineer.  It  is  best  not  to  have 
too  many  classes  of  materials,  and  all  kinds  of  materials  are 
usually  grouped  under  three  general  heads,  namely:  Earth, 
loose  rock,  and  solid  rock.* 

121.  Grading.  The  following  specifications  for  railroad 
grading  are  used  by  the  Pennsylvania  Railroad : 

Under  this  head  will  be  included  all  excavations  and 
embankments  required  for  the  formation  of  the  roadbed ;  cut- 
ting all  ditches  or  drains  about  or  contiguous  to  the  road ;  the 
foundations  of  culverts  and  bridges,  or  walls ;  the  excavations 
and  embankments  necessary  for  reconstructing  turnpike  or 
common  roads,  in  cases  where  thev  are  destroyed  or  interfered 
with  in  the  formation  of  the  railroad  ;  and  all  other  excavations 
or  embankments  connected  with  or  incident  to  the  construction 
of  said  railroad. 

All  cuttings  shall  be  measured  in  the  excavations,  and  esti- 
mated by  the  cubic  yard,  under  the  follow  heads,  viz:  Earth, 
Loose  Rock,  Solid  Rock. 

Earth — will  include  clay,  sand,  loam,  gravel  and  all  other 
earthy  matter,  or  earth  containing  loose  stone  or  boulders  inter- 
mixed, which  do  not  exceed  in  size  three  cubic  feet. 

*  In  the  specifications  used  on  the  Chicago  Drainage  Canal  but  two  classes  of 
materials  were  named,  "Solid  rock"  and  "Glacial  drift."  Where  no  solid  rock  was 
anticipated,  but  one  class  was  named  and  this  was  called  "Excavation."  Sometimes 
more  than  three  classes  are  recognized  and  provided  for  when  the  grades  are  distinct 
and  well  marked. 


136  ENGINEEEING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

Loose  Rock — shall  include  all  stone  and  detached  rock  lying 
in  separate  and  contiguous  masses  containing  not  over  three 
cubic  yards;  also,  all  slate  or  other  rock  that  can  be  quarried 
without  blasting,  although  blasting  may  be  occasionally 
resorted  to. 

Solid  Rock — Includes  all  rock  occurring  in  masses  exceed- 
ing three  cubic  yards,  which  can  notbe  removed  without  blasting. 

The  roadbed  will  be  graded  twenty  feet  wide  in  earth  cut- 
tings and  fifteen  feet  in  fillings,  except  where  otherwise  directed 
by  the  engineer,  with  side  slopes  of  such  inclination  as  the 
engineer  shall  in  each  case  designate,  and  in  conformity  to  such 
depth  of  cuttings  and  fillings  as  may  have  been  or  may  hereaf- 
ter be  determined  upon  by  said  engineer. 

Earth,  gravel  and  other  materials  taken  from  excavations 
(except  when  otherwise  directed  by  the  engineer),  shall  be 
deposited  in  embankments,  the  cost  of  removing  which  will  be 
included  in  the  price  paid  for  excavation.  All  material  neces- 
sarily procured  from  without  the  road  and  deposited  in  the 
embankments  will  be  paid  for  as  excavation  only.  In  procuring 
materials  for  embankment  from  without  the  line  of  the  road,  the 
place  will  be  designated  by  the  engineer  in  charge  of  the  work ; 
and  in  excavating  and  removing  it,  care  must  be  taken  to  injure 
or  disfigure  the  land  as  little  as  possible.  The  embankments 
will  be  formed  in  layers  of  such  depth  (generally  one  foot), 
and  the  materials  disposed  and  distributed  in  such  manner  as 
the  engineer  may  direct,  the  required  allowance  for  settling 
being  added. 

No  borrow  pits  will  be  opened  nearer  than  four  feet  from 
base  of  embankment  slope,  and  will  receive  same  slope  as  cor- 
responding embankment.  All  borrow  pits  will  be  excavated  in 
a  regular  manner  and  so  as  to  leave  no  holes  for  standing  water, 
generally  with  a  descent  at  bottom  to  allow  fre^  passage  of 
water. 

Wherever  the  excavations  furnish  more  material  than  is 
required  for  embankments,  the  surplus  will  be  used  to  increase 
width  of  embankment,  or  deposited  in  spoil  banks  or  waste 
piles,  as  and  where  the  chief  engineer  may  direct. 

The  roadbed,  in  cuts  and  on  banks,  to  be  made  in  a  work- 
manlike manner;  to  be  perfectly  even  and  regular  according  to 
grade  stakes  as  set  from  time  to  time  by  the  engineer  in  charge, 
and  to  be  exactly  of  the  width  directed. 

All  slopes  to  be  formed  even  and  straight,  according  to 
slope  stakes,  and  to  such  incline  as  directed  in  each  case. 

All  ditches  in  cuts  or  along  banks  to  be  made  of  such  width 
and  grade  as  the  engineer  in  charge  may  direct. 

If  the  contractor  shall  make  excavations  or  embankments 
in  excess  of  the  directed  width,  then  such  excess  shall  not  be 
paid  for. 


SPECIFICATIONS   ON   EXCAVATIONS,    ETC.  137 

Over  culverts  and  behind  bridge  abutments  the  embank- 
ments shall  be  formed  carefully,  so  as  to  avoid  damage  to,  or 
bulging  of,  the  masonry.  Only  the  best  materials  will  be  used 
for  this  purpose,  the  same  to  be  deposited  in  layers  of  not  over 
ten  inches  thick.  The  contractor  to  be  responsible  for  any 
damage  to  the  masonry. 

Contractors,  when  directed  by  the  engineer  in  charge  of 
the  work,  will  deposit  on  the  side  of  the  road,  or  at  such  con- 
venient point  as  may  be  designated,  any  stone  or  rock  that  they 
may  excavate;  and  if,  in  so  doing,  they  should  deposit  material 
required  for  bank,  the  additional  cost,  if  any,  of  procuring  other 
materials  from  without  the  road  will  be  allowed.  All  stone  or 
rock  excavated  and  deposited  as  above  will  be  considered  the 
property  of  the  railroad  company,  and  the  contractors  upon  the 
respective  sections  will  be  responsible  for  its  safe  keeping  until 
removed  by  said  company,  or  until  the  work  is  finished. 

The  line  of  road,  or  the  gradients,  may  be  changed  if  the 
engineer  shall  consider  such  change  necessary  or  expedient ; 
and  for  any  considerable  alterations,  the  injury  or  advantage  to 
the  contractor  will  be  estimated,  and  such  allowance  or  deduc- 
tion made  in  the  prices  as  the  engineer  may  deem  just  and 
equitable;  but  no  claim  for  an  increase  in  prices  of  excavation 
or  embankment  on  the  part  of  the  contractor  will  be  allo\ved  or 
considered,  unless  made  in  writing  before  the  work  in  that  part 
of  the  section  where  the  alteration  has  been  made  shall  have 
been  commenced.  The  engineer  may  also,  on  the  conditions 
last  recited,  increase  or  diminish  the  length  of  any  section  for 
the  purpose  of  equalizing  or  balancing  the  excavations  and 
embankments. 

Whenever  the  route  of  the  railroad  is  traversed  by  public 
or  private  roads,  commodious  passing  places  must  be  kept  open 
and  in  safe  condition  for  use  ;  and  in  passing  through  farms  the 
contractor  must  also  keep  up  such  temporary  fences  as  will  be 
necessary  for  the  preservation  of  the  crops. 

The  above  specification  makes  HO  provision  for  what  is 
commonly  called  "haul."  By  "haul"  is  meant  an  additional 
compensation  for  carrying  the  excavated  material  beyond  a 
certain  limiting  distance.  Such  a  provision  usually  accom- 
panies a  specification  for  excavation,  and  may  be  given  in  the 
following  language: 

The  price  paid  for  "excavation"  in  all  the  several  classes 
thereof  will  be  understood  to  cover  and  pay  for  the  entire 
expense  of  its  removal  by  any  method  whatever,  including 
loading,  unloading,  transportation  and  deposit  in  the  manner 
prescribed  in  these  specifications,  in  the  places  designated  by 


138  ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

the  engineer,  provided  the  haul  of  the  material  so  transported 
does  not  exceed (  )  feet,  and  beyond  that  dis- 
tance  per  cubic  yard  per  one  hundred  (100)  feet  will 

be  allowed  and  paid,  for  such  extra  haul,  in  addition  to  the 
price  paid  for  excavation. 

122.  Excavations  Under  Water.  Excavations  made 
under  water  are  usually  for  the  purpose  of  securing  a  channel 
for  the  passage  of  boats.  In  many  cases  the  character  of  the 
material  is  quite  various,  and  largely  unknown.  It  is  proper 
for  the  engineer  to  make  such  investigations  as  are  practicable 
to  discover  what  these  materials  are,  and  to  about  what  depth 
the.  cutting  will  have  to  be  made,  and  to  give  the  contractor  the 
benefit  of  such  information.  It  would  not  be  well  for  him, 
however,  to  make  positive  statements  as  to  the  character  of  the 
material,  and  he  should  relieve  himself  in  the  specifications  of 
all  responsibility  for  the  information  given.  The  contractor  on 
the  other  hand  should  inform  himself  of  the  nature  of  the  work 
so  far  as  possible,  both  by  personal  examination,  and  by  avail- 
ing himself  of  the  investigations  of  the  engineering  department. 
The  following  paragraphs  concerning  excavations  under  water 
are  taken  from  the  standard  specifications  used  by  Col.  O.  M. 
Poe,  of  the  corps  of  engineers,  U.  S.  army. 

All  available  information  in  the  possession  of  the  United 
States  will  be  given  upon  application.  The  United  States  will 
not  guarantee  the  correctness  of  its  information  and  will  not  be 
responsible  for  the  safety  of  the  employees,  plant  or  materials 
used  by  the  contractor,  nor  for  any  damage  done  by  or  to  them 
from  any  source  or  any  cause.  Bidders  are  expected  to  satisfv 
themselves  as  to  the  nature  of  the  work  to  be  done,  and  it  will 
be  assumed  that  proposals  are  based  upon  a  thorough  under- 
standing of  its  character.  Intending  bidders  are  urged  to  visit 
the  localities  of  the  work,  and,  by  personal  inspection  and 
inquiry,  fully  inform  themselves  as  to  the  present  and  probable 
future  conditions.  Navigation  shall  not  be  obstructed,  and  no 
allowance  or  concession  will  be  made  for  any  lack  of  informa- 
tion on  the  part  of  the  contractor  regarding  the  work.  The 
price  bid  shall  be  full  compensation  for  furnishing  all  necessary 
labor,  materials,  and  appliances  of  every  description,  and  for 
doing  all  work  herein  specified  to  the  satisfaction  of  the  engi- 


SPECIFICATIONS   ON   EXCAVATIONS,    ETC.  139 

neer  officer  in  charge,  and  shall  include  all  risks  and  delays  of 
whatever  nature  attending  the  execution  of  the  work. 

The  work  comprises  the  improvement  of  two  shoals  in 
St.  Mary's  River,  Michigan,  above  the  canal.  The  upper 
shoal  lies  northwesterly,  and  the  lower  shoal  northeasterly  from 
old  Round  Island  Light  House. 

The  work  to  be  done  consists  in  excavating  a  channel 
within  the  side  and  end  lines  prescribed  by  the  U.  S.  Agent  in 
charge,  said  channel  to  have  a  bottom  width  of  300  feet,  and  a 
total  length  of  about  3,000  feet,  the  estimated  excavation  being 
90,000  cubic  yards,  bank  measure,  more  or  less.  The  greatest 
distance  to  the  dumping  ground  will  not  exceed  two  miles,  and 
the  average  distance  will  not  exceed  one  mile. 

The  material  to  be  removed  consists  of  boulders,  clay, 
sand,  gravel,  and  possibly  hard  pan,  all  in  unknown  propor- 
tions.* 

The  bottom  of  the  completed  cut  shall  be  in  a  plane  25.32 
feet  below  the  upper  surface  of  the  coping  of  the  lock  of  1881 
in  St.  Mary's  Falls  Canal,  the  face  of  excavation  probably 
varying  from  scraping  to  5  feet. 

Xo  payment  will  be  made  for  excavation  below  22  feet 
depth  of  water.  All  excavations  within  the  specified  side  slopes 
and  between  21  and  22  feet  depth  of  water  will  be  paid  for  at 
half  rates  in  the  final  estimates. 

Proposals  will  be  received  for  bank  measure  only.  For 
the  monthly  estimates  30  per  cent,  will  be  deducted  from  scow 
measurements,  but  the  total  of  the  estimates  made  for  the  upper 
shoal  will  never  exceed  the  total  of  the  estimates  made  for  the 
lower  shoal,  until  all  the  required  excavation  has  been  finished 
at  one  of  the  shoals,  and  an  equal  amount  of  excavation  has  been 
done  at  the  other. f  O.  M.  P. 

*In  letting  this  work  all  materials  were  entered  in  one  class,  even  though  it  were 
solid  rock.  In  this  particular  instance  no  solid  rock  was  anticipated,  and  hence  it  is 
not  mentioned  in  the  list  of  materials  to  be  encountered,  but  in  other  sections  solid 
rock  was  anticipated,  and  was  so  entered  in  the  list  of  materials,  but  the  proportion  in 
each  class  was  left  for  the  contractor  to  estimate  as  best  he  could  from  the  investiga- 
tions made  by  the  engineering  department,  and  such  additional  borings  as  he  might 
make  himself,  there  still  being  but  one  price  per  cubic  yard  for  all  materials.  The 
responsibility  of  the  contractor  in  this  connection  is  fully  defined,  however,  in  the 
extract  given  above. 

jThis  work  was  let  by  the  cubic  yard  as  measured  in  bank.  That  is  from  sound- 
ings taken  both  before  and  after  the  excavation  between  the  side  lines  indicated,  and 
above  the  depth  of  n  feet.  Material  excavated  below  the  depth  of  zi  feet  and  above 
the  depth  of  22  feet  was  paid  for  at  half  rates.  Any  excavation  below  the  depth  of  22 
feet  was  not  paid  for  at  all.  Neither  were  the  excavations  made  outside  the  side 
boundaries.  In  other  words  the  material  was  paid  for  in  cut  as  it  would  be  described 
in  earthwork  out  of  water.  The  reason  for  requiring  the  work  on  one  shoal  to  be 
fully  completed  before  an  equivalent  sum  is  paid  for  the  other  is  to  insure  the  comple- 
tion of  the  work.  If  a  small  amount  of  material  had  been  left  above  the  21  foot  line  in 
various  places,  the  excavation  of  these  scattered  portions  would  be  very  expensive  per 
cubic  yaid,  and  if  the  contractor  had  already  received  the  major  part  of  his  compensa- 
tion it  might  be  difficult  to  induce  him  to  finish  up  the  work  properly. 


140  ENGINEERING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

123.  Specifications  for  Measuring  Quantities 
Excavated  Under  Water  by  Weight  and  Displace- 
ment. The  following  specification  is  taken  from  the  U.  S. 
Engineer  Corps  specifications  for  excavation  in  the  James 
River,  and  they  illustrate  another  method  of  determining 
amount  of  material  excavated.  In  this  case  the  soundings  in 
the  river  are  only  used  for  determining  when  the  excavation 
has  been  completed  to  the  proper  depth,  and  to  prevent  excava- 
tion beyond  a  limit  of  over-depth. 

CLASSIFICATION. — Mud,  sand,  clay,  and  gravel,  under  the 
class  '•Dearth  excavation,"  will  include  those  materials,  however 
hard  or  compact  they  may  be,  the  gravel  to  include  pebbles  up 
to  three  inches  in  diameter.  "Cobble"  will  include  stones  up 
to  three  cubic  feet.  '-''Soft  Rock"  will  include  any  rock  in 
place  which  can  be  removed  by  dredges  without  bla-ting, 
although,  for  economy  in  removal,  blasting  is  resorted  to,  and 
will  include  the  disintegrated  rock  found  for  two  or  three  miles 
below  Richmond.  "Solid  Rock"  will  include  rock  which 
rin^s  under  the  hammer,  boulders  measuring  over  three  cubic 
feet,  and  other  rock  which,  in  the  opinion  of  the  Engineer 
officer  in  charge,  can  not  be  removed  without  blasting.  When 
soft  and  solid  rock  occur  together,  in  strata  or  otherwise,  the 
amount  of  each  will  be  ascertained  by  the  inspector  after  the 
material  is  placed  on  lighters.  Mixed  classes  of  material  must 
be  separated  by  the  contractor,  at  his  expense,  for  measure- 
ment by  displacement  as  the  lighters  are  unloaded  at  the  place 
of  deposit. 

UNCLASSIFIED  ROCK. — In  place  of  bidding  on  soft  and 
solid  rock  separately,  an  alternate  bid  may  be  submitted  for 
unclassified  rock,  which  will  include  all  material  described  in 
these  specifications  as  rock,  whether  soft  or  solid.  The  bid 
will  be  for  the  ton  of  2,000  pounds,  and  the  weight  will  be 
ascertained  by  displacement,  as  hereinafter  described.  The 
bidder  on  this  class  will  specify  a  price  for  extra  haul  per  ton 
of  2,000  pounds. 

Should  the  bid  for  unclassified  rock  be  accepted  on  any 
section,  the  price  per  ton  will  be  stated  in  the  contract  in  lieu 
of  those  for  soft  and  solid  rock.  On  such  section  the  con- 
tractor must-begin  the  excavation  of  areas  known  to  be  of  solid 
rock  in  part,  with  other  areas,  as  directed  by  the  Engineer, 
and  continue  their  excavation,  or  accept  an  equivalent  reserva- 
tion in  tons,  according  to  the  relative  cost  of  excavating  soft 
and  solid  rock,  to  be  determined  by  the  Engineer,  until  such 
solid  rock  excavation  is  made. 


SPECIFICATIONS   ON   EXCAVATIONS,    ETC.  141 

MEASUREMENT  OF  EXCAVATION. — All  materials  excavated 
in  the  two  and  a  half  miles  below  Richmond  and  at  Drewry 
Bluff  will  be  measured  on  deck  lighters  by  displacement  of 
water  taken  at  62  pounds  per  cubic  foot.  The  basis  of  meas- 
urement for  "solid  rock"  will  be  155  pounds  and  of  soft  rock 
120  pounds,  and  of  other  classes  120  pounds  per  cubic  foot, 
until  otherwise  ascertained  at  the  instance  of  either  the  Engineer 
or  the  contractor.  These  "other  classes"  will  then  be  loaded 
on  deck  lighters  (with  gauges  attached)  whose  cubic  feet  of 
submergence  has  been  ascertained  for  each  tenth  of  a  foot. 
The  load  will  be  put  on  in  shape  suitable  for  accurate  measure- 
ment by  cross  sections,  at  the  expense  of  the  contractor,  and  in 
such  manner  that  the  plane  of  submergence  will  be  parallel  to 
the  deck  of  the  lighter,  as  near  as  may  be.  The  difference  in 
cubic  feet  of  submerged  section,  light  and  loaded,  at  62  pounds 
to  the  cubic  foot,  will  be  considered  the  weight  of  the  measured 
load.  The  lighters  must  be  kept  bailed  out,  and  will  be  con- 
sidered loaded  with  the  same  weight  when  afterward  sunk  to 
the  same  gauge  readings.  The  proportion  of  a  partial  to  a  full 
load  will  be  determined  by  the  ratio  of  the  displaced  volumes 
of  water. 

The  Engineer  may  measure  the  displacement  of  empty 
lighters  at  his  discretion,  and  the  contractor  must  free  them 
from  water  at  his  own  expense  whenever  requested  by  the 
inspector  for  the  purpose  of  determining  their  loads. 

DUMPING  LIGHTERS  will  not  be  allowed  in  transporting 
materials  excavated  at  Drewry  Bluff  or  above,  but  can  be  used 
for  material  excavated  at  Harrison's  Bar  and  Goose  Hill  Flats. 

Where  dumping  lighters  are  used  measurements  will  be 
made  by  the  capacity  of  the  pockets. 

DECISION  AS  TO  QUANTITIES- — The  duty  of  determining 
the  quantity  of  material  carried  in  or  on  lighters  will  be  per- 
formed by  inspectors  appointed  by  the  Engineer  in  charge,  and 
the  decision  of  such  inspectors,  acting  under  the  orders  of  the 
Engineer,  as  to  the  amount  of  material  excavated  and  removed, 
as  well  as  to  its  place  and  manner  of  deposit,  shall  be  final  and 
without  appeal  on  the  part  of  the  contractor. 

OVER-DEPTH. — No  allowance  will  be  made  for  dredging 
more  than  twelve  inches  below  the  required  depth  or  outside 
the  limits  of  the  channel  as  marked  by  stakes  or  ranges,  unless 
such  additional  depth  is  necessary  to  break  up  strata  of  rock  or 
cemented  earth.  Increased  depth  will  be  allowed  in  such  cases 
if  authorized  by  the  inspector,  acting  under  the  direction  of  the 
Engineer.  If  a  deficiency  in  depth  is  found  the  contractor 
must  re-excavate  the  bottom  until  .the  required  depth  is 
obtained. 


142  ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

DUMPING. — Excavated  material  will  be  the  property  of  the 
United  States  and  be  disposed  of  strictly  in  accordance  with 
instructions  from  the  inspector.  W.  P.  C. 

124.     Specifications  for  an  Earthen  Dam.     The 

following  specification  for  an  earthen  dam  across  a  stream  for  a 
storage  reservoir  for  irrigation  purposes  is  a  fair  illustration  of  a 
method  of  writing  the  specifications  for  such  a  purpose.  It  is 
sufficiently  elastic  to  allow  the  engineer  great  discretion  in  the 
matter  of.  adapting  the  methods  to  the  particular  material 
encountered,  while  at  the  same  time  it  gives  to  the  contractor  a 
fair  idea  as  to  the  amount  of  work  which  will  be  required  of 
him,  and  therefore  as  to  its  approximate  cost.  This  is  really 
all  he  cares  to  know  at  the  time  he  makes  his  bid. 

The  object  in  the  mind  of  the  engineer  in  writing  this 
specification  was  to  make  as  impervious  a  dam  as  possible  with 
the  materials  which  were  known  to  exist  in  the  immediate 
vicinity,  without  making  the  cost  extravagant.  The  earthwork 
was  well  insured  against  overflow  by  having  a  very  long  spill- 
way across  the  dividing  ridge  between  this  and  an  adjacent 
drainage  basin  some  distance  above  the  dam. 

SPECIFICATION  FOR  AN  EARTHEN  DAM: — After  the  work 
has  been  staked  out,  the  top  soil  and  all  vegetable  matter  shall 
be  wholly  removed  from  the  area  of  the  work.  This  area  shall 
be  cleared  to  the  satisfaction  of  the  engineer,  and  no  allowance 
will  be  made  therefor.  The  material  removed,  which  is  suffi- 
ciently free  from  vegetable  matter,  may  afterwards  be  used  for 
building  the  outer  toe  of  the  dam. 

The  sides  of  the  valley  shall  be  terraced  or  stepped  with 
risers  one  foot  high,  over  the  whole  area  of  contact  with  the 
dam.  These  terraces  shall  also  have  offsets  horizontally  as 
shown  in  the  sketch.  They  shall  be  cut  to  the  depth  indicated 
by  the  engineer,  and  the  material  excavated  will  be  paid  for  as 
excavation. 

A  trench  shall  be  opened  from  the  surface  to  and  into  the 
gravel  stratum,  of  the  dimensions  as  shown  on  the  drawings, 
being  about  16  feet  wide  at  the  surface,  and  about  6  feet  wide 
at  the  bottom.  This  trench  extends  the  entire  length  of  the 
dam  and  up  to  the  side  slopes ;  it  extends  to  the  rock  after  the 
gravel  stratum  is  passed.  This  work  will  be  paid  for  as  exca- 
vation. 


SPECIFICATIONS   ON   EXCAVATIONS,  ETC.  143 

A  puddle  core  wall  extends  the  whole  length  of  the  dam, 
being  6  feet  wide  at  the  bottom  of  the  trench,  which  averages 
about  20  feet  below  the  surface  of  the  ground,  averages  about 
16  feet  wide  at  the  surface  of  the  ground,  and  is  6  feet  wide  at 
a  point  4  feet  below  the  top  of  the  dam. 

This  puddle  core  is  to  be  a  mixture  of  clay  and  the  grav- 
elly sand  such  as  found  in  the  gravel  stratum  (all  of  the  gravel 
to  be  such  as  will  pass  through  a  2  inch  ring),  in  about  equal 
proportions.  These  two  kinds  of  materials  will  be  spread  in 
alternate  courses  about  3  inches  thick.  The  clay  courses  will 
be  harrowed  sufficiently  to  pulverize  the  hard  clods,  using  a 
disc  harrow,  or  such  other  machine  as  may  be  satisfactory  to  the 
engineer.  A  gravel  course  will  then  be  laid  and  this  harrowed 
until  it  is  thoroughly  incorporated  and  mixed  with  the  clay.  It 
shall  then  be  wet  down  and  allowed  to  stand  until  it  is  in  a 
proper  condition  for  compacting,  wrhen  it  shall  be  rolled  thor- 
oughly, to  the  satisfaction  of  the  engineer,  with  a  grooved  roller 
weighing  not  less  than  150  pounds  to  the  lineal  inch  along  the 
axis  of  the  roller. 

On  this  shall  then  be  laid  another  3  inch  layer  of  clay, 
which  shall  be  pulverized  by  harrowing,  to  be  followed  by  a  3 
inch  layer  of  gravel,  harrowed,  wet  down  and  rolled,  as  before 
described,  and  so  on.  If,  in  the  opinion  of  the  engineer,  it  is 
deemed  advisable,  or  desirable,  the  clay  for  the  puddle  shall  be 
pulverized  dry  before  it  is  spread  on  the  dam. 

The  above  describes,  in  a  general  way,  the  amount  of 
work  which  will  be  required  to  be  done  on  the  puddle  core  of 
the  dam,  but  the  particular  operations  are  made  subject  to  any 
changes  which  the  engineer  may  choose  to  make,  in  the  inter- 
est of  a  more  effectual  mixing  or  compacting  of  the  materials. 
The  general  drawings  show  the  probable  depth  to  which  the 
puddle  wall  will  be  carried,  but  the  depth  shown  is  not  to  be 
considered  as  exact  nor  final,  as  it  may  be  varied  according  to 
the  character  of  the  ground  developed  by  the  excavation. 

All  that  part  of  the  dam  on  the  up-stream  side  of  the  core 
wall  shall  be  made  of  such  clay  material  as  the  engineer  may 
select  from  that  overlying  the  gravel  stratum  in  the  immediate 
vicinity  below  the  dam.  It  is  thought  that  at  least  half  of  this 
overlying  clay  is  suitable  for  this  purpose.  It  shall  be  thor- 
oughly incorporated  with  the  upper  clay  underlying  the  dam  by 
first  plowing  up  the  surface,  after  the  top  soil  has  been  removed, 
and  rolling  down  again  as  described  below.  This  plowed 
upper  surface,  and  also  the  clay  fill,  shall  be  pulverized  in 
courses  not  over  6  inches  thick,  by  harrowing  or  rolling,  or  both, 
before  wetting  down.  It  shall  then  be  wet  down  thoroughly 
and  allowed  to  stand  until  it  is  in  a  proper  condition  for  most 
effectual  compacting.  It  shall  then  be  rolled  to  the  satisfaction 
of  the  engineer,  and  in  accordance  with  his  directions,  with  a 


144  ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

grooved  roller  weighing  not  less   than    150  pounds  per  lineal 
inch  of  roller,  measured  along  its  axis. 

All  that  part  of  the  dam  below  the  puddle  core  wall  shall 
be  filled  with  the  surface  clay  in  the  immediate  locality  below 
the  dam.  It  shall  be  laid  in  courses  not  over  6  inches  in 
thickness,  harrowed  and  rolled  dry  to  the  satisfaction  of  the 
engineer.  It  is  the  intention  to  make  as  compact  a  mass  of  this 
portion  as  possible  without  wetting  down. 

J.  &F. 

125.  Specifications  for  Oofcer-Dams.  The  follow- 
ing specification  for  the  construction  of  coffer-dams,  and  for 
the  methods  of  paying  for  the  same  is  taken  from  a  recent  U. 
S.  Engineer  Corps  specification  for  the  building  of  a  navigation 
lock  and  dam  on  the  Great  Kanawha  river,  West  Virginia.  It 
illustrates  how  such  specifications  may  be  drawn  and  the  work 
paid  for  in  an  equitable  manner,  and  how  bids  may  be  made 
up  upon  such  work  without  assuming  extraordinary  risk,  and 
without  knowing  much  of  the  nature  of  the  material  to  be 
excavated  or  of  the  depths  to  which  the  construction  will 
extend. 

How  Built. — The  coffer-dams  will  be  built  as  shown  gen- 
erally by  the  drawings  exhibited  and  as  directed  by  the  engi- 
neer. They  will  be  formed  of  cribs  sunk  to  hard  pan,  sheathed 
with  plank  and  filled  with  heavy-dredged  river-bed  material 
not  liable  to  wash.  They  will  be  thoroughly  banked  on  the 
outside  with  clay  puddling,  or  like  material,  of  quality  and 
quantity  to  make  them  sufficiently  water-tight  to  be  pumped 
out.  The  crib-filling  and  the  banking  outside  will  be  pro- 
tected to  such  an  extent,  as  directed,  by  a  top  layer  of  loose 
stone. 

As  the  work  within  the  different  sections  of  the  coffer- 
dams for  the  dam  is  finished,  the  ends  of  the  next  section  of 
coffer  will,  when  required,  be  made  of  square  sawed  timber, 
rods,  upright  plank  and  puddle,  built  across  and  near  the  end 
of  the  finished  part.  Similar  timber  and  plank  bulkheads  will, 
also,  if  ordered,  be  built  by  the  contractor  between  the  coffer- 
dam for  the  lock  and  the  lock  wall,  to  form  part  of  the  first 
section  of  coffer-dam  for  the  navigation  pass  and  elsewhere  in 
making  coffer  connections  as  the  engineer  may  require. 

How  Paid  For. — The  United  States  will  pay  the  con- 
tractor for  the  dredging  and  excavation  for  the  site  of  the  coffer- 
dams his  contract  price  for  "Excavation."  For  logs  and 
sheathing  used,  he  will  be  paid  his  contract  prices  for  "Crib 


SPECIFICATIONS   ON   EXCAVATIONS,    ETC.  145 

Logs  in  Coffer-dam"  and  ''Sheathing."  For  material  used  to 
fill  the  coffer-dam  cribs,  he  will  be  paid  his  contract  price  for 
''Coffer-dam  Filling."  The  plank  and  sawed  timber  used  in 
the  coffer-ends  or  bulkheads  will  be  paid  for  as  "Sheathing," 
and  the  puddle  in  same  as  k'Coffer-dam  Filling."  It  is  under- 
stood that  all  labor,  all  banking,  puddling  and  stone  used  on 
the  outsicle  of  the  cribs,  the  spikes  and  bolts  and  all  material 
not  mentioned,  required  in  the  construction  of  the  coffer  dams, 
shall  be  furnished  by  the  contractor  without  cost  to  the  United 
States.  The  coffer-dams  must  be  promptly  banked  to  full 
height.  No  payment  will  be  made  for  logs  or  filling  above 
the  level  of  the  top  of  the  lowest  part  of  unfinished  banking. 
Xo  payment  will  be  made  for  any  coffer-dam  materials  carried 
off  by  the  river  or  lost  in  any  manner  during  construction.  All 
repairs  to  the  coffer-dams  or  their  adjuncts  must  be  borne  by 
the  contractor. 

Removal. — The  contractor  will  be  required  to  remove  the 
coffer-dams  and  their  belongings  at  his  own  cost.  The  time 
and  manner  of  the  removal  of  the  coffer-dams,  or  any  parts  of 
them,  and  the  place  to  deposit  the  materials,  to  be  prescribed 
by  the  engineer. 

Ownership. — It  is  understood  and  agreed  that  the  pny- 
ments  for  excavation,  logs,  sheathing  and  filling,  as  provided 
for  above,  shall  cover  the  entire  cost  of  the  coffer-dams  to  the 
United  States,  and  by  virtue  thereof  they  shall  become  the 
property  of  the  United  States,  in  case  of  the  failure  or  annul- 
ment of  this  contract. 

Dredges  and  Pumps. — In  building  the  coffer-dams  the 
contractor  will  be  required  to  employ,  at  the  same  time,  not 
less  than  two  suitable  steam  dredges  at  excavating  and  filling; 
and  for  pumping  the  coffer-dams  he  must  keep  at  least  three 
good  sufficient  pumping  outfits,  with  pumps,  engines  and  boats 
complete,  in,  or  always  ready  for,  operation.  The  dredges 
must  be  equipped  to  do  effective  work  to  a  depth  of  28  feet. 

W.  P,  C. 

126.     Specifications  for  Protective  Work.      It  is 

customary  for  engineers  to  require  the  contractor  to  protect  his 
work  from  all  causes,  such  as  landslides,  rainfall,  floods, 
ground  water,  quicksand,  etc.,  without  any  special  compensa- 
tion therefor.  In  all  such  cases  the  contractor,  of  course,  will 
build  his  temporary  protective  works  as  cheaply  as  possible, 
and  ofien  will  not  provide  that  degree  of  protection  which  the 
engineer  may  think  is  necessary  and  wise.  A  fair  division  of 

the  responsibility  and  cost  of  such  protective  works  between  the 
10 


146  ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

contractor  and  owner  is  therefore  desirable,  and  the  following 
specifications  taken  from  those  used  on  the  new  Croton  Dam  of 
New  York  City,  in  1892,  are  offered  as  a  very  excellent  solu- 
tion of  this  problem. 

It  will  be  noted  that  the  cost  of  such  protective  works  as 
the  engineer  might  consider  necessary  is  to  be  paid  for  by  the 
citv  at  the  standard  prices  per  unit  of  measure  named  in  the 
bid,  and  the  engineer  is  given  control  of  the  design  and  general 
character  of  such  works.  The  responsibility  for  the  efficient 
execution  of  such  works,  however,  is  made  to  rest  upon  the  con- 
tractor by  holding  him  responsible  for  all  damages  caused  by 
their  inefficiency,  except  in  one  instance  of  an  unprecedented 
flood  in  the  Croton  river.  In  which  particular  case  the  damages 
are  to  be  duly  appraised  and  paid  for  by  the  city. 

It  will  also  be  noted  that  the  taking  care  of  the  ground 
water  by  pumping  rests  wholly  upon  the  contractor  without 
special  compensation. 

The  contractor  shall  do  all  other  work  needed  to  protect 
his  work  from  water ;  he  shall  erect  all  temporary  dams,  coffer- 
dams, sheet  piling  and  other  devices,  take  care  of  the  river,  and 
shall  be  responsible  for  all  damage  that  may  be  caused  by  the 
action  of  water,  whether  from  negligence  or  any  other  cause. 
Such  damage  is  to  be  repaired,  and  the  work  must  be  restored 
and  maintained  at  his  cost. 

All  earth  and  rock  excavation,  masonry,  timber  and  other 
work,  temporary  or  permanent,  for  the  purpose  of  protecting 
the  work  from  the  river,  provided  that  they  are  ordered  or 
approved  by  the  engineer,  are  to  be  paid  for  at  the  prices  stip- 
ulated in  this  contract.  All  work  of  this  character  is  to  be 
removed  by  the  contractor  at  his  own  expense,  if  so  ordered  by 
the  engineer. 

The  responsibility  of  the  contractor  as  to  damage  caused 
by  the  inefficiency  of  the  protective  work  shall  cease,  however, 
if  such  damage  is  caused  by  the  river  at  a  time  when  the  flow 
of  the  river  attains  such  volume  as  will  cause  it  to  rise  to  a 
height  of  more  than  eighty-one  inches  above  the  stone  crest  of 
the  present  Croton  dam,  such  height  being  the  greatest  recorded 
by  the  city  authorities. 

Such  damage  as  may  be  caused  under  the  circumstances 
just  stated  shall  be  repaired  by  the  contractor  as  soon  as  practi- 
cable, under  the  direction  of  the  engineer,  who  shall  appraise 


SPECIFICATIONS   ON   EXCAVATIONS,  ETC.  147 

the  cost  of  such  work  of  repairs,  and  the  amount  of  the  same 
shall  be  paid  to  the  contractor  on  the  certificate  of  the  engineer 
that  the  work  has  been  completed  to  his  satisfaction;  and,  after 
such  certificate  shall  have  been  issued,  the  contractor  shall  again 
become  responsible  for  all  damage  that  may  be  caused  by  the 
action  of  the  water,  in  the  same  manner  as  is  specified  above. 

If  such  appraisal  of  the  engineer  is  not  satisfactory  to  the 
contractor,  the  said  contractor  shall  so  state  in  writing  to  the 
aqueduct  commissioners,  and,  thereupon,  a  board  of  arbitra- 
tion, composed,  first,  of  the  chief  engineer,  or  of  such  other 
person  that  the  aqueduct  commissioners  may  designate  ;  second, 
of  a  person  selected  by  the  contractor;  third,  of  another  person 
to  be  designated  by  the  other  two,  shall  proceed  to  appraise  the 
cost  of  such  damage,  and  their  decision  shall  be  final  and  bind- 
ing on  both  parties,  provided  it  is  the  unanimous  decision  of  the 
three  members  of  the  said  board ;  but  if  the  said  decision  is  not 
unanimous,  the  appraisal  of  the  chief  engineer  shall  stand  and 
become  final  and  binding  to  both  parties.*  And,  on  the  cir- 
tificate  of  the  aqueduct  commissioners  that  the  said  appraisal 
has  been  made  in  accordance  with  the  stipulations  of  this 
agreement,  the  amount  of  said  appraisal  shall  be  paid  to  the 
contractor.  And  the  said  appraisal,  whether  made  by  the  chief 
engineer  or  by  the  said  board  of  arbitration,  shall  include  only 
the  cost  of  the  actual 'work  done  tort-pair  the  damage,  and  shall 
not  include  any  alleged  loss  of  profit  or  other  loss  due  to  the 
delay  caused  by  such  repairs,  but  an  extension  of  time  shall  be 
granted  to  the  contractor  for  the  performance  of  his  contract, 
equivalent,  in  the  opinion  of  the  engineer,  to  the  loss  of  time 
due  to  the  interruption  of  the  operations  of  construction  on 
account  of  the  said  work  of  repairs. 

The  contractor  is  to  do  all  the  draining  and  pumping  which 
shall  be  necessary  for  keeping  the  work  free  from  water,  and  if 
at  any  time  the  engineer  is  of  the  opinion  that,  in  order  to 
maintain  the  slopes  and  sides  of  the  excavations  in  proper 
order,  it  is  necessary  to  remove  the  water  from  the  ground  out- 
side of  the  limits  of  the  excavations,  the  contractor  shall,  at  his 
request,  sink  the  necessary  pipes  or  wells  to  intercept  the  water, 
and  place,  maintain  and  work  such  pumping  or  other  exhaust- 
ing apparatus  as  shall  be  sufficient  to  properly  maintain  the 
said  slopes  and  sides. 

The  cost  of  furnishing  the  necessary  appliances  and 
machinery,  of  working  them,  and  of  doing  all  the  work  con- 
nected with  draining  and  pumping  operations,  is  to  be  included 
in  the  prices  bid  for  the  various  kinds  of  work  wrhich  the  drain- 
ing and  pumping  operations  are  intended  to  protect. 

A.  F. 

*  This  is  a  new  departure  in  arbitration  proceedings,  but  it  has  many  things  to 
recommend  it. — AUTHOR. 


148  ENGINEERING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  CEMENT  MORTAR,  CON- 
CRETE, AND  MASONRY. 

127.  Cement  Mortar.*  There  are  in  general  two 
kinds  of  cement  in  common  use  in  America,  namly,  Portland 
or  artificial  cement,  and  Natural  cement.  Portland  cement  is 
an  artificial  mixture  of  lime  and  clay  properly  burned  and 
ground.  Natural  cement  is  made  by  burning  the  natural  rock 
which  contains  approximately  the  proper  ingredients,  and 
grinding  the  calcined  product.  Portland  cements  are  known 
by  their  various  manufacturer's  names  or  brands,  and  are  mostly 
imported  from  Germany,  France,  and  England.  Recently  a 
number  of  manufactories  have  been  established  in  America. 
Natural  cements  are  usually  known  under  a  geographical  name, 
indicating  their  place  of  manufacture,  as  Rosendale  cement, 
made  on  the  Hudson  river;  Louisville  cement,  made  on  the  Ohio 
river  in  the  vicinity  of  Louisville ;  Utica  cement,  made  at  Utica 
in  the  northern  part  of  the  state  of  Illinois;  Milwaukee  cement, 
etc.  In  general  the  Portland  cement  costs  about  three  times  as 
much  as  the  natural  cements  and  it  has  three  or  four  times  the 
strength  of  these.  It  is  common  to  require  a  tensile  strength 
of  from  300  to  400  pounds  per  square  inch  for  Portland 
cements,  which  have  hardened  one  day  in  the  air  and  six  days 
in  water,  and  about  100  pounds  per  square  inch  tensile  strength 
for  natural  cements,  similarly  treated.  The  Louisville  cement 
is  quick  setting,  and  a  very  fair  test  may  be  obtained  of  its 
strength  in  twenty-four  hours,  in  which  case  a  tensile  strength 
of  from  60  to  So  pounds  per  square  inch  may  be  specified,  the 
briquettes  being  allowed  to  remain  one  hour  in  the  air,  and 
twenty-three  hours  in  water. 

*The  reader  is  referred  to  a  small  book  of  100  pages  by  F.  P.  Spalding  assistant 
professor  of  civil  engineering,  Cornell  University,  Ithaca,  New  York,  on  "The  Testing 
and  use  of  Hydraulic  Cement"  (1893).  This  is  a  most  excellent  hand-book  for  the- 
engineer  as  well  as  for  the  student ;  it  fully  describes  the  characteristics  of  both  natural 
and  Portland  cements,  as  well  as  the  most  approved  methods  of  testing  cements  and  ot 
mixing  morlars. 


SPECIFICATIONS  FOR   CEMENT,  MORTAR,  ETC.         149 

The  strength  of  cement  and  cement  mortar  depends 
greatly  on  the  fineness  of  the  cement.  This  is  usually  tested 
by  parsing  it  through  a  sieve  of  from  50  to  100  meshes  per 
lineal  inch,  having  from  2,500  to  10,000  meshes  per  square 
inch.  The  100  mesh  sieve  is  much  to  be  preferred,  and  is 
usually  specified  in  the  case  of  Portland  cement,  since  proba- 
bly only  the  particles  which  would  pass  through  such  a  sieve 
are  really  efficient  or  active  in  the  process  of  hardening,  the 
coarser  parts  being  inert,  or  as  so  much  sand. 

A  cement  mortar  is  a  thorough  mixture  of  sand  with 
cement,  first  in  a  dry  state,  usually  in  the  proportion  of  one  of 
cement  to  two  of  sand  by  measure,  with  natural  cements,  and 
one  of  cement  to  three  or  four  of  sand  when  Portland  cement 
is  used.  After  these  ingredients  have  been  effectually  mixed, 
sufficient  water  is  added  to  reduce  the  composition  to  the  desired 
consistency.  It  is  important  that  the  sand  should  be  clean,  or 
free  from  all  earthy  ingredients.  It  is  common  also  to  specify 
that  it  shall  be  sharp;  that  is  to  say,  the  grains  should  not  be  too 
much  rounded.  Ocean  beach  sand  is  apt  to  be  very  much 
worn,  and  not  sharp  in  this  sense.  River  or  bank  sand  is 
usually  preferred  on  this  account. 

In  specifying  the  proportions  of  sand  and  cement  to  be 
used  in  making  up  a  cement  mortar,  it  is  customary  simply  to 
name  so  many  parts  of  sand  to  one  part  of  cement,  by  meas- 
ure. It  would,  as  a  rule,  be  inconvenient  to  determine  this 
ratio  by  weight,  but  a  determination  by  measure  is  subject  to 
serious  objections.  For  instance,  a  barrel  or  original  package 
of  cement,  when  dumped  or  turned  out  upon  a  mixing  platform 
in  a  loose  and  fluffy  condition  will  have  nearly  50  per  cent,  more 
volume  than  it  had  in  the  original  package.  It  is  necessary, 
therefore,  in  order  that  the  meaning  of  the  specifications  shall 
be  clear,  to  indicate  whether  the  proportions  by  volume  shall 
be  taken  with  the  cement  in  the  original  package,  or  in  a  loose 
state,  after  having  been  emptied  from  such  package.  It  is  per- 


150  ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

haps  more  convenient  to  measure  the  cement  after  it  has  been 
emptied  from  the  original  package.  In  any  case  the  engineer 
should  decide  which  method  he  proposes  to  adept,  and  reveal 
this  decision  in  the  specifications  themselves.  The  following 
specification  for  the  making  of  cement  mortar  is  satisfactory  in 
every  respect,  except  that  it  does  not  indicate  whether  the  cement 
is  to  be  measured  in  the  original  package,  or  in  a  loose  condi- 
tion. Since  all  kinds  of  cement  set  or  harden  by  a  kind  of 
crystallizing  process,  and  in  some  cases  this  action  begins  almost 
immediately  after  the  cement  has  been  wet  down,  it  is  necessary 
to  use  the  mortar  as  quickly  as  possible  after  it  has  been  mixed. 
In  the  case  of  Portland  cement,  and  some  of  the  slow  setting 
natural  cements,  an  hour  or  two  may  be  allowed  to  elapse 
between  the  wetting  of  the  mortar  and  its  final  use  upon  the 
work,  but,  in  the  case  of  such  quick  setting  cements  as  the 
Louisville,  the  mortar  should  be  finally  placed  in  the  Work 
within  thirty  minutes  of  the  time  it  is  first  wet.  If  cement 
mortar  is  used  after  it  has  begun  to  set,  it  will  be  permanently 
weakened,  and  if  used  very  long  after  it  has  begun  to  set,  it 
will  remain  inert  and  will  never  hard  -ri. 

Mortar  shall  be  composed  .of  one  measure  of  cement  and 
two  measures  of  sand,  and  shall  be  mixed  on  a  t'ght  platform 
as  follows:  One  measure  of  sand  shall  be  evenly  distributed 
on  the  platform  ;  and  one  measure  of  cement  shall  be  distributed 
on  the  satid',  and  a  second  measure  of  sand  shall  be  distributed 
on  the  cement.  The  sand  and  cement  shall  then  be  thoroughly 
mixed  in  a  dry  state,  .being  turned  over  with  shovels  until  this 
is  accomplished.  Water  shall  then  be  added  in  a  sufficient 
quantity  to  convert  the  sand  and  cement  into  a  mortar  which 
will  stand  in  a  pile  and  not  be  fluid  enough  to  flow.  During 
the  application  of  the  water  the  mass  must  be  constantly  turned 
with  shovels,  so  that  the  mortar  will  be  of  uniform  consistency. 

O.  B. 

128.  Cement  Concrete.  Cement  concrete  is  usually 
composed  of  cement  mortar  as  described  in  the  previous  article, 
mixed  with  broken  stone.  It  may,  however,  be  composed  of 
cement  mortar  mixed  with  gravel.  If  gravel  can  be  procured 
free  from  earthy  matter,  varying  in  size  from  course  sand  to 


SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  CEMENT,  MORTAR^  ETC.         151 

stones  not  more  than  about  two  inches  in  diameter,  it  would 
serve  a  better  purpose  in  the  manufacture  of  concrete  than  does 
broken  stone.  Experiments  have  shown  also,  that  when  stone 
is  broken  in  a  stone  crusher  and  not  screened,  so  that  all  the 
finer  parts  remain  in,  including  the  stone  dust,  a  stronger  con- 
crete results  than  with  the  use  of  the  same  quantity  of  screened 
stone. 

The  ideal  cement  concrete  is  such  a  mixture  of  material  of 
graded  size,  from  the  largest  used  down  to  the  finest  sand,  as 
will  make  a  nearly  solid  mass,  when  properly  mixed.  This 
may  then  be  solidified  by  uniting  with  it  such  an  amount  of 
finely  ground  cement  as  will  serve  to  completely  coat  each  and 
every  particle  of  sand,  gravel,  or  stone,  and  fill  the  small  voids 
remaining  after  the  graded  materials  have  been  thoroughly  and 
uniformly  mixed.  Since  crushed  rock  is  always  angular  it  will 
be  often  impossible  to  make  as  solid  a  concrete  mass  writh  it  as 
can  be  made  by  the  use  of  gravel.  When  grave!  is  used  it  is 
best  to  have  it  screened  to  a  series  of  regularly  graded  sizes, 
and  then  such  proportions  of  each  successive  smaller  size  used 
as  will  serve  to  fill  the  voids  in  the  larger  size.  The  cement 
finally  fills  the  voids  between  the  small  sand  grains. 

The  sand  and  cement  should  always  be  very  thoroughly 
mixed  dry,  then  the  coarser  material  should  be  thoroughly  wet 
and  the  excess  of  water  drained  off,  after  which  the  mixed  sand 
and  cement  should  be  incorporated  with  the  moistened  gravel 
or  rock,  and  a  sufficient  amount  of  water  added  while  the  mix- 
ing is  in  progress  as  will  reduce  the  entire  mass  to  the  proper 
consistency.  The  most  effectual  mixing  can  be  done  by 
machinery,  but  it  is  more  commonly  done  by  hand.  Perhaps 
the  best  cement  mixer  is  a  cubical  box  mounted  on  trunions  at 
its  diagonally  opposite  corners  into  which  the  proper  propor- 
tions of  the  constituent  parts,  including  the  water,  are  placed 
and  the  whole  given  a  certain  number  of  revolutions.  There 
are  various  kinds  of  continuous  mixtures  into  which  the  proper 


152  ENGINEERING  SPECIFICATIONS. 

proportions  of  the  several  ingredients  are  thrown  somewhat  at 
random,  and  from  which  the  concrete  is  supposed  to  continu- 
ously fall  upon  the  work  in  a  properly  mixed  condition.  This 
method  is  probably  fully  equal  to  hand  mixing,  but  is  not  as 
satisfactory  as  the  use  of  the  cubical  box  above  described. 

Concrete  should  always  be  laid  in  courses  of  from  six  to 
nine  inches  in  depth,  and  thoroughly  rammed  in  place  in  order 
to  compact  it  effectually.  If  several  courses  are  to  be  laid  in 
order  to  obtain  the  required  depth  of  concrete,  one  course  should 
follow  another  as  rapidly  as  possible,  in  order  that  they  may 
become  effectually  joined,  and  form  finally  one  monolithic 
mass.  The  courses  already  laid,  however,  should  not  be  dis- 
turbed, after  the  concrete  has  begun  to  take  a  set.  Whtn  the 
work  is  interrupted  at  the  end  of  a  day,  and  other  courses  of 
concrete  are  to  be  laid  the  following  day,  and  especially  when 
Sunday  intervenes,  the  top  of  the  concrete  should  be  covered 
and  kept  wet,  and  when  the  next  course  is  laid  the  top  surface 
of  the  former  should  be  thoroughly  water  soaked,  and  all 
earthy  matter  removed  from  it. 

Masonry  or  other  heavy  weights  should  not  be  laid  upon 
concrete  until  it  has  been  allowed  to  harden,  usually  as  much 
as  twrenty-four  hours.  In  the  case  of  quick  setting  natural 
cements,  however,  twelve  hours  may  be  sufficient. 

Since  successive  freezing  and  thawing  will  prevent  the 
ultimate  hardening  of  cement  mortar,  it  is  customary  to  pre- 
scribe that  no  masonry  or  concrete  in  which  cement  mortar  is 
employed  shall  be  laid  in  freezing  weather.  It  is  a  well  estab- 
lished fact,  however,  that  Portland  cement  mortar  is  not  injured 
by  freezing  if  it  remains  in  a  frozen  condition  for  a  considerable 
length  of  time.  Again,  when  the  temperature  is  not  too  low, 
but  below  freezing,  freezing  of  the  mortar  may  be  prevented 
by  adding  salt  to  the  water  in  making  the  mortnr,  or  the  ingre- 
dients of  concrete  may  be  heated  so  that  the  concrete  will  have 
set  before  freezing  can  take  place. 


SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  CEMENT,  MOHTAE,  ETC.          153 

The  following  specification  for  cement  concrete  mc'udes 
as  a  constituent  part  of  it  the  specification  for  cement  mortar  in 
the  previous  article.  That  which  is  given  below  is  supposed 
to  follow  directly  upon  the  previous  quotation,  the  whole  con- 
stituting a  specification  for  'cement  concrete. 

The  broken  stone  shall  be  wetted  down  and  then  thor- 
oughly mixed  with  the  mortar  bv  turning  it  over  with  sho\els; 
no  more  stone  shall  be  used  than  can  be  covered  on  all  surfaces 
with  mortar,  and  the  proportion  of  broken  stone  in  the  concrete 
must  not  exceed  five  measures  of  stone  to  one  measure  of 
cement.  All  material  must  be  actually  measured  in  bulk. 

Concrete  must  be  mixed  in  small  and  convenient  quantities 
and  immediately  deposited  in  the  work.  It  must  be  carefully 
placed,  and  not  dropped  from  any  height.  It  shall  be  laid  in 
sections,  and  in  horizontal  layers  not  exceeding  nine  (9)  inches 
in  thickness,  and  it  must  be  thoroughly  rammed  until  the  stone 
is  covered  with  mortar  and  a  film  of  v\ater  appears  on  the 
surface.  In  no  case  shall  concrete  bo  permitted  to  remain  in 
the  work  if  it  has  begun  to  set  before  the  rammi  g  is  com- 
pleted. When  concrete  is  properly  made  the  whole  mass 
becomes  one  stone  when  it  has  set,  and  it  is  very  important 
that  it  shall  be  deposited  continuously  in  the  work.  All  sur- 
faces upon  which  concrete  is  to  be  laid  must  be  welted  before 
the  concrete  is  deposited.  Plank  or  timber  forms  must  be 
provided  when  necessary  to  confine  the  concrete  to  the  shape 
and  dimensions  shown  on  the  plans. 

Before  any  weight  is  placed  on  concrete  it  shall  have  as 
much  time  to  set  as  can  conveniently  be  allowed,  and  in  no 
case  less  than  twelve  (12)  hours. 

In  cold  weather  material  for  concrete  shall  be  heated  as 
directed  by  the  engineer. 

The  engineer  wrill  issue  special  instructions  for  concrete 
which  is  to  be  deposited  under  water.  O.  B. 

The  following  method*  of  making  concrete  by  using  sea 
washed  gravel  of  standard  sizes  as  obtained  from  graduated 
screens  has  given  most  excellent  results.  In  this  mixture  there 
were  three  grades  of  sand  and  gravel  employed,  namely,  fine 
sand,  coarse  sand,  and  small  gravel  stones  up  to  one  fourth  of 
an  inch  in  diameter,  and  large  gravel  from  one  half  to  two 
inches  in  diameter.  The  proportions  were  one  part  cement, 
two  parts  fine  sand,  four  parts  coarse  sand  and  small  gravel, 

*See  article  by  C.  II.  Platte,  C.  E.  in  Engineering  News  of  February  21,  1895. 


154'  ENGINEEKING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

and  eight  parts  of  the  larger  gravel,  making  in  all  one  part  of 
cement  to  fourteen  parts  of  sand  and  gravel,  by  measure. 
The  cement  and  fine  sand  were  mixed  dry.  The  two  grades 
of  gravel  were  then  thoroughly  mixed  and  saturated  with 
water,  the  surplus  water  being  allowed  to  drain  off.  The  dry 
mixture  of  cement  and  sand  was  then  uniformly  spread  over  the 
wet  gravel  and  thoroughly  mixed  with  it.  The  water  which 
remained  adhering  to  the  gravel  was  found  sufficient  to  moisten 
the  cement,  and  also  to  insure  a  uniform  distribution  of  such 
water  through  the  mass.  The  mixture  was  then  deposited  in 
place  and  thoroughly  rammed,  and  it  was  found  to  give  a  very 
solid  and  strong  concrete.  It  was  found  that  three  and  one 
half  barrels  of  cement  were  used  for  each  four  and  onehalf 
cubic  yards  of  concrete  in  place.  It  is  said  that  the  concrete 
was  equal  in  every  particular  to  that  made  of  one  part  of 
cement,  three  parts  sand,  and  five  parts  broken  lime  stone. 
This  species  of  concrete  was  used  in  the  foundations  of  the 
New  York  and  Brooklyn  bridge,  and  also  on  some  of  the  New 
York  City  cable  railways.  This  mixture  comes  very  near 
being  the  ideal  concrete  for  both  solidity  and  economy. 

The  following  complete  specification  for  cement  mortar 
and  concrete  indicates  the  present  practice  of  one  of  the  lead- 
ing civil  engineers  of  this  country,  and  has  many  excellent 
qualities.  These  specifications  were  used  in  the  construction 
of  the  1 55th  street  bridge  over  the  Harlem  river,  New  York 
City. 

All  mortar  used,  except  for  pointing,  shall  be  composed 
of  one  part  Portland  cement  mixed  in  a  dry  state,  with  two 
parts  clean,  sharp  sand,  free  from  loam;  the  entire  quantity  of 
water  to  be  added,  and  the  whole  mass  thoroughly  "incor- 
porated. Mortar  shall  only  be  made  in  batches  for  immediate 
consumption,  and  none  used  that  has  commenced  to  set. 
Pointing  mortar  shall  be  composed  of  cement  and  sand  in 
equal  parts,  made  in  very  small  quantities,  and  mixed  with 
just  enough  water  to  bind  the  grains. 

The  cement  used  will  be  Rosendale  or  its  equivalent,  and 
Portland.  The  Rosendale  shall  be  of  the  best  quality  of 


SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  CEMENT,  MORTAR,  ETC.          155 

established  brands  approved  by  the  engineer,  and  showing  a 
minimum  breaking  strength  of  seventy  pounds  per  square  inch 
on  the  twenty-four  hour  test,  viz. :  Set  one  hour  in  air, 
remainder  of  time  in  water.  Portland  cement  must  be  of  a 
well-established  brand,  English  or  German  manufacture,  and 
approved  by  the  engineer.  It  should  be  a  moderately  slow- 
setting  cement,  weighing  one  hundred  and  six  to  one  hundred 
and  twelve  pounds  per  struck  bushel,  not  less  than  ninety- 
eight  per  cent,  fine,  using  a  two  thousand  five  hundred  mesh 
sieve,  and  to  test  neat  in  seven  days  after  two  hours  in  air,* 
remainder  of  time  in  water,  three  hundred  and  eighty,  to  four 
hundred  and  twenty-five  pounds  per  square  inch  of  section. 
When  tested  in  cakes,  all  cement  must  be  free  from  crackin 
on  the  edges. 

In  general,  all  cements  must  be  subject  to  the  usual 
standard  of  inspection  and  testing,  as  recommended  by  the 
American  Society  of  Civil  Engineers.  The  contractor  must 
keep  on  hand,  under  proper  shelter,  and  convenient  of  access, 
sufficient  stock  of  cement  ahead  of  his  wants  to  afford  a  rea- 
sonable time  for  its  proper  examination  and  testing. 

The  sand  used  must  be  clean,  sharp  sand,  not  too  fine, 
free  from  pebbles  and  must  not  soil  white  paper. 

The  water  used  must  be  clean,  fresh  water. 

The  concrete  will  be  mixed  either  by  hand  or  machine, 
according  to  quantity  needed  and  rapidity  of  requirements. 
Any  machine  used  must  be  one  of  proved  efficiency  and 
reliability  for  uniform  product.  All  component  parts  of  a  con- 
crete batch  must  be  accurately  gauged  as  to  relative  volume. 
Cement  and  sand  must  be  thoroughly  mixed  dry,  and  the 
thoroughly  wetted  broken  stone  incorporated  therewith,  and  only 
enough  water  added  by  sprinkling  to  uniformly  dampen  the 
mass  without  wetting  it,  as  may  be  directed.  The  amount  of 
water  required  will  depend  upon  atmospheric  conditions  of  heat 
and  moisture,  and  due  allowance  must  be  made  therefor.  In 
hand  mixing,  the  broken  stone  will  be  spread  out  upon  a  tight 
platform,  within  a  movable  frame  of  gauged  dimensions,  holding 
an  exact  manageable  batch  of  stone,  nine  to  twelve  inches  deep. 
The  stone  to  be  flushed  off  uniform  with  edge  of  frame,  and 
thoroughly  wetted,  allowance  being  made  when  stone  has 
become  highly  heated  from  the  sun,  when  the  water  quickly 
evaporates.  The  sand  and  cement  mixed  dry  on  an  adjacent 
platform  to  be  then  uniformly  spread  over  the  stone  prepared 
as  above.  The  frame  will  then  be  lifted  off,  and  the  mass 
shoveled  over  in  rows,  the  men  working  from  opposite -sides 
towards  each  other,  care  being  exercised  not  to  heap  the  mass, 
but  simply  turn  it  over,  keeping  the  original  thickness.  Dur- 
ing this  process  the  sprinkling  to  be  kept  up  to  obtain  the 

*This  is  commonly  given  as  24  hours  in  air,  but  kept  moist. 


\ 

156  ENGINEEKING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

required  dampness.  The  operation  to  be  repeated  rapidly  and 
only  so  often  as  may  be  necessary  to  obtain  a  uniform  homo- 
geneous mass  of  concrete,  which  must  be  used  as  rapidly  as 
possible.  All  concrete  must  be  thoroughly  rammed  in  layers, 
as  may  be  directed,  with  metal  rammers  of  an  approved  pat- 
tern, weighing  from  thirty  to  thirty-five  pounds  each.  Corners 
inaccessible  to  direct  long-handled  ramming,  as  in  air  chambers 
of  caissons,  to  have  special  devices  provided  to  insure  solid 
contact  work.  All  concrete  stone  to  be  trap-rock,  or  a  dense 
fine  grained  blue  limestone,  or  may  be  a  clean  screened  coarse 
gravel,  when  used  with  Rosendale  cement.  All  concrete  stone 
must  be  clean  and  free  from  dust.  There  will  be  three  grades 
of  concrete  required  designated  by  numbers. 

No.  i.  Concrete  mass  on  roof  of  caissons  and  filling  of 
air  chambers — one  part  Portland  cement,  two  parts  sand  and 
four  parts  of  one-half-inch  clean,  broken  stone.* 

No.  2.  Concrete  for  footings  of  Pier  III,  and  hearting  of 
all  piers — one  part  Portland  cement,  two  parts  sand  and  four 
and  one  half  parts  broken  stone,  miscellaneous  sizes,  but  none 
over  two  inches  in  any  direction.  *, 

No.  3.  Common  concrete  in  Pier  II — one  part  Rosen- 
dale  cement,  two  parts  sand  and  five  parts  gravel  or  broken 
stone.  A.  P.  B. 

When  concrete  is  used  for  the  purpose  of  making  a  wall 
impervious  to  water,  it  must  be  made  of  small  gravel  or  small 
broken  stone,  and  it  must  be  unusually  rich.  That  is  to  say  a 
large  excess  of  mortar  must  be  employed.  With  these  precau- 
tions, with  proper  care  in  laying,  it  is  possible  to  make  a  prac- 
tically water-tight  wall  of  cement  concrete.  Such  a  wall  or 
partition  may  be  constructed  between  two  rubble  stone  walls, 
the  concrete  core  being  relied  on  to  make  the  wall  practically 
water-tight. 

129.  Specifications  for  Stone.  The  following  spec- 
ifications for  stone  to  be  used  for  various  purposes  are  those  in 
use  by  the  Chicago,  Milwaukee  and  St.  Paul  Railway.  While 
certain  qualities  of  stone  are  here  specified,  no  method  is  pre- 
scribed for  determining  these  qualities.  The  qualities  of  build- 
ing stone  are  often  examined  by  means  of  laboratory  tests  for 
strength,  specific  gravity,  and  for  effect  of  freezing,  and  also 

*That  is  to  say,  crushed  stone  which  will  pass  through  a  sieve  of  ^  inch  mesh  and 
be  retained  on  a  sieve  of  %  inch  mesh. 


SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  STONE.  157 

by  chemical  and  microscopic  tests  to  determine  composition 
an  1  structure.  While  such  tests  have  considerable  value  in  th.e 
absence  of  any  knowledge  from  experience,  they  do  not  take 
the  place  of  that  kind  of  knowledge  which  is  obtained  from 
having  observed  the  strength  and  weathering  qualities  in  actual 
structures  wrhich  have  been  long  expo-ed  to  the  action  of  the 
elements.  It  is  always  desirable,  therefore,  to  have  stone  from 
quarries  of  established  reputation,  the  products  of  which  have 
long  been  upon  the  market.  For  this  reason  where  stone  spec- 
ifications are  prepared  for  a  given  locality,  the  engineer  may 
inform  himself  of  the  most  available  kind  of  stone  to  be  used 
at  that  place,  and  may  specify  two  or  three  alternative  varieties, 
by  naming  the  quarries.  Evidently  this  \vould  not  be  practica- 
ble where  general  specifications  are  prepared  for  an  entire 
railway  system  of  such  large  extent  as  that  of  the  Chicago, 
Milwaukee  and  St.  Paul.  For  this  system  the  specifications 

read  as  follows: 

Stone. 

Bridge,  block  rubble  and  common  rubble  stone  must  be  of 
sound  and  durable  quality,  free  from  flint  seams,  powder 
cracks,  dry  and  incipient  cracks,  flaws  and  other  imperfections, 
and  of  such  character  as  will  resist  the  action  of  the  weather 
without  injury  to  t  ic  masonry  in  the  climates  traversed  by  the 
railway  company's  lines. 

All  stone,  except  riprap,  shall  have  its  top  and  bottom 
beds  approximately  parallel  to  each  other  and  to  the  natural 
quarry  beds,  and  shall  be  approximately  rectangular  in  shape 
with  sides  perpendicular  to  its  beds. 

Bridge  stone  shall  be  from  14  inches  to  24  inches  thick, 
from  4  feet  to  7  feet  long,  and  from  2  feet  to  5  feet  wi  le;  but 
in  no  case  shall  its  length  be  less  than  two  and  one  half  times 
its  thickness,  nor  its  width  be  less  than  one  and  one  half  times 
its  thickness. 

Block  rubble  stone  shall  be  from  8  inches  to  14  inches* 
thick,  2  feet  to  5  feet  long,  and  not  less  than  18  inches  wide. 

Common  rubble  stone  shall  not  be  less  than  6  inches  thick, 
16  inches  long,  and  10  inches  wide. 

Riprap  must  be   of  sound   stone   of  such    quality  that  will 

-not  disintegrate  under   the  action   of   the    weather.     It  shall  be 

of  random  size   and    shape,   none  to  be  less  than  20  pounds  in 

weight,  and  the  majority  such  as  can  be  handled  by  one  man, 


158  ENGINEEKING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

but  no  stone  to  be  larger  than  can  be  handled  by  two  men 
without  the  use  of  a  bar. 

The  engineer  reserves  the  right  to  specify  the  quarry  and 
the  particular  ledge  in  the  quarry  from  which  the  stone  shall 
he  supplied. 

The  stone  may  be  inspected  before  or  after  shipment  from 
fche  quarry,  at  the  option  of  the  railway  company,  and  in  the 
former  case  the  contractor  shall  furnish  the  inspector  with  full 
facilities  for  examination  of  the  stone. 

The  engineer  reserves  the  right  to  accept  or  reject  any  or 
all  of  the  stone  for  want  of  conformity  with  these  specifications 
at  any  time  previous  to  its  being  paid  for  in  full  by  the  railway 
company,  notwithstanding  that  it  may  have  been  previously 
passed  upon  by  the  inspector,  and  in  case  of  such  rejection  the 
title  to  the  stone  shall  be  in  the  contractor,  and  he  shall  be 
charged  freight  on  the  same  at  regular  tariff  rates.  O.  B. 

130.  Stone  Masonry.  It  is  not  safe  for  the  engineer 
to  undertake  to  designate  a  particular  class  of  masonry  by  a 
particular  name,  without  entering  in  the  specifications  a  full 
description  of  the  same.  The  names  of  classes  of  masonry 
are  too  indefinite  and  are  used  in  too  many  senses  to  make  it 
safe  to  pursue  such  a  course.  The  engineer  should,  therefore, 
describe  in  considerable  detail  exactly  the  kind  of  masonry 
construction  he  desires,  and  he  need  not  give  to  such  masonry 
any  particular  class  name.  If  he  does  use  class  names,  he 
should  define  them  clearly  in  the  body  of  the  specifications. 
Specifications  will  be  given  below  for  several  different  kinds  of 
masonry. 

In  laying  masonry  and  in  writing  the  specifications  for 
the  same,  three  particular  ends  should  be  constantly  in  mind. 
These  are:  (#)  evenness  and  equality  of  bearing  in  support- 
ing the  superimposed  load ;  (<5)  so  far  as  possible  an  entire 
absence  of  voids  or  openings  in  the  body  of  the  work;  and  (c) 
so  effectual  a  bonding  of  the  mass  as  to  cause  it  to  act  so  far 
as  possible  as  a  monolithic  structure.  If  the  masonry  occu- 
pies a  prominent  situation  so  that  its  appearance  is  a  matter  of 
importance,  the  exterior  surfaces  may  be  made  to  conform  to 
any  desired  plan.  The  following  specifications  are  thought  to 


SPECIFICATIONS  FOE  STONE  MASONRY.  159 

be  self  explanatory.  They  are  the  general  specifications  for 
bridge  masonry  used  by  the  Chicago,  Milwaukee  &  St.  Paul 
Railway.  While  these  specifications  do  not  require  a  very 
expensive  grade  of  work,  if  fairly  carried  out  they  will  produce 
permanent  monolithic  structures  of  great  strength,  provided  a 
good  quality  of  stone  and  cement  have  been  employed,  the 
specifications  for  which  are  issued  separately. 

Bridge  Masonry. 

All  masonry  shall  be  built  according  to  the  plans  and 
instructions  furnished  by  the  engineer,  and  when  built  by  con- 
tract will  be  measured,  estimated,  and- paid  for  by  the  cubic 
yard,  and  only  to  the  amount  of  cubical  contents  of  the  same  as 
planned  and  laid  out. 

All  masonry  built  by  contract  shall  be  subject  to  the  super- 
vision of  an  inspector  whose  duties  it  shall  be  to  see  that  the 
requirements  of  these  specifications  are  complied  with,  but  his 
presence  shall  in  no  way  or  in  any  degree  lessen  the  responsi- 
bility of  the  contractor  or  his  obligations. 

The  stone  used  in  bridge  masonry  shall  be  of  the  quality 
and  dimensions  described  and  known  as  bridge  stone  in  this 
company's  specifications  for  stone. 

The  stone  shall  be  carefully  cut  and  dressed,  forming 
headers  and  stretchers,  which  must  be  laid  in  regular  horizontal 
courses  in  good  cement  mortar,  with  beds  and  builds  level,  the 
end  and  side  joints  vertical  and  broken  at  least  fifteen  (15) 
inches. 

All  foundation  or  footing  courses  must  be  made  of  select 
large  stones  not  less  than  eighteen  (18)  inches  in  thickness 
and  having  a  superficial  area  of  at  least  fifteen  (15)  square 
feet. 

No  course  of  stone  shall  be  less  than  fourteen  (14)  nor 
more  than  twenty-four  (24)  inches  in  thickness  and  each  course 
shall  be  continuous  around  and  through  the  wall,  the  courses 
decreasing,  when  at  all,  regularly  in  thickness  from  the  bottom 
to  the  top  of  the  wall. 

Face  stones  shall  be  composed  of  headers  and  stretchers, 
and  each  stone  in  any  course  shall  be  of  the  exact  thickness  of 
the  one  adjoining  it.  The  outer  surfaces  are  to  be  rock  face, 
but  the  edges  shall  be  brought  to  lines  corresponding  to  the 
finished  dimensions  of  the  masonry,  and  there  shall  be  no  pro- 
jections of  over  four  (4)  inches  beyond  these  lines. 

The  beds  and  joints  of  face  stone  shall  be  dressed  back  at 
least  twelve  (12)  inches  from  the  face  of  the  wall  and  must  be 
brought  to  a  joint  of  not  more  than  one  half  (^)  an  inch  when 


160  ENGINEEKING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

laid.     The  under  bed  must  extend  to  the  extreme  back  of  the 
stone;   NO  OVERHANG  whatever  will  be  allowed. 

Stretchers  shall  not  be  less  in  length  than  two  and  one  half 
(2^)  times  their  height,  and  no  stone  shall  have  a  less  width 
than  one  and  one  half  (i%)  times  its  thickness. 

Headers  at  least  four  (4)  feet  long,  when  the  thickness  of 
the  wall  will  permit,  shall  be  put  in  frequently  to  bond  the  wall, 
and  they  shall  be  so  arranged  that  the  headers  ot  any  course 
shall  fall  between  the  headers  of  the  course  immediately  beiow 
it.  There  shall  be  one  header  to  every  two  (2) 'stretchers,  and 
they  shall,  as  far  as  practicable,  hold  the  size  back  into  the 
heart  of  the  wall  that  they  show  in  the  face. 

When  the  walls  do  not  exceed  four  (4)  feet  in  thickness 
headers  must  run  entirely  through  the  wall,  and  in  pier  work  a 
number  of  them  shall  extend  through,  even  though  the  walls  are 
of  a  greater  thickness  than  this. 

When  walls  exceed  four  (4)  feet  in  thickness,  there  shall 
be  as  many  headers  of  the  same  size  in  the  back  of  the  wall 
as  in  the  face,  and  so  arranged  that  a  header  in  the  rear  of  the 
wall  shall  be  between  two  headers  in  the  front. 

The  backing  and  interior  of  the  walls  shall  be  of  large, 
well  shaped  stone  of  a  thickness  equal  to  that  of  the  corre- 
sponding face  stone.  No  voids  over  six  (6)  inches  in  width 
shall  be  left  between  these  stone,  and  all  such  void  must  be 
filled  with  small  stones  and  spawls  thoroughly  bedded  in  cement 
mortar  or  grouted.  When  the  masonry  is  completed,  it  must 
contain  no  voids,  and  must  be,  as  nearly  as  practicable  imper- 
vious to  water.  When  weep  holes  are  necessary,  they  will  be 
ordered  by  the  engineer. 

All  stones  shall  be  prepared  by  dressing  and  hammering 
before  they  are  brought  on  the  wrall,  and  must  be. so  shaped 
that  their  bearing  beds  will  be  parallel  to  their  natural  beds. 
No  heavy  hammering  will  be  allowed  on  the  wall  after  a  course 
is  set,  and,  should  any  irregularities  occur,  they  must  be  carefully 
pointed  off. 

Each  stone  must  be  laid  on  its  broadest  bed  without  the 
use  of  chips,  pinners  or  levelers,  in  a  full  bed  of  mortar,  so 
that  no  stone  shall  bear  upon  another  stone  at  any  point  without 
a  mortar  joint  intervening. 

Care  must  be  taken  not  to  injure  the  joints  of  stone  already 
laid.  Should  a  stone  be  moved  or  the  joint  be  broken  the  stone 
must  be  taken  out,  the  mortar  thoroughly  cleaned  from  both 
the  stone  and  the  masonry  and  the  stone  then  reset. 

The  stones  in  each  course   shall  be  so    arranged  as  to  form . 
a  proper  bond     with     the    stones    of  the     course    immediately 
beneath  it,   and  in  no  case   shall  this   bond  be  less  than  fifteen 
(15)  inches. 


SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  STONE  MASONRY.  161 

Both  the  stone  and  the  masonry  must  be  kept  free  from  all 
dirt  that  will  interfere  with  the  adhesion  of  the  mortar  or 
cement  to  the  stone,  and  in  warm  weather  the  stone  and  the 
masonry  must  be  wet  with  clean  water  just  before  laying. 

When  masonry  is  built  in  freezing  weather,  the  masonry 
and  stone  must  be  thoroughly  freed  from  ice  or  frost  by  using 
salt  and  hot  water,  and  where  practicable,  the  stone  must  be 
held  over  a  fire  just  before  being  set. 

The  top  surfaces  of  coping  stones  of  abutments  and  piers 
are  to  be  rough  cut  to  a  true  plane,  and  the  surfaces  where  the 
bed  plates  of  iron  bridges  rest  shall  be  bush  hammered  and 
made  level.  When  the  track  is  on  a  grade  or  curve,  the  eleva- 
tion both  for  the  curvature  and  grade  will  be  provided  for  in  the 
ironwork.  Under  no  circumstances  will  the  masonry  be  cut  on 
an  incline  for  this  purpose. 

The  front  face  and  top  of  all  mud  walls  shall  be  rough 
cut  to  a  true  plane. 

Whenever  it  may  be  necessary  to  remove  any  part  of  the 
present  masonry  in  extending  abutments  or  piers  for  second 
track  work,  it  shall  be  stepped  back  so  as  to  insure  a  sufficient 
bond  between  the  new  and  the  old  work,  so  as  to  break  joints 
nowhere  less  than  twelve  (12)  inches.  O.  B. 

The  following  specifications  for  different  classes  of  masonry 
are  taken  from  the  standard  specifications  used  by  the  Penn- 
sylvania Railroad  Company.  In  these  specifications  three 
separate  classes  of  masonry  are  recognized,  and  for  any  partic- 
ular piece  of  work,  it  becomes  necessary  to  specify  only  the 
class  of  masonry  which  shall  be  used  in  these  general  specifi- 
cations: 

Detailed  plans  will  be  prepared  by  the  engineer  for  each 
structure,  and  copies  of  the  same  furnished  to  the  contractor 
before  the  commencement  of  the  work.  All  stone  used  for  the 
different  classes  of  masonry  must  be  sound,  durable  and  not 
liable  to  be  affected  by  the  weather,  and  shall  be  subject  to  the/ 
approval  of  the  engineer. 

Masonry  will  be  classified  as  follows: 

First-class  masonry  shall  consist  of  ranged  rock  work  of  the 
best  description.  The  face  stones  shall  be  accurately  squared, 
jointed  and  bedded,  and  laid  in  regular  horizontal  courses,  not 
less  than  twelve  inches  in  thickness,  decreasing  regularly  from 
bottom  to  top  of  the  walls.  They  shall  consist  of  headers  and 
st.  etchers,  and  there  shall  be  at  least  one  header  to  every  two 
stretchers,  and  they  shall  be  so  laid  that,  as  nearly  as  practica- 
ble, the  headers  in  each  course  shall  divide  equally,  or  nearly 

11 


162  ENGINEEKING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

so,  the  spaces  between  the  headers  in  the  course  immediately 
below.  Stretchers  shall  be  not  less  than  three  feet  long  and 
sixteen  inches  in  width.  Headers  shall  not  be  less  than  three 
feet  in  length  and  eighteen  inches  in  width,  and  shall  hold  the 
size  back  into  the  heart  of  the  wall  that  they  show  in  the  face. 

When  the  walls  do  not  exceed  four  feet  in  thickness  the 
headers  shall  run  entirely  through,  and  when  they  exceed  that 
thickness  there  shall  be  as  many  headers  of  the  same  size  in  the 
rear  as  in  the  front  of  the  wall,  so  arranged  that  a  header  in 
the  rear  of  the  wall  shall  be  between  two  headers  in  the  front. 

Every  stone  must  be  laid  on  its  natural  bed,  and  all  stones 
must  have  their  beds  well  dressed  and  made  always  as  large  as 
the  stone  will  admit  of.  Mortar  joints  shall  not  exceed  one 
quarter  inch  in  width ;  the  vertical  joints  of  the  face  must  be  in 
contact  at  least  four  inches,  measured  in  from  the  face,  and  as 
much  more  as  the  stone  will  admit  of.  The  stone  will  be  cut 
with  pitched  edges,  but  all  corners,  batir  lines,  steps  and  cop- 
ings must  be  run  with  a  neat  chisel  draft  of  one  and  one  half 
inches  on  each  corner,  and  the  projections  of  the  rock  face 
must  not  exceed  three  inches  beyond  the  face  of  the  pitch  or 
draft  lines  of  the  stones.  The  stones  of  each  course  shall  be 
so  arranged  as  to  form  a  proper  bond  with  the  stones  of  the 
underlying  course,  and  the  bond  shaft  in  no  case  measure  less 
than  one  foot.  Stretchers  shall  in  no  case  have  less  than  six- 
teen inches  bed  for  a  twelve  inch  course,  and  for  all  courses 
above  sixteen  inches  in  thickness,  at  least  as  much  bed  as  face. 
The  whole  of  the  masonry  shall  be  laid  in  cement  mortar,  each 
stone  being  carefully  cleaned  and  dampened  before  setting  and 
each  course  shall  be  thoroughly  cemented  before  the  succeed- 
ing course  is  laid.  No  hammering  on  the  wall  will  be  allowed 
after  the  course  is  set ;  if  any  irregularities  occur  they  must  be 
carefully  pointed  off.  The  backing  shall  consist  of  stones  with 
beds  dressed  to  one  half  inch,  and  of  a  thickness  equal  to  that 
of  the  corresponding  face  stones;  they  shall  be  laid  in  full 
cement  mortar  beds,  so  as  to  break  joints  and  thoroughly  bond 
the  work  in  all  directions,  and  on  the  completion  of  each  course 
the  space  between  the  large  backing  stones  (none  of  which 
spaces  will  be  over  six  inches  wide)  shall  be  filled  with  small 
stones  and  spalls,  thoroughly  bedded  in  cement  mortar  or 
grouted. 

All  foundation  courses  must  be  laid  with  select  large 
stones  not  less  than  eighteen  inches  in  thickness,  nor  of  less 
superficial  surface  than  fifteen  square  feet.  All  bridge  seats, 
steps  and  tops  of  walls  should  be  finished  with  a  coping  course 
of  such  dimensions  and  projection  as  may  be  ordered  by  the 
engineer,  dressed  and  cut  to  a  true  surface  on  top  and  on  the 
showing  faces  and  in  conformity  with  diagrams  for  the  same, 


SPECIFICATIONS  FOE  STONE  MASONRY.  163 

which  shall  be  furnished  by  the  engineer.  If  required,  all 
copings  shall  be  fastened  together  with  clamps  of  iron. 

First-class  arch  masonry  shall  be  built  in  all  respects  in 
accordance  with  the  above  specifications  for  first-class  bridge 
masonry.  The  ring  stones  shall  be  dressed  to  such  size  and 
shape  as  the  engineer  may  determine,  and  of  the  thickness 
shown  on  the  plans.  The  joints  must  be  made  on  true  radial 
lines,  and  the  face  of  the  sheeting  stones  must  be  dressed  to 
make  close  joints.  The  ring  stones  and  arch  sheeting  stones 
shall  break  joints  not  less  than  one  foot.  The  wing  walls  shall 
be  neatly  stepped  in  accordance  with  the  drawings  furnished, 
with  selected  stones  the  full  width  of  the  wing  and  not  less 
than  fourteen  inches  thick,  and  no  stone  shall  be  covered  less 
than  twelve  inches  by  the  one  next  above  it. 

The  parapets  shall  be  finished  with  a  coping  course  of 
full  width  of  parapet,  with  such  projection  as  may  be  directed 
by  the  engineer ;  the  coping  to  be  not  less  than  fourteen  inches 
thick  and  to  be  fastened  together  with  wrought  iron  clamps. 

Second-class  bridge  masonry  shall  consist  of  broken  or 
random  range  work  of  the  best  description.  The  face 
stones  shall  be  dressed  to  a  uniform  thickness  throughout  before 
being  laid,  but  not  hammered,  and  shall  be  laid  with,  horizon- 
tal beds  and  vertical  joints  on  the  face.  No  stone  shall  be  less 
than  eight  inches  in  thickness,  unless  otherwise  ordered  by  the 
engineer.  There  shall  be  at  least  one  header  to  every  three 
stretchers,  and  both  headers  and  stretchers  shall  be  of  similar 
size,  when  the  thickness  of  the  wall  will  admit,  but  neither 
shall  be  less  than  three  feet  in  length  and  fifteen  inches  in 
width.  The  same  arrangement  of  headers  shall  be  required  as 
is  specified  for  first-class  bridge  masonry.  Mortar  joints  shall 
not  exceed  one  half  inch  in  thickness.  All  corners  and  quoins 
shall  have  hammer  dressed  beds  and  joints.  All  corners  and 
batir  lines  shall  be  run  with  an  inch  and  a  half  chisel  draft. 
The  vertical  joints  of  the  face  must  be  in  contact  at  least  four 
inches,  measured  from  the  face,  and  as  much  more  as  the  stone 
will  admit  of.  The  work  need  not  be  laid  up  in  regular  courses, 
but  shall  be  well  bonded.  The  stones  shall  be  cleaned  and 
dampened  before  setting  and  shall  be  laid  in  cement  mortar. 
The  backing  shall  consist  of  stones  of  the  same  thickness  as  the 
adjacent  face  stone,  laid  in  full  cement  mortar  beds  with  good 
joints  and  bonds,  and  the  spaces  filled  with  spalls,  thoroughly 
bedded  in  cement  mortar,  or  grouted,  as  specified  for  first-class 
bridge  masonry.  Bridge  seats,  steps  and  tops  of  walls  shall  be 
coped  in  the  same  manner  as  specified  for  first-class  masonry. 
Stones  in  foundation  courses  shall  be  of  not  less  than  twelve 
inches  thickness  and  ten  square  feet  of  surface. 

Second-class  arch  masortry  shall  be  laid  in  cement  mortar, 
and  shall  be  of  the  same  general  character  and  description  as 


164  ENGINEERING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

second-class  bridge  masonry,  with  the  exception  of  the  arch 
sheeting,  for  which  proper  stones  shall  be  selected  that  s'^all 
have  a  good  bearing  throughout  the  thickness  of  the  arch,  and 
shall  be  well  bonded  and  be  of  the  full  depth  of  the  arch.  No 
stone  shall  be  less  than  six  inches  in  thickness  on  the  intrados 
of  the  arch.  The  ring  stones  of  all  arches  shall  conform  to  the 
specifications  for  first-class  arch  masonry. 

Third-class  masonry  shall  be  laid  dry,  or  in  lime  or  cement 
mortar  as  may  be  directed  by  the  engineer.  It  s7  all  be  formed 
of  good  quarry  stones,  laid  upon  their  natural  bed«,  and  roughly 
squared  on  the  joints,  beds  and  faces,  the  stones  breaking 
joints  at  least  six  inches,  and  with  at  least  one  header  for 
every  three  stretchers.  No  stone  shall  be  used  in  the  face  of 
the  wall  less  than  six  inches  in  thickness,  or  less  than  twelve 
inches  on  the  least  horizontal  dimensions.  Headers  shall  be  at 
least  three  feet  long,  or  extend  entirely  through  the  wall.  The 
ends  of  all  walls  shall  be  dressed  and  finished  in  accordance 
with  the  plans.  The  stones  in  the  foundations  must  not  be  less 
than  ten  inches  in  thicknes^,  and  shall  contain  not  less  than  ten 
square  feet  surface,  and  each  shall  be  firmly,  solidly  and  care- 
fully laid. 

In  box  culverts  the  top  courses  of  the  side  walls  shall 
extend  entirely  across  the  walls,  and  the  covering  stones  shall 
have  a  bearing  .of  at  least  one  foot  on  each  wall.  The  thickness 
of  covering  stones  shall  not  be  less  than  ten  inches  for  two  feet 
openings ;  not  less  than  twelve  inches  for  three  feet  openings, 
and  not  less  than  fifteen  inches  for  four  feet  openings.  Unless 
built  on  timber  foundations  reaching  entirely  across  the  open- 
ing, the  space  between  side  walls  of  box  culverts  must  be  paved 
with  stone,  set  on  edge,  not  less  than  eight  inches  deep,  and 
well  secured  at  the  ends  with  deep  curbing.  P.  Ry. 

131.    Specifications    for   Stone    Masonry    for    a 

Large  Stone  Dam.  The  following  specifications  for  stone 
masonry  are  those  which  were  used  in  the  construction  of  the 
new  Croton  dam,  New  York  City,  1892.  They  are  com- 
mended especially  for  their  securing  a  most  efficient,  solid,  and 
impervious  grade  of  work,  at  a  minimum  cost.  Thus  the  body 
of  the  dam,  composed  of  rubble  stone  masonry  laid  in  cement 
mortar,  thoroughly  bonded,  and  made  entirely  solid,  cost  from 
$3.40  to  $4.00  per  cubic  yard,  the  cement  mortar  being  one  of 
Rosendale  cement  to  two  of  sand,  the  stone  having  to  be 
hauled  about  one  mile. 


SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  STONE  MASONRY.  165 

Another  significant  feature  of  these  specifications  is  the 
paying  for  the  face  dressing  per  unit  of  surface  in  addition  to 
the  standard  price  per  cubic  yard,  the  matter  of  this  face  dress- 
ing being  left  until  the  work  is  executed.  In  this  way  such 
small  details  need  not  be  determined  in  advance  and  indicated 
upon  the  drawings. 

Stone  Masonry. 

All  stone  masonry  is  to  be  built  of  sound,  clean  quarry 
stone  of  quality  and  size  satisfactory  to  the  engineer;  all  joints 
to  be  full  of  mortar,  unless  otherwise  specified. 

Dry  rubble  masonry  and  paving  are  to  be  laid  without 
mortar,  and  are  to  be  used  for  walls,  for  the  slopes  of  the  dam 
embankments,  and  at  any  other  place  that  may  be  designated. 

This  class  of  masonry  is  to  be  of  stone  of  suitable  size  and 
quality,  laid  closely  by  hand  with  as  few  spawls  as  practicable, 
in  such  manner  as  to  present  a  smooth  and  true  surface.  The 
work  is  to  be  measured  in  accordance  wifh  the  lines  shown  on 
the  drawings  or  ordered  during  the  progress  of  the  work.  The 
stones  used  must  be  roughly  rectangular;  all  irregular  projec- 
tion and  feather  edges  must  be  hammered  off.  No  stone  \\ill 
be  accepted  which  has  less  than  the  depth  represented  on  the 
plans  or  ordered.  Each  stone  used  for  paving  must  be  set 
solid  on  the  foundation  of  broken  stone  or  earth  and  no  inter- 
stices must  be  left. 

In  the  dry  ruJ^ble  masonry  walls,  large  stones  must  be 
used,  especially  for  the  faces,  and  the  walls  must  be  bonded 
with  frequent  headers,  of  such  frequency  and  sizes  as  shall  be 
approved  by  the  engineer. 

'  Riprap  may  be  used  in  connection  with  the  protective 
work,  and  wherever  the  engineer  may  order  it.  It  shall  be 
made  of  stone  of  such  size  and  quality  and  in  such  manner  as  he 
shall  direct,  and  must  be  laid  by  hand. 

After  the  slopes  which  are  to  receive  the  paving  have  been 
dressed,  a  layer  of  broken  stone  is  to  be  spread  as  a  foundation 
for  the  paving,  wherever  ordered.  The  broken  stones  must  be 
sound  and  hard,  not  exceeding  two  inches  at  their  greatest 
diameter.  Broken  stone,  not  exceeding  one  inch  in  diameter, 
may  be  used  for  forming  roadways ;  it  is  to  be  spread  to  such 
thickness  as  ordered  and  heavily  rolled  or  rammed.  Broken 
stones  may  be  used  also  wherever  the  engineer  may  direct, 
rolled  if  so  directed,  and  paid  for  under  this  head,  except  the 
broken  stone  used  for  making  concrete,  the  cost  of  which  is 
included  in  the  price  hereinbefore  stipulated  for  concrete  laid. 


166  ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

Rubble  stone  masonry  is  to  be  used  for  the  central  part  of 
the  dam,  for  the  overflow,  for  the  center  walls  of  the  earth 
embankments,  for  most  of  the  structures  and  appurtenances  of 
the  dam.  and  wherever  ordered  by  the  engineer. 

Rubble  stone  masonry  shall  be  made  of  sound,  clean  stone 
of  suitable  size,  quality  and  shape  for  the  work  in  hand,  and 
presenting  good  beds  for  materials  of  that  class.  Especial  care 
must  be  taken  to  have  the  beds  and  joints  full  of  mortar,  and 
no  grouting  or  filling  of  joints  after  the  stones  are  in  place  will 
be  allowed.  The  work  must  be  thoroughly  bonded.  The  faces 
of  the  rubble  stone  masonry,  especially  the  up-stream  face  of 
the  walls,  shall  be  closely  inspected  after  they  are  built,  and  if 
any  mortar  joints  are  not  full  and  flush,  they  shall  be  taken  out 
to  a  depth  of  no  less  than  three  inches  or  more,  if  so  ordered, 
and  repointed  properly. 

A  large  quantity  of  rubble  stone  masonry  in  mortar  is  to 
be  used  in  the  construction  of  the  central  part  of  the  dam  and 
of  the  center  wall  and  overflow. 

The  stones  used  therein  must  be  sound  and  durable ;  they 
must  have  roughly  rectangular  forms,  and  all  irregular  projec- 
tions and  feather  edges  must  be  hammered  off.  Their  beds, 
especially,  must  be  good  for  materials  of  that  class,  and  present 
such  even  surfaces  that,  when  lowering  a  stone  on  the  level 
surface  prepared  to  receive  it,  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  the 
mortar  will  fill  all  spaces.  After  the  bed  joints  are  thus  secured, 
a  moderate  quantity  of  spawls  can  be  used  in  the  preparation 
of  suitable  surfaces  for  receiving  other  stones.  All  other  joints 
must  be  equally  well  filled  with  mortar. 

The  quality  of  the  beds  is  to  regulate,  to  a  large  extent,  the 
size  of  the  stones  used,  as  the  difficulty  of  forming  a  good  bed 
joint  increases  with  the  size  of  the  stones. 

Various  sizes  must  be  used,  and  regular  coursing  must  be 
avoided,  in  order  to  obtain  vertical  as  well  as  horizontal  bonding. 

The  sizes  of  the  stones  used  will  vary  also  with  the  char- 
acter of  the  quarries,  but,  especially  in  the  places  where  the 
thickness  of  masonry  is  great,  a  considerable  proportion  of  large 
stones  is  to  be  used.  If  the  size  and  character  of  the  stones,  in 
the  opinion  of  the  engineer,  shall  admit  of  it,  the  joints  (except 
the  beds),  instead  of  being  filled  with  mortar,  may,  at  his 
request  or  on  his  approval,  be  filled  with  concrete  made  as 
hereinbefore  specified,  with  the  exception  that 'the  component 
materials  be  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  part  of  cement  to 
three  parts  of  small  stone  or  gravel  of  such  size  as  the  engineer 
shall  direct,  and  thoroughly  rammed,  care  being  taken  to  use 
a  moderate  amount  of  water  only  which  must  be  brought  to 
the  surface  by  ramming,  such  filling- of  joints  with  concrete  to 
leave  no  vacancies  and  to  be  thoroughly  made.  If  concrete  is 


SPECIFICATIONS  FOB  STONE  MASONRY.  167 

so  used,  the  spaces  left  between  the  stones  should  not  be  less 
than  six  inches,  in  order  that  proper  ramming  can  be  obtained. 

No  extra  compensation  shall  be  paid  to  the  contractor  for 
the  use  of  such  concrete,  the  cost  of  which  is  to  be  included  in 
the  price  herein  stipulated  for  the  masonry  in  connection  with 
which  it  is  used. 

The  exposed  faces  of  the  main  wing  wall,  of  road  culverts, 
of  some  of  the  walls  and  of  any  other  rubble  work  that  the 
engineer  may  designate,  are  to  be  made  of  broken  ashlar  with 
joints  not  exceeding  one  half  inch  in  thickness ;  the  stones  not 
to  be  less  than  24  inches  deep  from  the  face,  and  to  present 
frequent  headers.  This  face  work  to  be  equal  in  quality  and 
appearance  to  the  face  of  the  breast  wall  in  front  of  the  new 
gate  house  at  Croton  dam  (Section  i),  and  to  be  well  pointed 
with  Portland  cement.  This  face  work  is  to  be  paid  for  by  the 
square  foot  of  the  superficial  area  for  which  it  is  ordered,  in 
addition  to  the  price  paid  per  cubic  yard  of  rubble  stone 
masonry. 

Block  stone  masonry  is  to  be  composed  mainly  of  large 
blocks  and  is  to  be  used  for  the  steps  of  the  overfall  or  for 
other  steps,  or  whenever  and  wherever  ordered  by  the  engi- 
neer. It  is  to  be  laid  in  Portland  cement  mortar,  well  pointed, 
or  may  be  ordered  laid  dry  at  the  price  stipulated  in  clause  O, 
item  (0). 

This  stone,  which  is  to  receive  the  shock  of  water  and  ice, 
is  to  be  especially  sound,  hard  and  compact,  and  of  a  durable 
character;  it  is  to  be  prepared  to  the  dimensions  given  so  that 
no  joint  will  in  any  place  be  more  than  one  inch  wide.  The 
outside  arrises  must  be  pitched  to  a  true  line. 

The  outer  faces  of  the  masonry  dam  and  of  its  gate 
chambers,  of  the  overflow  (except  steps),  and  of  any  other 
piece  of  masonry  that  may  be  designated,  are  to  be  made  of 
range  stones,  as  shown  on  the  plans,  the  stone  to  be  of  unobjec- 
tionable quality,  sound  and  durable,  free  from  all  seams,  dis- 
coloration and  other  defects,  and  of  such  kind  as  shall  be 
approved  by  the  engineer. 

All  beds,  builds  and  joints  are  to  be  cut  true  to  a  depth  of 
not  more  than  4  inches,  and  not  less  than  3  inches  from  the 
faces  to  surfaces  allowing  of  one  half  inch  joints  at  most;  the 
joints  for  the  remaining  part  of  the  stones  not  to  exceed  two 
inches  in  thickness  at  any  point. 

All  cut  arrises  to  be  true,  well  defined  and  sharp. 

Where  this  class  of  masonry  joins  with  granite  dimension 
stone  masonry  the  courses  must  correspond,  and  the  joining 
with  arches  and  other  dimension  stone  masonry  must  be 
accurate  and  workmanlike. 

Each  course  to  be  composed  of  two  stretchers  and  one 
header  alternately,  the  stretchers  not  to  be  less  than  3  feet  long 


168  ENGINEEKING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

nor  more  than  7  feet  long,  and  the  headers  of  each  successive 
course  to  alternate  approximately  in  vertical  position. 

The  rise  of  the  courses  may  vary  from  bottom  to  top  from 
30  inches  lo  15  inches  in  approximate  vertical  progression,  and 
the  width  of  bed  of  the  stretchers  is  not  to  be  at  any  point  less 
than  28  inches.  The  headers  are  not  to  be  less  than  4  feet  in 
length. 

This  class  of  masonry,  for  the  faces  of  the  dam  and  gate 
chamber,  including  the  headers,  is  to  be  estimated  at  30  inches 
thick  throughout.  At  other  places  that  may  be  designed  by 
the  Engineer,  the_size  of  the  stones  is  to  be  established  by  him, 
and  the  facing  stone  masonry  is  to  be  estimated  according  to 
the  lines  ordered  or  shown  on  the  plans.  In  no  case  are  the 
tails  of  the  headers  to  be  estimated. 

The  work  to  be  equal  in  quality  and  appearance  to  the 
facing  stone  masonry  work  built  by  the  aqueduct  commis- 
sioners for  their  masonry  dam  across  the  east  branch  of  the 
Croton  River  near  Brewster. 

All  copings  that  may  be  ordered  and  the  heads  of  the 
arches  of  the  highway  culverts,  will  be  classed  as  facing  stone 
masonry. 

The  price  herein  stipulated  for  facing  stone  masonry  is  to 
cover  the  cost  of  pointing,  of  cutting  chisel  drafts  at  all  corners 
of  the  gate-house  dam  and  other  corners,  and  of  preparing 
the  rock  faces;  but  if  any  six-cut  or  rough-pointed  work  is 
ordered  in  connection  with  this  class  of  masonry  it  shall  be 
paid  for  at  he  prices  therein  stipulated  for  such  work. 

The  face  bond  must  not  show  less  than  12  inches  lap, 
unless  otherwise  permitted. 

The  pointing  of  the  faces  to  be  thoroughly  made  with  pure 
Portland  cement  after  the  whole  structure  is  completed  ;  unless 
otherwise  permitted,  every  joint  to  be  raked  out  therefor  to  a 
depth  of  at  least  two  inches,  and,  if  the  engineer  is  satisfied 
that  the  pointing  at  any  place  is  not  properly  made,  it  must  be 
taken  out  and  made  over  again. 

Granite  dimension  stone  masonry  must  be  made  of  first- 
class  granite  of  uniform  color,  free  from  all  seams,  discolora- 
tion and  other  defects,  and  satisfactory  to  the  chief  engineer. 

It  is  to  be  used  for  the  gate  openings  in  the  gate  chamber, 
for  the  coping  of  the  dam,  for  the  gate-house  superstructures 
and  for  the  crest  and  first  step  of  the  overflow,  and  at  any  other 
place  that  may  be  designated  by  the  engineer. 

The  stones  shall  be  cut  to  exact  dimensions,  and  all  angles 
and  arrises  shall  be  true,  well  defined  and  sharp. 

All  beds,  builds  and  joints  are  to  be  dressed,  for  the  full 
depth  of  the  stone,  to  surfaces,  allowing  of  one  quarter  (^) 
inch  joint  at  most.  No  plug  hole  of  more  than  6  inches  across 


SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  STONE  MASONRY.  169 

or  nearer  than  3  inches  from  an  arris  is  to  be  allowed,  and  in 
no  case  must  the  aggregate  area  of  the  ping-hole  in  any  one 
joint  exceed  onequarter  of  its  whole  area. 

The  stone  shall  be  laid  with  onequarter  (^)  inch  joints, 
and  all  face  joints  shall  be  pointed  with  mortar  made  of  clear 
Portland  cement,  applied  before  its  first  setting.  All  joints  to 
be  raked  out  to  a  depth  of  two  inches  before  pointing. 

The  pointing  of  all  masonry,  including  the  faces  of  the 
main  body  of  the  dam  and  of  the  center  walls  which  are  below 
the  ground,  is  to  be  done  thoroughly  with  Portland  cement 
mortar,  mixed  clear  where  used  for  all  exposed  faces  of  brick 
and  cut  stone  masonry  of  all  kinds  (including  the  rubble 
facing)  ;  and  mixed  for  other  work  in  such  proportion  as  the 
engineer  shall  determine.  The  cost  of  all  pointing  is  to  be 
included  in  the  price  stipulated  for  the  masonry  to  which  it  is 
applied. 

The  exposed  faces  of  the  cut  stone  are  to  be  finished  in 
various  ways,  in  accordance  with  the  various  positions  in  which 
they  are  placed.  They  shall  be  either  left  with  a  rock  or 
quarry  face,  rough-pointed,  or  fine  hammered  (six-cut  work). 

The  various  classes  of  face  dressing  must  be  equal  in 
quality  and  appearance  to  those  on  the  sample  in  the  office  of 
the  chief  engineer. 

In  rock  face  work  the  arrises  of  the  stones  inclosing  the 
rock  face  must  be  pitched  to  true  lines ;  the  face  projections  to 
be  bold,  and  from  3  to  5  inches  beyond  the  arrises.  The 
angles  of  all  walls  on  structures  having  rock  faces  are  to  be 
defined  by  a  chisel  draft  not  less  than  i  ^  inches  wide  on  each 
face. 

In  rough-pointed  work,  the  stones  shall  at  all  points  be  full 
to  the  true  plane  of  the  face,  and  at  no  point  shall  project 
beyond  more  than  %  inch,  the  arrises  to  be  sharp  and  well 
defined.  Each  stone  to  have  its  arrises  well  defined  by  a  chisel 
draft,  which  is  included  in  the  price  for  rough-pointed  dressing. 

In  fine  hammered  work  the  face  of  the  stones  must  be 
brought  to  a  true  plane  and  fine  dressed,  with  a  hammer  having 
six  blades  to  the  inch. 

In  measuring  cut  stone  masonry,  when  the  stones  are  not 
rectangular,  the  dimensions  taken  for  each  stone  will  be  those 
of  a  rectangular,  cubical  form  which  will  just  inclose  the  neat 
lines  of  the  same.  The  price  herein  stipulated  for  granite 
dimension  stone  masonry  is  to  cover  the  cost  of  preparing  the 
rock  faces,  of  making  the  chisel  drafts,  and  of  preparing  all 
holes  and  recesses  and  grooves. 

No  payment  will  be  made  for  cutting  grooves  and  recesses 
other  than  the  price  paid  for  the  dressing  of  their  surfaces, 
which  are  to  be  fine  hammered. 


170  ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

For  rough-pointed  and  fine  hammered  (six-cut)  dressing, 
a  price  per  square  foot  of  dressing  will  be  paid  in  addition  to 
the  price  per  cubic  yard  of  masonry,  viz.  : 

For  rough-pointed  dressing,  the  price  stipulated  in  clause 
O,  item  (/),  and  for  fine  hammered  (six-cut)  dressing,  the 
price  stipulated  in  clause  O,  item  (s). 

The  exposed  parts  of  the  cut  stone  are  generally  to  be 
prepared  with  rock  face. 

The  inside  surfaces  and  copings  are  generally  to  be 
rough-pointed. 

All  the  gateways,  grooves,  sills,  floors,  and  all  other 
surfaces  designated  by  the  engineer  are  to  be  fine  hammered. 

A.  F. 

132.  Specification  for  First-class  Bridge  Ma- 
sonry. The  following  specification  for  first-class  bridge 
masonry  represents  the  current  practice  of  one  of  the  leading 
American  engineers: 

Masonry — The  stone  to  be  used  shall  be  the  best  quality 
of  limestone  from  the  quarries,  except  the  nose  stones  for  the 
curved  upstream  starlings  of  Piers  I,  II  and  III,  one  stone  to 
each  course  shall  be  granite. 

The  stone  must  be  strong,  compact  and  of  uniform  quality 
and  appearance  and  free  from  any  defects  which  in  the  judg- 
ment of  the  engineer  may  impair  its  strength  or  durability. 

No  course  shall  be  less  than  16  inches  in  thickness  and  no 
course,  except  the  coping,  shall  be  thicker  than  the  one 
beneath  it. 

Each  bed  of  every  stone  shall  measure  at  least  thirty-six 
inches  in  each  direction,  except  that  where  the  thickness  of  the 
course  is  less  than  twenty-four  inches  the  bed  need  not  exceed 
one  and  one  half  times  the  thickness  of  the  stone. 

The  bottom  bed  shall  always  be  the  full  size  of  the  stone 
and  no  stone  shall  have  an  overhanging  top  bed. 

Stretchers  shall  not  be  less  than  four  feet  nor  more  than 
seven  feet  long  and  stretchers  of  the  same  width  shall  not  be 
placed  together  vertically,  but  this  shall  not  apply  to  the  ends 
of  stretchers  where  headers  come  centrally  between  stretchers. 

Headers  shall  be  at  least  four  feet  long  and  shall  be  at 
least  three  quarters  their  full  width  for  the  whole  length.  There 
shall  be  at  least  two  headers  on  each  side  of  every  course 
between  the  shoulders. 

At  least  two  stones  on  one  side  of  each  course  shall  reach 
through  to  the  stone  on  the  other  side. 

The  joints  of  the  face  stones  shall  be  cut  twelve  inches  back 
from  the  face. 


SPECIFICATIONS  FOE  STONE  MASONRY.  171 

The  beds  and  the  joints  shall  be  cut  to  within  one  quarter 
of  an  inch  of  a  true  plane.  The  depressions  below  this  plane 
shall  not  be  more  than  one  tenth  of  the  whole  surface. 

The  vertical  joints  shall  not  average  more  than  three  eighths 
of  an  inch  and  shall  not  exceed  one  half.  Thin  horizontal 
mortar  joints  will  not  be  insisted  on,  but  every  stone  shall  be 
set  in  a  full  bed  of  mortar  and  brought  to  a  proper  bearing 
with  wooden  mauls,  no  levelers  being  allowed. 

All  stones  must  be  carefully  cleaned  and  wet  before  set- 
ting, and  no  mortar  beds  shall  be  laid  until  the  course  below 
has  been  cleaned  and  wet. 

The  beds  and  joints  of  all  face  stones  shall  be  cut  to  true 
pitch  lines. 

The  face  of  the  upstream  cutwaters  of  Piers  1  and  II  shall 
be  fine  pointed  work  with  no  projections  exceeding  one  half 
inch. 

The  coping  shall  be  two  feet  thick  with  a  bush-hammerep 
face  throughout  and  be  cut  with  a  wash  as  shown  on  the  plans. 

A  four  inch  draft  line  shall  be  cut  on  all  vertical  angles. 

All  other  portions  of  the  piers  shall  have  a  rough  quarry 
face  with  no  projections  exceeding  three  inches,  the  quarry  face 
to  average  at  least  one  and  one  half  inches  from  the  pitch  line 
of  the  joints  and  never  be  run  back  of  such  pitch  line. 

No  grab  holes  shall  be  made  in  the  face  of  the  coping  or 
on  the  pointed  work  of  the  cutwater. 

The  stones  of  the  curved  upstream  starlings  of  Piers  II  and 
III  shall  be  doweled  into  those  of  the  course  below  with  one 
and  one  eighth  inch  steel  dowels  extending  six  inches  into  each 
course,  these  dowels  to  be  placed  about  ten  inches  back  from 
the  face  and  seven  inches  on  each  side  of  each  joint.  The 
stones  of  the  upper  course  shall  be  drilled  through  before  set- 
ting after  which  the  hole  shall  be  extended  six  inches  into  the 
lower  course,  a  small  quantity  of  mortar  shall  be  put  into  the 
hole,  the  dowel  dropped  in  and  the  hole  filled  with  mortar  and 
well  rammed. 

The  coping  shall  be  cut  with  close  joints  throughout  the 
whole  pier  and  each  stone  under  the  bridge  seat  shall  go  com- 
pletely across  the  pier. 

The  joints  in  the  two  courses  below  the  coping  in  all  piers 
shall  be  cramped  with  cramps  of  one  inch  round  iron,  sixteen 
inches  long,  the  ends  four  inches  into  each  stone. 

The  backing  shall  be  composed  of  stones  of  the  same 
thickness  as  the  face  stones  and  with  beds  cut  in  the  same 
manner  as  required  for  the  face  stones.  The  spaces  between 
the  large  stones  shall  not  occupy  more  than  one  fifth  of  the 
entire  area  of  the  pier  inside  of  the  face  stones  and  these  spaces 
shall  be  filled  with  good  rubble  masonry  carefully  laid  up  on 
full  mortar  beds  and  well  rammed. 


172  ENGINEERING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

All  face  stones  shall  be  laid  in  Portland  cement  mortar 
two  parts  of  sand  to  one  of  cement.  The  backing  shall  be  laid 
in  natural  cement  mortar,  two  parts  of  sand  to  one  part  of 
cement. 

The  Portland  cement  shall  be  an  imported  cement,  equal 
in  quality  to  O.  F.  Alsen  &  Sons'  best  quality,  natural  cement 
shall  be  equal  to  the  best  grades  of  Louisville  cement.  At 
least  88  per  cent,  shall  pass  through  a  sieve  of  350  meshes  per 
square  inch.  Each  carload  shall  be  treated  as  a  separate  lot. 
Samples  shall  be  mixed  separately  and  formed  into  briquettes 
which  shall  be  kept  one  day  in  air  and  six  days  in  water  and 
then  broken.  When  broken  they  shall  have  an  average  tensile 
strength  of  at  least  eighty  pounds  per  square  inch  and  a  mini- 
mum of  at  least  seventy  pounds.  None  of  the  briquettes  shall 
crack  or  blow  while  in  water.  The  tests  shall  be  made  in  the 
manner  usual  on  works  under  charge  of  the  same  chief  engineer. 

When  the  masonry  is  laid  up  in  freezing  weather  the  back- 
ing shall  be  laid  in  Portland  cement,  three  parts  of  sand  and 
one  part  of  cement,  and  such  other  precautions  taken  against 
freezing  as  the  engineer  may  direct. 

The  joints  of  the  face  stones  shall  be  picked  out  and 
pointed  in  mild  weather  with  one  part  of  sand  and  one  part  of 
Portland  cement  which  shall  be  driven  in  with  a  calking  iron. 

The  masonry  of  the  pivot  pier  will  be  built  hollow,  the 
central  opening  to  be  of  cylindrical  shape  and  24  feet  in  diani- 
ter,  the  interior  face  of  the  masonry  to  be  rough  and  every 
fourth  stone  to  project  at  least  one  foot  from  the  general 
interior  surface.  This  central  space  shall  be  filled  with  con- 
crete. 

The  upper  three  feet  of  the  filling  of  the  pivot  pier  shall 
be  made  of  Portland  cement  concrete,  the  center  of  the  pier  to 
finish  six  inches  above  the  masonry  coping,  the  top  to  be  fin- 
ished with  a  granitoid  surface  two  inches  thick.  The  anchor 
bolts  to  secure  the  center  casting  of  the  turntable  shall  be  set 
before  the  concrete  is  completed,  and  the  concrete  filled  around 
it.  G.  S.  M. 


SPECIFICATIONS     FOR     STREET    PAVEMENTS 
AND  MATERIALS. 

133.  Specifications  for  Paving  Brick.  The  essen- 
tial properties  of  a  good  paving  brick  are :  (a)  Strength  to 
resist  cross  breaking;  (6)  strength  to  resist  crushing  ;  (c)  tough- 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR  STREET  PAVEMENTS,  ETC.      173 

ness  or  strength  to  resist  shocks  and  blows;  («?)  it  must  be 
comparatively  non-absorbent.  Any  brick  which  possesses  these 
qualities  in  a  high  degree  will  also  resist  abrasion  or  wear  sat- 
isfactorily. 

The  above  four  qualities  can  be  determined  very  accura'ely 
by  laboratory  tests.  The  author  h.is  had  a  large  experience  in 
testing  paving  brick  for  these  qualities,  and  offers  the  following 
specification  as  one  which  can  be  readily  fulfilled,  without  lim- 
iting the  competition  overmuch,  and,  therefore,  without  adding 
appreciably  to  the  cost. 

Paving  Brick. 

Bidders  must  submit  not  less  than  20  samples  of  the  brick 
which  they  propose  to  use  upon  the  work,  at  least  ten  days  pre- 
vious to  the  letting  of  the  contract.  Ten  of  these  brick  will  be 
submitted  to  the  following  tests  at  the  expense  of  the  bidder, 
the  remaining  ten  supplied  by  the  successful  bidder  will  be 
retained  as  samples  for  comparison  until  the  work  is  completed. 

The  brick  shall  be  what  is  known  as  paving  brick,  made 
from  a  suitable  quality  of  shale,  and  burned  to  a  uniform  con- 
consistency  throughout,  but  not  to  the  degree  of  actual  vitrif ac- 
tion.* The  tests  to  which  the  brick  shall  be  subjected  are  as 
follows : 

(<z)  Cross  breaking.  Five  brick  will  have  their  top  and 
bottom  faces,  as  laid  edgewise  upon  the  street,  ground  to  per- 
fectly true  and  parallel  planes.  They  shall  then  be  supported 
edgewise  on  rounded  knife-edges  seven  inches  apart,  and  loaded 
in  the  center  to  rupture.  The  total  breaking  load  in  this  test, 
divided  by  the  thickness  of  the  brick  (top  width  as  laid  in  pave- 
ment) shall  give  a  result  of  not  less  th:m  3000  pounds,  this 
being  the  strength  of  the  brick  per  inch  in  width  when  laid  in 
the  pavement.! 

*Here  might  follow  any  desired  description  of  the  size,  dimensions,  rounding  of 
edges,  etc. 

+  Tnis  method  of  reducing  cross  breaking  strength  to  strength  per  inch  in  width 
gives  a  great  advantage  to  the  deeper  grades  of  brick,  Jbut  this  is  an  advantage  which 
sr.ch  bricks  are  properly  entitled  to.  It  evidently  would  not  be  fair  to  compute  from  this 
test  the  tensile  strength  of  the  brick  per  square  inch,  that  is  to  say  to  obtain  the  cross 
breaking  modulus  of  rupture  by  the  ordinary  formula,  and  use  this  function  in  making 
the  comparison,  since  in  this  case  no  advantage  would  accrue  to  the  deeper  brick.  The 
shallow  brick  being  able  to  show  as  great  a  strength  per  square  inch  as  the  deeper  brick. 
It  is  true  the  brick  as  tested  after  having  been  ground  down  have  not  their  normal  width, 
but  it  is  probable  that  on  the  average  one  set  of  samples  of  brick  will  have  been  reduced 
in  width  about  the  same  as  the  average  of  any  other  sample  in  the  process  of  grinding 
down.  Therefore  it  is  thought  the  specification  here  given  is  both  fair  and  adequate  to 
determine  the  strongest  brick  against  cross  breaking  when  used  in  a  pavement. 


174  ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

(<5)  Crushing.  One  end  of  each  brick,  after  having 
been  broken  as  above,  shall  then  be  tested  in  crushing.  For 
this  purpose  it  shall  be  dressed  approximately  to  two  inches 
square  and  a  height  equal  to  the  width  of  the  brick,  which  is 
approximately  four  inches.  This  makes  a  crushing  specimen 
two  inches  square,  of  four  inches  cross-section,  and  nearly  four 
inches  high,  which  is  tested  with  the  load  parallel  to  the  longer 
longer  dimension,  these  top  and  bottom  surfaces  having  been 
ground  to  true  planes  as  described  above.  In  other  words,  the 
brick  is  tested  for  crushing  by  applying  the  load  edgewise  upon 
the  brick,  or  as  it  will  be  applied  in  the  pavement.  When 
tested  in  this  manner  the  brick  shall  show  a  crushing  strength 
of  not  less  than  12,000  pounds  per  square  inch.* 

(c)  Impact  Test.  For  this  test  five  entire  bricks  of  each 
sample  shall  be  placed  in  a  tumbler  or  rattler,  along  with  ten 
cast  iron  brick  with  rounded  edges,  weighing  six  pounds  each. 
These  materials  shall  not  be  accompanied  by  any  kind  of  cush- 
ioning material  or  any  other  matter  whatever.  The  rattler  shall 
then  be  revolved  for  thirty  minutes  at  a  speed  of  thirty  revolu- 
tions per  minute.  The  bricks  are  weighed  before  they  are  put 
in  and  after  they  have  been  removed,  and  the  loss  in  weight 
found.  This  last  divided  by  the  original  weight  gives  the  per- 
centage of  loss.  The  average  percentage  of  loss  of  the  five 
brick  shall  not  exceed  twenty  per  cent.f 

(</)  Absorption.  The  five  brick  which  have  been  tested 
for  resistance  to  impact  shall  be  broken  across  and  then  dried 
for  four  hours  at  a  temperature  of  not  less  than  212  °  F.  and 
then  weighed.  They  shall  then  be  soaked  in  water  for  twenty- 
four  hours  (or  forty-eight  hours)  and  when  removed  from  the 

*The  author  has  tested  paving  brick  in  this  way  that  has  had  a  strength  of  over 
25,000  pounds  per  square  inch,  and  the  12,000  pound  minimum  limit  is  readily  complied 
with  by  many  makers  of  paving  brick.  A  crushing  test  of  paving  brick  by  applying 
the  load  to  the  side  of  the  brick,  or  testing  the  brick  flatwise,  is  very  deceptive,  inas- 
much as  the  specimen  is  too  short  in  the  direction  of  the  stress  to  allow  failure  to  occur 
in  a  normal  manner.  Even  cubical  forms  are  theoretically  much  too  short.  A 
crushing  test  specimen  should  always  have  the  length  in  the  direction  of  the  load  nearly 
twice  that  of  its  least  lateral  dimension,  in  order  to  obtain  a  normal  failure.  This 
height  is  necessary,  since  the  theoretical  angle  of  rupture  of  such  materials  when  fric- 
tion is  taken  into  account,  is  45  degrees  plus  one  half  the  angle  of  repose,  the 
tangent  of  which  is  the  coefficient  of  friction.  This  makes  the  angle  of  rupture  about 
58  degrees  to  60  degrees  with  the  horizontal,  instead  of  45  degrees,  as  is  commonly  stated 
in  the  text  books,  where  friction  is  neglected. 

fThis  test  is  a  very  severe  one,  but  one  of  the  most  valuable  to  which  paving  brick 
can  be  subjected.  If  the  brick  resists  this  test  satisfactorily,  it  may  be  relied  on  to 
resist  the  abusive  action  it  will  receive  in  a  street  pavement.  This  should  not  be  called 
an  abrasion  test,  since  the  loss  here  suffered  is  not  due  to  wear,  but  is  wholly  due  to 
chipping  and  breaking  off  under  impact.  It,  therefore,  can  not  be  compared  with  the 
ordinary  abrasion  tests  of  brick  where  small  castings  are  used  and  the  treatment  con- 
tinued for  a  long  period.  In  this  latter  case  the  loss  of  weight  is  due  to  abrasion  proper. 
But  since  a  brick  pavement  does  not  wear  out  in  this  way,  but  chips  off  and  breaks 
up,  it  is  thought  the  proper  test  is  an  impact  test,  such  as  above  described,  rather  than 
an  abrasion  test. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR  STREET  PAVEMENTS,  ETC.      175 

water  they  shall  be  wiped  clry  with  a  towel,  and  again  weighed. 
The  increase  in  weight  divided  by  the  original  or  dry  weight 
gives  the  percentage  of  water  absorbed.  This  test  shall  indi- 
cate an  absorption  of  less  than  two  per  cent,  (or  three  per 
cent.* 

Average  Results.  It  is  to  be  understood  that  in  each  of 
the  tests  described  above  the  standard  of  requirement  is  to  be 
applied  to  the  average  result  from  five  specimens,  these  aver- 
ages being  within  the  requirements.  It  is  also  to  be  understood 
that  no  one  specimen  shall  fall  without  the  requirement  by  more 
than  40  per  cent.,  and  in  case  either  the  average  does  not  come 
up  to  the  requirement,  or  any  one  test  fails  of  the  requirement, 
by  more  than  40  per  cent.,  the  entire  sample  of  twenty  brick 
shall  be  rejected  and  not  allowed  to  enter  the  competition;  or 
the  bidder  will  be  allowed  to  submit  other  twenty  samples  at 
his  option. 

The  average  result  of  the  four  tests  made  on  each  sample 
will  be  indicated  by  the  sum  of  four  characteristic  numbers,  cor- 
responding to  their  respective  tests,  these  four  characteristic 
numbers  being  derived  as  follows: 

1.  The  characteristic  number  for  the   cross  breaking  test 
shall  be  the  cross  breaking  strength  in  pounds  per  inch  in  width 
divided  by  1,000. 

2.  The  characteristic   number  for  the  crushing  test,  shall 
be  the  crushing  strength   in  pounds  per   square  inch  divided  by 
4,000. 

3.  The  characteristic  number  for  the  impact  test  shall  be 
twenty-five  minus  the  percentage  of  loss  of  weight  sustained  in 
this  test. 

4.  The  characteristic  number  for  the  absorption  test  shall 
be  three  minus  the  percentage  of  absorption. 

In  case  the  characteristic  numbers  found  for  the  impact  and 
absorption  tests  prove  to  be  negative,  they  are  to  be  subtracted 
from  the  sum  of  the  other  characteristic  numbers,  or  added  to 
them  negatively.  In  other  words  the  algebraic  sum  of  these 
four  characteristic  numbers  shall  form  the  basis  for  determining 
which  brick  has  sustained  the  best  test. 

Thus,  if  the  average  cross  breaking  strength  were  3,500 
pounds  per  inch  in  width,  its  characteristic  number  would  be 
3.50.  If  the  average  crushing  strength  were  15,000  pounds 

*  While  the  test  for  absorption  is  not  very  important,  and  while  the  maximum  limit 
is  not  well  defined,  the  precentage  of  absorption  does  indicate  something  of  the  general 
character  of  the  brick,  and,  therefore  should  be  made.  It  should  not,  however,  have 
equal  weight  with  the  other  tests.  Probably  any  absorption  less  than  two  or  three  per 
cent,  would  never  prove  a  source  of  weakness  in  any  brick.  While,  therefore,  the  two 
per  cent,  limit  is  specified  above,  probably  three  per  cent,  would  not  be  objectionable. 
In  making  the  absorption  test,  it  is  best  to  use  the  brick  which  have  already  been 
tested  for  impact.  These  have  their  outside  faces  largely  removed,  and  will  allow 
water  free  access  to  the  interior  portion  of  the  substance  of  the  brick.  It  is  also  well 
to  break  these  brick  in  two  before  subjecting  them  to  the  moisture  test. 


176  ENGINEERING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

per  square  inch,  its  characteristic  number  would  be  3.75.  If 
the  average  loss  in  weight  in  the  impact  test  was  18.25  per 
cent,  the  characteristic  number  of  this  test  w,ould  be  6.75.  If 
the  average  percentage  of  absorption  was  1.50,  the  character- 
istic number  for  this  test  would  be  1.50*.  the  sum  of  these 
characteristic  numbers  being  15.50.  This  becomes  the  total 
characteristic  number,  indicating  the  average  value  of  this 
sample  of  brick.  The  sample  giving  the  highest  total  charac- 
teristic number  as  determined  by  the  above  rules,  to  Be  declared 
the  brick  which  sustained  the  best  test. 

While  the  particular  numerical  quantities  chosen  in  the 
rules  given  above  may  not  be  the  best  to  use,  the  writer  believes 
these  rules  fairly  represent  the  proper  method  to  be  employed 
in  arriving  at  the  best  average  tests. 

134.  Specifications  for  Brick  Paving.  The  specifi- 
cations in  this  and  the  following  articles  for  various  kinds  of 
wearing  surfaces  of  street  pavements  are  taken  from  the  stand- 
ard specifications  used  in  the  city  of  St.  Louis.  In  these 
specifications  all  the  general  clauses  and  also  all  detailed 
description  of  the  grading,  curb,  gutter,  and  foundation  will  be 
omitted,. since  it  is  the  intention  to  include  in  them  only  that 
portion  of  the  specification  describing  the  wearing  surface. 

In  this  specification  for  brick  pavement,  after  describing 
the  curbing,  preparation  of  the  roadbed,  which  involves  a 
thorough  rolling  with  a  steel  roller,  weighing  not  less  than  ten 
tons,  or  three  hundred  pounds  per  lineal  inch  of  roller ;  also 
the  concrete  foundation  of  six  inches  in  depth,  the  following 
specification  is  given  for 

WEARING    SURFACE. 

Upon  the  foundation  of  concrete  shall  be  laid  a  berl  of 
coarse  sharp  sand  free  from  loam  or  vegetable  matter  one  and 
one  half  (i^)  inches  in  thickness  when  compacted  to  serve  as 
a  bed  for  the  bricks,  which  will  be  laid  directly  upon  and 
imbedded  in  it,  with  close  end  and  side  joints.  Upon  this  base 
of  sand  a  pavement  of  the  best  quality  of  vitrified  paving  brick 
shall  be  laid.  The  brick  shall  not  be  less  than  seven  and  one 

*This  indicates  how  the  absorption  test  can  be  made  to  enter  into  the  final  total  with 
a  small  weight,  since  it  is  not  so  important  as  the  other  tests.  The  impact  test,  on  the 
other  hand,  is  given  a  relatively  large  weight  as  it  is  of  the  greatest  importance. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR  STREET  PAVEMENTS,  ETC.      177 

half  inches,  nor  more  than inches  long,  not  less  than 

two  and  one  eighth  inches,  nor  more  than  two  and  one  half 
inches  wide,  not  less  than  three  and  one  half  inches,  nor  more 
than  four  and  one  fourth  inches  deep.  All  paving  brick  must 
be  homogeneous  and  compact  in  structure,  free  from  loose 
lumps  of  uncrushed  clay  or  from  laminations  caused  by  the 
process  of  manufacture  or  fire  cracks  or  checks  of  more  than 
superficial  character  or  extent.  All  brick  so  distorted  in  burn- 
ing as  to  lay  unevenly  in  the  pavement  shall  be  rejected.  All 
brick  shall  be  free  from  lime  or  magnesia  in  the  form  of  peb- 
bles and  shall  sho-.v  no  signs  oE  cracking  or  spalling  on 
remaining  in  water  ninety-six  (96)  hours. 

The  brick  shall  have  a  specific  gravity  of  not  less  than  2. 
They  shall  not  absorb  more  than  3  per  cent,  of  water  when 
dried  at  212  degrees  Fahrenheit,  and  immersed  for  twenty-four 
hours  in  water. 

The  bidders  shall  submit  twenty-five  samples  of  the  brick 
they  propose  using.  A  portion  of  these  bricks  shall  be  sub- 
jected to  such  physical  tests  as  the  board  of  public  improve- 
ments shall  deem  necessary,*  and  the  remainder  shall  be  retained 
as  samples  of  the  material  to  be  furnished  and  used.  Any  brick 
which  does  not  stand  the  tests  satisfactorily  wrill  be  rejected,  and 
no  bid  contemplating  the  use  of  the  rejected  brick  shall  be 
entertained.  Samples  may  be  submitted  by  manufacturers,  in 
which  case  the  bidder  proposing  to  use  brick  of  such  manufac- 
ture will  not  be  required  to  submit  samples.  The  quality  of 
the  brick  furnished  must  conform  to  the  samples  presented  by 
the  manufacturers  and  kept  in  the  office  of  the  street  commis- 
sioner. 

All  brick  may  have  a  proper  shrinkage  but  shall  not  differ 
materially  in  size  from  the  accepted  samples  of  the  same  make, 
nor  shall  they  differ  greatly  in  color  from  the  natural  color  of 
the  well  burned  brick  of  its  class  and  manufacture. 

Xo  bats  or  broken  brick  shall  be  used  except  at  the  curbs 
where  nothing  less  than  a  half  brick  shall  be  used  to  break 
joi»-te;  The  bricks  to  be  laid  in  straight  lines  and  all  joints 
broken  by  a  lap  of  at  least  two  inches,  to  be  set  upon  the  sand 
in  a  perfectly  upright  manner  as  closely  and  compactly  together 
as  possible,  and  at  right  angles  with  the  line  of  the  curb,  except 
at  street  intersections  where  they  are  to  be  laid  as  the  street 
commissioner  may  direct. 

The  pavement  to  be  thoroughly  rammed  two  or  three 
times,  as  may  be  directed  by  the  street  commissioner,  with  a 
paver's  rammer,  weighing  not  less  than  seventy-five  pounds,  or 
a  roadroller  weighing  not  less  than  three  nor  more  than  six 
tons. 

*  Tests  similar  to  those  described  in  the  previous  article  are  required. 

12 


178  ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

All  the  joints  in  the  pavement  shall  be  completely  filled 
with  clean  coarse  river  sand,  and  an  additional  layer  of  sand 
not  less  than  one  inch  in  depth  shall  be  spread  uniformly  over 
the  whole  surface  of  the  pavement.  The  joints  may  be  filled  with 
hot  pitch  or  asphalttim,  with  some  sand  or  gravel  at  bottom,  or 
with  cement  grout,  this  latter  being  now(i895)recommended  in 
order  to  prevent  the  brick  from  chipping  on  the  edges.  On  steep 
grades,  however,  this  would  give  too  smooth  a  surface.  ST.  L. 

Following  the  above  specification  is  a  "maintenance 
clause, "  similar  to  that  given  in  the  following  article,  provid- 
ing for  the  maintenance  of  the  pavement  in  good  repair  for  a 
period  of  nine  years.  The  contract  price  provided  also  for  an 
annual  sum  to  be  paid  for  maintenance,  and  the  bond  given  bv 
the  contractor  covered  the  maintenance,  as  well  as  the  original 
construction. 

The  tests  to  which  the  brick  are  submitted  under  this 
specification  are  the  same  as  those  given  in  Art.  133. 

135.     Specification   for  Asphaltum  Pavement. 

After  describing  the  preparation  of  the  roadbed,  curbing, 
concrete  foundation,  having  a  depth  of  five  inches,  etc.,  the 
following  specifications  of  the  asphaltum  body  and  wearing 
surface  are  employed. 

BINDER. 

The  second  or  binder  course  will  consist  of  a  fine  bitumin- 
ous concrete  composed  of  clean  broken  stone,  slag  or  gravel, 
not  exceeding  one  and  one  half  (i^£)  inches  in  their  largest 
dimensions,  thoroughly  screened,  and  asphaltic  cement  made 
from  lake  asphalt,  as  below  described.  The  stone,  slag  or 
gravel,  will  be  heated  by  passing  through  revolving  heaters 
and  thoroughly  mixed  by  machinery  with  the  asphaltic  cement 
in  the  proportion  of  not  less  than  fifteen  gallons  of  the  asphaltic 
cement  to  one  (i)  cubic  yard  of  stone,  slag  or  gravel.  The 
mixture  will  be  so  made  that  the  resulting  binder  has  life  and 
gloss  without  an  excess  of  cement.  Should  it  appear  dull  from 
over  heating  or  lack  of  cement  it  will  be  rejected.  This  binder 
will  be  hauled  to  the  work  and  spread  on  the  base  with  hot 
iron  rakes,  and  immediately  rammed  and  rolled  with  hand  and 
steam  rollers  while  in  a  hot  and  plastic  condition,  until  it  has  a 
thickness  of  one  and  one  half  (i/^)  inches.  The  upper 
surface  will  be  made  exactly  parallel  with  surface  of  the  pave- 
ment to  be  laid. 

WEARING    SURFACE. 

Upon  this  binder  course  thus  prepared  shall  be  laid  a 
wearing  surface  or  pavement  proper,  the  basis  of  which  shall 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOE  STREET  PAVEMENTS,  ETC.      179 

be  composed  of  lake  asphalt  unmixed  with  any  of  the  pro- 
ducts of  coal  tar,  of  a  nature  and  quality  proved  to  be  durable 
and  proper  by  having  been  in  successful  use  in  roadway  pave- 
ments in  one  or  more  cities  of  the  United  States  for  a  period  of 
at  least  two  years  and  in  an  amount  greater  than  five  thousand 
square  yards  in  each  of  said  cities. 

The  wearing  surface  shall  be  composed  of — 

ist.     Refined  lake  asphaltum. 

2d.     Heavy  petroleum  oil. 


3d.      Clean  sharp  sand. 

4th.    Fine  powder  of  carbonate  of  lime. 

Refined  asphalt  shall  be  smooth  and  free  from  lumps  of 
unmelted  pitch  or  organic  matter  not  bituminous.  It  shall  not 
at  any  time  reach  a  temperature  over  375  degrees  Fahrenheit. 
The  asphaltic  cement  shall  be  prepared  from  such  refined 
asphalt  as  "may  be  approved  by  the  street  commissioner,  and 
suitable  heavy  petroleum  oil  or  other  approved  solvent. 

The  heavy  p  troleum  oil,  which  may  be  the  residum  by 
distillation  of  the  petroleum  oils  as  found  in  the  market, 
generally  contains  water,  li^ht  oils,  coke,  and  a  gummy  sub- 
stance soluble  in  water.  This  petroleum  oil  is  freed  from  all 
impurities  and  brought  to  a  specific  gravity  of  from  18  degrees 
to  22  degrees  Beaume,  and  a  fire  test  of  250  degrees  Fahrenheit. 

To  the  melted  asphalt,  at  a  temperature  of  not  over  325 
degrees  Fahrenheit,  the  oil,  after  having  been  heated  to  at 
least  150  degrees  Fahrenheit,  is  to  be  added  in  suitable  propor- 
tions to  produce  an  asphalt  cement.  To  accomplish  this,  from 
15  to  21  pounds  of  oil  per  100  of  refined  asphalt  will  be 
required.  As  soon  as  the  oil  has  begun  to  be  added,  suitable 
agitation,  be  means  of  an  air  blast  or  other  acceptable  appli- 
ances, will  commence  and  be  continued  till  a  homogeneous 
cement  is  produced.  The  appliances  for  agitation  shall  be 
such  as  to  accomplish  this  in  at  least  ten  hours,  during  which 
the  temperature  shall  be  kept  at  from  290  degrees  to  325 
Fahrenheit,  and  no  higher.  If  the  cement  then  appears  homo- 
geneous and  free  from  lumps  and  from  inequalities,  as  shown 
by  samples  from  different  parts  of  the  still,  it  may  be  used. 
Should  it  not  prove  homogenous,  such  deficiencies  as  may 
exist  shall  be  corrected  by  the  addition  of  hot  oil  or  melted 
asphalt,  in  the  necessary  proportion. 

They  shall  be  mixed  in  the  following  proportions  by 
weight : 

Pure  asphalt   100  parts. 

Heavy  petroleum  oil 15  to  20  parts. 

The  asphaltic  cement  being  made  in  the  manner  above 
described,  the  pavement  mixture  shall  be  formed  of  the  follow- 
ing materials,  and  in  proportion  stated : 


180  ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

Asphaltic  cement from  12  to  15 

Sand.. "     83  "  70 

Pulverized  carbonate  of  lime "      5  "  15 

.  \  100     100 

Limestone  dust  shall  be  an  impalpable  powder  of  carbonate 
of  lime,  the  whole  of  which  will  pass  a  3O-mesh  screen,  and  at 
least  75  per  cent,  pass  a  loo-mesh  screen. 

The  sand  and  asphaltic  cement  are  heated  separately  to 
about  three  hundred  degrees  Fahrenheit.  The  pulverized 
carbonate  of  lime,  while  cold,  is  mixed  with  the  hot  sand  in 
the  required  proportions,  and  is  then  mixed  with  the  asphaltic 
cement  at  the  required  temperature,  and  in  the  proper  propor- 
tion, is  a  suitable  apparatus,  which  will  effect  a  perfect 
mixture. 

The  pavement  mixture,  prepared  in  the  manner  thus 
indicated,  shall  be  laid  on  the  foundation,  it  shall  then  be 
carefully  spread,  by  means  ol  hot  iron  rakes,  in  such  manner 
as  to  give  a  uniform  and  regular  grade,  and  to  such  depth  that 
after  having  received  its  ultimate  compression,  it  shall  have  a 
thickness  of  two  inches.  The  surface  shall  then  be  compressed 
by  rollers;  after  which  a  small  amount  of  hydraulic  cement 
shall  be  swept  over  it,  and  it  shall  then  be  thoroughly  com- 
pressed by  a  steam  roller,  weighing  not  less  than  ten  (10)  tons, 
in  order  to  get  a  thoroughly  compressed  wearing  surface,  the 
rolling  being  continued  as  long  as  it  makes  an  impression  on 
the  surface. 

The  powered  carbonate  of  lime  shall  be  of  such  degree  of 
fineness  that  5  to  15  per  centum  by  weight  of  the  entire  mix- 
ture for  the  pavement  shall  be  an  impalpable  powder  of  lime- 
stone, and  the  whole  of  it  shall  pass  a  No.  26  screen.  The 
sand  shall  be  of  such  size  that  none  of  it  shall  pass  a  No.  So 
screen,  and  the  whole  of  it  pass  a  No.  10  screen. 

In  order  to  make  the  gutters,  which  are  consolidated  but 
little  by  traffic,  entirely  impervious  to  water,  a  width  of  twelve 
inches  next  the  curb  shall  be  coated  with  hot  pure  asphalt  and 
smooth  with  hot  smoothing  irons,  in  order  to  saturate  the  pave- 
ment to  a  certain  depth  with  an  excess  of  asphalt. 

TOOLS    AND    SAMPLES    OF    MATERIALS. 

The  contractor  shall  furnish  and  have  on  the  line  of  work 
at  all  times,  a  complete  and  sufficient  plant  of  tools,  rollers, 
carts,  etc..  as  may  be  determined  by  the  street  commissioner, 
to  carry  on  the  work  in  an  expeditious  and  workmanlike 
manner,  also  furnish  samples  of  the  crude  lake  asphalt  to  be 
used  in  the  work,  properly  labeled,  also  samples  of  the  rearing 
surfaces  as  prepared  for  use,  and  the  statement  of  the  amount 
of  each  material  used  in  making  up  the  pavement  mixtures, 
when  called  for  by  the  street  commissioner. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOB  STREET  PAVEMENTS,  ETC.      181 

In  order  that  the  asphalt  may  be  fully  tested,  each  bidder 
must  deposit  with  the  street  commissioner,  at  least  three  days 
before  making  his  bid,  samples  ot  materials  he  intends  to  use, 
together  with  certificates  and  statements  as  follows: 

i st.  A  specimen  of  the  crude  asphaltum  not  less  than 
five  (5)  pounds  in  weight  with  a  certificate  stating  the  place 
from  whence  the  asphaltum  was  taken. 

2d.  A  specimen  of  the  asphaltic  cement  not  less  than 
five  (5)  pounds  in  weight  with  a  statement  of  its  composition, 
and  also  a  statement  of  the  composition  of  the  proposed  wear- 
ing surface. 

3d.  A  sample  of  the  pavement  surface  showing  the 
Asphalt  after  two  years'  actual  use  in  a  street,  said  sample  be 
not  less  than  one  foot  square  and  to  be  accompanied  by  a  cer- 
tificate from  the  proper  city  official  showing  the  time  during 
which  said  pavement  has  been  in  use  on  the  street  on  which  it 
was  laid,  and  the  certificate  shall  further  show  that  the  pave- 
ment from  which  the  sample  is  taken,  or  similar  pavement,  has 
been  in  successful  use  on  one  or  more  roadways  in  said  city  for 
a  period  longer  than  two  years,  and  in  an  amount  greater  than 
five  thousand  (5000)  square  yards. 

4th.  A  statement  of  the  location  and  the  capacity  in 
square  yards  per  day  of  the  works  or  factory  where  the  paving 
material  is  to  be  prepared. 

Specimens  must  be  furnished  to  the  street  department  as 
often  as  may  be  required  during  the  progress  of  the  work. 

MAINTENANCE. 

The  said ,  party  of  the  first  part,  expressly  guar- 
antees to  maintain  at  grade  and  surface  in  good  order  the 
aforesaid  work  of  reconstruction  throughout  and  at  the  end  of 
the  full  period  of  nine"  years,  commencing  one  year  after  the 
said  work  of  reconstruction  is  completed  and  accepted,  and 
binds  himself,  his  heirs  and  assigns  to  make  all  repairs  which 
may  from  any  imperfection  in  said  work  or  materials  or  from 
any  rotting,  crumbling  or  disintegration  of  the  materials, 
become  necessary  within  that  time  ;  and  the  party  of  the  first 
part  shall,  whenever  notified  by  the  street  commissioner  that 
repairs  are  required,  at  once  make  such  repairs  at  his  own 
expense,  and  if  they  are  not  made  within  the  proper  time,  the 
street  commissioner  shall  have  power  to  cause  such  repairs  to 
be  made,  and  the  cost  thereof  shall  be  paid  out  of  the  fund 
provided  for  the  payment  of  contracts  for  street  maintenance, 
and  the  amount  shall  be  deducted  from  any  money  then  clue 
under  the  contract,  or  which  may  thereafter  become  due.  At 
the  end  of  the  nine-year  period  the  street  commissioner  must 
determine  whether  or  not  the  street  is  in  good  order  at  grade 
and  surface,  and  the  principal  and  his  sureties  under  this  con- 


182  ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

tract  shall  not  be  discharged  from  liability  on  their  maintenance 
bond  hereunder  until  the  street  commissioner  shall  so  determine 
and  certify  thereto  in  writing  to  the  principal  under  this  con- 
tract. And  it  is  further  expressly  agreed,  that  if  at  any  time 
during  the  term  for  which  the  contract  for  the  maintenance  of 
the  above  street  is  in  force,  the  pavement  of  said  street,  or  any 
part  thereof,  has  deteriorated  to  such  an  extent  as  to  require, 
in  the  opinion  of  the  board  of  public  improvements,  reconstruc- 
tion, the  street  commissioner  shall,  with  the  approval  of  the 
board  of  public  improvements  and  of  the  mayor,  notify  the 
contractor  that  reconstruction  is  necessary,  and  the  contractor 
shall,  within  three  months  after  receiving  such  notice,  recon- 
struct the  whole  or  such  part  of  the  pavement  with  the  same 
kind  of  material  as  heretofore  applied,  or  with  some  other 
material  approved  by  the  board  of  public  improvements.  And 
if  .the  contractor  fails  to  reconstruct  the  street  within  three 
months  after  having  been  notified,  the  board  of  public 
improvements  may,  with  the  approval  of  the  mayor,  cancel  the 
contract  and  relet  the  work  of  reconstructing  the  pavement, 
and  that  the  cost  of  such  reconstruction  shall  be  paid  by  the 
city  and  the  amount  collected  by  suit  from  the  contractor  or  his 
sureties,  not  to  exceed  fifteen  dollars  per  square  of  pavement, 
included  in  the  contract. 

And  it  is  further  agreed  that  whenever  any  repairs  of  the 
street  are  made  necessary  from  the  construction  of  sewers,  the 
laying  of  pipes  or  telegraph  wires,  or  from  any  other  disturb- 
ance of  the  pavement  by  parties  acting  under  permits  issued  by 
the  city,  the  contractor  shall,  on  notification  from  the  street  com- 
missioner, immediately  make  all  necessary  repairs  in  conformity 
with  the  specifications  for  this  class  of  work.  The  cost  of  all 
such  repairs,  exclusive  of  trenching  and  back  filling,  which  shall 
be  done  by  the  parties  who  hold  the  permits,  and  in  the  same 
manner  as  now  required  by  existing  ordinances,  shall  be  paid 
for  at  the  full  contract  price  for  a  superficial  square  of  new 
pavement  out  of  the  fund  set  apart  for  the  payment  of  con- 
tracts for  the  maintenance  of  streets,  and  the  amount  shall  be 
certified  by  the  street  commissioner  to  the  auditor,  who  shall 
reimburse,  by  transfer,  the  aforesaid  fund  from  the  funds  of  the 
proper  department,  if  the  repairs  were  made  necessary  by  the 
construction  of  any  public  improvement;  and  out  of  the  funds 
to  be  deposited  by  persons  obtaining  permits  for  opening 
streets  before  such  permits  are  granted,  if  the  repairs  are  made 
necessary  by  work  done  under  such  permits.  And  it  is  agreed 
that  the  contractor  shall  have-  the  right  to  make  all  repairs 
which  become  necessary  by  the  construction  of  any  public 
improvement  or  work  done  by  private  parties  under  permits 
given  by  the  city.  St.  L. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOE  STREET  PAVEMENTS,  ETC.      183 

136.  Specification  for  Asphalt  Pavement.  The 
following  specification  for  asphalt  pavement  was  prepared  in 
1892,  by  Mr.  A.  P.  Boiler,  of  New  York  City,  for  such  a 
pavement  upon  the  new  Harlem  river  bridge  at  i55th  St.,  New 
York.  It  probably  embodies  the  latest  and  most  approved 
methods  of  making  such  a  pavement,  and  so  far  as  it  is  appli- 
cable to  ordinary  street  pavements,  it  might  be  followed  with 
advantage. 

The  sub-surface  must  then  be  brought  to  a  uniform  grade 
and  cross-section  not  to  exceed  a  crown  of  three  inches  in  width 
of  roadway  by  filling  all  depressions  with  a  fine  bituminous 
concrete  or  binder,  to  be  composed  of  clean,  broken  stone  not 
exceeding  one  inch  in  their  largest  dimensions,  thoroughly 
screened,  and  coal  tar  residuum,  commonly  known  as  No.  4 
paving  composition. 

If  required  by  the  department  of  public  parks,  clean,  sharp 
sand  may  replace  a  portion  of  the  broken  stone. 

The  stone  or  stone  and  sand  must  be  heated  by  passing 
through  revolving  heaters,  and  thoroughly  mixed  by  machinery 
with  the  paving  composition  in  the  proportion  of  one  (i)  gal- 
lon of  paving  composition  to  one  (i)  cubic  foot  of  stone. 

This  binder  must  be  hauled  to  the  work  and  spread 
with  hot  iron  rakes  in  all  holes  or  inequalities  and  depressions 
below  the  true  grade  of  the  pavement,  to  such  thickness  that 
after  being  thoroughly  compacted  by  tamping  and  hand  rolling 
the  surface  shall  have  a  uniform  grade  and  cross-section,  and 
the  thickness  of  the  binder  at  any  point  shall  be  not  less  than 
three  quarters  of  an  inch. 

The  upper  surface  shall  be  exactly  parallel  with  the  surface 
of  the  pavement  to  be  laid. 

Upon  this  foundation  must  be  laid  the  wearing  surface  or 
paving  proper,  the  basis  of  which  or  paving  cement  must  be 
pure  asphaltum,  unmixed  with  any  of  the  products  of  coal  tar. 

The  wearing  surface  must  be  composed  of: — 

1.  Refined  asphaltum. 

2.  Heavy  petroleum  oil. 

3.  Fine  sand,  containing  not  more  than  one  per   centum 
of  hydro-silicate  of  alumina. 

4.  Fine  powder  of  carbonate  of  lime. 

The  asphaltum  must  be  specially  refined  and  brought  to  a 
uniform  standard  of  purity  and  gravity  of  a  quality  to  be 
approved  by  the  engineer. 

The  heavy  petroleum  oil  must  be  freed  from  all  impurities 
and  brought  to  a  specific  gravity  of  from  eighteen  to  twenty 


184  ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

two  degrees  Beaume,  and  a  fire  test  of  two  hundred  and  fifty 
degrees  Fahrenheit. 

From  these  two  hydro-carbons  shall  be  manufactured  an 
asphaltic  cement  which  shall  have  a  fire  test  of  two  hundred 
and  fifty  degrees  Fahrenheit,  and  at  a  temperature  of  sixty 
degrees  Fahrenheit  shall  have  a  specific  gravity  of  1.19,  said 
cement  to  be  composed  of  one  hundred  parts  of  pure  asphalt 
and  from  fifteen  to  twenty  parts  of  heavy  petroleum  oil. 

The  asphaltic  cement  being  made  in  the  manner  above 
described,  the  pavement  mixture  will  be  formed  of  the  follow- 
ing materials,  and  in  the  proportions  stated : 

Asphaltic  cement from  12  to  15 

Sand from  83  to  70 

Pulverized  carbonate  of  lime from    5  to  15 

The  sand  and  asphaltic  cement  are  to  be  heated  separately 
to  about  three  hundred  degrees  Fahrenheit.  The  pulverized 
carbonate  of  lime,  while  cold,  shall  be  mixed  with  the  hot  sand 
in  the  required  proportions,  and  then  mixed  with  the  asphaltic 
cement  at  the  required  temperature,  and  in  the  proper  propor- 
tion, in  a  suitable  apparatus,  which  will  effect  a  perfect  mixture. 

The  pavement  mixture  prepared  in  the  manner  thus  indi- 
cated must  be  brought  to  the  ground  in  carts  at  a  temperature 
of  about  two  hundred  and  fifty  degrees  Fahrenheit,  and  if  the 
temperature  of  the  air  is  less  than  fifty  degrees,  iron  carts,  with 
heating  apparatus,  must  be  used  in  order  to  maintain  the  proper 
temperature  of  the  mixture ;  it  shall  then  be  carefully  spread 
by  means  of  hot  iron  rakes,  in  such  manner  as  to  give  a  uni- 
form and  regular  grade,  and  to  such  depth  that  after  having 
received  its  ultimate  compression,  it  will  have  a  thickness  of 
two  inches  at  crown  of  roadway,  tapering  off,  if  required,  to 
about  one  inch  at  gutters.  The  surface  shall  then  be  com- 
pressed by  hand  rollers,  after  which  a  small  amount  of 
hydraulic  cement  shall  be  swept  over  it,  and  it  shall  then  be 
thoroughly  compressed  by  a  steam  roller  weighing  not  less  than 
two  hundred  and  fifty  pounds  to  the  inch  run  ;  the  rolling  to  be 
continued  for  not  less  than  five  hours  for  every  one  thousand 
yards  of  surface. 

The  powdered  carbonate  of  lime  must  be  of  such  degree  of 
fineness  that  five  to  fifteen  per  centum  by  weight  of  the  entire 
mixture  for  the  pavement  shall  be  oi  an  impalpable  powder  of 
limestone,  and  the  whole  of  it  shall  pass  a  No.  26  screen.  The 
sand  must  be  of  silch  size  that  none  of  it  shall  pass  a  No.  So 
screen,  and  the  whole  of  it  must  pass  a  No.  10  screen. 

In  order  to  make  the  gutters,  which  are  consolidated  but 
little  by  traffic,  entirely  impervious  to  water,  a  width  of  twelve 
inches  next  the  curb  must  be  coated  with  hot,  pure  asphalt 
and  smoothed  with  hot  smoothing  irons  in  order  to  saturate  the 
pavement  to  a  certain  depth  with  an  excess  of  asphalt. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR  STREET  PAVEMENTS,  ETC.       185 

If  rock  asphalt  be  used,  it  must  be  natural  bituminous 
limestone  rock:  (i)  from  the  Sicilian  mines  at  Ragusa,  equal 
in  quality  and  composition  to  that  mined  by  the  United  Lim- 
mer  and  Ver  Wohle  Rock  Asphalte  Company,  Limited;  (2) 
from  the  Swiss  mines  at  Val  de  Travers,  equal  in  quality  and 
composition  to  that  mined  by  the  Neuchatel  Rock  and  Asphalte 
Company,  Limited,  or  (3)  from  the  French  mines  at  Seyssel, 
equal  in  quality  and  composition  to  that  mined  by  the  Com- 
pagnie  Generale  des  Asphaltes  de  France,  and  it  shall  be  pre- 
pared and  laid  as  follows: 

(i)  The  lumps  of  rock  shall  be  finely  crushed  and  pul- 
verized, the  powder  shall  then  be  passed  through  a  fine  sieve. 
Nothing  whatever  shall  be  added  to  or  taken  from  the  powder 
obtained  by  grinding  the  bituminous  rock.  The  povvder  shall 
contain  from  nine  to  twelve  per  cent,  natural  bitumen,  eighty 
eight  to  ninety  one  per  cent,  pure  carbonate  of  lime,  and  must 
be  free  from  quartz,  sulphates,  iron  pyrites,  or  aluminum.  (2) 
This  povvder  shall  be  heated  in  a  suitable  apparatus  to  two 
hundred  or  two  hundred  and  fifty  degrees  Fahrenheit,  and 
must  be  brought  to  the  ground  at  such  temperature  in  carts 
made  for  the  purpose,  and  then  carefully  spread  on  the  foun- 
dation previously  prepared,  to  such  depth  that,  after  having 
received  its  ultimate  compression,  it  will  have  a  thickness  of 
two  inches.  (3)  it  shall  be  skillfully  compressed  by  heated 
rammers  and  rolled  until  it  shall  have  the  required  thickness 
of  two  inches.  (4)  The  surface  to  be  rendered  perfectly  even 
by  heated  smoothers,  and  to  be  rolled  with  a  steam  roller 
weighing  not  less  than  two  hundred  and  fifty  pounds  to  the 
inch  run,  the  rolling  to  continue  for  not  less  than  five  hours  for 
each  one  thousand  yards  of  surface.  A.  P.  B. 

137.  Specification  for  Granite  Pavement.  The  fol- 
lowing specification  for  granite  pavement  is  that  used  in  the  city 
of  Milwaukee  "so  far  as  the  granite  paving  is  concerned.  These 
granite  blocks  are  laid  upon  a  concrete  foundation  six  inches 
thick,  and  this  latter  upon  a  carefully  prepared  surface  which 
has  been  thoroughly  rolled  with  a  heavy  roller.  The  concrete 
is  made  of  natural  cement  one  part,  sand  two  parts,  and  broken 
stone  five  parts.  On  this  is  spread  a  sand  cushion  two  inches 
thick  when  compacted,  on  which  the  granite  blocks  are  laid. 

Granite  Block  Paving.  The  blocks  must  consist  of  a  hard 
granite  uniform  in  grain  and  texture,  without  lamination  or 
stratification  and  free  from  excess  of  mica  or  feld>par.  Neither 
hard  basaltic  stone  that  will  take  a  smooth  polish  under  traffic, 


186  ENGINEEKING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

nor  soft  or  weather  worn  stones  nor  syenite  will  be  accepted. 
The  blocks  must  by  rectangular  in  form,  of  not  less  than  three 
(3)  nor  more  than  four  and  one  half  (4  y% )  inches  in  thick- 
ness, nor  less  than  six  (6)  or  more  than  seven  (7)  inches  in 
depth,  nor  less  than  eight  (S)  or  more  than  twelve  (12)  inches  in 
length,  and  so  split  and  dressed  with  fair  and  true  surfaces  on  top. 
bottom  and  ends  so  that  when  laid  close  together  the  end  joints 
will  fit  close  together,  and  the  side  joints  will  not  exceed  three 
fourths  (24)  inch  in  width.  The  blocks  will  be  imbedded  in 
the  sand  bed  and  laid  at  right  angles  to  the  line  of  the  street, 
except  at  street  and  alley  intersections,  where  the  same  will  be 
laid  at  an  angle  of  about  45  degrees  with  the  line  of  the  street. 
The  stone  will  be  laid  close  together  with  the  top  surface 
smoothly  conforming  to  the  crowrn  of  the  street.  Each  course 
is  to  be  of  uniform  width,  with  each  longitudinal  joint  broken 
by  a  lap  of  not  less  than  tw7o  inches.  The  blocks  are  to  be 
immediately  covered  with  sufficient,  clean,  fine,  hot,  screened 
gravel  to  fill  the  joints,  to  not  more  than  3  J/£  inches  from  the 
top  after  which  the  blocks  will  be  tamped  with  a  heavy  paver's 
ram  to  a  firm,  unyielding  and  uniform  smooth  surface.  The 
joints  will  then  be  filled  flush  with  top  of  pavement  with  a  hot 
paving  cement  obtained  by  direct  distillation  of  coal  tar,  imme- 
diately after  which  fine,  dry,  hot  gravel  will  be  run  into  the 
joints.  Not  less  than  three  (3)  gallons  of  paving  cement  shall 
be  used  to  each  square  pard  of  pavement.*  M. 

138.  Specification  for  Granitoid  Sidewalks.  Side- 
walks made  after  the  following  specifications  are  now  exclusively 
used  in  St.  Louis,  and  have  been  in  use  in  that  city  for  many 
years.  Where  granite  can  be  obtained  at  a  reasonable  price,  it 
is  thought  this  composition  is  more  durable  and  satisfactory  for 
sidewalks  than  any  other  material  or  mixture  which  has  ever 
been  used.  The  making  of  these  sidewalks  has  grown  to  be  a 
very  large  industry  in  St.  Louis  and  the  price  has  been  gradu- 
ally reduced  because  of  the  great  amount  of  this  kind  of  work 
done,  until  in  1895,  the  total  cost  of  removing  old  pavement, 
regrading,  laying  the  foundation  and  pavement  as  here  described 
in  the  most  approved  manner,  and  strictly  in  accordance  with 
this  specification  is  from  eighteen  to  twenty  cents  per  square 
foot  for  the  "ordinary  single  flagging." 

*This  treatment  of  the  joints  is  especially  satisfactory. — AUTHOR. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOE, STREET  PAVEMENTS,  ETC.      187 

The  sidewalks  shall  be  of  three  separate  and  distinct  thick- 
ness and  kinds,  and  shall  be  classified  as  follows:  "ORDINARY 
SINGLE  FLAGGING,"  "EXTRA  DOUBLE  THICK  FLAGGING,"  and 
"DRIVEWAY  OR  ENTRANCE  FLAGGING,"  and  shall  be  laid  in 
the  different  localities  within  the  above  described  limits  at  the 
discretion  of  the  street  commissioner,  who  shall  determine  which 
of  the  above  named  kinds  shall  be  laid. 

Preparation  of  Bed.  The  sidewalks  shall  be  excavated 
and  shaped  to  the  proper  depth  and  grade  as  directed  by  the 
street  commissioner,  and  all  the  refuse  material  therefrom  shall 
belong  to  the  contractor  and  shall  be  promptly  removed  from 
the  line  of  work. 

Ordinary  Single  Flagging.  After  the  shaping  is  done  a 
foundation  of  cinders  not  less  than  eight  (8)  inches  thick  shall 
be  placed  upon  the  subgrade,  which  shall  be  well  consolidated 
by  ramming  to  an  even  surface,  and  which  shall  be  moistened 
just  before  the  concrete  is  placed  thereon. 

After  the  sub-foundation  has  been  finished  the  artificial 
stone  flagging  shall  be  laid  in  a  good  workmanlike  manner. 

The  same  to  consist  of  two  parts:  ist.  A  bottom  course 
to  be  three  and  one  half  (3^2)  inches  in  depth.  2d.  A  finish- 
ing or  wearing  course,  to  be  one  half  (^2)  inch  in  depth. 

The  bottom  course  shall  be  composed  of  crushed  granite 
and  the  best  Portland  cement,  equal  to  the  Dyckerhoff  brand, 
and  capable  of  withstanding  a  tensile  strain  of  400  pounds  to 
the  square  inc%h  after  having  been  three  hours  in  air  and  seven 
days  in  wrater,  and  shall  be  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  part 
cement  to  three  parts  of  crushed  granite. 

The  crushed  granite  shall  consist  of  irregular,  sharp-edged 
pieces,  so  broken  that  each  piece  will  pass  through  a  three 
fourths  (24)  of  an  inch  ring  in  all  its  diameters,  and  which 
shall  be  entirely  free  from  dust.or  dirt. 

The  crushed  granite  and  the  cement  in  the  above  mentioned 
proportions  shall  first  be  mixed  dry,  then  sufficient  clean  water 
shall  be  slowly  added  by  sprinkling,  while  the  material  is  con- 
stantly and  carefully  stirred  and  worked  up,  and  said  stirring 
and  mixing  shall  be  continued  until  the  whole  is  thoroughly 
mixed. 

This  mass  shall  be  spread  upon  the  sub-foundation  and 
shall  be  rammed  until  all  the  interstices  are  thoroughly  filled 
with  cement. 

Particular  care  must  be  taken  that  the  bottom  course  is  well 
rammed  and  consolidated  along  the  outer  edges. 

After  the  bottom  course  is  completed,  the  finishing  or 
wearing  course  shall  be  added.  This  course  to  consist  of  a 
stiff  mortar  composed  of  equal  parts  of  Portland  cement  and 
the  sharp  screenings  of  the  crushed  granite,  free  from  loamy  or 
earthy  substances,  and  to  be  laid  to  a  depth  of  one  half 


188  ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

of  an  inch  and  to  be  carefully  smoothed  to  an  even  surface, 
which,  after  the  first  setting  takes  place,  must  not  be  disturbed 
by  additional  rubbing. 

When  the  pavement  is  completed  it  must  be  covered  for 
three  days  and 'be  kept  moist  by  sprinkling. 

Extra  Double  Thick  Flagging.  After  the  grading  and 
shaping  is  done,  a  foundation  of  cinders  not  less  than  six  (6) 
inches  thick  shall  be  placed  upon  the  subgrade,  which  shall  be 
well  consolidated  by  ramming  to  an  even  surface  and  which 
shall  be  moistened  just  before  the  concrete  is  placed  thereon. 
After  the  sub-foundation  has  been  finished  the  artificial  stone 
flagging  shall  be  laid  in  a  good,  workmanlike  manner. 

The  same  to  consist  of  two  parts :  ist.  A  bottom  course 
to  be  five  (5)  inches  in  depth.  2d.  A  finishing  or  wearing  course 
to  be  one  (i)  inch  in  depth. 

The  bottom  course  shall  be  composed  of  crushed  granite 
and  the  best  Portland  cement  equal  to  the  Dyckerhoff  brand,  and 
capable  of  withstanding  a  tensile  strain  of  400  pounds  to  the 
square  inch  after  having  been  three  hours  in  air  and  seven  days 
in  water,  and  shall  be  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  part  of 
cement  to  three  parts  of  crushed  granite. 

The  crushed  granite  shall  consist  of  irregular,  sharp-edged 
pieces,  so  broken  that  each  piece  will  pass  through  a  three 
fourths  (2O  of  an  inch  ring  in  all  its  diameters,  and  which 
shall  be  entirely  free  from  dust  or  dirt. 

The  crushed  granite  and  the  cement  in  the  above  mentioned 
proportions  shall  first  be  mixed  dry,  then  sufficient  clean  water 
shall  be  slowly  added  by  sprinkling,  while  the  material  is  con- 
stantly and  carefully  stirred  and  worked  up,  and  said  stirring 
and  mixing  shall  be  continued  until  the  whole  is  thoroughly 
mixed. 

This  mass  shall  be  spread  upon  the  sub-foundation  and  shall 
be  rammed  until  all  the  interstices  are  thoroughly  filled  with 
cement. 

Particular  care  must  be  taken  that  the  bottom  course  is  well 
rammed  and  consolidated  along  the  outer  edges. 

After  the  bottom  course  is  completed  the  finishing  or  wear- 
ing course  shall  be  added.  This  course  to  consist  of  a  stiff 
mortar  composed  of  equal  parts  of  Portland  cement  and  the 
sharp  screenings  of  the  crushed  granite,  free  from  loamy  or 
earthy  substances,  and  to  be  laid  to  a  depth  of  one  (i)  inch  and 
to  be  carefully  smoothed-to  an  even  surface,  which,  after  the 
first  setting  takes  place,  must  not  be  disturbed  by  additional 
rubbing. 

When  the  pavement  is  completed  it  must  be  covered  for 
three  days  and  be  kept  moist  by  sprinkling. 

Drive-way  or  Entrance  Flagging. — After  the  grading  and 
shaping  rs  done,  a  foundation  of  crushed  limestone  and  hydraulic 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR  STREET  PAVEMENTS,  ETC. 

cement  mortar  shall  be  laid  to  a  depth  of  six  (6)  inches  on  the 
subgrade.  The  stone  used  in  this  concrete  shall  be  broken  so 
as  to  pa^s  through  a  two  (2)  inch  ring  in  its  largest  dimensions. 
The  stone  shall  be  cleaned  from  all  dust  and  dirt%and  thoroughly 
wetted  and  then  mixed  with  mortar,  the  general  proportion 
being:  One  part  of  cement,  two  parts  of  sand,  and  five  parts 
of  stone.  It  shall  be  laid  quickly  and  then  rammed  until  the 
mortar  flushes  to  the  surface.  No  walking  or  driving  over  it 
shall  be  permitted  when  it  is  setting,  and  it  shall  be  allowed  to 
set  for  at  least  twelve  hours,  and  such  additional  length  of  time 
as  may  be  directed  by  the  street  commissioner  or  by  his  duly 
authorized  agents,  before  the  pavement  is  put  down. 

After  the  subfoundation  has  been  finished,  the  artificial 
stone  flagging  shall  be  laid  in  a  good,  workmanlike  manner. 
The  same  to  consist  of  two  parts:  ist.  A  bottom  course  to 
be  five  (5)  inches  in  depth.  2d.  A  finishing  or  wearing  course 
to  be  one  (i)  inch  in  depth. 

The  bottom  course  shall  be  composed  of  crushed  granite 
and  the  best  Portland  cement,  equal  to  the  Dyckerhoff  brand, 
and  capable  of  withstanding  a  tensile  strain  of  400  pounds  to 
the  square  inch  after  having  been  three  hours  in  air  and  seven 
days  in  water,  and  shall  be  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  part 
cement  and  three  parts  of  crushed  granite. 

The  crushed  granite  shall  consist  of  irregular,  sharp-edged 
pieces,  so  broken  that  each  piece  will  pass  through  a  three 
fourths  (^O  of  an  inch  ring  in  all  its  diameters,  and  which  shall 
be  entirely  free  from  dust  or  dirt. 

The  crushed  granite  and  the  cement  in  the  above  men- 
tioned proportions  shall  first  be  mixed  dry,  then  sufficient  clean 
water  shaU  be  slowly  added  by  sprinkling,  while  the  material 
is  constantly  are  carefully  stirred  and  wrorked  up,  and  said  stir- 
ring and  mixing  shall  be  continued  until  the  whole  is  thorough- 
ly mixed. 

This  mass  shall  be  spread  upon  the  subfoundation  and 
shall  be  rammed  until  all  the  interstices  are  thoroughly  filled 
with  cement. 

Particular  care  must  be  taken  that  the  bottom  course  is 
well  rammed  and  consolidated  along  the  outer  edges. 

After  the  bottom  course  is  completed,  the  finishing  or 
wearing  course  shall  be  added.  This  course  to  consist  of  a 
stiff  mortar  composed  of  equal  parts  of  Portland  cement  and 
the  sharp  screenings  of  the  crushed  granite,  free  from  loamy  or 
earthy  substances,  and  to  be  laid  to  a  depth  of  one  (i)  inch 
and  to  be  carefully  smoothed  to  an  even  surface,  which,  after 
the  first  setting  takes  place,  must  not  be  disturbed  by  additional 
rubbing. 

When  the  pavement  is  completed,  it  must  be  covered  for 
three  days  and  be  kept  moist  by  sprinkling.  ST.  L. 


190  ENGINEEEING   SPECIFICATIONS. 


SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  SEWERS. 
139.    Specifications  for  Brick  and  Tile  Sewers. 

The  following  specifications  for  brick  and  tile  sewers  are  those 
used  in  the  city  of  St.  Louis,  so  far  as  they  relate  to  the  con- 
struction proper,  except  that  part  relating  to  the  use  of  cement, 
concrete,  and  rubble  masonry.  As  specifications  on  these  sub- 
jects are  given  elsewhere,  they  are  not  included  here: 

Excavation. — All  excavation  shall  be  done  by  open  cut 
from  the  surface,  except  where  tunneling  is  shown  on  the  plans 
or  is  expressly  permitted  or  directed  by  the  sewer  commissioner. 

Wherever  the  material  is  of  such  a  nature  5s  to  allow  it, 
the  bottom  of  the  excavation  up  to  the  greatest  horizontal 
diameter  of  the  sewer  shall  be  made  with  a  template  so  as  to 
conform  to  the  exact  shape  of  the  brickwork.  Above  this  line 
the  cut  may,  in  all  ordinary  cases,  be  carried  to  the  surface  at 
such  a  slope  as  the  contractor  may  desire,  but  it  will  be  calcu- 
lated with  a  slope  of  one  horizontal  to— — 

vertical,  whatever  may  be  the  actual  slope.  Should  the  con- 
tractor think  it  best  to  keep  the  sides  of  the  excavation  vertical 
by  bracing  or  otherwise,  it  is  expresslyunderstood  that  it  shall 
be  done  at  his  own  cost  and  risk. 

Rock  shall  be  excavated  so  as  to  conform  as  nearly  as  possi- 
ble to  the  lower  half  of  the  sewer,  and  all  irregularities  shall  be 
filled  with  masonry  or  concrete  so  as  to  make  a  smooth  bed  for 
the  brick  work.  The  amount  of  the  excavation  in  rock  cuts 
will  be  calculated  with  a  base  at  the  bottom  of  the  brickwork 
equal  to  the  greatest  horizontal  diameter  of  the  sewer,  and 
with  side  slopes  of  the  same  inclinations  as  in  other  excavations. 
All  the-  rock  taken  from  the  excaVations  shall  belong  to  the 
contractor  for  his  own  use. 

Wherever  the  excavation  can  not  be  adapted  to  the  shape 
of  the  brickwork,  it  shall  be  done  according  to  such  directions 
as  may  be  given  in  each  case. 

The  sides  of  the  excavation  shall,  whenever  it  may  be 
necessary,  be  supported  with  suitable  plank  and  shoring,  but  no 
allowance  will  be  made  therefor  unless  the  same  is  left  in  by 
express  orders  of  the  sewer  commissioner,  when  it  will  be 

paid  for  at • dollars  per  thousand  feet,  board 

measure.  In  all  other  cases  it  will  be  drawn  as  the  work 
progresses  and  not  paid  for  by  the  city. 

The  contractor  shall,  at  his  own  cost,  keep  the  trenches 
free  from  water  during  the  progress  of  the  work.  Excavated 
material  must  be  so  placed  as  not  to  interfere  with  travel  on 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR   SEWERS.  191 

the  street  or  to  incommode  occupants  of  adjoining  property. 
Trenches  shall  not  be  opened  more  than  200  feet  in  advance  of 
the  laying  of  the  sewer. 

Back  Filling. — Back  filling  shall  follow  close  after  the 
construction  of  the  sewer,  and  in  no  case  be  more  than  100  feet 
in  the  rear. 

The  filling  of  the  earth  around  and  on  top  of  the  sewers 
shall  be  done  with  the  utmost  care,  and  in  a  manner  to  obtain 
the  greatest  compactness  and  solidity  possible.  For  that  pur- 
pose the  earth  shall  be  laid  and  rammed  in  regular  layers  not 
more  than  nine  inches  thick  up  to  the  surface  of  the  street,  or 
thoroughly  soaked  with  water,  as  may  be  directed  by  the  sewer 
commissioner.*  The  macadamizing,  if  any  has  been  removed, 
shall  be  carefully  replaced  on  the  top  of  the  said  filling;  and 
when  paving  has  been  removed  it  shall  be  replaced  in  the  same 
manner  as  wh'en  originally  constructed,  and  the  street  or  alley 
left  in  as  good  condition  as  it  was  before.  If  any  new  mater- 
rials  are  needed  for  such  repairing,  they  shall  be  of  the  best 
quality,  and  shall  be  furnished  and  put  down  by  the  contractor 
at  his  own  cost. 

The  gutter  paving  in  front  of  and  adjoining  sewer  inlets 
shall  be  taken  up  and  replaced  in  proper  shape,  so  as  to  con- 
duct the  storm  water  into  the  sewer  inlets. 

All  work  of  restoring  the  surface  of  the  streets  and  alleys 
shall  be  done  to  the  satisfaction  of  the  street  commissioner,  or 
his  duly  authorized  agents,  immediately  after  the  sewer  is  laid. 
If  not  so  done  within  five  days  after  notice,  the  work  may  be 
done  by  the  street  commissioner,  and  the  cost  thereof  shall  be 
paid  by  the  contractor;  and  in  default  of  payment,  the  cost 
may  be  retained  by  the  city  of  St.  Louis,  out  of  any  money  that 
may  be  due  or  become  due  to  the  contractor  under  this  contract. 

Surplus  Earth. — All  surplus  earth  shall  be  hauled  away 
promptly  to  such  places,  within  a  distance  of  3,000  feet,  as  the 
sewer  commissioner  shall  designate,  and  be  spread  according 
to  his  directions  ;  but  if  no  such  place  is  designated,  the  con- 
tractor shall  dispose  of  such  surplus  at  his  own  risk  and  expense. 
Xo  surplus  earth  shall  be  deposited  on  private  property,  if 
within  the  limit  just  named,  it  can  be  used  on  the  streets  or 
alleys  or  other  public  places.  But  if  no  such  use  can  be  found 
for  it,  it  may,  with  the  consent  of  the  sewer  commissioner,  be 
deposited  on  private  property ;  but  all  earth  so  deposited  with- 
out the  consent  of  said  commissioner,  shall  be  measured,  and 
the  amount  thereof  deducted  from  the  measurement  of  the 
excavation. 

The  price  paid  for  earth  and  rock  excavation  shall  cover 
the  whole  cost  of  excavating  the  trenches  and  refilling  the  same 

*  A  better  plan  is  to  thoroughly  ram  the  layers  in  nine-inch  courses  and  then  to 
also  thoroughly  soak  with  water  every  four  or  five  feet,  whenever  water  is  available. 


192  ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

with  earth,  restoring  the  street  and  hauling  away  the  surplus 
materials,  as  well  as  the  whole  cost  of  pumping,  bailing,  plank- 
ing, and  shoring,  excepting  such  planking  as  may  be  left  in  by 
express  orders  as  hereinbefore  specified. 

Bricks. — All  the  bricks  used  shall  be  of  uniform  texture, 
hard-burned  entirely  through,  free  from  lime  or  other  impuri- 
ties, that  will  affect  them  in  water,  and  shall  have  straight  edges 
and  square  angles.  Broken  bricks  must  not  be  brought  on  the 
ground,  and  such  as  are  broken  afterwards  in  handling  shall  be 
used  only  in  making  closures,  or  as  shall  be  otherwise  specially 
directed. 

The  bricks  are  to  be  culled  as  they  are  brought  on  the 
ground,  and  all  bricks  of  improper  quality  thrown  out  and 
removed  from  the  ground.  The  culling  to  be  done  at  the 
expense  of  the  contractor,  who  shall  furnish  the  inspector  with 
men  for  this  and  similar  purposes,  when  required. 

Brick  Masonry. — In  building  brick  masonry,  none  but 
careful  and  skillful  bricklayers  shall  be  employed. 

The  bricks  shall  be  clean  and  thoroughly  wet  just  before 
being  laid,  unless  otherwise  specially  directed.  Every  brick 
shall  be  laid  with  a  push  joint;  that  is,  by  placing  sufficient 
mortar  on  the  bed  and  forcing  the  brick  into  it  in  such  a  manner 
as  to  thoroughly  fill  every  joint,  whether  on  the  bottom,  side  or 
end  of  the  brick  with  mortar.  The  joints  shall  be  made  as 
nearly  as  possible  of  uniform  thickness,  not  exceeding  three 
eighths  of  an  inch,  and  in  the  inside  of  the  invert  or  lower  arch, 
they  shall  not  exceed  one  eighth  of  an  inch. 

The  bricks  in  each  course  shall  be  all  stretchers,  and  to 
break  joints  with  those  in  the  adjoining  courses.  The  bricks  of 
the  inside  course  shall  be  laid  to  a  line  and  to  the  true  cylin- 
drical or  other  form  given  for  each  case.  The  inside  course 
shall  also  be  made  of  the  smoothest  and  hardest  bricks,  care- 
fully selected  for  this  purpose. 

The  upper  arch  shall  be  built  on  strongly  made  centers, 
which  shall  be  drawn  with  great  care,  so  as  not  to  disturb  the 
brickwork.  The  crown  of  the  arch  shall  be  properly  keyed 
with  stretchers,  and  all  the  joints  be  well  filled  with  the  mortar. 
The  exterior  surface  of  the  upper  arch  shall  be  covered  with  a 
coating  of  mortar,  not  less  than  three  eighths  (^)  of  an  inch 
thick.  , 

The  mortar  joints  on  the  inside  of  the  sewer  below  the 
center  line  shall  be  carefully  struck  when  laid,  and  those  above 
be  scraped  smooth  with  the  brickwork  immediately  after  the 
centers  are  drawn,  and  the  mortar  scraped  off  and  entirely 
removed  from  the  sewer,  which  is  to  be  left  perfectly  clean 
throughout. 

All  unfinished  brickwork  must  be  racked  back  in  courses, 
except  when  otherwise  specially  directed  or  permitted,  and 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR    SEWEKS.  193 

when  new  work  is  to  be  joined  to 'it,  the  surface  of  the  bricks 
must  be  cleaned  and  moistened. 

Openings  for  branch  sewers  shall  be  made  and  junction 
pieces  inserted  in  the  main  sewers  in  such  manner  and  at  such 
places  as  may  be  directed.  Every  junction  piece  shall  be 
closed  with  a  cover  of  earthenware,  or  with  bricks  and  cement. 

All  brickwork  will  be  measured  and  paid  for  by  the  cubic 
yard  of  solid  wall. 

TUNNELING. 

In  tunneling,  the  excavation  shall  be  made  so  as  to  con- 
form neatly  to  the  regular  section  of  the  sewer,  and  nothing 
will  be  allowed  for  any  excavation  beyond  this.  All  holes  or 
irregularities  outside  of  the  regular  section  must  be  filled  up 
solid  with  bricks  and  mortar,  but  no  extra  allowance  will  be 
made  therefor. 

All  timbers  used  in  sustaining  the  excavation  must  be 
removed  as  the  brickwork  progresses. 

Points,  by  which  to  get  the  proper  line  of  the  sewer,  will 
be  given  from  time  to  time  as  may  be  needed,  and  from  these 
the  contractor  will  be  required  to  continue  the  line  of  the  exca- 
vation at  his  own  risk  of  its  accuracy,  and  to  correct  at  once 
any  errors  of  alignment  that  may  be  discovered  before  the 
brickwork  is  finished. 

In  tunnels,  the  quantities  paid  for  will  be  the  earth  or  rock 
excavated  in  the  regular  section  of  the  sewer,  and  the  brick  or 
stone  masonry  required  for  this  section,  together  with  any  foun- 
dation work  that  may  have  been  expressly  ordered,  and  the 
amount  paid  for  these  items  shall  be  in  full  for  furnishing  all 
materials,  and  finishing  the  sewer;  the  cost  of  sinking  shafts, 
pumping  water,  shoring,  restoring  falls  and  all  accessory  works 
of  every  kind  being  borne  wholly  by  the  contractor.  Those 
parts  only  of  the  sewer  will  be  paid  for  as  tunnels,  which  are 
so  marked  on  the  plans  exhibited  at  the  time  of  the  letting;  all 
the  rest  will  be  paid  for  as  open  cut,  regardless  of  the  manner 
in  which  the  work  is  actually  done. 

PIPE  SEWERS. 

All  pipe  sewers  shall  be  made  of  the  best  quality  of  vitri- 
fied clay  pipe  with  smooth  interior  surface.  Each  piece  shall 
be  straight  or  evenly  curved,  as  maybe  required,  and  in  section 
shall 'not  vary  more  than  half  an  inch  from  a  true  circle.  The 
thickness  of  six-inch  pipes  shall  not  be  less  than  three  quarters 
of  an  inch ;  of  twelve-inch  pipes,  not  less  than  one  and  one 
eighth  inches ;  of  fifteen-inch  pipes,  not  less  than  one  and  one 
quarter  inches ;  and  of  eighteen-inch  pipes,  not  less  than 
one  and  one  half  inches.  Junction  pieces,  for  use  in  brick 
13 


194  ENGINEEKING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

sewers,  shall  be  smoothly  beveled  off  to  an  angle  of  forty-five 
degrees,  and  be  not  less  than  two  feet  long,  exclusive  of  the 
socket.  For  pipe  sewers  the  junction  piece  shall  be  a  part 
of  the  main  pipe,  and  no  right  angle  junction  shall  ever  be 
used. 

So  far  as  the  specifications  for  the  excavation  of  trenches, 
shoring  and  pumping,  preparation  of  foundations,  backfilling 
and  restoring  the  street  surface,  already  given  for  brick  sewers, 
can  be  made  to  apply  to  the  construction  of  pipe  sewers,  they 
shall  be  followed. 

Each  pipe  is  to  be  laid  on  a  firm  bed  and  in  perfect  con- 
formity with  the  lines  and  levels  given.  The  bottom  of  the 
trench  must  be  shaped  so  as  to  fit  the  lower  half  of  the  pipe  as 
nearly  as  possible,  with  places  cut  at  the  joints  for  the  sockets 
to  rest  in,  so  that  the  pipe  shall  have  a  uniform  bearing  on  the 
ground  from  end  to  en4d. 

The  pipes  shall  be  joined  by  filling  the  socket  with  a  mortar 
of  pure  cement  without  sand,  with  only  water  enough  to  give  it 
a  proper  consistency.  Great  care  must  be  taken  to  make  the 
joint  throughout  the  lower  three  fourths  of  the  pipe  perfectly 
water  tight.  The  upper  one  fourth  of  joint,  when  so  directed, 
shall  be  left  open. 

The  interior  of  the  pipes  shall  be  carefully  cleaned  from 
all  dirt,  cement  and  superfluous  material  of  every  description, 
and  a  wad  made  of  a  sack  filled  with  hay,  large  enough  to  fill 
the  pipe  and  attached  to  a  rod  or  cord,  shall,  at  all  times  be 
kept  in  the  pipe  and  drawn  forward  as  the  swork  proceed,  care 
being  taken  not  to  loosen  the  joints. 

After  the  pipes  are  properly  laid  and  joined,  any  space 
between  them  and  the  sides  of  the  excavation  must  be  filled  with 
sand,  either  wrashed  in  or  well  rammed,  up  to  the  middle  of  the 
pipe.  From  this  point  for  at  least  twelve  inches  above  the  top 
of  the  pipe,  the  earth  shall  be  filled  in  so  as  not  to  disturb  the 
pipes,  and  thoroughly  rammed  ;  after  which,  up  to  the  surface, 
it  may  be  either  rammed  in  layers  or  thoroughly  soaked  with 
water,  as  may  be  directed  by  the  sewer  commissioner,  so  that 
the  least  possible  settling  will  take  place  after  the  work  is  com- 
pleted. 

Pipe  sewers  will  be  paid  for  by  the  linear  foot  of  finished 
work,  the  price  so  paid  to  be  in  full  payment  for  furnishing  and 
laying  the  pipe,  including  the  earth  excavation,  shoring  and 
pumping,  backfilling,  restoring  the  street  surface,  hauling  away 
surplus  material,  and  all  other  work  and  material  required  by 
the  specifications  or  necessary  to  give  a  finished  result. 

Where    rock    is    encountered    in    pipe    sewers,   such    rock 

excavation  shall  be  paid  for  at  the  price  named  herein 

the  amount  to  be  estimated  with 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOE    SEWERS.  195 

a  base  of  six  inches  more   than  the  inside  diameter  of  the  pipe 
and  the  side  slope  of  one  horizontal  to  eight  vertical. 

140.  Specification  for  Sewer  Pipe.  The  follow- 
ing specification  for  sewer  pipe  and  specials  is  probably  the 
most  carefully  worked  out  of  any  found  in  current  American 
practice.  While  these  specifications  are  very  full  and  complete 
in  many  details  which  are  usually  overlooked,  they  are  not 
unreasonably  severe.  They  simply  describe  clearly  what  kinds 
of  faults  will  serve  as  cause  for  rejection,  and  are  as  valuable 
to  the  manufacturer  of  the  pipe  in  enabling  him  to  select  those 
specimens  which  he  feels  will  be  accepted,  as  to  the  inspector 
himself,  who  is  called  upon  to  accept  or  reject  the  material 
when  supplied  upon  the  ground.  This  specification,  therefore, 
has  the  great  merit  of  extreme  definiteness  of  meaning,  which 
is  the  most  vital  and  necessary  quality  of  all  specifications. 
Thev  were  prepared  by  an  engineer  who  knew  from  experience 
exactly  what  could  be  furnished  by  the  best  sewer  pipe  manu- 
facturers without  greatly  increasing  the  cost. 

Sewer  Pipe  and  Specials — Pipe  sewers  are  composed  of 
straight  sections  which  are  herein  termed  tipipe1"  and  of 
branches,  bends,  reducers,  etc.,  which  will  here  be  called 
"specials"  or  "special  pieces." 

The  main  sewer,  as  well  as  all  surface  and  lot  lateral 
sewers,  shall  be  constructed  of  the  best  quality  of  salt-glazed, 
vitrified  stoneware  sewer  pipe,  and  all  special  pieces  that  may 
be  required  in  the  work  shall  be  of  the  same  description  and 
quality. 

The  pipes  and  specials  must  be  carefully  selected  and 
examined  by  the  contractor  before  or  while  being  delivered 
upon  the  street,  and  all  such  material  which  may  be  used  in 
the  work  must  conform  to  the  following  requirements  and  con- 
ditions: 

All  hubs  or  sockets  must  be  of  sufficient  diameter  to  receive 
their  full  depth  the  spigot  end  of  the  next  following  pipe  or 
special  without  chipping  whatever  of  either,  and  also  to  leave  a 
space  of  not  less  than  1-8  inch  in  width  all  around  for  the 
cement  mortar  joint.  Pipes  and  specials  w*hich  can  not  be  thus 
freely  fitted  into  each  other  shall  be  rejected. 

In  the  case  of  pipes  and  specials  of  12  inches  and  upward 
in  diameter,  at  least  40  per  cent,  of  all  such  that  will  be  used 


196  ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

in  the  work  must  be  truly  circular  or  substantially  circular  in 
cross-section,  and  in  the  case  of  pipes  and  specials  less  than  12 
inches  in  diameter,  at  least  60  per  cent,  of  the  whole  number 
required  must  be  truly  circular  or  substantially  circular  in  cross- 
section.  Of  the  remainder,  in  each  case,  the  allowable  diver- 
gence from  a  truly  circular  cross-section  shall  never  exceed  the 
following  limits :  a.  For  an  elliptical  cross-section,  the  great- 
est internal  diameter  must  not  be  more  than  from  6  to  7  per 
cent,  longer  than  the  least  internal  diameter  in  the  same  cross- 
section,  b.  For  an  oval  or  egg-shaped  cross-section,  the  same 
rule  as  for  eliptical  cross-sections  shall  apply,  c.  Pipes  and 
specials  having  cross-sections  which  exhibit  angles,  sharp 
curves  or  flat  places  of  appreciable  magnitude  in  the  circumfer- 
ence, will  be  rejected. 

A  single  fire-crack,  which  extends  through  the  entire 
thickness  of  a  pipe  or  special,  must  not  be  over  two  inches 
long  at  the  spigot  end,  nor  more  than  one  inch  long  at  the  hub 
or  socket  end,  measured  in  the  latter  case  from  the  bottom,  or 
shoulder,  of  said  hub  or  socket.  Two  or  more  such  fire-cracks, 
however,  at  either  end  of  said  pipe  or  special  will  cause  the 
same  to  be  rejected. 

A  single  fire- crack,  which  extends  through  only  two  thirds 
of  the  thickness  of  a  pipe  or  special,  must  not  be  over  four 
inches  long  at  either  end  thereof,  measured  in  the  direction  of 
its  length.  Two  or  more  such  fire-cracks,  however,  at  either 
end  of  said  pipe  or  special  will  cause  the  same  to  be  rejected. 

A  single  fire-crack,  which  extends  through  only  one  half 
of  this  thickness  of  a  pipe  or  special,  must  not  be  over  six 
inches  long  at  either  end  thereof,  measured  in  the  direction  of 
its  length.  Two  or  more  such  fire-cracks,  however,  at  either 
end  of  said  pipes  or  special  will  cause  the  same  to  be  rejected. 

A  single  fire-crack,  which  extends  through  less  than  one 
half  of  the  thickness  of  a  pipe  or  special,  must  not  be  over 
eight  inches  long,  measured  in  the  direction  of  the  length  of 
such  pipe.  Two  or  more  such  fire-cracks,  however,  anywhere 
in  the  pipe  will  cause  the  same  to  be  rejected. 

A  transverse  fire-crack  in  a  pipe  or  special  must  not  be 
longer  than  one  sixth  of  the  circumference  of  such  pipe,  nor 
shall  its  depth  be  greater  than  one  third  of  the  thickness 
thereof.  Two  or  more  such  fire-cracks  will  be  cause  for 
rejection. 

No  fire-cracks  of  any  description  shall,  however,  be  more 
than  one  eighth  inch  wTide  at  its  widest  point. 

No  combination  of  the  foregoing  six  limitations  will  be 
allowed,  except  with  the  express  consent  of  the  executive  board 
and  the  city  surveyor,  as  the  intent  and  meaning  of  these 
restrictions  or  limitations  is  to  insure  the  furnishing  of  the  best 
marketable  quality  of  pipe  and  specials  by  the  contractor.  In 


SPECIFICATIONS  FOK   SEWER   PIPE.  197 

general,  any  pipe  or  special  which  exhibits  more  than  one  fire- 
crack  of  the  magnitudes  above  mentioned  should  be  rejected  at 
once  by  the  inspector  in  charge  of  the  work  of  laying  the  pipes, 
unless  there  be  time  to  make  a  thorough  aud  minute  examina- 
tion of  the  other  fire-cracks  which  it  may  display,  and  to 
become  thereby  convinced  that  they  are  of  trifling  significance. 

Any  pipe  or  special  which  is  found  to  be  cracked  through 
its  whole  thickness  from  any  other  cause  except  the  process  of 
burning  in  the  kiln,  shall  be  rejected  at  once,  regardless  of  the 
extent  of  such  crack.  This  refers  particularly  to  damage  done 
by  transportation,  by  cooling  or  by  frost. 

Irregular  lumps  or  unbroken  blisters  on  the  interior  surface 
of  a  pipe  or  special  of  sufficient  size  and  number  to  form  an 
appreciable  obstruction  to  the  free  flow  of  the  sewage,  will  be 
cause  for  rejection.  A  few  small,  unbroken  blisters,  not 
exceeding  one  fourth  of  an  inch  in  height  and  one  or  two  inches 
in  diameter,  upon  the  inner  surface,  need  not  reject  a  pipe  or 
special.  If  there  is  a  broken  blister  or  a  flake  on  the  interior 
of  a  pipe  or  special  which  is  thicker  than  one  sixth  of  the  nor- 
mal thickness  of  said  pipe  or  special,  and  whose  largest  diame- 
ter is  greater  than  one  twelfth  of  the  inner  circumferenc  of  said 
pipe  or  special,  the  latter  shall  be  rejected.  Furthermore,  if 
such  broken  blister  or  flake  is  as  large  or  smaller  than  just 
defined,  then,  unless  said  pipe  or  special  can  be  properly  fitted 
and  laid  so  as  to  bring  such  broken  blister  or  flake  on  the  top 
or  upper  side  of  the  sewer,  the  said  pipe  or  special  shall  also 
be  rejected. 

Irregular  lumps  and  small,  unbroken  blisters  on  the  out- 
side of  a  pipe  or  special  need  not  reject  it.  A  large  and 
broken  blister  or  a  flake  on  the  outside  of  a  pipe  or  special. 
which  is  thicker  than  one  sixth  of  the  normal  thickness  of  said 
pipe,  and  whose  largest  diameter  is  greater  than  from  one  ninth 
to  one  twelfth  of  the  outer  circumference  of  said  pipe,  will 
cause  the  same  to  be  rejected.  Should,  however,  the  broken 
blister  or  flake  be  within  the  limits  of  size  just  defined,  and 
should  the  pipe  or  special  admit  of  being  properly  laid  so  as  to 
bring  said  blister  or  flake  on  the  upper  part  of  the  sewer,  tiien 
said  pipe  or  special  may  be  accepted,  if  otherwise  sound  in  all 
respects. 

Any  pipe  or  special  which  betrays  in  any  manner  a  want 
of  thorough  vitrification  or  fusion,  or  the  use  of  improper 
materials  and  methods  in  its  manufacture,  shall  be  rejected. 
Attention  of  inspectors  is  particularly  called  to  the  character  of 
the  material  composing  the  interior  of  a  pipe  or  special  where 
the  same  is  exposed  by  the  breaking  of  a  blister,  the  removal 
of  a  flake,  or  the  face  of  the  spigot  end  of  such  pipe. 

All  pipe  and  specials  which  are  designed  to  be  straight 
shall  not  exhibit  any  material  deviation  from  a  straight  line. 


198  ENGINEEKING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

Special  curves  or  bends  shall  substantially  conform  to  the 
degree  of  curvature  and  general  dimensions  that  may  be 
required. 

If  a  piece  be  broken  out  of  the  rim  forming  the  hub  or 
socket  of  a  pipe  or  special  without  injuring  the  body  of  such 
pipe,  the  latter  shall  be  rejected  if  the  length  of  said  broken 
piece,  or  the  gap  left  thereby,  is  greater  than  one  tenth  of  the 
circumference  of  said  hub.  In  case  that  a  defect  of  this  nature, 
and  within  the  limits  just  defined,  occurs  in  a  pipe  or  special, 
the  latter  shall  also  be  rejected  unless  it  can  be  so  fitted  in  the 
sewer  as  to  bring  said  defect  on  the  upper  part  thereof. 

The  attention  of  the  inspector  in  charge  of  the  work  of 
laying  the  sewer  pipe  is  herewith  particularly  directed  to  the 
foregoing  requirements  as  to  the  quality  of  the  pipe  and  specials 
that  will  be  allowed  in  the  sewer,  and  in  all  cases  of  doubtful 
interpretation  of  said  requirements,  the  necessary  definitions 
will  be  given  by  the  city  surveyor  and  the  executive  board. 
Said  board  also  reserves  the  right  to  add  to  the  foregoing 
requirements,  at  any  time  daring  the  progress  of  the  work, 
such  further  restrictions  and  conditions  respecting  the  quality 
of  the  said  pipe  and  specials  as  it  may  deem  for  the  best 
interests  of  the  tax-payers,  in  order  to  secure  the  best  materials 
which  can  practically  be  obtained.  All  such  explanations  or 
definitions  of  said  requirements,  in  cases  of  doubtful  interpre- 
tation, together  with  all  said  further  restrictions  and  conditions 
relating  to  the  quality  of  said  pipe  and  specials,  shall  have  the 
same  force  as  though  a  part  of  this  specification,  and  the  con- 
tractor shall  be  required  to  comply  therewith  without  extra 
compensation  beyond  the  prices  bid  by  him  for  performing  the 
work.  E.  K. 

141.    Specification   for  Laying  Sewer  Pipe.    The 

following  specification  for  the  laying  of  sewer  pipe  and 
specials  has  all  the  merits  ascribed  to  the  specification  for 
sewer  pipe  as  given  in  the  previous  article,  and  has  been  pre- 
pared by  the  same  engineer.  For  the  purpose  of  removing 
any  cement  mortar  which  may  have  been  forced  through  the 
joints,  and  which  may,  when  hardened,  form  serious  obstruc- 
tions in  the  sewer,  probably  no  specification  will  insure  such 
excellent  results  as  that  given  in  the  St.  Louis  specifications 
for  pipe  sewers  in  Art.  139,  where  the  contractor  is  required 
to  provide  "A  wad  made  of  a  sack  filled  with  hay,  large 
enough  to  fill  the  pipe  and  attached  to  a  rod  or  cord,  which 


SPECIFICATIONS    FOE    SEWER    PIPE.  199 

shall  at  all  times  be  kept  in  the  pipe,  and  which  shall  be  drawn 
forward  as  the  work  proceeds,  care  being  taken  not  to  loosen 
the  joints."  It  is  an  easy  matter  for  the  inspector  to  examine  at 
any  time  to  see  whether  or  not  this  wad  is  being  drawn 
forward,  and  when  drawn  forward  it  must  of  necessity  remove 
any  protruding  fins  of  mortar,  and  leave  the  interior  smooth 
and  entirely  free  from  such  obstructions. 

LAYING  THE  SEWER  PIPE  AND  SPECIALS. — Previous 
to  laying  the  pipe  and  specials  which  have  been  delivered 
upon  the  street,  into  the  trench,  they  shall  all  be  subjected  to  a 
rigid  inspection  by  both  contractor  and  inspector,  and  those 
which  do  not  come  up  to  the  foregoing  requirements  shall  be 
rejected. 

Additional  tests  by  sounding  said  pipe  for  cracks,  and 
examining  closely  all  blisters  and  flakes,  shall  also  be  applied. 
Before  lowering  the  pipes  and  specials  which  have  passed  the 
inspections  into  the  trench,  they  shall  first  be  properly  fitted 
together  upon  the  surface  of  the  street  in  the  order  in  which  they 
are  to  be  used ;  and  to  facilitate  the  process  of  laying,  the  top 
of  each  pipe  or  special,  after  said  fitting,  shall  be  plainly 
marked  with  chalk  or  paint,  so  that  the  pipe  previously  laid  in 
the  bottom  of  the  trench  shall  be  disturbed  as  little  as  possible. 

All  pipes  and  specials  in  which  the  spigots  and  sockets 
can  not  be  made  to  fit  together,  while  on  the  surface,  must  be 
rejected,  as  no  chipping  of  either  socket,  hub  or  spigot  will  be 
allowed. 

The  faces  of  all  spigot  ends  and  of  all  shoulders  in  the 
hubs  or  sockets  must  be  true,  and  be  brought  into  fair  contact, 
and  all  lumps  or  excrescences  on  said  faces  shall  be  carefully 
cut  away  before  the  pipes  are  lowered  into  the  trench. 

In  all  cases  where  the  rim  of  any  hub  or  socket  has  been 
broken,  as  aforesaid,  the  pipe  or  special  shall  be  rejected 
unless  it  can  be  so  fitted  as  to  bring  the  broken  portion  on  the 
top,  or  upper  portion  of  the  sewer.  The  same  condition  shall 
also  be  applied  to  the  case  of  broken  blisters  and  flakes,  as 
above  mentioned,  on  either  inside  or  outside  of  the  pipes  and 
specials.  All  special  pieces  required  in  the  work,  such  as 
branches,  bends,  curves,  reducers,  etc.,  shall  likewise  be 
subject  to  the  same  conditions  as  the  straight  pipe. 

The  pipes  and  specials  shall  be  so  laid  in  the  trench  that 
after  the  sewer  is  completed  the  interior  surface  thereof  shall 
conform  on  the  bottom  accurately  to  the  grades  and  alignment 
fixed  and  given  by  the  city  surveyor.  The  main  sewer  will  be 
divided  by  man-holes  and  lamp  or  hand-holes  into  a  number  of 
distinct  divisions  or  working  sections,  in  each  of  which  the 


200  ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

grade  and  alignment  shall,  under  ordinary  circumstances,  be 
truly  straight.  Changes  of  grade  or  direction,  or  both,  in  said 
main  sewer  will  generally  be  made  at  man-holes  or  lamp  or 
hand-holes,  although  under  special  conditions,  to  be  defined 
only  by  the  executive  board  and  city  surveyor,  such  changes 
may  be  made  at  intermediate  places. 

While  the  pipe  and  specials  are  being  laid  in  each  of  the 
aforesaid  straight  divisions  or  working  sections  of  the  main 
sewer,  a  light  or  a  burning  lamp  must  be  maintained  continu- 
ally by  the  contractor  at  the  beginning  of  such  section,  and 
each  pipe  and  specials  must  be  so  laid  that  such  light  or  lamp 
shall  remain  constantly  in  plain  view  throughout  the  entire 
length  of  such  section  or  division.  The  same  test  shall  also  be 
applied  during  the  work  of  refilling  the  trench,  so  that  when 
the  sewer  is  in  all  respects  fully  completed  and  accepted  by  the 
executive  board  a  light  which  may  be  applied  at  one  end  of 
such  a  division  of  the  main  sewer  shall  be  clearly  and  plainly 
seen  by  looking  through  said  sewer  from  the  other  end  of  said 
division  or  working  section.  The  length  of  any  such  division 
or  tthe  distance  between  a  man-hole  and  the  next  following 
lamp  or  hand-hole,  or  between  any  two  consecutive  openings 
of  such  kind  in  the  main  sewer,  will,  in  general,  not  exceed 
300  feet,  although  in  particular  cases  it  may  be  somewhat 
greater. 

The  trenches  must,  in  all  cases,  be  wide  enough  to  admit 
of  the  laying  of  the  pipe  and  specials  as  above  mentioned, 
and  wherever  they  have  not  been  thus  excavated,  all  necessary 
widening  thereof  must  be  done  before  the  pipe  and  specials 
are  lowered  therein.  Ample  room  or  space  must  likewise  be 
left  on  each  side  of  said  pipe  and  specials,  both  to  admit  of 
proper  refilling  underneath  and  also  to  allow  of  free  access  to 
all  parts  of  the  hub  or  socket  while  making  the  cement  joint. 
Wherever  any  additional  excavation  or  enlargement  in  the 
sides  of  the  trench  is  required  for  such  purposes,  it  shall  be 
satisfactorily  performed  before  the  pipe  and  specials  are  laid 
or  put  into  place,  as  no  cutting  away  of  the  banks  will  be  per- 
mitted after  any  such  pipe  or  special  has  been  set. 

Furthermore,  before  any  pipe  or  special  is  put  into  place, 
a  small  excavation  must  be  made  in  the  bottom  of  the  pre- 
viously graded  trench  to  receive  the  projecting  part  of  the  hub 
or  socket,  so  that  each  pipe  will  have  a  firm  and  uniform  bear- 
ing upon  said  graded  bottom  over  virtually  its  entire  length. 
All  adjustment  of  the  pipes  to  line  and  grade  must  be  done  by 
scraping  away  or  filling  in  the  earth  under  the  body  of  the 
pipe,  and  not  by  blocking  or  wedging  up  the  spigot  or  the  hub 
or  socket.  Special  attention  must  be  paid  to  this  part  of  the 
work,  since  the  stability  and  permanence  of  the  sewer  depend 
largely  upon  the  manner  in  which  the  pipes  are  bedded. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOB   SEWER    PIPE.  201 

The  joints  between  the  individual  pipes  and  specials  shall, 
in  all  cases,  be  made  water-tight  by  completely  filling  out  the 
entire  annular  space  between  the  exterior  of  the  spigot  end  and 
the  interior  of  the  hub  or  socket  with  hydraulic  cement  mortar, 
of  such  composition  as  is  hereinafter  specified.  To  prevent 
the  mortar  from  reaching  the  interior  of  said  pipe,  the  con- 
tractor may  if  he  desires,  use  a  narrow  gasket  of  oakum  or 
hemp,  which  shall  be  properly  caulked  into  each  joint,  after 
which  the  mortar  shall  be  introduced  therein ;  but  no  extra 
compensation  for  the  use  of  such  gaskets  will  be  allowed. 
Special  care  must  be  taken  to  secure  a  perfect  filling  of  the 
aforesaid  annular  space  at  the  bottom  sides  of  the  pipes,  as 
well  as  at  the  top;  and  previous  to  the  introduction  of  the 
mortar,  said  space,  together  with  the  surfaces  of  the  pipe 
bounding  the  same,  shall  be  thoroughly  free  all  around  from 
dust,  sand,  earth,  dirt,  small  stones  and  water.  After  said 
space  has  been  filled  as  described,  a  neat  and  proper  finish 
shall  be  given  to  the  joint  by  the  further  application  of  similar 
mortar  to  the  face  of  the  hub  or  socket,  so  as  to  form  a  con- 
tinuous and  even  beveled  surface,  from  the  exterior  of. said 
socket  to  the  exterior  of  the  connecting  spigot  all  around. 
The  pipes  must  also  be  thoroughly  cleaned  before  being  laid ; 
and  any  mortar,  earth  or  other  material  which  may  have  found 
its  way  through  a  joint  or  otherwise,  into  any  pipe  or  special 
must  be  carefully  removed  before  the  next  succeeding  pipe  is 
laid,  in  order  that  the  interior  of  the  sewer  shall  be  left  smooth 
and  clean. 

As  soon  as  the  cementing  of  any  joint,  whether  in  a  main 
sewer  or  in  a  lateral  sewer,  has  been  completed,  the  excavation 
previously  made  in  the  bottom  of  the  trench  for  the  reception 
of  the  hub  or  socket  must  'be  carefully  and  compactly  filled 
with  sand,  loam  or  fine  earth,  so  as  to  hold  the  external  mortar 
finish  of  said  joint  securely  in  its  place;  and  such  refilling 
shall  also  be  carried  up  around  the  sides  or  circumference  of 
the  socket,  as  far  as  may  be  necessary.  Any  water  which 
may  have  accumulated  in  said  excavations  must  first  be 
removed,  or  else  said  excavations  must  be  completely  filled 
out  with  the  cement  mortar  specified,  in  which  event  no  extra 
compensation  will  be  allowed. 

When  a  pipe  or  special  is  used  in  any  main  or  lateral 
sewer,  which  is  affected  by  a  broken  hub  or  socket,  or  a  boken 
blister  or  flake,  or  a  fire-crack  on  its  exterior  surface,  as  limited 
and  defined  in  the  foregoing,  such  pipe  or  special  must  be  set 
so  as  to  bring  said  permissible  defect  on  the  top  or  upper  part 
of  the  sewer;  and  said  defect  must  thereupon  be  completely 
and  liberally  covered  over  with  a  thick  layer  of  hydraulic 
cement  mortar,  of  the  quality  specified  for  the  joints,  to  the 
full  satisfaction  of  the  city  surveyor,  and  the  executive  board. 


202  ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

As  the  work  proceeds,  all  of  the  required  specials  that  are 
indicated  upon  the  plan  of  the  street,  or  that  may  be  required 
during  the  progress  of  the  work,  shall  be  introduced  and  set  in 
their  proper  positions. 

Any  omissions  of  the  required  specials  intended  to  be 
laid,  and  indicated  upon  the  plan  for  the  sewer,  or  that  may 
especially  be  ordered  beforehand  by  the  surveyor,  shall  be 
corrected  by  the  contractor  without  additional  compensation  ; 
but  in  case  that  any  special  not  indicated  upon  the  said  plan, 
or  not  distinctly  required  to  be  introduced  beforehand  by  the 
surveyor  is  inserted  into  the  sewer  after  the  latter  has  been 
laid,  the  expense  of  such  insertions  will  be  paid  by  the  execu- 
tive board  upon  proper  certificate  from  said  surveyor. 

Before  leaving  the  work  for  the  night,  or  during  a  storm, 
or  for  any  other  reason,  care  must  be  taken  that  the  unfinished 
end  of  the  main  sewer,  or  of  any  lateral  sewer  is  securely 
closed  with  a  tightly  fitting  iron  or  wooden  plug.  Any  earth, 
or  other  material  that  may  find  entrance  into  said  main  sewer, 
or  into  any  lateral  sewer,  through  any  such  open  end  or 
unplugged  branch,  must  be  removed  at  the  contractor' s 
expense.  The  cost  of  all  such  plugs,  and  the  labor  connected 
therewith,  moreover,  must  be  included  in  the  regular  prices 
bid  for  the  sewers.  E.  K. 

142.  Specifications  for  the  Manufacture  and 
Delivery  of  Cast  Iron  Water  Pipe.  The  following 
specifications  for  the  manufacture  of  cast  iron  water  mains  are 
in  use  in  the  city  of  Rochester,  N.  Y.  Although  water  pipe 
is  now  manufactured  and  sold  as  a  standard  article  of  com- 
merce, and  is  often  purchased  without  any  test  or  inspection 
whatever,  it  must  be  admitted  to  be  a  poor  practice,  and  if  the 
contract  is  a  large  one,  the  material  should  be  thoroughly 
inspected  and  tested  in  all  the  stages  of  manufacture.  Special 
attention  should  be  given  to  the  tests  of  the  strength  and  resil- 
ience of  the  material.  When  cast  iron  water  mains  burst,  it  is 
due  to  a  water  ram  or  shock,  and  the  more  elastic  the  material 
is  of  which  the  pipes  are  composed,  the  less  will  be  the  force  of 
the  ram  the  more  able  the  pipes  will  be  to  withstand  the  shock. 
The  resilience  of  the  iron  is  measured  by  the  product  of  the 
strength  into  the  deflection,  and  in  the  following  specifications 
both  tensile  and  cross-breaking  tests  are  required,  and  the 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOE,  WATER   PIPE. 


203 


requisite  deflection  in  the  cross-breaking  test  is  also  specified. 
The  deflection  here  named  will  insure  a  very  good  quality  of 
cast  iron,  so  far  as  its  resilience  is  concerned,  although  the 
strength  requirement  is  not  particularly  high.  The  author  has 
had  a  large  experience  in  testing  the  strength  of  cast  iron,  and 
he  can  approve  of  the  standards  of  strength  and  resilience  here 
named  for  water  pipe  metal. 

Specifications  for  Water  Pipe. 

Dimensions  and  Weight  of  Pipe. — The  pipe  shall  be  of 
the  kind  usually  known  as  "Hub  and  Spigot,"  and  in  general 
each  straight  pipe  shall  be  about  twelve  feet  in  length  from  the 
bottom  of  the  hub  to  the  end  of  the  spigot.  No  straight  pipes 
will  be  received  that  will  lay  less  than  1 1  feet  8  inches ;  but  it 
is  understood  that  not  more  than  two  per  cent,  of  the  total 
number  of  pipes  required  in  each  class  may  be  10  feet  or  more 
in  length,  produced  by  properly  cutting  off  in  a  lathe  a  defect- 
ively cast  spigot  end.  The  form  and  dimensions  of  the  hub 
and  spigot  ends  of  all  pipes  and  castings  shall  be  subject  to  the 
approval  of  the  Engineer,  when  specific  drawings  therefor  are 
not  furnished  by  him,  and  shall  conform  accurately  in  shape 
and  dimensions  to  all  drawings  that  may  be  furnished  by  him 
from  time  to  time. 

(See  accompanying  figure  for  these  dimensions  for  the  St. 
Louis  standard  water  pipe.) 

\ — .-A--- j 


T. 


The  weights  and  dimensions    of    the    straight    pipes  shall 
conform  to  the  figures   in   the  following  Table,  it  being  stipu- 


204 


ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 


lated  that  the  same  may  be   modified   at   any  time  hereafter  by 
the  Engineer: 

TABLE  OF  WEIGHTS  AND  DIMENSIONS  OF   STRAIGHT  PIPE. 


INomina 
of  pip< 

Q 

S 

Thickne 

1  Extern  a 
Barrel 

Thickne 

* 

5* 
o 

Standard 
weight  of 
pipe   laying 
12  feet. 

2.i 

H 

Maximu 
laying 

Minimul 
laying 

;       :\O 

Is  f 

JD    ^- 

w 

w 

»-H 

«  3 

-  a 

!—•       **           •» 

*~n 

5^ 

u 

o 

C- 

p' 

s, 

3* 
p- 

13 

5? 

t-h  0, 

(T)   (D 

^2. 

°2.    <*    H» 

o|  5ps» 

f? 

cr 

3 

rtT 

*t 

"^3  rr* 

ScfS" 

£t  ofq' 

&*  ^  rt 

3 

P 

P 

H- 

*Tl 

CD  S 

•  g; 

*  5" 

17*  3 

ET*  3 

e. 

1 

5 

Cu 

5' 

f 

f  § 

3, 

o 

D  0  w 

£r*       ^* 

S, 

5'-- 

*2 

m 

r 

o 
r 

crtj  o 
w 

f 

•5' 

a 

??» 

*ll 

?? 

r 

r  8  o. 

™  3  5T 

in. 

inches. 

in. 

inches. 

in. 

Ibs. 

Ibs.  |p.c. 

Ibs. 

Ibs. 

pounds. 

pounds. 

36 

AJ 

iX 

38^ 

7-16  to  J£ 

4K 

492 

5,904 

3 

6,081 

5,727 

I 

4! 

36 

B 

1/8 

3§K 

7-i6to^ 

4& 

444 

5,328 

3 

5,488 

5,168 

47 

37 

36 

C 

I 

38^ 

7-16  to  % 

4^ 

397 

4,764 

3 

4,907 

4,621 

43 

33 

30 

B 

I 

3^/4 

26  to  7-16 

4J^ 

330 

3,96o 

3 

4,079 

3,841 

35 

26 

20 

li 

%  to  7-16 

3^ 

165 

1,980 

4 

2,059 

t,yoi 

20 

H 

12 

9-l6 

^107-16 

3^ 

75 

900 

4 

936 

864 

8 

6 

IO 

^ 

5-1610  % 

Z1A 

56 

672 

4 

699 

645 

7 

5 

S 

7-16 

5-i6to  % 

zK 

41 

492 

4 

512 

472 

4 

3 

6 

H 

S-^to^ 

« 

30 

360 

4 

374 

346 

3 

2 

The  specified  internal  diameter  of  the  pipe  is  nominal,  but 
no  pipe  or  special  casting  of  any  class  shall  have  a  less  internal 
diameter  than  the  nominal  diameter.  The  external  diameters 
of  all  classes  of  said  pipe  shall  be  the  same  throughout,  and  all 
variations  in  thickness  of  metal  of  the  shells  or  barrels  shall  be 
made  by  changing  the  internal  diameter. 

The  thickness  of  the  metal  of  the  pipe  and  castings  will  be 
measured  after  they  have  been  thoroughly  cleaned,  and  before 
being  coated.  No  pipe  of  any  class  will  be  received  when  the 
thickness  of  the  metal  is  over  one  sixteenth  (-]— 6-)  of  an  inch  less 
in  any  part  than  the  .thickness  above  specified,  or  hereafter 
required  by  the  engineer. 

No  pipe  of  full  length  will  be  received  whose  weight  is 
less  than  the  above  specified  minimum  weight,  and  no  excess 
of  weight  in  any  such  pipe,  beyond  the  specified  maximum 
weight,  will  be  paid  for.  It  is  also  expressly  understood  that 
the  average  weights  of  the  straight  pipe  of  the  several  classes 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOE   WATER   PIPE.  205 

shall  not  exceed  the  said  standard  weights  by  more  than  two 
per  cent,  of  the  latter,  and  that  no  greater  over-weight  than  this 
percentage  will  be  paid  for  in  the  final  settlement.  The 
standard  weight  of  the  straight  pipes  will  depend  upon  the 
laying  length  of  the  pipes  actually  furnished,  and  will  be 
determined  by  the  engineer. 

Quality  of  Metal. ^-The  materials,  details  of  manufacture, 
and  the  testing  of  all  pipe  and  special  castings  herein  referred 
to,  shall  at  all  times  be  subject  to  the  inspection  and  approval 
of  the  engineer.  The  metal,  which  must  be  remelted  in  the 
cupola  or  air  furnace,  shall  be  made  without  admixture  of  cin- 
der-iron or  other  inferior  metal,  and  shall  be  of  such  character 
as  to  make  a  pipe  strong,  tough,  and  of  sound,  even  grain,  free 
from  uncombined  carbon  when  examined  under  the  microscope, 
and  such  as  will  satisfactorily  bear  drilling,  chipping  and  cut- 
ting. Its  tensile  strength  and  resilience,  when  tested  in  proper 
samples,  shall  meet  all  the  requirements  hereinafter  expressed. 

Specimen  rods  of  the  metal  used,  of  a  size  and  form  suita- 
ble for  a  testing  machine,  shall  be  made  and  carefully  tested  to 
ascertain  its  tensile  strength.  Another  set  of  test  bars,  each 
being  twenty-six  (26)  inches  long,  two  (2)  inches  wide,  and 
one  (i)  inch  thick,  shall  also  be  made  as  often  as  the  engineer 
shall  direct,  and  shall  be  tested  both  for  transverse  strength  and 
deflection  by  placing  them  horizontally  and  flatwise  upon  sup- 
ports twenty-four  (24)  inches  apart,  and  then  applying  a 
steadily  increasing  load  at  the  middle  of  each  bar. 

The  bars  for  testing  the  transverse  strength  or  resilience  of 
the  metal  shall  be  cast  from  regular  patterns  in  dry  or  green 
sand,  and  as  nearly  as  possible  to  the  required  dimensions 
without  being  finished  up;  proper  corrections  will,  however, 
be  made  in  the  results  for  slight  variations  of  width  and  thick- 
ness. The  rods  for  testing  the  tensile  strength  of  the  iron,  on 
the  other  hand,  must  be  turned  down  on  a  lathe  in  order  to 
remove  the  rough  exterior  and  enable  the  diameter  to  be  accu- 
rately measured. 

At  least  one  set  of  four  test  bars,  of  each  kind  above  des- 
ignated, shall  be  made  and  tested  as  described  on  each  working 
day  during  the  manufacture  of  the  pipes  and  specials.  These 
test  bars  must  be  poured  from  the  ladle  either  before  or  after 
an)r  particular  pipes  or  special  casting  are  poured,  and  must 
present  true  samples  of  the  iron  used  in  said  pipes  or  castings. 
Records  shall  be  kept  of  the  tests  of  all  bars  made,  and  a  duly 
certified  copy  of  such  records  shall  be  forwarded  weekly  to  the 
engineer. 

The  quality  of  the  metal  used  for  the  pipe  and  specials 
must  be  such  that  said  bars  for  testing  resilience,  as  aforesaid, 


206  ENGINEERING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

shall  each  carry  a  center  load  of  not  less  than  nineteen  hundred 
(1,900)  pounds  before  breaking,  and  exhibit  a  deflection  of  not 
less  than  five  sixteenths  dA6)  of  an  inch;  also  that  the  tensile 
strength  of  said  metal  shall  be  at  least  17,000  pounds  per 
square  inch,  as  determined  by  the  tests  with  the  first  named  set 
of  rods.  In  estimating  the  suitability  of  the  metal  from  said 
tests,  the  average  of  the  three  highest  results  obtained  from 
each  set  of  four  bars  will  be  considered  as  representing  the 
actual  strength  of  the  iron. 

Manufacture  of  Pipe  and  Special  Castings. — All  the 
straight  pipes  shall  be  cast  in  dry  sand  moulds,  vertically  with 
the  hub  end  down.  Every  pipe  is  to  have  the  initials  of  the 
maker's  name  cast  distinctly  upon  it,  and  also  the  year,  the 
class  letter,  and  a  number  signifying  the  order  of  its  casting,  in 
point  of  date ;  the  several  different  classes  of  pipe  each  to  have 
its  own  series  of  numbering ;  the  figures  and  letters  to  be  at 
least  two  inches  in  length,  with  a  proportionate  width;  the 
weight  of  each  pipe  to  be  conspicuously  painted  on  the  outside, 
before  delivery,  with  white  lead  paint  at  the  contractor's 
expense. 

The  branches  and  all  other  special  castings  must  conform 
in  weight  and  thickness  of  iron  to  the  drawings  and  directions 
to  be  furnished  by  the  engineer,  and  no  allowance  will  be  made 
for  making  or  altering  patterns  for  the  pipe  or  any  special  cast- 
ings, or  for  any  machine  work  in  properly  facing  and  drilling 
flanges,  etc.,  where  bolted  joints  are  to  be  made.  All  required 
machine  work  on  said  castings  shall  be  done  in  the  best  and 
most  workmanlike  manner,  in  accordance  with  said  plans  and 
directions  of  the  engineer,  and  to  his  entire  satisfaction.  Said 
castings  shall  be  subjected  to  the  same  examinations  and  tests 
at  the  foundry,  except  the  water- pressure  proof,  as  the  straight 
pipe,  and  shall  be  marked  in  a  similar  manner.  The  engineer 
may  reject,  without  proving,  any  pipe  or  casting  which  is  not 
in  conformity  with  the  specifications  or  the  drawings  furnished. 

Pines  and  special  castings  shall  not  be  taken  from  the  pit 
and  stripped  while  still  showing  any  color  of  heat,  but  shall  be 
left  in  the  flasks  for  a  sufficient  length  of  time  to  prevent 
unequal  cooling  and  contraction  by  subsequent  exposure. 

On  being  removed  from  the  flasks,  all  pipes  and  special 
castings  shall  be  subjected  to  a  careful  examination  and  hammer 
test  for  the  purpose  of  detecting  imperfections  of  any  kind. 
They  shall  then  be  thoroughly  dressed  and  made  clear  and  free 
from  earth,  sand  or  dust,  which  adheres  to  the  iron  in  the 
moulds ;  iron  wire  brushes  must  be  used,  as  well  as  softer 
brushes  to  remove  the  loose  dust.  No  acid  shall  be  used  in 
cleaning  the  castings.  After  having  been  properly  dressed  and 
cleaned,  they  shall  again  be  subjected  to  a  thorough  inspection 
and  hammer  test.  The  contractor  will  be  required  at  the 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR   WATER   PIPE.  207 

foundry  to  place  all  castings  in  such  positions  as  may  be  deemed 
necessary  by  the  Engineer  for  convenience  of  inspection. 

The  pipes  and  special  castings  shall  be  free  from  scoria, 
sand-holes,  air-bubbles  and  other  defects  or  imperfections  ;  they 
shall  be  truly  cylindrical  in  the  bore,  straight  in  the  axis  of  the 
straight  pipes,  and  true  to  the  required  curvature  or  form  in  the 
axis  of  the  other  pipes  ;  they  shall  be  internally  of  the  full  speci- 
fied diameters,  and  shall  have  their  inner  and  outer  surfaces 
concentric.  To  insure  proper  diameters  of  sockets  and  spigots, 
a  circular  iron  templet  of  the  required  dimensions  shall  be 
passed  to  the  bottom  of  every  socket,  and  a  circular  ring  over 
every  spigot.  Care  shall  also  be  taken  to  avoid  all  excess  in 
diameter  of  the  sockets.  No  pipes  or  special  castings  will  be 
accepted  which  are  defective  in  joint  room,  whether  in  conse- 
quence of  eccentricity  of  form  or  otherwise.  No  lump  or  rough 
places  shall  be  left  in  the  barrels  or  sockets,  and  no  plugging  or 
filling  will  be  allowed.  All  pipes  and  special  castings  with 
defective  hubs  or  flanges  will  be  rejected. 

When  a  defective  spigot  end  is  to  be  cut  off  from  any 
straight  pipe,  such  cutting  must  in  all  cases  be  done  in  a  lathe, 
and  a  suitable  bead  or  fillet  of  half-oval  wrought  iron,  about 
three  fourths  (^O  inch  wide  and  five  sixteenths  (-j^-)  inch 
thick  shall  be  shrunk  upon  the  new  end  of  the  pipe ;  and  there 
shall  be  deducted  from  the  proper  original  weight  of  the  pipe 
an  amount  as  determined  from  the  rate  specified  in  the  foregoing 
table. 

Coating  the  Pipe  and  Special  Castings. — After  the  above 
described  cleaning  and  inspection,  every  pipe  and  special  cast- 
ing shall  be  heated  in  a  suitable  oven  to  a  temperature  of  about 
320°  F.  and,  while  at  this  temperature,  be  immersed  in  a  bath 
of  hot  coal  tar  pitch  varnish,  prepared  in  general  according  to 
Dr.  R.  Angus  Smith's  process.  Special  care  shall  be  taken  to 
have  the  surfaces  of  all  pipes  and  castings  entirely  clean  and 
free  from  rust  immediately  before  putting  them  into  said  bath. 
If  any  pipe  or  casting  cannot  be  dipped  in  said  bath  soon  after 
its  removal  from  the  mould,  it  shall  at* once  be  thoroughly 
coated  with  pure  linseed  oil  in  order  to  prevent  the  formation 
of  any  rust  before  applying  said  varnish. 

The  varnish  above  mentioned  shall  be  made  from  coal  tar, 
distilled  until  the  naptha  is  entirely  removed  and  the  material 
deodorized,  also  until  it  attains  the  consistency  of  wax  when 
cold.  Pitch  which  becomes  hard  and  brittle  when  cold  will  be 
rejected.  To  this  material  from  five  to  six  per  cent,  of  its 
weight  of  pure  boiled  linseed  oil  shall  be  added  and  thoroughly 
boiled  therewith.  The  relative  portions  of  pitch  and  oil,  as 
well  as  the  details  of  mixture  and  boiling,  are  to  be  carefully 
determined  by  experiment. 


208  ENGINEERING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

The  coating  must  be  durable,  smooth,  glossy,  hard,  tough, 
perfectly  water-proof,  not  affected  by  any  salts  or  acids  found 
in  the  soil,  free  from  bubbles  or  blisters,  strongly  adhesive  to 
the  iron  under  all  circumstances,  and  with  no  tendency  to  be- 
come soft  enough  to  flow  when  exposed  to  the  sun  in  summer, 
or  to  become  so  brittle  as  to  scale  off  in  winter.  As  one  test 
of  the  quality  of  the  coating,  a  properly  coated  specimen  casting 
will  be  plunged  into  a  freezing  mixture,  and  kept  therein  until 
the  metal  has  acquired  the  temperature  of  said  mixture,  after 
which  the  casting  shall  be  well  hammered.  If  the  coating 
remains  tough  and  adhering  closely  to  the  metal,  it  will  be  con- 
sidered proper,  provided  that  it  be  satisfactory  in  all  other 
respects. 

After  a  varnish  of  the  proper  quality  has  been  obtained,  it 
shall  be  heated  in  a  suitable  dipping  tank  to  a  temperature  of 
about  300°  F.,  or  such  other  temperature  as  may  be  found  expe- 
dient, and  shall  be  maintained  thereat  uniformly  during  the  time 
of  dipping.  Fresh  materials  must  be  added  from  time  to  time  in 
the  right  proportions  to  keep  the  mixture  of  the  proper  consis- 
tency. The  exact  proportions  will  be  determined  by  the 
Engineer,  and  will  be  varied  also  according  to  the  season  of  the 
year,  as  may  be  directed  by  the  said  Engineer,  or  found  neces- 
sary to  produce  a  coating  of  the  required  quality.  The  tank 
shall  also  be  occasionally  emptied  of  its  contents  and  refilled 
with  fresh  material,  the  frequency  of  such  operation  depending 
both  on  the  character  of  the  mixture  and  the  manner  of  con- 
ducting the  coating  process. 

Every  pipe  and  special  casting,  after  having  been  inspected, 
cleaned  and  dressed  as  above  described,  shall  be  heated  in  a 
suitable  oven  to  a  temperature  about  20°  F.  higher  than  that 
which  was  found  most  expedient  for  the  bath  of  coating  mate- 
rial aforesaid,  and  while  at  such  temperature,  shall  be  immersed 
or  dipped  in  said  bath.  All  pipes  or  castings  shall  remain  in 
the  tank  at  least  twenty  (20)  minutes,  or  as  much  longer  as 
may  be  necessary  to  insure  the  soundness  of  the  coating. 

Whilst  any  pipe  or  casting  remains  in  said  bath,  the  hot 
mixture  must  be  kept  thoroughly  stirred  by  a  frequent  rolling, 
turning  or  churning  motion  of  such  casting,  and  upon  its  re- 
moval from  the  tank,  the  coating  shall  fume  freely  for  a  short 
time,  and  set  perfectly  hard  within  one  hour  thereafter.  Prop- 
er facilities  for  handling  the  castings  and  allowing  all  surplus 
material  to  drip  off,  shall  be  provided  by  the  contractor.  The 
co^t  of  all  labor  and  material  involved  in  the  coating  of  the 
pipes  and  castings  must  be  included  in  the  prices  bid  for  fur- 
nishing said  pipes  and  castings. 

Testing. — After  the  said  coating  has  become  thoroughly 
set  and  hard,  every  pipe  shall  be  subjected  to  a  proof  by  water- 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR   WATER   PIPE*.  209 

pressure  of  from  200  to  300  pounds  per  square  inch,  according 
to  its  class  and  diameter,  and  as  will  be  determined  by  the 
Engineer.  Each  pipe  while  under  the  required  pressure,  shall 
be  sharply  rapped  from  end  to  end  with  a  hand  hammer,  to 
ascertain  whether  any  defects  have  been  overlooked ;  and  any 
pipes  which  may  exhibit  any  defects  by  leaking,  sweating  or 
otherwise,  shall  be  rejected. 

All  the  above  inspections,  manipulation  and  tests  of  the 
pipe  and  test  bars  shall  be  made  at  the  expense  of  the  contract- 
or for  the  pipe,  said  expense,  however,  not  to  include  salary  of 
anv  inspector  who  may  be  appointed  by  the  Executive  Board. 
If  required  by  the  said  Board,  the  affidavit  of  the  superintend- 
ent of  the  foundry,  or  that  of  the  foreman  employed  by  him  to 
perform  the  above  described  testing,  shall  also  be  furnished  to 
the  Engineer  from  time  to  time;  said  affidavits  to  be  recorded 
upon  the  pipe  inspector's  sheets,  and  stating  in  detail  that  the 
pipes  or  castings  therein  described  have  been  carefully  tested 
at  the  foundry  in  accordance  with  these  specifications,  and  that 
no  defects  were  discovered  or  discoverable. 

Weighing  Jor  Payment. — The  pipes  and  castings  will  be 
weighed  lor  payment  after  all  cleaning,  dressing  and  machine 
work  has  been  done  and  the  coating  has  been  applied,  and  the 
contractor  must  furnish,  at  his  own  expense,  accurate  and 
properly  sealed  scales,  together  with  the  necessary  labor  for  the 
purpose.  The  Executive  Board  also  reserves  the  right  to  re- 
weigh  on  similar  scales,  any  pipe  or  casting  upon  or  after  its 
arrival  at  the  designated  point  of  delivery;  and  if  any  discrep- 
ency  be  discovered  between  the  weight  marked  upon  said  pipe 
or  casting  and  that  which  was  found  on  such  re-weighing,  the 
latter  weight  will  be  adopted  in  the  final  settlement.  Payment 
for  all  material  furnished  in  accordance  with  these  specifica- 
tions will  be  made  at  the  prices  bid  per  net  ton  (2,000  Ibs.) 
for  straight  pipe  and  special  castings. 

Transportation  of  Pipes  and  Castings. — All  pipes  and 
castings  must  be  delivered  in  all  respects  sound  and  in  conform- 
ity with  these  specifications. %  Upon  their  delivery  at  the  point 
designated,  the  Executive  Board  reserves  the  right  to  subject 
the  said  pipe  and  castings  to  the  same  water-pressure  proof  and 
hammer  tests  as  are  above  specified  to  be  applied  at  the 
foundry ;  and  all  defective  pipes  or  castings  which  may  have 
passed  the  inspector  at  the  foundry,  or  which  may  have  been 
broken  in  transportation  from  the  foundry  to  said  point  of  de- 
livery, will  be  rejected  when  there  discovered,  unless  the  same 
may  be  cut  as  hereinafter  provided.  Care  must  also  be  taken 
14 


210  ENGINEERING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

in  handling  the  pipes  and  castings  not  to  injure  the  coating, 
and  no  material  of  any  kind  shall  be  placed  in  said  pipes  and 
castings  during  transportation,  or  any  time  after  being  coated. 
If,  upon  its  arrival  at  the  designated  point  of  delivery,  the 
spigot  end  of  any  straight  pipe  should  be  found  cracked  or 
broken,  during  transportation  from  the  foundry  to  the  said 
point  or  otherwise,  such  defective  portion  will  be  cut  off  at  the 
contractor's  expense,  provided  that  the  same  does  not  exceed 
a  length  of  four  (4)  feet,  and  a  suitable  fillet  or  bead  shall  then 
be  shrunk  on  the  new  spigot  end,  as  above  specified.  A  deduc- 
tion from  the  proper  original  weight  of  such  pipe  shall  also  be 
made  in  each  such  case  at  the  rate  specified  in  the  above  table 
for  every  inch  of  length  so  cut  off.  No  pipe  or  special  casting 
in  which  the  hub  is  found  to  be  cracked  or  defective  in  any 
respect,  will  be  accepted  at  said  point  of  delivery  or  elsewhere ; 
nor  will  any  special  casting  with  a  defective  spigot  end  be 
received,  or  permitted  to  be  cut  off,  without  the  written  order 
of  the  Engineer.  E.  K. 


143.    Specifications  for  Laying  Water  Pipe.   The 

following  clauses  referring  to  the  methods  of  laying  water 
pipe,  and  making  the  joints,  are  taken  from  the  complete  speci- 
fications on  this  subject  used  by  the  water  commissioner  of  St. 
Louis.  All  that  portion  of  the  specification  referring  to  the 
trenching,  protection,  tools,  alignment,  grades,  connections, 
back-filling,  etc.,  together  with  the  general  clauses  are  here 
omitted. 

The  reducers,  bends,  caps  and  such  other  parts  as  are 
liable  to  draw,  shall  be  firmly  secured  by  straps  and  bolts,  and 
in  addition  to  this  a  firm  blocking  shall  be  set  behind  all  caps, 
curves,  fire  hydrants  and  three  way  branches,  said  blocking  to 
have  a  large  surface  bearing  against  the  undisturbed  earth,  and 
to  be  wedged  up  tight.  All  applications  necessary  to  the  per- 
fect working  of  the  distribution,  when  the  water  is  let  on,  shall 
be  made  and  completed. 

The  straps  and  bolts  used  shall  be  made  from  the  best 
American  refined  iron,  and  the  size  and  workmanship,  as  well 
as  the  material,  shall  be  in  all  respects  satisfactory  to  the  water 
commissioner. 


SPECIFICATIONS    FOR   LAYING   WATER  PIPE.  211 

Any  omission  of  branches,  stop-cocks,  or  other  appurte- 
nances intended  to  be  laid,  shall  be  corrected  when  required,  by 
re-opening  the  trench,  if  it  has  been  filled  up,  and  introducing 
what  mny  have  been  omitted. 

At  the  time  when  laid,  the  spigots  of  the  pipe  shall  be  so 
adjusted  in  the  sockets  as  to  give  a  uniform  space  all  around, 
and  if  any  pipe  does  not  allow  sufficient  space,  it  shall  be 
replaced  by  one  of  proper  dimensions.  The  joint  shall,  at  all 
points,  be  at  least  five  sixteenths  of  an  inch  in  thickness.  In 
the  lead  and  gasket  joints,  the  depth  of  lead  shall  not  be  less 
than  three  and  one  quarter  inches  for  the  fifteen  inch  pipes  and 
over,  nor  less  than  two  and  three  quarter  inches  for  smaller 
pipes.  Gaskets  of  clean,  sound  hemp  yarn,  braided  or  twisted, 
and  tightly  driven,  shall  be  used  to  pack  these  joints,  when 
required,  a  space  of  one  quarter  inch  shall  be  left  between  the 
contiguous  pipes. 

The  lead  used  shall  be  of  the  best  quality  of  pure  and  soft 
lead,  and  suitable  for  caulking  and  securing  a  tight  and  perma- 
nent joint. 

Before  running  the  lead,  the  joints  shall  be  carefully  wiped 
out  to  make  them  clean  and  dry;  the  joint  shall  be  run  full  at 
one  pouring,  and  the  melting  pot  shall  always  be  kept  within 
fifty  feet  of  the  joint  about  to  be  poured. 

The  joint  shall  be  caulked  by  competent  mechanics.  The 
caulking  to  be  faithfully  executed,  and  in  such  a  manner  as  to 
secure  a  tight  joint  without  overstraining  the  iron  of  the  bell. 
In  all  cases  the  caulking  shall  be  done  towards  the  place  of  the 
gate  and  other  points  where  the  lead  is  likely  to  be  porous,  so  as 
to  drive  it  together  at  these  points.  The  lead,  after  being 
driven,  shall  be  flush  with  the  face  of  the  socket. 

The  pipes  and  all  other  castings  shall  be  carefully  swept 
raid  cleaned,  as  they  are  laid,  of  any  earth  or  rubbish  which 
may  have  found  place  inside,  during  or  before  the  operation  of 
laying.  Every  open  end  of  a  pipe  shall  be  plugged  or  other- 
wise closed  before  leaving  the  work  for  the  night. 

In  refilling  the  trenches,  the  earth  filled  into  the  bottom  of 
the  trench,  under  and  to  the  top  of  the  pipes  and  other  cast- 
ings, shall  be  carefully  packed  and  well  rammed  with  proper 
tools  for  the  purpose. 

Whenever  written  directions  so  to  do  are  given,  the  con- 
tractor shall  fill  the  trench  with  river  sand,  said  filling  to  be 
done  in  exact  accordance  with  the  orders  and  directions  of  the 
water  commissioner.  For  all  sand  filling  done  as  above,  the  sum 
of  $  per  cubic  yard  will  be  paid,  which  sum  shall  include 
all  expense  of  materials,  tools  and  labor  for  the  sand  filling, 
and  removing  the  surplus  earth  from  the  work. 

Care  shall  be  taken  to  give  the  pipe  a  solid  bearing  through- 
out its  entire  length.  The  earth  rilling  above  the  pipes  shall 


212  ENGINEEKING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

also  be  sufficiently  packed  and  rammed  to  prevent  after  settle- 
ment, and  the  material  used  shall  be  free  from  stones  or  rock 
fragments.  The  trenches  shall,  in  all  cases  ;  be  refilled  with 
the  material  furnished  by  their  excavation,  provided  that  it  be 
of  a  proper  quality,  and  the  necessary  haul  be  not  more  than 
500  feet.  Earth  borrowed  or  hauled  over  500  feet,  to  refill  the 
trenches  (excepting  trenches  where  rock  has  been  excavated),, 
will  be  paid  for  as  embankment,  at  the  price  given  under  item 
of  section  seven. 

In  streets  and  roads,  the  class  of  surface  before  existing, 
shall  be  replaced,  so  as  to  be  in  every  way  equal  to  that  surface  in 
materials  and  workmanship,  and  satisfactory  to  the  water 
commissioner. 

Whenever  trenches  are  excavated  in  or  across  streets 
paved  with  granite  or  wood  blocks,  or  with  asphalt,  the  con- 
tractor will  be  required  to  have  the  back-fill  of  trench  thoroughly 
rammed  (not  less  than  three  men  ramming  to  each  man  filling 
the  trench),  and  to  replace  the  paving  temporarily,  so  as  to- 
make  the  street  passible  for  traffic;  the  permanent  laying  of  the 
pavement  in  these  cases,  will  be  assumed  by  the  city. 

A  wooden  box  or  vault  shall  be  furnished  and  set  over  each 
of  the  stop  cocks,  a>r  cocks,  and  fire  hydrants,  and  the  iron 
frames  and  covers  shall  be  properly  fastened  to  them.  These 
boxes  are  to  be  made  of  the  form  and  dimensions  shown  by 
samples  furnished  and  approved  by  the  water  commissioner;'' 
they  shall  be  made  from  sound,  well  seasoned  oak  lumber; 
the  corner  posts  shall  be  of  four-inch  scantling,  and  the  sides 
shall  be  formed  from  two-inch  plank,  set  close,  and  securely 
nailed.  M.  L.  H. 

144.  Specifications  for  Stop  Valves.  The  follow- 
ing specifications  for  stop  valves  for  water  mains  are  thought  to 
be  particularly  strong  in  the  requirements  governing  the  strength 
of  the  material  used  in  the  different  parts.  These  require- 
ments are  followed  up  very  carefully  by  numerous  tests  of  the 
strength  of  the  material,  and  in  this  way  the  character  of  the 
composition  metal  used  has  come  to  be  very  superior  to  that 
formerly  employed,  and  much  superior  to  that  which  would  be 
obtained  without  such  rigid  specifications  and  tests.  They  are 
the  standard  specifications  used  in  the  St.  Louis  water  depart- 
ment. 

All  the  iron  castings  shall  be  made  from  a  superior  quality 
of  iron,  re  melted  in  the  cupola  or  air  furnace,  tough  and  of  even_ 


SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  STOP  VALVES.        213 

grain,  and  shall  possess  a  tensile  strength  of  not  less  than  18,000 
pounds  per  square  inch. 

Test  bars  of  the  metal  3  inches  by  ^  inch  when  broken 
transversely,  18  inches  between  supports  and  loaded  in  the  cen- 
ter shall  have  a  breaking  load  of  not  less  than  1,000  pounds, 
and  shall  have  a  total  deflection  of  not  less  than  -fo  of  an  inch 
before  breaking.  Said  bars  to  be  cast  as  near  as  possible  to  the 
above  dimensions  without  finishing,  but  correction  will  be  made 
by  the  water  commissioner  for  variations  in  thickness  and  width, 
and  the  corrected  result  must  conform  to  above  requirements. 

Specimen  bars  of  the  metal  used,  of  a  size  and  form  suit- 
able for  testing,  shall  be  prepared  wnen  required. 

These  specimen  bars  shall  be  poured  from  the  ladle  at  any 
time,  either  before  or  after  the  casting  has  been  poured,  as  may 
be  required,  and  shall  present  a  true  specimen  of  the  iron  used 
for  making  the  castings. 

If  any  two  test  bars  cast  the  same  day  do  not  show  the 
required  cross  breaking  load  and  deflection,  all  the  castings 
made  from  the  same  mixture  to  be  rejected. 

Each  valve  shall  have  the  maker's  initials,  the  numbers 
showing  point  in  time  of  casting,  and  the  year  cast  upon  it. 
The  year  above  and  the  number  below,  thus:  — j9-— ,  — 2~>  e*c> 

The  figures  and  letters  will  be  from  2  to  2  y2  inches  long, 
and  shall  have  at  least  ^  inch  relief. 

All  the  wrought  iron  used  shall  be  of  the  first  quality  of 
American  refined  iron. 

All  the  composition  metal  used,  except  the  valve  stem, 
shall  be  composed  of  the  following  proportions,  viz:  85  per 
cent,  copper,  10  per  cent,  tin,  and  5  per  cent,  spelter;  and 
shall  have  a  tensile  strength  of  not  less  than  22,000  pounds  per 
square  inch,  with  5  per  cent,  elongation  in  8  diameters,  and  5 
per  cent,  reduction  of  area  at  breaking  point. 

All  castings  must  conform  in  shape  and  dimensions  to  the 
drawings.  The  costings  must  be  clean  and  perfect,  without 
blow  or  sand  holes,  or  defects  of  any  kind.  No  plugging  or 
other  stopping  of  holes  will  be  allowed. 

The  valve  guides  must  be  straight  and  smooth.  Irregular- 
ities, if  any,  must  be  planed  or  chipped  off  smooth.  All  face 
joints  must  be  planed  true  and  smooth,  in  the  most  workman- 
like manner,  so  as  to  make  a  perfectly  water-tight  joint,  with  a 
very  thin  layer  of  strictly  pure  lead  cement. 

All  bolt  holes  must  be  accurately  drilled  from  templates. 
The  upper  part  of  valve  to  be  finished  to  receive  Che  valve 
stem,  collar  and  stuffing  box,  and  the  fitting  at  this  point  must 
be  such  as  to  secure  a  perfect  working  joint. 

The  valve  to  be  a  two-faced  wedge  valve ;  the  castings  for 
same  to  be  as  shown  on  drawing.  Tb~  raised  rims  to  be  turned 


214  ENGINEERING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

true  with  dovetailed  channel  to  hold  the  composition  ring's. 
The  faces  must  be  brought  to  the  exact  angle  before  the  rings 
are  put  on.  The  face  rings  are  to  be  of  composition  metal, 
of  quality  hereinbefore  specified,  and  are  to  be  turned  to  fit  the 
dovetail  in  the  iron  wedge.  The  composition  rings  of  valves 
must  be  shrunk  on,  and  also  fastened  by  copper  studs,  placed 
not  over  three  inches  apart — the  whole  to  be  then  brought  to  a 
true  plane  surface. 

The  upper  portion  of  the  wedge  to  be  arranged  to  receive 
the  composition  nut  as  shown.  Care  shall  be  taken  to  give  the 
composition  nut  a  perfect  bearing  surface — both  top  and  bottom. 

On  the  36  inch  and  30  inch  valves,  the  brass  bearings  of 
side  guides  shall  be  of  the  full  dimensions,  and  have  the  exact 
clearance  shown  on  drawings,  and  be  secured  in  place  by  coun- 
tersunk copper  studs,  placed  not  over  three  inches  apart,  after 
which  the  guides  shall  be  brought  to  a  true  and  smooth  surface. 

The  seats  for  rings  in  body  of  valve  shall  be  turned  true 
and  smooth,  and  to  the  required  angle  as  shown  on  drawings. 

The  seat  rings  shall  be  of  form  and  dimensions  as  shown 
on  drawings,  and  faced  true  and  smooth.  Seat  rings  to  be 
forced  into  position  and  thoroughly  and  securely  fastened  in 
place,  and  a  perfectly  water-tight  joint  secured. 

All  valves  of  10  inch  diameter  and  upwards  to  be  provided 
with  indicator  as  shown  on  drawings. 

All  wrought  iron  bolts  and  nuts  to  be  made  from  the  best 
quality  of  American  refined  iron.  The  nuts  to  be  hexagonal 
and  the  heads  square.  Heads,  nuts  and  threads  to  be  standard 
size. 

Valve  stem  shall  be  made  of  phosphor  bronze,  quality  B ; 
or  Crescent  bronze,  quality  No.  2  ;  or  of  first  quality  of  "Stuck- 
stede"  bronze,  and  shall  be  free  from  flaws  or  defects  of  any 
kind,  and  have  a  tensile  strength  of  not  less  than  30,000  pounds 
per  square  inch.  Screw  threads  on  the  stems  and  nuts  to  be 
cut  in  most  perfect  manner,  and  of  the  exact  pitch  shown  on  the 
drawings,  and  so  as  to  work  true  and  smooth,  and  in  perfect 
line  throughout  entire  lift  of  valve. 

There  shall  be  two  dowel  pins,  made  of  composition,  set 
in  the  flanges  connecting  the  dome  and  main  casting,  as  shown 
on  drawings,  for  the  purpose  ot  centering  and  bringing  into 
perfect  alignment  these  castings.  Holes  for  dowel  pins  to  be 
drilled  and  reamed  tapering,  and  pins  turned  to  perfect  fit. 
Pins  for  the  36  inch  and  30  inch  to  be  i  inch  in  diameter ;  for 
the  20  and  15  inch,  ^  inch  diameter;  for  the  12  and  10  inch, 
$/%  inch  diameter;  and  for  the  8  and  6  inch,  y2  inch  diameter. 

Gearing  to  be  extra  strong,  and  of  the  form  and  dimen- 
sions shown.  Pinion  post  to  be  of  a  good  quality  of  steel ; 
key  seats  shall  be  truly  cut,  and  keys  made  of  steel,  and  of  the 
full  dimensions. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOE   STOP   VALVES. 


215 


Cap  nuts  for  valve  wrench  to  be  of  the  following  outside 
dimensions:  for  all  6  to  15  inch  valves  (inclusive),  to  be  2 
inches  square;  for  the  20  inch,  to  be  2^  inches  square;  and  for 
the  30  and  36  inch,  to  be  3^  inches  square. 

All  iron  work,  after  being  thoroughly  cleaned,  to  be 
painted  with  three  good  coats  of  paraffine  varnish,  applied  hot. 
The  valves  shall  be  tested  by  hydraulic  pressure,  as  follows: 

First.  Heads  shall  be  secured  at  each  end  of  casting, 
the  valve  opened,  and  a  pressure  of  200  pounds  per  square 
inch  applied. 

Second.  Each  face  joint  of  valve  shall  be  tested  by  clos- 
ing the  valve,  leaving  one  end  of  the  casting  open,  and  apply- 
ing a  pressure  of  100  pounds  per  square  inch  to  the  other — this 
operation  to  be  reversed  to  test  the  other  face. 

Any  and  all  defects  developed  in  testing  shall  be  thor- 
oughly corrected  to  the  satisfaction  of  the  water  commissioner. 
After  testing  all  valves  to  be  thoroughly  drained. 

All  parts  of  valves  of  the  same  size  to  be  perfectly 
interchangeable. 

The  water  commissioner  may  take  at  random  any  wrought 
iron  bolt  or  nut,  and  have  it  broken  in  a  testing  machine.  If 
bolt  shall  not  fulfill  the  requirements  of  table  below,  the  whole 
lot  of  that  size  and  make  to  be  rejected : 


SIZE  OF  BOLT. 

TENSILE  BREAKING 
STRENGTH. 

REDUCTION  OF  AREA  AT 
BREAKING  POINT. 

5-8  inch. 

9,000  Ibs. 

20  per  cent. 

3-4 

13,000    " 

20  per  cent. 

7-8 

19,000   " 

20  per  cent. 

1 

25,000   " 

20  per  cent. 

1  1-8 

31,000    " 

20  per  cent\ 

1  1-4 

40,000    " 

20  per  centv 

1  1-2 

58,000    " 

20  per  cent. 

The  Water  Commissioner  may  take  at  random  any  valve 
stem  with  nut,  either  finished  or  unfinished,  for  6,  8,  10  or  12 
inch  valves,  and  have  it  broken  in  a  testing  machine. 

If  any  stem  or  nut  shall  not  fulfill  the  requirements  of  the 
table  below,  the  whole  lot  of  that  make  and  size  to  be 
rejected. 


SIZE  OF  VALVE. 

TENSILE  BREAKING 
STRENGTH  OF  STEM. 
(Including  Nut  and  Collar.) 

DUCTILITY  IN 
S  Diameter. 

6  inch. 
8      " 
10     " 
12      " 

34,000  Ibs. 
34,000     «' 
34,000     " 
42,000     " 

8  per  cent. 
8 
8        " 
8 

216  ENGINEEKING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

All  valve  stems  for  15  inch  and  larger  valves  to  be  cast 
with  a  coupon  on  one  end,  15  inches  long  by  i%  inches 
diameter.  Any  one  or  all  of  these  coupons  may  be  taken  by 
the  Water  Commissioner  and  broken  in  a  testing  machine.  If 
any  coupon  shall  show  a  breaking  strength  of  less  than  30,000 
Ibs.  per  square  inch,  or  shall  have  a  ductility  of  less  than  8  per 
cent,  in  8  diameters,  the  stem  from  which  it  was  cut  shall  be 
rejected. 

For  all  materials  taken  by  the  Water  Commissioner  for 
testing  which  are  found  to  conform  to  the  above  requirements, 
there  shall  be  added  to  the  final  estimate : 

For  all  wrought  iron 7  cents  per  pound. 

For  all  Phosphor  bronze 25  cents  per  pound. 

For  all  Crescent  bronze 25  cents  per  pound. 

For  all  Stuckstede  bronze 25  cents  per  pound. 

The  broken  material  to  belong  to  the  party  of  the  second  part. 
For  all  materials  taken  for  testing  which  do  not  come  up  to 
requirements  there  shall  be  no  allowance,  and  the  broken 
material  shall  be  returned  to  party  of  the  first  part.* 

The  whole  to  be  put  together  in  a  thorough  and  workman- 
like manner,  and  delivered,  packed,  ready  for  use.  The  work- 
ing parts  to  be  perfectly  fitted  together  and  working  true  in 
line.  The  joint  between  the  face  rings,  when  the  valve  is 
closed,  must  be  absolutely  water-tight.  The  whole  to  be  in 
material,  workmanship  and  finish,  to  the  satisfaction  and 
acceptance  of  the  water  commissioner.  M.  L.  H. 


LUMBER  GRADING  AND  CLASSIFICATION. 

145.  Rules  of  the  Southern  Lumber  Manufac- 
turers' Association.  The  rules  given  in  the  following 
articles  were  adopted  by  the  Southern  Lumber  Manufacturers' 
Association  at  Memphis,  Tennessee,  February  21,  1895.  They 
are  given  here  entire  to  assist  the  engineer  to  use  descriptive 
terms  in  the  same  sense  in  which  they  are  used  by  the  lumber 
manufacturers  and  dealers.  While  they  are  intended  to  apply 
only  to  southern  yellow  pine,  they  can  be  understood  to  apply 
in  a  general  way  to  all  merchantable  lumber.  Since  lumber  is 
always  sold  under  certain  grade  names,  and  since  in  the  large 

*  In  the  St.  Louis  specifications  the  contractor  is  the  party  of  the  first  part. 


LUMBER   GRADING   AND    CLASSIFICATION.  217 

markets  the  lumber  is  officially  graded,  it  is  sufficient  for  the 
engineer  and  architect  to  use  these  technical  terms  in  his  speci- 
fications, provided  he  knows  that  he  is  using  it  in  the  same 
sense  in  which  it  is  used  by  lumber  dealers  in  that  market.  If 
he  does  not  feel  safe  in  limiting  his  description  to  the  use  of 
such  technical  class  terms,  he  will  still  find  considerable  infor- 
mation in  the  following  official  rules,  which  will  enable  him 
better  to  describe  the  kind  of  lumber  which  he  wishes  to  have 
supplied. 

146.     General    Rules   for    Classifying    Lumber. 

The  following  general  rules  are  intended  to  serve  as  a  guide  to 
lumber  inspectors  in  enabling  them  to  classify  the  lumber  in 
accordance  with  the  grades  named  below  in  subsequent 
articles. 

1.  Yellow   pine    lumber    shall    be    graded  and  classified 
according  to  the  following  rules  and  specifications  as  to  quality; 
and  dressed  stock  shall  conform  to  the  subjoined  table  of  stand- 
ard sizes,  except  where  other vvise  expressly  stipulated  between 
buyer  and  seller. 

2.  *  Recognized  defects  in   yellow  pine    are   knots    (pin, 
round,   spike,    black,    encased,    loose    or    rotten),    knot    holes, 
splits  (either  from   seasoning,  ring-heart   or  rough  handling), 
shake,    wane,    crooks,    warp,   rotten    streaks,   dote,   rot,   worm 
holes,  pitch  pockets,  seasoning  or  kiln   checks,  blue   sap    and 
pitch  streaks. 

*Some  of  the  following  terms  may  need  defining:  Ring-heart  is  a  "shake"  or 
cleavage  along  the  plane  of  an  annual  ring,  usually  about  half  way  between  the  pith 
and  the  circumference.  "Shake"  or  "wind  shake"  is  a  cleavage  of  the  trunk  of  a  tree 
while  yet  standing,  due  to  the  action  of  the  wind  in  bending  the  trunk.  It  is  usually 
along  the  plane  of  an  annual  ring,  that  is  to  say,  concentric  with  the  center  or  pith  of 
the  tree. 

"Heart-shake"  is  a  diametral  or  radial  cleavage  through  the  tree  or  log.  If  it 
occurs  after  the  logs  are  cut,  or  in  large  timbers  after  they  are  sawed,  it  is  due  to  shrink- 
age in  drying.  This  is  the  common  defect  of  all  oak  logs  or  large  timbers. 

"Wane"  is  a  deficiency  in  width,  either  over  the  entire  edge  or  on  one  corner, 
caused  by  a  crook  in  the  log. 

"Crooks"  are  permanent  distortions  of  the  board,  due  to  defective  piling  or  from 
other  causes. 

"Warp"  is  a  twisting  of  the  board  into  a  warped  surface. 

"Seasoning  or  kiln  checKs"  are  either  very  small  or  large  cracks,  caused  by  dry- 
ing the  surface  of  the  board  with  its  accompanying  shrinkage,  while^the  interior  is  still 
wet. 

"Blue  sap"  is  a  discoloration,  which  green  yellow  pine  is  subject  to,  especially  the 
sap  portion,  if  not  at  once  piled  for  drying  or  placed  in  a  dry  kiln. 

"Pitch  streaks"  are  longitudinal  openings,  sometimes  of  considerable  size,  as  J£ 
inch  to  J^inch  wide  and  several  inches  (or  even  feet)  long,  filled  with  rosin. 


218  ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

3.  Bright  sap  shall  not  be  considered  a  defect   in    any  ot 
the  grades   provided   for   and   described    in    these  rules.      The 
restriction  or  exclusion  of  bright  sap  constitutes  a  special  class 
of  material  which  can  be  secured  only  by  specific  contract. 

4.  Firm  red  heart    shall    not   be    considered  a  defect  in 
common  grades. 

5.  Defects  in  rough  stock,  caused  by  improper  manufac- 
ture or  drying,  will  reduce  grade,  unless  they  can   be   removed 
in  working  such  stock  to  standard  sizes. 

6.  Imperfect    manufacture     in    dressed     stock,    such     as 
chipped,  grain  splintered  or  torn  places,  broken  knots  on    edge 
of  shiplap,  insufficient  tongue  on   flooring,  etc.,  shall  be   con- 
sidered defects,  and  reduce  grade  accordingly. 

7.  A  standard  knot  is  sound,  and  not  over   i^    inches   in 
diameter.     A  pin  knot  is  sound,  and  not  over  half  an  inch  in 
diameter. 

8.  Any  piece  that  will  not  work  one  half  its  size  shall  be 
classed  as  a  dead  cull. 

9.  The  grade  of  all  regular  stock  shall  be  determined  by 
the  number  and  position   of   the   defects   visible  in   any   piece. 
The  enumerated    defects    admissible   in    any   given    grade   are 
intended  to  be  descriptive  of  the  coarsest  pieces  such  grade  may 
contain.      The  average  quality  of    the  grade  should   be  midway 
between  such  pieces  and  the  defects  allowed  in  the  next  higher 
grade. 

10.  Lumber  or  timber  sawed  for  specific   purposes,  such 
as  wagon   tongues,   bridge    timbers,    car    sills,    etc.,    must    be 
inspected  with  a  view  to  the   adaptability  of  the  piece   for   the 
use  intended. 

11.  In  finishing,  flooring,   etc.,   the   enumerated    defects 
admissible  in  a  given  grade  apply  only  to  the  face   side   of  tke 
piece,  but  reverse  face  should   not   admit  defects   that  would 
render  the  piece  unsuitable  for  the  purpose  intended. 

12.  Standard  lengths  are  multiples  of  2  feet  from  10  to  20 
feet,  inclusive,  for  boards  and   strips,  and  from   10  to  24  feet, 
inclusive,  for  dimension,  joists  and  timbers.     Longer  or  shorter 
lengths  than  those  herein  specified   are  special.     Odd  lengths, 
if  below  24  feet,  shall  be  counted    as   of  the    next   higher  even 
length. 

13.  On  stock  width  shipments  of  8-inch   and   under  no 
board  shall  be  admissible  that  is   more  than  ^   inch  scant ;  on 
lo-inch  not  more  than  ^   inch,  and  on   12-inch  not  more  than 
T/2.  inch  scant  of  specified  width. 

14.  Yellow  pine  of  better  grade  than  No.  i   common  up 
to  4  inches  in  width   is   classified   according  to   grain   as   edge 
grain  and  flat  grain.      Edge  grain  yellow  pine   has  been   vari- 
oiuly  designated  as  rift-sawn,  straight  grain,  vertical  grain  and 
quarter-sawed,    all    being    commercially    synonymous    terms. 


LUMBER   GRADING   AND    CLASSIFICATION.  219 

Edge  grain  stock  is  specially  desirable  for  flooring,  and  admits 
no  piece  in  which  the  angle  of  the  grain  exceeds  forty-five 
degrees  from  vertical,  thus  excluding  all  pieces  that  will  sliver 
or  shell  from  wear.  Such  stock  as  will  not  meet  these  require- 
ments is  known  as  flat  grain. 

15.  All    dressed    and   matched   stock    shall  be  measured 
and  sold   "strip  count,"   i.  e.,    full   size  of   rough    strip    from 
which  such  stock  is  made — 3,  4,  5  and  6  inches  w7ide. 

1 6.  The  foregoing  general  observations  shall  apply  to  and 
govern    the    following    detailed     descriptive    enumeration     of 
recognized  grades. 

147.    Rules  for  Grading  Finishing  Lumber.    T\p*>^>< 

following  rules  for  grading  apply  to  all  kinds  of  finishing  stockV^/  e>P^\ 
whether  for  interior  or  out-door  work.  In  these  rules  such 
expressions  as  "S.  i  S."or  "S.  2  S."  mean  "surfaced  one  side," 
or  "surfaced  two  sides,"  respectively.  Also  "S.  i  S.  i  E."  will 
be  understood  to  mean  "surfaced  one  side  and  one  edge."  By 
surfacing  is  meant  planing  or  running  it  through  a  planing 
machine.  It  may  still  require  hand  dressing  for  the  best  work. 
Nearly  all  saw  mills  now  dry  their  lumber  and  run  it  through 
the  planer,  in  order  to  save  the  extra  freight  on  the  rough 
and  green  lumber. 

(Grades:     First  and   second   clear;  third   clear;  barn  and 
roofing  stocks). 

17.  First  and  Second   Clear  Finish,  i  inch,  S.  i  or  2 
S.,  up  to  and    including    10  inches   wide,  must   show  one   face 
clear  from  all  defects;  33^3    per  cent,  of  any  shipment  of  12  or 
14  inches  wide  will  admit  two  pin  knots  or  one  standard  knot, 
slight  pitch  streak,  or  small   pitch  pocket,  or  sap  stain  not  over 
\yz    inches    wide    running    across     the   face,   or  small   kiln    or 
seasoning  checks,  but  no  two  of  these  defects  shall  appear  in  a 
single  piece  ;  16  inches  wide  will  admit  of  two  defects  allowed  in 
12-inch  or   their  equivalent.      Wider   than    i6-inch   will    admit 
proportionately  more  defects.      Pieces  otherwise  admissible   in 
which   the   point  of   the  grain  has  been  loosened  or  slivered    in 
dressing  on  the  face  side  should  be  put  in  lower  grade.    Defec-   . 
tive  dressing  or  reverse  face  of  finishing  is  admissible.      In  case 
both  faces  are  desired  clear  special  contract  must  be  made. 

18.  Third  Clear  Finish,  i  inch,  S.  i  S.  or  28.,  up  to 
and  including  10  inches  in  width,  may  have  not  more  than  two, 
of  the  following  defects  on  best  or  face  side:      Three  pin  knots 
one  standard  knot;  three  sap  stains  2  inches  wide  running  across 


220  ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

the  face  or  their  equivalent;  two  pitch  pockets;  slight  pitch 
streaks,  kiln  or  seasoning  checks;  torn  places,  and  wane  which 
does  not  enter  more  than  i  inch,  nor  extend  more  than  2  feet; 
12-inch  will  admit  three  of  the  above  defects,  or  their  equiva- 
lent. This  grade  is  suitable  for  paint  finish. 

19.  i^,  i>^  and  2    inch,    S.  i  or  2  S.,  shall  take  i  inch 
inspection,    and  unless   otherwise   agreed   between   buyer    and 
seller,  shall   be  subject  to  inspection  on  face  or   best  side  only. 

20.  Barn  and  novelty  siding,    shiplap  and  grooved  roofing 
shall  be  8,  10  and  12  inches  wide,  and  consist  of  boards  falling 
below  third  clear  which  are   sound  and   water-tight,  free  from 
coarse  knots  and  wane  over  i  inch  wide  extending  more  than   3 
feet  in   any  piece.     Pitch,  except  in  narrow  streaks,  should  be 
excluded. 

21.  Edge-Grain  Flooring.   (Grades:   First  clear,  second 
clear).     First  clear  edge-grain  flooring  must  be  well  manufac- 
tured, and  free  from  all  defects  on  face  side  of  strip. 

22.  Second  clear  edge-grain  flooring  will  admit  of  three 
pin  knots  or  one  standard  knot,  or  small  pitch  pocket,  or  blue 
sap  stain  not  to  exceed  10  per  cent,  of  the  face. 

23.  Flat-Grain  Flooring.     (Grades:     A  flat,  B   flat). 
A  flat    flooring    may    contain   two    pin    knots    or    one    small 
pitch  pocket,  but  shall   be  free  from   other  defects,  and   must 
be    well    manufactured.     Pieces    in    which    the    point    of    the 
grain  has   been    loosened  in   dressing  should  be   put  in   lower 
grade. 

24.  B    flat    flooring  may  have  any  two  of  the  following 
defects:    Three  pin  knots  or  one  standard  knot,  slight  sap  stains, 
small  pitch  pockets,  slight  torn  places  and  defects  in  manufac- 
ture, narrow   pitch   streaks   and   seasoning   checks.     When   all 
other  defects  are  absent,  blue  sap  stain  in  any  quantity  shall  be 
admitted. 

25.  Common  Flooring.     (Grades:     No.  i  common,  No. 
2  common).     No.  i    common  flooring   must  be   manufactured 
from   sound   stock.     In  addition  to  the  defects   described   in   B 
flat,  also  admits  of  sound  knots,  blue  sap  and  firm  red  heart  in 
any    quantity,    pitch    and   slight   shake,  but  must  lay   without 
waste.      No  division  as  to  grain  is  made  in  this  grade. 

26.  No.  2  common  flooring   includes  all   pieces  that  will 
not  grade  No.  i   cofnmon  which   can  be  laid  without  wasting 
more  than  one  fourth  the  length  of  any  piece.      This  grade  will 
admit  imperfections  which  do  not  render  the  piece  unfit  for  use 
in  cheap  floors  and  roof  sheathing. 

27.  Center-matched  flooring  shall  be  required  to  come  up 
to  grade  on  one  face  only. 

28.  Ceiling.     (Grades:    A,  B,  C).     A  ceiling   shall  be 
free  from  all  defects  on  face  side  and  well  manufactured. 


LUMBER   GRADING   AND   CLASSIFICATION.  221 

29.  B  ceiling  will  admit  slight  imperfections  in  dressing — 
three   pin  knots   or   one    standard  knot,  pitch   streaks   or   small 
pitch  pockets,  or  blue  sap  stain  not  to  exceed  10  per  cent  of  the 
face ;  but  not  more  than  two  of  these  defects  to  be  admitted  in 
any  piece. 

30.  C  ceiling  conforms  to  grade  of  No.  i  common  flooring 
and  is  suitable  for  paint  finish.      Will  admit  imperfections  that 
do  not  prevent  its  use  without  waste. 

31.  Wagon  Bottoms.   (Grades:   A,  B).    Wagon  bottoms 
shall  be  graded  the  same  as  flat  grain  flooring. 

32.  Bevel  and  Drop  Siding.      (Grades:   A,  B   and  C). 
Shall  be  graded  according  to  ceiling  rules,  but  will   admit  more 
blue  stain,  and,  except  in  C  grade,  should  exclude  pitch.   Slight 
additional  imperfections  on  the  thin  edge  of  bevel  siding  which 
will  be  covered  by  the  lap  are  admissible. 

33.  Partition.    (Grades:     A,  B  and  C).     Partition  shall 
conform  to  ceiling  grades,  but  must  meet  the  requirements  of 
the  specified  grade  only  on   one  face.     The   reverse  face  shall 
not  be  more  than  one  grade  lower. 

34.  Molded  Casings  and  Base.      (Grades:      First   clear, 
second  clear).     First  clear  shall  be  free  of  all  defects  on  face 
and  perfect  in  manufacture. 

35.  Second  clear  is  suitable  for  work  that  is  to  receive  a 
paint    finish,    and   usually    consists   of   rejections,    made   after 
dressing,  from  stock  inspected  in  the  rough  as  first  clear.     The 
defects  admitted  in  B  ceiling  would  be  allowed. 

148.    Rules  for  Grading  Common  Boards  and 
Rough  Lumber. 

COMMON    BOARDS    AND    SHIPLAP. 

36.  No.  i  common  boards,  S.  i  S.,   and  No.    I    common 
shiplap  shall  be  manufactured  from  sound  stock,  of  even  thick- 
ness the  entire  length.      Will  admit  of  any  two  of  the  following 
defects:      Wane  one  half  inch  deep  on   edge    and  one  sixth  the 
length  of  any  piece  ;   tight  sound  knots,  none  of  which  shall  be 
larger  than  three  inches  in  diameter,  or  equivalent  spike  knots; 
one   split   not   more   than   sixteen   inches   long,    and   blue  sap. 
These  boards  should  be  firm  and  strong,  suitable  for  use  in  all 
ordinary  construction  and  serviceable  without  waste. 

37.  No.    2   common  boards   and  No.    2   common  shiplap 
admit   pieces   that  fall  below  No.    i    common   which   are  free 
from   the  following   defects :      Rotten   streaks   that  go  through 
the  piece,    through   heart  shakes   which  extend    more  than  one 
half  the  length  of  the  piece,    and   wane   over  two  inches  wide 
exceeding  one  third   of   the   length  of  the  piece.      A  knot  hole 
i^£   inches  in  diameter  or  its  equivalent  will  be    allowed,   pro- 
vided the  piece  would  otherwise  grade  No.  i  common.    Worm 


222  ENGINEEKING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

holes  and  straight  splits  one   fourth   of  the   length  of  the  piece 
are  admissible. 

FENCING    S.    I    S. 

38.  No.  i  common   fencing  must  be  manufactured  from 
sound  stock.     May  contain   sound   knots   equal    in  diameter  to 
not    over    one    third    the    width   of   piece    at  any    given   point 
throughout   its   length,   but  must  be   free   from  spike  knots  the 
length  of  which  is  over  one  half  the  width  of  piece.     Also,  free 
from  wane  over  one  half   inch   deep  on   edge  and   one  half  the 
length  of   any  piece   measured  on  one  side.     This  grade  must, 
work  its  full  length  without  waste. 

39.  No.  2  common  fencing  shall  admit  of  pieces  that  fall 
below    No.    i    common    which    are    free    from  through   rotten 
streaks. 

40.  Miscut  i  inch  stock  in  boards  and  fencing  which  does 
not  fall  below  ^  inch   thick   shall  be   admitted   in  No.  2,  com- 
mon, provided  that  the  grade  of  such  thin   stock  is  in  all  other 
respects  as  good  as  No.  i  common. 

DIMENSION    S.      I     S.     I   E. 

41.  No.  I    Common  Dimension   shall   be    manufactured 
from  sound  stock,   and  be  free  from   loose  and  unsound  knots, 
and  large  knots  so  located  as  to  materially  impair  the  strength 
of  the  piece  ;   will  admit  of   seasoning  checks   and  heartshakes 
that  do  not  go  through,  of  slight   wane  and   such  other   defects 
as  do  not  prevent  its  use  as  substantial  structural  material. 

42.  JVo.  2  Common   Dimension   admits  all  pieces  falling 
below    No.    i    common    which  are   free    from    through    rotten 
streaks,  and  sound  enough  to  be  used  without  waste. 

43.  Miscut  2  inch  stock  which    does  not  fall  below    i^ 
inch  shall  be    admitted   in   No.    2   common,   provided  that   the 
grade  of  such  thin  stock  is  in  all  other  respects  as  good  as  No. 
i   common. 

44.  In  boards,  fencing  and  dimension,  stock  falling  below 
No.  2  grade  and  excluding  dead  culls  shall  be  classed  as  No.  3. 

45.  Dressed  timbers  shall  conform  in  grade  to  the  speci- 
fications applying  to  rough  timbers  of  similar  size. 

ROUGH    YELLOW    PINE FLOORING    STRIPS     AND    FINISHING. 

46.  Flooring   strips   are  3   inches,  4  inches,   5   inches  and 
6   inches  wide   when   green ;    square-edged   and  evenly    manu- 
factured. 

47.  Finish    must    be    evenly    manufactured,     and     shall 
embrace  all   sizes  from    i  inch  to    2   inches  thick   by   six  inches 
and  over  in  width. 

48.  No  finishing  lumber,  unless  otherwise  ordered,  should 
measure  when  dry  and  rough  less  than  ^  inch    scant  in  thick- 


LUMBER   GRADING   AND    CLASSIFICATION.  223 

ness.  No  piece  in  any  shipment  of  boards  and  strips  shall  be 
more  than  %  inch  scant  on  6  and  8  inch  stock,  ^  inch  scant 
on  10  and  l/t  inches  scant  on  12  inch  and  wider  stock. 

49.  Wane    and   seasoning  checks   that  will   dress   out  in 
working  to  standard  thicknesses  and  widths  are  admissible. 

50.  Subject   to  the   foregoing  provisions  rough  finishing 
shall  be  graded  according  to  the  specifications  applying  to  dress 
finishing.      When   like   grade  of   both  faces  is  required  special 
contract  should  be  made. 

COMMON    BOARDS,    FENCING    AND    DIMENSION. 

51.  Rough    Common    Boards    and    Fencing    must    be 
evenly  manufactured,  and  should  not  be  less  than  ^   inch  thick 
when  dry,  nor  more  than  %  inch  scant  of  specified  width. 

52.  Rough  2  inch  Common  shall  be  evenly  manufactured 
and    not    less  than  i^j    inches  thick  when  green,  or  i^    inches 
thick  when  dry.      The  several  widths  must  not  be  less  than   % 
inch  over  the  standard  dressing  width  for  such  stock. 

53.  The  defects   admissible   in  rough   rock  shall  be  the 
samfc  as  those  applying  to  dressed  stock  of  like  kind  and  grade, 
but   such   further   defects   as   would   disappear   in   dressing    to 
standard  size  of  such  material  shall  be  allowed. 

54.  Rough  timbers  6x6  and  larger  shall  not  be  more  than 
^  inch  scant   when   green  and  be   evenly   manufactured    from 
sound  stock  with  not  less  than  three  square  edges,  and  must  be 
free  from  knots  that  will  materially  weaken  the  piece. 

55.  Timbers    10x10  in   size  may  have   a  2  inch  wane  on 
one  corner,  or  its  equivalent  on  two  or  more  corners,  one  fourth 
the  length  of  the   piece.     Other   sizes   may   have  proportionate 
defects. 

56.  Seasoning  checks,  and  shakes  extending  not  over  one 
eighth  the  length  of  the  piece,  are  admissible. 

149.  Standard  Dimensions  of  the  Southern 
Lumber  Manufacturers'  Association.* 

Flooring.  The  standard  of  1x4  and  6  inch  shall  be 
ilx3/i  and  5/i  inches;  \]^  inch  flooring,  i3^2  inches. 

Ceiling.  3/&  inch  ceiling,  r5g  inch ;  ^  inch  ceiling, 
£Q  inch;  y$  inch  ceiling,  a-6  inch;  ^  inch  ceiling,  \\  inch; 
same  width  as  flooring. 

Finishing,  i  inch,  S  i  S  or  S  2  S,  to  ^-J;  i^(  inch, 
S  i  S  or  S  2  S,  to  i  3-2  inch;  i^  inch,  S  i  S  or  S  2  S,  to 
\\\  inches;  2  inch,  S  i  S  or  S  2  S,  to  i^  inches. 

Boards  'and  Fencing,     i  inch,  S  i  S  or  S  2  S,  to  13-16. 

*These  particular  dimensions  can  not  be  assumed  to  hold  for  all  parts  of  the 
country. 


224  ENGINEEKING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

Dimension.  2x4,  S  i  S  i  E,  to  1^x3^  inches;  2x6, 
S  i  S  i  E,  to  1^x5^4  inches;  2x8,  S  i  S  i  E,  1^x7^ 
inches;  2x10,  S  i  S  i  E,  to  1^5x9^  inches;  2x12,  S  i  S 
i  E,  to  ifixnj^  inches;  4x4,  3/%  inch  off  side  and  edge; 
4x4,  S  4  S,  %  inch  off  each  side. 

150.  Specification  for  Thoroughly  Seasoned 
Lumber.  There  is  no  difference  between  "seasoned"  lum- 
ber and  "dried"  lumber.  "Thoroughly  seasoned"  or  "thor- 
oughly dried"  lumber  is  lumber  which  has  been  dried,  either  in 
the  open  air  or  in  a  dry  kiln,  until  it  has  reached  that  state  of 
dryness  which  is  relatively  permanent.  It  then  contains  water 
equal  to  about  ten  per  cent,  of  its  weight.  This  is  what  might 
be  called  the  atmospheric  moisture.  This  will  remain  in  the 
wood  unless  driven  off  by  evaporation  at  a  temperature  of  212 
degrees  Fahrenheit  or  more.  The  word  "thoroughly"  when 
used  in  this  connection,  means  "uniformly"  as  well  as  "effect- 
ually." That  is,  "thoroughly  dried"  lumber  is  dried  uniformly 
throughout  its  entire  cross-section  and  throughout  its  entire 
length. 

To  determine  the  percentage  of  moisture  of  lumber  it  is 
only  necessary  to  cut  a  section  from  a  board  or  stick  and  weigh 
it;  then  dry  in  an  ordinary  stove  oven  with  a  slow  fire  for  an 
hour  or  two  and  then  weigh  again ;  the  difference  in  weight 
divided  by  the  dry  weight  is  the  percentage  of  moisture.  As 
determined  by  this  test,  "thoroughly  dry  lumber"  should  not 
contain  more  than  ten  or  twelve  per  cent,  of  water,  and  the 
interior  should  be  as  dry  as  the  exterior. 

The  necessity  for  using  thoroughly  dried  lumber  where 
shrinkage  is  to  be  avoided,  arises  from  the  fact  that  below  about 
JO  per  cent,  moisture  lumber  shrinks  nearly  as  much  as  it 
dries.  That  is  to  say,  when  lumber  dries  down  from  30  per 
cent,  moisture  to  10  per  cent,  moisture  it  dries  out,  or  loses 
in  weight,  20  per  cent,  of  its  dry  weight.  It  also  loses  about  20 
per  cent,  of  its  dry  volume,  or  say  15  per  cent,  of  its  volume  at 
30  per  cent,  moisture.  The  shrinkage  lengthwise  is  very  slight, 


SPECIFICATIONS  FOB  CAST  IRON.         225 

hence  it  has  lost  about  15  per  cent,  of  its  cross-section,  or  say 
six  or  seven  per  cent,  of  each  of  its  lateral  dimensions.  That 
is  to  say  a  board  one  foot  wide  at  30  per  cent,  moisture  is  only 
about  iif£  inches  wide  at  10  per  cent,  moisture;  or  a  floor- 
ing board  4  inches  wide  at  20  per  cent,  moisture  is  only  about 
3^4  inches  wide  at  10  per  cent,  moisture.  On  account  of  the 
very  large  radial  fibres  (medullary  rays)  in  oak  wood,  this 
kind  of  lumber  shrinks  mostly  in  a  circumferential  direction, 
and  all  timber  shrinks  more  circumierentially  than  radially 
since  all  woods  have  these  medullary  rays  to  a  greater  or  less 
extent.  It  is  for  this  reason  that  * 'quarter  sawed"  (radial 
sawed)  lumber  is  more  satisfactory  than  "flat  sawed"  for  all 
kinds  of  furniture  and  house  trimmings.  For  flooring  quarter 
sawed,  or  "rift  sawed"  boards,  presenting  an  "edge-grain" 
surface,  is  far  preferable  to  "flat-grain"  because  it  wears  evenly 

and  does  not  sliver  on  the  surface. 

* 

The  specification  may  read  as  follows: 

All   the   lumber  delivered  under   this  contract,   to  be  used 

for  purposes   of ,    shall    be   thoroughly  seasoned  or 

dried,  either  in  the  open  air  or  in  a  kiln  or  both.  By  "thor- 
oughly seasoned"  as  here  used  is  meant  a  seasoning  or  drying 
uniformly  throughout  the  entire  sections  of  the  various  sizes 
delivered,  and  the  average  percentage  of  moisture  contained  in 
the  lumber  when  delivered  shall  not  be  more  than  ten  per  cent, 
of  its  weight,  as  determined  by  actual  experiment. 


SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  IRON  AND  STEEL. 

151 .  Specification  for  Cast  Iron.  There  is  prob- 
ably no  material  in  engineering  structures  which  can  more 
profitably  be  governed  by  specifications  involving  tests  than 
cast  iron.  Since  cast  iron  usually  breaks  under  some  kind  of 
shock  or  blow,'  it  is  more  necessary  to  test  the  iron  for  resilience 
than  for  strength.  The  most  convenient  test  for  resilience  is 
15 


226  ENGINEERING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

the  cross-bending  test,  in  which  deflection  is  measured.  The 
half  product  of  the  deflection  multiplied  by  the  breaking  load 
is  the  mathematical  measure  of  the  resilience  in  inch  pounds. 
This  can  be  reduced  to  an  absolute  unit  by  dividing  by  either 
the  weight  or  the  volume  of  the  bar,  and  if  all  the  bars  tested 
in  this  way  are  rectangular  in  cross-section  and, of  uniform  size 
from  end  to  end,  the  unit  obtained  in  the  above  manner  will 
be  comparable,  notwithstanding  great  variations  in  the  dimen- 
sions. It  is  best,  however,  to  have  the  test  specimens  always 
made  from  the  same  pattern,  using  the  thickness  of  metal 
which  corresponds  closely  to  the  average  thickness  of  web  of 
the  castings  required.  If  uniform  test  specimens  be  employed, 
there  is  no  necessity  of  dividing  the  half  product  of  deflection 
and  breaking  load  by  the  volume  or  by  the  weight,  since  this 
volume  or  weight  remains  a  constant.  In  this  case  the  relative 
resilience  of  the  material  will  be  indicated  by  the  product  of 
the  breaking  load  into  the  maximum  deflection.  The  strength 
of  the  material  will  be  indicated  by  the  breaking  load  alone. 

The  following  specification  is  the  one  commonly  employed 
for  all  castings  made  for  the  water  department  of  St.  Louis, 
and  is  designed  to  answer  the  above  requirements. 

Cast  Iron. 

All  of  the  iron  castings  shall  be  made  from  a  superior 
quality  of  iron,  remelted  in  the  cupola  or  air  furnace,  tough 
and  of  even  grain,  and  shall  possess  a  tensile  strength  of  not 
less  than  18,000  pounds  per  square  inch. 

Test  bars  of  the  metal  3  inches  by  yz  inch,  when  broken 
transversely,  18  inches  between  supports,  and  loaded  in  the 
center,  shall  have  a  breaking  load  of  not  less  than  1,000  pounds 
and  shall  have  a  total  deflection  of  not  less  than  3-10  of  an 
inch  before  breaking.*  Said  bars  to  be  cast  as  near  as  possi- 
ble to  the  above  dimensions  without  finishing;  but  correction 
will  be  made  by  the  water  commissioner  for  variations  in  thick- 
ness and  width,  and  the  corrected  result  must  conform  to  above 
requirements. 

*The  tensile  strength  may  be  raised  to  20,000  or  even  to  25,900  pounds  per  square 
inch,  while  the  deflection  may  be  made  %  inch  for  ordinary  good  cast  iron  and  %  inch 
for  a  better  quality.  For  a  superior  quality  it  may  be  made  f£  inch,  with  a  breaking 
load  of  1250  pounds.  . 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOK   WROUGHT   IRON.  227 

Specimen  bars  of  the  metal  used,  of  a  size  and  form  suit- 
able for  testing,  shall  be  prepared  when  required. 

These  specimen  b.irs  shall  be  poured  from  the  ladle  at 
any  time,  either  before  or  after. the  casting  has  been  poured, 
as  may  be  required,  and  shall  present  a  true  specimen  of  the  iron 
used  for  making  the  castings. 

If  any  two  test  bars  cast  the  same  day  show  a  breaking 
strength  of  less  than  18,000  pounds  per  square  inch,  or  do  not 
show  the  required  cross-breaking  load  and  deflection,  all  the 
castings  made  from  the  same  mixture  to  be  rejected. 

All  castings  shall  conform  to  the  shape  and  dimensions 
required  by  the  drawings,  and  shall  be  clean  and  perfect,  with- 
out blow  or  sand  holes,  or  defects  of  any  kind.  No  plugging 
or  other  stopping  of  holes  will  be  allowed. 

Particular  care  shall  be  taken  to  secure  perfect  lugs,  where 
such  are  required  by  the  drawings.  Whenever  any  doubt 
exists  ot  the  exact  interpretation  as  to  the  shape  or  dimensions 
shown  on  the  drawings,  the  .contractor  must  consult  with  the 
water  commissioner,  or  his  duly  authorized  agent,  in  regard 
thereto.  M.  L.  H. 

152.     Specification  for  Wrought  Iron.    Since  the 

cost  of  the  manufacture  of  soft  and  mild  steel  has  been  so 
greatly  reduced  as  to  enable  this  material  to  compete  in  price 
with  that  of  wrought  iron,  the  wrought  iron  mills  have  been 
driven  to  cheapen  their  product,  and  they  do  this  by  hurrying 
tlie  metal  through  the  puddling  process  too  rapidly.  The 
result  is  that  whereas  steel  has  been  constantly  improved  for 
structural  purposes  wrought  iron  has  constantly  degenerated. 
It  is  necessary,  therefore,  now  to  examine  and  test  the  wrought 
iron  very  rigidly  to  insure  against  obtaining  a  comparatively 
worthless  product.  It  is  thought  the  following  specification  is 
sufficient  for  this  purpose,  provided  it  is  followed  up  by  suitable 

tests. 

Wrought  Iron. 

All  wrought  iron  used  must  be  tough,  ductile  and  fibrous, 
of  a  uniform  quality,  free  from  crystalline  structure,  cinders, 
flaws  or  cracks.  In  bars,  it  must  have  an  ultimate  strength  of 
50.000  pounds  per  square  inch,  with  26,000  pounds  elastic 
limit  and  an  elongation  of  25  per  cent,  in  eight  inches.  Angle 
iron  must  have  an  ultimate  strength  of  48,000  pounds  per 
square  inch,  24,000  pounds  elastic  limit,  with  20  per  cent, 
elongation  in  eight  inches.  A.  P.  B. 


228  ENGINEEBING-   SPECIFICATIONS. 

153.  Specification  for  Structural  Steel.  While 
ordinarily  it  is  not  wise  for  a  civil  engineer  to  specify  methods 
of  manufacture,  the  author  of  this  work  believes  thnt  it  is  advis- 
able in  the  case  of  structural  steel  to  limit  the  manufacture  to 
the  open-hearth  process,  and  also  to  limit  the  product  to  that 
supplied  by  the  manufacturers  of  established  reputation.  It  is 
now  an  easy  matter  to  obtain  any  desired  grade  of  structural 
steel  from  that  having  a  strength  of  55,000  pounds  to  that  hav- 
ing a  strength  of  70,000  pounds,  wherein  the  ultimate  elonga- 
tion of  a  test  specimen  eight  inches  in  length  will  be  from  33 
per  cent,  to  35  per  cent,  for  the  softer  grades,  to  20  per  cent. 
or  25  per  cent,  for  the  higher  grades.  It  is  important  also  to 
limit  the  phosphorus,  as  this  produces  brittleness.  The  best  of 
this  material  can  be  bent  cold  upon  itself  and  mashed  flat  with- 
out showing  signs  of  failure  up  to  a  thickness  of  plate  of  S/%  of 
an  inch.  Steel  manufactured  by  the  open-hearth  process  is 
usually  more  uniform  in  character,  and  if  care  is  taken  in  its 
manufacture  as  is  necessary  under  rigid  specifications,  it  is 
always  possible  to  obtain  the  desired  results.  The  following 
specification  is  probably  fully  up  to  the  present  practice  in  this 
direction. 

All  steel  used  shall  be  open-hearth,  made  at  works  of 
established  reputation,  and  which  have  been  successfully  man- 
ufacturing steel  for  at  least  one  year.  All  melts  must  be  made 
from  uniform  stock  in  which  phosphorus  shall  never  exceed 
ei^ht  hundredths  of  one  per  cent.  A  sample  bar  must  be 
rolled  from  each  melt,  of  three  quarters  of  an  inch  an  diameter, 
the  method  of  obtaining  the  same  being  uniform  for  all  melts. 
Tests  upon  such  samples  to  be  made  without  annealing.  Tests 
shall  also  be  made  upon  specimens  cut  from  the  finished 
product.  The  three-quarter-round  tests  must  conform  to  the 
requirements  hereinafter  given,  and  the  finished  product  tests 
cut  from  shapes  and  plates  must  conform  to  the  same  within 
four  per  cent.  Every  piece  of  steel  shall  be  stamped  with  a 
number  identifying  the  melt,  and  a  full  record  of  all  laboratory 
tests  kept.  Three  qualities  of  steel  will  be  required. 

First — For  the  main  trusses,  floor  beams  and  stringers 
and  cross  girders,  exhibiting  an  ultimate  strength  of  sixty-three 
to  seventy  thousand  pounds  per  square  inch,  a  minimum 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOB   STRUCTURAL    STEEL.  229 

elastic  limit  of  thirty-seven  thousand  pounds  per  square  Inch, 
with  an  elongation  in  eight  inches  of  not  less  than  twenty-two 
per  cent.,  and  a  reduction  of  area  of  not  less  than  forty-four 
per  cent. 

Second — For  buckle  plates,  caisson  plates,  rivets,  or  where 
wrought  iron  is  perrni:ted  (and  in  lieu  thereof),  a  steel  having 
an  ultimate  strength  not  exceeding  sixty-two  thousand  pounds 
per  square  inch,  or  less  than  fifty-five  thousand  pounds,  with 
fifty-eight  per  cent,  elastic  limit,  a  reduction  in  area  of  fifty 
per  cent,  and  an  elongation  in  eight  inches  of  twenty-eight  per 
cent.* 

Third — For  wheel  treads  of  track  circle  in  turn-table,  a 
steel  having  an  ultimate  strength  of  from  seventy  thousand 
to  eighty  thousand  pounds  per  square  inch,  with  sixty  per  cent, 
elastic  limit. 

The  first  two  steels  to  be  subject  to  bending  test,  before 
and  after  quenching,  and  the  metal  when  cold  must  bend  one 
hundred  and  eighty  degrees  upon  itself  without  sign  of  fracture 
in  convex  side.  Specimens  must  withstand  such  punch,  drift- 
ing, and  forge  tests  as  may  be  required  to  test  soundness,  tem- 
per and  ductility. 

All  metal,  whether  steel  or  iron  must  be  clean  rolled, 
and  any  imperfect  work,  such  as  ragged  or  cracked  edges,  sur- 
face imperfections,  or  imperfectly  rolled  shapes,  will  be  suffi- 
cient cause  for  rejection.  Materials  will  be  also  rejected  vary- 
ing more  than  two  and  one  half  per  cent,  from  weights  or  sizes. 

A.  P.  B. 

154.     Tests,     Inspection,    and    Acceptance     of 

Medium  Structural  Steel.  The  following  specifications 
were  prepared  in  1895  for  the  Northwestern  Elevated  Railroad 
of  Chicago,  and  represents  the  latest  and  best  American  prac- 
tice : 

All  steel  shall  be  manufactured  by  either  the  acid  or  the 
basic  open  hearth  process,  preference  being  given  to  the  former, 
and  must  be  uniform  in  character  for  each  specified  kind.  Any 
attempt  to  substitute  Bessemer  or  any  other  steel  for  the  open 
hearth  product,  will  be  considered  as  a  violation  of  the  contract, 
and  a  good  and  sufficient  reason  for  canceling  the  same. 

It  is  understood  also  that,  if  the  contract  be  let  on  the 
basis  of  using  acid  open  hearth  steel,  no  basic  open  hearth 
steel  will  be  permitted  to  be  employed  in  any  part  of  the  work ; 
but,  if  the  contract  be  let  on  the  basis  of  using  basic  open 
hearth  steel,  the  employment  of  the  acid  open  hearth  product 

*This  is  the  common  specification  for  steel  plates   used   for  boilers,  stand-pipes, 
plate-girders,  etc, 


230  ENGINEEKING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

will  be  permitted  whenever  the  contractor  may  desire  to  use  it, 
provided,  of  course,  that  it  comply  with  these  specifications. 

The  maximum  limits  for  phosphorus  shall  be  as  follows: 

For  acid  open  hearth  steel,  eight  hundredths  of  one  per 
cent.  (0.08  per  cent.). 

For  basic  open  hearth  steel,  five  hundredths  of  one  per 
cent.  (0.05  per  cent.). 

Each  ingot  which  is  cast  shall  be  stamped  or  marked 
plainly  with  its  proper  melt  number,  and  this  melt  number 
must  br  stamped  or  painted  plainly  on  all  blooms,  billets  or 
slabs  made  from  such  ingots,  in  order  to  identify  the  material 
throughout  its  various  processes  of  manufacture ;  and  the 
proper  melt  number  together  with  the  furnace  heat  number 
must  be  stamped  plainly  on  each  piece  of  finished  material. 

All  finished  material  must  be  free  from  injurious  seams, 
flaws  or  cracks,  and  must  have  a  clean,  smooth  finish. 

All  slabs  for  rolling  p^tes  must  be  hammered  or  rolled 
from  ingots  of  at  least  twice  their  cross  section. 

Test  Bars. 

The  tests  shall  be  made  in  the  following  manner: 
The  tensile  strength,  limit  of  elasticity  and  ductility  shall 
be  determined  from  standard  test  pieces,  not  less  than  three 
eighths  (ffj)  of  an  inch  in  thickness,  and  from  full  sized  pieces, 
tooled  to  parallel  sides.  If  the  cross  section  be  reduced,  the 
tangent  between  shoulders  shall  be  not  less  than  eight  (8) 
inches,  and  the  area  of  the  minimum  cross  section  in  either 
case  shall  not  be  less  than  one  half  (%)  of  a  square  inch,  and 
preferably  not  more  than  one  and  a  half  (1^2)  square  inches. 
When  of  a  rectangular  cross  section,  two  opposite  sides  of  the 
piece  are  to  be  left,  if  practicable,  as  they  come  from  the  rolls, 
but  the  finish  of  opposite  sides  must  be  the  same  in  this  respect. 
A  full  sized  piece,  when  not  exceeding  the  above  limita- 
tions," may  be  used  as  its  own  test  piece. 

Tensile   Tests. 

The  ultimate  tensile  strength  of  all  steel,  except  that  used 
for  rivets  and  adjustable  members,  shall  be  sixty  four  thousand 
(64,000)  pounds  per  square  inch. 

Steel  for  rivets  and  adjustable  members  shall  have  an  ulti- 
mate tensile  strength  of  fifty  seven  thousand  (57.000)  pounds- 
per  square  inch. 

All  test  bars  must  have  a  tensile  strength  within  four 
thousand  (4.000)  pounds  per  square  inch  of  that  specified  ;  and 
for  medium  steel  an  elastic  limit  not  less  than  one  half  of  the 
tensile  strength  of  the  test  bar,  a  percentage  of  elongation  not 
less  than  1,500,000  divided  by  the  tensile  strength  in  pounds 
per  square  inch,  and  a  percentage  of  reduction  of  area  not  less 


SPECIFICATIONS    FOE   IRON    AND    STEEL.  231 

than  3,000,000  divided  by  the  tensile  strength  in  pounds  per 
square  inch.  In  determining  the  ductility,  the  elongation  shall 
be  measured  after  breaking  on  an  original  length  of  eight  (8) 
inches,  in  which  length  must  occur' the  curve  of  reduction  from 
stretch  on  both  sides  of  the  point  of  fracture. 

For  rivet  steel  the  elastic  limit  must  not  fall  below  thirty 
thousand  (30,000)  pounds,  the  elongation  in  eight  (S)  inches 
shall  not  be  less  than  twenty-five  (25)  per  cent.,  and  the  reduc- 
tion of  area  shall  be  at  least  fifty  (50)  per  cent. 

All  broken  samples  must  show  a  silky  fracture  of  uniform 
color. 

Bending  and  Drifting  Tests. 

Specimens  of  medium  steel,  when  heated  to  a  cherry  red 
and  cooled  in  water  at  seventy  (70)  degrees  Fahrenheit,  shall 
be  capable  of  bending  one  hundred  and  eighty  (180)  degrees 
around  a  circle  whose  diameter  is  equal  to  the  thickness  of  the 
test  piece,  without  showing  signs  of  cracking  on  the  convex 
side  of  the  bend. 

Punched  rivet  holes  in  medium  steel,  pitched  two  (2) 
diameters  from  a  sheared  edge,  must  stand  drifting  until  their 
diameters  are  fifty  (50)  per  cent,  greater  thrm  those  of  the 
original  holes,  and  must  show  no  signs  of  cracking  the  metal. 

Specimens  of  rivet  or  soft  steel  shall  be  capable  of  bending 
cold  to  one  hundred  and  eighty  (180)  degrees  and  closing 
down,  flat,  upon  themselves  without  cracking. 

Number  of  Test  Pieces. 

At  least  three  tests  for  tensile  strength,  etc.,  and  three  for 
bending  shall  be  made  on  specimens  from  different  ingots  o£ 
each  melt.  These  tests  shall  be  made  by  the  contractor  with-*, 
out  charge,  and  if  the  consulting  engineer  or  his  authorized,' 
inspector  be  not  satisfied  that  the  tensile  test  correctly  indicates; 
the  effect  of  the  heating  and  rolling,  such  additional  tests  for 
tensile  strength,  limit  of  elasticity  and  ductility,  as  he  may 
desire,  shall  be  made  for  him  on  test  pieces  conforming  to  the 
provisions  named  above,  at  the  rate  of  one  dollar  ($1.00)  each; 
or,  if  the  contractor  desire  additional  tests,  he  may  make  them 
at  his  own  expense  under  the  supervision  of  the  consulting 
engineer  or  his  authorized  inspector,  the  quality  of  the  material 
to  be  determined  by  the  result  of  all  the  tests  in  the  manner  set 
forth  in  the  following  paragraph.  If  material  of  various  shapes 
is  to  be  made  from  the  same  melt,  the  specimens  for  testing  .are 
to  be  so  selected  as  to  represent  the  different  shapes  rolled  from 
such  melt. 

The  contractor  will  be  required  to  manufacture  and  test  on 
his  own  or  some  other  testing  machine,  free  of  all  extra  charge 
for  either  material  or  labor,  a  reasonable  number  of  full-sized 


232  ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

details  used  in  the  design  of  the  structure.  It  is  understood 
that  no  allowance  will  be  made  for  the  weight  of  any  test 
pieces,  when  the  total  weight  of  metal,  for  which  the  contractor 
is  to  be  paid,  is  computed  by  the  consulting  engineer. 

Acceptance  and  Rejection. 

Except  for  tensile  strength,  the  respective  requirements 
stated  are  for  an  average  of  the  tests  for  each;  and  the  lot  of 
finished  pieces  from  which  samples  were  selected  shall  be 
accepted,  if  the  tests  give  such  average  results;  but,  if  any  test 
piece  give  results  more  than  four  (4)  per  cent,  below  said 
requirements,  the  particular  piece  from  vshich  it  wras  taken  may 
be  rejected,  but  such  tests  shall  be  included  in  making  the 
average.  If  any  piece  have  a  manifest  flaw,  its  test  shall  not 
be  considered.  For  each  piece  thus  giving  results  more  than 
four  (4)  per  cent,  below  requirements,  tests  from  two  addi- 
tional pieces  shall  be  furnished  by  the  contractor  without 
charge;  and,  if  in  a  total  of  not  more  than  ten  (10)  tests,  two 
(2)  pieces  (or  for  a  larger  number  of  tests  a  proportionately 
greater  number  of  pieces),  show  results  more  than  four  (4) 
per  cent,  below  the  requirements,  it  shall  be  cause  for  rejecting 
the  lot  from  which  the  samples  W7ere  taken.  Such  lots  shall  not 
exceed  twenty  (20)  tons  in  weight;  and  plates  rolled  in 
universal  mill  or  in  grooves,  or  sheared  plates,  shall  each  con- 
stitute a  separate  lot,  as  shall  also  angles,  channels  or  beams. 

Variation  in    Weight. 

A  variation  in  cross  section  or  weight  of  rolled  material  of 
more  than  two  (2)  per  cent,  from  that  specified  shall  be  cause 
for  rejection,  and  no  excess  of  metal  above  that  computed  from 
the  drawings  exceeding  one  (i)  per  cent,  will  be  paid  for. 

J.  A.  L.  W. 

155.  Specification  for  Riveted  Work.  The  fol- 
lowing specification  for  riveted  work  in  structural  designing 
has  been  carefully  draw7n  to  give  the  highest  possible  efficiency 
and  strength  without  causing  extravagant  expense.  If  the 
highest  perfection  in  this  kind  of  work  is  not  required,  some 
reduction  in  cost  can  be  effected,  without  materially  lowering 
the  standard,  by  punching  to  full  size  of  hole  all  plates  having 
a  thickness  of  $/Q  of  an  inch  or  less,  and  for  such  plates  resort- 
ing to  reaming  only  after  the  plates  are  assembled  to  secure  the 
necessary  coincidence  of  parts.  For  all  plates  greater  than  $/Q 
of  an  inch  in  thickness  the  holes  should  be  punched  y&  of  an 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR   BKIDGE    SUPEKSTKUCTUKE.     233 

inch  less  in  diameter  than  required,    the   parts   then    assembled 
and  the  holes  reamed  out  to  the  required  diameter.* 

After  plates  or  bars  are  carefully  straightened  the  rivet 
holes  will  be  accurately  spaced,  so  that  when  members  are 
brought  into  position,  the  holes  shall  be  truly  opposite  be-fore 
rivets  are  driven.  Drifting  under  no  circumstances  will  be 
allowed.  In  steel  wrork,  for  all  thicknesses  up  to  three  quarters 
of  an  inch,  the  rivet  holes  shall  be  punched  one  eighth  of  an 
inch  smaller  than  the  rivet  required,  the  parts  assembled,  and 
the  holes  reamed  out  to  just  pass  the  rivet  before  driving.  For 
all  thicknesses  over  three  quarters  of  an  inch,  punching  wm 
not  be  permitted,  and  the  holes  must  be  drilled,  parts  assem- 
bled, and  reamed  as  above.  Reamed  work  is  not  required  for 
lacing  bars,  transverse,  diagonal,  or  lateral  bracing,  or  for 
caissons,  excepting  the  cross  girders  belonging  thereto,  and 
their  connection  to  caisson  sides.  In  the  lattice  girders  for  the 
web  system  of  fixed  spans,  and  plate  girders  of  draw  span,  the 
sharp  edges  Irft  by  drilling  or  reaming  to  be  eased  off  before 
driving  rivets.  Surfaces  in  contact  shall  be  thoroughly  coated 
with  boiled  linseed  oil  and  pure  red  lead  before  being  assem- 
bled for  riveting.  Power  riveting  to  be  alone  used  wherever 
possible.  All  rivets  to  have  neatly  capped  hemisphered  heads. 
Tightening  loose  rivets  by  recupping  or  ' 'setting  up"  will  not 
be  allowed  ;  they  must  be  cut  out  and  redriven,  whether  in  shop 
or  field.  Every  built  member  or  girder  must  be  true  and  out 
of  wind,  neatly  finished  to  length,  and  field  driven  rivets  of  all 
main  girder  connections  shall  be  laid  out  with  iron  templates 
and  accurately  drilled  so  as  to  just  pass  the  rivet  cold. 

A.  P.  B. 

156.  Specification  for  Wrought  Iron  and  Steel 
Railroad  Bridge  Superstructure.  The  specifications  for 
Iron  and  steel  superstructures  have  been  undergoing  gradual 
changes  at  the  hands  of  the  leading  American  civil  engineers 
for  many  years.  The  changes  have  all  been  based  on  numer- 
ous experiments  on  full-sized  bridge  members  and  they  have 
always  leaned  to  the  safe  and  conservative  side.  The  follow- 
ing specification  is  fully  up  to  the  best  practice  in  the  year  1895 
and  probably  will  not  be  varied  much  in  the  near  future,  as  to 
either  materials  or  workmanship: 

The  superstructure  will  consist  of  one  pivot  draw  440  feet 
long,  divided  into  fourteen  panels  of  30  feet  each,  and  one  cen- 

*  See  Modern  Framed  Structures,  Appendix  A,  for  a  full  discussion  of  this  subject. 


234  ENGINEERING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

tral  panel  of  20  feet,  carried  on  a  rim  bearing  turntable,  and  of 
two  spans  each  330  feet  long,  divided  into  eleven  panels  of  30 
feet  each.  It  will  include  the  iron  fence  which  sustains  the 
ends  of  the  ties. 

The  trusses  will  in  all  cases  be  spaced  20  feet  between 
centers. 

Full  detail  plans  showing  all  dimensions  shall  be  prepared 
at  the  expense  of  the  contractors  under  the  direction  of  the 
chief  engineer,  these  plans  to  be  made  in  accordance  with  the 
standard  practice  of  the  chief  engineer. 

The  superstructure  shall  be  proportioned  to  carry  the  fol- 
lowing loads : 

The  actual  weight  of  the  structure  including  floor,  rails  and 
all  other  parts. 

A  moving  load  of  3,000  pounds  per  lineal  foot  on  all 
lengths  exceeding  120  feet. 

A  moving  load  of  6,000  pounds  per  foot  on  a  length  not 
exceeding  20  feet. 

A  graduated  moving  load  decreasing  by  30  pounds  for 
each  foot  from  6.000  pounds  per  foot  on  20  feet,  to  3,000 
pounds  per  foot  on  120  feet. 

A  concentrated  load  of  60,000  pounds  upon  a  single  axle. 

Provision  shall  be  made  for  impact  by  adding  fifty  per 
cent,  to  the  portion  of  the  strain  of  the  web  members  which  is 
due  solely  to  variable  load. 

The  tension  members  of  the  trusses  shall  be  proportioned 
on  the  basis  of  a  strain  of  20,000  per  square  inch  for  dead  load 
and  10,000  pounds  per  square  inch  for  live  load. 

Stringers,  floor  beams  and  other  riveted  girders  shall  be 
proportioned  on  the  basis  of  a  strain  not  exceeding  8,000  pounds 
per  square  inch  of  net  section. 

The  maximum  compression  strain  allowed  on  mild  steel 
shall  not  exceed  14,000  pounds  per  square  inch  and  the  maxi- 
mum compression  strain  allowed  on  soft  steel  shall  not  exceed 
10,000  pounds  per  square  inch  when  the  length  of  the  member 
does  not  exceed  sixteen  times  the  least  transverse  dimension, 
these  strains  to  be  reduced  in  proportions  which  will  limit  the 
strain  to  6,000  pounds  per  square  inch  when  the  length  of  the 
member  is  thirty  times  its  least  transverse  dimension. 

In  the  draw,  the  turntable,  eleven  panels  of  each  bottom 
chord,  the  four  central  posts,  the  eye-bars,  the  pins,  and  some 
details  of  the  end  lifting  apparatus  shall  be  of  M  steel.  The 
coned  wheels  and  the  two  principal  pinions  shall  be  of  cast 
steel.  The  lower  casting  of  the  track-  and  the  center  casting 
shall  be  of  cast  iron.  All  other  parts  shall  be  of  soft  steel  or 
of  wrought  iron  at  the  option  of  the  contractor. 

In  the  flxed  spans,  the  chords,  end  posts,  eye-bars  and  pins 
shall  be  of  mild  steel.  The  expansion  bearings  shall  be  accord- 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR  .BRIDGE    SUPERSTRUCTURE.     235 

ing  to  the  special  provisions  of  the  specifications.  All  other 
parts  shall  be  of  soft  steel  or  wrought  iron  at  the  option  of  the 
contractors. 

STEEL. 

Classes. — Steel  will  be  divided  into  four  classes:  HM,  M, 
MS,  and  S,  of  which  M  and  S  will  be  standards,  and  HM  and 
and  MS  intermediates. 

Class  M  will  be  known  as  medium  steel,  and  will  be  used 
in  those  portions  of  every  member  which  constitute  the  calcu- 
lated section. 

Class  S  will  be  known  as  soft  steel,  and  will  be  used  for 
rivets,  fences  and  the  lateral  rods  of  the  floor  system. 

II M  and  MS  steel  will  be  accepted  for  details  and  parts 
which  do  not  form  portions  of  the  calculated  sections. 

Manufacture. — Steel  shall  be  made  by  the  open  hearth 
process  and  no  steel  shall  be  made  at  works  which  have  not 
been  in  successful  operation  for  at  least  one  year ;  but  this  pro- 
vision shall  not  be  held  to  exclude  new  furnaces  erected  in  con- 
nection with  old  works. 

If  made  in  an  acid  furnace,  the  amount  of  phosphorus  in 
the  finished  product  shall  never  exceed  eight  one  hundredths  of 
one  per  cent.,  this  being  a  maximum  and  not  an  average 
requirement. 

If  made  in  a  basic  furnace,  the  amount  of  phosphorus  shall 
never  exceed  four  one  hundredths  of  one  per  cent.,  this  being  a 
maximum  and  not  an  average  requirement  and  being  con-id- 
ered  necessary  to  show  a  proper  amount  of  work  in  the  furnace. 

The  finished  product  shall  be  perfect  in  all  parts  and  free 
from  irregularities  and  surface  imperfections  of  all  kinds.  All 
steel  must  be  free  from  piping. 

The  cross  sections  shall  never  differ  more  than  2^  per 
cent,  from  the  ordered  cross  sections  as  shown  by  the  dimen- 
sions on  the  plans. 

Steel  for  pins  more  than  four  inches  in  diameter  shall  be 
hammered. 

Every  finished  p^te,  bar  or  angle  shall  be  stamped  on  one 
side,  near  the  middle,  with  a  number  identifying  the  melt  and 
this  stamp  shall  be  surrounded  with  a  heavy  circle  of  white  paint. 
Steel  for  pins  shall  have  the  melt  numbers  stamped  on  the  ends. 
Rivet  steel  and  small  pieces  which  do  not  form  part  of  the  cal- 
culated section  of  members  may  be  shipped  in  bundles,  wired 
together,  with  the  melt  number  on  a  metal  tag  attached. 

Tests. — A  sample  bar  not  more  than  two  inches  wide,  and 
having  a  cross  section  of  one  square  inch  when  the  material  is 
not  less  than  one  half  inch  thick,  shall  be  cut  from  the  finished 
product  of  every  melt.  When  taken  from  metal  more  than 
two  inches  thick  this  sample  may  be  a  turned,  round  bar.  The 


236  ENGINEEKING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

laboratory  tests  shall  be  made  on  this  sample  bar  in  its  natural 
state  without  annealing. 

Where  a  melt  is  rolled  into  several  varieties  of  material, 
each  variety  shall  be  separately  tested.  A  variety  shall  consist 
entirely  of  one  of  the  following  shapes:  Sheared  Plates,  Uni- 
versal Mill  Plates,  Angles,  Z's,  Channels,  I  beams,  Flats, 
Rounds,  Squares,  Pin  Steel  and  Eyebar  Steel.  Flats  will 
include  all  flats  not  intended  to  be  forged  into  eyebars.  Where 
several  sizes  of  the  same  variety  are  rolled,  the  cross  section  of 
the  largest  size  shall  not  be  more  than  twice  that  of  the  smallest 
size,  and  the  sample  shall  be  taken  from  the  size  which  comes 
nearest  to  a  mean. 

In  the  laboratory  tests,  measurements  to  determine  elon- 
gation shall  be  made  on  a  length  of  eight  inches. 

A  piece  of  each  sample  bar  shall  be  bent  180  degrees  and 
closed  up  against  itself.  In  no  case  shall  any  crack  appear 
until  the  circle  around  which  the  bar  is  bent  becomes  less  than 
the  thickness  of  the  bar.  Except  when  the  sample  is  taken 
from  a  pin,  the  sample  bar  shall  close  up  against  itself  without 
showing  any  crack  or  flaw  on  the  outside  of  the  bent  portion. 

The  sample  bar  shall  be  tested  in  a  lever  machine  and  the 
following  requirements  fulfilled: 

CLASS  OF    STEEL. 

HM.  M.  MS.  S. 

Ultimate  strength,  Ibs.,  per  sq.  in 70,000  66,000  62,000  58.000 

Elastic  limit,              "      "     "    " 35,000  33,000  31,000  29,000 

Percentage  of  elongation  in  8  in 18  22                24  26 

Percentage  of  reduction  at  fracture. ..        36  44               48  52 

Where  the  sample  is  taken  from  a  pin,  the  elongation  and 
reduction  will  be  reduced  to  15  and  30  per  cent,  for  the  HM 
steel  and  to  18  and  36  per  cent,  for  the  M  steel. 

The  entire  fracture  shall  be  silky. 

The  requirements  for  ultimate  strength  are  means,  and 
steel  will  be  accepted  when  the  ultimate  strength  does  not  dif- 
fer more  than  4,000  pounds  from  the  requirements  of  the  table. 

The  requirements  for  elastic  limit,  elongation  and  reduc- 
tion are  minimum  requirements,  and  no  steel  will  be  accepted 
which  falls  below  these  conditions. 

The  elastic  limit  will  be  observed  by  the  falling  of  the 
beam  of  the  testing  machine. 

Duplicate  tests  may  be  made  when  the  first  sample  tested 
fulfills  four  of  the  five  requirements.  If  the  second  test  and 
also  the  average  of  the  two  tests  meet  all  the  requirements,  the 
melt  may  be  accepted.  Cases  in  which  the  tests  are  thought 
not  to  give  fair  indications  of  the  character  of  the  material, 
shall  be  referred  to  the  engineer. 

•  Analyses  shall  be  made,  showing  the  amount  of  phospho- 
rus and  carbon  in  every  melt,  the  drillings  for  these  analyses 
being  taken  directly  from  one  of  the  ingots.  Besides  this  a  set 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOB   BRIDGE    SUPERSTRUCTURE.     237 

of  analyses  of  phosphorus,  carbon,  silicon  and  manganese  shall 
be  made  from  every  ten  melts,  the  drillings  to  be  taken  from  a 
sample  test  bar. 

SHOP    REQUIREMENTS. 

The  work  shall  be  done  in  all  respects  according  to  the 
detail  plans  furnished  by  the  engineer. 

Where  there  is  room  for  doubt  as  to  the  quality  of  work 
required  by  the  plans  or  specifications,  the  doubt  shall  be 
decided  by  using  the  best  class  of  work  which  any  interpretation 
would  admit  of. 

All  workmanship,  whether  particularly  specified  or  not, 
must  be  of  the  best  kind  known  in  use.  Past  work  done  for 
the  same  engineer  will  never  be  recognized  as  a  precedent  for 
the  use  of  other  than  the  best  kind  of  work. 

All  material  shall  be  cleansed,  and,  if  necessary,  scraped 
and  given  one  heavy  coat  of  Cleveland  Iron  Clad  Paint,  Purple 
Brand,  put  on  with  boiled  linseed  oil  before  shipment.  This 
applies  to  everything  except  machine  finished  surfaces. 

The  same  paint  shall  be  used  wherever  painting  is 
required. 

All  machine  surfaces  shall  be  cleansed,  oiled  and  given  a 
heavy  coat  of  white  lead  and  tallow  before  shipment.  The 
inspector  must  see  that  this  is  a  substantial  coat,  such  as  is  used 
on  machinery  and  not  a  merely  nominal  covering. 

All  small  bolts,  all  pins  less  than  six  inches  in  diameter, 
the  expansion  rollers,  and  everything  with  special  work  on  it, 
shall  be  carefully  boxed  before  shipment. 

Riveted    Work. 

Riveted  W7ork  will  be  of  twTo  classes:  i.  Reamed  work. 
2.  Punched  work.  The  provisions  immediately  following  will 
apply  to  both  classes. 

All  plates,  angles  and  shapes  shall  be  carefully  straightened 
at  the  shop  before  they  are  put  together;  mill  straightening  will 
not  be  considered  as  meeting  this  requirement. 

If  the  rivet  holes  are  marked  with  templets,  these  templets 
shall  lie  flat  without  distortion  when  the  marking  is  made. 

The  size  of  rivets  shown  on  the  plans  is  the  size  of  the 
cold  rivet  before  heating. 

The  diameter  of  the  finished  rivet  hole  shall  not  be  more 
than  one  sixteenth  inch  greater  than  the  diameter  of  the  cold 
rivet.  The  heated  rivet  shall  not  drop  into  the  hole  but  require 
a  slight  pressure  to  force  it  in ;  the  relative  size  of  the  rivet  and 
rivet  hole  must  be  .such  as  to  meet  this  requirement. 

In  all  cases  wheie  riveting  is  to  be  done  in  the  field  the 
parts  so  to  be  riveted  shall  be  fitted  together  in  the  shops  and 
the  rivet  holes  reamed  out  while  thev  are  so  assembled,  or  an 


238  LNGINEEKING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

iron  templet  shall  be  made  and  both  parts  reamed  to  fit  this 
templet. 

All  surfaces  in  contact  shall  be  c!eaned  and  painted  before 
they  are  put  together. 

The  rivets  shall  be  driven  by  power  wherever  this  is  possi- 
ble. The  manufacturer  will  be  required  to  procure  special 
riveting  machines  to  meet  special  positions. 

All  rivets  shall  be  regular  in  shape,  with  hemispherical 
heads  concentric  with  the  axis,  absolutely  tight  and  shall  com- 
pletely fill  the  hole.  Tightening  by  calking  or  recupping 
will  not  be  allowed.  This  applies  to  both  power  driven  and 
hand  driven  rivets. 

The  angles  of  stringers  must  be  square  and  straight.  The 
web  plate  must  not  project  above  the  angles,  and  the  outside 
edges  of  the  two  angles  must  never  be  above  a  true  plane  and 
never  more  than  one  sixteenth  inch  below  the  true  plane  coinci- 
dent with  the  roots  of  the  angles. 

The  outside  angle  at  the  root  of  the  angles  connecting 
stringers  with  floor  beams,  floor  beams  with  posts,  or  in  other 
like  details,  shall  never  be  less  than  a  right  angle,  and  the  excess 
over  a  right  angle  shall  never  be  greater  than  one  eighth  inch  in 
the  longer  leg  of  the  angle;  the  angle  shall  be  perfectly  straight. 

Reamed    Work. 

All  work  which  is  of  mild  steel  shall  be  reamed. 

All  sheared  or  rough  edges  shall  be  carefully  planed  off. 

The  material  may  be  punched  with  holes  one  eighth  inch 
smaller  than  the  size  of  the  rivets  shown  on  the  plans,  except  as 
provided  below. 

When  the  thickness  of  the  metal  is  greater  than  a  thickness 
one  eighth  inch  less  than  the  diameter  of  the  rivet,  the  punched 
hole  shall  be  one  quarter  inch  smaller  than  the  diameter  of  the 
rivet. 

When  the  thickness  of  the  metal  is  greater  than  a  thickness 
one  eighth  inch  more  than  the  diameter  of  the  rivet,  no  punch- 
ing will  be  allowed  but  the  holes  must  be  drilled. 

After  the  several  pieces  have  been  punched  (or  drilled) 
they  shall  be  assemVed.  The  holes  shall  then  be  reamed  to 
the  diameter  required  by  the  size  of  the  rivets,  while  the  pieces 
are  together. 

After  reaming,  every  hole  shall  be  entirely  smooth,  show- 
ing that  the  reaming  tool  has  everywhere  touched  the  metal. 
In  special  cases  where  this  fails,  the  engineer  may  authorize  the 
hole  to  be  reamed  to  a  larger  size  and  larger  rivets  used. 

A  reamer  shall  be  run  over  the  outer  edges  of  every  hole 
so  as  to  remove  the  sharp  enges  and  make  a  fillet  of  at  least 
one  sixteenth  inch* under  each  rivet  head. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOE   BRIDGE    SUPERSTRUCTURE.     233 

After  the  reaming  is  completed  the  several  pieces  shall  be 
taken  apart  and  cleaned. 

Punched   Work. 

All  work  which  is  of  wrought  iron  or  soft  steel  may  be 
punched  without  reaming. 

All  pieces  whose  thickness  does  not  exceed  the  diameter 
of  the  rivet  shall  be  punched  with  holes  not  more  than  one  six- 
teenth inch  larger  than  the  diameter  of  the  rivet. 

All  pieces  whose  thickness  exceeds  the  diameter  of  the 
rivet  shall  be  punched  with  holes  one  sixteenth  inch  smaller 
than  the  diameter  of  the  rivet,  and  subsequently  reamed  to  one 
sixteenth  inch  larger  than  the  diameter  of  the  rivet ;  this  ream- 
ing may  be  done  before  the  several  parts  are  assembled. 

Where  the  thickness  of  the  metal  is  more  than  one  quarter 
inch  greater  than  the  diameter  of  the  rivet,  the  punching  shall 
be  one  eighth  inch  smaller  than  the  diameter  of  the  rivtt. 

The  several  parts  shall  be  cleaned  before  they  are  assem- 
bled. 

When  the  several  pieces  are  put  together,  the  work  shall 
be  sufficiently  true  for  a  cold  rivet  to  pass  through  every  hole 
without  reading  or  drifting.  In  special  cases  the  engineer 
may  authorize  the  holes  to  be  reamed  and  larger  rivets  used. 

Forged    Work. 

The  heads  of  eyebars  shall  be  formed  by  upsetting  and 
forging  into  shape  by  a  process  acceptable  to  the  engineer.  No 
welds  will  be  ahowed. 

After  the  working  is  completed  the  bars  shall  be  annealed 
in  a  suitable  annealing  furnace  by  heating  them  to  a  uniform 
dark  red  heat  and  allowing  them  to  cool  slowly. 

The  form  of  the  heads  of  steel  eyebars  may  be  modified  by 
the  contractors  to  suit  the  process  in  use  at  their  works,  but  the 
thickness  of  the  head  shall  not  be  more  than  one  sixteenth  inch 
greater  than  that  of  the  body  of  the  bar,  and  the  heads  shall  be 
of  sufficient  strength  to  break  the  body  of  the  bar. 

The  heads  and  enlarged  ends  for  screws  in  laterals,  sus- 
penders ana  counters  shall  be  formed  by  upsetting  and  shall  be 
of  sufficient  strength  to  break  the  body  of  the  bar. 

Nuts,  swivels  and  clevises,  if  made  of  steel,  shall  be  forged 
without  welds ;  whether  made  of  steel  or  wrought  iron,  one  of 
each  size  shall  be  tested,  and  shall  develop  a  strength  ten  per 
cent,  greater  than  the  strength  of  the  bars  to  which  they  are 
attached  as  determined  by  required  strength  of  material  in  such 
bars. 

Eyebars  shall  be  bored  truly  and  at  exact  distances,  the  pin 
holes  to  be  exactly  on  the  axis  of  the  bar  and  at  exactly  right 
angles  to  the  planes  of  the  flat  surfaces. 


240  ENGINEERING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

When  six  bars  of  the  same  billed  strength  are  piled  together 
the  two  pins  shall  pass  through  both  pin  holes  at  the  same  time 
without  driving.  Every  bar  shall  be  tested  for  this  require- 
ment. 

Pin  holes  shall,  be  bored  with  a  sharp  tool  that  will  make 
a  clean,  smooth  cut.  Two  cuts  shall  always  be  taken,  the 
finishing  cut  never  to  be  more  than  one  eighth  inch.  Rough- 
ness in  pin  holes  will  be  sufficient  reason  for  rejecting  bars. 

One  full  sized  eyebar  for  every  fifty  bars  made  shall  be 
selected  from  time  to  time  from  bars  made  for  the  bridge  for 
testing. 

No  bars  known  to  be  defective  in  any  way  shall  be  taken 
for  test  bars,  but  the  bars  shall  be  selected  as  fair  average  spec- 
imens of  the  good  bars  wThich  would  be  accepted  for  the  work. 

The  tests  of  full  sized  eyebars  shall  be  made  in  the  large 
testing  machine  at  Athens,  Pa.,  unless  some  other  machine  is 
especially  accepted  by  the  engineer. 

These  bars  shall  be  required  to  develop  an  average  stretch 
of  twelve  per  cent,  and  a  minimum  stretch  of  ten  per  cent, 
before  breaking.  The  elongation  shall  be  measured  on  a 
length  of  not  less  than  twenty  feet,  including  the  fracture. 

The  bars  will  be  required  to  break  in  the  body. 

They  shall  also  show  an  elastic  limit  of  not  less  than 
32,000  pounds  and  an  ultimate  strength  of  not  less  than  60,000 
pounds,  as  indicated  by  the  registering  gauges  of  the  testing 
machine  at  Athens. 

In  case  of  bars  too  long  for  the  machine,  the  bars  shall  be 
cut  in  two,  each  half  reheaded,  and  both  halves  tested  in  the 
machine,  the  two  tests,  however,  to  count  as  a  single  test  bar. 

In  these  tests  a  failure  to  meet  the  required  elongation 
will  be  considered  fatal,  and  be  a  sufficient  cause  for  condemn- 
ing the  bars  represented  by  the  bars  so  tested,  but  the  engineer 
shall  examine  carefully  into  the  cause  of  the  breakage  of  any 
bar  which  does  not  meet  the  requirements,  and  may  ord.er 
additional  tests  if  he  sees  fit. 

The  failure  of  the  bar  to  break  in  the  body  shall  not  be 
considered  sufficient  reason  for  rejection,  provided  the 
required  elongation  is  obtained  and  not  more  than  one  quarter 
of  the  bars  break  in  the  head. 

Machine  Work. 

The  planing,  drilling,  and  reaming  required  under  the 
provisions  for  riveted  work  shall  always  be  performed. 

The  ends  of  the  chord  sections  shall  be  faced  so  as  to  be 
perfectly  true,  after  they  are  riveted  up  complete,  excepting 
only  the  projecting  splice  p  ates. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR   STEEL    STAND-PIPE.  241 

When  four  chord  pieces  are  fitted  together  complete  in 
the  shop,  there  shall  be  no  perceptible  wind  in  the  length  of 
the  four  sections. 

All  chord  sections  shall  be  stamped  at  each  end  on  the 
outside  with  letters  and  numbers  designating  the  joints  in 
accordance  with  the  diagram  furnished  by  the  engineer. 

All  pin  holes  and  holes  for  turned  bolts  passing  through 
the  whole  width  of  a  riveted  member  shall  be  bored  or 
drilled  after  all  other  work  is  completed. 

Pin  holes  shall  be  bored  truly  and  at  exact  distances  par- 
allel with  one  another  and  at  exactly  right  angles  to  the  axis 
of  the  member. 

Pin  holes  shall  be  bored  with  a  sharp  tool  which  will  make 
a  clean  smooth  cut.  Two  cuts  shall  always  be  taken,  the  fin- 
ishing cut  never  to  be  more  than  one  eighth  inch.  Roughness 
in  pin  holes  will  be  sufficient  reason  for  rejecting  a  whole 
member. 

Pin  holes  shall  be  bored  to  fit  the  pins  with  a  play  not 
exceeding  one  fifteenth  of  an  inch.  These  requirements  apply 
to  latefal  connections  as  well  as  to  other  pins. 

The  plans  show  the  distance  between  the  centers  of  pin 
holes.  Shop  requirements  shall  be  between  the  bearing  ed^es 
of  tension  or  compression  members,  with  a  proper  allowance 
for  the  diameter  of  the  pin.  An  iron  standard  of  the  same 
temperature  as  the  piece  measured  shall  always  be  used. 

All  pins  shall  be  accurately  turned  to  a  gauge  and  shall  be 
of  full  size  throughout. 

The  ends  of  stringers  and  of  floor  beams  shall  be  squared 
in  a  facer,  as  shall  also  all  other  similar  connections. 

All  bearing  surfaces  shall  be  truly  faced. 

All  surfaces  so  designated  on  the  plans  shall  be  planed. 

All  screws  on  iron  shall  have  a  truncated  V  thread,  United 
States  standard  sized. 

All  screws  cut  on  steel  shall  have  a  truncated  V  thread, 
United  States  standard,  with  eight  threads  to  the  inch  when  the 
diameter  is  two  and  one  half  inches  or  less  and  six  threads  to 
the  inch  for  all  larger  sizes.  G.  S.  M. 

157.  Specification  for  the  Material  and  Work- 
manship of  a  Steel  Stand-Pipe.  The  following  specifica-, 
tion  for  the  material  and  workmanship  suitable  for  a  steel 
water  tower  or  stand-pipe  have  been  prepared  by  Mr.  Wm. 
D.  Pence,  after  a  very  long  and  careful  investigation  of  the 
numerous  failures  which  have  occurred  in  such  structures  and 
also  of  the  materials  and  workmanship  suitable  and  necessary 
16 


242  ENGINEEKING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

for  this  kind  of  work.  The  specification  includes  a  phosphorus 
limit  of  0.06  of  one  per  cent.,  whereas  those  given  in  articles 
154  and  156  allowed  an  upper  limit  of  0.08  of  one  per  cent. 
There  is  no  question  but  that  a  limit  of  from  0.06  to  0.08  of 
one  per  cent.,  is  necessary  in  order  to  exclude  high  phosphorus 
steels  which  are  of  necessity  brittle.  The  author  heartily  com- 
mends these  specifications,  not  only  for  the  purpose  named, 
but  for  all  similar  kinds  of  work. 

Material.  The  metal  composing  the  stand-pipe  shall 
be  soft,  open-hearth  steel,  containing  not  more  than  0.06  per 
cent,  phosphorus,  and  having  an  ultimate  tensile  strength  of 
not  less  than  54,000  nor  more  than  62,000  pounds  per  square 
inch,  an  elastic  limit  not  less  than  one  half  the  ultimate 
strength,  an  elongation  of  not  less  than  26  per  cent,  in  eight 
inches  and  a  reduction  of  area  of  not  less  than  50  per  cent,  at 
fracture,  which  shall  be  silky  in  character.  Before  or  after 
being  heated  to  a  cherry  red  and  quenched  in  water  at  80°  F., 
the  steel  shall  admit  of  bending  while  cold,  flat  upon  itself, 
without  sign  of  fracture  on  the  outside  of  the  bent  portion. 

Test  Pieces.  All  test  samples  shall  be  cut  from  finished 
material.  Tensile  test  pieces  to  be  at  least  16  inches  long,  and 
to  have  for  a  length  of  8  inches  a  uniform  planed-edged  sec- 
tional area  of  at  least  y?  square  inch,  the  width  in  no  case  to  be 
less  than  the  thickness  of  the  piece.  Bending  test  pieces  to  be 
12  inches  long,  and  to  have  a  width  of  not  less  than  four  times 
the  thickness,  with  edges  filed  smooth. 

Number  of  Tests.  For  the  purpose  of  identification  the 
number  of  the  melt  or  heat  of  steel  shall  be  stamped  on  each 
plate  produced  therefrom.  At  least  one  full  series  of  tests, 
both  chemical  and  physical,  as  above  specified,  shall  be  made 
of  each  melt,  and  such  additional  tests  may  be  made  as,  in  the 
judgment  of  the  inspector,  seem  essential  for  corroborative  pur- 
poses under  varying  conditions  or  methods  of  treatment  of  the 
metal. 

Finish  of  Material.  All  plates  must  be  free  from  lami- 
nations and  surface  defects,  and  shall  be  rolled  truly  to  the 
specified  thicknesses. 

Facilities  for  Testing.  Complete  facilities  for  the  tests 
and  inspections  shall  be  provided  by  the  contractor,  as  required. 

Inspector.  Material  will  be  inspected  at  the  mill  by 
(name  of  a  trustworthy  testing  concern  equipped  to  make  both 
chemical  and  physical  tests)  or  such  other  party  as  may  be 
approved  by  the  engineer. 

Additional  Test  Pieces.  If  required  by  the  engineer,  the 
contractor  will  provide  four  certified  samples  of  each  thickness 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOE   STEEL    STAND   PIPE.  243 

of  plate  used  in  the  work,  these   samples  to  be   2  inches  wide 
and  16  inches  long. 

Workmanship.  All  workmanship  must  be  first-class  in 
every  particular. 

'Working  Steel.  The  plates  and  .angles  shall  be  shaped  to 
the  proper  curvature  by  cold  rolling.  No  heating  and  hammering 
shall  be  allowed  for  straightening  or  curving,  or  for  other 
purposes.* 

Punching.  The  work  shall  be  carefully  and  accurately  laid 
out  in  the  shop,  and  the  rivet  holes  punched  with  a  centerpunch, 
sharp  and  in  perfect  order,  from  the  surface  to  be  in  contact. 
The  diameter  of  the  punch  shall  not  exceed  that  of  the  rivet  by 
more  than  1-16  inch,  and  the  diameter  of  the  die  shall  in  no  case 
exceed  that  of  the  punch  by  more  than  1-16  inch.  Rivet  holes 
in  plates  having  a  thickness  of  ^  inch,  and  over  shall  either  be 
drilled  or  if  punched,  shall  be  reamed  not  less  than  ^  inch  larger 
than  the  die  sides  of  the  holes,  and  sharp  edges  shall  be  trimmed. 

Beveling,  etc.  All  calking  edges  shall  be  planed  to  a 
proper  bevel.  All  parts  must  be  adjusted  to  a  perfect  tit,  and 
properly  marked  before  leaving  the  shop. 

Erection.  In  assembling  the  work,  the  rivet  holes  shall 
match  so  that  hot  rivets  may  be  inserted  without  the  use  of  a 
hammer.  Drifting  is  prohibited.  Eccentric  holes,  if  any, 
must  be  reamed,  and  if  required,  larger-sized  rivets  shall  be 
used  in  such  holes. 

Rivets  and  Riveting.  The  best  grade  of  soft  charcoal  iron 
rivets  to  be  had  in  the  market  shall  be  used.  Sufficient  stock 
must  be  provided  in  the  rivets  to  completely  fill  the  holes  and 
make  a  full  head.  lvThe  rivets  shall  be  driven  at  such  a  heat  as^ 
will  admit  of  their  being  finished  in  good  form  with  a  button  set 
before  the  rivet  has  cooled  to  a  critical  point.  As  often  as  may 
be  deemed  advisable  for  the  purpose  of  testing  the  work,  rivets 
shall  be  cut  out  at  the  direction  of  the  inspector.  The  quality 
of  the  rivet  metal  and  of  the  workmanship  shall  be  such  that  the 
fracture  of  the  rivet  so  removed  at  random  shall  show  a  good, 
tough,  fibrous  structure  without  any  crystalline  appearance,  and 
there  shall  be  no  evidence  of  brrttleness.  Loose  rivets  must  be 
promptly  replaced J&o  rivet^calkmg  being  permitted. 

Calking.  All\eams  muft  ^e  calked  thoroughly  tight  with 
around-nosed  calking  tool^i)^  |vorkmen  of  acceptable  skill. 
Great  care  must  be  taken  not  to  injure  the  under  plate. 

Rejections.  Defective  material  and  workmanship  may  be 
rejected  at  any  stage  of  the  work,  and  must  be  properly  replaced 
by  the  contractor  as  directed. 

*If  lap  riveting  is  used,  omit  the  expression  "or  for  other  purposes,"  and  insert  the 
following  sentence:  "No  scarfing  shall  be  done  at  a  temperature  below  that  of  igni- 
tion of  a  hard-wood  hammer  handle,  and  no  work  shall  be  done  upon  the  steel  betxveea 
such  temperature  and  that  of  boiling  water." 


244  ENGINEEKING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

Final  Tests.  After  completion  the  work  shall  be  tested 
by  filling  the  stand-pipe  with  water,  and  the  leaks,  if  any, 
shall  be  promptly  and  thoroughly  calked.  The  stand-pipe 
must  be  water-tight  before  acceptance. 

Superintendence.  All  inspections  shall  be  made  under 
the  direction  of  the  engineer  who  shall  have  general  supervi- 
sion of  the  work.  W.  D.  P. 


MISCELLANEOUS  SPECIFICATIONS. 

158.  Specifications  for  Pile  and  Trestle  Bridging. 
The  following  specifications  for  pile  foundations  and  timber 
trestles  are  those  used  by  the  Union  Pacific  Railway  Co.  These 
specifications  may,  however,  serve  as  a  standard  for  all  kinds 
of  pile  foundations,  and  for  the  selection  of  large  timbers  for 
engineering  structures.  The  formula  for  obtaining  the  safe 
bearing  resistance  of  pile  foundations  is  that  generally  known 
as  the  "Engineering  News  formula." 

All  piles  to  be  made  from  straight,  sound,  live  timber,  free 
from  cracks,  shakes  and  rotten  knots,  cut  from  the  following 
kinds  of  timber:  White  Oak,  Burr  Oak,  Red  or  Yellow 
Oregon  Fir.  They  must  be  so  straight  that  a  straight  line 
taken  in  any  direction  from  the  center  of  each  end  of  the  pile, 
and  run  the  length  of  it,  shall  show  that  the  pile  is  at  no  point 
over  one-eighth  of  its  diameter  at  such  point  out  of  a  straight 
line.  They  'must  show  an  even,  gradual  taper  from  end  to 
end.  Ends  must  be  cut  square,  all  bark  taken  off,  branches 
and  knots  trimmed  off  smooth,  finishing  the  pile  in  a  workman- 
like manner.  They  must  not  be  less  than  fourteen  (14)  inches 
in  diameter  at  the  narrowest  point  of  measurement  of  butt  or 
large  end,  nor  less  than  ten  (10)  inches  in  diameter  at  narrow- 
est point  of  measurement  of  point  or  small  end,  and  at  no  part 
more  than  seventeen  (17)  inches  in  diameter. 

All  piles  must  be  properly  sharpened  before  driving.  They 
must  be  driven  until  they  will  carry  a  safe  working  load  of  - 
pounds,  computed  by  the  following  formula: 

2wh 


In  which  L=Safe  load  in  pounds. 

w=Weight  of  hammer  in  pounds. 
h=Fall  of  hammer  in  feet. 
s=Last  penetration  in  inches. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR   TIMBER    STRUCTURES,          245 

They  will  be  estimated  and  paid  for  by  the  lineal  foot.  i. 
As  delivered  at  the  site  of  the  structure,  according  to  bills 
furnished  by  the  engineer.  2.  For  driving,  straightening  and 
cutting  off  ready  for  the  caps,  and  only  the  length  .actually  left 
standing  in  the  structure  to  be  paid  for. 

All  timbers  must  be  of  the  exact  dimensions  given  and 
figured  on  the  plans,  to  be  cut  from  sound,  live  timber,  free 
from  loose  or  rotten  knots,  worm  holes,  wind  shakes  or  splits ; 
reasonably  well  seasoned,  straight  grained,  square  edged,  and 
free  from  any  and  every  defect  calculated  to  impair  its  strength 
and  durability.  It  will  be  estimated  and  paid  for  in  the  work  by 
the  thousand  feet,  board  measure.  The  following  kinds  of1 
timber  will  be  accepted: 

All  bridge  ties  will  be  White  or  Burr  Oak,  Oregon  Red  or 
Yellow  Fir,  Tamarack,  or  Yellow  Pine. 

All  track  stringers  and  guard  timbers  will  be  Oregon  Fir 
or  Yellow  Pine,  of  the  long  leaved,  southern  hard  pine  variety. 

All  posts,  caps,  sills,  bracing  and  end  plank  will  be  White 
or  Burr  Oak,  Red  or  Yellow  Oregon  Fir,  White  or  Yellow 
Pine,  or  Tamarack. 

All  wrought  iron  must  be  of  the  best  quality  of  refined 
iron,  tough,  ductile,  and  capable  of  standing  a  tensile  strain  of 
fifty  thousand  (50.000)  pounds  per  square  inch  of  sectional 
area.  The  manufacture  of  the  bolts  must  be  perfect  in  every 
respect,  and  have  nuts  and  screws  of  the  United  States  standard 
dimensions,  length  of  thread  to  be  not  less  than  three  inches. 

All  washers  and  spacing  blocks,  etc.,  must  be  well  manu- 
factured of  good  gray  iron  and  to  the  exact  dimensions  shown 
on  the  drawing.  The  cost  of  placing  all  bolts,  spikes,  and 
washers  in  the  structure  will  be  included  in  the  price  paid  for 
framing  and  erecting  the  timber. 

All  bridge  ties  will  be  furnished  and  placed  in  the  bridges 
by  the  contractor. 

The  surface  of  the  ties  must  be  brought  to  a  true  plane  under 
the  rail,  so  that  the  rail  will  get  a  full  bearing  on  every  tie. 

All  of  the  track  stringers  shall  be  brought  to  a  true  plane, 
so  that  ties  will  get  an  even  bearing  on  all  the  stringers. 

Where  any  timber  or  pile  trestle  bridge  is  built  on  a  curve, 
the  blocking  for  elevating  the  outer  rail,  or  other  means  for 
elevating  it,  will  be  as  per  drawings  for  the  same,  a  copy  of 
which  will  be  furnished  from  the  office  of  the  chief  engineer. 

The  culverts  will  be  put  in  place  and  finished  ahead  of  the 
grading,  so  that  it  will  not  interfere  with  or  detain  the  grading, 
in  any  way. 

Bridging  shall  begin  when  directed  by  the  engineer, 
and  progress  at  a  rate  sufficiently  rapid  to  keep  out  of  the  way 
of  the  tracklayers. 


246  ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

• 

When  directed  by  the  engineer  drain  pipes  will  be  used 
instead  of  culverts ;  they  will  be  of  cast  iron  or  vitrified  terra 
cotta;  this  will  be  carefully  bedded  and  jointed  and  of  such  size 
as  may  be  directed  by  the  engineer. 

Ail  framing  shall  be  accurately  fitted;  no  blocking  or  shim- 
ming will  be  allowed  in  making  joints ;  the  holes  for  the  bolts 
shall  be  bored  with  an  auger  of  the  exact  size  of  the  bolts.  The 
nuts  on  all  bolts  shall  be  screwed  so  the  washers  shall  pinch 
hard  upon  the  wood  and  bring  all  the  parts  of  the  structure 
close  together. 

On  completion  pick  up  "and  remove  all  rubbish  from  the 
premises. 

All  material  will  be  inspecte'd  on  the  above  specifications^ 
at  points  of  shipment  or  destination  as  agreed,  and  the  owners 
required  to  remove  all  rejected  material  from  the  company's 
premises  within  thirty  (30)  days  from  the  date  of  notice  to  do 
so.  The  company  after  that  time  will  not  be  responsible  for 
the  return  or  safe  keeping  of  the  same. 

When  from  any  cause  bridge  materials  are  unloaded  from 
cars  at  material  yards  or  end  of  track,  it  shall  be  reloaded  by 
the  contractor  at  his  own  expense.  U.  P.  R'y. 

159.    Specifications  for  the  Steam  Plant  of   a 

Small  Electric  Light  Station.  The  following  specifica- 
tion for  the  steam  plant  of  a  small  electric  light  station  includes 
specifications  for  the  engine  and  its  attachments,  feed  water 
heater,  boiler  feed-pumps,  boilers,  furnace,  stack  and  pipe  con- 
nections. While  not  especially  elaborate,  they  have  been  pre- 
pared by  a  mechanical  engineer  of  large  experience  in  this 
field  of  practice.  They  are  given  here,  however,  not  for  the 
purpose  of  being  copied,  but  simply  as  an  illustration  of  such  a 
specification.  The  reader  will  note  that  three  kinds  of  engines 
have  been  provided  for,  and  that  large  liberty  is  retained  by  the 
engineer  in  the  selection  of  the  engine  from  those  submitted  for 
competition  in  the  bids.  A  particular  feed  water  heater  was 
here  specified,  because  it  was  thought  to  be  best  suited  for  the 
kind  of  water  which  was  to  be  used,  the  advantage  of  this 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOE   STEAM   PLANT.  247 

heater  being  that  it  largely  removes  the  scale  from  hard  water 
before  it  enters  the  boiler: 

ENGINE. 

Type:  There  will  be  one  engine,  of  the  High  Speed  Auto- 
matic pattern;  cylinders  10%  inches  or  n  inches  diameter; 
capable  of  operating  continuously  at  600  feet  piston  speed  per 
minute,  without  undue  heating. 

Regulation:  The  automatic  governor  must  permit  a  cut- 
off as  late  as  y^  \  and  must  be  so  adjusted,  that  the  difference  in 
speed,  when  running  with  100  pounds  initial  pressure  and  no 
load,  as  compared  with  75  pounds  initial  pressure  and  cut-off  ^, 
shall  not  exceed  a  guaranteed  amount  to  be  stated  by  bidder ; 
with  a  correspondingly  less  variation  inside  of  the  limits  named. 
The  regulator  must  be  so  constructed,  as  to  permit  this  guar- 
anteed regulation  to  be  easily  maintained,  without  racing. 

Fixtures  and  Fittings:  Standard  cast  iron  sub-base,  and 
two  heavy  driving  pulleys,  of  such  diameter  and  face  as  may  be 
required  to  suit  dynamo  pulleys ;  a  full  set  of  foundation  bolts, 
nuts,  and  plates ;  template  for  foundation ;  throttle  and  drain 
valves;  cylinder  lubricators,  automatic  oil  cups,  wrenches,  indi- 
cator motion,  etc.;  and  two  one-inch  relief  valves  set  at  no 
pounds  pressure. 

Dimensions:  State  diameter  and  material  of  shaft  and 
crank  pin,  and  submit  drawing  or  blue  print  indicating  clearly 
size  of  cylinders,  speed,  diameter  of  pipe  openings,  space  occu- 
pied, and  dimensions  of  foundations. 

Corliss  Engine:  Bids  will  also  be  considered  under  the 
same  conditions  on  a  Corliss  engine ;  1 1  inches  diameter  of 
cylinder,  shaft  6  inches ;  flywheel  and  frame  extra  heavy ;  speed 
100.  Regulation  to  be  guaranteed. 

Direct  Connected  Engines:  This  type  will  also  be  con- 
sidered, together  with  suitable  dynamo.  High  speed.  Vertical 
or  horizontal.  Compound  or  single  expansion.  Full  details 
must  accompany  proposals. 

Belting:  Double  thickness,  even  and  pliable,  equivalent 
in  strength  and  adhesiveness  to  the  Shultz  Leather  Belting.  Of 
selected  stock,  stretched  twice  before  being  made  into  belts. 
No  shoulders  or  flank  leather  to  be  used.  Its  tensile  strength 
must  not  be  less  than  3200  Ibs.  per  square  inch  of  section,  and 
must  not  be  worked  beyond  65  Ibs.  per  inch  of  width.  The 
belt  will  be  thoroughly  stretched  again  after  making,  and  before 
shipment. 

FEED     WATER     HEATER. 

\ 

One  No.  5  Hoppes  exhaust  steam  feed  water  heater  and 
purifier  capable  of  heating  3,000  pounds  of  water  per  hour  to 
the  highest  point  attainable,  without  back  pressure  on  the 


248  ENGINEEKING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

engine.  To  have  steel  shell,  oil  extractor  and  trap;  crane  for 
removing  head ;  automatic  water  regulator  and  openings  for 
water  and  steam  as  required. 

BOILER     FEED     PUMPS. 

One  Worthington  Duplex  pump,  5/^x3^x5,  water  ends  to 
have  packed  pist  ons.  Piston  rods,  water  cylinder  linings  and 
water  pistons  to  be  of  gun  metal.  Valves  suitable  for  hot 
water;  complete  with  a  full  set  of  oil  cups  and  wrenches. 

BOILERS. 

To  be  two  in  number  as  follows: 

Dimensions:  Fifty-four  inches  diameter,  eighteen  feet 
long;  thickness  of  shells,  five  sixteenths ;  heads,  seven  six- 
teenths, to  have  half  smoke-box  extension,  bolted  on,  sixteen 
inches  in  length. 

Material:  Park  Bros.'  Open  Hearth  Homogenous  flange 
steel  of  60,000  pounds  tensile  strength.  All  plates  to  be  stamped 
with  name  of  maker,  quality  and  tensile  strength. 

Construction:  The  heads  are  to*  be  machine  flanged,  to 
have  an  easy  radius ;  and  amply  braced,  with  braces  of  best 
refined  iron,  uniformly  distributed,  so  that  each  brace  will  carry 
its  full  share  of  strain.  Before  beginning  construction  a  plan  of 
the  bracing  proposed  must  be  submitted  to  the  engineer  for 
approval. 

Tubes:  Thirty-eight — 4  inches  in  diameter,  18  feet  long, 
of  lap  welded,  charcoal  iron;  carefully  and  properly  expanded 
and  beaded  over. 

Dome:  Thirty  inches  diameter,  thirty  inches  high.  To 
be  of  same  material  as  shell ;  well  braced  and  double  riveted. 

Seams:  There  will  be  one  longitudinal,  double  riveted 
seam,  in  each  sheet,  well  removed  from  the  fire.  Other  riveting 
single.  The  make,  size  and  spacing  of  rivets  shall  be  in 
accordance  with  the  best  modern  engineering  practice. 

Supports:  There  will  be  two  extra  heavy  cast  iron  lugs 
for  each  side;  each  4^  feet  from  end  of  the  boiler.  The  for- 
ward lugs  to  rest  directly  on  cast  iron  plates  12  inches  square, 
supported  by  the  masonry.  The  rear  lugs  will  rest  upon  9  one- 
inch  rollers,  which  in  turn  will  rest  upon  12x12  plates. 

Stack:  Of  sheet  steel,  No.  12  gauge  in  thickness,  diame- 
ter 32  inches,  height  50  feet.  f  Lower  end  Y  shaped  to  fit  stack 
plates.  Furnish  sufficient  ^  inch  galvanized  iron  guy  wire  to 
make  two  complete  sets  of  guys.  Support  stack  underneath  Y 
to  brick  work  or  floor. 

Fittings:  One  5-inch  chime  whistle;  one  soot  sucker, 
complete,  with  hose  and  handle;  one  flue  scraper;  one  steel 
barrow;  complete  set  of  firing  tools,  consisting  of  shovel  hoe, 
slice-bar,  and  poker ;  2  eight-inch  steam  gauges  ;  2  one  and  one- 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOB    STEAM   PLANT.  249 

quarter  inch  combination  water  columns,  with  gauge  cocks,  and 
water  glasses;  two  4-inch  safety  valves,  with  levers  marked  to 
150  pounds  pressure;  2-inch  check,  stop  and  blow-off  valves. 

Castings:  Two  square  top,  full  flush  fronts  of  approved 
ornamental  design,  with  tight  fitting  doors,  and  anchor  rods 
extending  the  entire  length  of  brick  work  ;  six  9-foot  binding  bars 
with  cross  and  archor  rods;  soot  door  and  frame;  stack  plate 
and  damper.  Cast  iron  skeleton  frames  suitable  for  standard 
sizes  of  fire  brick,  to  be  used  in  place  of  back  plates.  Rocking 
grates  will  be  furnished  and  erected  by  the  city. 

Openings.  The  man  hole  in  front  head  under  tubes,  and 
one  in  shell  back  of  dome,  both  properly  reinforced,  and  pro- 
vided with  heads,  arches  and  bolts  complete;  two  i^  inch 
openings  for  water  column ;  one  2-inch  for  feed  and  blow  off 
pipe ;  one  4-inch  main  steam  outlet,  and  one  4-inch  for  safety 
valve ;  all  to  be  properly  reinforced  and  located  as  directed  by 
the  engineer. 

Inspection  and  Insurance.  Before  shipment  the  boilers 
will  be  tested  and  made  tight  under  a  water  pressure  of  150 
pounds.  Certificate  of  inspection  and  insurance  policy  in  the 
Hartford  Steam  Boiler  Inspection  and  Insurance  Company,  for 
the  sum  of  $500,  for  one  year  must  be  furnished,  for  each 
boiler. 

FOUNDATIONS  AND  BRICK  WORK. 

(See  Drawing.) 

The  dimensions  of  foundations  for  engine,  boilers,  heaters, 
pumps,  and  brick  work  for  furnaces,  will  be  clearly  shown  in 
drawings,  which  must  be  accurately  followed. 

Foundations:  All  are  to  be  of  concrete  composed  of  one 
part  best  domestic  cement,  three  parts  of  clean,  sharp  sand,  and 
five  parts  clean,  broken  stone  of  sizes  that  will  pass  through  a 
2^  inch  ling;  all  to  be  thoroughly  mixed,  laid  quickly,  and 
rammed  down  solid. 

Excavations:  As  per  drawing.  Remove  promptly  all 
earth  and  other  debris.  Bottom  to  be  level,  and  rammed  if 
necessary. 

Iron  Work:  All  bolts  and  plates  for  engines  and  dynamos 
must'  be  put  thoroughly  and  permanently  into  position  by  the 
contractor.  '  Outside  of  each  bolt  place  a  piece  of  2-inch  iron 
pipe,  so  as  to  permit  some  adjustment  of  the  bolts. 

Cap  Stones:  Foundations  for  heater,  and  boiler  feed 
pumps  will  project  somewhat  above  floor  line.  Each  of  these 
will  be  surmounted  by  a  neatly  cut  cap  stone,  8  inches  thick 
and  of  proper  dimensions. 

Boiler  Furnaces:  To  be  of  well  burned  red  brick,  thor- 
oughly wetted  before  laying ;  all  joints  flushed  solid ;  all  courses 


250  ENGINEERING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

level  and  straight.  Every  sixth  course  both  inside  and  outside 
to  be  a  header.  Brick  to  be  laid  in  mortar  composed  of  one 
part  lime  to  five  parts  of  sharp  sand.  Build  into  side  and  rear 
walls  a  i-inch  air  space,  which  shall  be  airtight;  except  imme- 
diately under  the  supporting  lugs  of  boilers,  where  the  walls 
shall  be  carried  up  solid. 

Fire  Brick  Lining:  The  entire  inside  of  the  furnace 
where  exposed  to  flame,  will  be  lined  with  A  No.  i  hard  burned 
fire  brick,  laid  in  dry  milled  fire  clay,  with  very  thin  joints, 
flushed  full;  headers  every  sixth  course.  Use  the  following 
special  fire  brick  "Angle  B,"  to  form  the  top  and  front  corner 
of  same,  use  the  "4^  to  give  the  batter  on  front  of  bridge  wall : 
at  top  and  bottom,  Jamb,"  also  for  the  inner  corners  of  clean- 
ing out  doors  openings.  Front  of  bridge  all  headers. 

Closing  In  Tile:  For  the  sides  of  furnace,  use  fire  brick 
tile  6x12x2^  ;  and  for  the  rear  above  tubes  lay  ordinary  fire 
brick  special  skeleton  arch  frame. 

Iron  Work:  Place  in  position  all  cleaning  outdoors,  cast 
iron  plates  and  anchor  rods. 

PIPE  CONNECTIONS. 

To  be  as  per  drawing,  which  will  be  furnished. 

Steam:  Four  inches  from  boiler  to  6-inch  header  leading 
to  engine  room,  v^here  it  will  reduce  to  size  required  by  engine, 
thence  to  engine  proper  size,  through  a  Hine  separator  suitably 
drained.  Leave  Tee  having  plugged  outlets  for  additional 
engine  and  water  works  pump. 

Exhaust:  Four  inches  from  engine  to  main  line ;  thence 
6  inches  through  heater  to  5  feet  above  roof.  Leave  plugged 
inlet  Tee  for  additional  engine  and  pump. 

Drains:  Both  the  steam  and  exhaust  pipes  are  to  have 
suitable  drains  of  ample  size  wherever  there  is  any  possibility 
of  water  accumulating.  Run  these  drains  outside  of  building. 

Small  Piping:  Feed,  blow-off  and  steam  and  exhaust 
pipes  for  boiler  feed  pumps  to  be  as  per  details  shown  in  draw- 
ing. 

Fittings :  Of  the  best  construction,  with  threads  true  and 
clean.  Use  in  all  cases  what  is  known  as  "water"  or  "sweep" 
ells  and  fittings,  having  extra  long  radii  for  curves. 

Valves:  Of  the  Jenkin  Brothers,  or  asbestos  disk  pat- 
tern. Use  gate  and  angle  valves  in  preference  to  globe.  When 
globe  valves  are  used  they  must  be  so  placed  as  not  to  form 
water  pockets. 

Supports:  All  pipe  work  to  be  well  supported  in  such  a 
way  as  to  bring  no  unusual  strain  on  the  pipe  or  fittings;  either 
from  their  weight,  or  from  expansion  or  contraction. 

Covering :  All  live  steam  pipes,  domes  and  top  of  boilers 
to  be  covered  with  a  high  grade  non-conducting  material,  such 
as  magnesia  ectional. 


SPECIFICATIONS  JFOB   LEATHER  BELTING.  251 

In  General:  The  arrangement  of  the  pipe  work  must  be 
such  as  to  provide  for  all  differential  strains  arising  from  expan- 
sion and  contraction.  The  work  to  be  of  the  best  and  most 
thorough  possible.  The  steam  pipe  will  be  tested  to  150 
pounds.  \V.  H.  B. 

160.     Specifications  for  Leather  Driving  Belts. 

The  following  specifications  for  large  leather  belts  were 
prepared  for  the  large  water  power  electric  plant  at  Austin, 
Texas,  in  1894.  It  is  thought  they  conform  to  the  latest  and  best 
practice  in  the  manufacture  of  leather  belting. 

There  are  to  be  six  main  driving  belts  and  seven  belts  to 
drive  dynamos,  of  dimensions  as  hereinafter  scheduled. 

These  belts  are  to  be  of  leather  made  from  the  best  selected, 
large  steer  hides,  of  pure  oak-bark  tannage.  The  cuts  are  to 
be  taken  from  the  centre  solid  portions  of  the  hides,  and  are 
not  to  include  shoulders,  flank  or  soft  parts  of  the  hides.  Each 
piece  is  to  be  of  fine,  close  fibres  and  all  pieces  are  to  be  scarf- 
ed to  a  uniform  thickness.  No  piece  taken  from  one  hide  is  to 
exceed  a  net  length  of  fifty  inches. 

The  individual  pieces  of  the  leather  are  to  be  thoroughly 
stretched  after  currying  and  again  machine  tested  and  the  utmost 
stretch,  within  elastic  limits,  given  to  the  belts  when  they  have 
been  made  up  complete. 

The  transverse  lap  joints  are  not  to  exceed  four  inches  in 
longitudinal  length,  are  to  be  scarfed  in  the  best  manner,  thor- 
oughly cemented  and  are  to  be  made  fast  and  durable  without 
the  use  of  pegs  or  rivets.  All  belt  edges  are  to  be  properly 
rounded. 

All  belts  are  to  be  thoroughly  water-proofed. 

The  complete  belts  are  to  be  soft,  pliable,  and  finished  with 
smooth  polished  surfaces. 

The  belts  of  thirty-eight  inch  width  are  to  be  of  double 
thickness.  The  outer  face  pieces  are  each  to  be  in  a  single 
width,  with  centre  conforming  to  the  back-bone  centre  of  the 
hide.  The  inner,  or  running  face  pieces  of  the  thirty-eight 
inch  belts  are  to  be  n'neteen  inches  in  net  width  and  to  have 
one  and  one-half  inch  scarfed  and  lapped  longitudinal  joints. 
One  edge  of  each  half-width  will  be  cut  along  the  back-bone 
centre  ot  the  hide  and  in  the  makeup  of  the  belt,  these  inside 
half  widths  are  to  be  placed  with  the  back-bone  edges  at  the 
outer  edges  of  the  belt.  These  seam  sides  of  the  thirty-eight 
inch  belts  are  to  be  run  next  the  pulleys. 

All  the  remaining  belts  are  to  be  of  double  thickness  in 
single  width  pieces,  with  centres  of  each  piece  conforming  to 
the  back-bone  centres  of  the  hide.  The  belts  are  to  be  finished 


252  ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

with    uniform    thicknesses    respectively  not  less  than  as  follows 
for  each  stated  width : 

38  inches  width  of  not  less  than  -  -a  inches  thickness. 

04: 

25    "    "    "    "    "  £   "      "      '  '• 
24    "    "    "    "    "  f    "      " 

•tA  tt  II  t(  ((  (I         ^  tt  tt 

64 


The  speeds  of  the  belts  will  be  at  rates  of  about  5,000 
lineal  feet  per  minute. 

All  these  belts  are  to  be  transported  to  the  power  house 
now  being  constructed  by  the  Board  of  Public  Works  of  Aus- 
tin, Texas,  in  Austin,  and  are  to  be  placed  upon  the  pulleys  in 
the  power  house  and  spliced  and  cemented  in  place. 

The  hides  and  manufacture,  finish  and  fitting  of  the  belts 
are  to  be  first-class  in  every  respect  and  the  belts  are  to  be 
guaranteed  to  run  smoothly  and  straight  upon  the  pulleys  and 
to  work  successfully  for  the  space  of  one  year  from  the  time  of 
the  starting  up  of  the  power  house  for  regular  work. 

If  any  defect  tending  to  impair  the  usefulness  or  life  of  any 
belt  supplied  under  this  specification,  shall  develop  within  one 
year  that  belt  shall  at  once  be  made  good  by  the  manufacturer 
or  replaced  by  a  belt  conforming  with  this  specification. 

Proposals  for  these  belts,  as  fitted  in  place  ready  for  the 
starting  of  the  machines,  are  to  be  delivered  to  the  Hon.  John 
McDonald,  Mayor,  and  President  of  the  Board  of  Public  Works, 
Austin,  Texas,  on  or  before  the  8th  day  of  December,  1894, 
and  all  belts  are  to  be  delivered  and  fitted  in  place  'ready  for 
use  within  six  weeks  of  the  date  of  the  order  for  their  manufac- 
ture and  delivery. 

The  Board  of  Public  Works  reserves  the  right  to  reject  any 
and  all  proposals  as  may  be  for  the  best  interest  of  the  City  of 
Austin. 

Blue-prints  showing  relative  positions  of  the  pulleys  and 
inclinations  of  the  belts  are  submitted  herewith. 


SPECIFICATIONS    FOR  WATER-POWER   PUMPS.         253 

SCHEDULE    OF    BELTS. 


H.  P. 

"o 
Ji  £ 

In. 

•£  Thickness  in 
s*  64ths  of  an  inch. 

Diameter  of 
D  Driving  Pulley, 

M  Diameter  of 
s  Driven  Pulley. 

>2j  Distance  be- 
n  tween  Centres 
~  of  Shafts. 

^S   o 

Feet. 

Main  Driving'  Belt 

28 

ti 

A-}     I  n8 

^8 

28 

Ct 

5: 

4.2     76l 

no  66* 

«                         < 

2OI 

2C 

C4 

26 

14                                                     » 

26 

$'075 

«                                                     i 

2OI 

2C 

24 

26 

4-5   -770 

i  oi  230 

Dynamo  Belt 

201 

25 

s 

26 

&S? 

107  846 

J34 

14 

24 

28  c 

is  625 

47   222 

134 

So 

26.5 
18 

17.688 

45-348 

IOO 

13 

24 

er 

18 

1Q  70S 

80 

So 

ii 
ii 

21 

22 

1 

18 

18 

15.211 
19.912 

38.800 
48.102 

J.  T.  F. 

16 1 .    Specifications  for  Pumps  to  be  Operated  by 

\Vater  Power.  The  following  specification  was  prepared 
for  the  city  of  Austin,  Texas,  in  1892,  for  the  construction  of 
two  pumps  for  a  city  water  supply  to  be  driven  by  water  power 
machinery. 

PUMPS. — There  are  to  be  two  pairs  of  horizontal,  double- 
acting,  plunger  pumps,  having  two  pump  cylinders  to  each 
pair.  Each  pair  of  pumps  is  to  have  capacity  to  deliver  four 
million  gallons  of  water  per  24  hours. 

The  dimensions  of  plunger  will  be  approximately  as 
follows:  1%  foot  diameter,  2^  foot  stroke,  with  25  revo- 
lutions per  minute ;  the  plunger  speed  not  to  exceed  a  mean 
rate  of  1375^  feet  per  minute  when  pumping  water  at  the 
rate  of  four  million  gallons  per  twenty-four  hours. 

These  pumps  are  to  be  adapted  for  pumping  to  a  reservoir 
and  also  for  pumping  directly  into  the  city  distribution  pipes 
with  direct  pressure,  the  pump  house  being  located  between  the 
reservoir  and  the  city.  The  static  head  of  the  reservoir  is  245 
feet  and  the  dynamic  head  approximately  265  feet  and  the  force 
main  to  the  reservoir  is  7,600  feet  in  length,  of  24  inch  pipe. 

These  pumps  are  to  receive  motion  from  vertical  turbine 
shafts  having  beveled  gears  which  drive  a  jack  shaft.  On  the 
jack  shaft  is  to  be  a  spur  pinion,  which  will  drive  a  spur 
mortise  gear  on  the  main  pump  shaft.  On  each  end  of  the 
main  shafts  are  to  be  balanced  crank  disks,  which  will  drive 
the  pumps. 


254  ENGINEERING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

The  receiving  and  delivery  chambers  are  to  be  ample  in 
dimensions,  and  are  to  have  nests  of  valves  of  the  best  bronze 
composition  of  approximately  3  inches  diameter,  and  sufficient 
in  number  so  that  the  valves  shall  not  lift  more  than  3/fa  inches 
each  when  the  rate  of  delivery  of  the  pumps  is  at  four  million 
gallons  per  day.  The  pump  chambers  will  be  well  provided 
with  hand-holes  that  will  give  easy  access  to  each  of  the  valves. 

The  water  supply  for  each  pair  of  pumps  is  to  be  taken 
from  a  30  inch  branch  in  the  horizontal  penstock  in  the  base- 
ment beneath  the  pump  room  floor.  The  necessary  admission 
and  discharge  pipes,  of  ample  size  and  easy  curves,  and  a  tall 
air  vessel  for  each  pair  of  pumps  are  to  be  provided.  The 
force  mains  will  be  connected  with  the  force  mains  leading  to 
the  reservoir,  on  the  outside  of  the  pump  house  wall,  and  not 
exceeding  10  feet  distance  from  the  face  of  the  wrall. 

The  pump  cylinders  will  be  connected  with  the  main  and 
jack  shaft  pillow  blocks  by  continuous,  heavy  cast-iron  girders, 
adapted  to  carry  the  bearings  and  the  strains  of  the  connecting 
rods  without  tremble  or  elasticity. 

The  main  and  jack  shafts  are  to  be  of  the  best  wrought 
iron  forgings  turned  to  the  diameters  indicated  upon  the  draw- 
ings, and  bossed  up  to  receive  the  gears.  The  large  gears,  of 
both  the  spur  and  bevel  pairs,  will  be  mortise  gears  with  their 
mortises  planed,  and  having  thoroughly  seasoned,  machine  cut, 
smooth  maple  cogs,  fitted  and  keyed  in  the  most  rigid  manner. 
The  cogs  are  to  be  thoroughly  boiled  in  oil. 

Each  spur  pinion  is  to  be  machine  moulded,  with  teeth 
planed  on  both  sides  to  match  and  run  with  mortise  gears. 
Both  gears  and  pinions  are  to  be  bored  to  fit  their  respective 
shafts  and  to  be  keyed  in  place.  The  pinions  are  to  be  feather 
keyed  on  the  jack  shaft  and  fitted  with  approved  screw  motion 
to  move  them  out  or  into  gear  and  to  hold  them  where  placed. 

The  jack  shafts  are  to  be  not  less  than  6}/£  inches,  and  the 
main  shafts  not  less  than  nine  inches  diameter  in  the  bearings. 

The  two  jack  shafts  are  to  have  their  axes  precisely  in  line 
and  .are  to  have  a  connecting  shaft  fitted  with  couplings,  bear- 
ings and  distance  plates  as  directed. 

All  bearings  are  to  be  babbeted  and  bored  out,  of  ample 
lenght  to  insure  moderate  wear  and  easy  lubrication,  and  are  to 
be  fitted  with  oil  cups. 

The  cranks  will  be  in  balanced  disk  forms  and  fitted  with 
mild  steel  pins.  The  connecting  rods  will  be  of  the  best 
wrought  iron,  and  fitted  with  brasses,  steel  straps  and  adjusting 
keys  and  babbeted  friction  bearings.  The  cross  heads  will  be 
of  forged  iron  approved  model  with  steel  wrist  pins.  The 
guides  will  be  rigidly  bolted  to  the  girders  and  adjustable  to 
wear.  The  plunger  rod  and  plunger  stuffing  box  glands,  the 
valves  and  all  interior  bolts  and  nuts  will  be  of  the  best  solid 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR   A  WELL   AND    CURB.  255 

standard  bronze  metal.  The  plunger  stuffing  box  will  be 
packed  with  the  best  quality  of  "Seldon"  or  other  approved 
packing.  The  crank  disks,  connecting  rods,  straps  and  cross- 
heads  are  to  have  polished  surfaces. 

All  bearings  and  wrist  pin  brasses  are  to  be  fitted  with  the 
best  oil  cups  and  with  proper  drip  pockets,  and  drip  pipes  are 
to  be  provided  where  required. 

There  is  to  be  furnished  and  connected  with  each  pair  of 
pumps  one  8  inch  water  pressure  gauge,  indicating  the  column 
of  water  in  both  feet  head  and  pounds  pressure.  There  will  be 
a  good  approved  revolution  counter  fitted  to  each  pair  of 
pumps  as  directed  by  the  engineer.  There  \vill  be  a  long 
Scotch  tube  water  glass  with  proper  cocks  on  each  air  vessel. 

The  general  plan  of  the  power  house  shows  the  position  of 
these  pumps,  the  method  of  connecting  their  power,  and  the 
positions  of  their  suction  and  delivery  pipes. 

Full  detail  drawings  of  the  pumps  and  their  appendages 
are  to  be  delivered  to  the  consulting  engineer  and  are  to  be 
subject,  in  all  respects  to  his  approval.  J.  T.  F. 

162.    Specification  for  a  Pump  Well.  The  following 

specification  describes  a  good  method  of  sinking  a  well  from  20 
to  50  feet  in  diameter  and  to  a  depth  not  usually  exceeding  50 
to  60  feet.  Such  wells  are  usually  sunk  through  water-bearing 
strata,  where  an  open  cut  would  have  to  be  supported  by  some 
kind  of  curbing  and  this  curbing  may  as  well  be  the  masonry 
well  curb  itself.  In  this  case  it  is  necessary  to  rest  this  masonry 
upon  a  shoe  which  may  be  made  either  of  wood  or  iron.  In 
the  former  case  an  iron  cutting  edge  should  be  provided.  It  is 
also  best  to  reduce  the  external  diameter  of  the  masonry  curb  a 
short  distance  above  the  shoe  in  order  to  prevent  the  whole 
mass  from  sticking  in  the  process  of  sinking  by  its  becoming 
tightly  bound  by  the  surrounding  earth.  It  is  necessary  to 
anchor  the  lower  portion  of  the  masonry  curb  to  the  shoe  by 
means  of  iron  bolts,  as  indicated  in  these  specifications. 

Pump  Well. — The  pump  well  shall  be  constructed  within 
lines  to  be  given  by  the  Engineer,  and  will  consist  of  a  brick 
curb,  laid  in  cement  mortar,  on  an  oak  shoe  provided  with  an 
angle  iron  ring  bolted  to  the  under  side  of  shoe  flush  with  its 
outer  periphery. 

S/ioe. — The  shoe  shall  be  in  three  rings  of  unseasoned  oak, 
three  inches  thick,  made  up  in  segments,  the  segments  to  be  a 


256  ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 

true  arc  upon  the  outer  periphery  and  bolted  together  with 
seven  eigths  (%)  inch  bolts  and  wrought  iron  washers  to  break 
joint  as  shown  in  drawing  marked  "Section  and  Details  Pump 
Well,"  on  file  in  the  office  of  the  Water  Works  Committee. 
The  width  of  the  shoe  shall  be  twenty-two  (22)  inches,  and 
when  bolted  up  shall  measure  nine  (9)  inches  in  depth  or 
thickness.  The  ring  shall  be  of  4x4  inch  angle  iron  five  eighths 
(f£)  inch  thick  weighing  16.2  pounds  per  foot,  twenty-one 
(21)  feet  external  diameter,  with  two  fishplates  eighteen  (18) 
inches  long  at  each  joint,  riveted  on  hot,  with  four  (4)  three 
quarter  (24  )  rivets  staggered,  each  side  of  joint;  the  heads  of 
/ivets  to  be  countersunk  and  finished  flush  on  outside  of  angle 
iron  ring  and  shall  be  attached  to  the  oak  shoe  with  sixty  (60) 
seven  eighths  (^)  bolts,  placed  about  one  (i)  foot  and  one 
(i)  inch,  center  to  center,  on  a  circle  twenty  (20)  feet,  seven 
and  one  half  (7%)  inches  diameter.  These  bolts  shall  have 
forged  square  heads  and  nuts  and  wrought  iron  washers.  The 
oak  shoe  shall  have  a  diameter  of  twenty-one  (21)  feet. 

Curb. — The  cuib  shall  be  of  select  hard  burned  front  or 
paving  brick,  straight,  sound  and  solid,  when  broken.  No 
over  burned  or  salmon  brick  will  be  accepted,  and  the  brick 
shall  be  laid  on  the  oak  shoe  in  courses;  in  full  beds  of  cement 
mortar,  consisting  of  one  part  Louisville  [fresh  burned]  cement 
to  2  parts  of  clean  sharp  sand  which  shall  be  mixed  only  as  fast 
as  used  by  the  masons.  No  cement  mortar  which  has  had  an 
over  dose  of  water  or  sand,  or  which  has  be^un  to  set  in  the 
mortar  box  shall  be  used,  but  all  such  must  be  thrown  aside. 
The  bricks  shall  be  free  from  dust  and  wet  with  a  sprinkling 
hose  or  can,  or  be  dipped  by  the  mason  in  clean  water  before 
being  placed  in  the  curb  and  all  joints  shall  be  slushed  with 
mortar  pressed  in  with  the  trowel,  as  rapidly  as  the  courses  of 
brick  work  are  laid  up.  No  GROUTING  WILL  BE  ALLOWED.* 

The  outer  and  inner  faces  of  the  curb  shall  be  laid  in  true 
circles  of  the  dimensions  shown  by  the  drawing  above  men- 
tioned, and  shall  have  at  the  bottom  (or  on  the  shoe)  an  exter- 
nal diameter  of  twenty  (20)  feet  ten  (10)  inches,  and  an 
internal  diameter  of  seventeen  (17)  feet  four  (4)  inches,  these 
dimensions  for  a  height  of  two  (2)  feet  six  (6)  inches,  when 
the  internal  diameter  shall  be  contracted  by  a  gradual  racking 
inward  of  the  courses  to  a  height  of  four  (4)  feet  above  the 
shoe,  where  the  internal  diameter  shall  be  sixteen  (16)  feet 
eight  (8)  inches. 

From  a  depth  or  height  of  four  (4)  feet  above  the  shoe- to 
the  top  of  well  the  internal  diameter  shall  be  eighteen  (18) 
feet,  and  the  external  diameter  shall  be  twenty  (20)  feet  ten 
(10)  inches  from  the  shoe  to  the  top  of  well,  the  thickness  of 
wall  at  the  bottom  or  on  the  shoe,  and  for  two  and  one  half 

*  The  author  would  prefer  the  grouting  to  the  slushing  with   mortar,  as   better  cal- 
«ulated  to  obtain  perfectly  solid  joints. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR   A   WELL   AND    CURB.  257 

(2%)  feet  above,  shall  be  twenty-one  (21)  inches,  four  (4) 
feet  above  the  shoe  the  thickness  shall  be  twenty-five  (25) 
inches,  and  for  the  remainder  of  heighth  or  depth,  the  thickness 
shall  be  seventeen  (17)  inches. 

The  bricks  shall  be  laid  stretchers  and  headers  or  with 
hoop  iron  bond,  as  may  be  directed  by  the  engineer.  The 
contractor  to  state  in  his  proposal  the  difference  in  price-  (if 
any),  should  all  bricks  be  laid  as  stretchers  and  the  curb  bonded 
from  insiJe  to  outside  with  hoop  iron. 

Should  hoop  iron  bond  be  used  this  will  be  of  charcoal  iron, 
Xo.  1 6,  B.  G.,  one  and  one  half  (i  1-2)  inches  wide  cut  four 
(4)  inches  longer  than  thickness  of  wall,  with  each  end  turned 
at  right  angles  for  a  length  of  two  (2)  inches,  and  shall  be 
placed  eighteen  (18)  inches  apart  around  the  wall,  and  shall 
occur  at  every  fifth  horrizontal  joint. 

The  curb  of  the  well  shall  be  truly  cylindrical  for  all 
depths,  and  shall  be  carried  down  plumb.  The  outer  surface 
of  the  brick  work  must  be  true  to  the  arcs  and  smooth,  to  pre- 
vent sticking  as  the  material  is  undermined  from  the  shoe,  and 
the  inside  joints  shall  be  neatly  struck  as  the  courses  of  brick 
are  laid. 

Anchor  Bolts.  The  lower  or  first  eight  (8)  feet  of  the 
curb  shall  be  attached  to  the  shoe  by  ten  (10)  anchor  bolts, 
eight  (8)  feet  long,  of  seven  eighths  (7-8)  inch  round  iron, 
with  square  nuts  and  wrought  iron  washers  at  the  bottom  and 
square  nuts  and  plate  iron  washers  of  one  quarter  (1-4)  inch, 
boiler  iron  eight  (8)  inches  square  at  the  top,  the  bolts  shall  be= 
placed  about  six  (6)  feet  apart,  and  built  in  as  shown  by  the^ 
drawing  herein  mentioned,  and  after  the  course  of  brick  next: 
under  the  washers  (at  top)  has  been  laid,  the  nuts  shall  be  aU 
screwed  down  on  the  washers,  and  the  excess  of  thread  on  the 
bolts  carefully  cut  off  with  a  hack  saw,  to  avoid  disturbance  of 
the  brick  work  just  set. 

Coping.  The  well  shall  be  finished  with  a  coping  of  sand 
stone  ten  (10)  inches  thick,  twenty-one  (21)  inches  wide,  with 
an  internal  diameter  of  seventeen  (17)  feet  eight  (8)  inches,  to 
project  two  (2)  inches  inside  and  outside  brick  work  at  top  of 
curb.  The  inner  and  outer  edges  of  coping  on  top  shall  have  a 
chiseled  wash  one  and  one  half  (i%)  inches  "in"  on  the  bed 
and  one  (i)  inch  "down"  on  the  face.  The  coping  shall  be 
made  up  in  ten  (10)  segments  of  uniform  length  of  arc,  and 
shall  be  dressed  to  lay  with  less  than  one  quarter  (^)  inch 
joint.  The  joints  shall  be  filled  with  mortar  worked  in  with  the 
trowel  and  the  several  segments  shall  be  cramped  together  with 
iron  cramps  of  best  "^X2^£  f.  b.  iron  with  legs  2^  inches 
long,  and  width  of  cramps  between  legs  fifteen  (15)  inches. 
These  cramps  shall  be  "let"  into  the  beds  of  stones  at  the  mid- 
width,  flush  with  the  surface  of  coping,  and  the  leg  pockets 
17 


258  ENGINEEBING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

fchall  be  cut  slightly  dovetail  with  a  flare  downwards,  and  after 
the  cramps  are  set  shall  be  run  with  hot  lead  caulked  in  place. 
The  lower  bed  shall  be  chisel  dressed  to  make  a  joint  on  a  full 
bed  of  mortar  with  the  last  course  of  brick,  and  the  faces  and 
upper  beds  shall  be  finely  chiseled  to  a  smooth  even  surface. 

Excavation.  The  well  will  be  constructed  by  the  under- 
mining method,  a  circular  hole,  twenty-one  (21)  feet  diameter 
will  be  sunk  in  the  clay  eight  (8)  or  ten  (10)  or  more  feet, 
depending  upon  the  capacity  of  the  material  to  stand  vertical, 
and  at  the  option  of  the  contractor  and  upon  approval  of  the 
engineer.  The  shoe  will  then  be  placed  in  the  hole  and  care- 
fully leveled,  the  anchor  bolts  being  in  place,  the  brick  curb 
will  be  laid  as  herein  provided  until  the  brick  work  reaches  a 
heighth  of  three  (3)  feet  above  the  level  of  ground,  when  fur- 
ther excavation  will  be  had  by  removing  the  material  within 
the  curb  and  under  the  shoe  and  allowing  the  shoe  to  settle 
from  the  superimposed  weight  of  the  curb.  The  excavation 
under  the  shoe  to  be  carried  down  uniformly  all  around  to 
maintain  a  true  level  of  the  last  course  of  brick  on  the  curb. 
The  level  shall  be  taken  for  each  course  of  brick  laid,  and 
w7hen  found  "out"  the  curb  shall  be  truly  leveled  by  additional 
excavation  under  the  higher  side.  J.  W.  H. 

163.    Specification  for  Turbine  Water  Wheels. 

The  following  specifications  for  both  horizontal  and  vertical 
turbine  water  wheels  was  used  in  the  construction  of  the  large 
water  power  system  of  Austin,  Texas,  of  1892. 

Horizontal  Turbines.  There  are  to  be  four  pairs  of  hori- 
zontal turbines  of  506  horse  power  each,  under  54  feet  head. 
Each  pair  of  these  turbines  will  discharge  into  one  common 
draft  tube.  On  the  shaft  of  each  pair  of  turbines  there  will  be 
two  pulleys,  each  to  be  adapted  to  transmit  the  full  power  of 
the  pair  of  turbines,  and  on  the  same  shaft  there  will  be  a  heavy 
balance  wheel.  The  pulleys  are  to  be  for  belt  or  rope  driving 
as  directed.  The  turbine  shafts  are  to  have  ample  bearing 
surfaces,  and  each  exterior  bearing  is  to  be  fitted  with  oil  cups 
and  proper  drip  pockets. 

Each  turbine  case  is  to  have  a  man-hole  of  10x15  inches 
clear  opening.  Er.ch  of  the  turbine  quarter-turns  is  to  be  of 
cast-iron  and  is  to  be  fitted  with  a  good  stuffing  box  and  is  to 
be  flanged,  fitted  and  bolted  to  its  5^  feet  diameter  stop  valve. 
The  draft  tube  is  to  be  flared  at  its  mouth.  A  cast-iron  plate 
is  to  be  fitted  on  the  floor  of  each  tail  race  under  each  draft 
tube,  which  plate  is  to  be  6y2  feet  diameter  and  raised  coni- 
cally  in  the  center  to  a  point.  The  floor  plates  are  each  to  be 
secured  with  twelve  ^  inch  lag  bolts. 


SPECIFICATIONS    FOR   TURBINE   WATER   WHEELS.      259 

The  turbine  cases,  quarter-turns  and  feeder  pipes  are  to 
have  proper  lugs  upon  them  to  rest  upon  the  iron  beams  and 
masonry,  which  are  to  be  their  supports. 

A  strong  and  rigid  frame  of  iron  beams  is  to  be  furnished 
with  each  pair  of  turbines.  Each  frame  is  to  be  supplied  with 
proper  strong  hold-down  bolts  and  anchor  plates.  All  anchor 
rods,  ph.tes,  lugs  and  braces  are  to  be  supplied  that  may  be 
necessary  to  secure  the  turbine  cases,  frames,  draft  tubes  and 
feeder  pipes  securely  in  place,  so  they  will  be  free  from  move- 
ments or  vibration. 

Vertical  Turbines.  There  are  to  be  also  two  turbines 
with  vertical  shafts,  each  of  185  horse  power  under  54  feet 
head.  These  vertical  turbines  will  have  draft  tubes  similar  to 
those  above  described  for  the  horizontal  turbines.  The  draft 
tubes  are  to  be  quarter  inch  plate  iron  with  seams  riveted  so  as 
to  be  air  tight  and  with  seams  caulked  in  a  workmanship  man- 
ner. The  shaft  of  each  vertical  turbine  is  to  extend  up  to  a 
level  proper  to  receive  the  beveled  pinion  at  the  pump  room 
floor.  A  pair  of  bevel  wheels  is  to  be  furnished  with  each  of 
the  vertical  turbines  of  ratios  as  directed,  approximately  2  and 
75-100  to  i.  The  larger  bevel  will  be  a  mortise  gear  wheel 
with  planed  mortises  and  fitted  with  the  best  maple  cogs  wrhich 
have  been  thoroughly  seasoned  and  boiled  in  oil  and  substanti- 
ally keyed  in  place.  The  small  bevel  gear  will  be  machine 
molded  and  have  planed  teeth. 

The  vertical  feeder  pipe  with  each  vertical  turbine  and  its 
quarter-turn  will  be  supplied  with  each  wheel  case.  Within 
this  vertical  feeder  pipe  are  to  be  a  sufficient  number  of  bearings 
to  keep  the  shaft  truly  in  line.  These  feeder  pipes  are  to  be 
made  of  quarter  inch  plate  iron  of  good  ductile  stock,  of  not 
less  than  40,000  pounds  tensile  resistance  per  square  inch,  and 
are  to  be  well  riveted  with  hot  rivets  and  are  to  be  calked  water 
tight  in  a  workmanlike  manner. 

The  quarter-turns  will  be  flanged  and  fitted  with  bolts  to 
connect  them  to  the  vertical  and  horizontal  feeder  penstock 
pipes  or  valves.  Each  vertical  turbine  is  to  have  ample  capacity 
when  working  under  54  feet  head  to  start  its  pair  of  pumps 
when  pumping  at  a  rate  of  four  million  gallons  in  24  hours 
against  a  pressure  of  265  feet  of  water  and  to  bring  the  speed 
of*the  pumps  quickly  and  easily  up  to  a  rate  of  25  revolutions 
per  minute. 

The  turbines  will  have  bronze  buckets,  approved  gates  and 
gate  gears,  and  composition  stuffing  box  glands.  Approved 
cast-iron,  bright  standard  and  hand  wheels  will  be  set  on  the 
main  floors  of  the  house,  where  directed,  and  connected  with 
the  gate  gears.  Approved,  sensitive  regulators  will  be  con- 
nected with  the  horizontal  turbines.  Substantial  pedestals  will 
be  provided  for  the  bearings  of  the  horizontal  shafts. 


260  ENGINEERING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

The  turbines  are  each  to  be  guaranteed  to  give  a  duty  of 
not  less  than  So  per  cent,  by  dynamometrical  test,  in  a  testing 
flume,  or  by  similar  test  when  driving  their  pumps  at  a  rate  to 
deliver  four  million  gallons  of  water  per  24  hours  into  the 
reservoir.  *  *  ;;-;; 

The  turbine  cases,  turbine  and  draft  tubes,  also  the  vertical 
feeder  pipes  of  the  vertical  wheels  and  all  the  quarter-turns, 
are  to  be  set  in  place  in  the  power  house  being  constructed 
in  Austin,  Texas,  by  the  Board  of  Public  Works  of  the  city, 
and  their  materials  and  workmanship,  and  their  trimmings  and 
anchorages  are  to  be  of  the  best  of  their  respective  classes,  to 
the  full  approval  of  the  Engineer,  and  are  to  be  guaranteed  and 
maintained  in  perfect  condition  for  the  term  of  one  year  after 
their  test  and  acceptance. 

A  general  plan  accompanying  this  specification  shows  the 
wheel  pits,  penstocks,  feeder  pipes  and  draft  tubes,  the  floors 
of  the  power  house  and  method  of  using  the  power.  Full  detail 
drawings  of  the  turbines  and  their  appendages  are  to  be  deliv- 
ered to  the  Consulting  Engineer  and  are  to  be  subject  to  his 
approval  in  all  respects.  J.  T.  F. 

164.  Specification  for  the  Installation  of  an 
Electric  Lighting  Station  in  a  Small  City.  The  fol- 
lowing specification  for  an  electric  lighting  station  were  pre- 
pared in  the  year  1894,  for  a  small  city  which  required  an 
economical  installation.  They  are  given  here,  not  for  the  pur- 
pose of  being  copied,  but  as  an  illustration  of  what  was  con- 
sidered good  practice  at  the  time  they  were  drawn.  The 
gentleman  who  prepared  these  specifications  has  had  a  large 
experience  in  Electric  Light  installation,  having  been  at  one 
time  manager  of  an  Electric  Works,  while  at  the  same  time 
being  a  mechanical  engineer  of  thorough  training  and  wide 
experience.  The  work  was  to  be  erected  under  his  own 
supervision  and  inspection,  so  that  it  was  only  necessary 
to  make  such  a  specification  as  would  warrant  him  in  demand- 
ing first-class  materials  and  workmanship  in  the  execution. 

STATION  PLANT. 

Dynamo:  The  dynamo  shall  be  of  constant  potential 
alternating  incandescent  type,  and  to  have  a  nominal  or  rated 
capacity  of  thirty  to  thirty-five  kilo-watts,  at  one  thousand  to 

*The  author  recommends  that  a  bonus  and  forfeiture  condition  should  accompany 
such  a  duty  clause  as  this. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR  ELECTRIC  LIGHTING  PLANT.    261 

one  thousand  and  one  hundred  volt  at  station.  State  numb 
of  alterations  per  minute.  Exciter  to  be  belt  driven  froi 
alternator  shaft.  By  "nominal"  or  "rated"  capacity  is  meant 
that  load  at  which  the  dynamo  will  run  continuously,  without 
undue  heating.  Proposals  will  state  the  capacity,  and  the 
amount  of  overload  the  machine  will  safely  stand  for  three 
hours  run  in  hot  weather.  Bids  are  also  desired  on  direct 
connected  generators,  with  high  speed  engine  of  approved  de- 
sign. Bids  must  give  full  details,  and  be  accompanied  by 
drawings. 

Attachments:  Machine  to  have  insulated  base  frame, 
belt  tightener,  self-oiling  bearings,  automatic  regulator,  and  all 
necessary  station  and  switch-board  apparatus,  including  light- 
ning ari'fsters.  Submit  a  list  of  station  equipment  intended  to 
be  furnished. 

Regulators:  Must  automatically  control  the  current  over 
the  entire  range  of  the  capacity  of  the  machine,  without  undue 
heating,  or  sparking;  so  that  the  power  required  is  at  all  times 
proportionate  to  the  number  of  lamps  burning.  It  must  pro- 
vide a  steady  and  uniform  light,  with  variations  in  the  engine 
speed  not  exceeding  three  per  cent.  The  regulators  must  pro- 
tect the  dynamos  in  case  of  short  circuiting  on  the  line. 

Erection:  Contractors  will  deliver  machine,  and  all  sta- 
tion apparatus,  and  erectsame  in  position,  including  substantial 
foundations  of  concrete.  They  will  run  wires  in  station 
between  outlet  where  external  construction  begins,  and  switch- 
board, machines,  arresters,  exciter,  grounds,  etc.  Wire  to 
Okonite.  Furnish  and  place  switch-board,  and  erect  all  appa- 
ratus thereon.  Furnish  expert  to  erect*  adjust,  and  run  appa- 
ratus ten  days,  instructing  the  city's  attendants  in  its  care  and 
operation.  Contractor  must  keep  informed  as  to  the  progress 
of  the  work,  and  arrange  the  time  of  his  experts  accordingly, 
and  there  will  be  no  allowance  for  extra  time  or  traveling 
expenses,  not  specially  ordered.  State  charge  per  day  for  the 
time  of  expert  longer  than  ten  days. 

Acceptance:  Before  leaving,  the  expert  must  satisfacto- 
rily make  the  capacity  test,  and  such  other  texts  as  the  city  may 
require  to  satisfy  itself  that  the  provisions  of  the  contract  have 
been  fully  carried  cut.  At  the  end  of  the  ten  days'  run,  the 
apparatus  will  be  accepted,  providing  the  requirements  of  the 
contract  have  been  fully  met. 

Switch  Board:  Furnish  and  erect  a  switch-board,  com- 
plete, of  good,  hard,  well  seasoned  wood,  providing  for  one 
dynamo  and  two  mains  for  commercial,  and  for  street  lights  as 
hereinafter  provided.  Arrange  for  easy  access  to  rear  of  board. 
Submit  list  of  apparatus  to  be  placed  on  switchboard. 


262  ENGINEERING    SPECIFICATIONS. 

Lightning  Arresters :  Include  six  double  pole  lightninj 
arresters  of  approved  form  f.or  use  on  the  circuits  throughout 
the  city. 

MISCELLANEOUS  APPARATUS    AND    SUPPLIES. 

Converters:  From  one  thousand  to  one  hundred  volts. 
Number  and  capacity  to  be  as  per  the  accompanying  list. 
Each  must  be  provided  with  fuse  box  and  eye  bolts,  or  wrought 
it  on  straps;  with  hooks  on  upper  ends  to  hang  directly  from 
cross  arm  or  cleats.  The  regulation  imist  be  within  two  and 
one  half  per  cent,  for  the  smallest  size,  and  two  per  cent,  for 
the  largest,  besides  which,  the  leakage  losses  must  not  exceed 
five  per  cent,  on  the  small,  and  one  per  cent,  on  the  large,  and 
the  regulation  and  leakage  must  be  uniform  for  all  converters 
of  the  same  size.  Each  converter  must  be  ample  to  carry,  in 
emergencies  for  three  hours  continuously,  without  dangerous 
overheating,  twice  its  rated  capacity,  but,  of  course,  with 
reduced  efficiency. 

Shunt  Coils:  Fifty  in  number;  one  to  be  used  with  each 
street  lamp,  of  which  there  are  five  groups,  of  ten  each.  The 
shunt  coils  to  take  care  of  the  current  in  the  event  of  a  lamp 
burning  out.  Furnish  two  extra  coils  for  reserve. 

Meters:  Will  read  ampere  or  watts  hours,  and  must  be 
carefully  adjusted  and  tested  before  shipment.  See  list 
appended.  Furnish  one  extra  meter  of  each  of  the  three 
smallest  sizes. 

Lamps:  To  be  of  approved  make,  and  furnished  with 
such  base  as  may  be  selected  later.  Efficiency  fifty-five  watts 
per  sixteen  candle  power  lamp.  Furnish,  now,  1,000  sixteen 
candle  power,  and  100  thirty-two  candle  power.  All  for  one 
hundred  volt  current. 

Sockets:  One  thousand  of  first-class  construction,  with 
porcelain  base  to  fit  such  lamp  as  may  be  selected  later. 

Delivery  and  Erection:  The  converters,  meters,  lamps 
and  sockets  shown  on  accompanying  lists  and  maps,  are  to  be 
erected  in  position.  The  rest  of  the  quantities  above  named 
are  to  be  delivered  to  the  city  for  future  use. 

Future  Orders:  The  quantities  hereinbefore  mentioned 
are  to  be  included  in  original  proposal  price,  but  a  price  must 
also  be  named  at  which  additional  orders  may  be  placed  within 
one  year  from  signing  contract. 

EXTERNAL  CONSTRUCTION. 

Pole  Line. — Furnish  and  erect  in  position  all  poles  and 
cross-arms  for  the  complete  distribution  system  shown  on  blue 
print.  All  poles  to  be  live  peeled  white  cedar,  30  feet  long,  6 
inches  diameter  at  top,  housed  and  gained  for  two  cross-arms. 
Set  4*/2  feet  in  ground  and  tamp  well.  Poles  must  be  straight 
and  sound.  Any  poles  crooking  more  than  one  inch  in  five 


SPECIFICATIONS    FOR  ELECTRIC  LIGHTING  PLANT.    263 

feet  or  having  more  than  ten  per  cent,  rot  in  butt,  will  be 
rejected.  Location  of  poles  will  vary  between  100  and  150 
feet  apart,  averaging  probably  125.  All  locations  to  be 
approved  by  city.  Furnish  12  extra  poles  for  future  use.  Fur- 
nish all  material  and  do  all  work,  connected  with  the  primary 
system,  starting  from  station  outlet,  and  including  secondaries 
to  house  inlets.  Corner  pins  to  be  1^/2,  inch  extra  quality 
locust,  except  in  cases  of  unusually  severe  strain,  where  they 
must  be  of  iron;  all  others  i^  inch  painted  oak;  all  whites  to 
be  carried  on  insulators  of  the  deep  groove  double  petticoat 
pattern. 

Wire. — To  have  triple  braided  weather-proof  insulation  of 
superior  finish  and -smoothness,  tough  and  not  easily  abraded, 
and  which  will  not  disintegrate  or  deteriorate  by  exposure  to 
the  elements,  and  equal  in  all  respects  to  "K  K."  The  wires 
will  be  of  sizes  as  shown  on  blue  print.  The  drop  from  con- 
verter to  house  inlet  when  all  lamps  shown  on  map  are  burning 
at  once  must  not  exceed  one  per  cent. 

Street  Lights. — Will  be  47  of  32  candle  power  each,  run 
in  groups  of  10-100  volt  lamps,  with  shunt  coils,  each  group  in 
series.  Location  of  street  lamps  and  wires  as  per  accompanying 
blue  print.  All  wire  No.  10  B.  &  S.  Furnish  and  erect  on 
switchboard  at  station,  switches  controlling  all  street  lights. 
There  will  be  two  groups  of  10  street  lights  each.  The  other 
three  groups  will  each  have  9  lights  on  street,  and  one  in 
station. 

•  Hanging  Lamps. — Contractor  is  to  furnish  all  fixtures, 
material  and  labor;  to  hang  in  position  the  47  incandescent 
street  lamps  shown  on  map,  as  high  above  grade  line  as  possi- 
ble ;  with  cutters  suspension  street  hoods,  with  cross-arms, 
insulators,  nozzles,  and  petite  pulleys  and  ^  inch  galvanized 
iron  flexible  lamp  cord,  with  hemp  core;  also  galvanized  steel 
wire  strand  ^  inch  diameter,  for  suspending  lamps  in  the  cen- 
tre of  streets,  by  the  cross  suspension  method.  Use  eye  bolts 
with  washers  for  suspension  wires,  projecting  sufficiently  to 
permit  slack  being  taken  up  by  tightening  nut.  Iron  break 
arms  are  to  be  used  v\  here  lines  leave  poles,  or  wherever  a  loop 
is  made. 

Returns  from  Street  Circuits. — Shown  in  broken  lines 
on  blue  print  may  be  cut  into  commercial  circuits,  instead  of 
returning  to  station  independently. 

Incandescent  Distribution. — Will  be  shown  on  accompa- 
nying blue  print. 

In  General. — All  joints  are  to  be  well  soldered  and 
taped.  No  wire  must  be  lower  than  20  feet  above  grade  line. 
All  streets,  alleys,  and  other  public  places  where  work  is  done, 
must  be  left  in  as  good  condition  as  before  starting.  Use 
special  iron  brackets  wherever  necessary,  always  placing  some 


264  ENGINEERING    SPECIFICATIONS, 

soft  moisture  proof  material  between  the  iron  screw  and  the 
insulator.  Erect  on  incandescent  mains  where  directed,  the 
six  lightning  arresters. 

SECONDARY    INDOOR    WIRING. 

Capacity. — All  secondary  wiring  must  be  sufficiently  large 
to  carry  at  one  time  25  per  cent,  more  lamps  than  the  number 
shown  on  the  accompanying  map,  without  undue  heating,  and 
at  100  volts.  The  drop  from  house  inlet  to  the  most  distant 
lamp  with  the  above  maximum  load  must  not  exceed  2*/£  per 
cent. 

Erection. — All  inlets  to  be  in  front  of  houses,  except 
where  some  other  place  may  be  designated,  as  more  conven- 
ient. Converters,  meters,  sockets,  and  lamps  are  to  be  furnished 
by  this  contractor,  placed  by  him  and  connected  permanently 
in  position,  complete.  All  other  necessary  material,  such  as 
fuse  boxes,  switches,  cut-outs,  etc.,  to  be  furnished  and  erected 
by  this  contracior. 

Plans. — Name  a  lump  sum  for  the  complete  installation  of 
the  lamps  located  on  the  blue  print  in  accordance  with  these 
specifications.  State  also: 

i st.  Price  per  lamp  at  which  this  schedule  may  be  added 
to  or  deducted  from. 

2d.  Price  per  lamp  which  will  be  charged  additional  for 
concealed  work. 

Character  of  Work. — Except  where  otherwise  arranged, 
all  interior  wiring  will  be  open  cleat  work,  using  wThite  double 
braided  painted  fire-proof  wire.  The  details  of  all  indoor  wir- 
ing will  be  in  accordance  with  the  rules  of  the  St.  Louis  Board  of 
Fire  Underwriters.  The  city  will  have  the  work  inspected  from 
time  to  time  at  its  own  expense,  and  any  work  which  may  be 
found,  at  any  time  previous  to  the  acceptance  of  the  plants  not 
in  accordance  with  those  rules,  must  be  put  into  satisfactory 
shape  by  this  contractor  at  once.  Drops  to  be  No.  16  cotton 
flexible  cable,  with  adjusting  ball  and  fibre  socket  bushing. 

Special  Work. — The  city  grants  the  contractor  the  right 
to  sell  shades,  fixtures,  etc.,  and  to  do  concealed  and  fixture 
wiring,  for  which  extra  work  the  customers  will  pay  him 
direct,  such  work  to  be  done  under  the  supervision  of  the  engi- 
neer, and  to  his  satisfaction.  W.  H.  B. 

165.  Specifications  for  Electrical  Distribution 
Circuits  for  Light  and  Power.  The  following  is  the 
descriptive  portion  of  a  set  of  specifications  for  electrical  dis- 
tribution for  light  and  power  prepared  for  the  city  of  Austin, 
Texas,  in  1894.  They  are  thought  to  be  a  good  example  of 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOB  ,ELECTKICAL  DISTRIBUTION.    265 

such  specifications  and  are  here  inserted  exactly  as  used  in  the 
letting  of  the  contract. 

Power  Station:  The  power  station  is  located  at  the  new 
dam  in  the  Colorado  river  and  is  about  three  miles  northerly  of 
the  corner  of  Congress  avenue  and  Pecan  streets  in  said  city  of 
Austin.  There  will  be  in  the  power  station  one  180  kilo-watt 
tri-phase  generator  adapted  to  generate  alternating  currents  of 
2,700  volts  potential,  two  100  kilo-watt  generators  adapted  to 
generate  direct  currents  of  550  volts  potential,  four  alter- 
nators of  3,000  light  capacity,  and  two  alternators  of  1,500  light 
capacity  adapted  to  generate  alternating  currents  of  2,200  volts 
potential  and  two  arc  machines  each  of  capacity  to  supply  cur- 
rents for  loo  arc  lamps  of  450  watts  each. 

The  wires  for  power  currents  will  be  led  out  of  the  station 
for  grouping  on  one  set  of  poles  and  the  wires  for  lighting  cur- 
rents for  grouping  on  another  set  of  poles.  The  currents  of  the 
three  power  generators  will  be  transmitted  by  three-wire  com- 
plete circuits. 

All  the  wire  circuits  are  to  be  connected  with  the  switch- 
board and  station  apparatus  so  as  to  give  the  most  complete 
switching,  testing  and  regulating  facilities  with  the  least  drop  of 
potential  consistent  therewith.  The  leading  wires  are  to  be 
strung  from  the  switch-board  to  the  cupola  of  the  power  house 
and  out  through  the  panels  of  the  cupola  and  are  to  be  insu- 
lated from  the  building  and  panels  in  the  best  manner. 

All  the  wires  within  the  buildings  will  be  covered  with  a 
firm  wrater  proof  insulating  material,  such  as  shall  be  approved 
by  the  engineer,  and  to  the  safe  insulation  of  currents  with 
standard  potentials  of  2,500  volts. 

Pole  Lines:  The  line  poles  will  be  of  peeled,  white  northern 
cedar.  The  poles  are  to  be  straight,  sound,  smooth  and  free 
from  large  or  loose  knots  that  might  weaken  them. 

The  dimensions  of  poles  shall  not  be  less  than  those  stated 
in  the  following  schedule  and  poles  of  each  representative  class 
are  to  be  set  at  depths  not  less  than  those  stated  in  the  schedule, 
if  set  in  earth,  and  six  inches  less  if  set  in  solid  rock. 

Poles  will  not  be  less  than  the  schedule  thickness  at  one 
half  foot  below  their  tops,  and  will  be  made  roofed  at  their  tops 
and  their  roofs  wTill  be  painted  with  the  best  quality  of  mineral 
paint.  Their  lowest  cross  arms  shall  be  at  least  18  feet  and  3 
inches  at  center  above  the  center  of  the  street  opposite  the  pole. 

On  the  main  two-feeder  lines,  between  the  power  house 
and  Congress  avenue,  the  poles  are  to  be  spaced  not  exceeding 
loo  feet  between  centers,  and  on  the  sub-feeder  and  distribution 
lines  poles  are  to  be  spaced  not  exceeding  132  feet  between  cen- 
ters, and  if  lengths  of  blocks  are  such  that  three  poles  per  block 


266 


ENGINEEKING    SPECIFICATIONS. 


exceed  this  limit,  four  poles  per  block  are  to  be  used.  Poles 
will  be  placed  in  the  curb  line  or  in  a  line  parallel  with  the  curb 
line  if  on  streets  and,  if  in  the  alleys,  as  directed  by  the  engi- 
neer. 

Corner  and  terminal  poles  and  all  other  poles  subject  to 
extra  unbalanced  strains  shall  be  securely  guyed  with  No.  6  gal- 
vanized steel  wire.  Guys  shall  be  so  placed  and  secured  as  not 

to  be  obstructions  or  nuisances. 

i 

'    SCHEDULE  OF  MINIMUM  DIMENSIONS  OF  POLES. 


CLASS. 

Number 
of  cross 
arms. 

Minimum 
length  of 
poles. 

Depth 
set  in 
earth. 

Height  of 
lowest 
arms. 

Dia.  at 

top  of 
poles. 

A 

One. 

25  ft.  0  in. 

4  ft   0  in. 

18  ft   3  in. 

4^i 

B 

Two. 

25  ft.  0  in. 

4  ft.  8  in. 

18  ft.  4  in 

5 

c         ...  

Three. 

27  ft.  0  in. 

4  ft.  6  in. 

18  ft.  5  in. 

5ls6 

D     

Four. 

29  ft.  6  in. 

5  ft.  0  in. 

18  ft.  9  in. 

6 

E  

Five 

31  ft.  6  in. 

5  ft.  6  in. 

18  ft.  7  in. 

64£ 

F 

Six. 

33  ft   6  in 

5  ft   9  in. 

18  ft   8  in 

7 

G                      .   . 

Seven. 

35  ft.  0  in. 

6  ft.  0  in. 

18  ft.  3  in 

1\£ 

Gains  shall  be  cut  in  the  poles  so  that  the  cross  arms  will 
fit  snugly  and  rest  at  right  angles  to  the  axis  of  the  poles. 
Proper  gains  are  to  be  made  to  receive  lightning  arresters,  trans- 
formers and  other  apparatus  to  be  attached  to  the  poles. 

The  contractor  shall  secure  all  necessary  permissions  for 
the  trimming  of  private  trees  and  shall  do  all  trimming,  and  he 
shall  secure  the  necessary  permission  for  attaching  any  guy 
wires  to  private  property. 

Cross  Arms. — The  six-pin  cross  arms  will  be  four  and 
one  quarter  by  five  and  one  fourth  inches  section,  and  other 
cross  arms  of  three  and  one  quarter  by  four  and  one  quarter 
inch  section,  and  all  are  to  be  of  sound,  clear  and  smooth 
seasoned  white  oak.  The  two-pin  cross  arms  will  be  of  clear, 
hard  Michigan  white  pine. 

Each  will  be  rounded  on  its  top  and  each  will  be  fastened 
with  three  and  one  half  by  seven  inch  lag  screws  with  washers. 
The  six-pin  arms  will  be  not  less  than  five  feet  and  ten  inches 
long  and  four-pin  cross  arms  not  less  than  four  feet  ten  inches 
long.  All  cross  arms  will  have  one  good  coat  of  the  best  "P. 
and  B."  paint  compound  for  the  purpose  before  being  fastened 
to  the  poles. 

The  vertical  distances  between  centers  of  cross  arms  shall 
not  be  less  than  twenty  inches. 

All  four  and  six-pin  cross  arms  will  be  stayed  with  one 
quarter  by  one  and  one  half  inch  rolled  iron  japanned  braces, 
not  less  than  twenty-six  inches  long  on  the  six-pin  arms  and 
twenty  inches  long  on  the  shorter  arms. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOB  ELECTRICAL   DISTRIBUTION.    267 

Each  pair  of  braces  will  be  secured  with  two  lag  screws, 
two  by  five-sixteenth  inches,  and  one  lag  screw  three  by  five- 
sixteenth  inches  dimensions  each,  with  washers  complete. 

Pins. — All  cross  arms  carrying  No.  i  or  larger  wire  will 
be  furnished  with  the  best  quality  of  locust  pins  and  for  smaller 
wires  with  the  best  quality  of  white  oak  pins  all  with  one  and 
and  one  half  inch  diameter  tenons.  The  interior  pins  shall  be 
eight  inches  from  centers  of  cross  arms  and  other  spacings  of 
pins  12  inches  between  centers. 

The  pins  shall  be  covered  with  "P.  &  B."  paint  com- 
pound, shall  fit  closely  in  the  cross  arm  mortises,  and  shall  be 
secured  with  steel  nails. 

Insulators. — Each  pin  shall  have  one  of  the  best  deep 
groove  glass  insulators  of  double  petticoat  pattern. 

Pole  Steps. — Screw  pole  steps  of  five  eighths  by  eight  inch 
wrought  iron,  galvanized,  shall  be  placed  on  each  pole  on 
which  there  is  a  lightning  arrester,  transformer  or  cut-out. 
The  lowest  step  shall  be  at  eight  feet  from  the  ground  and 
other  steps  at  eighteen  inches  between  centers  vertically,  but 
alternately  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  poles. 

Wire  Circuits. — All  of  the  circuits  are  to  be  of  pure 
copper,  of  at  least  95  per  cent,  conductivity,  drawn  true  to 
gauge  and  of  the  best  quality  in  every  respect  as  electrical  con- 
ductor wires. 

The  diameters  of  the  circuit  wires  as  herein  described  are 
stated  in  the  dimensions  of  the  Brown  &  Sharp  gauge.  The 
wires  in  the  power  house  will  have  the  best  water  proof  insula- 
tion. The  wires  in  all  alternating  current  feeders  and  circuits 
are  to  have  the  best  weather  proof  insulation  of  standard 
double  braided  and  compounded  coverings. 

The  arrangements  of  the  power  circuits  on  the  poles  from 
the  power  station  to  West  Avenue  are  shown  on  an  accompany- 
ing plan  and  the  arrangements  of  the  main  alternating  circuits 
and  arc  circuits  are  similarly  shown  on  another  plan. 

On  the  top  of  the   two  main   pole   lines  above  described 
there  will  be  one  guard  or  protection  galvanized  iron  standard-, 
barbed  double  fence  wire  to  be  strung  on  pony  insulators,  and 
effectively  grounded  at  distances  not  exceeding  500  feet. 

All  joints  in  wires  must  have  full  and  durable  contact  and 
be  soldered  in  the  best  manner  so  that  the  joints  shnll  hold  and 
maintain  a  degree  of  conductivity  at  least  equal  to  that  of  the 
wires  connected.  All  joints  so  made  shall  be  thoroughly 
washed  in  an  acid  neutralizing  solution  and  well  wrapped  with 
insulating  tape,  and  the  finishing  end  of  the  tape  shall  be 
wrapped  with  copper  wire.  The  insulation  resistance  of  the 
joint  is  to  be  equal  to  the  insulation  resistance  on  other  parts 
of  the  line. 


268 


ENGINEERING   SPECIFICATIONS. 


The  power,  arc  and  alternating  circuits  within  the  city  will 
be  arranged,  as  nearly  as  possible,  as  shown  on  the  accom- 
panying mops  of  the  distribution  system. 

The  commercial  and  domestic  lighting  by  alternating  cur- 
rents will  be  divided  into  eight  districts,  as  shown  on  the  wiring 
map,  and  the  wires  will  be  proportioned  for  16  candle  power, 
alternating  lamp  transformers  in  each  district  as  follows: 


District  No.  1, 

2, 
3, 
4, 
5, 
6. 
' 


1500 
3000 
3000 
1500 
1500 
1500 
1500 
1500 


Lamps  and   1200  Lamp  capacity  of  transformers. 
2400 


2400 
1200 
1200 
1200 
1200 
1200 


The  power  generators  will  have  their  currents  wired  from 
the  power  house  into  the  city  by  the  Boulevard  and  Pecan 
street,  to  Red  River  street,  and  a  branch  current  wire  will 
extend  along  the  alley  between  Congress  avenue  and  Colorado 
street  from  3rd  to  loth  streets.  The  transmission  will  be  by 
three-wire  circuits  with  complete  returns,  and  the  drop  in 
potential  in  full  power  of  the  generators  shall  not  exceed  ten 
per  cent. 

Towers. — Thirty  iron  "Star"  lighting  towers  of  the 
Detroit  pattern,  i^o  feet  each  in  height  to  top  of  mast,  are  to  be 
located  in  various  parts  of  the  city  as  shown  in  the  accompany- 
ing maps  of  lighting  towers.  These  towers  are  to  be  of  the 
most  substantial  construction,  substantially  guyed,  and  equip- 
ped with  six  450  watt  arc  lamps  each. 

Each  of  the  two  circuit  systems  of  wires  for  lighting  these 
tower  arc  lamps  is  to  be  of  No.  6,  weather  proof,  insulated 
copper  wire,  connected  with  the  switch  board  in  the  power 
house. 

Potentials. — In  the  wires  for  commercial  and  domestic 
lighting  by  alternating  currents,  the  loss  by  drop  in  potential 
in  the  mains  between  the  power  house  and  West  avenue  shall 
not  exceed  twelve  and  one  half  per  cent.,  and  in  the  sub-feeders 
and  branches  shall  not  exceed  an  additional  five  per  cent. 

Transformers. — The  schedule  of  transformers  or  convert- 
ers as  herein  contemplated  is  as  follows: 

Twenty-one  of  12  Lamp  Capacity,  50  watts  per  lamp. 

Ninety -nine  of 25vLamp  Capacity,  50  watts  per  lamp. 

Forty  of  50  Lamp  Capacity,  50  watts  per  lamp. 

Fifteen  of 70  Lamp  Capacity,  50  watts  per  lamp. 

Fifteen  of 90  Lamp  Capacity,  50  watts  per  lamp. 

Eleven  of 125  Lamp  Capacity,  50  watts  per  lamp. 

Twelve  of 250  Lamp  Capacity,  50  watts  per  lamp. 

One  of 500  Lamp  Capacity,  50  watts  per  lamp. 

The  said  party  of  the  first  part  hereby  reserves  the  right  to 
exchange  converters  by  sizes,  taking  an  equal  capacity  in  smaller 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOE   ELECTRICAL  DISTRIBUTION.    269 

converters  as  the  interest  of  its  patrons  shall  require.  The  con- 
verters, as  located  by  the  engineer,  are  to  be  fully  connected  in 
the  wiring  circuits  ready  for  attaching  the  domestic  and  com- 
mercial wires. 

Grounds. — Effective  grounds  are  to  be  prepared  for  each 
of  the  lightning  arresters  and  for  the  ground  connections  of  the 
guard  wires.  When  no  good  ground  connection  is  available 
one  is  to  be  prepared  by  placing  two  bushels  of  good  coke  or 
charcoal  near  the  base  of  a  pole  and  placing  therein  a  copper 
plate,  one  eighth  by  four  inches  in  section  and  three  feet  in 
length,  and  the  ground  wires  are  to  be  soldered  thereto. 

Apparatus. — All  the  circuits  will  be  fully  equipped  with 
the  requisite  installation  apparatus  required  for  the  safe  and 
easy  operation  of  the  lines  and  for  their  testing,  inspection  and 
maintenance,  such  as  feeder  boxes,  primary  switch  and  fuse 
boxes,  cut-outs,  transformers,  etc.,  each  marked  with  their  safe 
ampere  carrying  capacity,  and  all  lines  will  be  fully  equipped 
with  lightning  arresters. 

Each  piece  of  this  apparatus  is  to  be  located  as  directed,  is 
to  be  of  the  best  material  and  workmanship  for  the  purpose  and 
is  to  be  set  and  secured  in  the  best  manner,  and  each  is  to  be 
subject  to  the  rgid  inspection  and  test,  and  to  the  approval  and 
rejection,  of  the  engineer. 

Guarantees. — All  apparatus,  materials,  and  workmanship 
herein  specified  and  contracted  for  are,  by  the  said  party  of  the 
second  part,  hereby  guaranteed  against  all  electrical  and 
mechanical  defects,  and  defective  workmanship  for  the  space  of 
one  year  from  and  after  their  completion  and  acceptance.  The 
party  of  the  second  part  also  hereby  guarantees  that  any  of  the 
lighting  towers  herein  contracted  for,  when  provided  with  six 
direct  current  arc  lamps  of  450  watts  capacity  each  (2,000  nom- 
inal candle  power)  will  illuminate  any  portion  of  a  circle  3,000 
feet  in  diameter,  of  which  the  tower  is  the  center,  sufficiently 
so  that  any  ordinary  watch  may  be  read  on  the  darkest  night 
when  the  said  towers  are  illuminated.  J.  T.  F. 


PART  IV. 

Illustrative  Examples  of  Complete  Con- 
tracts and  Specifications. 

EXAMPLES     OF     COMPLETE      ENGINEERING      SPECIFICATIONS,     SO 

FRAMED  AS  TO    INCLUDE    THE    CONTRACT     AND     BOND, 

TOGETHER  WITH  ALL  THE  GENERAL  CLAUSES, 

SO  DRAWN  AS    TO    BE    DISTINCT  AND 

SEPARATE      FROM      THE 

SPECIFICATIONS. 

166.  Contract  and  Bond  Combined  in  One  Doc- 
ument with  the  Specifications.  It  is  often  customary 
for  corporations  doing  a  great  deal  of  work  by  contract  to  have 
a  standard  form  of  combined  contract,  specification,  and  bond, 
in  which  the  contracting  and  surety  clauses  remain  the  same, 
and  in  which  a  large  proportion  of  the  general  clauses  remain 
unchanged,  while  the  specifications  proper  vary  in  accordance 
with  the  different  classes  of  work  to  be  done.  Of  such  an  ex- 
ample is  that  given  in  the  following  article,  this  being  the 
standard  form  used  by  the  city  of  St.  Louis.  It  will  be  noted 
that  in  this  contract,  the  contractor  is  represented  as  the  party 
of  the  first  part,  and  the  city  of  St.  Louis  as  the  party  of  the 
second  part.  In  Part  II  of  this  work,  wherein  the  general 
clauses  of  specifications  were  discussed,  the  party  of  the  first 
part  was  supposed  to  indicate  the  employer,  and  the  party  of 
the  second  part,  the  contractor.  It  is,  of  course,  a  matter  of 
indifference  as  to  which  custom  is  followed,  so  long  as  the  doc- 
ument clearly  defines  the  meaning  of  these  terms. 

270 


SPECIFICATIONS  FOK   PUMPING   ENGINES.  271 

In  all  the  examples  given  in  this  portion  of  the  work,  the 
subjects  of  the  clauses  will  be  indicated  by  marginal  titles. 
This  is  the  common  practice  in  all  specifications,  but  it  has  not 
been  followed  in  the  previous  portions  of  the  work,  since  the 
examples  chosen  were  fragmentary  in  their  character,  and  did 
not  seem  to  require  this  kind  of  indexing.  In  actual  practice, 
however,  it  is  advisable  to  use  these  marginal  titles  for  conven- 
ience of  reference.  So  also  should  the  clauses  be  all  numbered, 
as  is  done  in  the  examples  which  follow,  these  numbers  also 
having  been  omitted  in  the  previous  portions  of  this  work, 
because  of  their  fragmentary  character. 

167.  Contract  and  General  Specifications  for 
Large  Pumping  Engines.  The  following  complete  con- 
tract and  specifications  was  used  in  1894  by  the  Water  Com- 
missioner of  the  city  of  St.  Louis,  in  the  letting  of  contracts  for 
two  large  high  service  pumping  engines.  They  are  what  is 
known  as  general  specifications,  since  they  do  not  indicate  any 
particular  style  of  engine,  and  since  no  plans  were  drawn  for 
the  work.  It  should  be  understood  also  that  the  city  of  St. 
Louis  is  obliged  to  let  all  public  work  by  contract  and  always 
to  accept  the  lowest  bid  or  to  reject  all  bids.  It  has  hitherto 
been  customary  for  this  city  to  prepare  detail  plans  for  all  pub- 
lic work  because  of  this  provision  requiring  them  to  accept  the 
lowest  bid.  These  specifications  have  therefore  been  drawn 
with  the  greatest  care,  and  in  such  a  way  that  the  city  may  be 
able  to  accept  the  lowest  bid  without  danger  of  obtaining  an 
inferior  product.  The  gentleman  who  prepared  these  specifi- 
cations is  a  thorough  civil  and  mechanical  engineer  of  about 
twenty  years  experience  in  the  designing  and  operation  of  pump- 
ing engines,  and  therefore  the  requirements  here  embodied  are 
likely  to  represent  the  latest  and  best  practice.  They  are  given 
here,  however,  not  for  the  purpose  of  being  copied,  but  for  the 
purpose  of  illustrating  the  care  and  foresight  required  in  the 
letting  of  contracts  under  general  specifications,  in  order  that 


272  COMPLETE   SPECIFICATIONS. 

all  the  bidders  may  be  placed  on  an  even  footing,  and  that  even 
the  lowest  bid  shall  of  necessity  correspond  to  a  first-class  and 
in  every  way  satisfactory  result.  In  general,  where  it  is  obliga- 
tory to  accept  the  lowest  bid,  it  is  advisable  to  have  detail  plans 
prepared.  The  privilege  had  been  specially  reserved,  however, 
in  the  advertisement  of  this  work,  to  reject  all  the  bids,  if  none 
of  them  proved  satisfactory,  but  the  city  is  not  allowed,  under 
its  charter,  to  reject  a  lower  bid,  and  accept  a  higher. 

Referring  to  clause  D  in  these  specifications  and  to  the  last 
portion  of  that  clause,  the  wording  here  is  evidently  too  inclu- 
sive. That  is  to  say,  the  Water  Commissioner  would  not  be 
allowed  by  law  to  ''decide  all  questions  which  may  arise  rela- 
tive to  the  execution  of  this  contract  on  the  part  of  the  contrac- 
tor," with  the  condition  that  "his  estimates  and  decisions  shall 
be  final  and  conclusive."  See  articles  12  and  13,  parti,  and  article 
109,  part  II,  for  a  discussion  of  this  question. 

168.    Contract  and  Specifications  for 

designing,  furnishing  and  erecting  at  High  Service 
Pumping  Station  A7o.  j,  St.  Lotus,  Mo.,  Pumping 
Engines  Nos.  7  and  8,  with  Fixtures  and  all  Ap- 
purtenances Complete. 

A  AGREEMENT  made  and  entered  into  this 

day  of ,  1 8 — ,  by  and  between 

,  part         of  the  first 

part,  and  the  City  of  St.  Louis,  party  of  the  second 
part,  -witnesscth : 

WHEREAS,  The  Board  of  Public  Improvements 
of  the  said  City  of  St.  Louis,  under  the  provisions  of 
Ordinance  No.  17006,  approved  December  30,  1892, 
and  by  virtue  of  the  authority  vested  in  the  said 
Board  by  the  Charter  and  general  ordinances  of  the 

city,  did  let  out  unto  the  said — 

the  work  of  designing,  furnishing  and  erecting,  at 
High  Service  Pumping  Station  No.  3,  St.  Louis, 
Mo.,  Pumping  Engines  Nos.  7  and  8. 


B  Now,    therefore,    in   consideration   of  the  pay- 

ments and   covenants   hereinafter   mentioned   to  be 
made  and  performed  by  said  second  party,  the  said 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR  PUMPING  ENGINES.  273 


hereby  covenant    and 


agree  to  furnish  and  erect  in  the  pump  pits  at  High 
Service  Pumping  Station  No.  3,  two  pumping 
engines,  each  of  a  capacity  of  ten  million  U.  S. 
gallons  of  water  in  twenty-four  consecutive  hours, 
with  all  fixtures  and  appurtenances  complete,  and  in 
conformity  to  the  requirements  and  conditions  here- 
inafter specified. 

Wherever    the    words  "Water  Commissioner"     0 
are  used  herein,  they  shall  be  understood  to  refer  to 
the  Water  Commissioner  of  the  City  of   St.    Louis, 
and  to  his  properly  authorized  agents,  limited  by  the 
particular  duties  entrusted  to  them. 

Wherever  the  word  "Contractor"  is  used  herein, 
it  shall  be  understood  to  refer  to  the  part  who 
ha  entered  into  the  contract  to  perform  the 
work  to  be  done  under  this  contract  and  these 
specifications,  or  the  legal  representative  of  such 
part 

To  prevent  all  disputes  and  litigation,  it  is  D 
agreed  by  and  between  the  parties  to  this  contract 
that  the  Water  Commissioner  shall,  in  all  cases, 
determine  the  quantity  and  quality  of  the  several 
kinds  of  material  to  be  furnished  and  work  to  be 
done,  the  duty  and  capacity  of  the  engines,  and  the 
amount  to  be  paid  under  this  contract ;  and  he  shall 
decide  all  questions  which  may  arise  relative  to  the 
execution  of  this  contract  on  the  part  of  the  Contrac- 
tor, and  his  estimates  and  decisions  shall  be  final  and 
conclusive. 

The  said  part  of  the  first  part  hereby  agree  E 
that  all  materials  and  workmanship,  of  whatever 
description,  shall  be  subject  to  inspection  and  rejec- 
tion by  the  Water  Commissioner,  and  that  the  entire 
work  shall  be  done  to  his  satisfaction.  The  said 
part  of  the  first  part  further  agree  that  the  Water 
Commissioner  may  appoint  such  assistants  as  he 
may  deem  necessary  to  inspect  the  materials  to  be 
be  furnished  and  the  work  to  be  done  under  this 
agreement,  and  see  that  the  same  strictly  correspond 
with  the  specifications  hereinafter  set  forth;  and 
that  said  Water  Commissioner  shall  at  all  times  have 
the  right  to  enter  the  works,  shops,  etc.,  where  the 
machinery  is  being  constructed,  for  the  purpose  of 
inspection  and  examination  of  the  materials  furnished 
and  work  being  done,  and  shall  be  afforded  such 
assistance  as  may  be  required  to  determine  whether 
the  quality  of  the  materials  and  the  character  of  the 

18 


274 


COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 


Work  to  be 
done. 


Working  de- 
tail plans. 


work   are   in    accordance   with  the  requirements  and 
intentions  of  this  contract. 

The  part  of  the  first  part  further  agree  that 
the  materials  used  throughout  the  engines  and  ap- 
purtenances shall  be  of  the  qualities  specified,  and 
new  and  unused  when  put  into  the  work,  and  that 
the  engines  and  appurtenances  shall  be  constructed 
and  erected  in  the  most  workmanlike  and  substantial 
manner,  and  everything  done  and  furnished  neces- 
sary to  complete  and  perfect  the  engines  and  appur- 
tenances according  to  the  designs  and  intentions  of 
this  contract,  whether  particularly  specified  or  not, 
but  which  may  be  inferred  from  the  drawings  and 
from  this  contract  and  the  following  specifications : 

SPECIFICATIONS. 

1.  The    work  to  be   done   consists  in  making 
the  design,  furnishing  general  and  detail  drawings, 
constructing  and  erecting   complete   in  place  ready 
for  service  at  High  Service  Pumping  Station  No.  3, 
St.    Louis,   Mo.,   two   vertical  triple  expansion  con- 
densing pumping  engines.      Each  engine  shall  pump 
ten  millions  U.  S.  gallons   of  water   in   twenty-four 
hours. 

GENERAL  DATA. 

Water  Pressure 125  pounds. 

Steam  Pressure 125  pounds. 

Elevation  Bottom  Pump  Pit  (City  Datum  100).  90  feet. 

Elevation  Engine  Boom  Floor 118  feet. 

Elevation  Water  in  Wet  Well  (Approximate).  110  feet. 
Dimensions  of  Pump  Pit 56x57  feet. 

PLANS. 

2.  A  complete    set    of    accurate    and    distinct 
detail  working  tracings,    made  in   accordance   with 
the  general  plans  submitted  by  the  Contractor   with 
his  proposal  and  approved  by  the   Board   of  Public 
Improvements,  shall  be  furnished  by  the  Contractor 
and  submitted   to   the   Water   Commissioner  within 
four  months  after  the  award  of  the  contract. 

3.  The  tracings  shall  be  of  uniform  siz 
X39    inches — and    shall    have    a    clear  margn  o 
least  y%  of  an  inch. 

4.  The   kind    of    material  to   be   used  in  each 
and  every  part  of  the  construction   shall   be    clearly 
denoted  in  the  tracings  by  different  section  lining  or 
by  distinct  lettering. 

5.  The  tracings  shall  show  complete  sectional 
outline  and  plan  views,  giving  all  necessary  dimen- 


25^ 
>f  at 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR   PUMPING  ENGINES.  275 

sions  and  thickness  of  metal,  radii  of  fillets  and 
roundings  in  the  various  parts  of  the  construction  in 
plain  and  intelligible  figures,  and  shall  definitely 
state  in  printed  letters,  at  all  surfaces  and  details, 
the  name  of  the  parts  and  the  kind  of  machine  work 
and  finish  to  be  put  upon  them,  thus  enabling  the 
machinery  to  be  built  and  completed  exclusively 
from  blue  prints  taken  from  the  tracings. 

6.  There    shall   be  separate   tracings  showing 
the  valve  motion,  as   put   together  in  working   con- 
dition. 

7.  The  tracings  will  be  examined  by  the  water TobeAppror- 
commissioner,  and  if  found  in  accord  with  this  con- 
tract    and     specifications,    will    be    approved;     any 

change  found  necessary  shall  be  at  once  made  by 
the  contractor  to  the  satisfaction  of  the  Water  Com- 
missioner. 

8.  The  contractor  shall  also,  within  two  months  c 
after  the  award  of  the  contract,  furnish  accurate  and 
workmanlike  general   tracings,  made    in    accordance 
with  the  drawings  submitted  by   the  contractor  with 
his  proposal,  and  filed  in  the  office   of  the   board  of 
public  improvements,  and   with   the  detail  drawings 
approved  by  the  Water  Commissioner. 

9.  These  general  tracings  shall  show  the  posi- 
tion of  the    engines    in    the   pits,   with    all    required 
foundation  piers   and   bolts,    and   all  floors,   girders, 
platforms,  stairs,  galleries,  railing,  pipes,  stop  valves 
and     all     appliances    complete,    giving     all    general 
dimensions  required  in  the  erection  of  the  machinery. 

10.  If,    during  the    construction,    it  be    found  change  of  De- 
expedient    or    necessary    to    change    or    modify    the 

design  of  any  of  the  details  of  the  engines,  working 
drawings  showing  the  proposed  changes  shall  be 
submitted  to  and  approved  by  the  Water  Commis- 
sioner before  any  change  is  made. 

11.  All  drawings  rendered  in   any  way   incor- 
rect through  changes  or  modifications,  must  be  com- 
pletely replaced  by  new  tracings. 

12.  Before  the  final  payment  for  the  engines,  ^g 
the  contractor  must  furnish  and  deliver  to  the  water   ings, 
commissioner  a  book  of  complete  general  and  detail 
drawings  of  all   parts   of   the   engines  jand    appurte- 
nances, as  built  and  erected. 

The  detail  drawings  shall  show  all  details  enter- 
ing into  the  construction  in  sectional,  outline  and 
plan  views,  with  all  dimensions  plainly  written  in 
neat  and  intelligible  figures  and  names  printed  at 


276 


COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 


Pit. 


Suction. 


Steam. 


Plunger. 


every  detail,  the  hind  of  material  used  and  the  finish 
of  the  various  parts  and  surfaces. 

The  general  drawings  shall  show  the  engines  in 
position  in  the  pump  pits  in  at  least  four  different 
views,  viz. :  Sectional  side  elevation,  sectional  end 
elevation,  contour  or  outline  end  elevation  and  plan, 
and  shall  give  necessary  main  dimensions,  thickness 
and  kind  of  metals,  location  of  foundation  bolts,  and 
all  important  sizes  of  the  machinery  as  erected. 

These  general  and  detailed  drawings  shall  be 
made  on  mounted  double  Elephant  paper  of  a  size  of 
25^x39  inches  inside  the  margin  lines,  strongly 
and  substantially  bound  in  book  form,  with  the  name 
and  date  of  the  engines  printed  in  giit  letters  on  the 
covers  of  the  book. 

All  drawings  shall  be  accurately  and  neatly 
executed  in  ink  in  a  workmanlike  manner  and  to  an 
appropriate  scale.  All  sheets  shall  be  uniformly 
lettered  and  consecutively  numbered  and  provided 
with  proper  titles  and  headings. 

DESIGN. 
General  Features. 

13.  The  two  engines  shall  be   designed   to  be 
erected  and  operated  independently  in  the  south  pit 
of  the  engine  house,  which  will  be  built  by  the  city 
of  St.  Louis,  substantially  as  shown  by  the  plans  on 
file  in  the  office  of  the  water  commissioner. 

Especial  attention  must  be  paid  to  the  fact  that 
the  engines  will  be  used  for  direct  pressure  service. 

14.  .    Engines  shall  have  ample  space  around  all 
their  various  parts  for  access  and  maintenance. 

15.  The  height  of   the   water   in  the   wet  well 
will  depend  upon  height  of  water  in  conduit,  which 
will  be  approximately  constant. 

16.  The    engines     shall    be    designed    for    an 
initial  steam  pressure  of  125  pounds  per  square  inch 
and    a    water   pressure   of    125  pounds    per   square 
inch. 

17.  The   pumps    shall    be   designed   and  con- 
structed to  deliver  the   stipulated   quantity  of  water 
at  a  plunger  speed  which  will   insure  a   smooth   and 
effective  action  of  the  pump  valves,  and  all  working 
parts  of  the    machinery,  but    in    no    case    shall    the 
diameter  of  any  pump  plunger  exceed   40   per  cent, 
of  its  stroke,  or  the  plunger   speed  exceed   180  feet 
per  minute. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR   PUMPING   ENGINES. 


277 


18.  The  arrangement  and   construction   of  the   Balanced. 
engines  shall  be  such  that  they  will  give  equal  steam 

cards  on  the  up  and  down  strokes. 

19.  The   engines  shall  be  designed   and  pro-  Reiiabiiit>,ett. 
portioned  to    have  great  working   strength,  stability 

and  stiffness,  and  ample  space  around  all  parts  for 
erection,  repairs,  lubrication,  inspection  and  adjust- 
ment. 

20.  The  steam  cylinders   and   the   plungers  of  Vertical. 
the  engines  shall  be  vertical. 

21.  The    steam    cylinders   and   the   regulating   Hei&ht- 
mechanism  of  the  cut-off  and  valve  motion  shall  be 
placed  entirely  above  an  elevation  of   120  feet  above 
datum. 

22.  The  pump  chambers  and  steam  cylinders   Frame. 
shall   be  rigidly   connected    and    supported  through 

the  intervening  frames  and  columns  to  make  the 
whole  construction  of  ample  stability,  strength  and 
stiffness. 

23.  Each    engine    shall    have    vertical,  single   Piungers. 
acting  outside  packed  plungers,  and  no  construction 

will  be  allowed  requiring  internal  stuffing  boxes, 
glands  or  water  packings  in  the  pumps.  All  stuffing 
boxes  shall  be  readily  accessible  for  inspection  and 
tightening  up,  while  the  engine  is  running. 

24.  The    machinery  shall    be    so    constructed,  ^™t°sval  of 
supported  and  arranged  that  the  pump  chambers  or 

any  important  part  or  piece  of  the  substructure  can 
be  easily  removed  to  such  position  that  it  can  be 
hoisted  out  of  the  pump  pit  without  necessitating  the 
frame  and  fixed  parts  of  the  superstructure  of  the 
machinery  being  taken  apart,  disturbed  or  removed. 

25.  The  two  engines  shall  each    be   provided   Condenser. 
with  a  surface    condenser,   of  appropriate  size  and 
construction     to    maintain     a    steady    vacuum,    and 
designed  to  directly  utilize  the  water  discharged  by 

the  main  pumps  for  condensation  of  the  exhaust 
steam. 


26.  The  contractor  shall    furnish  and   put  up 

all  pipes,  valves,  oil  cups,  drip  pans,  fittings  and  tenances. 
fixtures  required  to  make  the  construction  complete 
inside  the  engine  room  and  pump  pit,  and  shall 
furnish  flanges  drilled  for  connection  on  end  of 
pipes  near  wall. 

27.  The  various  parts  of  the  machinery   shall    Appearance. 
be    of   plain    shapes   and    forms,   adapted    to    their 


278 


COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 


Expansion. 


Frame. 


Anchor  Bolts 


Castings. 


Reheaters. 


Jackets. 


specific  purposes,   insuring  great  strength  and  relia- 
bility with  good  mechanical  effects. 

Frame   and  Fixed  Parts. 

28.  The  frame  and  foundation  of  the  engines 
shall  be  so  designed  that    changes    of    temperature 
can  not  alter  the  distribution  of  the  loads  on,  or  affect 
the  alignment    of    the  members  of,  the  frame,   and, 
where  necessary,  expansion  joints  shall  be  used. 

29.  The  frame  of  the  engine  shall  be  designed 
to  have  great  stiffness   and   weight,  so    that  it  shall 
withstand   all  working  stresses    with   the    minimum 
vibration.     All  bed  plates  or   sole  plates  resting  on 
masonry  shall  have  ample  bearing  surfaces  to  safely 
distribute  the  working  pressures. 

30.  the  machinery  shall   be   substantially  and 
securely  anchored  and  held  in  place  with  a  sufficient 
number  of  foundation  bolts. 

31.  All  castings    shall  be    designed    to    avoid 
sudden  changes  of  section  and  of  such  forms  as  will 
cool  uniformly  without  shrinkage  strains. 

32.  At  all  flanges  of  castings  there  shall  be   a 
reinforcement,  or  addition  of  metal,  of  at  least  30  per 
cent,  of  the  regular  thickness,  wrhich  shall  extend  in 
length  or  height  at  least  twice  the  total  thickness  of 
the  metal  at  the  reinforcement.     All  flanges  to  be  of 
not  less   thickness  than  the  total   metal  at  the  rein- 
forcement. 

33.  All  castings  must  have  good  sized  fillets  at 
all  corner*;   no  small  brackets  will  be  allowed. 

34.  If  reheaters  are  used  they  shall  be  designed 
and   constructed  to  be  absolutely  steam  tight  under 
all  working  conditions   to  which   they  will   be  sub- 
jected, and  must  have  proper  heating  area  and  space 
and  facilites  for  examination,  repairs  and  renewals. 

35.  If  steam  jackets  are    used    they   must   be 
secured  to  the  steam  cylinder  in  such  a  manner  as  to 
allow  free  and  easy  expansion  and  contraction,  with- 
out causing  internal  leakage  of  joints  or  derangement 
of  any  description  to  jackets  or  cylinders,  or  undue 
strains  in  any  part ;  and  must  be  arranged  to  insure 
proper  circulation  of  steam  and  ready  removal  of  the 
jacket  water. 

36.  All  flat  plates  and  surfaces  acted  upon  by 
water   pressure    must  be  substantially  proportioned 
and  strengthened  with  a  sufficient  number  of  heavy 
ribs,  to  make  them  of  ample  stiffness  and  strength  to 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR   PUMPING   ENGINES. 


279 


safely  carry  the  loads  to  which  they  will  be  subjected. 

37.  All  handholes  and   manholes   shall  be  of 
ample  size,  well  fitted,   and  so  constructed  as  to  be 
readily  opened  and  closed. 

38.  Priming    and    draining  pipes    and    valves 
shall  be  provided  for  filling  and  emptying  the  pump 
chambers. 

39.  The  condensers  must  safely  stand  all  work-   Condenser. 
ing  stresses  to  which  they  may  be  subjected,  without 
leakage  or  weakness  of  any  description. 

40.  The    condensers    shall    be    constructed  to  EaxnadmRn/a°r" 
give  ample  facilities  and  space  for  the  examination, 
insertion  and   withdrawal   of   tubes   and  packing  of 

joints.  The  tubes  must  be  provided  with  perfectly 
tight  and  easily  removable  packings,  allowing  for 
expansion  and  contraction,  without  injury  or  leakage. 

41.  The  condensers  shall  be  so  arranged  that 
the  amount  of  water  passing  through,  or  condensing 
surface,  can  be  adjusted  to  suit  varying  temperatures. 

42.  Arrangement    must   be    made  for   proper 
distribution  and  circulation  of  the  exhaust  steam  and 
condensing  water  on  the  cooling  surfaces  of  the  con- 
denser, without  injurious  impingement  of  the  steam 
or  condensing  water. 

43.  All  glands   and  washers  used  in  the  con- 
densers shall  be  made  of  composition  ;  all  bolts  and 
nuts  (except  stay  bolts)  used  inside  the  condensers 
shall  be  made  of  Tobin  bronze. 

44.  The  condensers  must  be  provided  with  all 
necessary  auxiliary  pipes,  valves  and  tanks. 

45.  The   hot   well  shall  be  set  at  the  highest   HotWeii. 
elevation  in  the  pit  which  the  design  of  the  engines 

will  permit. 

46.  There  shall  be  effectual  means  and  appa- 
tus  provided  for  the  separation  of  grease  and  oil  from 
the  condensed  water  before  it  is  fed  to  the  boilers. 

47.  The  suction  and  discharge  pipes  shall  be 
thirty  inches  in  diameter. 

48.  For   each   engine    there  shall  be  a  single 
suction  or  inlet  pipe,   which   shall  be  attached  to  the 
gate    valve,    furnished    by    the    City    of    St.   Louis, 
shown  in  the  plans  of  the  pump  pits. 

49.  The  discharge  pipe   for   each  engine  shall 
be  carried  up  to  an  elevation  of  113.6,  and  then  hor- 
izontally through  and  to  a  distance  of  two  feet  from 
the  outside  of  the  pump  pit  wall,    and  shall  be  pro- 
vided with  a  drilled  flange  for  connection  to  pump 
main. 


Pipes. 


280  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

Air  chambers.  ^o>  Each  engine  shall  be  provided  with  air 
vessels  of  sufficient  capacity  to  insure  smooth,  easy 
and  equal  action  of  the  pumps. 

By-pass.  ^r>     Each  engine  shall  be  provided  with  a  by- 

pass pipe,  arranged  to  facilitate  draining  the  pump 
mains  and  starting  the  engines. 

Relief  Valves.  ^2.     Each    engine    shall    be    provided    with   a 

pressure  relief  valve  designed  and  arranged  to  by- 
pass the  discharge  of  its  pumps  when  the  pressure 
on  the  pump  mains  exceeds  125  pounds  per  square 
inch. 

53.  The    pressure    relief    to    be    of    sufficient 
capacity  to  by-pass  total  discharge  of  the  engine. 

54.  There   shall  be    platforms   or  galleries  of 
cast  iron  plates  or  wrought   iron   open  work  at  con- 
venient locations   upon   the  pump  and  steam  ends, 
which  will  allow   all  of   the  operations  necessary  in 
running    and    maintaining   the    engines    to    be   per- 
formed with  the  greatest  safety  and  ease. 

55.  The  Contractor  shall  design,  furnish  and 
erect  iron  stairways,    landings   and  galleries  leading 
from  the  top  gallery  down  to  the  bottom  of  the  pump 
pit,   with  all  intermediate   galleries   and  supporting 
girders,  beams,  and  composition  railings  required  to 
make  them  complete  and  satisfactory  in  all  respects. 
All  of  the  above  to  be  made  of  neat  and  harmonious 
proportions,  and   arranged  to  leave   sufficient  space 
for  hoisting  and  removing  the  pump  chambers  and 
other  parts  of  the  machinery  without  disturbing  any 
beams,  bed-plates  or  other  stationary  parts,  or  neces- 
sitating the  removal  of  stairways,  landings  or  galleries 
to  any  great  extent. 

L1£htt  56.  The  galleries,  stairs  and  platforms  shall  be 

arranged  to  secure  as  good  diffusion  of  light  down 
the  pump  pit  as  possible. 

57.  The  stairs  to  be  made  without  risers. 
Tread  plates  and  all  gallery  plates  to  be  made  of  a 
suitable  open-work  pattern. 

All  parts  of  stairs,  galleries  and  platforms  shall 
be  accessible  for  inspection  and  painting. 

Mechanism  and   Wearing  Parts. 

StstrineSSa.nd  58.  All  moving  parts  shall  be  of  ample  strength 
and  of  sufficient  stiffness  to  prevent  undue  vibrations 
in  operation. 

WfaceT.g  S  59-     All  journals  and  wearing  surfaces  shall  be 

of  sufficient  size  and  of  proper  proportion  to  avoid 
excessive  pressure  and  heating. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOE   PUMPING   ENGINES. 


281 


60.  When  practicable,  provision  shall  be  made   Counter-bor- 
to  prevent  the  wearing  of  shoulders  on  either  station- 
ary or  moving  parts  at  their  extreme  travel. 

61.  All  stationary  journals  shall  have  suitable   J°»««ais. 
boxes,  babbitt  lined  when  necessary,  and  all  journals 
above  four  inches  in  diameter  shall  have  provisions 

for  horizontal  and  vertical   adjustment. 

62.  All    glands    and    guide    rings    of    stuffing  Bushings, 
boxes  shall  be    provided    with    composition    linings 
forced  in  and  securely  held  in  place,  and  the  glands 

shall  be  cupped  out  to  make  proper  receptacles  for 
lubricants,  leakage  water,  etc. 

63.  The  bodies  of  all   valves,   three  inches  in   Valves,  etc. 
diameter  and  smaller,   shall  be  entirely  of  composi- 
tion,   but    the    bodies   of   valves    larger   than    three 
inches,  may  be  of  cast  iron,   with  composition  valve 

and  valve  seats. 

64.  All  valves,  fittings,  fixtures  and  appurte- 
nances used,  shall  be  of  an  approved  design. 

65.  The  valve    motions    and  starting  arrange-   steam  End 
ments  of  the  engines  shall  be  such  that  each  engine 

can  be  promptly  and  safely  started  and  operated  by 
one  engineer. 

66.  The  steam  distribution  valves  shall  be  of   Valves, 
a  known  reliable  type.    They  shall  be  well  balanced 

and  so  designed  as  to  work  with  the  minimum  fric- 
tion, to  wear  even  and  steam-tight,  and  to  have 
proper  facilities  for  refitting  and  adjustment. 

67.  The  steam    valve    mechanism  shall  be  of  Valve  Motion, 
ample  strength  and  durability,   and  must  be  reliable 

in  all  its  motions  and  entirely  free   from  any  danger 
of  failure,  derangement  or  rebounding.     The  engine    Regulation, 
and  valve  mechanism  to  be   provided   with  an  auto- 
matic device  to  prevent  racing   in  case  of  a  broken 
pump  main. 

68.  The  engines  shall  be  fitted  with  a  variable   Cut'off- 
cut-off  mechanism  so   arranged   as  to  be  easily  and 
quickly  adjusted  while  the  engines  are  in  operation. 

69.  The  running  throttle  valves  of  the  engines   Throttle, 
shall  be  of  a  well-balanced  type  and  operate  quickly 

and  easily  tinder  full  steam  pressure. 

70.  The  steam  pistons   of   the   cylinders   shall   Pistons, 
be  provided  with  Babbitt  and  Harris  piston  packing, 
packing  which,   in  the  opinion   of   the   Water  Com- 
missioner, is  equally  efficient.  • 

71.  Steam  valves  above  six  inches  in  diameter 
shall  have  steel  stems  provided  with  Phospho  bronze 
nuts. 


282 


COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 


Pump  End. 


Valves. 


Connecting 
Pieces. 


Guides. 


Boxes. 


Locked  Nuts. 


Fly -Wheel. 


Air  Pumps. 


72.  The    area    of    the    suction    and    discharge 
valves  shall  be  sufficient  to  insure  proper  filling  and 
discharging  of  the  pumps   under   all    conditions,  but 
in  no  case  shall  the  total  suction   valve  area,  or  the 
total  discharge  valve  area  of  each  engine  be  less  than 
6  square  feet. 

73.  The    valves   shall    be    designed    and    con- 
structed  to   open   and    close   promptly   and   quietly, 
shall  be   tight  and   of  ample   strength,  and   shaH  be 
especially  designed  for    facility  of  repairs   and    re- 
newals. 

74.  All   valve   stems   of  stop   and   gate  water 
valves  shall  be  made  of  Tobin  bronze. 

75.  All   connecting,    piston,   plunger   and  dis" 
tance  rods,  and  all  movable  parts  must  be  of  ample 
strength    and    stiffness    to    withstand    all    working 
stresses. 

76.  The    piston    rods,    plunger    and    plunger 
rods,    and    all    reciprocation    parts    have    properly 
designed    guides    and    crossheads.     The    crossheads 
shall  have  shoes  adjustable  for  wear. 

77.  All  journals   and   pins  of   connecting  and 
valve    rods,    and  of    all    reciprocating  and    oscillat- 
ing rods,   shall   have  well  proportioned  strap  or  box 
ends    having    easily    removable    composition   boxes, 
Babbitt    lined   where   required,    and    provided    with 
wedges,  keys  or  bolts  for  adjustment  of  wear.    Each 
link   or   connecting  rod   shall    at  the   different  ends, 
have   provisions  for  compensation   of   wear    in    the 
same  direction 

78.  All  strap  or  box  ends   shall  be  of  a  shape 
having  great  strength  and  stiffness,  holding  the  com- 
position boxes  securely,  and  giving  a  neat  and  work- 
manlike appearance. 

79.  All   nuts  of  pillow   block  caps  bolts   and 
follower  bolts  of  pistons,   all  screw  joints  of  moving 
parts  and   all  keys   shall  be  provided  with  a  secure 
locking  device. 

80.  If  a  fly-wheel  is  used,  the  shafts  shall  rest 
in  pillow  blocks  very  securely  and  rigidly  supported 
at  ample  distances  apart. 

Si.  The  construction  of  the  air  pumps  must  be 
such  that  they  will  at  all  times  perform  their  work 
promptly  without  noise  or  injurious  shocks. 

82.  The  air  pump  and  all  accessory  pumps 
required  to  run  the  engine,  except  the  boiler  feed 
pump,  shall  be  driven  from  the  main  engine. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOB   PUMPING   ENGINES.  283 

MATERIALS. 

83.  All    materials   used    throughout    this  con- 
struction   must   be    of    the    special    class  and    grade 
called    for    in    the  specifications  and    designated    in 
drawings,   and   shall    in    each   case    fully    stand    the 
specified  tests. 

84.  All  castings  shall  be  free  from  blow  holes,    Castings. 
flaws,  scabs  and  defects  of  any  description,  and  shall 

be  smooth,  close  grained,  sound,  tough,  and  of  true 
forms  and  dimensions. 

85.  All   casting   must  be  done   in    accordance 
with   the  best    modern   foundry    practice    to    obtain 
castings  of  the  very  best  quality.      Castings   above 
500  pounds  in  weight  shall  be  moulded  in  dry  sand 
or    loam.     Great    care  must   be  taken  to    make    all 
castings   as  nearly  as  practicable  of  uniform    thick- 
ness throughout. 

86.  No  plugging  or  other  stopping  of  holes  or 
defects  of  castings  will  be  allowed. 

87.  The  cast  iron  used  in  the  steam  cylinders,    Cast  iron, 
the    steam    distribution    valves,    the    barrels    of    air 
pumps   and   the   water  plungers   shall  be  close,   fine 
grained,  hard  and  uniform  in  character  and  of  good 
wearing   qualities.      The   cast   iron  used  in  all  other 

parts  of  this  construction  shall  be  of  superior  quality, 
tough  and  of  even  grain,  and  shall  possess  a  tensile 
strength  of  not  less  than  22,000  pounds  per  square 
inch.  Test  bars  of  the  metal  2  inches  by  i  inch, 
when  broken  transversely,  24  inches  between  sup- 
ports and  loaded  in  the  center,  shall  have  a  breaking 
load  of  not  less  than  2,200  pounds,  and  shall  have  a 
total  deflection  of  not  less  than  0.35  of  an  inch 
before  breaking. 

88.  The  test  bars  shall  be  cast  as  nearly  as  pos-   Test  Bars, 
sible  to  the  above  dimensions  without  finishing,  but 
corrections  will  be  made  by  the  Water  Commissioner 

for  variations  in  thickness  and  width,  and  the  cor- 
rected results  must  conform  to  the  above  require- 
ments. 

89.  If  any  two   test  bars,   cast  the  same  day, 
show  a  tensile  strength  less  than  22,000  pounds  per 
square    inch,    or    do    not   show    the    required    cross 
breaking   load   or   deflection,    all  the   castings  made 
from  the  melting  from  which  the  samples  were  taken 
may  be  rejected. 

90.  All  steel  castings  used  in  the  construction   SteeU 
shall  be  thoroughly  annealed  and  possess  a  tensile 


284 


COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 


Bolts. 


strength  of  65,000  to    75,000  pounds,   and    15    per 
cent,  elongation  in  two  inches. 

91.  All  steel  forgings  used  in  this  construction 
shall  be  equal  to  forgings  manufactured  by  the  Otis 
Steel  Company,  Cleveland,  Ohio,  and  have  a  tensile 
strength  of  not  less  than  75,000  pounds  per  square 
inch  of  section,  and  show  an  elongation  of  20  per 
cent,  in  eight  diameters. 

Wrought  iron.  ^2.  All  of  the  wrought  iron  used  shall  be 
tough,  fibrous  and  uniform  in  character,  and  speci- 
mens broken  in  the  testing  machine  shall  show  a 
tensile  strength  of  not  less  than  50,000  pounds  per 
square  inch,  with  an  elongation  of  18  per  cent,  in 
eight  diameters. 

93.  If  any  specimen  of  steel  or  wrought  iron 
shall    not   conform    to    the   above  requirements,   all 
material    of  the  lot  from   which   the  specimen    was 
taken,  will  be  rejected. 

94.  The  Water  Commissioner  may  take  at  ran- 
dom any  wrought   iron  bolt  and  nut,   and    have    it 
broken  in  a  testing  machine.     If  any  two  bolts  shall 
not  fill  the  above  stipulated  requirements  for  wrought 
iron,  the   whole   lot  of  that  size  and  make  may  be 
rejected ;   the   effective   area  used  in   computing  the 
breaking  strength,  will  be  the  area  corresponding  to 
the  smallest  diameter  at  the  bottom  of  the  threads, 
when  cut  in  accordance  with  the  U.  S.  standard. 

95.  Rivets  shall  be  made  from  the  best  refined 
iron,   and  must  be  capable  of  being  bent  cold  until 
until  the  sides  are  in  close  contact  without  sign  of 
fracture  on  the  convex  side. 

96.  All   rolled  wrought  iron  shapes   shall    be 
free   from   twists,   bends,    seams,    blisters,    buckles, 
cinder  spots  or  imperfect  edges.    All  sheet  and  plate 
iron  must  be  capable  of  being  worked  at  a  proper 
heat  without  injury. 

97.  All  rods  shall  be  formed  in  one  continuous 
rolled  or  forged  piece  without  weld. 

98.  All  the  composition  metal  used  [excepting 
for  Tobin  bronze  and  hand  railing]   shall  consist  of 
the  best  quality,    new    material    only,    of    mixtures 
specially   adapted  for  the   work   in   each   case,   and 
approved  by  the  Water  Commissioner. 

99.  All  Phosphor  bronze  used  must  be  homo- 
geneous and  uniform  in  character,  and  shall  have  a 
tensile  strength  of  not  less  than  30,000  pounds  per 
square  inch,   with   an   elongation  of  15   per   cent,  in 
eight  diameters. 


Rivets. 


Shapes. 


Rods. 


Composition. 


Phosphor 
Bronze. 


SPECIFICATIONS.  FOB  PUMPING   ENGINES.  285 

TOO.  All  Tobin  bronze  used  must  be  homo- Tobin  Bronze- 
geneous  and  uniform  in  character,  and  specimens 
broken  in  a  testing  machine  shall  show  a  tensile 
strength  of  not  less  than  60,000  pounds  per  square 
inch,  and  an  elongation  of  20  per  cent,  in  eight 
diameters. 

10:.  Finished  bolts  and  nuts  of  Tobin  or 
Phosphor  bronze  may  be  tested  in  the  same  manner 
as  specified  for  wrought  iron,  and  if  any  two  bolts 
shall  not  fulfill  the  requirements,  the  whole  lot  of 
that  size  and  make  will  be  rejected. 

102.  Test  specimens  and  samples  of  castings,  Test  Bars, 
forgings,  composition  or  any  other  material  used  in 

this  construction,  shall  be  prepared  ready  for  testing 
and  supplied  in  the  number,  shape,  finish  and  sizes 
required  by  the  water  commissioner,  and  shall  be 
prepared  as  may  be  directed  at  any  time  during  the 
pouring  or  working  of  the  materials. 

For  all  material  taken  by  the  water  commis- 
sioner for  testing,  the  following  prices  will  be  paid, 
which  shall  include  the  cost  of  preparing  and  finish- 
ing the  test  specimens,  viz. : 

For  all  wrought  iron  or  steel,  the  sum  of  ten 
cents  per  pound. 

For  all  composition,  the  sum  of  thirty  cents  per 
pound. 

For  all  cast  iron,  the  sum  of  three  cents  per 
pound. 

All  broken  material  to  belong  to  the  city  of  St. 
Louis. 

103.  The   Babbitt   metal   used  throughout  the  Babbitt  Metal, 
construction  must  be  of  the  following  approximate 
proportions   by    analysis:     88    per    cent,    pure    tin, 

eight  per  cent,  antimony,  and  four  per  cent.  Lake 
Superior  copper. 

104.  All  rubber  for  valves   and   gaskets   must   Rubber. 
be    of    a    suitable    quality,    approved  by  the  Water 
Commissioner  before  it  is  used. 

105.  All  other  material    used    in    the    engines   other  mater- 
and  not   mentioned   in  these    specifications   will    be      ials' 
subject  to  inspection,  test  and  approval  by  the  Water 
Commissioner  before  it  is  used. 

CONSTRUCTION. 

106.  The     workmanship    and    finish    of    the  Workmanship, 
pumping  engines  throughout   shall  be   equal  to  the 

best  American  practice,  and  in  every  respect  satis- 
factory to  the  Water  Commissioner. 


286 


COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 


Machine 
Worked. 


Joints. 


Boring. 


Turning. 


Joints. 


Journals. 


Straps, etc. 


Scraping. 


107.  All    surfaces    worked    in    machine    tools 
must  be  true  and  smooth,  and  accurately  conform  to 
the  drawings  in  shape,  size  and  alignment. 

108.  The  bearing  surfaces  of  all  sole  and  bed 
plates  and  parts  resting  on  masonry  shall  be  planed. 

109.  If  fly-wheels  are  used,   the  parts  shall  be 
fitted  and  fastened  together  in  the  most  careful  and 
workmanlike  manner  and  the   outer  circumferences 
and  the  sides  of  the  rim  shall  be  turned  smooth  and 
true. 

no.  All  joints  of  bed  plate  and  frame  to  be 
planed  or  faced  and  carefully  fitted. 

in.  The  steam  cylinders  shall  be  bored  in  a 
vertical  position,  perfectly  smooth  and  truly  cylin- 
drical, with  a  boring  bar  of  proper  diameter. 

112.  All  circular  flanges  shall  be  faced  on  the 
outer  circumference. 

113.  All  centers  of  lathe  work  must  be  made 
of  ample  size  and  carefully  preserved. 

1 14.  All  corners  in  journals  and  elsewhere  in 
turned  work  shall  be  rounded  to  proper  radii. 

115.  All    steam    joints    shall    be    made  in   an 
approved  manner,  with  a  very  thin  gasket  of  Jenkins' 
Usidurian  packing. 

116.  All  water  joints  to  be  made  with  rubber 
or  paper  gaskets,  arranged  with  special  care  to  pre- 
vent blowing  out. 

117.  All  seats  of  steam  and  water  gates  must 
be  scraped  and  ground  tight. 

118.  All  journals  to  be  turned  straight,  cylin- 
drical  and   smooth.     Particular   attention   and    care 
shall  be  paid  to  the  proper    fitting    and   scraping  of 
all  journal  boxes,  to   make   the   same   of  an  extraor- 
dinarily good   bearing   surface,    and    accurate  fit  to 
their  housings  or  carrying  members. 

119.  Straps,     gibs,    keys,    reamed    bolts    and 
boxes  of  all  connecting  rods  must  be  fitted  with  the 
utmost  care  and  accuracy,  and  finished  in  a  thorough 
and  workmanlike  manner. 

120.  The    final    fitting   marks    shall,     for    all 
parts,  be  preserved  for  examination  and  must  in  all 
cases  be  satisfactory  to  the  Water  Commissioner. 

121.  All  journal  boxes,    pins,    keys   and  other 
details  of  the  machinery  shall  be  taken  apart  at  any 
time  during  the  process  of  fitting  or   erecting,  when 
the  Water  Commissioner  so  directs,  to  allow  a  thor- 
ough examination  of  fit  and  workmanship. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR   PUMPING   ENGINES. 


287 


122.  If    gear    wheels    are    used    in    the    valve 
motion    of    the    engines,   they   shall  be  properly  de- 
signed and  accurately  cut  in  gear  cutting  machines. 

123.  The  treads  of  cams  and  other  parts  of  the 
valve  motion  subject  to  intermittent  or  sudden  motion 
and  heavy  wear  shall   be   of   tempered   steel  or  case 
hardened  iron. 

124.  The    tempering  or    hardening  processes 
must  be  so  conducted    that   parts    will    retain    their 
proper  size  and  shapes  and  have  the  requisite   hard- 
ness. 

125.  All  parts  of  the    engines    must    be   well 
secured  and  correctly  centered  with  accurately  fitted 
dowel  pins,  reamed  bolts  or  male  and  female  joints. 

126.  All  flanges  must  be   cast    solid,    and    all 
bolt  holes  shall   be   drilled  with  perfectly  sharpened 
and    centered    twist-drills    to   insure   accurate  round 
holes. 

127.  All  dowel  pins  must  be  of  proper  taper, 
and   well   fitted ;    and   where   necessary,    shall  have 
proper  facilities  for  removal. 

128.  All    holes    intended    to  receive  tapering 
parts  shall  be  carefully  reamed  and  ground  and  the 
tapering  parts  driven  or  forced  into  place. 

129.  Nuts  and  bolts  and  all  threads  shall  be  of 
the  U.  S.  standard,  except  where  special  threads  are 
necessary. 

130.  The  threads  and  shanks  of  all  bolts  above 
$/<&    inch   in   diameter   shall  be  cut  and  turned  in  the 
lathe,  and  the  ends  of  all  bolts  shall  be  finished  to  a 
neat  conical  or  hemispherical  point. 

131.  The  resting  surface  for  nuts  and  heads  of 
all  bolts  shall  be  faced   to  present   a   smooth,  plane 
surface,  square  to  the  axis  of  the  bolt. 

132.  Case  hardened,  finished  and  polished  nuts 
shall  be  used  in  all  exposed   work  above   the  upper 
floor  level,  and  also  for  all  parts  requiring  frequent 
removal  and  adjusting.     All    other    nuts    and    bolt- 
heads  above  the  upper  floor  level,    and   nuts   for  all 
stuffing  boxes,  and   at   such   other  places  as  may  be 
necessary,  shall  be  finished. 

133.  Finished     Phosphor     bronze     nuts     and 
rolled  Tobin  bronze  studs  and   bolts   to   be  used  for 
all  fastenings  inside  the  pump  chambers,  and  for  all 
glands  of  stuffing  boxes  of  the  pump  end. 

134.  Cold  pressed  nuts  shall   be   used   for    all 
stationary  parts  of    the  pump   chambers,   and  in  all 
cases  where  not  otherwise  specified. 


Gear. 


Cam  Treads, 
etc. 


Tempering  or 
Hardening. 


Centering. 
Bolting. 

Dowel  Pins. 
Taper. 
Threads.    , 


FinishedNuts. 


Cold  Pressed 
Nuts. 


288 


COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 


Hexagonal. 


Keys. 


Calking. 


Finishing. 


Lagging. 


Covering. 


In  Shop. 


13=;.  All  nuts  and  bolt  heads  shall  be  hexagonal 
in  shape  and  must  be  faced  on  top  and  bottom. 
The  sides  shall  fit  their  wrenches  accurately. 

136.  All  key-ways  and  keys  must  be  accurately 
fitted  and  properly  driven  or  forced   into   place,  and 
must  be  of  appropriate  size  and  taper. 

137.  All     riveted     work     shall     be     specially 
designed  for  its    particular   uses,    and   executed  in  a 
thorough  and  workmanlike  manner. 

138.  All  riveted  joints  subject  to  pressure  shall 
be  thoroughly  and  neatly  calked  with  a  round-nosed 
tool. 

139.  All  connecting  rods,  links  and  valve  rods 
shall  be  draw-file  finished. 

140.  All  bright  and    specially    finished    work 
must  be  of  the  highest  grade    and  entirely  free  from 
scratches,  specks  and  flaws. 

141.  All  visible  composition  w^ork  shall  have  a 
bright  finish. 

142.  All  exposed  machine   worked  surfaces  of 
all  parts  above  the  upper  floor  level  and  of  all  mov- 
ing   parts,   except   fly-wheels,    shall    have  a  bright 
finish. 

143.  The     steam      cylinders,      steam     chests, 
reheaters,    steam    and    distribution    pipe    and   other 
heated  surfaces   of  the   machinery,  when  necessary, 
shall  be  protected  by  neat  mahogany  or  walnut  lag- 
ging, securely  fastened    and   held   in   place  by  brass 
bands  and  button-headed  brass  screws,   or  by  bright 
finished  false  covers. 

144.  All  steam  pipes  and  heated  surfaces  shall 
be  protected    with   approved   non-conductors  to  the 
depth  of  flanges. 

145.  The    material    to    be    used  in  covering 
steam  pipes,  cylinders,  reheaters    and   all   protected 
parts,  and  the  method   of   its   application,    shall   be 
subject  to  approval  by  the  Water  Commissioner. 

146.  No     non-conductors,     lagging    or    false 
covers  shall  be   applied   until    the    construction    has 
been    thoroughly  tested  by  working  steam  pressure 
and  all  leakages  and  defects   developed   have  been 
thoroughly  remedied. 

ERECTION. 

147.  The    Contractor    shall    erect   in  the  shop 
such  parts  of  the  steam  and  water  ends  of  the  engines 
as  may  be  necessary,  in  order  that  the  final  erection 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOE   PUMPING   ENGINES. 


289 


Wall  Boxes, 
etc. 


can  be  carried  on  with  despatch  in  a  thorough  and 
workmanlike  manner. 

148.  The  Contractor,  shall,  at  his  own  expense  Transporting 
and  risk,  transport  all  parts  of  the  machinery  to  the 
pumping  station,  but  will  be  allowed  the  use  of  the 

power  traveling  crane  in  the  engine  house  for  erect- 
ing. 

149.  All   foundations    and  piers  required    for   Masonry, 
the  support  and  anchorage  of  the  engines,  in  addi- 
tion to  that   shown   in   the   city's   drawings,   will  be 

built  by  the  city  of  St.  Louis,  to  drawings  furnished 
by  the  contractor.  All  foundation  piers  will  .be 
built  of  first-class  coursed  cut  stone  masonry  and 
provided  with  granite  capstones  of  appropriate  sizes, 
and  charged  to  the  contractor  at  $20  per  cubic  yard. 

150.  The  contractor  shall  deliver  at  the  pump- 
ing station   all   bolts,   washers,    wall  boxes,  girders, 
etc.,  intended  to  be  inserted  in  the  masonry,  in  ample 
time  to  prevent   delay   during    the    building    of    the 
foundation  walls  and  piers. 

151.  The   contractor   shall   be   responsible  for 
the  proper  and  exact    location    of    all    parts,    when 
placed  in  accordance  with  his  drawings  and  templets. 

152.  The  contractor  shall  do  all  work  neces- 
sary to  erect,  fit  and  secure  the  engines  in  the  pump 
pit  upon  the  foundation  piers  as  completed  and  built 
by  the  city  of  St.  Louis. 

153.  Every  sole  plate,    girder,   bed  plate   and 
casting  resting  on  or  secured   to   masonry,    shall    be 
provided  with    a  rust   joint    of   sufficient   thickness, 
carefully  driven  and  packed  and  consisting  of  ingre- 
dients satisfactory  to  the  Water  Commissioner. 

154.  Great  care  shall  be  taken  in  the  erection 
of  the  engines  to  place  and  secure   the   various  sole 
and  bed  plates  upon  solid,   plane    and  smooth  bear- 
ings.     All  joints  between  stationary  details  must  be 
made  with  the  utmost  accuracy  and  precision,  insur- 
ing perfect  and  permanent  alignment.     None  of  the 
parts  shall  be  unduly  strained  in  lining  up. 

155.  The  contractor  shall  so  conduct  his  oper-   other  Work, 
ations  as  not  to   interfere    with   the   work  of   other 
contractors,  and  the  disposal  of  his  tools  and    mate- 
rials during  storage  and  erection   will   be   subject  to 

the  approval  of  the  Water  Commissioner. 

156.  The  party  of  the  second  part  will  furnish 
and  set  the  gate  valves  of  the  suction  pipes,  but  the 
contractor  shall  pump  out  all  accumulated  water  in 

19 


In  Pit. 


Rust  Joint. 


Bearings. 


Water. 


290 


COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 


Protection 
of  Parts. 


Damage. 
Cleaning-  up 


Damage  to 
Masonry, 
etc. 


Storage  of 
Machinery 
Parts. 


Paraffine 
Varnish. 


Oil  paint. 


the  pump  pit  before  commencing   erection,    and   do 
all  necessary  pumping  during  erection  of  engines. 

157.  All  finished  parts  must  be  well  protected 
in  shops  and  during  transportation  to  prevent  injury 
and  abrasion. 

158.  All  injured  parts  must  be  replaced,  when 
in  the  judgment  of  the   Water   Commissioner,  refit- 
ting will  not  suffice. 

159.  The  contractor    shall   remove  all  staging 
used  in  erecting  the   engines,    and   leave    the    pump 
pit,  engine  room  and  premises  neat  and  clean. 

160.  The  contractor  shall,    at    his*  own    cost, 
make  good  all    damages  to   masonry,    buildings,   or 
other  property  of  the  city  of  St.   Louis,   occasioned 
by  the  contractor  or  his  employes  in  the  transporta- 
tion and  erection  of  the  machinery. 

161.  The  city  of  St.    Louis  will  furnish  space 
within  its  premises  for   the  reception  of   the  various 
parts  of  the  machinery  j  but  shall  not  be  responsible 
for  the  safe  keeping  of  these  parts,  nor  .for  damage 
caused  to  them  from  exposure  or  other  cause. 

PAINTING. 

162.  .    All  castings  and  details  must  be  inspected 
and  approved  before  painting,  and  in   no   case  shall 
the  paint  or  pitch   be    applied   until  all  surfaces  are 
trimmed  and  thoroughly  cleaned. 

163.  All  unfinished  iron  work  not  visible  from 
the    engine    room    floor    (except    where    otherwise 
required)  and  that  above   the   floor   intended  to   be 
encased,  shall  be  thoroughly  painted  inside  and  out 
with  three  coats  of  No.    I  paraffine  varnish,  applied 
hot.     The  first  coat  shall  be  put  on  at  the  shop,  and 
the  others  after  erection,  excepting  for  inside  surfaces 
of  pumps,  pipes,  etc.,  which  shall  receive  two  coats 
at  the  shop  and  one  after  erection. 

164.  All  unfinished  iron  work  visible  from  the 
engine    room    floor,    shall    be    thoroughly    cleaned, 
rubbed  down  and  painted  with  four  coats  of  a  good 
quality  of  paint  and  strictly  pure    linssed   oil.      The 
first  coat  shall  be  put  on  at  the  shop  and  the  others 
after  erection. 

165.  The  paint  shall  be  of  a   grade  and  color 
approved  by  the  Water  Commissioner,  and  shall  be 
applied,  striped  and  varnished  to  his  satisfaction. 

166.  All   parts   to   be  covered  by  non-conduc- 
tors must   be    thoroughly    cleaned    and    frerd    from 
rust,  and  painted  with  three  coats  of  paint  of  a  kind, 


SPECIFICATIONS    FOE   PUMPING   ENGINES. 


291 


Iron  Work. 


color  and  quality  to  be  determined  by  the  Water 
Commissioner  before  application  of  the  non-con- 
ductors. 

167.     All  finished    and   polished   surfaces  must   Finished 
be  kept  entirely   free    from    rust   until    erected    and 
finally  accepted. 

TESTIXG. 

i6S.  After  erection  has  been  completed,  and  Pressure, 
before  the  final  painting,  a  blank  flange  shall  be 
bolted  on  the  out-door  end  of  the  discharge  pipe, 
and  the  whole  construction  tested  with  hydraulic 
pressure.  A  force  pump  shall  be  connected  to  the 
discharge  pipe,  and  a  pressure  of  200  pounds  per 
square  inch  applied  in  such  manner  as  to  test  the 
pumps,  pump  valves,  air  vessels,  discharge  pipes, 
pump  rods  and  the  frames  of  the  engines.  After 
this  test  the  engine  is  to  be  run  to  full  capacity,  dis- 
charging through  the  pressure  relief  valves  for  the 
purpose  of  testing  same  ;  a  further  test  to  be  made 
by  suddenly  opening  gate  on  pump  main  to  test 
speed  controlling  device  mentioned  in  section  67. 

These  tests  must  be  conducted  by  the  contrac- 
tor with  great  care  and  in  a  manner  satisfactory  to 
the  Water  Commissioner. 

The  contractor  shall  furnish  all  labor  necessary, 
and  all  piping,  cocks,  valves,  gauges,  force  pumps, 
flanges  and  appliances  required  in  the  tests. 

169.  For  the  purpose  of  determining  the  duty   Duty  Test, 
of  the  engines  furnished  under   this   contract,    there 

shall  be  an  expert  duty  test  of  twenty-four  hours 
continuous  run  for  each  engine.  These  tests  shall 
be  conducted  by  three  experts,  one  to  be  selected  by 
the  Water  Commissioner,  one  by  the  contractor,  and 
the  two  thus  named  to  select  the  third. 

The  duty  tests  shall  be  conducted  for  one  engine 
at  a  time,  unless  otherwise  ordered  by  the  Water 
Commissioner. 

170.  The    water     of    condensation    from     all 
steam  jackets  and   rehcaters   shall    be  gathered   and 
its    weight    carefully   determined,    and    it    shall    be 
charged   against  the   engines  during  all  of  the  duty 
tests. 

171.  The   total  weight    of    water   fed   to    the 
boilers  during    the    tests,    shall    be    considered    the 
amount  of  steam  used   when   corrected  for   entrain- 
ment  exceeding  two  per  cent. 


292 


COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 


Expert  Test 


Speed. 


Head  (h). 


Wrenches. 


172.  Steam  used  for  running  the   boiler  feed 
pumps  during  the  duty  tests  will  not    be    charged 
against  the  engines. 

173.  The  twenty-four  hours  duty  test  shall  be 
made  with  the  water  in  the  wet  well   at  an  approxi- 
mate elevation    of    no,    and   shall  be  conducted  by 
the  experts  selected  in  accordance   with  section    169 
of  this  contract. 

174.  If,  in  the  opinion,  of  the  Water  Commis- 
sioner, the  speed  of  the  engines    at   any  time  during 
the  twenty-four  hours  test  is   such   as   to   jeopardize 
their  safety,  he   shall   have   the  right  to  order  them 
run  at  such  reduced  speed  as  will  give  a  smooth  and 
quiet  action. 

175.  The   head    (h)    to    be    inserted    into   the 
formula  for  computing  the  duty  of  the  engines  dur- 
ing the  running  test,  shall  be   ascertained  by  attach- 
ing a  gauge  to  the  discharge   pipe   close  to  where  it 
turns  into  and  runs  through   the   foundation  walls  of 
the  pit,  and  by  the  elevation  of  the  water  in  the  wet 
well. 

176.  Any  part  or  detail  of  the   engines  show- 
ing undue   strain   or   weakness   of   any   description, 
must  be  replaced,  and  all  defects  developed  in  these 
tests    shall    be    corrected    by    the    contractor  to  the 
entire  satisfaction  of  the  water  commissioner. 

ADDITIONAL    APPLIANCES. 

177.  The  contractor  shall  furnish  for  all  sizes 
of  bolts  a  complete  set  of  wrenches  for  each  engine, 
accurately  fitted  to  the  respective  sizes  of  nuts.      The 
Frenches  for  all  finished  nuts  about  the  engines  shall 
have  a  bright  finish  and  shall  be   marked  with  their 
respective  sizes. 

178.  Each  engine  shall  be  provided  with  one 
steam  gauge,  graduated  from  o  to  250  pounds,   one 
vacuum  gauge,    one   suitable   steam  gauge  on  each 
receiver  (if  such  be  employed  in  the  construction), 
and  one  engine  revolution  counter;   all  of  them  to 
have   brass   cases,    triple  silver  plated,   and    placed 
convenient  for  observation.     The  dials  of  gauges  to 
be  ten  (10)  inches  in  diameter. 

179.  Each  of  the  air  vessels  of  the  pumps  shall 
be  provided  with  one  glass  water  gauge  of  satisfac- 
tory design.     The  hot  well  for  each  engine  shall  be 
provided    with    a    suitable,     permanently    attached 
thermometer  of  appropriate  design. 


SPECIFICATIONS  ^FOR    PUMPING    ENGINES.  293 

180.  The   contractor   shall   furnish   one  steam    indicators, 
indicator  for  each  steam  cylinder  and  three  indicators 

for  the  main  pumps,  and  one  indicator  for  the  ah 
pumps.  The  indicators  shall  he  the  Thompson, 
Crosby  or  Tabor. 

181.  Each  steam  cylinder,  main  and  air  pumps 
of  the  two  engines  shall  be  provided  with  permanent 
piping,  fixtures  and  motion   appliances  for  attaching 
and    working    the     indicators.     All    valves,    cocks, 
pipes  and  appliances  for  the  attachment  of  the  indi- 
cators  to   the   steam   cylinders   and  pumps  shall  be 
made  of  composition,  of  ample  size  and  complete  in 
every  respect. 

182.  All  journals  must  be  provided  with  sight-   on  Cups, 
feed  oil  cups.     There  shall  also  be  brass  drip  pans 

or  pockets  at  all  journals  and  oiling  places  to  catch 
lubricants. 

183.  The  steam  cylinders  shall  be  fitted  with 
sight-feed  lubricators. 

184.  There    shall    be    valves,    pipes  and  drip 
pans  at  all  places  where  necessary,  for  receiving  and 
conveying  water  from  stuffing  boxes,  etc* 

185.  The  contractor  shall  furnish  an  extra  set 
of  suction  valves  and  an  extra  set  of  discharge  valves 
with  all  parts  complete. 

REPAIRS. 

1 86.  Near  the   end  of  the  year  of  probation, 
the  Water  Commissioner  will  make  an  examination  of 
the  engines,  and  any  part  or  detail  found  to  be  de- 
fective or  injured  through  excessive  wear,  overstrain, 
bad  material  or  faulty  design,  shall  be   replaced  by 
the  contractor,  at  his  own  cost  and   expense,  to  the 
satisfaction  of  the  water  commissioner. 

The  said  part  of  the  first  part  further  agree  G1 
that  all  the  work  contemplated  and  described  in  this 
contract  and  the  foregoing  specifications,  shall  be 
done  in  accordance  with  the  general  drawing? 
approved  by,  and  on  file  in  the  office  of,  the  board 
of  public  improvements,  and  with  the  detail  work- 
ing drawings  submitted  to  and  approved  by  the 
Water  Commissioner.  It  is  further  agreed  that  the 
drawings  and  specifications  form  a  part  of  this  con- 
tract, and  that,  if  any  discrepancies  appear  between 
any  of  the  drawings  and  the  specifications,  or  between 
any  of  the  several  drawings  in  themselves,  such  dis- 
crepancies shall  be  adjusted  by  the  contractor  to  the 
satisfaction  of  the  Water  Commissioner.  And  it  is 


294  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

further  expressly  agreed  that  the  approval  of  the 
general  and  working  drawings  shall  not  in  any  case 
relieve  the  contractor  from  any  of  his  responsibilities 
under  this  contract. 

H  The  said  part  of  the  first  part  hereby  expressly 
agree  that  the  inspection  of  materials  and  work- 
manship shall  not  relieve of  any 

of ' obligations    to    perform     sound 

and  reliable  work,  as  herein  described.  And  the 
said  part  of  the  first  part  further  agree  to  repair 
or  replace  any  defective  part  or  piece  of  the  pump- 
ing engines  during  one  year  from  the  end  of  the  24. 
hours  running  test,  at  his  own  cost  and  expense. 

And  it  is  further  agreed  that  during  the  afore- 
said year,  the  Water  Commissioner  may  make  all 
necessary  repairs  requiring  prompt  attention,  and 
that  the  cost  of  such  repairs  shall  be  borne  by  the 
contractor. 

And  it  is  further  agreed  that  any  work  not 
herein  specified  which  may  be  fairly  implied  as 
included  in  this  contract,  of  which  the  Water  Com- 
missioner shall  judge,  shall  be  done  by  the  con- 
tractor without  extra  charge.  The  contractor  shall 
also  do  such  extra  work  in  connection  with  this  con- 
tract as  the  Water  Commissioner  may  in  writing 
specially  direct,  and  the  price  for  such  extra  work 
shall  be  fixed  by  the  water  commissioner,  but  no 
claim  for  extra  work  shall  be  allowed,  unless  the 
same  was  done  in  pursuance  of  a  written  order,  as 
aforesaid. 

J  The     said     part       of     the     first     part    further 

agree  that  the  work  embraced  in  this  contract  shall 
be  begun  within  one  week  after  written  notice  so  to 
do  shall  have  been  given  to  the  contractor  by  the 
Water  Commissioner,  and  continued  (unless  the  said 
commissioner  shall  otherwise  in  writing  specially 
direct),  with  such  force  and  in  such  manner  as  to 
secure  its  completion  within  twenty-six  months 
thereafter,  the  time  of  beginning,  rate  of  progress, 
and  time  of  completion  being  essential  conditions  of 
this  contract.  And  the  part  of  the  first  part  fur- 
ther agree  that  if  the  pumping  engines  to  be 
furnished  under  this  contract  are  not  completed  at 
the  time  above  specified,  then  there  shall  be  retained 
by  said  second  party,  as  ascertained  and  liquidated 
damages,  the  sum  of  fifty  ($50.00)  dollars  per  day 
for  every  day  thereafter  until  said  engines  are  ready 
for  service. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOB   PUMPING   ENGINES.  295 

• 

The  party  of  the  second  part  agrees  to  have  the  K 
pump  pits  ready  for  the  commencement  of  the 
erection  of  the  engines  within  twenty  months,  and 
to  have  the  steam  ready  for  testing  and  running  the 
engines  twenty-three  months  after  the  date  of  the 
above  notice  to  begin  work. 

And  the  part  of  the  first  part  further  agree  L 
that  shall  not  be  entitled  to  any  claim  for  any  hind- 
rance or  delay  from  any  cause  whatever  in  the 
progress  of  the  work,  or  any  portion  thereof ;  but 
any  hindrance  or  delay  occasioned  by  the  party  of 
the  second  part  shall  entitle  said  part  of  the  first 
part  to  an  extension  of  the  time  for  completing  this 
contract,  sufficient  to  compensate  for  the  detention, 
the  same  to  be  determined  by  the  Water  Commis- 
sioner. 

The  said  part  of  the  first  part  further  agree  M 
that  will  not  sublet  the  work  to  be  done  under  this 
contract,  but  will  keep  the  same  under  control,  and 
that  will  not  assign  the  same  by  power  of  attorney 
or  otherwise,  and  that  will  at  all  times  have  a  rep- 
resentative present  where  any  work  is  in  progress 
under  this  contract.  Whenever  it  may  be  desired  to 
give  directions,  orders  will  be  given  by  the  Water 
Commissioner  and  obeyed  by  the  contractor's  repre- 
sentative who  may  have  charge  of  the  particular 
work  in  reference  to  which  orders  are  given.  If  any 
person  employed  by  the  contractor  on  the  work 
should  appear  to  the  Water  Commissioner  to  be 
incompetent  or  disorderly,  he  shall,  upon  the  requisi- 
tion of  the  Water  Commissioner,  be  at  once  dis- 
charged and  not  again  employed. 

It  is  further  agreed  that  if  the  part  of  the  first  N 
part  shall  assign  this  contract,  or  abandon  the  work 
to  be  done  under  this  agreement,  or  shall  neglect  or 
refuse  to  comply  with  the  specifications  or  stipula- 
tions herein  contained,  the  board  of  public  improve- 
ments shall  have  the  right,  with  the  consent  of  the 
mayor,  to  annul  and  cancel  this  contract,  and  to 
relet  the  work  or  any  part  thereof ;  and  such  annul- 
ment shall  not  entitle  the  contractor  to  recover 
damages  on  account  thereof;  nor  shall  it  affect  the 
right  of  the  City  of  St.  Louis  to  recover  damages 
which  may  arise  from  such  failure. 

And  the  said  first  part     hereby  agree     to  pro-     O 
tect  and   defend  and  save  harmless  the  said  city  of 
St.  Louis  against  any  demand  for  patent  fees  on  any 
patented  invention,  article  or  arrangement  that  may 


296  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

i 

be  used  by  said  first  part  in  the  pumping  engines 
furnished  under  this  contract. 

P  The  said  part     of  the  first  part  further  agree 

»  to  idemnify  and  save  harmless  the  City  of  St.  Louis 
from  all  suits  or  actions  brought  against  the  said  city 
on  account  of  injuries  or  damages  received  or  sus- 
tained by  any  party  or  parties  during  the  construc- 
tion of  the  pumping  engines,  or  by  or  in  consequence 
of  any  negligence  in  guarding  the  same,  or  any 
improper  materials  used  in  the  construction,  or  by 
or  on  account  of  any  act  or  omission  of  the  said 
part  of  the  first  part  or  agents. 

Q  The  part     of  the  first  part  further  agree     that 

each  engine  furnished  under  this  contract  shall  have 
a  pumping  capacity  of  ten  million  U.  S.  gallons  in 
twenty-four  hours.  The  capacity  to  be  at  a  speed 
that  will  insure  smooth  and  quiet  action,  and  to  be 
determined  by  the  experts  during  the  duty  test. 

R  The  part     of  the  first  part  hereby  agree     that 

the  pumping  engines  furnished  under  this  contract 
shall  perform,  during  a  running  test  of  twenty-four 
hours,  a  duty  of  one  hundred  and  twenty-five  million 
foot-pounds  per  thousand  pounds  of  commercially 
dry  steam. 

The  part  of  the  first  part  further  agree  that 
in  case  either  engine  fails  to  perforn  a  duty  of  one 
hundred  and  'twenty-five  million  foot-pounds  per 
thousand  pounds  of  steam,  during  the  working  test 

of  twenty-four  hours,  will  pay  to  the  party  of 

the  second  part,  as  an  agreed  measure  of  damages 
for  lack  of  efficiency  of  the  engine,  in  the  ratio  of 
$2,500.00  for  each  one  million  foot-pounds  which 
the  duty  falls  below  one  hundred  and  twenty  five 
million. 

In  case  either  engine  exceeds,  during  the 
twenty-four  hours  working  test,  an  average  duty  of 
one  hundred  and  tw7enty-five  million  foot-pounds  per 
thousand  pounds  of  steam,  the  party  of  the  second 
part  agrees  to  pay  to  the  part  of  the  first  part,  as 
a  reward  for  the  superior  efficiency  of  the  engine, 
an  amount  to  be  in  the  ratio  of  $1,000.00  for  each 
one  million  foot-pounds  which  the  duty  comes  above 
one  hundred  and  twenty-five  million. 

S  On  condition  of  the  true  and  faithful  perform- 
ance of  all  the  conditions  of  this  agreement  and 
specifications,  the  said  party  of  the  second  part 
agrees  to  pay  to  said  part  of  the  first  part  the  sum 
of dollars,  subject  to  such  additions  or 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR   PUMPING   ENGINES.  297 

deductions  as  are  authorized  by  the  provisions  and 
conditions  of  this  contract,  in  full  payment  for  all 
the  work  and  materials,  designs  and  drawings 
required  by  this  contract,  embracing  the  satisfactory 
construction  and  erection  of  such  pumping  engines 
and  appurtenances  as  are  herein  defined  and 
described  in  all  their  parts  and  requirements. 

Payments  on  account  will  be  made  as  follows, 
viz. : 

a.  On  or  about  the   first  of  each   month,  the     T 
Water  Commissioner  shall  cause  an  approximate  esti- 
mate to  be  made  of  the  value  of  the  materials  and 
word  done,  based  on  the  total  amount  to  be  paid  for 
the   engines ;   from    the    amount  so   found   he    shall 
deduct  20  per  cent,  and  all  sums  previously  paid  or 
retained  under  this  contract,  and  certify  the  remain- 
der as  then   due.     Provided,  however,    that  nothing 
herein   contained    shall    be    construed    to    affect  the 
right  of  the  City   of   St.    Louis,  hereby  reserved,  to 
reject  the  whole  or  any  portion  of  the  work  afore- 
said, should  the  said  certificates  be  found   or  known 

to  be  inconsistent  with  the  terms  of  this  agreement, 
or  otherwise  improperly  given. 

b.  When    the   twenty-four  hours  running  test 
shall  have  been  satisfactorily  completed,   the  Water 
Commissioner  shall  make  an  estimate  for  the  amount 
of  the  contract  price,  less  10  per  cent.,  and  all  sums 
retained  under  this  contract. 

It  is  further  agreed  that  the  water  commissioner 
shall  have  charge  of  and  operate  the  engines  furnished 
under  this  contract,  during  the  twenty-four  hours 
duty  test,  and  the  year  following,  and  that  the 
part  of  the  first  part  shall  not  be  relieved  or 

released  thereby  from  any  of obligations  under 

this  contract.  - 

At  the  end  of  said  year,  the  pumping-  engines 
and  appurtenances,  if  found  to  be  in  good  working 
condition,  shall  be  finally  accepted,  and  the  Water 
Commissioner  shall  make  and  certify  a  final  estimate 
in  favor  of  the  first  part  and  the  responsibility  of 
said  first  part  shall  then  cease. 

The  said  part      of  the  first  part  further  agree         U 

that shall  not  be  entitled  to  demand  or  receive 

payment  for  any  portion  of  the  aforesaid  work  or 
materials,  except  in  the  manner  set  forth  in  this 
agreement ;  nor  until  each  and  all  of  the  stipulations 
hereinbefore  mentioned  are  complied  with,  and  the 
Water  Commissioner  shall  have  given  his  certificate 


298  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

to  that  effect.  The  party  of  the  second  part  hereby 
agrees  and  binds  itself  to  pay  the  said  part  of  the 
first  part  in  cash,  the  whole  amount  of  money  accru- 
ing to  the  said  part  of  the  first  part  under  this 
contract,  excepting  such  sum  or  sums  as  may  be 
lawfully  retained  under  any  of  the  provisions  of  this 
contract  hereinbefore  set  forth,  upon  the  giving  by 
the  said  part  of  the  first  part  to  the  party  of  the 
second  part  a  release  from  all  claims  and  demands 
whatsoever  growing  out  of  this  agreement. 
V  This  agreement  is  entered  into  subject  to  the 

city  charter  and  ordinances  in  general,  and  in  partic- 
ular to  the  following  provisions  of  Article  VI.,  sec- 
tion 28,  of  said  charter,  to  wit: 

"#."  The  aggregate  payments  under  this  con- 
tract shall  be  limited  by  the  appropriations  made 
therefor. 

"£."  On  ten  day's  notice  the  work,  under  this 
agreement,  may,  without  cost  or  claim  against  the 
city,  be  suspended  by  the  board  of  public  improve- 
ments, with  the  approval  of  the  mayor,  for  want  of 
means  or  other  substantial  cause.  Provided,  that  on 
the  complaint  of  any  citizen  and  tax  payer,  that  any 
public  work  is  being  done  contrary  to  contract,  or 
the  work  or  material  used  is  imperfect  or  different 
from  what  was  stipulated  to  be  furnished  or  done, 
the  said  board  shall  examine  into  the  complaint  and 
may  appoint  two  or  more  competent  commissioners 
to  examine  and  report  on  said  work,  and  after  such 
examination,  or  after  considering  the  report  of  said 
commissioners,  they  shall  make  such  order  in  the 
premises  as  shall  be  just  and  reasonable,  and  what 
the  public  interests  seem  to  demand,  and  such  decis- 
ion shall  be  binding  on  all  parties.  The  cost  of  such 
examination  shall  be  borne  by  the  contractor,  if  such 
complaint  is  decided  to  be  well  founded,  and  by  the 
complainant  if  found  to  be  groundless. 

"W  Ordinance    16,514,    approved     December    22d, 

1891,  is  hereby  made  part  of  this  contract,  and  must 
be  observed  in  all  its  provisions,  namely: 

SECTION  i.  All  contracts  hereafter  entered 
into  wherein  the  City  of  St.  Louis  is  a  party,  for  the 
doing  of  any  kind  of  work  or  labor  for  the  City  of 
St.  Louis,  including  work  on  all  public  buildings, 
works  and  enterprises,  shall  contain  the  following 
terms  and  conditions:  (#)  That  the  men,  persons 
or  laborers  who  may  be  employed  in  the  doing, 
prosecuting,  or  accomplishment  of  such  work  done 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR   PUMPING   ENGINES.  299 

by  the  contractor  with  the  City  of  St.  Louis,  or  any 
one  under  him,  or  any  person  controlling  the  said 
men.  persons  or  laborers,  shall  not  be  required  to 
work  more  than  eight  hours  a  day;  (£)  That  in  case 
of  the  violation  of  such  provisions  of  such  contracts, 
the  mayor  shall  immediately  declare  such  contracts 
canceled  and  forfeited,  and  the  work  being  done 
under  such  contracts  shall  be  relet  in  the  manner 
provided  for  the  letting  of  such  work,  and  such  con- 
tractor shall  thereafter  be  ineligible  to  bid  upon  such 
work  under  such  reletting,  and  the  difference'in  the 
cost  of  doing  such  work  under  such  contract  so  can- 
celed and  forfeited,  and  under  such  reletting,  shall 
be  sued  for  on  the  bond  of  such  contractor  so  violat- 
ing such  contract. 

For  the  faithful  performance  of  all  and  singu- 
lar the    terms    and    stipulations    of    this  contract,  in 

every  particular,  the  said part       of  the  first 

part,  as    principal,   and as  securities,  hereby 

bind  themselves  and  their  respective  heirs,  executors 
and  administrators,  unto  the  said  City  of  St.  Louis, 

in  the  penal  sum  of dollars,  lawful  money  of  the 

United  States,  conditioned  that  in  the  event  the  said 

shall  faithfully    and    properly  perform  the 

foregoing  contract  according  to  all  the  terms  thereof, 
and  shall  as  soon  as  the  work  contemplated  by  said 
contract  is  completed,  pay  to  the  proper  parties  all 
amounts  due  for  material  and  labor  used  and  em- 
ployed in  the  performance  thereof,  then  this  obliga- 
tion to  be  void,  otherwise  of  full  force  and  effect,  and 
the  same  may  be  sued  on  at  the  instance  of  any 
material  -man,  laboring  man  or  mechanic,  in  the  name 
of  the  City  of  St.  Louis,  to  the  use  of  such  material 
man,  laboring  man  or  mechanic,  for  any  breach  of 
the  condition  hereof;  provided,  that  no  such  suit 
shall  be  instituted  after  the  expiration  of  ninety  days 
from  the  completion  of  said»contract. 

In    witness   whereof,   the  said part     of 

the   first  part,    as  principal,   and securities, 

parties  of  the  first  part,  have  hereunto  set  their  hands 
and  seals  respectively,  and  the  City  of  St.  Louis, 
party  of  the  second  part,  acting  by  and  through  the 
board  of  public  improvements  aforesaid,  have  sub- 
scribed these  presents  the  day  and  year  first  above 
written. 

WITNESS: 

"seal" 


seal 
seal 
seal 


300  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 


The  City  of  St.  Louis  by 

President  Board  of  Public  Improvements' 
Countersigned : 

Comptroller. 

CITY  COUNSELOR'S  OFFICE. 

St.  Louis, 1 8 — 

The  foregoing  Agreement  and  Bond  are  in  due 
form  according  to  law. 

City  Counselor. 

MAYOR'S  OFFICE. 

St.  Louis. 18 — 

I  hereby  approve  of  the  Securities    to   the  fore- 
going Contract  and  Bond. 


Mayor. 
M.  L.  H. 

169.  Complete  General  Specifications  for  Water 
Tubular  Boilers  and  Settings.  The  following  complete 
general  specifications  for  horizontal  water  tubular  boilers  were 
used  in  connection  with  the  engine  specifications  given  in  the 
previous  article,  and  the  contract  was  let  under  similar  contract- 
ing, general,  and  surety  clauses.  These  portions  are  omitted 
from  these  specifications  for  the  sake  of  brevity.  They  were 
prepared  by  the  same  gentleman  who  prepared  the  specifica- 
tions in  the  last  article,  and  are  thought  to  represent  an  equally 
good  practice. 

1.  The  work  to  be  done  consists  in  furnishing 
designs   and   plans,    material,   tools  and  labor,   and 
building,     transporting     and    erecting    complete    in 
place,  ready  for  firing,  in  the  boiler-house  at  Bissell's 
Point,     eight     horizontal    water    tube     boilers,    the 
boilers  to  be    provided    with    all    necessary    valves, 
gauges,  breechings   and   connection  to  underground 
smoke  flue. 

DESIGN. 

2.  The  boilers  to  be  of  the  type  designated  as 
horizontal    \vater   tube  boilers,  designed    and    built 
with  special   reference   to  easy   access  for  cleaning 
and  repairing  of  both  internal  and  external  surfaces. 
The  boilers  to  be  designed  for  natural  draft  of  pres- 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOE  PUMPING   ENGINES.  301 

ent  smoke  stack.     No  stays  or  obstructions  of   any 
kind  shall  be  placed  inside  of  the  water  tubes. 

3.  The  boilers   to  be  designed  for  a  working 
steam  pressure  of  140  pounds  per  square  inch,  w7ith 
a  factor  of  safety  of  six  on  minimum  sections. 

4.  Each  boiler  shall  have   a  total  tube  heating 
surface   of  not  less   than   3,000  square    feet,   and  a 
grate  area   equivalent  to  75  square  feet  of  straight 
grate. 

5.  The  boilers  to  be  provided  with  smoke  pre- 
venting furnaces,  which  shall  effectually  stop  smoke 
while  burning  southern  Illinois  coal  at  a  rate  of  from 
twenty  (20)  to  twenty-five  (25)  pounds  per   square 
foot  of  grate  per  hour.     The  furnace  shall  be  some 
well   tested   and  approved  device  for  prevention  of 
smoke,  which  does  not  use  a  steam  jet  or  a  system 
of  brick  arches  in  the  fire  box. 

6.  The  boilers  to  be   set  in  four  independent 
batteries,   as  shown  on   drawing,    each  boiler  to  be 
provided  with  walls,  settings,  valves,  gauges,  smoke 
breeching  and  dampers   necessary  for  operating  or 
repairing  independently  of  other  boilers. 

7.  The  fire  fronts  shall  be   designed  to  facili- 
tate firing  and  removing  ashes.   The  fire  doors  to  be 
of  suitable  design    to  secure  the   regulation    of    air 
admitted   to  the  fire,   and  prevent  radiation  through 
the  fire  door  openings  during  regular  service.     The 
boiler  dampers  to  be  arranged  to  regulate  from  front 
of  boiler. 

8.  Each  boiler  to  have  an  eight-inch  stop  valve,    Fittings, 
admitting  of  independent  connection  to  main  steam 

pipe. 

To  each  boiler  there  shall  also  be  attached, 
besides  the  eight-inch  stop  valve,  two  three  and  a 
half  inch  improved  pop  safety  valves,  placed  in  such 
positions  that  their  escape  pipes  will  not  interfere 
with  the  roof  trusses  or  sky-lights  of  the  boiler 
house. 

9.  All  steam  drums  to  be  made  of  steel  plates 
of  the  quality  hereinafter  specified. 

10.  The  boilers   to  be  set  and  supported  in  a 
manner  admitting  of  expansion   and   contraction  of 
the  same,  without  injury  to  the  brick  work  or  boilers 
in  any  way. 

All  beams  required  to  support  or  carry  the 
boilers  to  be  of  ample  strength,  and  must  be  either 
wrought  iron  or  steel. 


302  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

There  shall  be  central  air  spaces  in  all  walls 
enclosing  the  boilers. 

FITTINGS    AND    APPURTENANCES. 

ii.  The  contractor  shall  furnish  and  put  in 
place  all  necessary  valves,  steam  gauges,  water  glass 
gauges,  safety  valve  escape  pipes,  and  all  appurte- 
nances, and  make  connection  to  steam  main,  feed 
.and  blow-off  pipes  and  underground  smoke  flue. 

Wrenches.  I2«     For   all  nuts  on  the  boilers  and    fittings, 

there  must  be  furnished  well-fitted  wrenches. 

steam  Gauges  IZ"     The  steam  gauge s  shall  be  attached  to  the 

and  Plugs,  boiler  fronts  with  nickel-plated  brass  siphon  pipe 
and  cocks,  in  a  neat  manner,  admitting  of  easy 
removal. 

The  feed-water  valve  of  each  boiler  to  be  pro- 
vided with  a  suitable  arrangement  for  its  regulation 
from  the  front  of  the  boilers. 

Steam  gauges  to  be  brass  case,  nickel-plated, 
fourteen  inches  in  diameter,  maximum  pressure  250 
pounds,  five-pound  divisions. 

14.  Each  boiler  to  be  provided  with  three 
Bailey's  safety  copper  cap  fusible  plugs,  or  other 
safety  plugs  of  equally  good  manufacture  and  satis- 
factory fusibility. 

Drains.  J5*     There  shall  be   suitable  copper  spouts  and 

polished  brass  piping  wherever  visible,  to  catch  the 
steam  and  water  from  the  gauge  cocks  and  glass 
water  gauges,  and  they  shall  be  piped  and  connected 
to  the  ash  box  in  an  acceptable  manner. 

Valves.  1 6.     Steam  valves  above  six  inches  in  diameter 

shall  have  steel  stems,  provided  with  phosphor 
bronze  nuts,  and  the  glands  of  all  stuffing  boxes  shall 
be  of  composition. 

17.  All  valves,    fittings,    fixtures  and  appurte- 
nances used  shall  be  of  the  best  design. 

18.  The    steam    drums   and   all    parts    of    the 
boilers  and  pipes  not   covered  by  brick  work,    and 
the  breechings  to  be  covered  with  magnesia  cover- 
ing, not  less  than  one  and  a  half  inches  in  thickness, 
thoroughly  secured  in  place. 

19.  Hand  hole    plates  must  be  secured  in  an 
approved    manner,    to  insure  the    greatest    possible 
safety  against  accidents  from  breaking  of  fastenings. 

MATERIALS. 

20.  All    material    used    throughout    this    con- 
struction must  be  of  the  special  class  and  grade  called 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOK  PUMPING  ENGINES.  303 

for  in  the  specifications,  and  shall  in  each  case  fully 
stand  the  specified  tests. 

21.  All   plates   in   the   boilers  to  be  made  of  Steel  Plat-- 
steel. 

The  steel  plates  used  in  these  boilers  must  be 
stamped  with  the  maker's  name  and  the  tensile 
strength ;  to  be  homogeneous  and  of  uniform  qual- 
ity, to  have  a  tensile  strength  of  not  less  than  55,000 
pounds,  nor  more  than  62,000  pounds  per  square 
inch,  an  elastic  limit  of  at  least  30,000  pounds  per 
square  inch,  and  an  elongation  of  at  least  twenty- 
four  (24)  per  cent,  in  eight  inches. 

Specimens  must  stand  the  following  bending 
test,  viz. : 

To  bend  double,  closing  up  completely  without 
showing  sign  of  fracture  when  bent  cold,  or  after 
having  been  heated  to  a  cherry  red  and  plunged  into 
water  at  70  degrees  Fahrenheit. 

The  water  commissioner  shall  have  the  right  to 
order  test  specimens  2x14  inches,  to  be  cut  out  of 
any  of  the  plates  to  be  used  in  the  boilers. 

22.  All  wrought   iron   for  bolts,  nuts   or  other  Wrought  iron. 
purposes   shall  be  double  refined,   and  have  an  ulti- 
mate tensile   strength  of  at  least   52,000  pounds  per 

square  inch,  an  elastic  limit  of  26,000  pounds  per 
square  inch,  and  an  elongation  of  eighteen  (18)  per 
cent,  in  eight  inches. 

23.  Rivets   to  be   Burden's  best,    and  must  be 
capable  of  bending  cold  until   the  sides  are  in  close 
contact,  without  sign  of  fracture  ;   and  iron  used  for 
screw    stays,    stay    bolts  and  braces    to  be    of   best 
quality  of  American  manufacture. 

24.  Tubes  to  be  lap-welded  of  the  best  quality  Tubes. 
of    American    manufacture,    of    a    diameter  of    3^ 
inches  or  4   inches,    and   must   stand   a  satisfactory 
hammer  test. 

25.  All  castings  shall  be  free  from  blow  holes,  Castin5?- 
flaws,    scabs,    and    defects   of   any   description,    and 

shall  be  smooth,  close-grained,  sound,  tough,  and  of 
true  forms  and  dimensions. 

Great  care  must  be  taken  to  make  all  castings, 
as  nearly  as  practicable,  of  uniform  thickness 
throughout,  when  not  otherwise  required. 

26.  All   cast  iron  used  under   steam  pressure  Iron  Castings, 
shall  be   of   good  quality,  tough  and  of  even  grain, 

and  shall  possess  a  tensile  strength  of  not  less  than 
22,000  pounds  per  square  inch. 


304  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

Test  bars  of  the  metal,  two  inches  by  one  inch, 
when  broken  transversely,  twenty-four  inches  be- 
tween supports  and  loaded  in  the  center,  shall  have 
a  breaking  load  of  not  less  than  2,200  pounds,  and 
shall  have  a  total  deflection  of  not  less  than  f-^  of 
an  inch  before  breaking. 

The  test  bars  shall  be  cast  as  nearly  as  possible 
to  the  above  dimensions,  without  finishing,  but  cor- 
rections will  be  made  by  the  water  commissioner  for 
variations  in  thickness  and  width,  and  the  corrected 
results  must  conform  to  the  above  requirements. 

27.  If  any  two  test  bars,  cast  the  same  day, 
show  a  tensile  strength  less  than  is  required  in  these 
specifications,  or  do  not  show  the  required  cross 
breaking  load  or  deflection,  all  castings  made  from 
the  melting  from  which  the  samples  were  taken  may 
be  rejected. 

Specimens.  28.     Test   specimens    and   samples  of  castings 

and  forgings,  or  any  other  kind  of  material  used  in 
this  construction,  shall  be  prepared  ready  for  testing 
and  supplied  in  the  number,  shape,  finish  and  sizes 
required  by  the  water  commissioner,  and  shall  be 
prepared  as  may  be  directed  at  any  time  during  the 
pouring  or  working  of  materials. 

29.  The   stamps  put  upon   the   steel  sheets  by 
the  manufacturer  must  at  all  times  be  preserved  for 
identification,    and  so  placed   as  to  be  visible  on  the 
outside  of  boilers ;   if  any  stamp  is  cut  out  in  process 
of   manufacture,   the  water   commissioner   shall  first 
replace  it  by  a  duplicate  stamp. 

WORKMANSHIP. 

30.  The  best   workmanship    on    these  boilers 
will  be  exacted,  and  it  must  be  equal  in  all  respects 
to    that   executed    in  the  best    boiler    works    in  this 
country. 

31.  All  holes   for   bolts,    studs   and  rivets    in 
castings  must  be  drilled.     No  cored  bolt  holes  will 
be  allowed. 

No  plugging  or  other  stopping  of  holes  or 
defects  of  castings  will  be  allowed. 

32.  Any    rivet    which    is    deformed,    cracked, 
burnt,    improperly    driven,    leaky,    or    in    any    way 
injured,  must  be  cut  out  and  properly  replaced. 

33.  All  surfaces   of   sheets,  and   other  parts  to 
be  riveted,    must  be   brought  together   to  close  con- 
tact   and    accurately   fitted,    with    bearing    surfaces 


SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  PUMPING  ENGINES. 


305 


smooth  and  clean,  and  while  being  riveted  to  be 
held  firmly  in  position  and  alignment  without  exert- 
ing injurious  strains  upon  any  portion  or  detail  of 
the  boiler. 

34.  The  use  of  drift  pens,   to  bring  rivet  holes 
to  match,   or   come   true   and   central,    will    not  be 
allowed  in  the  process  of  riveting,   and  must  be  dis- 
pensed   with    entirely.     The    utmost    accuracy    in 
punching  the   rivet    holes  will    be    exacted.      Rivet 
holes  failing  to  fit,  or  come  fair   and   true,  must  be 
reamed   out   accurately,    and   rivets   of  suitable  size 
used. 

35.  All  sheets  of  the  boilers  must  be  satisfac-   Sheets. 
torily  straightened  before  being  planed,  bent,  flanged, 
drilled,  fitted,  etc. 

36.  All    scarfing    to    be    done  in    a    neat    and 
workmanlike     manner.        Sufficient     allowance     of 
material  must  be  made  at  all  places  where  scarfs  are 
required. 

37.  The  edges  of   all  sheets  to  be  planed  to  a 
suitable  bevel. 

38.  All   seams   to  be   caulked    on   both    sides  Caulking, 
where  accessible. 

All  caulking  to  be  done  in  the  best  manner, 
with  round-nosed  caulking  tools ;  great  care  to  be 
taken  not  to  mar  the  sheet  or  rivets. 

39.  The    threads    of    all    studs,     bolts,    screw   Threads, 
stays,  stay  bolts   and   nuts,    to  be  chased  with  great 

care  and  skill,  to  insure  uniformity  in  pitch  and 
accuracy  in  fit. 

All  holes  which  are  to  receive  bolts,  screw 
stays,  studs  or  stay  bolts,  to  be  accurately  centered, 
drilled  and  tapped,  to  give  a  desirable  fit  and  tight- 
ness of  the  threads. 

The  stay  bolts,  screw  stays  and  studs  to  be 
entered,  screwed  in  and  riveted  in  a  careful  and 
workmanlike  manner,  to  insure  true  and  parallel 
surfaces  and  an  equitable  distribution  of  the  stress 
upon  all  of  the  sustaining  members. 

40.  All  expanding  of  tubes  and   nipples  shall 
be  done  in  a  careful  and  workmanlike  manner,   and 
shall  be   absolutely   water-tight  under  the  test  pres- 
sure. 

41.  The   fire,   ash   and    cleaning   doors    to  be   Doors, 
fitted  air-tight  to  their  seating  or  bearing  surfaces. 

All  holes   in  the  lugs  for  hinges  of  the  doors 
used  in  the  construction  to  be  drilled  and  reamed,  to 
accurately  fit  the  turned  pins  for  same. 
20 


306 


COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 


42.  The   brick  work    must  be   executed   in  a 
thorough  and  workmanlike   manner,  the   brick  used 
to  be  strictly  first-class  in  every  respect.     Outside  of 
setting  to  be  laid  with  stock  brick  in  white  mortar ; 
inside,  where  exposed  to  heat,  to  be  lined  with  best 
quality  fire  brick. 

43.  All    red    bricks    to    be    laid    in    mortar  of 
approved    quality,   and   all   fire  brick  to  be   laid  in 
ground  fire  clay. 

FOUNDATIONS. 

Foundations.  44.     The  city  will  furnish  complete  foundations 

for  the  boilers,  the  position  in 'the  house  to  be  as 
shown  on  plans  on  file  in  the  office  of  the  water 
commissioner,  and  the  space  occupied  by  each  bat- 
tery of  boilers  to  be  not  greater  than  that  shown. 

GENERAL     CLAUSES. 

Pressure  Test.  45.  The  boilers  shall  be  tested  by  the  con- 
tractor with  a  water  pressure  of  210  pounds  per 
square  inch,  under  which  they  must  be  water-tight. 

Paint.  46.      When  the  boilers  shall  have  been  tested  to 

the  satisfaction  of  the  water  commissioner,  they 
shall  be  thoroughly  scraped,  cleaned,  dried  and 
painted  outside  with  one  coat  of  linseed  oil. 

47.  The  fire  front,  fire  and  ash  doors,  and 
other  cast  and  sheet  iron  parts,  except  grate  bars, 
after  approval  shall  be  painted  in  the  shop  with  one 
coat  of  paraffine  varnish,  and  after  erection  they 
shall  receive  another  coat  of  the  same. 

Erection.  ^3.     Xhe  contractor  shall,  at  his   own   expense 

and  risk,  transport  the  boilers  and  appurtenances  to 
BisselPs  Point,  furnish  all  necessary  labor,  tools  and 
appliances,  and  erect  the  same  complete,  as  above 
specified. 

Every  possible  and  necessary  care  must  be  taken 
in  handling  and  transporting  the  boilers,  to  prevent 
injury  of  any  description  to  the  same. 

49.  i   The  contractor  shall  so   conduct  his  work 
as  not  to  interfere  with  the  operation  of   any   boilers 
under  fire,  and  the  disposal  of  his  tools    and   materi- 
als, during  storage  and  erection,    will   be   subject  to 
the  approval  of  the  water  commissioner. 

50.  The  contractor  shall,  at  his  own  cost,  make 
good   all   damages   to  masonry,    buildings    or  other 
property  of  the  city  of  St.   Louis,    occasioned  by  the 
contractor  or  his  employees  in  the  transportation  and 
erection  of  the  machinery. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR   ENGINE    HOUSE.  307 

t 

51.  The  city  of  St.    Louis   will    furnish   space   storage, 
within  its  premises  for  the   reception   of   the   boilers 

and  details,  but  shall  not  be  responsible  for  the  safe 
keeping  of  the  same,  nor  for  damage  caused  to  them 
from  exposure  or  other  causes. 

52.  The  city  will  remove  the   old   boilers  and 
prepare   foundations  below   the   floor  line    for  new 
boilers,  contractors  to   furnish    castings  to   be    set  in 
underground  flue  for  smoke  connections. 

53.  The  contractor  shall  get  all  finished  mate- 
rials on  the  ground  at  the  earliest  possible   moment, 
and  proceed  with  the  erection  of  the  same  as  soon  as 
notified  by  the  water  commissioner. 

The  work  of  erection  in  place,  ready  for  firing, 
shall  be  carried  on  continuously,  night  and  day,  and 
the  contractor  shall   provide  for   that  purpose  three, 
complete  erecting  gangs. 

If  at  any  time  during  the  erection  the  water 
commissioner  shall  be  of  the  opinion  that  the  work 
can  be  expedited  by  the  employment  of  additional 
labor  or  tools,  he  shall  order  the  contractor  to  make 
such  increase  in  his  working  force  or  appliances  as 
he  may  deem  necessary  to  secure  the  most  rapid 
progress  possible;  and  it  is  especially  understood 
and  agreed  that  if  the  contractor  fails  to  put  the 
required  force  at  work  promptly,  that  the  water 
commissioner  shall  employ  such  labor  as  he  may 
deem  necessary,  and  charge  the  cost  of  the  same  to 
the  contractor. 

54.  The  contractor  shall  bear  the  cost  of  mak- 
ing all   repairs  necessitated   by   defective   materials, 
workmanship  or    design  of  the  boilers  and  furnaces 
for  the  space  of  one  year   after   the  boilers   are   put 
into  regular  operation.  M.  L.  H. 

170.     Specifications  for  an  Engine  House.     The 

following  specifications  for  an  engine  house  differ  from  those 
in  the  two  previous  articles  inasmuch  as  they  were  accompan- 
ied by  complete  detail  drawings.  The  contracting  and  surety 
clauses  are  here  omitted,  since  they  would  be  the  sa,me  as  those 
given  in  article  168.  This  engine  house  covers  three  large  pump 
pits,  designed  for  three  sets  of  low  service  pumping  engines, 
and  it  is  entirely  without  a  floor,  nearly  the  entire  space  being 
occupied  by  the  pits.  The  walls  rest  directly  upon  the  natural 
rock,  and  an  electric  traveling  crane  is  carried  by  a  track  ne.  r 


308 


COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 


Work  to  be 
done. 


the  top,  of  the  two  side  walls,  this  crane  spanning  the  entire 
opening  and  running  the  entire  length  of  the  building.  The 
side  walls,  therefore,  were  made  very. strong  and  substantial. 

i.     The  work  to   be   done  consists  in  building 
and  finishing  complete  Low  Service  Engine  House 
at  Chain  of  Rocks,   St.    Louis   City  Water  Works 
Extension.     The  foundation  on  which  the  structure 
will  rest  is  now  completed.     The  work  is  shown  in 
detail  on  the  following  drawings : 
No.  1.     Elevation  of  side  walls. 
"  end  walls. 

Longitudinal  section. 
Transverse  sections. 
Plan  below  traveler. 

"    above        " 
Gallery  plan. 
Roof  plan. 

Roof  plan  for  iron  trusses. 
Cut  stone  courses. 
Details  of  stone  faced  door  and  window 

openings,  terra  cotta  details. 
Details  of  cut  stone  in   cornice,  fire  walls 

and  brick  arches. 
Details  of  windows,  doors,  ceiling  and  cast 

iron  door  sill. 

Details  of  large  sliding  doors  and  hangers . 
Details  of  door  and  window  frames. 
Details  of  sky  lights . 
Details  of  galleries,  stairs,  ladders,  balcony 

and  door  sills . 
Details  of  iron  trusses. 
Strain  sheet. 
Details  of  brick  cornice,  fire  walls,  etc. 


Sand. 


Cement. 


2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 


"  13. 

"  14. 

"  15. 
"  16. 
''17. 

"18. 
"  19. 
"20. 


MORTAR. 


2.  All  sand   for  mortar  shall  be  clean,  sharp, 
coarse,  Mississippi  river  channel  sand. 

3.  All  cement  used  in  the  masonry  shall  be  H. 
H.  Meier's  Puzzolan  cement,  put  up   in  well-made 
barrels. 

4.  It  shall  be  subject  to  such   tests   as  may  be 
necessary  to  fully  determine    its   character,   and  any 
cement  which,  in  the  opinion   of  the  water  commis- 
sioner, is  unfit  for  the  work  herein  specified  will  be 
rejected. 

5.  All    short   weight   or   damaged    barrels  of 
cement,  or  cement  without  the    maker's  brand,  will 
be  rejected  without  test.    .Samples  for  testing  shall 
be  furnished   at  such  times   and   in  such  manner  as 
may  be  required.     On  all  barrels  accepted  inspection 
marks  will  be  placed,  and  the  contractor  shall  care- 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR   ENGINE   HOUSE. 


309 


Colored 
Mortar. 


fully  preserve  these  marks  and  not  allow  them  to  be 
imitated. 

6.  All  cement  for  use   on   the  works  shall  be 
kept  under  cover,  thoroughly  protected  from  moist- 
ure, raised  from  the   ground — by  blocking  or  other- 
wise— and    dry    until    used.     The    contractor    shall 
keep  in  storage  a  quantity  of  accepted  cement  suffi- 
cient   to   insure    the   uninterrupted   progress   of   the 
work. 

7.  Cement  may  be  reinspected    at   any  time, 
and,  if  found  to  be  damaged  or  of  improper  quality, 
will  be  rejected.     All  rejected  cement  shall  at  once 
be  removed  from  the  line  of  work. 

8.  All  mortar  used   in   the   masonry  shall  be   Mortar, 
cement  mortar,  and  shall  be  made  of  three  parts  of 

sand  and  one  part  of  cement,  each  of  the  quality 
above  specified.  All  mortar  shall  be  made  fresh 
for  the  work  in  hand,  and  any  mortar  which  has 
begun  to  set  shall  not  be  used. 

9.  All  brick  in  outer  face  of  walls  shall  be  laid 
in  mortar,    colored  with   a  red  mortar  stain  that  is 
even    in    color  and  durable,   and   approved  by   the 
water  commissioner. 

STOXE    MASONRY. 

10.  The  base,  ashler  and  water  table  courses   Granite- 
shall  be  of  Missouri   red  granite,    sound,   free  from 
discolorations,  and  of  even  color.     All  visible  rock 

face  shall  be  free  from  drill-holes  or  tool-marks. 
Base  course  and  water  table  shall  be  six-cut  work, 
ashler  course,  rock  face. 

11.  Base  course  shall  be   12  inches  high,  8j^- 
inch  bond,  with  4-inch   by  4-inch   chamfer   on  top. 
Ashler  course  shall  be   i    foot  4^    inches  high,  13- 
inch  bond  on  the  setting  bed    and   8^  inch  bond  on 
the  top  bed,  and  cut  for  iron  anchors.     Water  table 
shall  be  75^  inches  high,  6-inch  bond,    cut  for  iron 
anchors    and    chamfered    on    top    as    shown.     The 
ashler  and  water  table  course   shall   be  anchored  to 
the  brick  backing  with  tarred  wrought  iron  anchors. 

12.  All  of  the  granite  work  shall  be  laid  in  the 
most  workmanlike  and  substantial  manner,  with  even 
and  equal  joints,    %    inch   thick.     Each   stone  must 
have  perfect   and   level   beds.     All   joints   shall    be 
pointed  well  and  neatly  with   pointing  mortar,  col- 
ored red.     Pointing   joints    must    show    equal    size 
throughout,    and    be   struck  with  pointing  tool  and 
straight  edge. 


310 


COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 


Sandstone. 


Limestone. 


Brick, 


13.  Eight  stones,   2  feet  o  inches  by  15  inches 
by  18  inches,    and   ten    stones,  2  feet  o  inches  by  14 
inches  by  15  inches,    shall    be   furnished  and  set  as 
directed,  to  be  used  as  bed  stones   for  roof  trusses; 
said  stones  shall  be  of  granite,  sound  in  all  respects, 
top  and  bottom  beds  dressed  true  and  level. 

14.  Window   sills,    sill    courses,    belt   course, 
coping,    pediments,    range    work   around    door  and 
window  openings,  and  all  cut  stone  work  above  the 
water  table,    shall    be   of   Lake  Superior  red   sand- 
stone ;   fine  Crandall  finish,  laid  with  equal  and  even 
i^-inch  joints   in  full    beds    of    mortar.      All  joints 
shall  be  without   chipping   and  beds  of   stone   level 
and  perfect.      Spalls  shall   not  be    used   in    leveling 
any  portion  of  the  work.      Window  sills  shall  be  cut 
with  drips  and  seats,  the  seats  not  being  cut  to  exact 
size  until  after  the  frames  are  set. 

15.  All  the  sand  stone  work  shall  be   cut  and 
set  in  the  very  best  manner,   and  the  whole  cleaned 
down  perfectly,  and  pointed  with  red  pointing  mor- 
tar, with  concave  joints,    and  backed   up   as  soon  as 
set. 

16.  The  stone  must  be  perfect  in   all  respects, 
even  color,  free  from  all  defects  or  pockets. 

17.  In  cleaning  down  the  work,  care  must  be 
taken  that  the  joints  are  rubbed  to  a  level  surface. 

18.  The  stone  bed  course  for  the  track  of  the 
crane  shall  be  made  of  lime   stone  from   approved 
quarries,  dressed  smooth  on  top  bed,  bysh-hammered 
on  face,    and    with   true    and    parallel    beds.      This 
course  shall  extend  the  entire  length  of  the  building 
on  each  side,  and   it   shall   be    14  inches  wide  and  8 
inches  high,  set  in  a  swimming  bed  of  cement  mor- 
tar.    WThen  set  same  must  be  leveled  perfectly,  the 
entire  length  of  the  building,  taking  each  side  out  of 
wind  with  the  other.     Special    care    must   be    exer- 
cised in  cutting  and  setting  this  course.     See    detail 
sheet  No.  20. 

BRICK    WORK. 

19.  All  the  exterior  faces  of  the  walls,  jambs, 
etc.,  shall   be  executed   with  even-colored   dark  red 
and  hard  brick.  All  other  portions  of  the  brick  work 
executed  with  strictly  red  and   hard   quality.      Light 
red  brick  shall  not  be  used    in   any  portion  of   the 
building,   nor    will     salmon    or    defective    brick    be 
allowed  in  any  part  of  the  walls  or  on  the  premises. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOE   ENGINE    HOUSE.  311 

20.  Brick  in  exterior  of   walls  shall  be  laid  in    Face  Wails. 
red  mortar,  with  even   and  full  bed  and  end  joints, 

struck  with  a  concave   tool,  as  the  work  progresses. 

21.  The    standard   height  for   laying  all  brick  Height  of 
shall    be    2    courses    to  5   inches,    unless    otherwise    ( 
ordered  by  the  water  commissioner. 

22.  Figured  thickness  of  walls  will  govern.       T1JvaUSeSS  °f 

23.  The  brick   in   every  fifth  course  shall  be    Bond, 
headers,  and  face  work  shall  be   laid  to   bond  with 
Flemish    bond   headers,    as   directed   by    the    water 
commissioner,    during    the    progress    of    the    work. 

The  different  courses  shall  be  slushed,  and  all 
joints  thoroughly  filled  with  cement  mortar. 

All  courses  shall  be  laid  to  a  line,  front  and 
rear;  plumb,  true,  straight  and  level. 

24.  All  arches  shall  be  turned  with  arch-brick,  Brick  Arches . 
ground   to   proper  radiating  lines,    and   the  face  of 

same  shall  be  laid,  alternately,  8*4  inches  and  4]^ 
inches,  and  backed  up  with  row  locks  laid  with  shove 
joint.  All  jambs  shall  be  returned  and  neatly 
pointed.  All  arches  shall  be  full  depth  of  wall.  Turn 
brick  arches  over  seats  of  each  truss,  as  shown  on 
sheet  No.  18. 

25.  Brick  must  be  thoroughly  wet  before  lay-   How  Laid- 
ing,  if  required.     Stone  walls    shall  be   well  swept 

off  and  sprinkled  with  water  before  any  brick  is  laid 
on  them. 

26.  Cut  a  sufficient  number  of  recesses  through   Notches  in 
the  stone  foundation  walls  for  passage  through  same 

of  the  copper  down-spouts,  and  build  them  in  with 
stone  work,  as  shown  on  sheet  No.  i. 

27.  All  frames,   anchors,    wood,    bricks,  etc.,  Setting  Cut 

.i  ini_i_*ii.*  Stone  above 

that  are  necessary  shall  be  built  in.  Water  Table. 

28.  All  cut   stone  above  the  water  table  shall 
be  set,  and  the  walls  carefully  leveled  for  the  recep- 
tion of  the  iron  trusses.   After  the  walls  are  built  all 
sills  shall  be  under-pinned  with  red  mortar. 

29.  All  necessary  wood  plates  for  the  fasten- 
ing of  tin  flashing  shall  be  built  in. 

30.  All  terra  cotta  shall  be  bonded  firmly  to  the  sgjja*  Terra 
brick  work   and   neatly  pointed   with  red  mortar  at 
completion. 

31.  Two  iron  I  beams   shall  be  built   in  and  Iron  J  Beams, 
covered  with  a  y% -inch  plate,  where  shown  on  sheet 

No.  3,  in  the  side  wall  over  the  traveler  off-set  and 
above  the  circle  head  windows,  leaving  the  wall  open 
on  the  under  side,  so  that  the  traveler  can  be  carried 
through  this  opening.  After  traveler  has  been  set 


312 


COMPLETE   SPECIFICATIONS. 


Cleaning 
Down. 


in  position  the  opening  shall  be  closed  up  with  brick 
work,  leaving  the  I  beams  in  the  walls,  but  not 
exposed. 

32.     All  exterior  brick  walls  shall  be  cleaned  of 
all  dirt  and  mortar  stains  at  completion. 


TERRA    COTTA. 

Quality.  33.  All  the  terra  cotta  letters  and  border  around 

same,  on  east  and  west  walls,  to  be  hard  burned, 
best  quality  red,  even  in  color,  and  of  designs  and 
dimensions  shown,  free  from  "flashing"  or  warp- 
ing. 

Moulds.  34.  xhe  letters  shall  be  first  modeled  and  a 

plaster  mould  made,  and  from  the  mould  the  letters 
shall  be  pressed. 

Fitting.  3^.  After  terra  cotta  has  been  burned  it  shall 

be  laid  out  and  carefully  fitted  and  shaded  and 
trimmed  if  necessary,  after  which  each  piece  shall  be 
lettered  to  correspond  with  a  setting  plan  which 
shall  accompany  the  delivery  of  all  terra  cotta.  The 
details  for  the  terra  cotta  will  be  found  on  sheet  No. 
ii. 

HOW  Set.  36.  All  terra  cotta  to  be  set  in  putty,  colored 

to  match,  and  properly  bonded  to  the  brick  backing. 
The  bricklayers  shall  set  all  terra  cotta. 

COPPER     WORK. 

Down-Spouts.  37.  Four  io-inch  square  down-pipes,  i6-ounce 
copper,  to  lead  water  from  roof  and  connect  same 
with  sewer,  shall  be  furnished  in  place.  Each  down- 
pipe  shall  have  square  copper  head  of  2O-ounce 
copper,  and  moulded  copper  bands  of  double  thick- 
ness of  i6-ounce  copper  placed  not  more  than  4  feet 
apart,  and  secured  with  3-inch  copper  holdfasts, 
with  rosette  heads. 

Gutters,  etc.  38.  Gutters  shall  be  formed  with  roofing  tin 

of  form  and  size  shown  on  drawings  for  same,  and 
constitute  a  part  of  the  roof-covering,  and  graded  so 
as  to  carry  the  water  from  the  center  to  the  four 
corners  of  the  building  and  open  into  the  copper 
down-spouts.  Tin  gutters  shall  be  carefully  flashed 
and  counterflashed  into  the  brick  fire-walls,  and 
nailed  to  wood  strips  provided  for  said  flashing,  as 
provided  for  in  clause  No.  44. 

Finialt.  29.  The  copper  finials  for  the  skylights  shall 

be  furnished  and  secured  in  place. 


SPECIFIC ATIOKS   FOB  ENGINE   HOUSE. 


313 


Flashing. 


40.  Copper    drip    strips,    i^    inches    wide,    i    DriP- 
inch  to  project  into  the  mortar  joint,   and   ^  mch  to 

be  exposed  and  bent  to  an  angle  of  30°,  as  shown 
on  detail  sheet  No.  12,  shall  be  furnished  the  brick- 
layers on  the  scaffold. 

TIN. 

41.  The   roof   shall   be    covered  with  roofing 
plates,    standing    seam,    with    joints    well     tacked, 
anchored   and   soldered,   using  rosJn  as    a   flux,  and 
8-pound  soldering  coppers,  and  tin  well  and  closely 
cleated  to  roof. 

42.  The  roofing  plate  used  shall  be  Scott's  IX   Tin  Plate. 
extra  coated   American  roofing  tin  plate,   and  must 

bear  a  coating  of  not  less  than  36  pounds  to  the  box, 
and  must  be  fully  guaranteed,  with  the  maker's 
name  stamped  in  each  sheet,  and  each  sheet  must 
be  coated  in  perfect  uniformity  and  free  from 
"wasters." 

43.  The  gutters  shall  be  lined  with  Scott's  IX   Gutters  and 
roofing  t^n,    flat  seam,    and    shall    conform    to    the 

gutter  plan  as  shown  on  sheet  No.  8,  and  shall  be 
carefully  flashed  against  the  brick  fire-walls,  and  be 
firmly  nailed  to  the  wood  flashing  strips,  after  which 
all  of  this  gutter  flashing  must  be  well  and  carefully 
counterflashed. 

44.  The   wood  flashing  strips   shall    be    built 
into    the  brick    fire-walls    8  inches  above   the   wall 
edge  of  gutter  at  center  of  roof  and  24  inches  above 
at  each  of  the  four  corners. 

45.  The    flashing   around    the    skylights  shall 
extend  against  and   8    inches  up  the  wood  skylight 
frame,   and  shall  be   finished    before    the  carpenter 
lays  the  base. 

46.  Tin   shall   be   painted,   before  being  laid, 
with  two  coats    of    the    best    quality   of  iron  oxide, 
ground   in  pure  linseed    oil,  on   the   under  side,   and 
must  be  perfectly  dry  before  laying  ;   and  that  part 
of  the  roof  covered  with  tin  shall  have  two  layers  of 
heavy    straw    building    paper    laid     over    sheathing 
boards    before    putting    down    the    said    tin.     Each 
layer  of    paper    to  overlap    and  be   fastened   down 
smooth  and  flat,  and  to  be  kept  free  from  moisture. 
(See  clause  No.  51.) 

LUMBER. 

47.  All  the  lumber  used  in  the  construction  of 
the  building  shall  be  graded  as  follows: 


Sk 


ashing. 


1*  Jnd 


314 


COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 


Carpenter 
Work. 


Purlins — 4-inch  by  lo-inch,  yellow  pine,  long 
leaf,  surfaced  three  sides  and  stub  moulded. 

Lower  Roof  Sheathing — i^  inches  by  4  inches, 
tongued,  grooved  and  beaded  on  under  side,  "B" 
select,  surfaced  one  side. 

Upper  Roof  Sheathing — 7/%  inch  by  8  to  10 
or  12  inches  No.  I  ship  lap,  surfaced  one  side. 

Skylight  Frame — Posts  and  plates,  5^  in.  x  5^  in.  yellow 

pine  No.  1. 

Rafters,  4  in.  x  4  in.  yellow  pine  No.  1. 
Nailing  girths,  2  in.  x  6  in.  white  pine  No.  1. 
Outside  casing,  %  in.   "B"  select. 

"        base,  l}^  in.  "B"  select. 
Inside  casing,  %  in.  "B"  select. 

"      lining,  %  in.  x  4  in.  beaded   white 

pine,  "C"  select. 
Plinth  and  base  blocks,  lj^  in.  "B"  select. 


Flashing  str 


ps — 2  in.  x  4  in.,  No.  1  white  pine. 


1st  gallery  floor  girders. — 3  in.  x  8  in.  and  2  in.  x  6  in.  No.  1 
long  California  yellow  pine,  surfaced  three  sides. 

1st  gallery  floor.— 1}£  in.  x  3  in.,  first  and  second  yellow 

pine,  tongued  and  grooved.* 
Mill  Work.    Tread  board— 2  in.  x  12  in.  white  oak. 

Window  frames — "B"  select. 

Sash — "A"  select. 

Doors— "B"  select. 
Quality.  ^     ^11  iumber  must  stand  strictly  on  grade, 

kiln  dried,  free  from  large  loose  knots,  sap,  shakes, 

rot,    stain    or    any    other    defects    foreign    to    their 

respective  grades. 

CARPENTER  WORK. 

Roof>  49.      The  roof  shall  be  covered  with  two  courses 

of  sheathing.  The  lower  sheathing  shall  be  white 
pine,  tongued,  grooved  and  beaded,  and  shall  be 
i y?,  inches  thick  by  4  inches  wide;  under  side 
dressed  and  smoothed  at  the  bench  to  a  perfect 
smooth  surface,  and  fastened  to  place  and  left  free 
from  hammer-marks  or  other  defects.  Upper 
sheathing  shall  be  -|-  inch  by  8,  10  or  12  inches  wide, 
No.  i  ship  lap,  laid  diagonally,  and  nailed  to  the 
lower  sheathing.  Care  must  be  taken  that  nails 
shall  not  go  through  the  lower  sheathing;  the  nailing 
to  be  in  the  purlins. 

50.  All  purlins  shall  be  4  inch  by  10  inch  long 
leaf  yellow  pine,  surfaced  three  sides,  stub  moulded, 
dry,  sound  and  straight  grained.  They  shall  be 
spaced  on  centers,  as  shown  on  detail  sheets  Nos. 
1 8  and  9,  and  secured  to  upper  cord  of  truss  by 
angles  and  bolts,  as  detailed. 

*  There  is  no  floor  proper  in  the  building — only  a  narrow  gallery 
around  the  sides.  AUTHOR. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOE   ENGINE    HOUSE.  315 

51.  Cover  the  entire  roof  with  two   (2)  layers 
of  heavy  straw  building  paper,  laid  over  the  ship  lap 
sheathing  before  putting  down  the  tin.      Each  layer 
of   paper  to  overlap  and  be  fastened  down   smooth 
and  flat,   and  to  be  kept  free  from  moisture.      This 
work  shall  be  performed  by  the  carpenter,  tinder  the 
direction  of  the  tinner,  and  laid  in  such  sections  only 
as  required  to  keep  in  advance  of  the  tinners.      The 
upper  sheathing,   paper  and  tin  shall  be  laid  as  fast 
as  the  lower  sheathing  is  nailed  in  place,  so  as  to 
protect  the  ceiling  at  all  times  from  the  weather. 

52.  Skylights   shall  be   three   (3)   in   number.    Skylights. 
and  framed  in  accordance  with  details  for  same,  as 
shown  on  sheet  No.  16  (this  sheet  shows  details  for 

the  two  end  lights  only ;  the  center  light  shall  be  of 
same  construction,  but  of  sufficient  length  to  reach 
the  distance  of  two  truss  centers,  as  per  longitudinal 
elevation  and  roof  plan).  The  principal  posts  shall 
be  of  55^  inch  by  55^  inch  yellow  pine,  and  shall  be 
fastened  to  purlins  with  wrought  iron  anchor  straps 
firmly  bolted  to  both  purlins  and  posts.  The  upper 
end  of  all  posts  shall  be  tenoned. 

53.  Wall  plates  shall  be  5^  inch  by  5^  inch 
yellow   pine,    and    mortised  to   fit  the   post   tenons, 
and   all   fastened   together   with   strap   iron   anchors 
and  bolts. 

54.  The  hip  rafters  shall  be  made  of  4  inch  by 
4  inch  yellow  pine  and  dressed  four  (4)    sides,  and 
shall   be   backed   same   as  for  wood  sheathing,  and 
upon   the   top   of    plates    between    heels    of    rafters 
spike  a  triangular  strip  of  wood   secured   rigidlv  to 
the  plate  to  receive  the  thrust  of   the    skylight   bars. 
The    center   cage   shall    have  the    necessary    rafters 
shown  on  sheet  No.   8,  and  be  firmly  bolted  at  apex 
through  a  ridge  piece  of  2  inch  yellow  pine,  top  edge 
of  ridge  beveled. 

55.  Nailing  girths  shall  be  2   inch  by  6  inch 
white    pine,    No.    i,    and   be   firmly   spiked   to   the 
framing. 

56.  The  outside  shall  be  cased  up  with  £  inch 
"B"   select,  to  form  the  finish  above  the  base.     A 
baseboard  of  il/2  inches  thick,    "B"   select,  beveled 
on  top  edge,  shall  run  around  the  entire  frame  and 
be  firmly  nailed  to  the  casing.     See  clause  No.  45. 

57.  The  inside  shall  be  trimmed  by   casing  up 
the  posts  with  7/§  inch  thick   fc'B"   select,  fluted  and 
nailing  on   plinth  and  base   blocks   as   shown.      The 
inside  below  the  window  stool  shall  be  ceiled  with 


316 


COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 


Ceiling. 


Gallery 
Floor. 


Centers, 
Templets, 
etc. 


Frames. 


Window 
Frames. 


%  inch  x  4  inch  beaded  "B"  ceiling,  nailed  on  diag- 
onally, with  the  nails  countersunk  and  finished  at  the 
bottom  with  a  2-inch  band  mould. 

58.  (For  specifications  of   skylight  roof,   see 
clause  No.  112.) 

59.  The  roof  ceiling  shall  be  finished  by  run- 
ning a  mould   along  the  truss   and  purlins,  forming 
the  different  panels,  as  per  detail  sheet  No.  13. 

60.  The  floor  of  lower  gallery  shall  be  made 
of  i^  inch  by  3  inch  tongued  and  grooved  first  and 
second  yellow  pine  in  continuous  lengths.      It  shall 
be  blind  nailed  to  girders  and  the  nailing  joist. 

61.  The  nailing  joist  shall  be  2  inch  by  6  inch 
No.    i    long   leaf   yellow  pine,    and    in    continuous 
lengths  from  bracket  to  bracket  and  bolted  to  chan- 
nel bar. 

62.  The  floor  girders  shall  be  3  inch  by  8  inch 
No.  i  long  leaf  yellow  pine,   surfaced  three  sides, 
notched    on    brackets.     All    joints    shall    rest    on 
brackets. 

63.  The   carpenters    shall    furnish   all    centers 
and  templets,  and  shall  put  up  and  take  down  same. 
The  centers  and  templets  shall  be  made  in  a  proper 
manner,  strong  and  well  braced. 

64.  The   carpenter  shall   set  all   frames,    and 
verify  their  plumb  after  the  brick  arches  are  turned. 

MILL  WORK. 

65.  Window  frames  below   the  traveler  shall 
be  solid  frames  for  top  and  bottom  pivoted  sash,  and 
shall  be  made  of  form  and  dimensions  called  for  by 
the  drawings.      The  lumber  used  in  their  construction 
shall  be  clear,  dry,  and  sound  Wisconsin  white  pine, 
"B"    select,    free   from   knots  or  sap.     Faces  of  all 
frames  shall  be  moulded  as  per  detail. 

66.  All  frames  shall  be  given  a  heavy  coat  of 
paint  all  around,  including  back  of  jambs,  and  shall 
be  set  perfectly  plumb ;   and  the  sill  shall  rest  on  a 
bed  of  cement  mortar,  ^   inch  higher  on  the  inside, 
so  as  to  make  a  water  tight  joint.      Casings,   mul- 
lions,  transoms,  etc.,  shall  be  moulded  as  shown  on 
details.     The    frames    shall    be    put   together    in    a 
strong   manner,   well    and    closely   nailed,    and    the 
stop-beads    fastened    with     i^-inch    blued    round- 
headed  screws.     All  the  lumber  in  frames  shall  be 


Wisconsin 
specified. 


white     pine,     "B"     select,    as    above 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOE  ENGINE    HOUSE.  317 

67.  The  frames  shall  be  provided  with  moulded 
stool,     terminating    with     mould      against    plaster. 
Mullions   and  jambs   shall   be   cut   down  square  on 
stone  seats. 

68.  Stiles,  heads,   mullions  and  transoms  shall 
be  solid.     All  circular  portions  of  frames  shall  be 
worked    in   the   solid   and   put   together  with    white 
lead,   so  as  to  break  joints  throughout,    and   firmly 
spiked..    A    2   inch   by  4   inch  bond  strip   shall  be 
spiked  to  all  frames   (except  the  two  door  and  the 
two    large   window   frames),   extending  from  sill  to 
spring  of  arch  for  anchoring  same  to  brick  backing. 
The  heads  of  frames  shall  have  wood  blocks  of  2 
inch  by  4  inch  by  8  inche  nailed  to  same  and  spaced 
a  distance  of  18  inches  on  centers. 

69.  The  two  door  and  window  frames  above 
mentioned   shall   be    anchored  to  the  brick  backing 
with  wood  blocks  of  bone  dry  white  pine  4  inch  by 
12   inch   by    12    inch,   built   in  the  brick  work,   and 
spaced    as    shown    on    detail    sheet    No.    n.     The 
frames   shall   be  bolted   to  same  with  ^   inch  by  8 
inch  lag  screws.     The  frames  shall  fit  in  a  recess  of 
one  inch  in  the  brick  work. 

70.  Inside  mould  and  stools  will  not  be  nailed 
in  place  until  plastering  is  perfectly  dry. 

71.  Two   iron  dowels   shall   be  placed  in   the 
bottom    of   each    jamb    and  mullion.     The    dowels 
shall  be  of  i-inch  round  wrought  iron,  and  sunk  i^ 
inches  in  stone  sill. 

72.  All    frames    above    the    traveler    shall    be 
solid  frames  for  side   pivoted   sash    and  for  1 3-inch 
walls,  and  shall  be  made  of  "B"  select. 

73.  All  window    sashes  shall  be  of  the  form 
and  dimensions  called    for  by  the   drawings.      The 
lumber  used  in  their  construction  shall  be  clear,  dry 
and  sound  Wisconsin  white  pine  ("A"  select),  free 
from  knots  or  sap. 

74.  All  sash  shall  be  moulded  and  rebated  2^ 
inches    thick,     and    divided    into    lights    as    shown. 
Each  sash  shall  be  neatly  fitted   and  properly  hung 
with  Wollensak's  plain  bronze  sash  centers,  No.  144, 
and  shall  be  secured    with  bronze  cupboard  turns, 
and  provided  with  casement  rods  or  shutter  holders. 
No.  8020,  p.  1876,  "Simmons." 

75.  All  transom  sash  that  are    fixed    shall  be 
closely  fitted  and  secured  in   place   with    heavy  coat 
of  white  lead    in  the  stop    joints,  so    that  all   joints 
shall  be  water  tight. 


318  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

76.  Skylight    sash  shall  be    2^   inches  thick, 
and  divided  as  shown  on  sheet  No.    16,   center  piv- 
oted and  made  water  tight. 

77.  The  door  frames  at  each  end  of  the  build- 
ing shall  have  rebated  solid  plank    frames,   beaded 
and  moulded  on  outer  face  to  match  window  frames. 
They  shall  be  built  in  same  manner  as  specified  for 
window    frames,    using    "B"    select,    and    shall  be 
secured  to  brick  work  in  the  same  manner  as  speci- 
fied for  other  frames.      The    frame  for    the  double 
door,  south  end,  shall  be  rebated  for  2^  inch  doors, 
and  shall  have  a  transom  bar  3^  inches  thick.      The 
single  door  at  north  end  shall  be  made  without  tran- 
soms and  shall  have  i^   inch  rebate. 

Doors.  ^3<     The  doors  at  the  south  end  shall  be  double, 

and  each  door  shall  be  hung  with  four  6  inch  by  6 
inch  real  bronze  butts,  rebated  at  center  joint  and 
beaded. 

79.  The  doors  shall    be    2^   inches  thick  and 
made  of  dry  "B"  select,  with  stationary  sash  divided 
in  lights  as  shown ;   lower  portions  of  the  doors  shall 
be  paneled  and  moulded   as  shown  by  detail    sheet 
No.  13;   the  panels  shall  be  made  of  tongued   and 
grooved  7/%  inch  "B"  select,  2  inches  wide,  with  all 
joints  beaded  and  driven  up  in  white  lead. 

80.  The  S1ngle  door  in  the  north    end  shall  be 
made  of  "B"  select,  i^  inches  thick.      It  shall  have 
stationary  sash  panels,  and  be  built  as  specified  for 
south  door. 

81.  Doors  shall  be  secured  with  mortise  locks, 
rebated  for  double  doors,   bronze  knobs,   plates  and 
trimmings,  and  flush  spring  bolts,  top  and  bottom  of 
real  bronze. 

82.  The  sash  in    all  doors    and   transoms   for 
same    shall    be    as    specified    for  the   window  sash, 
and  the  transom    sash  pivoted    and  hung    with  the 
same  kind  and  quality  of  hardware. 

83.  The  large  sliding  doors  shall  be  made  of 
the  same  quality  of  lumber  as  specified  for  ;he  small 
doors,  and  in  two  thicknesses  of  i  ^  inches  each,  mak- 
ing a  total  of  3^4  inches,  framed  separately,  and  put 
together   with    white    lead,    and   firmly   screwed  up 
with  3  inch    screws,    countersunk ;     they  shall    have 
tenoned  stiles,  rails  and  muntin's ;   all  tenons  shall  be 
double  pinned  with  y2  inch   white   oak  pins,  and  all 
shall  be  bolted  together  with  iron  rods,  as  shown  by 
dot  lines  on  detail  sheet  No.    14.     The  panels  shall 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR   ENGINE   HOUSE. 


319 


be  made  of  tongued  and  grooved  "B"  select,  2  inches 
wide  and  beaded  both  sides. 

84.  Small   swing   doors   shall   be   framed  into 
each  large  door,  making  four  in  all.      They  shall  be 
hung    with    three   (3)   4   inch  by  4  inch  real  bronze 
butts,  and  fitted  with  Yale  mortise  locks,  with  keys 
to  pass. 

85.  Each  pair   of   the  large  sliding  doors  shall 
have   wrought  iron   drop   bars,  made  of  2  inch  x  ^ 
inch  iron,  bolted  at  one  end  and  made  to  drop  into 
a  hook  at  the  other ;  with  a  turned  iron  hand  lift  as 
shown  on  detail  sheet  No.  14. 

86.  An  oak  brace  frame  for  each  door  opening, 
having  form,    size    and    radius  as   shown  on   detail 
sheet  No.  14,  rounded  on  each  edge,  shall  be  secured 
to  the  brick  work  with  expansion  bolts,  in  the  most 
substantial  manner,  and  framed   into  a  girder  made 
of  i^  inch  by  7^  inch  oak,    of  length  equal  to  the 
run  of  both  doors,  and  firmly  bolted  to  the  wall  with 
bracketed  bolts,  as  detailed.      All  to  be  put  in  posi- 
tion before  plastering,  in  the  most  careful  and  sub- 
stantial manner. 


Oak  Brace 
Frame  for 
Large 
Doors. 


HARDWARE. 


for  hard-   Windows. 


87.  The   numbers  and  pages  given 
ware  refer  to  Simmons'  Catalogue. 

88.  All  pivoted  windows   shall   be   hung  with 
Wollensak's    plain   bronze   sash   centers,   No.    144, 
and  secured  with  plain   bronze   cupboard  turns,  No. 
8535,  page  1650,    and    real   bronze    casement  stays, 
No.  8020,   page    1876.      Pivoted   transoms   shall  be 
fitted  with  similar  sash   centers,    and   with  Payson's 
solid  grip  transom   lifts,    real   bronze,    ^    inch  by  6 
feet,  No.  0336. 

.  89.      All  doors,  except  large  sliding  doors,  shall    Doors, 
be  hung  with   butts,    and    fitted   with   Yale   mortise 
locks  and  keys  to  pass,  and  top  and  bottom  bolts  for 
the  double  doors. 

90.  The    two    double     doors     in     south     end 
shall  each  be  hung  with  four   6-inch   by  6-inch  real 
bronze  butts,  and   fitted   with   rebated  mortise  Yale 
lock,  plain  bronze,  for  2^    inch   door,   with  keys  to 
pass,  and  real  bronze   extension    flush    bolts,    plain, 
same  as  Yale  pattern  No.  788E.,  B.  34,  page  1675. 

91.  The  single  door  in  north  end  shall  be  hung 
with  four  6-inch  by  6-inch  real  plain   bronze   butts, 
and  fitted  with  lock  for  i^  inch  door  of  same  kind 
as  specified  for  double  door. 


320  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

92.  The  four  small  swing  doors  that  are  built 
in  the  large  sliding  doors  shall  each  be  hung  with 
three  (3)  4  inch  by  4  inch  real  plain  bronze  butts, 
and  fitted  with  lock  as  specified  for  the  north  door. 

Finish.  93.  The  finish  of  all  hardware  shall  be  real 

plain  bronze  throughout,  and  all  locks  shall  be  Yale, 
with  keys  to  pass. 

iron  Work  94.  Construct  for  the  two  sets  of  large  sliding 

Doors. ing  doors  a  hanger  and  track  as  per  detail  sheet  No.  14. 
The  hanger  shall  be  made  of  wrought  iron  n  inches 
wide  and  %  inch  thick,  bent  to  correspond  with 
profile  shown,  and  fitted  with  a  steel  track-wheel, 
turned  with  a  groove,  and  necessary  bearings.  The 
hanger  shall  be  firmly  bolted  to  the  doors  with 
heavy  screw-bolts,  as  shown. 

95.  The  track  for  above  hanger  shall  be  made 
of    steel    Z    bars,   4.72    pounds  per  foot  (Carnegie 
catalogue  No.  295),  with  the  short  flange  ground  to 
fit  groove    in    wheel,    and    the    large    flange    firmjy 
bolted  to  oak  girder.     The   track   shall   be  equal  to 
the  run  of  both  doors.     These  doors  must  be  made 
to  run  easy  and  work  perfectly. 

PLASTER. 

96.  The   side   and   end   walls  from   the   stone 
foundation  to  the  top  of  the  brick  walls  in  the  inside 
of  the  building,  including  window-jambs  and  stools, 
shall  be  plastered  with  Acme  plaster,   and  given  a 
granulated  finish  with  white  sand,  applied  according 
to  the   directions    of    agent.      All   walls    shall    have 
straight,    true    surfaces,    angles    plumb,   jambs  and 
stools  plastered.      Walls  shall  be   laid  off  to  repre- 
sent   stone    courses,    as    directed.     Joints    shall    be 
marked  off  when  plaster  is  green,    and   shall   be  % 
inch  throughout,  and  cut  with  clean  edges,  the  joints 
to  continue  around  window-jambs  and  to  be  struck 
to  represent  arch  stones  over  openings. 

97.  A    plaster    base    and   wainscot   moulding 
shall  be  made  around  the  building  of  height  shown, 
base  12  inches  by  i  inch,  chamfered  on   top;    wain- 
scot cap,  5  inches  by    i   inch,    moulded  and   cham- 
fered top  and  bottom,  as  shown  on  sheets  Nos.  3  and  4. 

PAINTING    AND    GLAZING. 

98.  The  contractor  shall  furnish   all   material 
and  perform  all  labor  necessary  for  the  proper  paint- 
ing of  the  building.     All    sap,    knots,    etc.,   of    the 
wood-work  shall    be    covered    with    a    good  coat  of 
strong  shellac  before  priming. 


SPECIFICATIONS  FOE  ENGINE   HOUSE. 


321 


GTina"dd 
iron. 


inside 


99.  All    wood-work    to    be    painted    shall    be    Priming. 
primed    with   French   ochre   and  boiled  linseed  oil, 

and  all  iron-work  shall  be  primed  with  oxide  of  iron 
and  boiled  linseed  oil.  All  holes  and  cracks  in  the 
wood-work  shall  be  puttied  and  stopped  on  the 
priming  coat,  and  again  before  applying  the  last 
finishing  coat. 

100.  All  outside  wood-work,  usually  painted, 
shall  have  four  (4)  coats  of  pure  white  lead,  ground 
in  linseed   oil,    and   mixed  with  pure  boiled  linseed 
oil.     The  exterior  of  all  frames,   doors,   sashes,  sky- 
lights,   etc.,    shall    have    the    last    two  (2)  coats  in 
colors,  as  directed  by  the  water  commissioner. 

101.  All  tin    and   galvanized   iron  shall  have, 
after    completion,  three   (3)   coats  of  Dixon's  Silica 
Graphite  paint,  thinned  with  pure  boiled  linseed  oil  ; 
each  coat  shall  be   allowed  to  dry  thoroughly  before 
the  next  is  applied.     Each  coat  of  paint  on  the  tin 
roof   must  be  of  a  different  shade,  and   each  shade 
shall  be  approved  by  the  water  commissioner. 

102.  All  of    the  inside  wood-work,   including 
sash,  doors   and  frames,  etc.,  shall  be   painted  four 
(4)    coats   of  pure   white   lead,    ground   in  oil,    and 
mixed    with    pure    boiled    linseed    oil,    brushed    on 
smooth  *and  even,  and   grained  a  perfect  oak  on  the 
last  coat,  after  which  it  shall  receive  a  heavy  coat  of 
coach    varnish,    evenly    flowed    on    and    left    in  the 
gloss. 

103.  The  ceiling,  including  purlins,  skylights, 
etc.,  shall  be  painted  with  four  (4)  coats  of  paint  of 
quality    specified   above,    and   of  such   colors  as  the 
water     commissioner    may    direct,    and    each    suc- 
ceeding coat   must  be   of  a  different  shade,    as  per 
direction  of  the  water  commissioner. 

104.  The  first  gallery  floor  shall  receive  four   Wood  Floor- 
(4)  coats   of  pure  boiled   linseed    oil,  and   the  floor 

girders  shall  be  painted  to  match  the  iron  channel 
bar  and  brackets. 

105.  All   iron   and   steelwork  before  leaving  iron  work. 
the  shop  shall  be   thoroughly   cleaned  from  all  loose 

scale   and   rust,   and   after   inspection  be   given  one 
good  priming  coating  of  pure,  raw  linseed  oil  and  iron 
oxide,  well  worked  into  all  joints  and   open  spaces. 
1  06.     In   riveted  work  the  surfaces  coming  in 
contact  shall  be  painted  before  being  riveted  together. 
Bottoms  of  bed-plates,  bearing-plates,  and  any  parts 
which  are  not  accessible  for  painting  after  erection, 
shall  have  two  coats  of  paint. 
21 


322 


COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 


Workman- 
ship. 


Glazing. 


Manufacture. 


Bars. 


Gutters. 


107.  After   the   structure   is    erected    the   iron 
work,   both   wrought  and    cast,  shall   be   thoroughly 
and  evenly  painted   with   three    additional   coats  of 
paint,  of  quality  specified  for  the  wood-work,  mixed 
with  strictly  pure   linseed  oil,  and   each   succeeding 
coat  shall  be   of  a  different   shade,    and  each  shade 
must   be     determined    and   approved    by   the   water 
commissioner. 

108.  The  painter  must  see  that  all  wood-work 
is  perfectly   clean   before   priming  or   painting,   and 
putty  up  all  nail  heads  and  other  defects,  and  sand- 
paper smooth  and  perfectly  prepare  all  wood  before 
applying  a  second  coat.     The  whole  of  the  painting 
work   throughout  to  be   done   in  the  best   and  most 
workmanlike  manner,  and  all  paint  and  varnish  spots 
must  be  cleaned  off  the  glass,  walls  and  galleries  at 
the  completion  of  the  work,    and  all  left  clean  and 
perfect,  without  exception. 

109.  All  paint  must  be  mixed  at  the  building, 
and  under  the  direction    of   the  water  commissioner, 
except  the  priming  for  the  iron  work. 

no.  All  of  the  glass  throughout  shall  be 
American,  double  thick,  perfectly  free  from  any 
blemish,  flaw  or  defect.  All  shall  be  set  in  oil 
putty,  carefully  tacked  with  tin  glazing  tacks,  and 
back  puttied. 

in.  All  glass  to  be  cleaned  after  glazing,  and 
again  after  painting  sash. 

SKYLIGHT    ROOFS. 

112.  The  skylight  roofs  used  on  this  building 
shall  be  of  the  Vaile  &  Young  patent,   and  shall  be 
adapted  to   the   wood   cage  construction,  as  detailed 
on  sheet  No.    16. 

113.  The   bars   shall    be    of   galvanized    iron, 
except  the  parts  exposed  to  the  weather,  which  shall 
be  of   2O-ounce   copper,   and  the  said  bars  must  be 
rigid  enough  to  support  the  glass  without  deflection. 
The  apex  shall  not  be  finished  to   a  point,  but  shall 
be  fitted  to  the  square  of  the  size  of  the  copper  finial, 
and  said  finial   shall   fit   over  the  apex  and  cover  all 
joints.     This  finial  shall   be  made   of   iS-ounce  cop- 
per and  furnished  with  the  skylights. 

114.  All  bars   not  resting  on  rafters  shall  be 
wrought  iron,  encased  with  galvanized  iron. 

115.  All  skylights  shall  have  hanging  gutters 
of  2O-ounce  copper,  with  a  fall  to  one   corner,  and 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOK  ENGINE   HOUSE.  323 

from  this  corner  the  water  shall  bev  conveyed  to  the 
main  roof  by  means  of  a  copper  down-spout,  which 
shall  be  furnished  with  the  skylight. 

116.  All  glass  used  in  the  skylights  shall  be  3/&    Glass> 
inch  thick  and  ribbed.     It  shall  be  furnished  by  the 
manufacturers  of  the   skylights,   and  it  shall  be  set 
with  special   care,    and  under  rigid  inspection,  and 
shall  be  of  a  continuous  length. 

ROOF     TRUSSES. 

117.  The    castings    shall    be    made    from    a   Cast  iron, 
superior  quality  of  iron,  tough  and  of  even  grain,  and 

must  conform  in  shape  and  dimensions  to  the  draw- 
ings. Castings  must  be  clean  and  perfect,  without 
flaw  or  sand  holes  or  defects  of  any  kind. 

118.  With  the  exception  of  the  bearing  plates,    Soft  Steel, 
the  roof  trussing  shall  be  of  soft  steel  throughout. 

119.  The  steel   must  be   uniform  in  character. 
The  finished  parts  must  be  free  from  cracks  on  the 
faces  or  corners,  and   have  a   clean,    smooth  finish. 
No  work  shall   be  put  upon  any  steel  at  or  near  the 
blue  temperature,    or  between  that  of  boiling  water 
and  of  ignition  of  hardwood  saw-dust. 

1 20.  All   tests  shall  be   made  by   samples  cut 
from  the  finished  material  after  rolling.     All  broken 
samples  must  show  uniform  fine  grain  fractures  of  a 
blue,  steel  grey  color,  entirely  free  from  a  fiery  luster  or 
blackish    cast.     Soft    steel    shall    have    an    ultimate 
strength  of  54,000  to  62,000  pounds  per  square  inch; 
an    elastic    limit    not    less    than    30,000  pounds  per 
square  inch,  and   a   minimum  elongation  of  25  per 
cent,  in  8  inches. 

Before  or  after  heating  to  a  light  yellow  heat 
and  quenching  in  cold  water,  this  steel  must  stand 
bending  180  degrees  to  a  curve,  whose  inner  radius 
is  equal  to  the  thickness  of  the  sample,  without  sign 
of  fracture. 

121.  Specimen  pieces  of  a  size  and  form  suit- 
able for   the   testing  machine  shall  be  cut  from  any 
plate,   angle  or    bar,  when  directed  by  the  water 
commissioner. 

122.  If    any    specimen   shall    not   conform    to 
above   requirements,    all   the   material   of  the   same 
form  and  manufacture  as  the  piece  from  which  this 
specimen  was  taken  will  be  rejected. 

123.  All  rivets  shall  be  made  of  soft  steel,  and 
the  steel   for  rivets    must,  under  the   above  bending 


324 


COMPLETE   SPECIFICATIONS. 


test,  stand  closing  solidly  together  without  sign  of 
fracture. 

Specimen  Bars.  124.  For  all  material  taken  by  the  water 
commissioner  for  testing  there  will  be  added  to  the 
final  estimate  the  following  prices,  viz. : 

For  all  steel,  the  sum  of  five  cents  per  pound. 
For  all  cast   iron,  the   sum  of   three   cents  per 
pound. 

All  broken   material  to  belong   to  the   party  of 
the  second  part. 

Finish.  125.      The  workmanship  and  finish  throughout 

shall  be  thorough  and  of  the  very  best,  and  any  piece 
or  part,  however  perfect  it  may  be  in  other  respects, 
if  defective  in  workmanship,  will  be  rejected. 

Planed.  •       126.     That  part  of  the  bed  plate  on  which  rests 

the  three  eighth  inch  bottom  plate  of  the  truss  shall 
be  planed  or  faced  to  a  true  plane  surface.  All 
abutting  joints  in  top  and  lower  chord  shall  be 
planed  or  faced. 

Punching.  127.     In  punching  rivet  holes,  the  diameter  of 

the  die  shall  in  no  case  exceed  the  diameter  of  the 
punch  more  than  one  sixteenth  inch,  and  all  holes 
must  be  clean  cut,  without  torn  or  ragged  edges. 

Rivet  Holes.  ^g,     ^11     rivet    holes  shall    be  so    accurately 

spaced  and  drilled  or  punched  that  when  the  several 
parts  are  assembled  a  rivet  one-sixteenth  inch  less  in 
diameter  than  the  hole  can  be  entered  hot  into  any 
hole  without  straining  the  iron  by  drifting.  Occa- 
sional variations  shall  be  corrected  by  reaming. 

Rivet  Work.  12<j.     Whenever   possible,    all  rivets    must  be 

machine  driven.  The  rivels,  when  driven,  shall 
completely  fill  the  holes.  The  rivet  heads  shall  be 
round  and  of  a  uniform  size  throughout  the  work. 
They  shall  be  full  and  neatly  made,  and  be  concen- 
tric with  the  rivet  holes,  and  thoroughly  pinch  the 
connected  pieces  together.  The  several  pieces  form- 
ing one  built  member  must  fit  closely  together,  and 
when  riveted  shall  be  free  from  twists,  bends  or 
open  joints.  The  angle  irons  forming  the  top  chord 
must  be  bent  at  the  different  panel  points  to  the 
proper  angle.  The  lower  chord  shall  have  sufficient 
camber  to  allow  for  the  deflection  of  the  loaded 
truss. 

130.  All  bolts  and  nuts  to  be  made  from  the 
best  quality  of  soft  steel.  The  nuts  to  be  hexagonal 
and  the  heads  square.  Heads,  nuts  and  threads  to 
be  standard  size.  All  bolts  shall  have  a  washer 
under  the  heads  or  nuts,  Where  in  contact  with  wood. 


Bolts  and 

Nuts. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOE  ENGINE   HOUSE.  325 

131.  All  rods  with  screw  ends  shall  be   upset  uPset  Ends- 
at  the  ends  so  that  the  diameter  at  the  bottom  of  the 
threads  shall  be  one  sixteenth  inch  larger  than   any 

part  of  the  body  of  the  bar. 

132.  All   the  angles,  filling   and    splice  plates  Angles,  etc. 
must  fit  at  their  ends  to  the  flange  angles  sufficiently 

close  to  be  sealed,  when  painted,  against  the  admis- 
sion of  water,  but  need  not  be  boat  finished. 

177.     To  support  and  hold  purlins  in  place,  short  Fastening  and 

JJ  •  i        s-  •       11  s  •  Supporting 

pieces  of  angle  iron  3^  inches  by  6  inches  by  %  inch   Purlins. 
shall  be  riveted  to  principals  with  two  24 -inch  rivets, 
and   purlins   shall  be   fastened   to   them   by  24 -inch 
bolts.     The  contractor   shall   furnish  all  bolts,   each 
with  one  cast  iron  washer. 

134.  All  the  bed  plates  under  fixed  and  sliding^d^Piates 
end    must   be   fox-bolted  to  the  masonry  with    i^    chors. 
inch  bolts.     The  contractor  must  furnish  all  bolts, 

drill  all  holes  and  set  bolts  to  place  with  cement. 

IRON  GALLERY,  LADDERS,    ETC. 

135.  The  galleries  shall  consist  of  three  differ- 
ent sections,  as  follows: 

1st.     A  lower  or  first  gallery.     (Sheet  No.  7.) 
2d.     An  upper  or  second  gallery.     (Sheet  No.  7.) 
3d.     A  balcony  gallery.     (Sheet  No.  4.) 
Details  for  above  galleries    will    be    found    on 
Sheet  No.  17. 

136.  The  first   gallery  shall  extend  around  the  First  Gallery 
entire  building  on  a  level  with  grade  (El.  115),  and 

shall  consist  of    brackets,  railing,  chains,  posts,   and 
wood  floor. 

137.  The    wood    floor    shall    be  4  feet  and  2 
inches  wide  and  made  of    i^    inch   thick  by  3  inch 
wide  yellow  pine    flooring,  and  shall  rest  upon  two 
girders  and  one   channel   bar,  and   both  girders  and 
channel  bar  shall  be  supported  by  cast  iron  brackets. 
The  channel  bar  shall  be  6  inches  high,  weighing  9^ 
pounds  per  lineal    foot,  and  to  this  channel  shall  be 
bolted  yellow  pine  nailing  joists   2   inch   by  6  inch ; 
the   bolts   shall   be    ^4    inch,  with   round   head,  nuts 
and    washers,    and    shall    be  spaced   three    to    each 
panel.      The  two  yellow  pine  girders  shall  be  3  inch 
by  8  inch   and   notched   so   as  to   seat  on  the  top  of 
brackets. 

138.  Brackets  shall  be  cast,  according  to  detail, 
showed  on  sheet  No.  17,  and  shall  be  firmly   bolted 
to  the  stone-mason  work  with  i    inch   by  10  inch  ex- 
pansion bolts,  at  top   and   bottom  of  each   bracket. 


326  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

The  stone  walls  must  be  recessed  sufficiently  to  give 
an  even  bearing  for  the  backs  of  all  brackets. 

139.  Railing  shall   be   made  of   gas   pipe  and 
suitable  fittings   connecting   same,    made  in   accord- 
ance with  details.      Top  and  bottom  rails  shall  be  1% 
inch  and   2   inch   gas   pipe;    intermediate    rails,  i^ 
inch  gas  pipe;    principal  posts   2%    inch,  and  inter- 
mediate posts  2  inch  diameter  cast  iron. 

140.  At  the  angle  where  the  stairs  commence 
this  first  gallery  shall  be  constructed,  on  a  radius,  as 
shown  on  gallery  plan,  sheet  No.  7?  to   make  room 
for  said  stairway.      A  round   hole   must  be  made  in 
this  floor  to  suit  stair  column. 

141.  Suitable   chain   fastening   gates    shall   be 
provided    at   all  openings    in    gallery   with    suitable 
hooks,  etc.,  chain  to  be  of  wrought   iron    ^  inch  in 
diameter.     There  shall  be  two   chains  at  each  open- 
ing.    See  sheet  No.  7. 

UondG°aiierC~  H2'  ^he  secon^  gallery  shall  extend  across 

y*  south  end  of  building,  and  terminate  at  one  end 
with  a  spiral  staircase,  and  shall  consist  of  brackets, 
channels,  railings,  post  and  floor.  The  brackets 
shall  be  cast  as  per  detail,  shown  on  sheet  No.  17, 
(scale,  24  inch),  and  fastened  to  brick  work  by  an 
expansion  bolt  at  the  foot  and  a  bearing  plate  at  the 
head.  Upon  these  brackets  shall  rest  a  six  inch 
channel  bar  weighing  9^  Ibs.  per  lineal  foot,  and 
another  bar  of  same  size  and  weight  shall  be  fastened 
to  the  brick  work  by  expansion  bolts.  Upon  these 
two  channels  the  cast  floor  plates  shall  take  their 
bearing.  The  railing,  posts,  etc.,  shall  be  made  the 
same  as  specified  for  the  first  gallery.  For  a  plan 
of  this  second  or  upper  gallery,  refer  to  sheet  No. 
7.  The  floor  plates  shall  each  be  cast  with  three 
ribs;  said  ribs  shall  be  spaced  on  centers,  according 
to  the  length  of  the  floor  plates,  and  shall  be  located, 
one  on  each  extreme  edge  and  one  in  the  center;  all 
3  inches  deep  and  I  inch  thick. 

Stairs>  143.  Winding  stairs  shall  consist  of  cast  iron 

center  column,  treads,  rail  and  newels. 

144.  The  center  column   shall  be  cast  ^  inch 
metal  and  be  7   inches   in   diameter,   terminating  at 
upper  end  with  a  newel,  as  shown  on  sheet  No.  17. 

145.  The  center  column  shall  be  supported  by 
two    12    inch  steel  I   beams,   42    pounds    per    foot, 
located   diagonally   across   one   corner  of  the  stone 
foundation,    with    bolts   and   separators,   and   set  in 
place  before  commencing  the  brick  work.     The  col- 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOK  ENGINE   HOUSE.  327 

umn  shall  have  a  square  iron  flange  on  the  lower 
end  of  i  inch  metal,  and  said  flange  must  be  firmly 
bolted  to  the  steel  I  beams. 

146.  Steps    or    treads    shall    be    cast    without 
risers,  but  shall  have  thimble  height  of  step,  cast  on 
each  step,  with  tread  nosing  continued  around. 

147.  These  thimbles  shall  have  freedom  fig- 
ured on  drawing,  and  the  vacant  space  shall  be  well 
and  thoroughly  calked  with  sulphur. 

148.  Steps  shall  be  cast  of  ^  inch  metal,  dia- 
mond   pattern    tread.     Each    step-thimble,    bracket 
and    flange    shall    be   cast  in  one  piece,   each    step 
being  bolted  to  the   next  at   connections.      The  first 
risers  shall  be   housed  into  the  wood  floor,  if  neces- 
sary. 

149.  Stair  rail  shall   be   made  of   2   inch   gas 
pipe,  bent  to  proper    sweep   and   curve,  terminating 
top   and  bottom   at  newels.     Newels  shall   be   cast 
iron  5/&  inch  metal.      All  shall  be  executed  according 
to  drawings,  each  and    every  portion  put  up,  bolted 
and  secured  in  the  strongest  and  most  workmanlike 
manner,  and  to  the  satisfaction  of  the  water  commis- 
sioner. 

150.  The  third  or  balcony  gallery  shall  be  con-  Balcony  Gal- 
structed  of  wrought  iron   brackets,  made  of   j^  inch 

by  2  inch  metal,  and  fastened  to  the  brick  work  with 
expansion  bolts.  It  shall  be  provided  with  an  oak 
tread  board.  This  tread  board  shall  be  furnished 
by  the  carpenter  and  put  in  place  by  the  gallery 
contractor. 

151.  This  balcony    shall   extend   across  north 
end  of  building,  as  shown  on  section  plan  No.  4. 

152.  Two  wrought  iron  ladders  with  %   inch   Ladders, 
by  2    inch  sides  and  ^    inch  round  rungs,   passing 
through  side  pieces  and  riveted,  shall  be   furnished, 

put  in  place  and  properly  secured.  One  ladder  to 
start  on  the  first  'or  lower  gallery  and  extend  up 
and  through  the  balcony  gallery  as  per  drawings. 
One  ladder  shall  be  located  on  the  exterior  of  the 
building  and  commence  about  10  feet  from  the 
ground  and  extend  upwards  to  and  be  anchored  into 
the  fire-wall  coping,  as  shown  on  elevation  sheet 
No.  i.  The  details  for  these  iron  ladders  will  be 
found  on  sheet  No.  17. 

153.  There  shall  be  cast  and  set  in  place  cast 
iron  door  sills  for  the   doors  in  the  north  and  south 
ends  and  the  two  large  doors  in  each  sids. 


328 


COMPLETE   SPECIFICATIONS. 


Hand  Rail. 


Traveler 

Track. 


154.  Sill   for   the   south  door  shall  be  5  feet  8 
inches  long  and  3  feet  4^   inches  wide,   ^    inches 
thick,  and  cast  in  diamond  pattern,  with  door  saddle 
and  seats  for  wood  frame  drilled  for  ^   inch   expan- 
sion bolts. 

155.  Sill    for    the  north  door  shall  be  3  feet  6 
inches  long  and  3  feet  4%  inches  wide,  cast  same  as 
specified  for  south  door. 

156.  Sills  for  the  large  doors  shall  be  cast  dia- 
mond   pattern,  i  inch  thick,  and  shall  have  a  square 
flange  on  outside  and  inside  edge  as  shown.     These 
sills  shall  be  cast  in  three  separate  sections,  as  shown 
and  figured  in  sheet  No.  17. 

157.  A  hand  rail  made  of   i^    inch   gas    pipe 
shall  be  provided  and  put   in    place    and    continued 
along  both  sides  of  the  building  its  entire    length,  3 
feet  6  inches  above  the    traveler  I  beam.      This  rail- 
ing shall  project  from  the  wall  6  inches,  and  be  firmly 
bracketed  to  the  wall  at  sufficient  intervals  to  insure 
ample    stiffness.     The    ends  shall  be  secured  to  the 
wood  window  frames.     See  sheet  No.  3. 

158.  The  traveler  track  shall  consist  of  an  iron 
I  beam,  8  inches  in  height,  and  weighing  34  pounds 
per  lineal  foot,   Carnegie    catalogue,  No.  8  C,  page 
22,  extending  the  entire  length  of  building  on    each 
side.     It  shall  be  firmly  bolted  to  the  stone  sill  course 
with  y^  inch  expansion  bolts,  and  the  space  between 
the  web  of  beam  and   sandstone    sill    shall  be  filled 
with    hard    burned    brick,   laid  in  the  best  of  cement 
mortar. 

159.  Upon  the  top  flange  of  this  8  inch  I  beam  a 
flat  top  steel  rail,  weighing  52  pounds  per  lineal  yard, 
shall  be  bolted,  extending  the  entire  length    on    both 
sides  of  the  building.     This    rail   must  be  drilled  in 
each  flange,  and  these   flanges    bolted   with  ^   inch 
bolts  into  the  flanges  of  the  I  beam.     The  rail  shall 
be  connected  at  joints  with  fishplates  and  bolts. 

160.  Two  8-inch  I  beams,  weighing  34  pounds 
per  foot,  with  bolts    and    separators,   shall  be  built 
in    brick   work,  as  shown  on   plan    and  specified  in 
clause  No.  31,  and  covered  with  a  ^-inch  iron  plate. 

GENERAL     CLAUSES. 

Finish  161.     All  of  the   materials   and    work    required 

>mpiete.  for  the  £ull  compietion  of  tne  building  herein  speci- 
fied, to  the  entire  satisfaction  of  the  water  commis- 
sioner, shall  be  furnished  and  done  by  the  contractor, 
and  should  anything  not  mentioned  within  this  spec- 


I  Beams  in 
Side  Walls. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOB   ENGINE   HOUSE.  329 

ification  be  necessary  to  fully  complete  the  work, 
the  same  shall  be  furnished  and  done  without  extra 
charge. 

162.  No    masonry   work    of    any     description  Fr°st. 
shall  be  laid  in  freezing  weather,  except  with  special 
permission  of  the  water  commissioner. 

163.  All    unfinished    work    shall    be   properly 
protected  from  injury  by  frost. 

164..  Any  masonry  work  found  damaged  by 
frost  shall  be  taken  down  and  rebuilt  at  the  cost  of 
the  contractor. 

165.  When  the  work  is  completed,  the  build-  Cleaning  up. 
ing,  substructure  and  surrounding  grounds  shall  be 

cleared  of  all  rubbish  caused  by  construction,  and 
left  in  a  neat  and  presentable  condition  for  imme- 
diate use. 

1 66.  Measures  shall  be    taken  by  the  contract-  pubiic  Safety. 
or,  whether  required  by  city  ordinance  or  not,  to  in- 
sure the  safety  of  the  public,  by  such    precautions  of 
fencing,  watching,  lights,  etc.,  as   the   exigencies   of 

the  case  may  call  for. 

167.  The  contractor  shall  furnish,  at  his    own   Erection, 
cost  and  expense,  all  necessary  centering    and    scaf- 
folding, and    remove  same  at  the  completion  of  the 
work. 

1 68.  Due  facilities  must  be  afforded  the  water 
commissioner  for   giving  the  lines,  grades  and  points, 
and  all  stakes  or  marks  given  by  him  must  be    pre- 
served undisturbed. 

169.  The  contractor  shall    keep  on   the   work, 
accessible  at  all  times,   the  plans  furnished   him   by 
the    water    commissioner,  and  a  copy  of  these  spec- 
ifications. 

170.  At  all  times,  when  work  is  in  progress, 
there  shall  be  a  foreman  or   head   workman    on    the 
grounds. 

171.  Necessary  conveniences  shall  be  construct- 
ed for  the  use  of  the  contractor's  employees,  and  dur- 
ing the  progress  of  the    work    herein    specified    the 
contractor    shall  not  use  or  interfere   in  any    manner 
with    the    present  buildings,  pipes  or  appurtenances 
of  the  waterworks. 

172.  The  use  of  the.  railroad  tracks  and  switch- 
es belonging  to    the    waterworks    will   be  permitted 
to  the    contractor  for  the  work  herein  specified   at 
such  times  only  as  will  not  interfere  with  the   deliv- 
ery, switching  and  handling  of  coal  cars. 


330  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

173.  Particular  care  must  be  exercised  in    the 
protection  of  all  finished  work  as  the  building  pro- 
gresses, such  as  exterior  projections,   cut  stone,  iron 
stairs  and  galleries,  etc., which  must  be  fully  protected 
from  injury  or  defacement  during  the  erection  and 
completion  of  the  building. 

174.  The  erection  shall  be  carried  on  in  such 
manner  as  will  in  no  way  interfere  with  the  erection, 
completion  and  operation  of  the  pumping  engines  or 
machinery.      The  extra  cost  of  handling  the  erection 
in  this  manner  must  be  included   in  the  sum  bid  for 
the  work. 

175.  The  directions  of  the  water  commissioner 
as  to  the  disposition  of  building  materials  and    loca- 
tion  of  sheds,    temporary  buildings,   etc.,    must   be 
strictly  observed. 

Examination  176.      Whenever    required  by  the   water    com- 

>f  Workmissionerj  (;he  contractor  shall  furnish  all  facilities 
and  labor  to  make  an  examination  of  any  work,  com- 
plete or  in  progress,  under  this  contract.  If  the 
work  so  examined  is  found  defective  in  any  respect, 
or  not  in  accordance  with  this  contract  and  specifica- 
tions, the  contractor  shall  bear  all  expenses  of  such 
examination  and  of  satisfactory  reconstruction.  If 
the  work  so  examined  is  found  to  be  in  accordance 
with  the  contract  and  specifications,  the  expense  of 
the  examination  and  reconstruction  will  be  estimated 
to  contractor  at  a  fair  price,  to  be  determined  by  the 
water  commissioner.  M.  L.  H. 

171.     General  Specifications  for  Highway  Bridges 
and  Viaducts  of  Iron  and  Steel.    The  following  general 

specifications  for  highway  bridge  work  have  been  prepared  by 
Mr.  G.  Bouscaren,  M.  Am.  Soc.  C.  E.,  who  has  had  a  very 
large  experience  in  structural  designing  of  a  superior  grade  of 
railway  and  highway  bridge  work.  These  specifications  were 
revised  and  reissued  in  1890. 

General  Clauses. 

Plans  &  stress  i.     Structures  shall  be  built  in  accordance  with 

the    general    plans    exhibited    or    furnished    by   the 

engineer  of 

2.  Unless  stress  sheets  and  plans  are  also  fur- 
nished by  the  engineer,  bidders  must  submit  with 
their  proposals,  complete  stress  sheets  for  the  structure 
and  detail  plans  showing  the  form  and  connections 
of  each  typical  member. 


GENERAL  SPECIFICATIONS  FOE  HIGHWAY  BRIDGES.    331 


Material. 


3.  The  stress  sheets  must  show  for  each  mem- 
ber the  total  maximum    stress   or  stresses  caused  by 
the  dead  load,  the  live  load,  the  wind,  and  the  effect 
of   temperature,  separately,  and    the  dimensions  and 
area  of   cross  section  ;   also  the  dead  weight  assumed 
in  the  calculation  which  must  not  be   less   than  the 
actual  weight  of  the  structure  as  built. 

4.  Complete  detail  drawings  must  be  submit- 
ted for  approval  of  the  engineer,  and  work  shall  not 
be  commenced  until   the  stresses  and  details  relating 
thereto  have  been  approved. 

v  A  copy  of  every  approved  stress-sheet  and 
drawing  shall  be  furnished  without  charge  to  the 
engineer  within  ten  days  after  its  approval. 

6.  All    parts    of    the    structure,   excepting  the 
floor  timbers  hereinafter  specified   under  the  head  of 
"floor,"  shall  be  of  iron  or  steel  or  both  combined, 
as  may  be  approved  by  the  engineer.     The  kind  of 
metal  to  be  used  for  each  member,  or  class  of  mem- 
bers, must  be  noted  on  the  stress-sheet.     Cast  iron 
may  be  used  in  minor  details  at  the  discretion  of  the 
engineer. 

7.  Through  bridges  shall  be  built  of  two  trusses, 

unless  otherwise  specified,  and  shall  have  a  clearance   Provisions. 

above  floor  of  not  less  than  fourteen  feet,  measuring 

from  top  of  floor  to  the  lowest  point  of  portals.    The 

depth  from  center  to  center  of  chords  of  trusses  shall 

not  generally  be   less   than   one-eighth  of   the  span. 

The  depth  of  plate  girders  shall  not  generally   be 

less  than  one  twelfth  of   span.     The  length  of  span 

used   in  calculation  of  stresses  shall  be   the  distance 

from  center  to  center  of  end  pins  for  trusses,  and  the 

distance  from  center  to  center  of  bearings  for  plate 

or  lattice  girders.  . 

8.  Through    spans    shall    be    designed,    when 
practicable,  with  inclined  end  posts. 

9.  Iron  trestles  and  piers  shall  have,  when  prac- 
ticable, a  width  of  base  sufficient  to  give  a  moment 
of  stability  on  the  masonry,  exclusive  of  the  anchor- 
age,  greater  than   the   overturning   moment   of  the 
wind. 

10.  Provision  must  be  made  in  all  structures 
for  the  free  expansion   and   contraction  of  all  parts, 
corresponding  to  a  variation  of    150  degrees  Fahren- 
heit in  temperature. 

Loads. 

All  parts  of  structures  shall  be  proportioned  to 
sustain  the  stresses  produced  : 


332 


COMPLETE   SPECIFICATIONS. 


11.  ist.   By  the  weight  of  the  structure  itself, 
considered  integrally  and  separately  for  each  partic- 
ular member. 

12.  2d.  By  the  live  load  I,  II  or  III,  as  speci- 
fied for  each  particular   case   on   the   general   plan, 
considered   in   positions   and   conditions,  namely: — 
continuous    or  discontinuous,    standing   or    moving, 
giving  the  greatest  results. 

13.  3d.  By  the  specified  wind  pressure,  giving 
the  greatest  results. 

14.  4th.   By  the  effects  of  a  variation  of  tem- 
perature of  150  degrees  Fahrenheit. 

15.  The  bending  effect  produced  on  every  indi- 
vidual member  by  the  side  pressure  of  the  wind  and 
the  weight  of  the  member  itself  shall  be  considered. 

Dead  Load.  16.     In    determining   the    total    weight   of   the 

structure  for  the  purpose  of  calculating  stresses,  the 
weight  of  the  iron  shall  be  assumed  at  the  rate  of  ^ 
pounds  per  lineal  foot  of  bar  of  one  square  inch  area. 
The  weight  of  the  steel  at  the  same  rate  as  for  iron, 
with  two  per  cent,  added.  The  weight  of  the  timber 
shall  be  assumed  at  the  rates  of  five  pounds  per  foot, 
board  measure,  for  creosoted  timber,  four  pounds  for 
oak  and  yellow  pine,  and  three  pounds  for  white 
pine. 

Live  Load.  ij.     The  live  load  shall  consist  of  either  class  I, 

II,  III  or  any  other  load  designated  by  the  engineer 
for  each  structure. 

Load  I  shall  consist  of  one  hundred  pounds  per 
square  foot  of  floor,  and  two  concentrated  weights  of 
10,000  pounds  each,  six  feet  apart  at  right  angles 
with  the  direction  of  the  bridge. 

Load  II  shall  consist  of  eighty  pounds  per  square 
foot  of  floor,  and  two  concentrated  weights  of  7,500 
pounds  each,  six  feet  apart  at  right  angles  with  the 
direction  of  the  bridge. 

Load  III  shall  consist  of  sixty  pounds  per  square 
foot  of  floor,  and  two  concentrated  weights  of  5,000 
pounds  each,  six  feet  apart  at  right  angles  with  the 
direction  of  the  bridge. 

18.  The  live  load  per  square  foot  shall  be 
applied  to  the  width  in  clear,  specified  for  the  wagon 
way,  and  to  the  width  in  clear,  specified  for  the  side 
walks.  The  distribution  of  the  uniform  load  shall 
be  considered  continuous  or  discontinuous,  such  as 
may  give  the  largest  result.  The  concentrated  loads 
shall  also  be  taken  in  position  giving  the  largest 
result  in  conjunction  with  the  uniform  load. 


GENERAL  SPECIFICATIONS  FOE  HIGHWAY  BRIDGES.    333 


To  provide   for  the  effect  of  impact  and  vibra- 
tion, additions  to  the  stresses  produced  by  the  above 
•  specified  live  load  shall  be  made  as  follows: 

19.  Riveted  connections  of  stringers  and  floor 
beams,  and  hangers  two  feet  long  or  less — 50  per 
cent. 

20.  Hangers  and  suspenders  over  two  feet  long 
25(1-] — y-)  per  cent.,  where  /=  length  of  hanger  or 
suspender. 

21.  Floor   beams,   stringers    and    other    plate 

girders,  25(1 ^-)  per   cent.,  where  d=one  half 

length  of  girder. 

22.  Web  members  of  trusses,  and  trestle  posts 
2^(1 ^— )  per  cent.,  where  c/=distance   of   mem- 
bers from  center  of  trusses. 

23.  Chords  of  trusses  25(1 —-)   per    cent, 

where  d=one  half  length  of  span. 

No   addition   shall   be   made  where  d  in  above 
formula  exceeds  125. 


Wind  stresses  shall  be  calculated : 


Wind  Pressure. 


24.  i St.   For  a  wind  pressure  of  thirty  pounds 
per  square  foot  on  the  exposed  surfaces  of  floor,  of 
both  trusses  and  railings,  and  on  a  moving  load  sur- 
face of  six  square  feet  per  lineal  foot  of  bridge. 

25.  2d.  For  a  wind  pressure   of  fifty  pounds 
per  square  foot  on  the  exposed  surfaces  of  floor  and 
of  both   trusses   and   railings,  the   direction  of  wind 
giving  the  largest  surface  being  assumed  in  the  cal- 
culation and  the  greatest  results  shall  be  taken  in  the 
proportioning  of  parts. 

26.  Coefficients  of  fric- 
tion shall  be  assumed  as  fol- 
lows: 


For  wheels  sliding  on  iron  or  steel 
rails 

For  plane  surfaces  of  iron  or  steel . . 

For  plane  surfaces  of  wood  on  iron 
or  steel 

For  steel  rollers  between  plane  sur- 
faces of  iron  or  steel 


When  acting  to  Friction. 


Increase  I  Decrease 
the  Strain,  (the  Strain. 


30 

IOO 


50 

IOO 


5 

IOO 


15 

IOO 


25 

IOO 


Description  and  Dimensions  of  Parts. 

All  parts  of  structures  jshall  be  so  proportioned, 
that  the  combined  effect  of  temperature  and  of  all 


334  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

the  loads  specified,  except  the  wind,  shall  not  cause 
the  stress  per  square  inch  to  •  exceed  the  following 
maximum  limits: 

f  Rolled  bars  . .  12,000  pounds. 
For  iron.  27.  In  tension,  <  Plates  and 

L     shapes  ....  10,000  pounds. 

28.  In    compression  for  lengths    less  than    50 
times  the  least  radius  of  gyration     .     9,000  pounds. 

29.  In  shearing  across  fibers     .  9,000       " 

30.  On  pins  closely  packed,  tension  and   com- 
pression on  extreme  fibers     .     .      .      18,000  pounds. 

31.  On  bearing  surfaces     .      .    15,000        " 

32.  The    bearing    surfaces  of    pins  and    rivets 
shall  be    reckoned  from  the  diameter,  not  from  the 
semi-circle. 

The  stress  per  square  inch  in  compression  shall 
be  reduced  with  the  ratio  of  diameter  to  length  o*f 
member  whose  length  exceeds  fifty  times  the  least 
radius  of  gyration,  according  to  the  following  form- 
ula: 

33.  For  members  with  square 
bearings E=  — 


I2 
1+ 


34.     For  members  with  square 
bearing   at  one  end,    and  pin   bear-  9>000 

ing  at  the  other R=  — 


I2 
1+ 


35.     For    members    with    pin 
bearings 


24,000r2 


I2 

1+ 

18,000r2 


36.     For  top  flange  of  rolled  I          10,000 
beams  between  supports     .     .     .     R=  — 


I2 

1+ 


5,000b2 

37.     For  top  flange  of  built  I             9>000 
beams  between  supports     .     .     .     R= ! 


5,000b2 
Where  R=Modulus  of  allowable  stress  per  square  inch 

of  cross  section. 

1=  Length  in  inches  of  member  between  sup- 
port. 


GENEKAL  SPECIFICATIONS  FOB  HIGHWAY  BBIDGES.    335 

r=Least  radius  at  gyration  of  cross  section. 
b= Breadth  of  top  flange  of  girder  in  inches. 

38.  In  tension     ...     .      .      14,000  pounds. 

39.  In   compression  for  lengths 

less  than  fifty  times  the 

least  radius  of  gyration  12,000       " 

40.  In  shearing 10,000       u 

41.  In  bending  on  pins  closely 

packed     ....       22,000        " 

42.  On  bearing  surfaces  .     .     18,000          " 

43.  For    compression    steel    members    whose 
lengths  exceed  fifty  times  the  least  radius  of  gyration, 
the  stress  per  square  inch  shall  be  determined  by  the 
same  formulas  as  prescribed  for  iron  members,  but  a 
sufficient  number  of  tests  shall  be  made  on  full   size 
members  to  determine  the  value   of  the  constants  in 
the  formulae,  with  a  factor  of  safety  of  4. 

44.  On  extreme  fibers    in    bend-  For  Wood. 

,  (Oak  &  Yel- 

ing,  tension  and  compres-  low  Pine), 

sion i, 200  pounds. 

45.  On    bearing  surfaces    trans- 

versely to  fibers  .     .      .         400       " 

46.  Members  subjected  to  alternate  tensile  and 
compressive   stresses  shall  be   designed  and   propor- 
tioned to  resist  both. 

The  moduli    of  allowable  stress  per  square 
inch  of  such  members,  shall  be : 

rFor  rolled 

j    bars    .    12,000  (i — J^l) 


47ie±n  )  l  aud  shaP6S  'O'000'  '-'lr  > 

[For  steel     .     .     .     14,000(1 — */>.*-) 

48.  In    compression     for 
lengths  less  than  fifty 
times  the  least   radius 

c For  iron    9,ooo(  i — ^  L) 
of  gyration    .     < 

1^  For  steel  12,000(1 — /4~) 

When  s  and  S    are    respectively  the   smallest  and    largest 
of  the  two  maximum  stresses  regardless  of  sign. 

49.  For  compression  members,  whose  lengths 
exceed    fifty  times  the  least    radius   of    gyration,  the 
constunt  in  the  numerators  of  the  formulas,  used  to 
determine  the  moduli,  shall  be: 

For  iron 9,000(1 — } 

For  steel P  (i — : 


336 


COMPLETE   SPECIFICATIONS. 


Wind 

Stresses. 


Eye  Bars  and 
Upset 
Rods. 


Compression 
Members. 


Where  P  represents  the  numerical  value  derived  from  the 
results  of  tests  on  full  size  members. 

50.  In  shearing  of  riveted    connections : 

For    iron 9,000  ( — JL) 

For    steel 10,000  (i — _?_) 

51.  An  addition  of  twenty-five  per  cent,  to  all 
specified   limits  of    stress  per  square  inch,  shall    be 
allowed  for  wind  stresses.     These   limits  shall  apply 
wherever  the  wind  stresses  are  added  to  the  stresses 
due  to  other  loads. 

52.  Independently  of  the  wind  stresses,  lateral 
struts  shall  be  proportioned  to  resist  the  resultant    of 
an  initial  stress  of  10,000  pounds  per  square  inch  on 
all  rods  attached  to  them.     No   lateral  or  sway  rods 
shall  be  less  than  one  inch  diameter. 

53.  The  eye  and  threaded  parts  of  all  bars  and 
rods  must  not  be  less  in  strength  than  the  body  of  the 
bar.     The  shape,    size  and   mode  of  manufacture  of 
the  heads  of  eye-bars  shall  be  subject  to  the  approval 
of  the  engineer.     Welding  the  head  to  the  body    of 
the  bar  will  not  be  allowed. 

54.  In  upset-rods,  the    area  of  section  at  base 
of  thread  shall  exceed   sectional   area  of  rod  by   not 
less  than  seventeen  per  cent. 

55.  Long  tension    members  shall  be  supported 
at  suitable  intervals,  to  avoid  rattling  and  undue  stress 
by  bending. 

56.  When   practicable,  compression    members 
in  trusses  shall  be  designed  with  pin  bearings.     Long 
compression  members,  supported  at  intervals  by  lat- 
eral   bracings,    such    as   top    chords    of  trusses    and 
trestle    posts,    shall    be    considered    and    calculated 
as  columns  with  pin  bearings. 

57.  The    thickness    of    metal    in    compression 
where    the  stress  per  square   inch   is  9,000  pounds, 
shall  not  be  less  than  one  sixteenth^  )    of    the    dis- 
tance   between    supports  in  line  of  stress,   and  one 
thirtieth  (^— 0-)  °^  distance  between    supports  at  right 
angles  to  line  of  stress,  nor  less  than  one  eighth(J) 
of  distance  from  edge  of  plate  or  flange   to   line  of 
support.     When    the    stress  per   square  inch    is  less 
than  9,000  pounds,    the  limits   aforesaid  can  be  in- 
creased   proportionately,  but  the    thickness  of  metal 
shall    in  no  case  be  less  than    one  quarter(^)   inch 
when  both  faces  are  accessible  for  painting    and  five 
sixteenths  (-j^-)  inch  when  one  face  only  is  accessible. 


GENERAL  SPECIFICATIONS  FOE  HIGHWAY  BRIDGES.    337 

58.  The  ratio  of  length    to  diameter   shall  not 
exceed  fifty. 

59.  In    built    posts    and    struts,    the    segments 
shall  all  be  of  one    length  without  break,   and    shall 
be  rigidly    riveted  together  to  act  collectively  as  one 
solid  body. 

60.  The  sectional   area    of  rivets  in   one    seg- 
ment in  a  distance  from  the  end  as  short  as  the  spec- 
ified minimum  spacing  of  rivets  will  allow,  shall    be 
sufficient  to  resist  the  entire  stress  on  that  segment. 

61.  In    lattice  work,  the  distance  between  riv- 
ets shall  not  be  more  than  length  of  segment  of  equal 
strength  per  square  inch  as  the  column    itself.     The 
sizes  and  stiffness  of  the  lattice  bars  shall  be  propor- 
tioned to  the   weight   and   spacing  of    the    segments 
joined  by  them,  so   as  to  resist  bending  from   rough 
handling  of  the   finished   member,    and    all    stresses 
that  they  may  be  subject  to,  from  eccentricity  of  the 
line  of   pressure,  and    from  the  inclination  or    curv- 
ature of  the  segments. 

62.  Pins   shall    be    proportioned  to  resist    the 
bending  as   well  as  the   shearing  forces  acting  upon 
them.     The  limits  of    stress    specified    for    shearing 
and  for   the   pressure  on    bearing  surface   of  holes, 
shall  determine  the  number  and  size  of  rivets.     The 
sectional  area  of  rivets  before  driving  shall  be   taken 
for  the  effective  shearing  area.      The  allowable  stress 
per  square    inch  on  hand  driven  field  rivets  shall   be 
only  three  fourths  of  the  specified  limits  for  shearing. 

63.  Shall    be  so  proportioned  that  the  top  and   pl(|jf*Gird 
bottom  flanges  will  resist  the  bending  moments  with- 
out considering  the  web,  and  the  \veb  will  resist  the 
shearing  forces  without  considering  the  flanges. 

64.  The  thickness  of  web  of  girders   shall  not 
be  less  than  one  fourth  inch.     When  shearing  stress 

9,000 

on  same  exceeds  d2      (Where   t=  thickness   of 

i+ 

6,000  t2 

web,  and  d=vertical  depth  between  flanges),  stiff - 
eners  must  be  provided  at  intervals  not  greater  than 
depth  of  girder.  Stifieners  of  sufficient  strength  to 
resist  the  shear  shall  be  provided  at  the  ends  and  at 
all  points  of  concentrated  load.  Webs  of  plate- 
girders  shall  be  splice.d  with  a  plate  on  each  side. 
The  top  and  bottom  flanges  of  plate  girders  shall 
have  the  same  gross  area.  When  flange  plates  are 
22 


338 


COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 


Connection 
&  Attach 
ments. 


Bed  Plates 
and  Fric 


used,  the  flange  angles  must  be  as  large  and  heavy 
as  practicable. 

65.  Of  all  members  shall    be  so  designed,  that 
the  stress  on  each  member  can  be  correctly  calculated. 
The  lines  of  stress  shall    coincide  with  the    lines    of 
center  of  gravity  of   members,   and   intersect    at   the 
joint  point.      The  strength  of  all  connections  shall  be 
at  least    equal  to  that  of  the   member   or    members 
which  they  are    designed  to  connect.     This  shall   be 
demonstrated  by  testing,  if  required  by  the    engineer. 

66.  Bed-plates    and    bearing    plates    shall     be 
tionRoii-  truly  planed    on  all  sliding  and  rolling  surfaces,  and 

shall  be  so  proportioned  that  the  maximum  pressure 
per  square  foot  on  masonry  will  not  exceed  30,000 
pounds.  They  shall  be  securely  anchored  against 
upward  and  sideway  motion. 

67.  The  rollers  shall  be  of  steel,    and   not  less 
than   two    inches   in  diameter;    they   shall   be  truly 
dressed  to  a  smooth  finish.      The  pressure  in  pounds 
per  lineal  inch  on   friction   rollers  shall   not  exceed 
700  Vd^  (d)  being  the  diameter  of  rollers  in  inches. 
The  rollers  and  rolling  surfaces  of    bed-plates  shall 
be  protected  by   approved   wrought  iron   casings  tp 
keep  out  foreign  matter. 

When  practicable,  adjacent  ends  of  consecutive 
spans  shall  have  a  common  bed-plate. 


General. 


Pin  Holes. 


Eye  Bar 


Workmanship  and  Details  of  Construction. 


in 


68.  All  workmanship    shall    be    first-class 
every  particular. 

69.  As   far  as  practicable,  all    parts    shall  be 
accessible  for  inspection  and  painting. 

70.  All   members  shall    be    free    from    undue 
twists  and  bends. 

71.  All  parts  working  together  as  one  member 
of  the  truss,  shall  be  uniformly  stressed. 

72.  Tensile  stress  shall  be  avoided  in  a  trans- 
verse  direction,  and   shearing  stress   in   a   direction 
parallel  to  the  fibers  of  the  iron. 

73.  Shall  be  bored,  not  punched,   exactly  per- 
pendicular to  the  center  lines  of  stress,  and  not  more 
than  one  fiftieth  ( ^V)  J"nc^  larger  than  the  diameter 
of  the  pin. 

74.  Shall  be  straightened  before  boring.     Bars 
working  together  shall  be   bored   in   one   operation, 
piled  and  clamped  together,  and   at  the   same  tem- 
perature.    The    eye  shall   be   in   the   center    of  the 


GENERAL  SPECIFICATIONS  FOB  HIGHWAY  BRIDGES.    339 


Pins. 


head  and  on  the  center  line  of  the  bar.  A  discrep- 
ancy in  length  from  center  to  center  of  eye,  exceed- 
ing 2~o~o~o  o^  °f  tne  ^ngth  of  the  bar  will  not  be  allowed. 

75.  All  forging  shall  be  done  at  the  tempera- 
ture  best  suited  to  the  kind  and  quality  of  the  metal. 
No  work  shall  be  done  on   iron   or  steel    at   a  black 
heat. 

76.  Steel  eye  bars,  upset  rods,  and   all   pieces   Annealing. 
of  steel  which  have  been  partly  heated,  or  bent  cold, 

must  be  properly  annealed. 

77.  Shall  be  turned  true  to  size,   and  straight. 
They  shall  be  turned  down  to  a  smaller  diameter  at 
the  ends  for  the  thread  and  driven   in   place   with  a 
pilot-nut,  when  necessary  to  save  the  thread.     There 
shall  be  a  washer  under  each  nut. 

78.  No  discrepancy  in  length  of  pins    through 
the  bearing  parts  will  be  allowed. 

79.  The  several  members  attached  to  the  same 
pin  shall  be  so    arranged    as    to    produce    the    least 
bending  moment  on  the  pin  ;   they  shall  be  held  and 
closely  packed  in  position   by   rilling  rings   between 
them.      Fillers  shall  be  of  wrought  iron. 

So.  Abutting  ends  shall  be  planed  or  turned, 
in  a  plane  perpendicular  to  the  line  of  stress.  They 
shall  be  in  contact  throughout,  and  held  in  position 
by  suitable  splices. 


Abutting 
Joints. 


Si.     All  segmental  joints  in  riveted  work   shall   Riveted 


be  square  and  truly  dressed,  and  in  contact  through- 
out. They  shall  be  fully  spliced,  no  reliance  being 
placed  upon  the  contact  of  abutting  parts.  Sheared 
edges  of  steel  plates  shall  have  not  less  than  one 
quarter  inch  of  metal  removed  by  planing. 

82.  In  the    effective  area  of  riveted  members, 
pin,  bolt  and  rivet   holes  shall  be   counted   out  for 
tension  ;   bolt  and  pin  holes  shall  be  counted  out  for 
compression.     Rivet  holes   shall   be   assumed  to  be 
one  eighth  inch  larger  than  diameter  of  rivets. 

83.  No  tensile  stress  shall  be  allowed  on  rivets. 
Rivets  shall  be  used   in  preference   to  bolts   for  all 
rigid  connections   to  resist  shearing.     Where    bolts 
must  be   used   in   place  of    rivets,  they  shall  be  in 
double  shear;   the  holes  shall  be  drilled  or  reamed 
and   the   bolts  shall  be  turned  to  fit  tightly  in  their 
holes. 

84.  Rivet  holes  shall  be  accurately  spaced  and 
shall  be  drilled  or  reamed  to  fit  exactly  opposite  to 
each  other  without  drifting.     The  space  between  the 
edge  of  a  piece  and  the  edge  of  rivet  holes  shall  be 


Work. 


340  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

such  that  the  iron  will  not  crack  nor  split  by  punch- 
ing. It  shall  not  be  less  than  one  and  a  half  diame- 
ters of  rivet.  The  pitch  of  rivets  shall  not  be  less 
than  three  diameters  of  rivet  nor  more  than  sixteen 
times  the  thickness  of  plate. 

85.  Rivet  holes  in  steel,  if  punched,  shall  be 
reamed  not  less  than  one  eighth  inch  larger  than  the 
die  sides  of  the  punched  holes,  and  the  sharp  edge 
of  holes  under  the  rivet  heads  shall  be  trimmed. 

86.  When  practicable  all  riveting  shall  be  done 
by  a  machine  capable  of  holding  on  to  the  rivet,  after 
the  upsetting  is  complete. 

87.  Rivets  when  driven,  shall  completely  fill 
the  holes. 

88.  Rivet  heads  shall  be  full  size,  well  formed 
and  concentric  to  the  holes. 

89.  No  loose  rivets  will  be  allowed. 

90.  All  rivet  holes  for  field  riveting  shall  be 
reamed  in  place. 

Adjustment.  ^K      ^11  members  requiring    adjustment,   shall 

be  provided  with  adjusting  screw-threads,  nuts  and 
check-nuts  convenient  of  access.  Where  sleeve-nuts 
are  used,  they  must  be  open  so  that  the  threaded 
lengths  of  rods  engaged  at  each  end  can  be  verified. 

Counter  and  92.     When   practicable,    counter  rods   will    be 

Bracing,     dispensed  with,   by   designing  all  web   members  to 

resist  counter,   as  well  as  direct  stress.     Preference 

will  be  given  to  a  system  of  lateral  bracing  designed 

to  resist  compression  as  well  as  tension. 

Portals.  93.     The  end  posts  shall  be  rigidly  connected 

by  riveted  portals  of  approved  design,  as  deep  as 
the  specified  clearance  above  the  floor  will  allow. 

Vertical  94.     Shall  be  provided  between  posts  at  each 

Bracing,  panel  in  deck  bridges,  and  in  through  bridges  where 
practicable.  This  bracing  shall  be  proportioned  to 
resist  the  unequal  loading  of  trusses,  the  effect  of  the 
wind  on  the  moving  load  being  taken  into  consider- 
ation. 

95.  The  top  chord  of  through  girders  or  pony- 
trusses  shall  be  rigidly  braced  sideways  at  the  ends 
and  at  suitable  intermediate  points. 

Bwasher<-  9^'     Washers   and  nuts  shall    have   a    uniform 

ana  Nuts,  bearing.  All  nuts  shall  be  easily  accessible  with  a 
wrench  for  the  purpose  of  adjustment,  and  shall  be 
effectively  checked  after  the  final  adjustment.  No 
round  headed  bolts  will  be  allowed.  All  bolts 
through  wood  must  be  provided  with  wrought  iron 
washers  under  head  and  nut:  the  use  of  more  than 


GENERAL  SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  HIGHWAY  BRIDGES.    341 


Floor  A. 


one   washer   under  the  head  or  nut  to  make  up  for 
deficiency  in  length  of  thread,   will  not  be  allowed. 

97.  The  plan  of  Moor  shall  be  of  the  kind  A    Floor. 
or  B,  or  any  other  description  specified  for  each  par- 
ticular case  by  the  engineer. 

98.  The    stringers    shall  be  of    iron  *or    steel, 
spaced  not  more  than  3  feet  6  inches  from  center  to 
center  under  the  wagon-ways  and  capped  with  nail- 
ing pieces  5   inches  thick  of  creosoteci  wood.      The 
flooring  of  the   wagon-ways  shall  be  made  of  two 
thicknesses  of   plank,  3   inches  thick  each  for  "load 
I,"    2^    inches    thick  each   for   "load   II,"    and   2 
inches  thick  each  for  "load  III,"  the  under  flooring 
shall  be  creosoted,  and  the  top  flooring  of  white  oak 
shall  be  laid  transversely,  breaking  joints  with  the 
under   flooring.      The   top   flooring  pieces  shall  not 
exceed    8    inches    in    width.       The   sidewalk    floors 
shall  consist  of  2x6  inch  planks  nailed   on  creosoted 
joists  laid  transversely  on  the  iron  or  steel  stringers 
and  spaced  not  more  than  2  feet  from  centers.      The 
joists  shall  be  fastened  to  the  stringers  so  as  to  allow 
for  the   longitudinal  motion  of  expansion   and  con- 
traction.     The  under  flooring  of  wagon-way  shall  be 
fastened     to     the     nailing     pieces     with       wrought 
spikes  yx-j^g-    inches  for  load  I,   6x^4    inch  spikes  for 
load  II,  and  5x-^g    inch  spikes  for  load  III ;   the  top 
flooring    shall    be  fastened  with  60  penny  nails    of 
the  best  quality  for  load  I,  40  penny  for  load  II,  and 
30  penny  for   load   III.      The  flooring  of  the  side- 
walks shall  be  fastened   with  30  penny  nails  of  the 
best  quality. 

99.  The  joints  shall  be  of  creosoted  wood,  not 
less  than  3  inches  thick,  laid  longitudinally  with  the 
line  of  the  bridge  for  the  wagon-way  and  sidewalks, 
and    supported    by    the     floorbeams.      The    flooring 
shall  be  made  as  for  Plan   "A"  and  fastened  in  the 
same  manner,  but  the  flooring  of  the  sidewalk  shall 
be  laid  transversely  with  the  line  of  the  bridge. 

100.  The  joists  of  consecutive  panels  shall  lap 
by  each  other  on  the  floorbeams  ;  they  shall  be  bolted 
to  the  floorbeams  so  as  to  allow  for  the   motion  of 
expansion  and  contraction,   and  shall  be  fastened  to 
each  other  by  two  five-eights  (^6)  inch  bolts  or  lag- 
screws;   they  shall  be  braced  between  floorbeams  bv 
rows  of  bridging  spaced  not  more  than  6  feet  apart. 

101.  Guard-timbers  not  less  than  8x8  inches  shall 
be  securely  bolted  to  the  floor  on  each  side  of  the 
wagon-way,  to  give  a  clearance  of  24  inches  between 


Flopr  B. 


Floor  Gen- 
eral. 


342 


COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 


Railings. 


Camber. 


Anchorage. 


the  inside  faces  of  the  guard  and  the  inside  faces  of 
the  widest  part  of  the  truss  for  through  bridges,  and 
the  inside  lines  of  sidewalks  for  deck  bridges  and 
viaducts. 

102.  All    floor   timbers,    guards    and    railings 
shall  extend  over  all  piers  and  abutments,  and  make 
suitable  connection  with  the  embankments  at  the  ends 
of  the  structure.     Cast  iron  aprons  or  cover-joints 
shall  be  provided  at  the  free  ends  of  spans  if  required. 

103.  Stresses  due  to  the  friction  of  the  floor  on 
the  stringers  and  floorbeams,  shall  be  considered  and 
treated  the  same  as  stresses  due  to  regular  load. 

104.  Should  one  or  more  street  railroad  tracks 
be  required  on  the  bridge,   the  contractor  shall  fur- 
nish all  necessary  material  for  the  same,  and  lay  the 
track  conformably  to  the  instructions  of  the  engineer. 
The  tread  of  the  rails  must  not  deviate  more  than  six 
inches  from  the  center  line  of  the  stringers. 

105.  The  floor  of  the  sidewalks  shall   extend 
to  and  connect  with  the  floor  of  the  wagon-way  so 
as  to  leave  no  open  space  between  them.     Openings 
shall    be  left   at   suitable   intervals  in    the  floor,    if 
required  by  the  engineer,   to  dispose  of  the  sweep- 
ings on  the  bridge  and  of  the  drainage. 

106.  All  framing  shall  be  done  to  a  close  fit, 
and  in  a  thorough   and   workmanlike   manner.     No 
open  joints  or  filling   shims    will  be  allowed.     All 
under  and  top   flooring  must  be  passed  through  the 
planer  so  as  to  secure  a  uniform  thickness. 

107.  Substantial     iron    railings    of    approved 
design,  not  less  than  four  feet  high,  shall  be  provided 
for  the  outward    lines    of    sidewalks.      The   railings 
shall   be  supported  directlv  by  the  floorbeams   and 
braced  laterally   with  outside   stays  riveted  thereto. 
Intermediate  stays  fastened  to   the   stringers  shall  be 
provided  at  intervals  not  more  than   ten   feet.     The 
top  flange  of  railings  shall  be  proportioned  to  resist 
a  transverse  horizontal   thrust   of   not    less  than  one 
hundred  pounds  per  lineal  foot. 

108.  The  camber  measured  on  the  center  line 
of   the   pins   of    chords  shall    not    be  less  than  one 
twelve  hundredth  (y-^rg-)  of  the  span.     The  camber 
line  shall  not  deviate  from   an  arc   of  a  circle,  more 
than  one  quarter  (j^)  of  an  inch  at  any  place. 

109.  All   bridges  and  viaducts   shall  be  suffi- 
ciently anchored  to  the  masonry,   to  resist  displace- 
ment by  the  strongest  wind  specified.     The  base  of 


GENEKAL  SPECIFICATIONS  FOK  HIGHWAY  BRIDGES.    343 

all  piers  and  trestles  shall,  when  practicable,  be 
sufficient  to  avoid  tension  under  the  most  unfavora- 
ble circumstances  of  load  and  wind,  but  sufficient 
anchorage  shall,  nevertheless,  be  provided  to  resist 
not  less  than  one  half  (^)  of  the  overturning 
moment  of  the  wind. 

no.  All  the  necessary  drilling  and  dressing 
of  masonry  shall  be  done,  and  all  the  necessary  fast- 
enings and  anchorage  provided  and  put  in  by  the 
contractor  without  extra  allowance. 

Quality  of  Material. 

in.     Shall  be  double    rolled,    tough,    ductile,  Wroushtlron- 
uniform  in  quality,  and  shall  have  a  limit  of  elastic- 
ity of  not  less  than  26,000   pounds  per  square  inch. 

When  tested  in  specimens  of  uniform  sectional 
area  of  at  least  one  half  (^-2)  square  inch,  cut  out  of 
the  full  size  finished  piece,  it  shall  stand  without 
breaking,  the  following  tensile  stresses  and  elonga- 
tions in  the  distance  of  12  diameters. 

112.  For    bar^j 

iron  4  sq.  in.  and  >52,ooo  pounds.per  square  inch  ; 
less  in  sect'al  area,  J  elongation,  20  per  cent. 

113.  For  bars  over  4   square  inches  in  area,  a 
reduction  will  be  allowed  in  the  strength  per  square 
inch  and  elongation  of  specimen  of  500  pounds  and 
one  half  per  cent,   respectively   for  every  additional 
square  inch  of  area  of  the  bar,  down  to  the  limits  of 
48,000    pounds    per    square   inch,  and    16  per  cent, 
elongation. 

114.  For    ain 

shapes  and  plates  V 50,000  pounds  per  square  inch; 
24  in.  wide  and  less,  J  elongation,  15  per  cent. 

115.  For  plates  1 

over     24     inches  > 48,000  pounds  per  square  inch ; 
wide,  J       elongation,  10  per  cent. 

116.  The  ultimate  strength  of  full  size  tension 
bars  shall  not  be  less  than  45,000  pounds  per  square 
inch,  with    elongation  not   less  than   10  per  cent,  in 
ten  feet,  measured  on   any  part   of  the  bar.     Their 
elastic  limit  shall  not  be   less   than    25,000    pounds 
per  square  inch. 

Specimens  as  above  shall  bend  cold  without  sign 
of  fracture  on  the  convex  side. 

117.  For  bar  iron,  180  degrees  around  a  circle 
whose  diameter  is  equal  to  the  thickness  of  the  spec- 
imen. 


344  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

118.  For  shapes  and  plates,  90  degree's  around 
a  circle  whose  diameter  is  equal  to  twice  the  thick- 
ness of  the  specimen. 

t    "  1 19.     Full    size    pieces     shall    bend    cold    90 

degrees  without  sign  of  fracture  around  a  circle 
whose  radius  is  equal  to  the  thickness  of  the  piece. 
For  bars,  angles,  shapes  and  plates  24  inches  wide 
and  less,  the  radius  shall  be  equal  to  twice  the  thick- 
ness, and  for  plates  more  than  24  inches  wide  to 
four  times  the  thickness.  Full  size  rivet  iron  shall 
bend  cold  and  set  flnt  on  itself  180  degrees  without 
sign  of  fracture  on  the  convex  side. 

120.     Iron  plates  rolled  in  a  universal  mill  shall 
be  used  in  preference  to  others,  when  practicable. 
steel-  121.     Shall  be  tough,  ductile,  uniform  in  qual- 

ity and  incapable  of  tempering;  it  shall  not  contain 
more  than  one  tenth  (-^Q-)  of  one  per  cent,  of  phos- 
phorus. 

122.  Test   pieces    three  fourths    (^)    inch  in 
diameter,  cut  out  of  the  finished  pieces,  shall  stand 
without    breaking,    a    tensile    stress    not    less    than 
64,000  pounds  and  not  more  than  70,000  pounds  per 
square  inch,  with  an  elongation  not  less  than  twenty 
per  cent,  in    a  length   of    12    diameters.     The  same 
allowance  as  for  iron  specimens  shall  be  made  in  the 
strength  and  elongation  of  the  specimens  according 
to  the  sizes  of   the   bars    from   which    they  are  cut, 
down  to  the  limit  of  60,000  pounds  and  16  per  cent. 
They    shall    bend    cold  and    set  flat  on    themselves 
without   sign    ot   fracture.      Heated    uniformly  at  a 
low  cherry  red   and   cooled  in  water  at  82  degrees 
Fahrenheit,  they  shall  bend  around  a  circle  one  and 
one  half    (i^)    inches    in    diameter,    180    degrees, 
without  fracture. 

123.  Full    size    pieces    shall    bend    cold    90 
degrees    without    sign    of   fracture,   around  a  circle 
whose  radius  is  equal  to  the  thickness  of  the  pieces, 
and  shall  have  an  ultimate  strength   of  not  less  than 
56,000  pounds  per  square  inch,  with  elongation  not 
less  than  ten  per  cent,   in  ten   feet  measured  on  any 
part  of  the  bar;  their  elastic   limit  shall  not  be  less 
than  33,000  pounds  per  square  inch. 

124.  Steel  for  rivets  shall  have  in  test  pieces 
an  ultimate  strength  of  from  56.000  to  62,000  pounds 
per  square   inch,  with  25   per   cent,    elongation ;   it 
shall  stand  the  quenching  test  at  a  light  yellow  heat. 
Full  size  rivet  bars   shall  bend  cold  and  set  flat  on 


GENEKAL  SPECIFICATIONS  FOE  HIGHWAY  BEIDGES.    345 


themselves  without  sign'  of  fracture  on  the  convex 
side. 

125.  All  steel   plates  must  be  rolled  in  a  uni- 
versal mill. 

126.  Shall  be  of  the  best  quality  of  tough  gray   Cast  iron. 
metal.     A  cast  bar  five  feet  long,  one  inch  square, 

four  feet  six  inches  between  supports,  shall  bear, 
without  breaking,  a  weight  of  550  pounds  suspended 
at  the  center. 

127.  Castings    shall  be  smooth,    well-shaped,    General. 
free  from  air-holes,  cold  shorts,  cracks,   cinders  and 

other  imperfections.  All  finished  pieces  of  iron  and 
steel  shall  be  smooth,  free  from  injurious  seams  or 
flaws,  blisters,  buckles,  cinder  spots  and  imperfect 
edges.  Hammering  and  heating  for  the  purpose  of 
straightening  will  not  be  allowed. 

128.  The  timber  shall   be  of  the  sound  heart   Timber. 
wood  of  long-leaf  yello\v  pine  or  white  oak.   It  shall 

be  sawed  true  and  out  of  wind,  full  size,  free  from 
wind  shakes,  large  or  loose  knots,  decay,  brash  or 
sap-wood,  worm  holes,  or  any  defect  impairing  its 
strength  or  durability. 

129.  All    timber     shall     be      inspected    and 
accepted  by    an    authorized    inspector  before  being 
used. 

130.  Shall  be  prepared  in  the   following  man- 
ner  unless  otherwise  specified. 

i  st.  By  a  thorough  seasoning  of  the  wood  at  a 
temperature  not  to  exceed  230  degrees  Fahrenheit 
in  a  vacuum  of  twenty-four  inches  of  mercury,  a 
sufficient  length  of  time  being  used  in  this  operation 
to  avoid  the  cracking  or  splitting  of  the  timber. 

2d,  By  the  injection  into  the  wood  under  a 
pressure  of  not  less  than  150  pounds  per  square 
inch,  of  not  less  than  ten  pounds  of  heavy  creosote 
oil  to  each  cubic  foot  of  timber. 

All  framing  and  trimming  shall  be  done  before 
injection. 

131.  The  creosote  oil  used  shall  generally  be 
solid  at  a  temperature  of  50  degrees  Fahrenheit,  and 
entirely  liquid  at  a  temperature  of   100  degrees  Fah- 
renheit.    It  shall  contain  not  less  than  five  per  cent. 
of  tar  acids.     It  shall  contain  not  less  than  twenty- 
five  per  cent,  of  constituents  that  do  not  distill  over 
at  a  temperature  of  600  degrees  Fahrenheit.   It  shall 
be    free   from    water,  ammonia,  naphtha,  and  other 


the 


346  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

impurities,  and  shall  be  subject  to  the  acceptance  of 
the  engineer. 

Inspection  and  Tests. 

132.  An    expert   inspector   appointed   by   the 
engineer   will    inspect   the    material,    supervise   the 
work  at  the  shops,  the  work  of  erection  and  all  tests 
to  be  made.     All    finished    parts    of    the    structure 
shall  be  inspected  and  weighed  by  him  before  ship- 
ment. 

133.  All  facilities  for  inspection,  testing,  and 
weighing,  shall  be  furnished  by  the  contractor  free 
of  charge. 

The    following    tests    shall    be    made    by    the 
inspector  at  the  expense  of  the  contractor  : 

134.  ist.  For   every   lot  of  50,000  pounds  or 
less  of  the  same  kind   (iron   or  steel)   and   the  same 
class  (bars,  angles,  plates  or  other  shapes)  of  mate- 
rial: 

Three  specimen  tensile  tests. 
Three  specimen  bending  tests. 
One  full  size  bending  test. 

One  specimen  quenching  test,  if  the  material  be 
of  steel. 

135.  2d.   All  additional  tests  required  to  dup- 
licate any  of  the  above,  by  reason  of  faulty  material 
or  manipulation  in  the  first  tests. 

136.  All  other  tests  required  by  the  engineer, 
shall  be  made  by  the  inspector,  and  paid  for  at  cost, 
less  the  scrap  value  of  the  material,  if  the  test  proves 
satisfactory.      If  the  test  is  not  satisfactory,  the  con- 
tractor shall  receive  no  compensation. 

137.  Failure  to  stand  the  foregoing  tests,  or  a 
discrepancy  in  weight  of  materials  of  more  than  2^ 
per  cent,  shall  be  a  sufficient  cause  for  rejection. 

138.  The    acceptance    of    any  material  or  fin- 
ished member  by  the  inspector,  shall  not  prevent  the 
subsequent  rejection  of  the  same  if   found  defective 
after  delivery,   and   {he  contractor  shall  replace  the 
rejected  material  or  member  without  extra   compen- 
sation. 

139.  Before    the    final    estimate    is    paid,    a 
thorough  test  of  the  structure  shall   be  made  by  the 
engineer,    by    loading    each    span    with  the  nearest 
equivalent  load   obtainable  to   that  described  under 
the  head  of  "loads,"  distributed  and  moving  in  such 
a  way  as  the   engineer  may   see  fit.     The  load  will 
be  allowed  to  remain  on  the  structure  any  length  of 


GENERAL  SPECIFICATIONS  FOB  HIGHWAY  BRIDGES.    347 

time  deemed  necessary  by  the  engineer.  Each  span 
shall  not  deflect  under  such  a  load  more  than  one 
eighteen  hundredth  (y-sVo")  °^  'lis  length,  and  shall 
return  to  its  original  camber,  when  the  load  is 
removed.  There  shall  be  no  permanent  changes  in 
the  position  or  condition  of  any  part  of  the  structure 
as  a  result  of  the  test. 

Paint. 

140.  All  iron  and  steel  before  leaving  the  shop 
shall  have   all  loose   scales  scraped  off,  and  shall  be 
thoroughly     coated    with    boiled    linseed    oil.       All 
planed  or  turned  surfaces  shall  be  coated  with  white 
lead  mixed  with  tallow. 

141.  All  inaccessible  surfaces  shall  be  painted 
before  being  put  together  with  two  coats  of  red  lead 
or  other  metallic  paint,    approved  by   the  engineer. 
After  erection,   the   entire  structure,   excluding  tim- 
bers, shall  be   painted  with   two  coats  of  the  same 
paint. 

142.  No  painting  shall  be  done  in  wet  or  freez- 
ing weather. 

143.  All    depressions  in  the  erected  structure 
where  water  is  liable  to  collect,  shall  be  drained  by 
suitable  drain  holes  or  rilled  with  approved  water- 
proof mastic. 

Travel  and  River  Navigation. 

144.  The  contractor  shall  conduct  all  his  oper- 
ations so  as   not  to   impede   travel   on   the   road  or 
street  for  which   the   bridge   is   designed,  nor  travel 
and  operation  of  trains  on   any   road,   street  or  rail- 
road, crossing  under  or  above  the  bridge. 

145.  When  rivers  are  navigable,  they  shall  at 
all    times    during   the    construction    and  erection  of 
the  structure  be  kept  open  for  navigation. 

146.  All  staging,  coffer-dams,  and  other  tem- 
pbrary    structures    used    in    the  construction  of  the 
bridge,  as  also  the  old  bridge,  if  any  exists,  shall  be 
removed  by  the  contractor. 

Risks. 

The  contractors  shall  assume  all  risks  from 
floods  and  storms,  damage  to  persons  and  properties, 
and  casualties  of  every  description,  and  shall  furnish 
all  materials,  tools,  machinery  and  labor  incidental 
to,  or  in  any  way  connected  with  the  manufacture, 


348  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

transportation,  erection,  and  maintenance  of  the 
structure  until  its  final  acceptance,  without  addi- 
tional compensation. 

Additional  Clauses. 


G.  B. 

172.  Advertisement,  Instructions,  Specifications 
and  Proposals  for  Improving  St.  Mary's  Falls  Canal. 

The  following  complete  set  of  papers  illustrate  the  practice  of 
the  U.  S.  Engr.  Corps,  and  also  describe  one  of  the  finest 
pieces  of  masonry  construction  in  this  country.  The  work  was 
done  under  Col.  O.  M.  Poe,  of  the  U.  S.  Engr.  Corps,  with 
Mr.  E.  S.  Wheeler,  M.  Am.  Soc.  C.  E.,  as  Chief  U.  S..  Asst. 
Engr.  The  lock  gates,  buildings,  and  operating  machinery 
were  no  part  of  this  contract. 

No 

PROPOSAL  OF 


Opened  Jazmary  27,  -fSpJ, 

FOR  FURNISHING  ALL  MATERIALS,  ETC.,  AND  BUILDING  THE 
MASONRY  OF  A  LOCK 

AT  ST.  MARY'S  FALLS  CANAL,  MICHIGAN. 
Under  Acts  of  Congress  of  August  11,  1888,  and  September  19,  1890. 

EXTRACT  FROM  ACT  OF  CONGRESS, 
Approved  Sept.  19,  iSgo. 

Improving  St*  Mary's  River  at  the  Falls,  Michigan:  Con- 
tinuing improvement  on  new  locks  and  approaches,  nine  hun- 
dred thousand  dollars:  Provided,  That  such  contracts  as  may 


SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  A  CANAL  LOCK.       349 

be  desirable  may  be  entered  into  by  the  Secretary  of  War  for 
materials  and  labor  for  the  entire  structure  and  approaches, 
or  any  part  of  the  same,  to  be  paid  for  as  appropriations  may 
from  time  to  time  be  made  by  law. 

ADVERTISEMENT. 

UNITED  STATES  ENGINEER  OFFICE, 
«  34  West  Congress  Street, 

DETROIT,  MICH.,  November  28,  1890. 

Sealed  proposals,  in  triplicate,  for  furnishing  all  materials 
and  labor  and  building  the  Masonry  of  a  Lock  at  St.  Mary's 
Falls  Canal,  Michigan,  will  be  received  at  this  office  until  2 
o'clock,  p.  m.,  January  27,  1891,  and  then  publicly  opened. 

Preference  will  be  given  to  materials  of  domestic  produc- 
tion or  manufacture,  conditions  of  quality  and  price  (import 
duties  included)  being  equal. 

Attention  is  invited  to  Acts  of  Congress,  approved  Feb- 
ruary 26,  1885,  and  February  23,  1887,  Vol.  23,  page  332,  and 
Vol.  24,  page  414,  Statutes  at  Large. 

The  Government  reserves  the  right  to  reject  any  or  all 
proposals;  also,  to  award  the  contract  upon  other  considera- 
tions than  the  price. 

For  further  information  apply  at  this  office  or  to  the  U.  S. 
Engineer  Office,  Sault  Ste.  Marie,  Michigan. 

O.  M.  POE,  Col.  Corps  of  Engineers, 

Bvt.  Brig.  General,  U.  S.  A. 

GENERAL  INSTRUCTIONS  FOR  BIDDERS. 

1.  All  bids   must   be  made    in    triplicate,   upon   printed 
forms  to  be  obtained  at  this  office. 

2.  The    guaranty   attached    to    each    proposal    must    be 
signed  by  two  responsible   guarantors,  to  be  ceriified   as  good 
and  sufficient  guarantors  by  a  United  States  District  Attorney. 
Collector  of  Customs,   or   any  other   officer  under  the  United 
States  Government,  or  responsible  person  known  to  this  office. 

3.  When  a  firm  bids,  the  individual  names  of  the  mem- 
bers should  be  written  out,  and  should  be  signed  in  full,  giving 
the   Christian    names;   but  the   signers    may,    if  they    choose, 
describe  themselves  in  addition  as  doing  business  under  a  given 
name  and  style  as  a  firm. 

4.  Anyone  signing  a  proposal  as  the  agent  of  another,  or 
of  others,  must  file  wfth    it  legal  evidence  of  his  authority  to 
do  so. 

5.  All  signatures  must  have  affixed  to  them  seals  of  wax 
or  wafer. 


o  -r 


50  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

6.  The  place  of  residence  of  every  bidder,  with  postoffice 
address,   county  and  state,  district  or  territory,  must  be  given 
after  his  signature,  which  must  be  written  in  full. 

7.  All  prices  must  be  written,    as   well  as  expressed  in 
figures. 

S.  Alterations  by  erasures  or  interlineations  should  be 
explained  or  noted  in  the  proposal  over  the  signature  of  the 
bidder. 

9.  A  firm  will  not  be   accepted  as  a  surety,  nor  will  a 
partner  be  accepted   as  a  surety  for  a  co-partner,  or  for  a  firm 
of  wfiich  he  is  a  member. 

10.  An  officer  of  a  corporation  will  not  be  accepted  as 
surety  for  such  corporation. 

11.  A  contract  will  not  be  awarded  to  a  corporation  until 
it  shall  have  furnished  satisfactory  evidence  of  its  legal  capacity 
to  enter  into  the  same. 

12.  The   bidder  must    satisfy   the  United   States   of  his 
ability  to  do  the  work  for  which  he  bids. 

13.  Reasonable  grounds  for  supposing  that  any  bidder  is 
interested   in  more  than  one  bid  for  the  same  item  will  cause 
the  rejection  of  all  bids  in  which  he  is  interested. 

14.  The  United  States  reserves  the  right  to  reject  any  or 
all  bids,   and   to  wraive   any  informality  in  the  bids   received ; 
also  to  disregard  the  bid  of  any  failing  contractor  known  as 
such  to  the  Engineer  Department. 

15.  Contingent  upon    such  appropriations  as  may  from 
time   to  time  be   made  by  law,   payments  will  be   made  upon 
monthly  estimates,  but  ten  (10)  per  cent,  will  be  reserved  from 
each  payment  until  the  completion  of  the  contract. 

1 6.  The  contract,  which  the  bidders  and  sureties  promise 
to   enter  into,    shall  be   in  its   general  provisions  in  the  form 
adopted  and  in  use  by  the  Engineer  Department,  blank  forms 
of  which  can  be  inspected  at  this  office,  and  will  be  furnished, 
if  desired,  to  parties  proposing  to  put  in  bids.     Parties  making 
bids  are  to  be  understood  as  accepting  the  terms  and  conditions 
contained  in  such  form  of  contract. 

17.  The  bond  required   under   the   contract  will  not  be 
greater  than  one  fourth  nor   less  than   one  fifth  the    estimated 
amount  of  the  contract. 

1 8.  Transfers   of  contracts,   or  of  interests  in  contracts, 
are  prohibited  by  law. 

19.  In  the  form  for  proposal,  the  materials  to  be  furnished 
and  the  work  to  be  done  are  itemized  for  the  purpose  of  com- 
paring the  bids,  and  as  a  basis  for  the  monthly  estimates ;     but 
if  the  contract  be  awarded  it  will  be  as  *a  whole. 

20.  Any  bid   in  which   the   prices   stated  for  the  several 
items  seem  to  be  "unbalanced"  may  be  rejected  on  that  account 
alone. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOB  A   CANAL   LOCK.  351 

21.  The  character  of  the  materials  proposed  will  be  con- 
sidered, and  if  it  be  deemed  to  the  interest  of  the  United  States, 
for  this  or  any  other  reason,  to  accept  any  proposal  other  than 
the  lowest  in  price,  the  right  to  do  so  is  expressly  reserved. 

22.  No  advantage  shall  be  taken  of  any  error  or  omission 
in  the  following  specifications,  as  full  information  will  be  given 
upon  application. 

23.  Envelopes   containing  proposals   must  be  endorsed, 
*  'Proposals   for    Lock   at  St.   Mary's   Canal,    Michigan,"  and 
addressed  to  COLONEL  O.  M.  POE,  Corps  of  Engineers,  Detroit, 
Mich. 

SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  CONSTRUCTING    THE    MASONRY   OF    A  LOCK 

IN  THE  ST.  MARY'S  FALLS  CANAL,  MICHIGAN. 

I.—  Description. 


1.  The  work  required  by  these  specifications  is  the 

ing  of  the  main  walls,  miter  walls,  and  stairways  of  the  800 
foot  Lock  at  Sault  Ste.  Marie,  Michigan,  and  the  furnishing  of 
all  material,  labor  and  appliances  needed  for  this  purpose. 

2.  The  general  character  of  the  proposed  work  is  similar 
to  that  of  the  lock  now  in  use,  which  will  be  called  the  lock  of 
1881  in  these  specifications;     and    the    general   outline    of   the 
work  will  be  as  shown  in  the  drawings  to  be  seen  at  the  U.  S. 
engineer  office,  34  West  Congress  street,  Detroit,   Mich.     The 
location  of  the  work  and   of   all   parts  of  it  will  be  made  under 
the  direction  of  the  U.  S.  agent  in  charge,  who  will  also  furnish 
the  contractor  with   detailed   drawings  of  the   various  parts  of 
the  work  as  they  become  necessary  for  the  construction. 

3.  The  United  States  will  be  responsible  for  the  mainte- 
nance of  the  coffer-dam  that  surrounds  the  site  of  the  lock,  and 
for  keeping  the  lock-pit  free  from  water. 

4.  For  landing  and  storing  material  and  carrying-  on  the 
work,    the   contractor  will  have  the  use  of  such  portions  of  the 
U.   S.    canal    lands   and    piers    as    may   from   time   to  time  be 
designated  by  the  U.  S.  agent  in  charge. 

5.  Bidders  are  requested  to  visit  the  locality  of  the  pro- 
posed work  and  obtain  from  personal  investigation  the  informa- 
tion necessary  to  enable  them  to  make  intelligent  proposals,   as 
the  United  States  will  not  be  responsible  for  any  lack  of  accurate 
information  on  the  part  of  the  contractor,  regarding  the  work. 

II.—  Stone. 

6.  The   masonry  of   the   lock  will  be  of  two  kinds,   cut 
stone  and  backing.     Each  bidder  shall  state  the  location  of  the 
quarries  from  which  he  intends  to  obtain  each  kind  of  stone, 
and  shall  submit  with  his  proposal,  at  his  own  expense,  a  sam- 
ple of  each  kind  of  stone  ;   each  sample  to  have  the  name  and 


352  COMPLETE   SPECIFICATIONS. 

location  of  its  quarry,  .  and  the  name  of  the  bidder  plainly 
marked  thereon;  each  sample  shall  be  a  "six-inch"  cube,  one 
face  showing  natural  fracture,  and  the  other  faces  showing  dif- 
ferent styles  of  finish.  The  samples  submitted  with  the  pro- 
posals will  be  retained. 

7.  Each  bidder,   when  requested,    shall    also  furnish,  at 
his  own  expense,  "two-inch"  cubes  for   testing  purposes,  from 
such  portions  of  his  quarries   as   the   engineer  officer  in  charge 
may  direct  ;t  and  all  stones  delivered  by  the  contractor  shall  be 
of  as  good  quality  as  the  samples  and  test  cubes  furnished  by 
him. 

8.  Stones  quarried  after  October   15  shall  not  be  laid  in 
the  work  until   the  following  season,    and    no    stone    shall    be 
quarried  between  November  i  and  April  15.     When  placed  in 
the  work  all  stones  shall  lie  on   their  natural  beds.     No  lewis 
holes  shall  have  an  opening  larger  than  i  inch  by  4  inches,  and 
only  one  lewis  hole  will  'be  permitted    in    each    stone.     Lewis 
holes,  dog  holes,  letters,  or  marks  of  any  kind  shall  not  appear 
on  show  surfaces  ;  but,  in  the  top  face  of  each  coping  stone,  one 
lewis   hole   will  be  permitted.     All  lewis  holes  shall  be  thor- 
oughly filled  with  stiff  cement  mortar  of  the  same  quality  as 
that  in  which  the  stone  is  set.     Stones  having  defects  concealed 
by  cement  or  otherwise  will  be  rejected. 

9.  Cur    STONE. — The    cut   stone    shall    be    uniform   in 
appearance,  and  of  at  least  as  good  quality  as  the  cut  stone  of 
the  lock  of  1 88 1.     It  shall  be  free  from  all  defects  that,  in  the 
judgment    of    the    engineer    officer   in    charge,   will  impair  its 
strength  or  durability.     Sandstone  will  not  be  accepted.     No 
stone   shall   be  used   that  weighs  less   than    148  pounds  to  the 
cubic  foot.      The   cut    stone    shall    conform    approximately   in 
dimensions  to  the  bill  of  materials  appended  to  these  specifica- 
tions, but  exact  drawings    of    the    stones  will  be  furnished  the 
contractor  when  he  needs   them.     The  character  of  workman- 
ship, style  of  finish,  chamfer,  etc.,  shall  be  the  same  as  that  of 
the  corresponding  cut  stone  of  the  lock  of   1881,  except  where 
otherwise  specified  below. 

10.  The  stones  for  the  miter  walls  shall  be  cut  to  ^  inch 
joints  throughout.      The   coping  stones  shall  be  cut  to  3/&  inch 
joints,  except  for  the  t?ed  joints  that  overlie  the  backing,  which 
shall  not  exceed  one  inch  in  thickness.     The  stones  for  the  face 
of  the  main  walls,  and  the  facing  of  the  well  holes  and  passages 
for  the  gears  for  operating  the  gates  and  valves  shall  be  cut  to 
$/%  inch  joints  on  their  upper  and   lower  beds,   except   for  such 
portions  of  the   bed   joints  as  overlie  the  backing,  which  shall 
not  exceed  i   inch   in   thickness ;     the   vertical    joints    of    these 
stones  shall  be  cut  to  y%  inch  for  18  inches  from  the  face,  and 
the  remainder  of  each  of  these  joints  shall  not  exceed  i  inch  in 
thickness.     No  joint  shall  vary  in  thickness  from  the  dimensions 


SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  A  CANAL  LOCK.       353 

specified,  and  the  dimensions  of  all  stones  shall  be  such  that 
the  center  of  each  vertical  joint  shall  not  vary  more  than  -^ 
inch  on  either  side  of  a  vertical  line  through  the  center  of  the 
lowest  corresponding  joint.  Any  excess  in  width  of  stretchers 
or  length  of  headers  in  the  face  walls  will  be  paid  for  as  "back- 
ing stone." 

11.  All  beds  and  joints  shall  be  fair  and  true,  out  of  wind 
and  have  an  equal  bearing    throughout;   the  faces   of   all  the 
walls,  shall  be  out  of  wind,  and  true  to  line  both  horizontally 
and  vertically ;   and  the  top  surface  of  each  course  of  stone  and 
of  the  coping  of  each  wall  shall  be  horizontal  throughout,  and 
of  the  levels  given  by  the  U.  S.  agent  in  charge. 

12.  All   edges   on   show  lines    shall   be   perfect,   and  no 
stones  will  be  accepted  that  are  in  any  way  marred  or  nicked. 
Show  faces  shall  be  cut  true  and  even,  without  depressions  of 
any  kind  ;   but  within  the  draft  lines  the  show  faces  of  stones  in 
courses  below  the  upper  12   courses  of  the  main  walls  (coping 
not    included),    may  be    rough    finished,    with   no    depression 
below  the  plane  of  the  face,  and  no  projection  greater  than  i 
inch  above  the  plane  of  the  face ;   the  face   stones  of  the  gate 
recesses,  however,  shall  be  finished  throughout,  as  those  in  the 
lock  of  1 88 1.      All  cut  stones  shall  be  laid  by  clamps  or  by  the 
lewis,  and  all  lewis  holes  in  cut  stone  kept  over  winter  shall  be 
carefully  protected  from  the  weather  by  the  contractor. 

13.  BACKING. — The    backing    stones  shall    be    of  some 
good  quality  approved  by  the  engineer  officer  in  charge.    They 
shall  have  an  average  area  of  bed  of  at  least  8  square  feet;   the 
smallest   shall  have   an  area  of  bed  of  at  least  5  square  feet, 
except    when    the    U.    S.    agent    in     charge  may    occasionally 
specially  authorize   the   use   of  a  smaller   stone,  and  no  stone 
shall   have  an  overhanging    top.     Backing  stones  shall   be   at 
least  8  inches  thick   and  shall  have  their  faces  approximately 
parallel  and  their  joints  at  right  angles  to  the  faces.     No  irregu- 
lar or  three-cornered  stones  will  be  accepted.      The  bed  joints 
of  the  backing  shall  not  exceed  one  inch  in  thickness.     No  ver- 
tical joints  shall,  at  any  point,  exceed  four  inches  in  thickness, 
and  the  average  shall  not  exceed  two  inches. 

14.  About  4,000  cubic  yards  of  stone,  now  piled  on  the 
U.  S.  canal  lands,    shall  be  taken  by  the  contractor  from  where 
it  now  lies  and  laid  in  the  w7ork  as  backing.       The  U.  S.   agent 
in  charge  will  designate  the  stones  to  be  so  taken,  and  the  con- 
tractor   shall    furnish   only    the     difference    between   the   total 
amount  of  backing  required  and  the  amount  of  this  supply. 

III. — Sand,   Cement  and  Concrete. 

15.  SAND. — All  sand  used  in  mortar  or  concrete  shall  be 
clean,  sharp   and  silicious.     It  shall  be  subject  to  the  approval 

23 


354  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

of  the  U.  S.  agent  in  charge  as  to  fineness,  and  shall  be 
screened  and  washed  if  required  by  him.  The  cost  of  all  sand 
used  in  the  work  shall  be  included  in  the  contractor's  prices  for. 
laying  masonry  and  concrete. 

16.  CEMENT. — All    cement    shall    be    well    packed    in 
strong   barrels  of  standard   size,  lined  with  paper,  so  as  to  be 
reasonably  secure   from  air.     It  shall  be  delivered  as   directed 
by  the  U.  S.  agent  in  charge,  in    a    U.  S.  warehouse  at  Sault 
Ste.  Marie,   Michigan.     As  soon  as  possible  after  its  delivery 
it  will  be  inspected,  and,  if  accepted,  the  United  States  will  be 
responsible  for  its  preservation  until  it  is  issued  at  the  ware- 
house to  the  contractor  to  use  in  the  work. 

17.  Tests  of    cement    will    be  made   at    a  summer   tem- 
perature of  60  degrees  Fahrenheit  or  above.      In  making  tests 
samples  may  be  taken  from  each  and  every  barrel  delivered, 
and  a  failure   of  one  tenth  of  the  samples  tested  shall  be  suffi- 
cient cause  for  the  rejection  of  all  barrels  in  the  same  lot  as  those 
from   which   the   samples  have   been   taken.      The   amount   of 
cement  accepted  will  be  such  that  the  United  States  will  not  be 
responsible,  at  any  time,  for  more  cement  than  will  be  needed 
during  the  succeeding  month ,    and  only  so  much    cement  will 
be  issued  to  the  contractor   as  will  be  needed  from  day  to  day 
for  immediate  use  in  the   work.      Should  the  contractor  delay 
the  work  at  any  time  by  an  insufficient  delivery  of  cement  the 
United  States  reserves  the  right  to  annul  so  much  of  the  con- 
tract as  relates  to  the  delivery  of  cement,  and  to  purchase  else- 
where  all  the   cement  re  ded   to   complete   the  work;    and  all 
increase  in  cost  to  the  United  States  resulting   from  such  pur- 
chase shall  be  deducted  from  the  percentages  retained  under  the 
contract;     and   thereafter   the  contractor   shall  make  no   claim 
against  the  United  States  on  account   of  any  delays  caused  by 
cement  not  being  furnished  to  him  as  rapidly  as  it  is  needed  in 
the  work. 

1 8.  The  U.  S.  agent    in  charge  shall  direct  where  Port- 
land Cement  mortar  is  to  be  used,  and  where  Natural  Cement 
mortar  is  to  be  used.     Each  shall   be   thoroughly  mixed  dry  of 
equal  parts  by  measure  of  cement  and  sand,  and  only  enough 
clean  water  added  afterwards  to  form  a  paste  that  can  be  read- 
ily handled  with    a  trowel.      The   mortar  shall   be   thoroughly 
mixed    and  used  before  it  has  begun  to  set,  and  if  required  by 
the  U.  S.  agent  in  charge,  the    mortar   beds  shall  be  protected 
from  the  sun. 

19.  PORTLAND  CEMENT. — This  cement  shall  be  of  the  best 
quality  of  hydraulic  Portland ;   no  barrel  shall  weigh  less  than 
375  pounds  gross, 'and  the  average  gross  weight  per  barrel  shall 
not  be  less  than  400  pounds.  At  least  95  per  cent,  of  the  cement, 
by  weight,  shall  pass  through  a  sieve  with  2.500  meshes  to  the 
square  inch.     The  cement  shall  stand  a  tensile  stress   of  at  least 


SPECIFICATIONS    FOB   A   CANAL   LOCK.  355 

400  pounds  to  the  square  inch  when  mixed  neat,  and  exposed 
one  day  in  air  and  six  in  water,  and  when  mixed  in  propor- 
tions by  weight,  of  one  part  cement  to  three  sand,  and  exposed 
in  the  same  manner,  it  shall  stand  a  tensile  stress  of  at  least 
125  pounds  per  square  inch.  A  cement  that  cracks  or  checks 
when  made  into  thin  cakes  or  that  begins  to  set  in  less  than  30 
minutes  will  not  be  accepted. 

20.  AMERICAN  NATURAL  CEMENT. — This  cement  shall 
be  of  the  best  quality  of  natural  hydraulic    cement,  of  domestic 
production.      The  average  gross  weight  per  barrel  shall  not  be 
Jess  than  300  pounds.      At  least  90  per  cent,  of  the  cement,  by 
weight,    shall    pass    through   a  sieve  with  2,500  meshes  to  the 
square  inch.   The  cement  shall  stand  a  tensile  stress  of  at  le-ast  60 
pounds  per  square  inch  when  mixed  neat,  and  exposed  one  hour, 
or  until  set,  in  air,  and  the   remainder  of  the  24  hours  in  water, 
and  at  least  100  pounds  per  square  inch  when  mixed  neat,  and  ex- 
posed one  day  in  air  and  six  in  water,  and  when   mixed  in  pro- 
portions, by  weight,  of  one  cement  to   one  sand,    and    exposed 
for  seven  days  as  described  above,  it  shall  stand  a  tensile   stress 
of  at  least  50   pounds   per  square    inch.      A  cement  will  not  be 
accepted  that  cracks  or  checks  when    made    into  thin  cakes,  or 
that,  when  made  into  stiff  mortar,  sets  hard  enough  in  less  than 
30  minutes,  to  bear  a  weight  of  one  pound  on  a  wire  one  twen- 
ty-fourtn  of  an  inch  in  diameter. 

21.  CONCRETE. — The    concrete    for  foundations  shall  be 
composed,  by  measure,  of  one  part    cement,  one  part  sand  and 
four  parts  broken  stone,      The  concrete  for  rilling  sha'l  be  com- 
posed,   bv   measure,   of  one  part  cement,  two  pai  t*  sand    and 
four  parts  broken  stone.      The    stone    for    the   concrete  may  be 
obtained  from  such  of  the  stone  in  the  spoil  banks  of  the   lock- 
pit  as  may  be  designated    by  the  U.    S.  agent    in  charge,  who 
will  also  designate  the  kind  of  cement  to  be  used  in  each   case. 
It  shall  be  broken  by  the  contractor  to  pass  in  every  wray  through 
a  ring  2  inches  in  diameter,  and  shall  be  screened   and    washed 
clean  before  being  used. 

But  the  proportions  of  any  or  all  of  the  component  materials 
of  the  concrete,  either  for  foundation-  or  for  filling,  may  be  varied 
1  v  the  engineer  officer  in  charge,  or  additional  stone  in  the  form 
of  pebbles,  boulders  of  the  locality  crushed  to  pass  through 
a  half-inch  ring,  or  crushed  quartz  from  stamp  mills  may  be 
required  by  the  same  authority,  and  when  so  required  the 
changes  shall  be  made,  or  the  additions  shall  be  supplied  by  the 
contractor  without  any  increase  in  the  price  per  cubic  yard  to  be 
paid  for  the  concrete  in  place. 

22.  The  cement  and  sand  shall  first  be  thoroughly  mixed 
dry.  the  proper  quantity  of  clean  water  shall  then  be  mixed  in 
and  the  clean  moistened  stone  shall  then  be  added  to   the    mass 


356  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

and  the  whole  thoroughly  mixed.  The  amount  of  water  added 
s  'all  be  such  that  no  sign  of  water  shall  appear  until  the  ram- 
ming of  the  concrete,  as  specified  below,  is  nearly  finished.  The 
concrete  shall  be  thoroughly  rammed  in  place  before  its  cement 
has  begun  to  set. 

IV. — Construction. 

23.  The  contractor  must  clean  all  broken  stone    and    rub- 
bish   from   the   rock   upon  which  the  concrete  foundation  is  to- 
rest,  and  must  thoroughly  clean  and  scrub   it  before   any    con- 
crete is  placed  upon  it. 

24.  The  concrete  foundation  shall  extend  under  the  bot- 
tom course  of  masonry   of  all  walls,  but  shall  not  be  so  laid  as 
to  interfere  with  the  subsequent  laying  of  the  lock  floor  timbers. 
The  top  surface  of  the  concrete  foundation  shall  be   horizontal 
throughout,  and  of  the  levels  given  the  contractor  by  the  U.  S. 
agent  in  charge.       The  concrete  shall  be  deposited  in  layers  not 
more  than  6  inches  in  thickness,    and    thoroughly    rammed,    as 
soon  as  laid,  with  rammers  weighing  not  less  than  35  pounds. 

25.  Unless  specially  directed  otherwise  by    the.   engineer 
officer  in  charge,  the  walls    shall  be  carried  up  in  such  a  manner 
that  not  more  tiian' three  courses  shall  be  unfinished  at  a  time. 
The  stones  shall  be  prepared  for  their  respective  places  they  are 
to  occupy    in    the  work  before  they  are  brought  on  the  walls ; 
moving  stones  about  on  the  walls  will  not  be  permitted,  and  no 
dressing,  except  by  special    permission    of   the   U.    S.   agent  in, 
charge,  will  be  allowed  on  any  stone  after  it  is  in  the  wall. 

26.  Generally  the  backing  shall  be  laid  in  courses  not  ex- 
ceeding two  feet  in  height,  and  must  be  leveled  off  with  the  top 
surface  of    each  course  of  the  face   stone.      But    the    engineer 
officer  in  charge    may  occasionally  permit  the    use   of    backing 
stone  of  more  than   two   feet  in   thickness,    in    which    case    the 
course  shall  not  exceed  four  feet  in  thickness  and  must  be  level- 
ed off  with  the  top  surface  of  every  second  course  of  face  stone. 
The    bottom    stones  of   each    course  of  backing  shall  brea'c  all 
vertical  joints  at  least  9  inches  with  the  top  stones  of  the  course 
below.      Whenever    possible,    in   each    course,  all    stones  shall 
break  joints  at  least  9  inches  with  all  stones   adjacent  to   them.. 
The  backing  shall  not  be  laid  in  advance  of  the  face  stones. 

27.  No  cut  stone  shall  be  laid  after  d-ark.     Every  stone, 
both  cut  stone  and  backing,  shall  be  laid  in  a  full  bed  of   mor- 
tar, and  shall  be  carefully  settled  in  place  in  a  manner  satisfac- 
tory to    the  U.  S.  agent  in  charge.      All   vertical  joints  shall  be 
completely  filled  with  mortar.      The  spaces  in  vertical  joints  due 
to  irregularities  of  form  of  the  backing  stones,  shall  all  be  filled 
solid  with  selected  hammer  shaped  stones  and    spalls,  carefully 
laid  and  settled  in  mortar,  but  no  spalls  or  wedges  of  any   kind 


SPECIFICATIONS  FOR  CANAL  LOCK.        357 

will  be  permitted  in  horizontal  joints.  The  use  of  grout  is  pro- 
hibited. 

28.  Where  the  work  is  in  progress  the  masonry    and  con- 
crete shall  be  kept  wet  and  free  from  dirt.      All  stones  shall  be 
washed  clean  just  before  they  are    brought  on  the  wall,  and  the 
beds  and  joints  of  all  stones  shall  be  moistened  with  water  just 
before  they  are  laid. 

29.  All     irons    that  must   be   built   in  or   attached  to  the 
masonry,  such  as  gate  anchorages  and  pivot  p'ates,  snubbing 
hooks,  miter  wall  bolts,  etc.,  will  be  furnished  the  contractor  at 
the  site  by  the  United   States.      The  contractor  must  place  all 
these  irons  in  the  positions  indicated  by  the  detailed    drawings 
that  will  be  furnished   him   at  the   time,    and,    as  no  additional 
compensation    will    be    allowed  for  this  work,  its  cost  must  be 
included  in  the  prices  bid  for  laying  masonry. 

30.  Before  filling  of  any  kind  is   placed  behind  the  walls, 
the  exposed  joints  of  the  backing  must  be  rough  pointed  by  the 
contractor,  with    stiff   cement  mortar.      The  cut  stone  masonry 

'will  be  pointed  by  the  United  States  before  the  completion  of 
the  contract,  and  the  contractor  is  not  to  interfere  in  any  way 
with  the  employees  of  the  United  States  engaged  in  this  work. 

31.  Neither    masonry    nor    concrete    shall   be    laid    from 
November  15  to  April  15  inclusive,  nor  at   any  other  time  dur- 
ing freezing  weather.      The  U.  S.  agent  in  charge  will  inform 
the  contractor  when  the  laying  of   masonry  or   concrete  shall  be 
stopped  on  this   account.     Xo  holes   that  will  hold  water  shall 
be  left  in  the   walls   during   winter.     All   portions  of  the  walls 
remaining  unfinished  over  winter  must  be  thoroughly  protected 
by   the    contractor  by   suitable   covering  against  the   action  of 
frost.      Before   laying   any   masonry   in   the    spring,  all    mortar 
that  has  been  injured  by   frost  shall   be   removed   from    all  the 
joints  by  the  contractor,  and  they  shall  then  be  properly  refilled 
by  him  without  additional  compensation. 

32.  The  space  between  the  back  of  the  walls  and  the  rock 
face    of    the    lock-pit    shall    be    filled    with    concrete,    laid    as 
described  for  the  concrete   foundations    and  carried  up  simulta- 
neously with  the  walls. 

33.  Except    where    indicated     by     the    U.    S.    agent    in 
charge,  the  space  behind  the  walls,  above   the   concrete  filling, 
shall  be  filled  with    material  taken   from  such  parts  of  the  spoil 
banks  of  the  lock-pit  as  may  be  indicated  by  the  U.  S.  agent  in 
charge.     It  shall  be  placed  in  horizontal   layers  not   exceeding 
one    foot    in    thickness,   and   after  being  well   dampened  with 
water  shall  be  thoroughly  rammed    with  rammers  weighing  not 
less  than  35   pounds   each.      Between   the   south    wall    and   the 
lock  of  1 88 1,  all  depressions   below   the  level  of  the  coping  of 
the  two  locks  shall  be  filled  to  this  level ;  and  behind  the  north 
wall  the  top  surface  of   the  filling  shall   be  on  a  level  with  the 


358  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

coping,  and  shall  extend  back  to  a  line  parallel  to  the  face  of 
the  north  wall  and  50  feet  from  it.  All  slopes  of  the  filling 
shall  be  at  least  I  on  2.  No  stones  will  be  permitted  in  the 
filling  of  a  greater  volume  than  one  cubic  foot,  and  the  filling 
shall  be  carried  up  simultaneously  with  the  walls. 

34.  The  contractor  shall   be   responsible  for  the  preserva- 
tion   of    the    slopes    of:   the    lock-pit   until    the    completion  of 
work  under   the   contract,  and    immediately  thereafter  he  shall 
remove   all   of   his    machinery,  all  rubbish    and  loose  material, 
from  between  the  walls. 

V. —  General. 

35.  The   approximate  estimate   of  materials    to   be    fur- 
nished, and  the  work   to  be   done  under   these  specifications,  is 
as  follows: 

Portland  cement  to  be  delivered,  22,000  bbls.  (more  or 
less). 

Natural  cement  to  be  delivered,  75,000  bbls.  (more  or 
less). 

Cut  stone  to  be  delivered,  20,000  cubic  yards,  solid  meas- 
ure (more  or  less).. 

Cut  stone  to  be  laid,  20,000  cubic  yards,  solid  measure 
(more  or  less). 

Backing  to  be  delivered,  55,000  cubic  yards,  solid  measure 
(more  or  less). 

Backing  to  be  laid,  59,000  cubic  yards,  solid  measure 
(more  or  less). 

Concrete  to  be  laid,  5,000  cubic  yards,  measured  in  place 
(more  or  less). 

Earth  to  be  filled  behind  walls,  70,000  cubic  yards,  meas- 
ured in  place  (more  or  less). 

36.  Bidders  will  state  th§   price   per   unit  for  the  several 
items  separately,  but  the   aggregate  determined  from  the  prices 
and  the  above  approximate  quantities  will  be  considered  as  one 
bid.     No   claim    shall   be  made   against   the   United   States  on 
account  of  any  excess  or  deficiency,  absolutely  or  relatively,   in 
the  amounts  as  stated  above.      Sufficient   material  shall  be  fur- 
nished, and  sufficient  work  done,  to  complete  the  masonry,  etc., 
as  specified,  and  bidders  are  n  quested  to   make  the  estimate  of 
quantities    for    themselves.      The    contractor's    prices     for    the 
various    items    shall    cover  all   costs   of    labor,  appliances,  and 
materials,  and  all   expenses  of  whatever   nature  (except  super- 
intendence by  U.  S.  agents),  that  may  arise  during  the  progress 
of  the  work.      The  best  quality  of   materials  and  workmanship 
will  be  required  and  the  cost   to  the   United   States  will  be  but 
one  element  in  determining  the  award  of  the  contract. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR   CANAL   LOCK.  359 

37.  The  work  will  not   be  finally   accepted  until  the  con- 
tractor shall  have  made  good  any   injury   that   may  have   been 
done  to  work  included  in  any  previous  estimates,  and  the  con- 
tract shall  have  been  completed.      The  United  States  will  not 
be  responsible  for  the  safety  of  the  employees,  plant,  or  mate- 
rials used  by  the  contractor,  nor  for  any  damage  done  by  or  to 
them  from  any  source  or  cause  whatever.      While  in  the  canal, 
the  contractor's  plant  shall  be  subject  to  the  rules  which  govern 
vessels  passing  through  it,  and  to  this  extent  shall  be  under  the 
orders  of  the  superintendent  of  the  canal.  * 

38.  All  the  work  under  these  specifications   shall  be  car- 
ried  on  under,  and   in    conformity   \vith,   the   direction  of    the 
U.    S.  agent    in    charge.      Should     any     changes     in    any     of 
the  plans  be  made  by  the  engineer   officer  in  charge  during  the 
progress  of  the  work,  the  contractor  shall  conform  to  them,  and 
a  fair  allowance   will  be   paid  for  any  changes,  which,  in  the 
judgment  of  the  engineer  officer  in   charge,  materially  increase 
the  cost  of   the  work.      No  "extras"  of  any  kind  will  be  paid 
for,  however,  unless   they  have  been  specially  ordered  in  writ- 
ing, and  their   price   stated   in   writing,  by  the   engineer  officer 
in  charge,  before  work  on  them  has  begun.      All  rejected  mate- 
rial shall  be  removed  from  the  work  immediately  by  the  con- 
tractor at  his  own  expense. 

39.  Contingent    upon   such  appropriations  as   may  from 
time   to  time  be  made   by   law,  payments   will  be    mad.e  upon 
monthly    estimates    of    the   amounts    of    work    and     materials 
accepted  during  the  preceding  month.      The  monthly  estimates 
will  be  made  as  follows: 

1.  Portland  cement  delivered  and  accepted. 

2.  Natural  cement  delivered  and  accepted. 

3.  Seventy-five    per    cent,   of  the  cut  stone  delivered  and 
accepted  (before  it  is  laid). 

4.  Twenty-five  per  cent,  of  the  cut   stone   delivered  and 
accepted  (after  it  is  accepted  in  the  wall). 

5.  Laying  of  cut  stone  after  it  is  accepted  in  the  walK 

6.  Backing  delivered  and  accepted  (after  it  is  laid). 

7.  Laying  of  backing,  after  it  is  accepted  in  the  walls. 

8.  Laying  of  concrete,  after  it  is  accepted  in  place. 

9.  Earth  filling  behind  walls,  after  it  is  accepted  in  place. 
For  all  cut  stone  and  backing  items,  payment  will  be  made 

only  for  the  volume  actually  occupied  by  the  stones  in  the 
completed  wall.  No  payment  will  be  made  for  the  volume 
lost  in  cutting  stones  to  their  proper  shapes. 

Until  the  completion  of  the  contract,  the  contractor  shall 
be  responsible  for  the  preservation  of  all  previously  accepted 
work  or  material,  the  cement  while  in  custody  of  the  United 
States  alone  excepted,  and  e;ic  i  monthly  estimate  to  be  dimin- 
ished first  by  the  ten  per  cent,  to  be  retained  from  each  pay- 


360  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

ment,  and  second,  by  the  estimated  value  of  all  previously 
accepted  work  or  material  injured  or  wasted  during  the  pre- 
ceding month. 

40.  In  case  it  be  deemed  advisable,  at  the  request  of  the 
contractor,  to  extend  the  contract  or  modify  it  in   any  manner, 
all    cost    to    the    United    States   resulting     therefrom    may    be 
deducted  from  the  final  payment,  and  only   the   remainder  will 
be  paid  to  the  contractor. 

41.  Work  under  the  contract  shall  be  begun   on  or  before 
May  15,  1891,  and  entirely  completed  on  or  before  November 
15,  1893.      The  total  amount  of  the   contractor's   monthly   esti- 
mates by  the  end  of  the  first  season's   work  under  the   contract 
shall  be  at  least  one  fifth  of  the  total    amount  of    the  approxi- 
mate estimate  given  above ;   and  by  the  end  of  the  second   sea- 
son's work,  the  total  of  the  contractor's  monthly  estimates  shall 
be  at  least  three  fifths   of  the   same   approximate   estimate.     In 
case  the  total  estimates  for  the   work   done   by  the   end  of  any 
season  shall  be  less    than    specified    above,  the    United  States^ 
shall  have  the  right  to  annul  the   contract  and  finish  the   work, 
and  the  contractor   and   his  bondsmen   shall  be   liable   for   any 
increase  of  cost  to  the    United   States   over  that  proposed  and 
agreed  upon  for  the  entire  work  as  specified.      In  case  the  con- 
tract is  annulled  as  described   above,    all   amounts   that  may  be 
due  the  contractor  at  the  time  shall  be   forfeited  to   the  United 
States. 

42.  The  River  and  Harbor  Act    of   September    19,  1890, 
in  making  the  appropriation  for  continuing  the  work  of  improv- 
ing St.  Mary's  river,  provides: 

"  *  *  *  That  such  contracts  as\  may  be  desirable 
may  be  entered  into  by  the  Secretary  of  War  for  materials  and 
labor  for  the  entire  structure  and  approaches,  or  any  part  of 
the  same,  to  be  paid  for  as  appropriations  may  from  time  to 
time  be  made  by  /aw." 

The  amount  of  funds  available  at  any  time  for  work  under 
the  contract  wrill  be  obtained  by  deducting  from  the  total  funds 
on  hand  for  improving  St.  Mary's  river,  the  estimated  amounts 
necessary  for  all  the  contingencies  of  engineering,  superintend- 
ence, etc.,  etc. 

43.  If  any  person  employed  by  the  contractor  on  any  part 
of  the  work,  or  upon  any  work  pertaining  thereto,  should  appear 
to    be    incompetent    or    objectionable,  he    shall    be    discharged 
immediately    upon  the    requisition    of    the    engineer    officer  in 
charge,  and  such  person  shall  not  again   be   employed    in   con- 
nection with  the  work  or  any  part  of  it. 

In  case  of  differences  arising  between  the  contractor  and 
the  U.  S.  agent  in  charge,  in  regard  to  the  work  or  to  these 
specifications,  appeal  may  be  made  to  the  engineer  officer  in 
charge,  and  his  decision  shall  be  final. 


SPECIFICATIONS  FOE   800   FOOT   LOCK. 


361 


No  advantage  shall  be  taken  of  any  error  or  omission  in  the 
foregoing  specifications,  as  full  information  will  be  given  upon 
application. 

APPROXIMATE  BILL  OP  CUT  STONE  REQUIRED  FOR  800  FOOT  LOCK  AT  ST. 
MARY'S  FALLS  CANAL,  MICHIGAN. 


No.  of 
Pieces. 

Dimensions  of 
Each  Piece. 

Cu.  Ft. 
in   Each 
Piece. 

No.  of 
Pieces. 

Dimensions  of 
Each  Piece. 

Cu.  Ft.  ; 

in   Each 
Piece. 

Ft. 

Ft. 

Ft. 

Ft. 

Ft. 

Ft. 

36 

2 

5 

5K 

55 

6 

2 

< 

W 

Ill 

7752 

2 

3 

6 

36 

8 

2 

5 

iy* 

75 

186 

2 

6 

6^ 

78 

10 

2 

3 

4M 

26 

348 

2 

3 

7 

42 

4 

2 

5 

% 

53 

102 

2 

4% 

6 

57 

32 

2 

5^ 

6 

66 

194 

2 

3 

6% 

40 

2 

2 

6fc 

7^ 

102 

138 

2 

4 

6 

48 

4 

2 

3^ 

7 

49 

166 

2 

3 

6K 

33 

6 

2 

4^ 

6fc 

60 

186 

2 

sk 

6 

42 

16 

2 

3^ 

5 

35 

276 

2 

3 

Wz 

39 

8 

2 

4 

7^ 

60     ; 

152 

2 

4K 

6 

51 

36 

2 

4^ 

5 

45 

230 

2 

5 

6 

60 

8 

2 

2% 

7 

39 

38 

2 

2^ 

6 

30 

61 

2 

3 

4^ 

27 

10 

2 

5 

7 

70 

16 

2 

4 

5>£ 

44 

12 

2 

5 

6^ 

65 

28 

2 

3 

3>£ 

21 

227 

2 

4>£ 

6 

54 

172 

2 

2 

4 

16 

12 

2 

334 

6 

39 

190 

2 

2^ 

5 

28 

64 

2 

3^ 

6 

45 

77 

2 

2% 

6 

33 

66 

2 

6 

7^ 

87 

12 

2 

2K 

4 

20 

36 

2 

3 

5^ 

33 

8 

2 

2 

5K 

21 

30 

2 

6 

6 

72' 

4 

2 

2 

2^ 

10 

273 

2 

3 

5 

30 

10 

2 

3 

3 

18 

362 


COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 


APPROXIMATE  BILL  OF  CUT  STONE  REQUIRED  FOR  800  FOOT  LOCK  AT  ST. 
MARY'S  FALLS  CANAL,  MICHIGAN. 


No.  of 
Pieces. 

Dimensions  of 
Each  Piece. 

Cu.  Ft. 
in   Each 
Piece. 

No.  of 
Pieces. 

Dimensions  of 
Each  Piece. 

Cu.   Ft. 
in  Each 
Piece. 

Ft. 

Ft. 

Ft. 

Ft. 

Ft. 

Ft. 

6 

2 

3 

4 

24 

4 

2 

4K 

5K 

50 

8 

2 

2 

*\ 

23 

4 

2 

3 

8^ 

50 

6 

2 

3 

VA 

34 

26 

2 

2% 

4% 

26 

2 

2 

^A 

5% 

36 

28 

2 

3% 

4K 

33 

34 

•2 

2 

5 

20 

21 

2 

4 

4K 

36 

8 

2 

2 

2% 

11 

14 

2 

3 

8% 

53 

4 

^ 

2 

3^ 

14 

14 

2 

3 

7% 

47 

4 

2 

2>^ 

G>4 

31 

12 

2 

4^ 

4>£ 

41 

12 

2 

6^ 

9K 

120 

4 

2 

VA 

8^ 

57 

74 

2 

5% 

6 

69 

8 

2 

^A 

7 

46 

74 

2 

3 

5K 

32 

14 

« 

VA 

6 

29 

2 

2 

4K 

7M 

65 

11 

2^ 

5 

6 

75 

2 

2 

3>^ 

6% 

47 

10 

2^ 

3 

5 

38 

14 

o 

4 

6>£ 

52 

4 

3 

3K 

G% 

63 

100 

2 

3 

7^ 

45 

7 

3 

3 

1% 

70 

2 

2 

6 

7 

84 

6 

3 

3M 

3^ 

37 

2 

2 

6 

G^ 

81 

6 

3 

3 

m 

32 

14 

2 

8 

8^ 

136 

5 

3 

3^ 

7M 

76 

14 

2 

7K 

7^ 

113 

5 

3 

3^ 

6>4 

66 

98 

2 

2% 

4K 

25 

2 

3 

3^ 

73^ 

79 

91 

2 

5% 

7^" 

86 

12 

3H 

3^ 

6 

68 

4 

2 

6 

8^ 

102 

28 

3K 

3^ 

6 

74 

SPECIFICATIONS   FOE   800   FOOT   LOCK. 


363 


APPROXIMATE  BILL  OF  CUT  STONE  REQUIRED  FOR  800  FOOT  LOCK  AT  ST. 
MARY'S  FALLS  CANAL,  MICHIGAN. 


No   of 
Pieces. 

Dimensions  of 
Each  Piece. 

Cu.  Ft. 
u   Each 
Piece. 

No   of 
Pieces. 

Dimensions  of 
Each  Piece. 

Cu.  Ft. 
in   Each 
Piece. 

Ft. 

Ft. 

Ft. 

Ft. 

Ft. 

Ft. 
5 

2 

3K 

4K 

7K 

118 

52 

IK 

3 

23 

2 

3K 

4 

4K 

63 

8 

IK 

3 

% 

24 

2 

3K 

4K 

6 

95 

64 

IK 

3 

4K 

20 

2 

3K 

5K 

7K 

144 

36 

IK 

3 

7K 

34 

2 

2% 

3K 

4K 

43 

12 

IK 

3 

5K 

25 

2 

3K 

8 

8K 

238 

8 

IK 

5^ 

6 

47 

2 

3K 

7K 

7K 

197 

2 

IK 

5 

7 

53 

50 

% 

!« 

8 

6 

2 

IK 

4 

7 

42 

2 

% 

12 

8 

8 

8 

IK. 

3 

o% 

30 

1052 

IK 

3 

6 

27 

4 

IK 

4 

7K 

45 

42 

IK 

3 

7 

32 

6 

IK 

4 

6 

36 

22 

IK 

5 

6 

45 

2 

IK 

3K 

5 

26 

8 

IK 

4>4 

6 

39 

4 

IK 

4 

4K 

27 

28 

IK 

3* 

6K 

29 

4 

IK 

3 

4 

18 

30 

IK 

3K 

6 

32 

6 

IK 

4K 

5 

34 

8 

IK 

2K 

6 

23 

2 

IK 

6 

6 

54 

30 

IK 

3% 

6 

34 

134 

I* 

3 

5 

2/5 

2 

IK 

2K 

4K 

17 

132 

13* 

5 

6 

53 

36 
2 
14 

4 

IK 
IK 
IK 
IK 

4K 
2K 

6 

4K 

6 

7K 

7 

41 

28 
65 

47 

2 

1% 

5 

5 

43 

Total  No.  Stone  13,904  ^|  Z  „• 
Total  Vol.  Cu.  Yds  ....  19,688  /  f  J 

NOTE.  —  The 
quarter  of  a   foot, 
They    describe  a 
may  be  cut. 


linear  dimensions  are  given  to  the  nearest 
and  the  volume  to  the  nearest  cubic  foot, 
prism  from  which  the  required  finished  stone 


364  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

Payments  are  not  to  be  made  by  this  bill,  but  upon  the 
volume  of  stone  laid  in  the  wall  after  being  cut  to  the  proper 
dimensions. 

PROPOSAL. 

TO  COLONEL  O.  M.  POE, 

Corps  of  Engineers,  U.  S.  A.,  Detroit,  Mick. 

_i89— . 

SIR — In  accordance  with  your  advertisement  of  Novem- 
ber 28,  1890,  inviting  proposals  for  furnishing  all  material  and 
labor  and  building  the  Masonry  of  a  Lock,  at  Saint  Mary's 
Falls  Canal,  Mich.,  and  subject  to  all  the  conditions  and 
requirements  thereof,  and  of  your  instructions  to  bidders  and 
specifications  dated  November  28,  1890,  copies  of  all  of  which 
are  hereto  attached,  and,  so  far  as  they  relate  to  this  proposal, 
are  made  a  part  of  it,  we  (or)  I  propose  to  furnish  all  mate- 
rials, appliances  and  labor,  and  do  the  work  as  specified,  at  the 
prices  named  below,  namely: 

Deliver  at  Sault  Ste.  Marie,  Mich.,  twenty-two  thousand 
(22,000)  barrels  (more  or  less)  of  Portland  Cement  at  the 

rate   of  (— — -)   dollars   and   ( )   cents  per 

barrel. 

Deliver  at  Sault  Ste.  Marie,  Mich.,  seventy-five  thousand 
(75,000)  barrels  (more  or  less)  of  Natural  Cement,  at  the  rate 
o± ( )  dollars  and  ( )  cents  per  barrel. 

Deliver  at  Sault  Ste.  Marie,  Mich.,  twenty  thousand 
(20,000)  cubic  yards  (more  or  less),  solid  measure,  cut  stone, 

at  the   rate   of ( )  dollars  and ( )  cents 

per  cubic  yard. 

Lay  in  the  lock  walls  twenty  thousand  (20,000)  cubic 
yards  (more  or  less),  solid  measure,  cut  stone,  at  the  rate  of 

( )  dollars  and ( )  cents  per  cubic  yard. 

Deliver    at    Sault    Ste.    Marie,  Mich.,    fifty-five  thousand 

(55,000)  cubic  yards  (more  or  less),  solid  measure,  backing 

stone,  at  the  rate  of ( )  dollars  and ( ) 

cents  per  cubic  yard. 

Lay  in  the  lock  wall  fifty-nine  thousand  (59,000)  cubic 
yards  (more  or  less),  solid  measure,  backing  stone,  at  the  rate 

of  ( )  dollars  and ( )  cents  per  cubic 

yard. 

Lay  in  the  foundations,  etc.,  of  the  lock,  five  thousand 
(5,000)  cubic  yards  (more  or  less)  concrete,  at  the  rate  of 

( )  dollars  and ( )  cents  per  cubic  yard 

measured  in  place. 

Fill  behind  walls   seventy  thousand  (70,000)  cubic   yards 

(more  or  less)    earth,  at  the  rate  of  ( )  dollars  and 

( )  cents  per  cubic  vard,  measured  in  place. 


SPECIFICATIONS  FOE  800  FOOT  LOCK.      365 

We  [or]  I  make  this  proposal  with  a  full  knowledge  of 
the  kind,  quantity,  and  quality  of  the  articles  required,  and  of 
the  work  to  be  done,  and,  if  it  is  accepted,  will,  within  ten  (10) 
davs  after  icceiving  written  notice  of  such  acceptance,  enter 
into  contract,  with  good  and  sufficient  sureties,  for  the  faithful 
performance  thereof. 


WITNESS: 


.  (Signature) [SEAL] 

( Address)    

. .  (Signature) .  . . [SEAL] 

(Address) 

.  .(Signature) [SEAL] 

(Address)    

.  .('Signature) [SEAL] 

(Address)..   . 

(Signature) [SEAL] 

(Address)   

.  (Signature) [SEAL] 

(Address) 

(Sign  in  Triplicate.) 

GUARANTY. 


We,  ,  of ,  in  the  state  of ,  and ,  of 

.  in  the  state  of ,  hereby  guarantee  and  bind  ourselves 

and  each  of  us,  our  and  each  of  our  heirs,  executors  and  admin- 
istrators, to  the  effect  that  if  the  bid  of herewith  accom- 
panying, dated ,  189 — .  for  furnishing  all  materials  and 

labor,  and  building  the  Masonry  of  a  Lock  at  Saint  Mary's 
Falls  Canal,  shall  be  accepted,  in  whole  or  in  part,  within 
sixty  (60)  days  from  the  date  of  the  opening  of  proposals,  the 

said    bidder    ,  will,    within   ten    (10)   days  after    being 

notified  of  such  acceptance,  enter  into  a  contract  with  the 
United  States  in  accordance  with  the  terms  and  conditions  of 
the  advertisement,  and  will  give  bond  with  good  and  sufficient 
sureties  for  the  faithful  and  proper  fulfillment  of  the  same. 
And  in  case  the  said  bidder shall  fail  to  enter  into  con- 
tract within  the  said  ten  (10)  days  with  the  proper  officer  of 
the  United  States,  and  furnish  good  and  sufficient  bond  for  the 
faiihiul  performance  of  the  same  according  to  the  terms  of  said 
bid  and  advertisement,  v\  e  and  each  of  us  hereby  stipulate  and 
guarantee,  and  bind  ourselves  and  each  of  us,  our  and  each  oi 
our  heirs,  executors  and  administrators,  to  pay  unto  the  United 
States  the  difference  in  money  between  the  amount  of  the  bid 

of  the  said  bidder and  the  amount  for  which  the  proper 

officer  of  the  United  States  may  contract  with  .another  party  to 
furnish  said  materials  and  la'-.or  and  build  the  Masonrv  of  a 


366  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

Lock,  as  specified,  if  the  latter  amount  be  in  excess  of  the  for- 
mer, for  the  whole  work  covered  by  the  proposal. 

WITNESSES  : 


-[SEAL.] 

-[SEAL.] 


Dated  189.. 

[Executed  in  Triplicate.] 

JUSTIFICATION  OF  THE  GUARANTORS. 


STATE  OF- 

COUNTY   OF- 


JSS. 


I,  ,  one  of  the  guarantors  named  in  the  within  guar- 
anty, do  swear  that  I  am  pecuniarily  worth  the  sum  of  two 
hundred  thousand  dollars,  over  and  above  all  my  debts  and 
-liabilities. 


(Signature  of  Guarantor.) 

Before  me, 

(Signature  of  Officer  administering  oath,  with  seal,  if  any.) 


STATE  OF- 

COUNTY   OF- 


JSS. 


I, ,  one  of  the  guarantors  named  in  the  within  guar- 
anty, do  swear  that  I  am  pecuniarily  worth  the  sum  of  two 
hundred  thousand  dollais,  over  and  above  all  my  debts  and 
liabilities. 


(Signature  of  Guarantor.) 

Before  me, 

(Signature  of  officer  administering  oath,  with  seal,  if  any.) 


CERTIFICATE. 

I,  ,   do  hereby  certify  that and  ,  the 

guarantors  above  named,  are  personally  known  to  me,  and, 
that,  to  the  best  of  my  knowledge  and  belief,  each  is  pecun- 
iarily worth,  over  and  above  all  his  debts  and  liabilities,  the 
sum  stated  in  the  accompanying  affidavit  subscribed  by  him. 


(Signature  of  certifying  official.) 

NOTE. — The  certificate  maybe  given  separately  as  to  each 
guarantor,  and  modified  accuidingly. 

O.  M.  P. 


SPECIFICATIONS   AND   CONTRACT   FOR   DAM.  367 

173.  Complete  Specifications  and  Contract  for 
Dam  No.  5,  Southborough,  of  the  Boston  Water- 
works, July,  1893. 

ADVERTISEMENT. 

TO  CONTRACTORS. 


Sealed  proposals  addressed  to  the  Boston  Water  Board, 
and  endorsed  "Proposals  for  building  Dam  No.  5  in  the  Town 
of  Southborough,"  will  be  received  by  the  Boston  Water  Board, 
at  their  office,  City  Hall,  Boston,  Mass.,  until  12  o'clock  M., 
of  Monday  the  seventeenth  day  of  July,  1893,  and  at  that  time 
will  be  publicly  opened  and  read. 

Each  bidder  must  make  a  personal  examination  of  the  loca- 
tion of  the  dam. 

All  bids  must  be  .made  upon  blank  forms,  to  be  obtained 
of  the  City  Engineer,  Boston,  must  give  the  prices  proposed, 
both  in  writing  and  in  figures,  and  be  signed  by  the  bidder, 
with  his  address. 

Each  bid  is  to  be  accompanied  by  a  certified  check  for  two 
thousand  dollars  ($2.000),  payable  to  the  City  of  Boston,  said 
check  to  be  returned  to  the  bidder  unless  he  fail  to  execute  the 
contract,  should  it  be  awarded  to  him. 

A  bond  for  one  hundred  thousand  dollars  ($100,000) will  be 
required  for  the  faithful  performance  of  the  contract,  the  sure- 
ties to  be  residents  of  Massachusetts,  and  satisfactory  to  said 
Boston  Water  Board. 

The  person  or  persons  to  whom  the  contract  may  be  award- 
ed will  be  required  to  appear  at  this  office  with  the  sureties 
offered  by  him  or  them,  and  execute  the  contract  within  six 
days  (not  including  Sunday)  from  the  date  of  notification  of 
such  award,  and  the  preparation  and  readiness  for  signature  of 
the  contract ;  and  in  case  of  failure  or  neglect  so  to  do,  he  or 
they  will  be  considered  as  having  abandoned  it,  and  the  check 
accompanying  the  proposal  shall  be  forfeited  to  the  City  of 
Boston. 

All  bids  will  be  compared  on  the  basis   of    the    Engineer's 
estimate  of  quantities  of  work  to  be  done,  which  is  as  follows : — 
(#)          14,000  cubic  yards  soil  excavated  and  placed  in   spoil- 
banks. 
(aa)        13,900  cubic  yards  soil  excavated  from  spoil-banks  and 

placed  on  dam. 

(<5)  1,610  square  yards  sodding. 

(££)  5  acres  seeding. 

(c)        230,000  cubic  yards  earth  excavation  (trenches,  embank- 
ments, and  backfilling). 
(cc)        10,000  cubic  yards  rehandling  of  excavated  materials. 


368  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 


13,400  cubic  yards  rock  excavation. 
(^)  2,000  feet  board  measure  timber  work. 

(ee)          2,000  feet  board  measure  timber  work  (tongued    and 

grooved). 

(_/")  800  barrels  Portland   cement. 

Of)          14,000  cubic  yards  concrete  masonry. 
(<££")  S°°  cubic  yards  concrete  masonry. 

(h)  9»27o  square  yards  plastering. 

(i)  256  cubic  yards  brick  masonry. 

(/)  75°°  CUDic  yards  paving.  * 

(£)          10,  100  cubic  yards  riprap. 
(/)  5?4°°  cubic  yards  broken  stone.  f 

(/«)         22,200  cubic  yards  rubble-stone  masonry. 
(;z)         13,300  square  feet  facing  stone  masonry   (broken  ashlar 

work). 

(^)  8565°  cubic  yards  facing  stone  masonry  (range  work). 

(^)  320  linear  feet  coping. 

(^)  290  cubic  yards  dimension  stone  masonry. 

(r)  4,110  square  feet  hammered  work. 

(5)  1,000  cubic  yards  masonry  laid   in    American    cement 

mortar  r  to  i,  an  additional  price   per    cubic 

yard. 
(2?)  1,000  cubic  yards  masonry   laid    in    Portland    cement 

mortar  i  to  i,  an  additional   price  per    cubic 

yard 
.(u)  i,  ooo  cubic  yards   masonry  laid    in    Portland    cement 

mortar  i  to  2,  an  additional  price   per    cubic 

yard. 
(v)  i,  ooo  cubic  yards  masonry    laid    in    Portland    cement 

mortar  i  to  3,  an  additional  price    per    cubic 

yard. 
(iv)  J>575  linear  feet  of  walk. 

These  quantities  are  approximate  only,  and  the  Boston 
Water  Board  expressly  reserves  the  right  of  increasing  or  dimin- 
ishing the  same,  as  may  be  deemed  necessary  by  its  Engineer. 
Plans  can  be  seen,  and  specifications  and  forms  of  proposal 
and  contract  obtained,  at  the  office  of  the  City  Engineer,  City 
Hall,  Boston. 

The  Boston  Water  Board  reserves  the  right  to  reject  any 
or  all  bids,  should  it  deem  it  to  be  for  the  interest  of  the  City 
of  Boston  so  to  do.  ROBERT  GRANT, 

JOHN  W.  LEIGHTON, 
THOMAS  F.  DOHERTY, 

Boston  Water  Board. 
OFFICE  OF  BOSTON  WATER  BOARD, 
CITY  HALL,  BOSTON,  JULY  i,  1893. 

*  3,200  cubic  yards  if  riprap  is  used.  \  2,800  cubic  yards  if  riprap  is  used. 


SPECIFICATIONS   AND    CONTRACT   FOR  DAM.  369 

PROPOSAL 

TO  THE  BOSTON  WATER  BOARD  FOR  BUILDING  DAM  NO.  5  IN  THE 
TOWN  OF   SOUTHBOROUGH. 

The  undersigned  hereby  declares  that  he  has  carefully  ex- 
amined the  annexed  form  of  contract  and  specifications  and  the 
drawings  therein  referred  to,  and  made  an  inspection  of  the 
site  of  the  proposed  dam,  and  will  provide  all  necessary  ma- 
chinery, tools,  apparatus,  and  -other  means  of  construction,  and 
do  allthe  work  and  furnish  all  the  materials  called  for  by  said 
contract  and  specifications  and  the  requirements  under  them  of 
the  Engineer,  for  the  following  sums,  to  wit: 

(a)  For  the  removal  of  soil  excavated  and  placed  in 
spoil  banks,  including  all  incidental  work,  the  sum  of  - 
($  -  )  per  cubic  yard. 

(00)  For  the  removal  of  soil  taken  from  spoil  banks  or 
from  other  places  and  placing  on  the  slopes  of  the  embank- 
'ment,  including  all  incidental  work,  the  sum  of  -  ($  -  ) 
per  cubic  yard. 

(6)  "For  sodding,  including  all  incidental  work,  the  sum 
of  -  ($  -  )per  superficial  square  yard. 

(££)  For  seeding,  including  all  incidental  work,  the  sum 
of  --  ($  -  )  per  acre. 

(c)  For  earth  excavation,  including  its  disposal  in  em- 
bankments and  refilling,  or  as  otherwise  ordered  by  the  engi- 
neer, and  all  incidental  work,  the  sum  of  -  ($  -  )  per 
cubic  yard.  t 

(cc)  For  rehandling  of  excavated  materials  from  spoil 
banks  and  placing,  including  all  incidental  work,  the  sum  of 
-  ($  -  )  per  cubic  yard. 

(</)  For  rock  excavation,  including  its  disposal  and  all 
incidental  work,  the  sum  of  -  ($  -  )  per  cubic  yard. 

(0)  For  permanent  timber  work,  except  tongued  and 
grooved  timber,  placed,  including  all  incidental  work,  the  sum 
of  -  ($  -  )  per  thousand  feet  B.  M. 

{ee)  For  permanent  timber  work,  tongued  and  grooved, 
placed,  including  all  incidental  work,  the  sum  of  -  ($  -  ) 
per  thousand  feet  B.  M. 

(_/")  For  Portland  cement  ordered  by  the  engin  er, 
delivered  where  ordered  on  the  work,  in  barrels  containing  400 
pounds,  including  all  incidental  work,  the  sum  of  - 
($  -  )  per  barrel. 


For  concrete  masonry,  in  place,  formed  of  five  parts 
of  broken  stone  or  screened  gravel,  to  one  part  of  cement,  and 
made  with  American  cement  mortar  mixed  in  the  proportion  of 
one  part  of  cement  to  two  parts  of  sand,  including  all  incidental 
work,  the  sum  of  -  ($  -  )  per  cubic  yard. 
24 


370  COMPLETE   SPECIFICATIONS. 

(gg)  For  concrete  masonry,  in  place,  formed  of  three 
parts  of  broken  stone  or  screened  gravel  to  one  part  of  cement, 
and  made  with  American  cement  mortar  mixed  in  the  propor- 
tion of  one  part  of  cement  to  two  parts  of  sand,  including  all 
incidental  work,  the  sum  of ($ )  per  cubic  yard. 

(^)  For  plastering  all  concrete  walls  with  Portland 

cement,  including  all  incidental  work,  the  sum  of ($ ) 

per  superficial  square  yard. 

(*)  For  brick  masonry,  laid  in  Portland  cement  mortar 
mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  part  of  cement  to  two  parts  of 
sand,  and  including  all  pointing,  centering,  etc.,  and  removing 

the  same,  and  all  incidental  work,  the  sum  of ($ ) 

per  cubic  yard. 

(j)  For  paving  in  place,  including  all  incidental  work, 
the  sum  of ($ )  per  cubic  yard. 

(/£)  For  riprap  in  place,  including  all  incidental  work, 
the  sum  of ($ )  per  cubic  yard.  • 

(/)  For  broken  stone  in  place  (other  than  that  used  in 
making  concrete  and  the  walk),  including  all  incidental  work, 
the  sum  of ($ )  per  cubic  yard. 

(iri)  For  rubble-stone  masonry,  laid  in  American  cement 
mortar,  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  part  of  cement  to  two 

parts  of  sand,  including  all  incidental  work,  the  sum  of 

($ )  per  cubic  yard. 

(n)  For  face  work  of  broken  ashlar,  in  addition  to  the 
price  paid  per  cubic  yard  as  rubble,  including  pointing  in  neat 

Portland  cement,  and  all  incidental  work,  the  sum  of 

($? )  per  superficial  square  foot. 

(0)  For  facing  stone  masonry  of  range  stones  laid  in 
American  cement  mortar  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one 
part  of  cement  to  two  parts  of  sand  and  pointing  in  neat 

Portland  cement,  including  all  incidental  work,  the  sum  of 

($ )  per  cubic  yard. 

(/)  For  coping  laid  in  place,  and  pointed  in  neat 
Portland  cement,  including  all  incidental  work,  the  sum  of 
($ )  per  linear  or  running  foot. 

(^)  For  dimension  stone  masonry  laid  in  American 
cement  mortar  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  part  of  cement  to 
two  parts  of  sand,  including  pointing  in  neat  Portland  cement, 

centering,  etc.,  and  all  incidental  work,  the  sum  of 

($— • )  per  cubic  yard. 

(r)  For  fine  hammer  dressing  (six  cut  work)  the  sum  of 
($ )  per  superficial  square  foot. 

(.?)  For  all  kinds  of  masonry  laid  in  American  cement 
mortar  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  part  of  cement  to  one 
part  of  sand,  in  addition  to  the  prices  per  cubic  yard  herein- 
before stipulated  to  be  paid  for  the  same  class  of  masonry  laid 
HI  American  cement  mortar  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  part 


SPECIFICATIONS   AND   CONTRACT   FOR  DAM.  371 

of  cement  to  two  parts  of  sand,  the  sum  of ($ )  per 

cubic  yard. 

(/)  For  all  kinds  of  masonry  laid  in  Portland  cement 
mortar  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  part  of  cement  to  one 
part  of  sand,  in  addition  to  the  prices  per  cubic  yard  hereinbefore 
stipulated  to  be  paid  for  the  same  class  of  masonry  laid  in 
American  cement  mortar  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  part  of 

cement  to  two  parts  of  sand,  the  sum  of  ($ )  per 

cubic  yard. 

(«)  For  all  kinds  of  masonry  laid  in  Portland  cement 
mortar  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  part  of  cement  to  two 
parts  of  sand,  in  addition  to  the  prices  per  cubic  yard  herein- 
before stipulated  to  be  paid  for  the  same  class  of  masonry  laid 
in  American  cement  mortar  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  part 

of  cement  to  two  parts  of  sand,  the  sum  of ($ )  per 

cubic  yard. 

(v)  For  all  kinds  of  masonry  laid  in  Portland  cement 
mortar  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  part  of  cement  to  three 
parts  of  sand,  in  addition  to  the  price  per  cubic  yard  herein- 
before stipulated  to  be  paid  for  the  same  class  of  masonry  laid 
in  American  cement  mortar  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  part 

of  cement  to  two  parts  of  sand,  the  sum  of ($ )  per 

cubic  yard. 

(TV)  For  building  walk,  including  all  incidental  work,  the 
sum  of ($ )  per  linear  or  running  foot. 

(#)  For  all  extra  work  done  by  written  order  of  the  Boston 
Water  Board,  its  actual  reasonable  cost  to  the  Contractor,  as 
determined  by  the  City  Engineer,  plus  fifteen  per  cent,  of  said 
cost. 

Accompanying  this  proposal  is  a  certified  check  for  two 
thousand  dollars  ($2,000),  which  it  is  agreed  shall  become  the 
property  of  the  city  of  Boston,  if,  in  case  this  proposal  shall  be 
accepted  by  the  Boston  Water  Board,  the  undersigned  shall  fail 
to  execute  a  contract  with  said  city  under  the  conditions  of  this 
proposal  within  the  time  provided  for  by  the  advertisement  for 
proposals ;  otherwise  said  check  shall  be  returned  to  the  under- 
signed. 

No  member  of  the  city  council,  and  no  person  in  any  office 
or  employment  of  the  city  of  Boston  is  directly  or  -indirectly 
interested  in  this  proposal  or  in  any  contract  which  maybe  made 
under  it,  or  in  expected  profits  to  arise  therefrom  ;  and  this  pro- 
posal is  made  in  good  faith  without  collusion  or  connection  with 
any  other  person  bidding  for  the  same  work. 

Name 


Address- 
Date 


372  COMPLETE   SPECIFICATIONS. 

CITY    OF    BOSTON. 

BOSTON  WATER  WORKS. 

CONTRACT  AND  SPECIFICATIONS    FOR    BUILDING    DAM: 
NO.   5,  IN  THE  TOWN  OF    SOUTHBOROUGH. 

This   Agreement,    made     and     concluded    this 

day   of in  the  year  one  thousand  eight 

hundred  and  ninety-three,   between  the  City  of  Bos- 
ton, by  its  Boston  Water  Board,  of  the   first  part, 

and in   the    State    of • 

of  the  second  part: 

C°m™fofe'  ^"  Witnesseih,  That  for  and  in  consideration  of 
Work.  the  payments  and  agreements  hereinafter  mentioned, 
to  be  made  and  performed  by  the  said  party  of  the 
first  part,  and  under  the  penalty  expressed  in  a  bond 
bearing  even  date  with  these  presents  and  hereunto 
annexed,  the  said  party  of  the  second  part  agrees 
with  the  said  party  of  the  first  part  to  commence  the 
work  herein  required  to  be  done,  within  fourteen 
days  after  the  signing  of  this  contract  and  to  proceed 
with  the  woik  in  such  order  and  at  such  times, 
points,  and  seasons,  and  with  such  force  as  may, 
from  time  to  time,  be  directed  by  the  engineer,  and 
at  his  own  proper  cost  and  expense,  to  do  all  the 
work  and  furnish  all  the  materials  called  for  by  this 
agreement,  in  the  manner  and  under  the  conditions, 
hereinafter  specified. 

Completion  of  And   the  said   party   of    the  second  part  hereby 

' Work*  agrees  to  complete  all  the  work  called  for  under  this 
agreement,  in  all  parts  and  requirements  and  in  full 
conformity  with  the  plans  and  specifications  on  or 
before  November  i,  1896;  provided,  however,  that 
the  water  board  shall  have  the  right  at  their  discre- 
tion to  extend  the  time  for  said  completion  of  the 
work.  It  is  further  agreed  that  the  permitting  of 
said  party  of  the  second  part  to  go  on  and  finish 
said  work  after  the  time  specified  for  its  completion 
shall  not  operate  as  a  waiver  of  any  of  the  rights  of 
said  city  under  this  contract. 

Referee.  B.  To  prevent  all  disputes  and  litigation  it  is  fur- 
ther agreed,  by  and  between  the  parties  to  this  con- 
tract, that  the  city  engineer  of  Boston  (meaning 
thereby  the  individual  at  any  time  holding  the  posi- 
tion or  acting  in  the  capacity  of  the  engineer  of  the 
Boston  Water  Board)  shall  be  referee  in  all  cases  to 
determine  the  amount  or  the  quantity  of  the  work 
which  is  to  be  paid  for  under  this  contract,  and  to- 


SPECIFICATIONS   AND   CONTRACT   FOR   DAM. 


373 


decide  all  questions  which  may  arise  relative  to  the 
fulfillment  of  this  contract  on  the  part  of  the  con- 
tractor, and  his  estimates  and  decisions  shall  be  final 
and  conclusive ;  also  that  said  engineer,  by  himself, 
or  by  assistants  and  inspectors,  acting  for  him,  shall 
inspect  the  work  to  be  done  under  this  agreement  to 
see  that  the  same  is  done  strictly  in  accordance  with 
the  requirements  of  the  specifications  hereinafter  set 
forth. 

C.  The  parties  further  agree  that  wherever  in  this 
contract  the  words  defined  below  are  used,  they  shall 
be  understood  to  have  the  meanings  herein  given: 

The  term   "water  board"  shall  mean  the  Bos-  Water  Board, 
ton  Water  Board,  or   any  board  or   committee  duly 
authorized   to   represent   the   city  of  Boston  in    the 
execution  of  the  work  covered  by  this  contract. 

The  word   "engineer"  when  not  further  quali-  Engineer, 
fied,  shall  mean  the  said    city  engineer   or  his  prop- 
erly  authorized    agents,    limited    by    the    particular 
duties  entrusted  to  them. 

The  word    "contractor"   shall  mean  the  person   Contractor, 
or  persons,  co-partnership  or  corporation,  who  have 
entered  into  this  contract  as  party  of  the  second  part, 
or  his  or  their  legal  representatives. 

D.  It  is   further   agreed  that  the  quantities  of  work 
to  be  done  and   materials  to   be  furnished,  as  given 
in  the  accompanying  notice  to   contractors  are  only 
for  the  purpose  of  comparing  the  bids  offered  for  the 
work  under   the    contract  on  a  uniform  basis ;  and  it 
is    hereby    agreed    that    the     Boston    Water    Board 
expressly  reserves  the   right   to  increase  or  diminish 
the  above  mentioned  quantities,   or  any  of  them,  as 
may  be  deemed  necessary  by  the  engineer. 

E.  The  plans  and  specifications  are  intended  to  be   Plans, 
explanatory  of  each  other ;    but   should  any  discrep- 
ancy appear,  or  any  misunderstanding  arise  as  to  the 
import  of   anything   contained  in  either,  the  parties 
hereto  further  agree  that  the  explanation    and  deci- 
sion of  the  city  engineer  shall  be  final  and  binding  on 

the  contractor;  *and  all  directions  and  explanations 
required,  alluded  to,  or  necessary  to  complete  any 
of  the  provisions  of  this  contract  and  specifications 
and  give  them  due  effect,  shall  be  given  by  the  said 
engineer.  Corrections  of  errors  or  omissions  in " 
drawings  or  specifications  may  be  made  by  the  said 
engineer,  when  such  corrections  are  necessary  for 
the  proper  fulfillment  of  the  intention  of  such  draw- 
ings or  specifications,  the  effect  of  such  corrections 


374 


COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 


to  date  from  the  time  that   the   said  engineer  gives 
due  notice  thereof  to  said  contractor. 

Alterations.  F.  It  is  further  agreed  that  the  city  engineer  may 
make  alterations  in  the  line,  grade,  plan,  form,  posi- 
tion, dimensions,  or  material  of  the  work  herein 
contemplated,  or  of  any  part  thereof,  either  before 
or  after  the  commencement  of  construction.  If  such 
alterations  diminish  the  quantity  of  work  to  be  done, 
they  shall  not  constitute  a  claim  for  damages,  or  for 
anticipated  profits  on  the  work  that  may  be  dis- 
pensed with ;  if  they  increase  the  amount  of  work, 
such  increase  shall  be  paid  for  according  to  the 
quantity  actually  done,  and  at  the  price  established 
for  such  work  under  this  contract ;  or  in  case  there 
is  no  price  established,  it  shall  be  paid  for  at  its 
actual  reasonable  cost  as  determined  by  the  city 
engineer,  plus  fifteen  per  cent,  of  said  cost. 

SPECIFICATIONS    FOR    BUILDING    DAM   NO.    5    OF    THE 


Plans. 


Borings. 


General  De- 
scription. 


SUDBURY  RIVER  WORKS. 

G.  i.  The  contractor  is  to  furnish  all  the  material 
and  do  all  the  work  necessary  to  build  a  dam  on  the 
Stony  Brook  branch  of  the  Sudbury  river  near  the  site 
of  Nichol's  Mill,  so  called,  in  the  town  of  South- 
borough,  Mass.  The  dam  to  be  in  accordance  with 
plans  marked  Dam  No.  5,  dated  June  16,  1893, 
signed  by  William  Jackson,  city  engineer,  and  filed 
in  the  office  of  the  city  engineer,  City  Hall,  Boston. 
The  work  will  also  be  built  in  conformity  with  these 
specifications. 

These  plans  show  only  the  general  character  of 
the  work,  and  during  its  progress  such  working  plans 
will  be  furnished  from  time  to  time  by  the  engineer 
as  he  may  deem  necessary. 

The  character  of  the  materials  to  be  met  with, 
as  shown  on  said  plans,  is  the  result  of  such  exami- 
nations as  the  city  of  Boston  has  been  able  to  make ; 
but  no  guarantee  is  made  as  to  the  accuracy  of  the 
borings  or  test  pits  or  the  representations  on  the 
plans. 

2.  The  dam  is  to  be  built  partly  of  masonry 
and  partly  of  earth,  approximately  on  the  lines  shown  ; 
but  if  the  character  of  the  materials  or  circumstances 
arise  which  render  it  advisable  to  change  the  location 
of  the  dam  or  to  change  the  plans  of  the  dam  the 
city  of  Boston  expressly  reserves  the  right  so  to  da 
without  payment  of  damages  to  the  contractor,  but 


SPECIFICATIONS   AND   CONTRACT   FOR   DAM.  375 

all  work  actually  completed  will  be  paid  for  as  per 
prices  bid  for  the  whole  work. 

The  earth  embankments  will  contain  plastered 
concrete  core  walls.  Water-tight  material  will  be 
placed  next  these  walls  on  the  water  side.  The 
embankments  will  be  protected  from  wash  by  linings 
of  riprap  or  paving.  A  walk  will  be  built  on  the  top 
of  the  dam,  and  other  slopes  and  surfaces  covered 
with  soil  as  directed.  The  embankments  will  be 
separated  from  the  masonry  overfall  by  heavy  wing 
walls.  A  gate-house  with  wells  and  appurtenances 
as  shown  will  be  built  next  to  the  north  wing  v\  all. 
The  "masonry  portion"  of  the  dam  will  be  about 
300  feet  in  length  and  will  be  a  solid  mass  of  rubble 
masonry  faced  with  range  stones  laid  in  courses. 

Where  the  rock  is  of  poor  quality  or  for  other 
reasons,  it  may  seem  to  the  engineer  to  be  desirable, 
the  core  walls  both  in  the  center  of  the  embankments 
and  under  the  masonry  section  may  be  carried  down 
deep  into  the  rock. 

3.  The  work  to  be  done  in  a  general  way  con-  ^°0rjeto  be 
sists  in  stripping  the  site  of  the  dam  ;  building  up 
the  embankments  in  layers,  and  in  paving  or  other- 
wise protecting  their  surfaces;  doing  all  blasting, 
rock  and  timber  wrork ;  constructing  all  masonry ; 
building  in  all  iron  work  in  connection  with  brick  or 
other  masonry ;  laying  pipes  through  the  dam  ;  cloing 
all  pumping  or  other  temporary  wrork  in  connection 
with  the  permanent  work,  and  delivering  over  to  said 
city  of  Boston  the  whole  structure  in  a  complete  con- 
dition with  the  masonry  all  pointed  and  writh  the 
dam  ready  to  be  put  into  service  in  accordance  with 
the  plans  and  these  specifications. 

All  work  during  its  progress  and  on  its  comple-  Lines, Grades, 

e  iiT  i  -  •    *     •  «    Levels.Plans. 

tion  must  conform  truly  to  the  lines,  grades,  and 
levels  to  be  determined  and  given  hereafter  by  the 
engineer,  and  due  facilities  and  such  assistance  and 
materials  as  he  may  require  must  be  furnished  by  the 
contractor  without  extra  charge,  and  the  engineer's 
marks  must  be  carefully  preserved.  The  work  must 
also  be  built  in  accordance  with  the  plans  and  direc- 
tions which  shall  be  given  by  him  from  time  to  time, 
subject  to  such  modifications  and  additions  as  said 
engineer  shall  deem  necessary  during  the  prosecution  . 
of  the  work,  and  in  no  case  will  any  work  which  may 
be  performed,  or  any  materials  furnished  in  excess 
of  the  requirements  of  this  contract  or  of  the  plans  or 


376  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

of  the  specifications,  be  estimated  and  paid  for, 
unless  such  excess  shall  have  been  ordered  by  the 
water  board  as  hereinafter  set  forth. 

^^e  contractor  is  to  furnish  all  temporary 
flumes,  all  materials  and  all  tools,  implements, 
machinery,  and  labor  necessary  or  convenient  for 
doing  all  the  work  herein  contracted  for,  with  safety 
to  life  and  property  in  accordance  W7ith  this  contract, 
and  within  the  time  specified  herein ;  he  will  be 
required  to  construct  and  put  in  complete  working 
order  the  work  herein  specified,  and  is  to  perform 
and  construct  all  the  work  covered  by  this  agree- 
ment; the  whole  to  be  done  in  conformity  with  the 
plans  and  these  specifications ;  and  all  parts  to  be 
done  to  the  satisfaction  of  the  city  engineer. 
Soi1'  4.  The  soil  is  to  be  removed  from  the  grounds 

where  the  dam,  embankments,  and  other  works  are 
to  stand.  Wherever  directed  by  the  engineer  said  soil 
to  be  hauled  and  put  in  spoil  banks,  to  remain  until 
required  to  be  placed  over  the  finished  surfaces  of 
slopes  or  embankments.  The  quantities  of  soil 
removed  will  be  measured  in  the  spoil  banks  and 
paid  for  as  stipulated  in  article  Q.  item  («). 

The  slopes  of  the  embankment  are  to  be  covered 
with  soil  taken  from  the  spoil  banks ;  if  any  addi- 
tional soil  is  needed  for  the  work,  it  shall  be 
obtained  and  taken  from  such  grounds  as  may  be 
designated  by  the  engineer,  and  deposited  wherever 
ordered  by  him ;  all  soil  removed  from  the  spoil 
banks,  or  .from  such  grounds  as  the  engineer  may 
designate,  shall  be  measured  in  excavation.  It  will 
be  rolled  or  otherwise  compacted,  and  paid  for  as 
stipulated  in  article  Q,  item  (##). 

All  surfaces  which  rre  required  to  be  afterwards 
sodded  or  seeded  are  to  be  covered  with  soil  at  least 
twenty-four  inches  in  thickness. 

S°dsdeefingd  5'     The   embankments   of  the    dam,    and  such 

other  surfaces  as  may  be  designated  by  the  engineer, 
are  to  be  sodded  or  seeded  with  grass  seed. 

All  the  surfaces   to  be  sodded   or  seeded   are  to 
be   carefully    graded   and    particular  care    taken   to 
make  a  true  and  even  bearing  for  the  sods  to  rest  on. 
Sods>  The  sods  to  be  of  good  quality  of  earth  covered 

with  heavy  grass,  sound  and  healthy,  and  not  less 
than  one  foot  square,  and  generally  of  a  uniform 
thickness  of  three  inches.  These  sizes  may  be 
altered  by  the  engineer  during  the  progress  of  the 
work.  The  sods  will  be  cut  with  a  bevel  on  all 


SPECIFICATIONS   AND    CONTRACT   F01J.  DAM.         377 

sides,  so  that  when  laid  they  will  lap  at  the  edges; 
to  be  properly  set  so  as  to  have  a  full  bearing  on  • 
their  whole  lower  surface ;  to  be  padded  down  firm  with 
a  spade  or  wooden  bat  made  suitable  for  the  purpose  ; 
each  sod  is  to  be  pinned  with  one  wooden  pin,  not 
less  than  fifteen  inches  long,  so  as  to  be  secured  to 
the  ground  beneath  it,  and  to  be  so  laid  that  the 
upper  surface  shall  conform  to  the  true  slope  of  the 
bank  or  ground  and  to  the  lines  given  by  the 
engineer.  No  lean,  poor,  or  broken  sods  will  be 
allowed  in  the  work,  but  on  the  outside  edges  of  the 
bank  sods  may  be  cut  to  such  size  and  shape  as  will 
make  a  proper  finish  to  the  same.  The  engineer 
may  alter  all  the  above  sizes  during  the  progress  of 
the  work. 

The  sodding  that  shall  have  been  laid  shall  be 
well  and  carefully  sprinkled  with  water  as  often  as 
the  engineer  shall  deem  necessary. 

6.  The  engineer  may  specify  the  kind,  quality,    Seeding:, 
and    amount    of   seed   to    be   used    on    all    surfaces 
ordered  to  be  seeded,    and   he   may  also  direct  the 
manner  of   seeding,  including  roiling  and  watering; 

EARTH  EXCAVATION  AND  EMBANKMENT. 

7.  Earth    excavation    is    to  be   made  for    the 
foundations,  center  walls,  etc..  and  for  any  grading 
that  may  be  required  either  above  or  below  the  dam, 
or  for  any  other  work  in  connection   with  the  dam, 
structures,  or  appurtenances  which  the  engineer  may 
order,   but  no   payment  will  be   made  for  earth  or 
other  excavation  unless  specifically  staked  out  and 
ordered  by  the  engineer.      The  price  bid  for  excava- 
tion will  cover  all  excavations  by  the  contractor  for 
his  own 'convenience  or  for  temporary  or  protecting 
work,  none  of  which  will  be  measured   or  estimated 
by  the  engineer. 

8.  Earth   excavation   is   to  be  made  in  accord-   Excavation, 
ance  with  the  lines   established  by  the  engineer,  and 

the  price  herein  stipulated  for  earth  excavation- 
article  Q,  item  (c) — is  to  include  the  work  of  clear- 
ing and  grubbing  the  ground  of  all  trees,  stumps, 
bushes,  and  roots,  and  burning  or  otherwise  dispos- 
ing of  the  same ;  of  sheeting  and  bracing  and  sup- 
porting and  maintaining  all  trenches  and  pits  during 
and  after  excavation;  of  all  pumping,  ditching  and 
draining;  of  clearing  the  excavation  of  all  wood  or 
other  objectionable  materials,  of  se'ecting  the  mate- 
rials, and  of  hauling  and  of  disposing  of  the  exca- 


378 


COMPLETE   SPECIFICATIONS. 


Measure- 
ment. 


Embank- 
ment. 


vated  materials  in  making  embankments,  in  filling, 
•     refilling,  and  wasting;   of  rolling  and  watering,  and 
all  other  labor  and  expenses  incidental  to  the  hand- 
ling of  the  excavated  materials. 

Spoil  Banks.  ^     Whenever,  in  the  opinion  of  the   engineer, 

the  material  excavated  from  the  pits  and  trenches 
can  not  properly  be  disposed  of  in  embankment  or 
for  other  work  at  one  hauling,  it  shall  be  deposited 
in  spoil  banks,  and  paid  for  under  article  Q,  item 
(c),  and  if  subsequently  ordered  to  be  used  in  the 
work,  it  shall  be  paid  for  a  second  time  under  article 
Q,  item  (cc). 

10.  All  earth  work  paid  for  under  article  Q, 
items  (c)  and  (cc),  shall  be  measured  in  excavation. 

11.  The  embankments  for  the  dam  shall   start 
from    a    well    prepared    base,    stepped    on    sloping 
ground,  and  shall  be  carried  up  in  horizontal  layers 
not  exceeding  four  inches  in  thickness;   every  layer 
to   be   carefully  rolled,    either   with   heavy  grooved 
rollers,  or  steam  rollers,   and    to    be    well  watered. 
The   earth  to  be  well  rammed  with  heavy  rammers 
at  such  points  as  can  not  be  reached  by  the  rollers. 
Special  care  shall  be  required  in  ramming  the  earth 
close  to  the  center  wall,  which  shall  always  be  kept 
at  least  two  feet  higher  than  the  adjoining  embank- 
ment,   unless    otherwise    permitted.     The  embank- 
ments of  the  dam  shall  be  kept  at  an  uniform  height 
on  both  sides   of  the  masonry   during   construction, 
and  at  no  time  will  the  down-stream  half  of  the  dam 
be  allowed  to  be  higher  than  the  up-stream  portion. 

At  all  times  the  earth  embankment  must  be 
kept  three  feet  above  the  "masonry  portion"  of  the 
dam. 

Watering.  12.     Ample  means  shall  be  provided  for  wrat^r- 

ing  the  banks,  and  any  portion  of  the  embankment 
to  which  a  layer  is  being  applied  shall  be  so  wet, 
when  required,  that  water  will  stand  on  the  surface. 

The  contractor  shall  furnish  at  his  own  cost  the 
necessary  steam  pumping  plant  and  force-main  for 
forcing  water  into  a  tank  situated  on  the  side  hill,  at 
least  fifty  feet  above  the  top  of  the  dam  when  com- 
pleted. From  this  tank  a  three-inch  distribution 
pipe,  fitted  with  gates  and  hose  connections,  will 
lead  lengthwise  over  the  dam  to  supply  water  wher- 
ever it  may  be  needed.  If  the  engineer  approves, 
some  other  method  of  equal  efficiency  for  the  fur- 
nishing of  water  may  be  substituted  for  the  above 


SPECIFICATIONS   AND   CONTRACT   FOll   DAM.         379 

plant.  This  work  is  included  in  the"  price  to  be 
paid  for  earth  excavation. 

13.  All   the   grounds   covered  by  the  dam  and   ^^^^ 
by  the  borrow  pits  shall  be  cleared  of  all  soil,  stones, 

trees,  stumps,  or  other  organic  or  perishable  matter, 
which  shall  be  deposited  at  such  points  as  shall  be 
designated.  If  the  borrow  pits  are,  in  the  opinion 
of  the  engineer,  sufficiently  near  the  dam,  the  soil 
or  other  useful  materials  may  be  removed  to  the 
spoil  banks  and  measured,  otherwise  they  will  not 
be  measured.  Stumps  and  other  vegetable  substances 
shall  be  burned. 

14.  The    surfaces    of    embankments    shall  be 
dressed   smoothly   to   line   and  grade  to  receive  the 
soil  or  broken  stones  supporting  the  paving  or  riprap, 

15.  The  earth  used  for  the  embankments  shall   Quality  of 
be  free  from  perishable-  material   of   all   kinds,   and      Earth, 
from  stones  larger  than  three  inches  in  diameter,  ,md 

it  shall  be  of  a  quality  approved  by  the  engineer. 
The  portion  of  the  embankment  next  to  the  core- 
wall  on  the  up-stream  side  of  the  dam  and  the  refill- 
ing of  all  trenches  will  be  composed  of  hard-pan  or 
other  fine,  compact,  or  selected  material  approved 
by  the  engineer,  who  shall  decide  upon  the  quality 
and  character  of  the  earth  to  be  used  at  various 
places,  and  it  must  be  selected  and  placed  in  accord- 
ance with  his  orders. 

1 6.  AH  excavation    and  disposal    in  embank-   ciassifica- 
ments  and  refilling    of    earth,    hard-pan,    and    other      tion> 
materials,   shall  be  classified  and  estimated  as  earth 
excavation,    and    paid  for    at  the    price    hereinafter 
stipulated,  article  Q,  item  (c). 

ROCK    EXCAVATION. 

17.  Rock  excavation  is  to  include  the  excava- 
tion of  all  solid  rock  which  can  not,  in  the  opinion 
of    the  engineer,  be    removed    by  picking,   and    of 
bowlders  of  one  cubic  yard  or  more  in  size  ;   the  price 
hereinafter    specified — article    Q,   item  (aT) — to  be 
paid  for  rock  excavation   shall  include  the  work  of 
hauling  and  disposing  of  the  same  in  spoil  banks  or 
other  places. 

18.  Rock    excavation    shall    be    measured    in 
excavation,  and  estimated  for  payment  in  accordance   How  Meas- 
vvith  the  lines  given  by  the  engineer.     No  excavation 
outside  of  these  lines  will  be  estimated. 

19.  Rock  is  to  be  excavated  for  the  foundations 
of  the  dam,  core-walls,  and  gate-house,  and  wherever 
the  engineer  may  order. 


380  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

Steps.  20.      In  the  wall  and  pipe  trenches  and  in  the 

foundation  for  the  gate-house  or  other  structures, 
the  rock  is  to  be  shaped  roughly  in  steps  or  other 
form  that  may  be  ordered  by  the  engineer. 

The  price  bid  for  rock  excavation  is  to  include 
the  cost  of  supporting  and  maintaining  the  excava- 
tions, of  pumping  and  draining,  of  disposing  of  the 
excavated  materials  as  ordered  by  the  engineer,  and 
all  other  incidental  expenses. 

Explosives.  21.     All  rock  excavation  in  the  wall   trenches 

and  at  any  other  place  designated  by  the  engineer  is 
to  be  made  with  explosives  of  a  moderate  power, 
under  his  directions,  and  not  wTith  high  explosives. 
Black  powder  may  be  ordered  by  him  to  be  used  in 
special  cases. 

22.  All  rock    surface    intended    for    masonry 
foundation  must  be  freed  from  all    loose  pieces,  and 
be  firm  and  solid,  and  prepared  as  directed  by  the 
engineer. 

FOUNDATION    WORK. 

23.  The  foundation  wrork  for  the  centre  walls 
of  the  dam  and  for  other  structures  is  to  be  extended 
to  such  depth   and  in    such   a  manner  as    shall     be 
ordered    by    the    eng'neer.      In    bad    bottom,    sheet 
piling,  tonged    and    grooved,    may  be  ordered  to  be 
driven  or  placed  on  one  or  more  sides    of    the  work. 
If  the  material  of  excavation  is   such,  in    the  opinion 
of  the  engineer,   as  to  require  especial  precaution, 
the  trenches  for  the  centre  wall  and  for  other  struc- 
tures   may  be  ordered    extended  to  a  great    depth, 
beyond  the  indications   of    the  plans.      The  position 
of  the  bed  rock  being  uncertain,  it  is  impossible  to 
indicate  the  bottom  of  the  core-wall  with   accuracy, 
and  it  is  distinctly  understood  that  the  lines  for  the 
foundation  shown  on  the  plans  are  not  guaranteed 
by  the  city  to  be  correct. 

PROTECTIVE     WORK. 

24.  The  contractor  will  be  required  at  his  own 
expense  to  take  care  of  all  water  which  may  come 
down  the  stream  during  the  progress  of  the  work, 
and  to    make  good    any  damage  done  to    the  dam 
from  freshets    or  other   action  of    the  water  or  the 
elements. 

TIMBER. 

25.  Timber  may  be  ordered  used  for  platforms, 
for  permanent  sheet-piling,  and  for  other  permanent 


SPECIFICATIONS   AND    CONTKACT   FOU   DAM.         381 


Tongued  and 
Grooved 
Timber. 


uses.     It  shall    be  of   the  sizes    and  placed    in  the 
manner  ordered  by  the  engineer. 

26.  All    timber    and    lumber    so  used  shall  be 
spruce,  sound,   straight  grained,    and  free    from  all 
shakes,   loose    knots,    and    other    defects,  that    may 
impair  its    strength  and    durability.      The  price  b.d 
for  timber  shall  cover  all  incidental  expenses  incurred 
for  labor,  or  for  tools  or  materials  used  in  placing, 
securing,  and  fastening  it. 

27.  No    payment    shall    be    made    to  the  con- 
tractor for  lumber  used    for    bracing,  sheeting,  scaf- 
folding, and  other  temporary  purposes. 

28.  All  sheeting  and  other  timber  work  in  the 
trenches    and    pits    shall    be  removed  unless    it  is 
ordered  left  in,  in  which  case    such    timber    shall  be 
paid  for  as  herein    stipulated — article  Q,  item  (e) — 
for  permanent  timber  work. 

29.  The  timber  to    be   used  for  sheet-piling  in 
the    foundations    and    other    places  may  be  ordered 
tongued    and  grooved.     Such    timber   shall    be  fur- 
nished and  placed  as  ordered,  and  the    price  herein- 
after stipulated — article  Q,   item   (ee) — for   tongued 
and  grooved  timber  is  to  cover  the    cost    of  placing, 
driving,  securing,  and  fastening  the  same. 

MASONRY. 

30.  All  masonry,  except  where  otherwise  spec- 
ified, shall  be  laid  in  hydraulic  cement  mortar,   and 
shall  be  built  of  the  forms  and  dimensions  shown  on 
the  plans,  as  directed  by  the   engineer  from  time  to 
time,  and  the  system  of  bonding  ordered  by  the  engi- 
neer shall  be  strictly  followed. 

31.  All  beds  and  joints  must  be  entirely  filled 
with  mortar,  and  the  work  in  all  cases  shall  be  well 
and  thoroughly  bonded. 

32.  Care   must  be    taken  that  no    water  shall 
interfere  with  the  proper  laying   of  masonry  in  any 
of  its  parts. 

33.  All    means    used    to    prevent   water  from 
interfering  with  the  work,  even  to  the  extent  of  fur- 
nishing and  placing  pipes  for  conducting  the  water 
away  from  points  where  it  might  cause  injury  to  the 
work,  must  be  provided  by  the  contractor  at  his  own 
expense. 

34.  Under  no  circumstances  will   masonry  be 
allowed  to  be  laid  in  water. 

35.  All   iron-work,  except  the   sluice-gates,  is    iron-work, 
to  be  built  in  the  masonry  without   other  compensa- 


Water. 


Pipes. 


382 


COMPLETE   SPECIFICATIONS. 


Freezing 
Weather. 


Sprinkling. 


Cement. 


tion  than  the  price  herein  stipulated  to  be  paid  per 
cubic  yard  of  masonry.  The  pipes,  special  castings 
and  other  iron  work  will  be  furnished  and  deliverd 
by  the  city  on  the  site  of  the  dam,  and  must  then  be 
carefully  protected,  handled  and  laid  by  the  con- 
tractor in  a  thorough  manner  as  directed  by  the  engi- 
neer. 

36.  No   masonry  is  to  be   built  between   the 
1 5th  of  November  and  the  i5th  of  April,  or  in  freez- 
ing weather,  except  by  permission  of  the  engineer. 

All  masonry  to  be  amply  protected  from  the 
action  of  frost  during  the  winter.  The  contractor 
will  be  required  to  make  good  any  damage  resulting 
from  frost  on  any  portion  of  the  work. 

37.  All  fresh  masonry,  if    allowed  to  be  built 
in  freezing  weather,  must  be   covered  and  protected 
in  a  manner  satisfactory  to  the  engineer,  and  during 
hot  weather  all   newly-built  masonry   shall  be  kept 
wet  by  sprinkling  water  on  it  with  a   sprinkling  pot 
until  it  shall  have  become  hard   enough  to   prevent 
its   drying  and   cracking,   and  if    necessary  canvass 
coverings  must  be  provided. 

38.  American    cement    and    Portland   cement 
are  to  be  used.     The  American  cement  must  be  in 
good  condition  and  must  be  equal  in  quality  to  the  best 
Rosendale  cement.     It  must  be   made   by  manufac- 
turers of  established   reputation,  must   be  fresh  and 
very    fine    ground,   and    in   well-made    casks.      The 
Portland  cement  must  be  of  a  brand  equal  in  quality 
to  the  best  English  Portland  cement.     To  insure  its 
good  quality,  all  the  cement   furnished   by  the  con- 
tractor  will    be   subject  to  inspection  and   rigorous 
tests;   and  if  found  to   be    of  improper  quality,   will 
be  branded  and  must  be  immediately  removed  from 
the  work;  the  character  of  the  tests  to  be  determined 
by  the  engineer.     The  contractor  shall,  at  all  times, 
keep  in  store  at  some  convenient  point  in  the  vicinity 
of  the  work,  a  sufficient  quantity  of  cement  to  allow 
ample  time  for  the  tests  to  be    made  without  delay 
to  the  work  of  construction.     The  engineer  shall  be 
notified  at  once  of  each  delivery  of  cement.    It  shall 
be  stored  in   a   tight  building,   each  cask  must   be 
raised  several  inches  above  the    ground,  by  blocking 
or  otherwise. 

39.  Cement  is  generally  to  be  used  in  the  form 
of  mortar  with  an  admixture  of  sand,   and  when  so 
used,  its  use  is  included  in  the  price  herein  stipulated 


SPECIFICATIONS   AND   CONTRACT   FOR   DAM.         383 

for  the  various  kinds  of  masonry.  For  the  founda- 
tion work,  however,  Portland  cement  may  be 
ordered  by  the  engineer  in  exceptionally  wet  and 
difficult  places,  to  be  used  with  or  without  any 
admixture  of  sand  for  grouting  seams  or  for  such 
other  purposes  as  he  may  direct.  The  cost  of  plac- 
ing said  cement  will  be  paid  by  the  city,  the  price  to 
be  paid  to  be  estimated  by  the  engineer  unless  other- 
wise stipulated.  Such  cement  is  to  be  paid  for  per 
barrel  of  .four  hundred  pounds,  furnished  and  deliv- 
ered by  the  contractor  at  the  place  where  it  must  be 
used.  .See  article  Q,  item  (_/"). 

40.  All  mortar  shall  be  prepared  from  cement  Mortar 
of   the    quality  before   described,  and    clean,  sharp 
sand.     These  ingredients  shall  be  thoroughly  mixed 

dry,  as  follows:  The  proportion  of  cement  ordered, 
by  measure,  with  the  ordered  proportion  of  sand, 
also  by  measure;  and  a  moderate  dose  of  water  is  to 
be  afterwards  added  to  produce  a  paste  of  proper 
consistency ;  the  whole  to  be  thoroughly  worked 
\\  ith  hoes  or  other  tools.  In  measuring  cement  it 
shall  be  packed  as  received  in  casks  from  the  manu- 
facturer. The  mortar  shall  be  freshly  mixed  for  the 
\vork  in  hand,  in  proper  boxes  made  for  the  purpose ; 
no  mortar  to  be  used  that  has  become  hard  or  set. 
If  the  mortar  ingredients  are  mixed  at  some  distance 
from  the  work,  water  shall  not  be  added  until  the 
mortar  has  been  brought  to  the  dam  and  is  ready  for 
use. 

41.  The  price  herein  stipulated  for  the  various 
kinds  of  masonry  is  contingent  on  the  use  of  a  mortar 
made  of  a  mixture  of  one  part  in  a  volume  of  Amer- 
ican cement  to  twro  parts  of  sand.     Additional  prices 
are  herein  stipulated  for   the  use  of  mortars  formed 
with  a  different  mixture  of  cement  and  sand.     Article 
Q,  items  (5),  (0,  (*0,  (*>)• 

42.  The    concrete   shall    be    formed  of  sound 
broken  stones  or  screened  gravel  stones  not  exceed- 
ing two  inches  at  their  greatest  diameter.     All  stones 
in  any  way  larger  are  to  be  thrown  out.     The  mate- 
rials to  be  cleaned  from   dirt   and  dust  before  being 
used ;   to  be  mixed  in   proper  boxes,  with  mortar  of 
the  quality  before  described,  in  the  proportion  of  five 
parts  of  broken  stone  to  one  part  of  cement ;   to  be 
laid  immediately  after  mixing,  and  to  be  thoroughly 
compacted  throughout  the  mass  by  ramming  till  the 
water  flushes  to  the   surface ;  the   amount  of  water 
used    for    making    the   concrete  to   be   approved  or 


384 


COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 


Plastering. 


Brick  Ma- 
sonry. 


directed  by  the  engineer.  The  concrete  shall  be 
allowed  to  set  for  twelve  hours,  or  more,  if  so  directed, 
before  any  work  shall  be  laid  upon  it;  and  no  walk- 
ing over  or  working  upon  it  shall  be  allowed  while  it 
is  setting.  Article  Q,  item  Qr). 

43.  Whenever  ordered  by  the  engineer  the  con- 
Crete  shall  be  formed  of  broken   stone  not  exceeding 
one  inch  at  their  greatest  diameter,  used  in  the  pro- 
portion of  three  parts  of  broken  stone  to  one  part  of 
cement.     Article  Q,  item  (gg). 

44.  The  up-stream  faces  of  all  core-walls,  and 
such  other  surfaces  as  the  engineer  may  direct,  will 
be  thoroughly  plastered  with  a  half  inch  coat  of  Port- 
land cement  plastering  put  on  in  two  portions  as  fol- 
lows:     Next  the  concrete  a  thick  coating  of  Portland 
cement  mortar  will    be    put    on,  mixed    in   the    pro- 
portion of  one  part  of  cement  to  one  of  sand,  rubbed 
to  a  uniform  surface   and   left  rough;   over  this  will 
be  smoothly  spread  with  trowels  a  coat  of  neat  Port- 
land  cement  which  shall   be    thoroughly  worked    to 
make  a  perfectly  water-tight  surface.      All  plastering 
will  be  measured  and  paid  for  by  the  square  yard  of 
superficial  surface  as  per  article  Q,  item  (^). 

45.  The  bricks  shall  be  of  the  best  quality  of  hard- 
burned  bricks;    burned  hard  entirely  through,  regular 
and  uniform  in  shape  and  size,  and  of  compact  text- 
ure.    To  insure  their  good  quality,  the  bricks  fur- 
nished by  the  contractor  will  be  subject  to  inspection 
and  rigorous  tests,  and  if  found  of  improper  quality 
will  be  condemned,  the  character  of  the   tests  to  be 
determined  by  the   engineer.      They  are  to  be  culled 
before  laying  at  the  expense   of   the   contractor,  and 
all  bricks  of  an  improper  quality  shall  be   laid    aside 
and  removed ;   the  engineer  to  be  furnished  with  men 
for  this  purpose,  by  and  at  the   expense   of  the  con- 
tractor. 

46.  All  brick  masonry  shall  be  laid  with  bricks 
of  the  quality  before  described  and  in  Portland  cement 
mortar  mixed   one  part  of   cement  to  two  of  sand. 
No  4'bats"   shall  be    used    except    in    the    backing, 
where  a  moderate  proportion  (to   be  determined  by 
the  engineer)  may  be  used,  but  nothing  smaller  than 
"half  bricks."      The  bricks  to  be  thoroughly  wet  just 
before  laying.     Every  brick  to  be  completely  imbed- 
ded  in  mortar   under  its  bottom    and   on   its   sides. 
Care  shall  be  taken  to  have  every  joint  full  of  mortar 
and  all  joints  shall  be  pointed. 


SPECIFICATIONS   AND   CONTRACT   FOE   DAM. 


385 


Paving. 


Broken 

Stones. 


47.  All  centering  shall  be  made,  put  up,  and  Centering. 
removed  in  a  manner  satisfactory  to  the  engineer. 

48.  All  stone  masonry  is  to  be  built  of  sound, 
clean  quarry  granite  stone  of  quality  and  size  satis- 
factory  to    the    engineer;   all    joints    to     be    full  of 
mortar,  unless  otherwise  specified. 

49.  Paving  is  to  be  laid  without  mortar,  and  is 
to  be  used  for  portions  or  the  whole  of  the  slopes  of 
the  dam  embankments,  and  at  any  other  place  that 
may  be  designated. 

50.  This  work  is  to  be  measured  in  accordance 
with  the  lines  shown  on  the  drawings  or  ordered  dur- 
ing the  progress  of  the  work.     The  stones  used  must 
be  roughly  rectangular;   all  irregular  projections  and 
feather  edges  must  be  hammered  off.     No  stone  will 
be  accepted  which  has  less  than  the  depth  represented 
on  the  plans  or  ordered.     Each  stone  used  must  be 
set  solid  on  the  foundation  of  broken  stone  or  earth 
and  no  interstices  must  be  left. 

51.  After  the  slopes  which  are  to  receive  the 
paving  have  been  dressed,  a  layer  of  broken  stone, 
nine  inches  thick  or  less,  is  to  be  spread  as  a  founda- 
tion for  the  paving  wherever  ordered.     The  broken 
stone  must  be  sound  and  hard,  not  exceeding    two 
inches  at  the  greatest  diameter.     Broken  stones  may 
be  used    also  wherever  the  engineer  may  direct,  and 
paid    for   under  this    head.     Article    Q,    item    (/). 
The    cost    of    the    broken    stone    used    for    making 
concrete  is  included  in  the  price  hereinbefore  stipu- 
lated for  concrete  laid. 

52.  Riprap  instead  of  paving  may  be  used  for 
covering    a    large    portion    of  the  dam  slopes,   and   RlPraP- 
wherever  the  engineer  may  order.      It  shall  be  made 

of  stone  of  such  size  and  quality  and  in  such  manner 
as  he  shall  direct,  and  must  be  roughly  laid  by  hand. 
It  will  generally  be  put  on  in  thick  layers,  and  if 
found  cheaper  will  probably  be  substituted  for  paving 
on  the  lower  slopes  of  the  dam  below  the  berm. 

53.  Rubble-stone  masonry  is  to  be  used  for  the  Rubbie. 
central  part  of  the  dam,  for  the  wing-walls  of  the 
earth  embankments,  for  the  gate-house,  and  wherever 
ordered  by  the  engineer. 

It  shall  be  made  with  sound  clean  stones  of  com- 
pact texture,  free  from  loose  seams  and  other  defects. 
They  must  have  roughly  rectangular  forms,  and  all 
irregular  projections  and  feather  edges  must  be 
hammered  off  before  the  stones  are  set.  The  beds 
25 


386 


COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 


Broken 
»    Ashlar. 


Rangework 


must  be  good  for  materials  of  this  class  and  must 
present  such  even  surfaces  that  when  lowering  a 
stone  on  the  surface  prepared  to  receive  it,  there 
may  be  no  doubt  that  the  mortar  will  fill  all  spaces. 

After  the  bed-joints  are  thus  secured,  a  moderate 
quantity  of  spalls  can  be  used  in  the  preparation  of 
suitable  surfaces  for  receiving  other  stones.  No 
spalling  up  under  a  stone  after  it  is  laid  will  be 
allowed,  neither  will  any  grouting  or  filling  of  joints 
be  allowed  after  the  stone  is  set.  Especial  care  is  to 
be  taken  to  have  every  stone  entirely  surrounded  by 
mortar. 

The  quality  of  the  beds  is  to  regulate,  to  a  large 
extent,  the  size  of  the  stones  used,  as  the  difficulty  of 
forming  a  good  bed-joint  increases  with  the  size  of 
the  stones.  Various  sizes  must  be  used. 

Generally  the  largest  stones  are  not  to  measure 
more  than  twenty  cubic  feet,  and  they  are  to  be  used 
in  the  proportion  of  about  twenty-five  per  cent,  of 
the  whole,  but  they  must  be  omitted  partially  or 
entirely  if  their  beds  are  not  satisfactory.  It  is 
expected  that  one  quarter  of  the  stones  used  will  be 
of  such  size  that  two  men  can  handle  them.  The 
balance  to  be  composed  of  intermediate  sizes. 
Regular  coursing  to  be  avoided. 

54.  The    exposed    faces    of    the    wing   walls, 
retaining  walls,  and  of  any  other  rubble  work  that  the 
engineer  may  designate,  are  to  be  made  of   broken 
ashlar  with  joints    not    exceeding    one  half    inch  in 
thickness;   the  stones  not  to  be  less  than   12  inches 
deep  from  the  face,  and  to  present  frequent  headers. 
The    joints    shall    be   pointed    with    neat    Portland 
cement.     This  face  work  is  to  be  paid  for  by  the 
square  foot  of  the   superficial  area  for  which   it  is 
ordered  in  addition  to  the  price  paid  per  cubic  yard 
of  rubble-stone  masonry,  but  the  right  is  reserved  to 
change  this  masonry  to  range  work,  should  it  be  for 
the  interest  of  the  city  so  to  do.   Article  Q,  item  (72). 

55.  The  outer  faces  of  the  masonry  dam,  and 
if    found    best    the     gate-chamber    and     any    other 
masonry  that  may  be  d  signated,  are  to  be  made  of 
range  stones,  as  shown  on  the  plans,  the  stones  to  be 
of  unobjectionable  quality,   sound  and  durable,  free 
from  all  seams  and  other  defects,  and  of  such  kind 
as  shall  be   approved  by'  the   engineer.     They  shall 
be  pointed  with  neat  Portland  cement. 

All  beds,  builds,  and  joints  are  to  be  cut  true  to 
a  depth  of  not  more  than  4  inches,  and  not  less  than 


SPECIFICATIONS    AND   CONTRACT   FOB   DAM.         387 

3  inches  from  the  faces  and  to  surfaces  allowing  of 
one.  half  inch  joints  at  most;  the  joints  for  the 
remaining  part  of  the  stones  not  to  exceed  2  inches 
in  thickness  at  any  point. 

56.  All  cut  arrises  to  be  true,  well  defined,  and   Arrises, 
sharp. 

57.  Where  this  class   of  masonry    joins    with 
dimension   stone  masonry   the   courses  must  corres- 
pond, and  the  joining  with  arches  and  other  dimen- 
sion stone  masonry  must  be  accurate  and  workman- 
like. 

Each  course  to  be  composed  of  two  stretchers   Bond- 
and   one   header  alternately,    the  stretchers   not  less 
than  3  feet  long  nor  more  than  7  feet  long. 

58.  The  rise  of  the  courses  may  vary  from  bot-   Courses, 
torn  to  top  from  30   inches   to  15  inches   in  approxi- 
mate vertical  progression,  and  the  width  of  bed  of 

the  stretchers  is  not  to  be  at  any  point  less  than  the 
height  nor  less  than  24  inches.  The  headers  are  not 
to  be  less  than  4  feet  in  length. 

This  class  of  masonry,  including  the  headers,  is   M^aes^tre* 
to  be  estimated  at  30  inches  thick  throughout.     In  no 
case  are  the  tails  of  the  headers  to  be  estimated. 

59.  The    coping   of    the    wing    walls  will  be   c°Pins- 
classed  as  coping  stone  masonry.     The  surfaces  will 

be  rough  pointed  to  the  circular  forms  given.  v  The 
capping  stones  to  the  posts  will  be  estimated  as 
dimension  stone  with  hammered  surfaces. 

60.  The  prices  herein  stipulated  for  range  and    Prices. 
broken  ashlar  stone  masonry  are  to  cover  the  cost  of 
pointing,   of  cutting  chisel  drafts  at  all  corners  and 
angles  in  the  work,  and  of  preparing  the  rock  faces ; 

but  if  any  six-cut  work  is  ordered  in  connection  with 
this  class  of  masonry  it  shall  be  paid  for  at  the  prices 
hereinafter  stipulated  for  such  work.  Article  Q, 
item  (r). 

61.  The   face   bond   must  not  show   less  than 
12  inches  lap  unless  otherwise  permitted. 

62.  The  pointing  of  the  faces  of  all  masonry   Pointing, 
in  the  dam,  gate-house,  and  wings  to  be  thoroughly 

done  with  neat  Portland  cement  after  the  structures 
are  completed,  every  joint  to  be  raked  out  therefor 
to  a  depth  of  at  least  2  inches,  and  if  the  engineer  is 
satisfied  that  the  pointing  at  any  place  is  not  properly 
done  it  must  be  taken  out  and  done  over  again.  The 
cement  is  to  be  mixed  in  small  quantities  and  applied 
before  its  first  setting. 


388 


COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 


Dimension 
sonry. 


Rock-face. 


Hammered 

Work. 


Grooves. 


Walk. 


63.  Dimension   stone  masonry  must  be  made 
of   first-class   granite   of  moderately   uniform  color, 
free  from  all  seams,  discoloration,  and  other  defects, 
and   satisfactory  to  the   engineer.      The  stones  shall 
be  cut  to  exact  dimensions,  and  all  angles  and  arrises 
shall  be  true,   well   defined,   and  sharp.     All  beds, 
builds,  and  joints  are  to  be  dressed  for  the  full  depth 
of  the  stone,  to  surfaces  allowing  of  one  quarter  (^) 
inch  joint   at   most.     No   plug-hole   of  more  than  6 
inches  across  or  nearer  than  3  inches  to  an  arris  is  to 
be  allowed,  and  in  no  case  must  the  aggregate  area 
of  the  plug-hole  in  any  joint  exceed  one  quarter   of 
its  whole  area. 

The  stone  shall  be  laid  with  one  quarter  (5O 
inch  joints,  and  all  face  joints  shall  be  pointed  with 
mortar  made  of  neat  Portland  cement,  applied  before 
its  first  setting.  All  joints  to  be  raked  out  to  a  depth 
of  two  inches  before  pointing ;  the  cost  of  pointing 
to  be  included  in  the  price  stipulated  for  cut  stone 
masonry. 

64.  In    rock    face    work    the    arrises    of    the 
stones   enclosing  the   rock  face  must  be   pitched  to 
true  lines;   the  face  projections  to  be  bold,  and  from 
3  to  5  inches  beyond  the  arrises.     The  angles  of  all 
walls    or   structures    having   rock    faces    are    to  be 
defined    by  a    chisel    draft  not  less    than   i^  inches 
wide  on  each  face. 

65.  In  fine   hammered   work  the   face   of  the 
stones    must   be    brought  to    a  true    plane  and  fine 
dressed,    with    a    hammer    having  six    blades  to  the 
inch. 

For  fine  hammer-dressing  (six-cut  work)  the 
price  stipulated  in  article  Q,  item  (r),  per  superfi- 
cial square  foot  of  dressing  will  be  paid  in  addition 
to  the  price  per  cubic  yard  of  masonry. 

66.  No    payment    will    be    made    for    cutting 
grooves  and  recesses  other  than  the  price  paid  for 
the  dressing  of  their  surfaces,  which  are  to  be  fine 
hammered. 

67.  The  contractor  will  build  a  walk  upon  the 
top  of  the  earthen  embankments.     It  will  be  8  feet 
wide  and  i  foot  in  depth,  composed  of  broken  stone 
9  inches  in  depth  and  a  thin  layer  of  selected  screen- 
ings and  binding  gravel  (as  ordered).      The   surface 
will  be  moistened  and  rolled  with  a  hand  roller  as 
directed.      The  broken  stone   screenings   and   gravel 
used  in  this   walk   will   not  be    included  in  any  other 
measurement.     Payment  will  be  made  for  the  fin- 


SPECIFICATIONS   AND   CONTEACT   FOB  DAM. 


389 


ished  walk  according  to  the  number  of  linear  or  run- 
ning feet  it  may  contain. 


GENERAL  CLAUSES. 


68.  If  any  person  employed  by  the  contractor   In^y™rpkeIJ1eeI1IJ 
on   the   work  should  appear   to  the  engineer  to  be 
incompetent,  or  to  act  in  a  disorderly  or  improper 
manner,  he  shall  be  discharged  immediately  on  the 
requisition  of  the  engineer,  and  such  person  shall  not 

be  again  employed  on  the  work. 

69.  Any  materials   condemned  or  rejected  by 
the  engineer  or  his  representatives  may  be  branded, 
or    otherwise    marked,    and    shall,    on   demand,   be 
at  once  removed  to  a  satisfactory  distance   from   the 
work. 

70.  Any   unfaithful   or   imperfect  work  which 
may  be  discovered  before  the  final  acceptance  of  the 
work  shall  be  corrected  immediately,  and  any  unsat- 
isfactory materials  delivered  shall  be  rejected  on  the 
requirement  of   the   engineer,    notwithstanding  that 
they    may    have    been    overlooked    by    the    proper 
inspector.      The    inspection    of    the    work  shall  not 
relieve   the    contractor   of   any  of   his   obligations  to 
perform   sound   work,  as  herein   prescribed ;   and  all 
work,  of  whatever  kind,  which,   during  its  progress 
and  before  it  is  finally  accepted,   may  become  dam- 
aged from  any  cause  shall  be  removed,  and  replaced 
by  good  and  satisfactory  work. 

.71.  Whenever  the  contractor  is  not  present  on  Orders 
any  part  of  the  work  where  it  may  be  desired  to 
give  directions,  orders  will  be  given  by  the  engineer 
to,  and  shall  be  received  and  obeyed  by,  the  super- 
intendent or  foreman  who  may  have  charge  of  the 
particular  work  in  relation  to  which  the  orders  are 
given. 

72 .  In  all  the  operations  connected  with  the  work 
herein  specified,  all  laws  or  regulations  controlling 
or  limiting  in  any  way  the  actions  of  those  engaged 
on  the  works,  or  affecting  the  methods  of  doing  the 
work  or  materials    applied  to  it,  must  be  respected 
and  strictly  complied  with  ;   and  during  the  progress 
of  the  work  the  contractor  shall  provide  such  precau- 
tions   as    may    be    necessary    to     protect    life    and 
property. 

73.  After  the  completion  of  the  work  the  con- 
tractor is  to  remove  all  temporary  structures  built  by 
him,  and  all  surplus  materials  of  all  kinds  from  the 
site  of  the  work,  and  to  leave  them  in  neat  condition. 


Obeyed- 


Laws. 


390 


COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 


Ways  and 
Means. 


Subletting.  H.  The  contractor  agrees  that  he  will  give  his  per- 
sonal attention  to  the  fulfillment  of  this  contract ;  and 
that  he  will  not  sublet  the  aforesaid  work,  but  will 
keep  the  same  under  his  control,  and  that  he  will  not 
assign,  by  power  of  attorney  or  otherwise,  any  'por- 
tion of  the  said  work,  unless  by  and  with  the  previous 
consent  of  the  water  board,  to  be  signified  by 
endorsement  on  this  agreement. 

I.  The  contractor  shall  furnish  the  necessary 
scaffolding,  ways,  and  all  necessary  means  and  con- 
veniences for  the  transfer  of  the  material  to  its 
proper  place  and  for  its  erection.  And  it  is  also  to 
be  understood  that  the  city  shall  not  be  held  respon- 
sible for  the  care  or  protection  of  any  materials  or 
parts  of  the  work  until  its  final  acceptance. 

Access.  J«  It  is  further  agreed  that  the  engineer,  or  his 
authorized  agent  and  assistants,  shall  at  all  times 
have  access  to  the  work  during  its  progress ;  and  he 
shall  be  furnished  with  every  reasonable  facility  for 
ascertaining  that  the  work  being  done  is  in  accord-' 
ance  with  the  requirements  and  intention  of  this 
contract. 

Alteration.  K.  Should  it  be  found  desirable  by*  the  water 
board  to  make  alterations  in  the  form  or  character  of 
any  of  the  work,  the  said  water  board  may  order 
such  alterations  to  be  made,  defining  them  in  writing 
and  drawings,  and  they  shall  be  made  accordingly; 
provided,  that  in  case  such  changes  increase  the  cost 
of  the  work,  the  contractor 'shall  be  fairly  remunera- 
ted;  and  in  case  they  shall  diminish  the  cost  of  the 
work,  proper  deduction  from  the  contract  price  shall 
be  made ;  the  amount  to  be  paid  or  deducted  to  be 
decided  by  the  city  engineer. 

Extra  work.  L.  The  contractor  hereby  agrees  that  he  will  do 
such  extra  work  as  may  be  required  by  the  water 
board  for  the  proper  construction  or  completion  of 
the  whole  work  herein  contemplated ;  that  he  will 
make  no  claims  for  extra  work  unless  it  shall  have 
been  done  in  obedience  to  a  written  order  from  the 
said  water  board  or  their  duly  authorized  agent ;  that 
all  claims  for  extra  wTork  done  in  any  month  shall  be 
filed  in  writing  with  the  engineer  before  the  fifteenth 
of  the  following  month;  and  that,  failing  to  file  such 
claims  within  the  time  required,  all  rights  for  pay  for 
such  extra  work  shall  be  forfeited.  The  price  to  be 
paid  for  all  extra  work  done  shall  be  its  actual  rea- 
sonable cost  to  the  contractor,  as  determined  by  the 
city  engineer,  plus  fifteen  per  cent. 


SPECIFICATIONS   AND   CONTRACT   FOE   DAM.         391 

M.  The  contractor  is  to  use  such  appliances  for  the  ^  liances> 
performance  of  all  the  operations  connected  with  the 
\vork  embraced  under  this  contract  as  will  secure  a 
satisfactory  quality  of  work  and  a  rate  of  progress 
which,  in  the  opinion  of  the  engineer,  will  secure  the 
completion  of  the  work  within  the  time  herein  speci- 
fied. If,  at  any  time  before  the  commencement  or 
during  the  progress  of  the  work,  such  appliances  ap- 
pear to  the  engineer  to  be  inefficient  or  inappropriate 
for  securing  the  quality  of  the  work  required  or  the 
said  rate  of  progress,  he  may  order  the  contractor  to 
increase  their  efficiency  or  to  improve  their  character, 
and  the  contractor  must  conform  to  such  order;  but 
the  failure  of  the  engineer  to  demand  such  increase 
of  efficiency  or  improvement  shall  not  relieve  the 
contractor  from  his  obligation  to  secure  the  quality 
of  work  and  the  rate  of  progress  established  in  these 
specifications. 

N.  The  said  contractor  further  agrees  that  if  the 
work  to  be  done  under  this  contract  shall  be  aban- 
doned, or  if  at  any  time  the  engineer  shall  be  of  the 
opinion,  and  shall  so  certify  in  writing  to  the  water 
board,  that  the  said  work  is  unnecessarily  or  unrea- 
sonably delayed,  or  that  the  said  contractor  is  willfully 
violating  any  of  the  conditions  or  agreements  of  this 
contract,  or  is  not  executing  said  contract  in  good 
faith,  or  fails  to  show  such  progress  in  the  execution 
of  the  work  as  will  give  reasonable  grounds  for  an- 
ticipating its  completion  within  the  required  time, 
the  said  \vater  board  shall  have  power  to  notify  the 
said  contractor  to  discontinue  all  work,  or  any  part 
thereof,  under  this  contract;  and  thereupon  the  said 
contractor  shall  cease  to  continue  said  work,  or  such 
part  thereof,  as  the  said  water  board  may  designate ; 
and  the  said  water  board  shall  thereupon  have  the 
right,  at  their  discretion,  to  contract  with  other  par- 
ties for  the  delivery  or  completion  of  all  or  any  part 
of  the  work  left  uncompleted  by  said  contractor,  or 
for  the  correction  of  the  whole  or  any  part  of  said 
work.  And  in  case  the  expense  so  incurred  by  said 
water  board  is  less  than  the  sum  which  would  have 
been  payable  under  this  contract  if  the  same  had  been 
completed  by  the  said  contractor,  then  the  said  con- 
tractor shall  be  entitled  to  receive  the  difference ;  and 
in  case  such  expense  shall  exceed  the  last  said  sum, 
then  the  contractor  shall,  on  demand,  pay  the  amount 
of  such  excess  to  the  said  city,  on  notice  from  the 
said  water  board  of  the  excess  so  due ;  but  such  ex- 


392  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

cess  to  be  paid  by  the  contractor  shall  not  exceed  the 
amount  of  the  security  for  the  performance  of  .  this 
contract. 

O.  The  said  contractor  further  agrees  that  the  said 
water  board  may,  if  they  deem  it  expedient  to  do  so, 
retain  out  of  and  amounts  due  to  the  said  contractor 
sums  sufficient  to  cover  any  unpaid  claims  of 
mechanics  or  laborers  for  work  or  labor  performed 
under  this  contract;  provided,  that  notice  in  writing 
of  such  claims,  signed  by  the  claimants,  shall  have 
been  previously  filed  in  the  office  of  the  city  clerk. 
P.  The  said  contractor  further  agrees  that  he  will 
indemnify  and  save  harmless  said  city  from  all  claims 
against  said  city,  under  chapter  one  hundred  and 
ninety-one  of  the  Public  Statutes  of  Massachusetts, 
and  any  laws  passed  since  the  Public  Statutes,  with 
reference  to  liens  on  buildings  and  lands,  for  labor 
done  and  materials  furnished  under  this  contract, 
and  shall  furnish  the  said  water  board  with  satis- 
factory evidence,  when  called  for  by  them,  that  all 
persons  who  have  dorre  work  or  furnished  materials 
under  this  contract,  for  which  the  said  city  may 
become  liable,  and  all  claims  from  the  various 
departments  of  the  city  government,  or  private  cor- 
porations, or  individuals,  for  damage  of  any  kind 
caused  by  the  construction  of  said  work,  have  been 
fully  paid  or  satisfactorily  secured ;  and  in  case  such 
evidence  is  not  furnished,  an  amount  necessary  and 
sufficient  to  meet  the  claims  of  the  persons  aforesaid 
shall  be  retained  from  any  moneys  due,  or  that  may 
become  due,  the  said  contractor  under  this  contract, 
until  the  liabilities  aforesaid  shall  be  fully  discharged 
or  satisfactorily  secured. 

The  said  contractor  further  agrees  that  he  will 
indemnify  and  save  harmless  the  said  city  from  all 
suits  or  actions,  of  every  name  and  description, 
brought  against  the  said  city  for  or  on  account  of 
any  injuries  or  damages  received  or  sustained  by 
any  person  or  persons,  by  or  from  the  said  con- 
tractor, his  servants  or  agents,  in  the  construction  of 
said  work,  or  by  or  in  consequence  of  any  negli- 
gence in  guarding  the  same,  or  any  improper  mate- 
rials used  in  its  construction,  or  by  or  on  account  of 
any  act  or  omission  of  the  said  contractor  or  his 
agents ;  and  the  said  contractor  further  agrees  that 
so  much  of  the  money  due  him  under  and  by  virtue 
of  this  agreement  as  shall  be  considered  necessary  by 
the  said  engineer  may  be  retained  by  the  said  city 


SPECIFICATIONS   AND   CONTRACT   FOE   DAM.         393 

until  all  such  suits  or  claims  for  damages  as  afore- 
said shall  have  been  settled,  and  evidence  to  that 
effect  furnished  to  the  satisfaction  of  the  said  engi- 
neer. 

Q.  And  the  said  contractor  further  agrees  to  receive 
the  following  prices  as  full  compensation  for  furnish- 
ing all  the  materials,  and  for  doing  all  the  work  con- 
templated and  embraced  in  this  agreement ;  also,  for 
all  loss  or  damage  arising  out  of  the  nature  of  the 
work  aforesaid,  or  from  the  action  of  the  elements, 
or  from  any  unforeseen  obstruction  or  difficulties 
which  may  be  encountered  in  the  prosecution  of  the 
same ;  and  for  all  risks  of  every  description  con- 
nected with  the  work ;  also,  for  all  expense  incurred 
by  or  in  consequence  of  the  suspension  or  discon- 
tinuance of  said  work  as  herein  specified,  and  for 
well  and  faithfully  completing  the  work,  and  the 
whole  thereof,  in  the  manner  and  according  to  the 
plans  and  specifications,  and  the  requirements  of 
the  engineer  under  them,  to  wit: 

(a)  For  the  removal  of  soil  excavated  and 
placed  in  spoil  banks,  including  all  incidental  work, 
the  sum  of ($ )  per  cubic  yard. 

(«#)  For  the  removal  of  soil  taken  from  spoil 
banks  or  from  other  places  and  placing  on  the  slopes 
of  the  embankment,  including  all  incidental  work, 
the  sum  of ($ )  per  cubic  yard. 

(3)     For  sodding,  including  all  incidental  work, 

the  sum   of  ($ )  per  superficial   square 

yard. 

(£<5)  For  seeding,  including  all  incidental 
work,  the  sum  of ($ )  per  acre. 

(c)  For  earth  excavation,  including  its  dis- 
posal in  embankments  and  refilling,  or  as  otherwise 
ordered  by  the  engineer,  and  all  incidental  work,  the 
sum  of ($ )  per  cubic  yard. 

(cc)  For  rehandling  of  excavated  materials 
from  spoil  banks,  and  placing,  including  all  incident- 
al work,  the  sum  of ($ )  per  cubic  yard. 

(^)  For  rock  excavation,  including  its  dis- 
posal, and  all  incidental  work,  the  sum  of — : 

($ )  per  cubic  yard. 

(tf)  For  permanent  timber  work,  except 
tougued  and  grooved  timber,  placed,  including  all 

incidental     work,     the   sum  of ($ )     per 

thousand  feet  B.  M. 


394  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

(ee)  For  permanent  timbet  work,  tongued  and 
grooved,  placed,  including  all  incidental  work,  the 
sum  of ($ )  per  thousand  feet  B.  M. 

(jO  For  Portland  cement  ordered  by  the  en- 
gineer, delivered  where  ordered  on  the  work,  in  bar- 
rels containing  four  hundred  pounds,  including  all 

incidental  work,  the  sum  of ($ )  per 

barrel. 

(£")  For  concrete  masonry,  in  place,  formed  of 
five  parts  of  broken  stone  or  screened  gravel,  to  one 
part  of  cement,  and  made  with  American  cement 
mortar  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  part  of  cement 
to  two  parts  of  sand,  including  all  incidental  work, 
the  sum  of ($ )  per  cubic  yard. 

(gg)  For  concrete  masonry,  in  place,  formed 
of  three  parts  of  broken  stone  or  screened  gravel  to 
one  part  of  cement  and  made  with  American  cement 
mortar  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  part  of  cement 
to  two  parts  of  sand,  including  all  incidental  work, 
the  sum  of ($ )  per  cubic  yard. 

(^)  For  plastering  all  concrete  wralls  with 
Portland  cement,  including  all  incidental  work,  the 
sum  of ($ )  per  superficial  square  yard. 

(z)  For  brick  masonry,  laid  in  Portland 
cement  mortar  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  part 
of  cement  to  two  parts  of  sand,  and  including  all 
pointing,  centering,  etc.,  and  removing  the  same, 

and  all  incidental  work,  the  sum  of  ($ ) 

per  cubic  yard. 

(_/')  For  paving  in  place,  including  all  inci- 
dental work,  the  sum  of  ($ )  per  cubic 

yard. 

(£)  For  riprap  in  place,  including  all  inci- 
dental work,  the  sum  of  ($ )  per  cubic 

yard. 

(/)  For  broken  stone  in  place  (other  than  that 
used  in  making  concrete  and  the  walk),  including 

all  incidental  work,  the  sum  of ($ )  per 

cubic  yard. 

(«»)  For  rubble-stone  masonry,  laid  in  Ameri- 
can cement  mortar  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one 
part  of  cement  to  two  parts  of  sand,  including  all 

incidental  work,  the  sum  of ($ )  per  cubic 

yard. 

(TZ)  For  face  work  of  broken  ashlar,  in  addi- 
tion to  the  price  paid  per  cubic  yard  as  rubble, 
including  pointing  in  neat  Portland  cement,  and  all 


SPECIFICATIONS  AND   CONTKACT  FOE  DAM.         395 

incidental  work,  the  sum  of  ($ )  per 

superficial  square  foot. 

(0)  For  facing  stone  masonry  of  range  stones 
laid  in  American  cement  mortar  mixed  in  the  pro- 
portion of  one  part  of  cement  to  two  parts  of  sand 
and  pointing  in  neat  Portland  cement,  including  all 

incidental  work,  the  sum  of ($ )  per  cubic 

yard. 

(/)  For  coping  laid  in  place,  and  pointed  in 
neat  Portland  cement,  including  all  incidental  work, 

the  sum  of  ($ )  per  linear  or  running 

foot. 

(^)  For  dimension  stone  masonry  laid  in 
American  cement  mortar  mixed  in  the  proportion  of 
one  part  of  cement  to  two  parts  of  sand,  including 
pointing  in  neat  Portland  cement,  centering,  etc., 

and  all  incidental  work,  the  sum  of ($ ) 

per  cubic  yard. 

(r)  For  fine  hammer  dressing  (six-cut  work) 

the  sum  of  : —  ($ )  per  superficial  square 

foot. 

(.?)  For  all  kinds  of  masonry  laid  in  American 
cement  mortar  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  part 
of  cement  to  one  part  of  sand,  in  addition  to  the 
prices  per  cubic  yard  hereinbefore  stipulated  to  be 
paid  for  the  same  class  of  masonry  laid  in  American 
cement  mortar  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  part 

of  cement  to  two  parts  of  sand,  the  sum  of 

($ )  per  cubic  yard. 

(tf)  For  all  kinds  of  masonry  laid  in  Portland 
cement  mortar  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  part 
of  cement  to  one  part  of  sand,  in  addition  to  the 
prices  per  cubic  yard  hereinbefore  stipulated  to  be 
paid  for  the  same  class  of  masonry  laid  in  American 
cement  mortar  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  part 

of  cement  to  two  parts  of  sand,  the  sum  of 

($ )  per  cubic  yard. 

(«)  For  all  kinds  of  masonry  laid  in  Portland 
cement  mortar  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  part 
of  cement  to  two  parts  of  sand,  in  addition  to  the 
prices  per  cubic  yard  hereinbefore  stipulated  to  be 
paid  for  the  same  class  of  masonry  laid  in  American 
cement  mortar  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  part 

of  cement  to  two  parts  of  sand,  the  sum  of 

($ )  per  cubic  yard. 

(x>)  For  all  kinds  of  masonry  laid  in  Portland 
cement  mortar  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  part 


396  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

of  cement  to  three  parts  of  sand,  in  addition  to  the 
price  per  cubic  yard  hereinbefore  stipulated  to  be 
paid  for  the  same  class  of  masonry  laid  in  American 
cement  mortar  mixed  in  the  proportion  of  one  part 

of  cement  to  two  parts  of   sand,    the   sum  of 

($ )  per  cubic  yard. 

(w)  For  building  walk,  including  all  inci- 
dental work,  the  sum  of ($ )  per  linear 

or  running  foot. 

(#)  For  all  extra  work  done  by  written  order 
of  the  Boston  Water  Board,  its  actual  reasonable  cost 
to  the  contractor,  as  determined  by  the  engineer, 
plus  fifteen  per  cent,  of  said  cost. 
R.  And  it  is  agreed  that  payment  for  the  work 
embraced  in  this  contract  shall  be  made  in  the  fol- 
lowing manner: 

A  payment  will  be  made,  on  or  about  the  first 
day  of  each  month,  of  85  per  centum  of  the  value  of 
the  work  completed  in  place  by  the  contractor  on 
the  fifteenth  of  the  previous  month,  as  estimated  by 
the  engineer. 

Provided,  however,  that  the  making  of  such 
payment  may  be  deferred  from  month  to  month, 
when,  in  the  opinion  of  the  engineer,  the  value  of 
work  done  since  the  last  estimate  for  payment  is  less 
than  one  thousand  dollars. 

The  said  contractor  further  agrees  that  he  shall 
not  be  entitled  to  demand  or  receive  payment  for 
any  portion  of  the  aforesaid  work  or  materials,  until 
said  work  shall  have  been  completed  to  the  satisfac- 
tion of  the  city  engineer  and  the  said  city  engineer 
shall  have  given  his  certificate  to  that  effect ;  where- 
upon the  said  city  will,  within  forty  days  after  such 
completion,  and  the  delivery  of  such  certificate,  pay 
the  said  contractor  the  whole  amount  of  money 
accruing  to  the  said  contractor  under  this  contract, 
excepting  such  sum  or  sums  as  may  be  lawfully 
retained  by  said  city. 

Provided,  that  nothing  herein  contained  be  con- 
strued to  affect  the  right  hereby  reserved  of  the  said 
water  board  to  reject  the  whole  or  any  portion  of 
the  aforesaid  work,  should  the  said  certificate  be 
found  or  known  to  be  inconsistent  with  the  terms  of 
this  agreement,  or  otherwise  improperly  given. 
S.  The  parties  hereto  further  agree  that  this  con- 
tract shall  be  in  writing,  and  executed  in  triplicate, 
one  of  which  triplicates  shall  be  kept  by  the  said 
engineer,  one  to  be  delivered  to  the  city  auditor  of 


SPECIFICATIONS   AND   CONTRACT   FOB   DAM.         397 

said  Boston,  and  one  to  the  said  contractor;  that 
this  contract  shall  be  utterly  void  as  to  the  said  city 
if  any  person  appointed  to  any  office,  or  employed 
by  virtue  of  any  ordinance  of  said  city,  is  either 
directly  or  indirectly  interested  therein. 

And  the  said  contractor  further  agrees  that  he 
will  execute  a  bond  in  the  sum  of  one  hundred 
thousand  dollars  ($100,000)  and  with  such  sureties 
as  shall  be  approved  by  the  said  Boston  Water  Board, 
to  keep  and  perform  well  and  truly  all  the  terms  and 
conditions  of  this  contract  on  his  part  to  be  kept  and 
performed  and  to  indemnify  and  save  harmless  the 
said  water  board  as  herein  stipulated. 
T.  And  it  is  also  to  be  understood  and  agreed 
that,  in  case  of  any  alterations,  so  much  of  this 
agreement  as  is  not  necessarily  affected  by  such 
alterations  shall  remain  in  force  upon  the  parties 
.hereto. 

U.  And  the  said  contractor  hereby  further  agrees 
that  the  payment  of  the  final  amount  due  under  this 
contract  and  the  adjustment  and  payment  of  the  bill 
rendered  for  work  done  in  accordance  with  any 
alterations  of  the  same,  shall  release  the  city  from 
any  and  all  claims  or  liability  on  account  of  work 
performed  under  said  contract  or  any  alteration 
thereof. 

In  Witness  Whereof,  the  parties  to  these  pres- 
ents have  hereunto  set  their  hands  the  year  and  day 
first  above  written. 
The     City    of  Bos-  ( 

ton,  by  its  Boston  1  

Water  Board. 


SIGNED  in  the  presence  of 


Know  all  Men  by  these  Presents, 

That  we 

are  held  and  firmly  bound  unto  the  CITY  OF  BOS- 
TON, in  the  sum  of . 

dollars,  to  be  paid  to  the  CITY   OF   BOSTON,  or 


398  COMPLETE   SPECIFICATIONS. 

its  certain  attorney,  its  successors  and  assigns,  for 
which  payment,  well  and  truly  to  be  made,  we  bind 
ourselves,  our  heirs,  executors,  and  administrators, 
jointly  and  severally,  firmly  by  these  presents. 

The  Condition  of  this  obligation  is  such  that 

if  the  above-bounden 

shall  well  and  truly  keep  and  perform  all  the  terms 
and  conditions  of  the  foregoing  contract  for  building 

Dam  No.  5,  in  the  town  of  Southborough  on 

part  to  be  kept  and  performed,  and  shall  indemnify 
and  save  harmless  the  said  CITY  OF  BOSTON, 
as  therein  stipulated,  then  this  obligation  shall  be  of 
no  effect;  otherwise  it  shall  remain  in  full  force  and 
virtue. 

In    Witness  Whereof,  we  hereto  set  our  hands 

and  seals   on   this day  of in  the  year 

eighteen  hundred  and  ninety-three. 


SIGNED  AND  SEALED  in  presence  of 


174.     SPECIFICATIONS   FOR   THE  STRUCTURAL 
IRON  WORK 

OF  A 

HOTEL  BUILDING, 

TO  BE    ERECTED  ON  THE  SOUTHWEST  CORNER  OF    34-TH    STREET 
AND  5TH  AVENUE  FOR  JOHN    JACOB    ASTOR. 

H.  J.  HARDENBERGH,  PURDY  &  HENDERSON, 

Architect,  Consulting  Engineers, 

New  York.  New  York  and  Chicago. 

MAY,  1895. 

In  order  to  understand  the  business  relations  involved  in 
the  following  specifications,  some  explanation  of  them  is  neces- 
sary. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR   STEEL   HOTEL  BUILDING.      399 

Messrs.  Purdy  and  Henderson,  the  consulting  engineers, 
are  under  contract  with  Mr.  H.J.Hardenbergh,  architect,  to  furn- 
ish those  parts  of  the  plans  and  specifications  for  the  building 
which  relate  to  the  iron  and  steel  frame  work.  They  are  also 
under  contract  with  Mr.  Downey,  the  agent  of  the  owner,  to 
prepare  all  the  shop  drawings,  to  supervise  the  inspection,  to  su- 
perintend the  erection  of  the  steel  frame  work,  to  check  all  bills 
rendered  by  the  contractor  for  this  portion  of  the  work,  and,  in 
general,  to  see  that  all  the  contracts  relating  to  this  part  of  the 
building  are  faithfully  fulfilled.  The  contract  for  the  iron  and 
steel  work  was  let  on  a  pound  basis  erected.  A  separate  set 
of  specifications  were  prepared  for  the  inspection  of  the  work, 
and  also  one  for  the  use  of  the  computers  and  draftsmen  in  pre- 
paring detail  plans.  It  will  thus  be  seen  that  the  consulting 
engineers  are  under  contract  to  do  a  great  deal  more  in  this 
matter  than  is  usually  expected  of  the  architect,  and  much  more, 
therefore,  than  the  architect  could  afford  to  pay  for,  if  all  this 
service  had  to  be  remunerated  out  of  his  professional  fees.  In 
the  most  common  practice,  the  owner  checks  his  own  bills,  pays 
the  contractor  for  the  shop  drawings  and  divides  the  remaining 
portion  of  this  additional  service  with  the  architect.  Only  a 
small  portion  of  the  additional  fee  paid  the  engineer  by  this 
arrangement  is  consequently  an  added  expense.  It  is  important 
that  consulting  engineers  should  make  contracts  with  the  owner 
for  the  additional  detail  work  and  supervision  as  well  as  with 
the  architect  for  the  preparation  of  the  general  plans.  This 
kind  of  a  double  connection  is  desirable  and  likely  to  secure 
the  most  satisfactory  service. 

The  steel  construction  described  in  these  specifications  is 
that  for  a  new  hotel  adjoining  The  Waldorf  on  the  north,  cor- 
ner 34th  street  and  Fifth  avenue,  New  York  city.  The 
building  is  in  plan  350  feet  by  100  feet,  and  is  sixteen  stories 
high  above  the  sidewalk,  with  basement  and  sub-basement, 
extending  35  feet  belovv  ground.  It  is  the  largest  steel  con- 


400  COMPLETE   SPECIFICATIONS. 

structed  building  ever  designed,  containing  over  10,000 
tons  of  structural  iron.  The  exterior  of  the  building  is 
finished  with  stone  to  the  height  of  three  stories  above 
the  sidewalk,  and  with  brick,  with  terra  cotta  trimmings, 
above  that  line.  The  construction  involves  many  unusual 
conditions,  such  as  a  ballroom  on  the  second  story  100 
feet  long,  and  85  feet  wide,  with  vaulted  ceiling  reaching  to 
the  fifth  floor.  The  floors  above  this  great  room,  and  also  the 
roof,  are  carried  on  two  trusses  extending  through  four  stories, 
the  total  load  carried  by  the  two  being  about  nine  million 
pounds.  The  columns  in  the  walls  around  this  ballroom  are 
from  60  to  70  feet  in  length,  and  some  of  them  carry  over  three 
million  pounds  each.  There  is  also  a  large  dining  room  on  the 
first  floor,  which  necessitates  the  use  of  very  heavy  trusses,  and 
difficult  and  costly  work.  The  spaces  between  the  columns 
are  unusually  long,  35  and  40  feet  being  common,  thus  requir- 
ing an  unusual  quantity  of  plate  girder  work.  In  several  other 
places  in  the  building,  rooms  extend  through  two  stories,  and 
the  roof  on  three  sides  has  a  Mansard  slope  fifty  feet  in  height, 
with  large  towers  on  the  three  street  corners.  All  the  details 
have  been  worked  out  with  great  care,  and  the  business  rela- 
tions of  the  engineer  of  construction  to  both  the  architect  and 
the  owner  are  considered  ideal. 

Specifications  Explained:  These  specifications  are  sup- 
plemental to  the  contract  already  entered  into  for  the  construc- 

tural  iron  and  steel  work  of  this  building,  between 

,  parties  of  the  first  part,*  and ,  parties  of  the 

second  part.  They  are  the  specifications  referred  to  in  the  first 
clause  of  said  contract,  and  which  are  to  be  considered  a  part 
of  that  contract. 

These  specifications  are  intended  to  cover  all  the  structural 
iron  work  in  said  building.  They  are  intended  to  co-operate 
with  the  drawings  for  the  same,  both  those  furnished  by  the 
architect  and  those  furnished  by  the  engineers  as  hereinafter 
specified,  and  what  is  called  for  by  either,  is  as  binding  as  if 
called  for  by  both.  They  are  intended  to  describe  and  provide 

*  Mr.  Astor's  agent,  who  stands  as  the  party  of  the  first  part  in  these  specifications, 
is  Mr.  John  Downey,  and  he  is  so  named  in  various  parts  of  the  document. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOE   STEEL   HOTEL   BUILDING.      401 

for  a  finished  piece  of  work.  The  contractor  will  understand 
that  the  steel  construction  herein  described  is  also  to  be  complete 
in  every  detail,  and  in  every  portion  of  the  work,  and  all  mate- 
rial entering  into  it  is  to  be  first-class,  and  he  will  be  expected 
to  thoroughly  understand  the  construction  and  to  fully  inform 
himself  in  regard  to  any  points  that  he  may  not  clearly  under- 
stand, for  what  is  herein  intended  to  be  described,  viz. :  The 
complete  and  perfect  construction  of  the  building  is  the  thing 
required.  When  necessary  or  desirable,  he  must  apply  to  the 
architect  or  the  engineers  for  further  details  or  specifications 
during  construction  or  before  proceeding  with  his  work. 

Requirements  Outlined:  This  contractor  must  furnish  and 
set  all  the  iron  and  steel  shown  or  referred  to  in  these  specifica- 
tions and  called  for  by  the  said  drawings  hereinbefore  referred 
to,  and  when  the  erection  is  completed,  he  must  remove  all  the 
materials  used  in  performing  the  work.  He  must  furnish  in  all 
cases  the  exact  sections,  weights  and  kinds  of  material  that  are 
called  for,  and  he  must  follow  exact  details,  methods  and  in- 
structions called  for  by  these  specifications  and  said  drawings. 
He  must  set  the  iron  work  as  fast  as  may  be  considered  practi- 
cal in  the  judgment  of  the  architect,  always  keeping  at  least  one 
story  in  advance  of  the  masonry.  He  will  be  expected  to  give 
this  work  his  personal  supervision,  or  have  a  capable  man  at 
all  times  to  take  care  of  it.  He  must  also  do  all  the  cutting  and 
fitting  that  may  be  required  in  his  work  to  receive  the  work  of 
other  contractors. 

Reference  in  Case  of  Dispute:  Should  any  difference  of 
opinion  or  dispute  arise  in  relation-to  the  meaning  of  these 
specifications,  or  of  the  said  drawings  furnished  by  either  the 
architect  or  the  engineers  as  hereinafter  specified,  reference 
must  be  made  to  the  engineers,  but  if  their  decision  is  not  sat- 
isfactory appeal  may  be  made  to  the  architect,  whose  decision 
on  all  such  points  shall  be  final  and  conclusive. 

Drawings:  The  general  dimensions,  arrangement  and  sec- 
tions required  for  the  structural  iron  work  herein  specified,  are 
shown  on  the  general  structural  iron  drawings  prepared  and  fur- 
nished by  the  architect,  and  included  in  pages 

to , inclusive. 

The  sections  given  are  those  of  the  Carnegie  Steel  Com- 
pany's manufacture.  In  general,  these  drawings  are  made  to 
scale,  but  scale  dimensions  must  never  be  used.  These  draw- 
ings, together  with  these  specifications,  are  the  property  of  the 
architect,  to  whom  all  copies  must  be  returned  on  the  comple- 
tion of  the  work.  Detail  or  shop  drawings,  including  drawings 
of  every  part  and  piece  of  the  work,  with  all  the  lists,  schedules, 
indexes,  erection  plans  or  other  directions  necessary  lor  the 
proper  manufacture,  finish  and  erection  of  the  work  covered 
2G 


402  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

by  these  specifications,  and  the  said  general  drawings  prepared 
by  the  architect,  will  be  made  and  furnished  by  the  engineers. 

Blue  prints  of  the  shop  drawings,  lists  and  schedules,  as 
many  copies  of  each  as  are  necessary,  but  not  more  than  five, 
will  be  furnished  to  the  contractor  for  his  use  in  the  manufac- 
ture of  the  material.  Another  complete  set  of  these  prints, 
together  with  one  complete  set  of  prints  of  the  erection  draw- 
ings, will  be  furnished  to  the  contractor  for  use  in  erection. 
One  complete  set  of  all  the  drawings,  plans,  lists  and  schedules 
will  be  furnished  to  the  inspector.  All  the  above-mentioned 
prints  will  be  furnished  by  the  engineers,  free  of  expense. 
Additional  prints  of  any  of  these  drawings  may  be  taken  by  said 
contractor  or  inspector,  if  desired,  at  their  own  expense,  but 
originals  taken  from  the  office  for  that  purpose  must  be  promptly 
returned. 

Orders:  All  materials  required  to  be  furnished  or  work  to 
be  done  under  these  specifications  or  by  the  said  general  structural 
iron  drawings,  prepared  by  the  architect,  will  be  ordered  by  the 
engineers  from  time  to  time  with  the  shop  drawings,  lists, 
schedules,  etc.,  for  the  same,  as  fast  as  they  can  be  prepared, 
and  the  contractor  for  the  structural  iron  work  must  order  no 
material  and  perform  no  work  under  these  specifications  until 
he  has  received  the  said  detail  drawings,  lists  and  schedules  for 
the  same.  Bolts  or  other  material  used  temporarily  for 
erection  purposes  are  not  included  in  this  specification. 

Extras  and  Bills :  No  additional  work  or  material,  over  and 
above  what  is  called  for  by  said  detail  drawings,  lists  and  sched- 
ules, prepared  and  furnished  as  hereinbefore  provided,  will  be 
allowed  unless  ordered  by  the  architect  in  writing.  When  said 
detail  drawings,  lists  and  schedules  are  received  by  the  con- 
tractor, they  -must  be  immediately  examined  to  determine 
whether  the  material  and  work  called  for  by  the  same  may  be 
properly  classified  in  the  price  classification  contained  in  the 
contract  hereinbefore  referred  to,  and  of  which  these  specifica- 
tions are  considered  a  part ;  or,  in  any  supplemental  agreement 
that  may  be  made  to  said  contract.  In  case  either  or  both  may 
not  be  properly  classified,  in  said  price  classification,  the  engi- 
neers must  be  promptly  notified  of  the  fact  in  writing,  and  a 
copy  of  such  notification  must  also  be  sent  to  the  architect.  If 
no  reply,  verbal  or  written,  to  such  notification  is  received 
within  three  days,  a  second  notification  must  be  sent  the  same 
as  the  first,  but,  in  any  case,  the  work  called  for  by  such  detailed 
drawings,  lists  or  schedules  must  proceed  without  delay,  unless 
the  contractor  shall  receive  written  instructions  to  the  contrary 
from  the  architect  or  engineers. 

No  bill  for  extra  work  ordered  by  the  architect  as  herein 
provided,  or  not  called  for  by  said  drawings,  lists  or  schedules 
will  be  approved  by  the  architect  unless  it  is  rendered  imme- 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOB   STEEL   HOTEL   BUILDING.      403 

diately  upon  the  completion  and  acceptance  of  said  work.  All 
bills  for  material  or  work  not  properly  included  in  the  price 
classification  hereinbefore  referred  to,  must  be  made  separate 
from  the  bills  for  work  and  material  properly  covered  by  said 
price  classification.  All  bills  must  be  made  sufficiently  in 
derail  to  permit  of  their  ready  verification.  The  originals  of 
all  bills  must  be  sent  to  the  engineers,  Purdy  &  Henderson,  and 
exact  duplicates  must,  at  the  same  time,  be  sent  to  John 
Downey,  parties  of  the  first  part  in  the  contract  hereinbefore 
referred  to. 

Building  Laws:  This  contractor  must  comply  with  all 
municipal  or  corporation  ordinances  and  the  laws  and  regula- 
tions relating  to  buildings  in  the  city  of  New  York. 

Risks:  This  contractor  will  be  liable  and  responsible  for 
any  damage  to  life,  limb  or  property  that  may  arise  or  occur  to 
any  party  whatever,  either  from  accident  or  owing  to  his  negli- 
gence, or  that  of  his  employees  during  the  operations  of  con- 
structing or  completing  the  works  herein  specified. 

Rubbish  :  This  contractor  must  remove  from  the  premises 
all  rubbish  arising  from  his  operations  as  the  work  proceeds 
and  at  completion  of  same. 

Signs:  No  signs  of  any  description  will  be  allowed  to  be 
placed  on  or  about  the  building  or  premises. 

Co-operation  and  Cleaning  Up :  This  contractor  must  co- 
operate with  the  contractors  for  the  other  parts  of  the  building, 
so  that  when  completed  it  shall  be  in  accordance  with  the 
architect's  design  and  a  complete  and  perfect  piece  of  work. 
He  must  arrange  and  carry  on  his  work  in  such  a  way  that  the 
other  contractors  shall  not  be  delayed,  subject  always  to  the 
architect.  When  his  work  is  finished  he  must  remove  from  the 
premises  all  the  tools,  apparatus,  machinery,  scaffolding,  and 
the  debris  pertaining  to  his  part  of  the  work,  and  leave  the  job 
free  from  all  obstruction. 

Kind  of  Material  Required:  All  material  required  for 
the  trusses,  and  all  the  material  required  for  the  flanges  of 
riveted  girders  must  be  open  hearth  steel. 

All  other  material  required  for  riveted  members,  and  the 
beams  and  channels  used  in  the  floors  with  their  connections, 
may  be  made  of  Bessemer  steel,  unless  in  special  cases,  it  shall 
be  otherwise  specified. 

Pins  over  five  inches  in  diameter  must  be  of  forged  steel. 

All  machine  driven  rivets  must  be  of  steel. 

Tie  rods,  bolts,  anchors,  lateral  ties  and  all  hand  driven 
rivets  must  be  of  wrought  iron. 

Bearing  plates  in  masonry,  bases  under  columns,  separa- 
tors, brackets  under  plates,  and  filler  blocks  more  than  i^ 
inches  thick,  must  be  made  of  cast  iron. 


404 


COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 


Shoes  for  trusses  and  column  blocks  where  required  must 
be  made  of  cast  steel. 

Character  and  finish  of  materials :  All  the  steel  used 
in  this  building  must  comply  with  the  following  specifications : 


Medium 

Steel. 

Soft  Steel. 

Maximum  ultimate  strength  inlbs.  per  sq.  in.  . 
Minimum  ultimate  strength  in  Ibs.  per  sq.  in.  . 
Minimum  elastic  limit  in  Ibs  per  sq  in.  .  .  . 

68,000 
60,000 
32  000 

60,000 
30  000 

Minimum  percentage  of  elongation  in  8  inches  .  . 

22  & 

26^ 

Test  pieces  of  medium  steel  must  bend  cold  180°  about  a 
diameter  equal  to  the  thickness  of  the  piece  without  any  sign  of 
fracture  on  the  convex  side  of  the  bends.  Test  pieces  of  soft 
steel  must  bend  cold  180°  flat  without  any  sign  of  fracture  on 
the  convex  side  of  the  bend.  They  must  also  stand  the  same 
bend  after  being  heated  to  a  light  cherry  red  and  quenched  in 
water  whose  temperature  is  82°  Fahrenheit. 

Soft  steel  must  be  used  for  rivets  and  medium  steel  for  all 
other  material.  All  steel  must  have  a  smooth  surface  and  must 
be  free  from  all  faults  or  defects  of  any  kind  or  of  any  indication 
of  unsoundness.  Each  piece  must  be  straight,  free  from  wind 
and  of  proper  section.  A  variation  in  weight  either  way  of 
more  than  2  per  cent,  from  that  specified  shall  be  cause  for 
rejection.. 

Eye  bars  used  in  trusses  must  comply  writh  the  following 
specifications  in  full  size  tests: 

Ultimate  strength  in  Ibs.  per  sq.  in.  not  less  than  ...............  .  .  58,000 


"  more 

Elastic  limit  in  Ibs.  per  square  inch  not  less  than 
Elongation  in  2  ft.  length  of  bar  nearest  fracture . 
Reduction  of  area  . 


66,000 
..29,000 


The  fracture  must  take  place  in  the  body  of  the  bar  and 
must  be  generally  silky.  The  mill  requirements  for  material 
for  eye  bars  must  be  as  specified  for  by  the  manufacturers  of 
the  bars. 

All  wrought  iron  used  in  this  building  must  have  an  ulti- 
mate strength  of  not  less  than  48,000  Ibs.  per  square  inch,  an 
elastic  limit  of  not  less  than  26,000  Ibs.  per  square  inch,  and  an 
elongation  of  20  per  cent,  in  8  inches.  The  wrought  iron 
required  for  bolts  and  rivets  must  be  so  ductile  that  test  pieces 
will  bend  cold  180  degrees  flat  without  any  sign  of  fracture  on 
the  convex  side  of  the  bend.  All  the  wrought  iron  must  be 
perfectly  welded  in  rolling,  fihrous,  uniform  and  free  from  all 
defects.  •  Each  piece  must  be  straight  and  of  proper  section. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOE   STEEL   HOTEL   BUILDING.      405 

All  the  cast  steel  used  in  this  building  must  have  an  ulti- 
mate strength  of  not  less  than  60,000  Ibs.  per  square  inch,  an 
elastic  limit  of  not  less  than  32,000  Ibs.  per  square  inch,  and  an 
elongation  in  8  inches  of  not  less  than  15  per  cent.  All  cast- 
ings must  be  annealed  and  all  test  pieces  must  be  cast  as 
coupons  and  detached  after  annealing. 

All  the  cast  iron  used  in  this  building  must  be  tough  gray 
iron,  free  from  cold  shuts,  blow  holes  or  other  serious  defects. 
Its  quality  must  be  such  that  sample  bars  i  inch  square  cast  in 
sand  moulds  must  be  capable  of  sustaining  on  a  clear  span  of 
4^  feet  a  central  load  of  500  pounds  when  tested  in  the  rough 
bar. 

Painting:  All  iron  must  receive  a  coat  of  pure  raw  lin- 
seed oil  at  the  rolling  mills  just  before  being  loaded  on  the 
cars. 

The  covered  surfaces  (surfaces  in  contact  and  surfaces 
enclosed)  of  all  parts  of  riveted  members  must  receive  one  good 
coat  of  graphite  paint,  after  the  pieces  are  punched  and  before 
they  are  assembled.  All  finished  members  must  receive  one 
complete  coat  of  the  graphite  paint  before  they  are  taken  from 
the  shop  or  exposed  to  the  weather.  All  surfaces  that  can  be 
reached  must  have  one  coat  of  the  graphite  paint  after  erection. 
All  truss  members  must  have  two  coats  of  paint  in  the  shop  and 
the  enclosed  surfaces  of  these  members  must  have  the  two  coats 
before  they  are  assembled. 

Foundation  beams  and  connections  must  have  two  coats  of 
paint  at  the  shop.  All  bolts  used  in  erection  and  remaining 
permanently  in  the  building  must  be  dipped  in  graphite  paint 
before  being  placed  in  position. 

All  pins  and  bored  pin  holes  or  other  planed  surfaces  in  the 
trusses  must  be  coated  with  white  lead  and  tallow  before  leaving 
the  shop. 

All  painting  must  be  done  on  dry  surfaces  and  preferably 
warm  ones.  All  dirt  and  foreign  matter  of  any  kind  must  be 
removed  from  the  iron  before  painting.  All  scale  must  be 
removed  from  finished  members  before  painting  the  first  coat  in 
the  shop.  All  scale  must  be  removed  from  material  required 
for  the  trusses  before  it  is  oiled  at  the  rolling  mill. 

The  paint  used  must  be  the  superior  graphite  paint,  pre- 
pared and  mixed  by  the  Detroit  Graphite  Manufacturing  Com- 
pany, of  Detroit,  Michigan. 

Inspection :  The  inspection  hereby  provided  will  be  made 
by  inspectors  employed  by  John  Downey. 

The  contractor  for  the  structural  iron  must  furnish  full  and 
ample  means  for  the  inspection  of  all  the  materials  called  for  by 
these  specifications,  and  of  all  the  work  required  in  fitting  such 
materials  for  erection;  and  to  this  end,  he  shall  admit  the  arch- 


406  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

itect,  engineers,  and  inspectors  to  any  part  of  the  mills  or  shops 
where  work  under  these  specifications  is  being  carried  on. 

To  secure  proper  material,  as  herein  specified,  one  pulling 
test  must  be  made  from  every  heat  or  blow  of  steel  or  rolling  of 
iron,  and  one  bending  and  one  quenching  test;  when  such 
requirements  are  specified,  if  these  are  satisfactory,  the  whole 
will  be  accepted.  If  they  are  not  satisfactory,  others  may  be 
made  as  the  inspector  may  deem  expedient.  All  test  pieces 
must  be  prepared  at  the  expense  of  the  contractor  for  the  s;ruc- 
tural  iron.  The  test  pieces  of  rolled  steel  and  wrought  iron 
must  be  cut  out  of  finished  material,  and  must  not  be  less  than 
YZ  square  inch  in  section.  They  must  be  at  least  10  inches  long 
between  fillets  when  turned  down.  When  possible  they  must 
be  cut  from  the  full  thickness  of  the  section,  from  which  the 
tests  are  taken.  The  method  of  selecting  test  pieces  for  mate- 
rial for  eye  bars  must  be  as  required  by  the  manufacturer  of 
the  bars. 

The  number  of  test  pieces  of  cast  steel  must  be  fixed  by 
the  inspector. 

Full  sized  tests  of  eye  bars  must  be  made  as  required  by 
the  architect  or  engineers.  Test  bars  for  such  tests  will  be 
selected  by  the  inspector  from  the  lot  after  forging  and  before 
boring,  the  results  of  the  test  to  determine  the  acceptance  or 
rejection  of  the  entire  number  wrhich  the  test  bar  represents. 
Other  full  sized  tests  must  be  made  if  required. 

The  material  used  for  all  full  sized  tests  will  be  paid  for  at 
cost,  less  the  scrap  value  of  the  material  to  the  contractor  when 
the  pieces  are  tested  to  destruction,  and  the  test  proved  satis- 
factory ;  otherwise  it  must  be  solely  at  the  cost  of  the  contrac- 
tor. The  use  of  testing  machines  capable  of  testing  both 
specimens  of  material  and  the  full  sized  members,  together  with 
all  necessary  assistance  in  handling  and  operating  the  same, 
must  be  furnished  by  the  contractor  free  of  all  expense. 

All  surfaces  of  all  materials  must  be  carefully  examined  by 
the  inspectors,  and  all  pieces  that  are  of  full  section — free  from 
flaws — straight  and  in  every  way  satisfactory,  must  be  accepted. 
This  inspection  will  not,  however,  prevent  the  rejection  of  any 
piece  at  any  later  time,  but  before  it  is  riveted  in  place  in  the 
building,  if  it  is  discovered  that  the  piece  is  in  any  way  unsuit- 
able. Ample  assistance  must  be  given  by  this  contractor  to  the 
inspector  in  making  this  examination. 

All  material  manufactured  under  these  specifications  must 
be  tested  and  examined  as  herein  provided  before  the  same  is 
oiled  or  loaded  on  the  cars  for  shipment  from  the  mill,  and  as 
soon  after  rolling  as  maybe  convenient  for  the  mill,  and  failure 
to  comply  with  these  specifications  will  be  sufficient  cause  for 
the  rejection  of  the  material. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR   STEEL   HOTEL 


The  inspection  in  the  shop  must,  in  general,  cover  the 
identification  of  material,  the  accuracy  of  work,  and  ful- 
fillment of  specifications  and  drawings  in  every  respect,  and 
reports  of  finished  weights  and  progress  of  the  work,  in  all 
of  which  the  inspector  must  have  ample  opportunity  to  do  his 
work.  All  rejected  material  must  be  made  good  to  the  satis- 
faction of  the  inspector. 

All  long  measurements  in  the  shop  made  by  the  inspector, 
must  be  made  with  a  steel  tape  which  must  be  compared  with 
the  shop's  standard  measure  to  assure  their  agreement. 

In  case  of  any  disagreement  between  the  inspectors  and 
the  contractors  regarding  the  inspection,  appeal  may  be  ha  1  to 
Purely  &  Henderson,  Consulting  Engineers,  but  their  decision 
shall  be  final. 

Yearns:  In  general  not  more  than  ft  of  an  inch  will  be 
allowed  by  the  drawings  for  clearance  at  each  end  of  beams 
connecting  to  beams  and  not  more  than  %  of  an  inch  at  each 
end  of  beams  connecting  to  columns.  All  beams  supported  by 
connection  angles  riveted  to  the  webs  when  finished,  must 
measure  out  to  out  of  such  connection  angles,  not  more  than 
the  length  given  on  the  drawings,  and  not  more  than  ft  of  an 
inch  less  than  that  length.  All  beams  connecting  to  columns 
may  be  ^  inch  shorter  than  shown  on  the  drawings,  but  must 
not  be  longer. 

All  open  holes  must  be  true  to  the  drawings,  and  an  error 
in  the  distance  from  end  to  end,  between  the  open  holes  in  the 
flanges  at  the  ends  of  beams  of  more  than  1-16  of  an  inch  must 
not  be  approved  by  the  inspector. 

Where  connections  are  marked  standard,  the  standards 
adopted  for  this  particular  job  must  be  used.  Beams  or  other 
material  used  in  floor  construction,  excepting  bent  plates  used 
in  connections,  must  not  be  heated  for  bending,  cutting,  or 
fitting,  unless  so  marked  on  the  drawings. 

Beams  split  or  permanently  injured  by  work  in  the  shop 
must  not  be  used. 

Beams  which  are  required  to  be  bolted  together  with  sep- 
arators in  the  building,  must  be  assembled  and  bolted  together 
in  shop  when  practicable. 

Columns:  The  distance  from  the  center  of  the  columns 
out  to  the  open  holes  required  for  the  connection  of  beams, 
must  be  'verified  by  the  inspector.  If,  on  account  of  the 
material  overrunning  in  weight  or  on  any  other  account,  these 
distances  are  wrong  more  than  1-16  of  an  inch,  the  error  must 
be  remedied,  as  the  inspector  may  des  re. 

All  columns  must  be  milled  or  ground  at  each  end  to  a 
smooth  bearing  surface  at  right  angles  to  the  axis  of  the  column, 
and  the  inspector  must  verify  from  time  to  time,  the  adjustment 
of  the  machinery  used  in  this  work. 


408  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

All  columns  must  be  exactly  true  to  length,  and  any  dis- 
crepancies in  such  lengths  of  more  than  1-32  of  an  inch,  must 
be  reported  promptly  to  the  engineers.  If  more  than  1-32  of 
an  inch  too  long,  they  must  be  milled  shorter. 

Where  columns  coming  over  each  other  are  designed  to 
have  the  same  exterior  dimensions,  a  filler  about  1-32  of  an 
inch  thick  must  be  put  under  the  splice  plates  where  they  are 
riveted  to  the  columns.  These  fillers  must  cover  the  entire 
area  covered  by  the  splice  plates.  They  will  not  be  drawn  on 
the  drawings,  but  will  be  noted  in  the  bill  of  material  on  each 
drawing  where  required. 

Columns  must  all  be  straight  and  out  of  wind. 

Riveted  Girders :  Web  plates  must  be  arranged  so  as  not 
to  project  above  or  below  the  flange  angles.  The  lines  show- 
ing the  edges  of  such  plates  will  be  omitted  from  the  drawings. 

In  general,  all  stiff ener  angles  must  fit    tight  at  both  ends. 

Open  holes  in  flanges  must  have  the  same  accuracy 
required  for  beams. 

All  riveted  girders  must  be  out  of  wind  before  leaving  the 
shop. 

Trusses:  Eye  bars  must  be  entirely  free  from  flaws  and 
of  full  section.  The  heads  must  be  so  proportioned  that  the 
bars  will  break  in  the  body  of  the  original  bar  and  the  process 
of  manufacture  and  the  form  of  the  head  must  be  subject  to  the 
approval  of  the  engineers.  No  welding  will  be  allowed  in  the 
body  of  the  bars.  They  must  be  perfectly  straight  before 
boring  and  the  pin  holes  must  be  centered  through  the  center 
line  of  the  bar.  The  lengths  back  to  back  of  pin  holes  must 
not  vary  more  than -6J4- of  an  inch  from  the  figured  lengths 
when  the  bars  are  20  feet  long  or  less;  not  more  than  -£-$  of  an 
inch  when  more  than  20  feet  long.  Bars  which  go  side  by  side 
in  the  trusses  must  be  so  perfectly  bored  that  the  pins  will  pass 
through  the  holes  at  both  ends  without  driving  when  the  bars 
are  placed  in  a  single  pile.  The  holes  must  not  be  more  than 
-*$  of  an  inch  larger  the  pins.  All  eye  bars  must  be  annealed. 

Compression  members  must  have  all  butting  ends  planed 
smooth  and  exactly  square  to  the  center  line  of  the  member, 
and  they  must  be  assembled  in  the  shop  for  the  fitting  of  the 
splice  plates  and  to  assure  perfect  contact  throughout.  Such 
members  must  be  entirely  free  from  twists  or  bends  and  all 
work  must  be  neatly  finished  and  first-class  in  every  respect. 
Pin  holes  must  be  bored  -3i-  of  an  inch  larger  than  the  pins, 
exactly  perpendicular  to  a  vertical  plane  passing  through  the 
center  line  of  each  member,  when  placed  in  a  position  similar 
to  that  which  it  should  occupy  in  the  finished  structure. 

Pins  must  be  turned  straight  and  smooth  and  to  exact 
size. 


SPECIFICATIONS   FOR   STEEL   HOTEL   BUILDING.     409 

Castings:  The  cast  bases  required  in  the  column  must  be 
planed  smooth  on  top  and  to  exact  dimensions.  All  holes  for  the 
bolts  connecting  to  the  columns  must  be  drilled  also  to  the 
exact  measurements  given,  and  the  holes  in  the  other  castings, 
both  steel  and  iron,  must  be  drilled  when  so  marked.  All  sur- 
faces marked  planed  must  be  planed  smooth  and  true  for  a  per- 
fect bearing  as  designed. 

Rivets:  Drifting  that  is  liable  to  injure  the  material  must 
not  be  allowed  anywhere  in  erection. 

Shop  rivets  must  be  machine  driven  as  far  as  possible. 

Rivet  heads  must  be  concentric  with  the  necks  of  the  rivets 
and  all  rivets  when  driven  must  completely  fill  the  holes  and  be 
t  ght. 

Rivets  will  be  used  in  erection  wherever  possible. 

All  rivets  must  be  uniformly  heated. 

Holes  that  do  not  match  sufficiently  to  admit  the  rivet 
without  drifting,  in  assembling  work  in  the  shop,  must  be 
reamed. 

All  riveting  must  be  done  to  the  satisfaction  of  the  engi- 
neers. 

Erection:  If  beams  are  used  in  the  construction  of  the 
foundations,  the  contractor  for  the  structural  iron  must  put 
them  in  position,  both  as  to  plan  and  as  to  height,  using  a  sur- 
veyor's level  for  the  purpose,  but  the  grouting  and  covering  of 
tne  beams  will  be  done  by  the  contractor  for  the  masonry. 

The  outside  building  lines  will  be  given,  but  the  contractor 
for  the  structural  iron  must  determine  and  fix  the  interior  lines, 
and  each  cast  base  must  be  set  in  its  exact  position,  both  as  to 
alignment  and  to  height,  supported  on  wooden  wedges,  before 
the  bedding  is  run  in.  The  center  of  each  base  must  be  true 
to  the  column  center,  as  given  on  the  plans,  within  -jJ6-  of  an 
inch,  and  its  height  must  be  adjusted  exactly,  using  a  surveyor's 
level  and  referring  to  a  fixed  bench  mark.  Each  base 
must  be  bedded  with  a  Portland  cement  grouting,  by  pouring 
the  same  through  the  center  until  all  the  spaces  under  and 
inside  the  base  are  filled.  The  cement  must  be  of  some 
imported  brand  which  must  be  approved  by  the  architect,  and 
the  sand  must  be  clean  and  sharp  and  fine.  The  two  must  be 
mixed  dry  in  equal  quantities  in  a  box — all  that  is  required  for 
one  base  at  one  mixing.  Enough  water  must  then  be  added 
to  make  the  whole  just  flow  under  its  own  weight.  The  whole 
operation  of  mixing  and  setting  must  be  done  as  rapidly  as 
possible.  After  the  bases  are  set  their  heights  will  be  inspected 
by  the  engineers,  and  if  they  are  found  to  vary  more  than  ^§ 
of  an  inch  from  the  correct  height  they  must  be  taken  up  and 
reset. 

The  use  of  iron  sledges  in  driving  or  hammering  beams  or 
columns  or  other  structural  iron  will  not  be  allowed  where  it 


410  COMPLETE   SPECIFICATIONS. 

can  be  avoided.  Wooden  mauls  must  be  used  wherever  their 
use  is  possible.  Care  must  also  be  exercised  to  prevent  the 
material  from  falling  or  from  being  in  any  way  subjected  to 
heavy  shocks. 

Especial  care  must  be  used  to  keep  the  columns  plumb  and 
in  proper  line  during  erection,  and  they  must  be  plumbed  to 
the  satisfaction  of  the  architects  and  engineers  as  often  as  may 
be  desired.  In  case  the  columns  are  not  kept  plumb  the  entire 
work  of  erection  shall  stop  at  the  written  order  of  the  architect 
to  that  effect,  and  the  measures  to  be  employed  to  remedy  the 
defect  must  be  approved  by  the  architect  before  the  erection 
proceeds.* 

The  sections  of  columns,  truss  members,  beams  or  girders 
must  nowhere  be  cut  without  first  obtaining  the  approval  of  the 
engineers. 

Every  failure  of  the  material  to  come  together  properly 
must  be  noted  and  reported  daily  to  the  engineers.  If  any 
serious  difficulty  occurs  during  erection,  it  must  be  reported  to 
the  engineers  before  any  unexpected  measures  are  used  to  meet 
the  difficulty. 

The  plan  or  scheme  for  the  erection  of  the  trusses,  and  tre 
material  connected  to  the  trusses  must  be  submitted  to  the 
engineers,  before  the  iron  work  is  erected  above  the  ground 
floor,  for  their  approval. 

Pilot  nuts  must  be  used  in  entering  all  pins. 

After  the  truss  members  are  put  in  position,  before  they 
are  materially  shadowed  by  temporary  flooring  or  any  other 
construction,  and  after  all  surfaces  are  thoroughly  dried  by  the 
heat  of  the  sun,  they  shall  be  protected  by  waterproof  canvas, 
tarred  paper,  or  other  materials  from  further  exposure  to  the 
weather.  Such  protection  to  continue  until  those  parts  of  the 
building  are  under  the  cover  of  the  other  construction  of  the 
building.  Such  protection  is  desired  to  prevent  water  from 
lodging  and  remaining  in  the  concealed  parts  of  the  work.  Any 
inaccuracy  in  the  matching  of  the  holes  in  the  column  splices 
must  be  removed  by  reaming  and  not  by  drifting. 

Temporary  timber  bracing  must  be  put  in  the  building 
wherever  required  by  the  architect  or  the  engineers. 

The  entire  work  of  erection  must  be  done  to  the  satisfac- 
tion of  both  the  architects  and  the  engineers. 

*Probably  the  worst  practice  in  the  erection  of  architectural  iron  work  is  the  very 
common  use  of  shims  in  the  joints  between  the  successive  column  sections,  thus  con- 
centrating the  loads  on  the  opposite  sides  of  the  cross-section.  The  columns  are 
usually  kept  plumb  in  this  manner,  but  the  practice  is  extremely  vicious  and  should  not 
be  allowed.  If  the  faces  of  the  ends  are  properly  planed  or  milled  off,  and  the  base 
plate  is  set  exactly  level,  it  will  not  be  necessary  to  use  shims.  The  greatest  difficulty 
is  in  setting  the  bed  plate  in  a  truly  horizontal  plane.  The  ordinary  carpenter's  level  is 
not  sufficiently  delicate  for  this  purpose.  These  specifications  are  not  explicit  on  these 
points.— AUTHOR. 


CONTRACT  BOND  OE  SURETY.  411 

CONTRACTOR'S  BONDS. 

175.  Contract  Bond  or  Surety.  It  is  a  very  general 
custom  in  all  important  work  to  require  the  contractor  to  fur- 
nish a  bond  for  the  faithful  and  complete  performance  of  his 
contract.  Sometimes  these  bondsmen  or  sureties  sign  with  the 
contractor,  as  in  the  case  of  the  St.  Louis  contracts,  exemplified 
in  article  168.  It  is  more  usual,  however,  to  make  this  bond  a 
separate  document,  following  immediately  the  signatures  of  the 
contract  itself. 

Bonds  are  always  executed  under  seal,  and  are  therefore 
special  contracts,  since  the  bondsmen  are  not  usually  paid  a 
consideration  for  the  service  rendered,  and  a  sealed  contract 
does  not  require  a  consideration  to  enforce  it. 

In  case  the  original  contract  and  specifications  are  deviated 
from  in  the  execution  of  the  work  to  any  material  extent,  with- 
out the  consent  of  the  bondsmen,  these  latter  are  thereby 
released  from  their  bond.  Since  such  changes  are  nearly  always 
made  in  the  execution  of  engineering  work  after  the  contracts 
are  signed,  and  since  these  are  usually  made  without  consulting 
the  bondsmen,  these  latter  are  as  a  rule  thereby  released  from 
all  obligations,  and  the  bond  becomes  of  no  effect.  Even 
though  the  bondsmen  be  consulted  in  the  matter  of  changes, 
they  are  not  obliged  to  give  their  consent,  and  usually  perhaps 
would  not,  in  which  case  material  changes  could  be  made  only 
by  releasing  the  bondsmen.  The  practice,  therefore,  of  secur- 
ing the  faithful  performance  of  engineering  contracts  by  means 
of  bonds  is  a  very  unsatisfactory  one.  It  would  'be  better 
always  to  confine  the  contract  strictly  to  the  principals  to  the 
agreement,  and  to  secure  guaranties  of  faithful  performance  in 
some  other  manner  than  by  the  execution  of  a  bond  by  outside 
parties,  so  far  as  engineering  and  building  contracts  are  con- 
cerned. The  form  of  bond  given  below  is  that  used  by  the  city 
of  Boston,  and  may  be  taken  as  a  general  type  of  such  a  docu- 
ment. 


412  CONTKACTOK'S  BONDS. 

CONTRACT  BOND  OR  SURETY. 

Know  all  Men  by  these  Presents, 
That  we 


are  held  and  firmly  bound  unto  the  City  of  Boston,  in  the  sum 
of  ... 


dollars  to  be  paid  to  the  City  of  Boston,  or  its  certain  attorney, 
its  successors  and  assigns,  for  which  payment,  well  and  truly  to 
be  made,  we  bind  ourselves,  our  heirs,  executors,  and  adminis- 
trators, jointly  and  severally,  firmly  by  these  presents. 

The  Condition  of  this  obligation  is  such  that 
if  the  above-bounden.... 


shall  well  and  truly  keep  and  perform  all  the  terms  and  condi- 
tions of  the  foregoing  contract  for  excavation  for  stripping  and 
shallow  flowage  and  for  building  two  roads,  at  Basin  No.  5,  in 

Southborough,  on  part  to   be   kept   and   performed,  and 

shall  indemnify  and  save  harmless  the  said  City  of  Boston,  as 
therein  stipulated,  then  this  obligation  shall  be  of  no  effect; 
otherwise  it  shall  remain  in  full  force  and  virtue. 

In  Witness  Whereof,  we  hereto  set  our  hands  and  seals  on 

this day  of in  the  year  eighteen  hundred 

and  ninety  four. 

... [SEAL  .  ] 

[Ss AL  .  ] 

[SEAL.] 

.„ [SEAL.] 

[SEAL.] 

Signed  and  Sealed  in  presence  of 


INDEMNITY   BOND.  413 

176.  Indemnity  Bond.  The  following  is  a  common 
form  of  bond  to  cover  all  liens  which  may  arise  from  a  failure 
of  the  contractor  to  pay  for  his  labor  and  materials. 

Know  all  Men  by  these  Presents:     That of 

as  principal,  and of as  surety,  are  held  and  firmly 

bound  unto  the  in  the  penal  sum  of  dollars,  to 

the  payment  of  which  well  and  truly  to  be  made  we  bind  our- 
selves, our  heirs,  executors,  administrators  and  assigns  firmly  by 
these  presents. 

Signed  this day  of 189 — . 

The  Condition  of  the  above   Obligation  is  such  that: 

WHEREAS,  the  said has  this  day  entered  into  a  con- 
tract in  writing  with  the  said for  the  grading  and  con- 
struction of  a  certain with  ditches,  roadways,  and  other 

works  connected  therewith,  as  more  specifically  set  forth  in  said 
contract: 

Now,  THEREFORE:     If   the   said  shall   well   and 

truly  perform  his  part  of  said  contract,  and  each  and  every  cov- 
enant and  agreement  therein  contained,  and  shall  indemnify 

and  save  harmless  the  said from  and  against  all  damages 

\vhich  it  may  sustain  by  reason  of  liens  for  labor  and  materials 
furnished  for  said  work,  or  by  reason  of  the  failure  of  said 

to   pay  the  wages  and  earnings   of   any  of   the — : 

laborers  or  mechanics  employed  by  him  as  such  contractor,  in 
and  about  said  work ;  or  by  reason  of  his  failure  to  pay  for  any 
materials,  provisions  or  goods  of  any  kind  furnished,  or  by 
reason  of  any  just  debts  incurred  in  carrying  on  said  work ;  and 

if   the   said   shall   pay  to  the  said  all   sums  of 

money,  damages,  or  costs  and  expenses  which  it  may  be  com- 
pelled to  pay,  or  which  it  may  sustain  by  reason  of  his  failure 

as    aforesaid,    and   if    the    said   shall   pay  all  laborers, 

mechanics  and  material  men,  and  persons  who  may  have  sup- 
plied provisions  or  goods  of  any  kind,  all  just  debts  due  to  such 
persons,  or  to  any  person  to  whom  any  part  of  such  work  was 
given,  then  this  obligation  shall  be  void,  otherwise  of  full  force 
and  e£Tect. 

[SEAL.] 

[SEAL.] 


414  COMPLETE    SPECIFICATIONS. 

APPENDIX  A. 

PRELIMINARY    SURVEYS    AND    EXAMINATIONS    FOR    BRIDGE  ^ 
RENEWALS. 

The  following  Instructions  to  Assistant  Engineers  are 
used  by  the  engineer  of  bridges  and  buildings  on  the  C.,  M.  & 
St.  P.  R'y,  and  are  inserted  here  as  an  illustration  of  the  scope 
and  character  of  the  inquiries  and  investigations  necessary  for 
an  intelligent  solution  of  the  problem  in  hand.  It  is  only  by 
means  of  such  complete  and  detailed  information  that  all  future 
contingencies  can  be  foreseen  and  provided  for,  so  that  there 
shall  be  no  ''unexpected"  to  happen.  It  is  a  common  saying 
that  "the  unexpected  always  happens."  In  good  engineering, 
"It  is  only  the  unexpected  which  can  happen,"  since  what  was 
anticipated  has  been  fully  provided  against.  In  the  best  engi- 
neering designs,  however,  every  possible  contingency  has  been 
foreseen  and  provided  for,  so  there  is  no  unexpected  left  which 
can  happen,  and  hence  security  and  permanence  are  assured  in 
advance.  The  following  instructions  are  a  good  illustration  of 
this  kind  of  preliminary  survey  of  the  problem  which  puts  the 
engineer  in  a  position  to  perfectly  fit  the  design  to  all  the  con- 
ditions of  the  problem : 

Instructions  to  Assistant  Engineers  in  Regard  to  Surveys  for 
the  Renewal  of  Wooden  Bridges  ivith  Perma- 
nent   Structures. 

(1)  Gather  information  from   the   chief  engineer's  office 
and  from  the    office    of    the    engineer    and    superintendent    of 
bridges  and  buildings  relative  to  the   grade,    alignment,  right- 
of-way  for  embankment  and  borrow  pits,    second   track  con- 
struction, contracts  relating  to  crossings  or  cattle  passes,  recom- 
mendations already  made  by  others  as  to  style  of  reconstruction 
and  any  other  matters  that  are  liable  to  have  a  bearing  on  work 
in  question. 

(2)  Determine    the    elevation    of   base   of  rail  above  an 
assumed  datum  across  the  bridge  and  for  a   distance  of    1,000 
feet    on  each  side  of  it,  at  intervals  of  100  feet,  or  less  when  the 
irregularities  of  the  track  make  it  necessary. 

(3)  Consider  the  question   of   changing   grade    and   note 
the  kind,  condition  and  depth  of  ballast  as  well  as  other  points 


SURVEYS   FOR   BRIDGE    RENEWALS.  415 

that  will  assist  in  determining  the  expense  and  practicability  of 
making  a  change. 

(4)  Obtain  particularly  notes  of   the  ground  surface  that 
will  be  covered  by  the  proposed   structure  or  embankment,  by 
determining  its  elevation  on  the  center  line  of  bridge  and  when 
necessary  on  each  side  of  same.      These  heights  may  be  meas- 
ured from  the  base  of  rail  at  each  bent  or  panel  point  but  should 
refer    to    the    datum  used   in   the  survey,  and  additional  notes 
should  be  made  of  intermediate    irregularities   that  would  con- 
cern the  height  of  pedestals  located  between  bents. 

(5)  Establish  and  note  two  bench  marks  on  solid  objects, 
conveniently  located,  one  each  way  from  the  bridge,  and  which 
are  unlikely  to  be  disturbed  during  the  construction  of  the  per- 
manent structure.     For  ordinary  cases  a  track  spike  driven  in 
a  telegraph  pole  will  be  suitable. 

(6)  Note  the  alignment  of  the  track  at  the  structure  and 
consider  whether  there  is  any  evident  reason  for  changing  same. 

(7)  Consider  the  question  of  second  track  construction  as 
concerning  any  change   in    alignment   or   in  location  of  bridge. 
Conclude  on  which  side   of   the  present   track  the  second  track 
should  be  constructed   and   make  note  of  the  grounds  for  your 
conclusion. 

(S)  When  track  across  the  bridge  or  near  the  bridge  is 
curved  make  full  notes  of  elevation  of  outer  rail.  If  the  point 
of  curve  is  so  located  that  the  elevation  of  outer  rail  on  bridge 
is  varying,  determine  by  eye  the  location  of  point  of  curve 
and  of  the  point  where  the  elevation  is  commenced.  On  iron 
bridges  the  elevation  should  be  constant  when  practicable. 

(9)  Take   notes   for   a  sketch   of  the   water  course  for  a 
sufficient  distance  on  each   side    of    the    bridge,    to    determine 
whether  a  change  in  location  of  channel  or  an  improvement  in 
the  channel  is  advisable,  and  indicate  your  recommendations  in 
this  regard,  remembering  that  the  most  favorable  condition  for 
a  bridge  is  usually  a  deep  channel  at  right  angles  to  the  railway 
for  some  distance  above  and  below   the   bridge.     Contours  in 
the  immediate  vicinity  of    the  bridge   should  be   sketched   in. 
Ordinarily  this  can  be  done  with  sufficient  accuracy  by  the  eye, 
or  by  taking  a  few  offsets. 

(10)  Ascertain  the  nature  of  foundations,   whether  soft, 
requiring  pile  foundations,  or  of   sand,   or  of   hard   clay,  or  of 
rock.     Reports  should  state  the  character,  depth  and  dip  of  the 
strata. 

(n)  Ascertain  present,  ordinary  and  extreme  high  water 
marks.  Inquire  into  cause  of  high  water ;  whether  by  ordinary 
heavy  rains,  by  water-spout,  by  damming  from  accumulations 
of  drift  or  ice,  or  by  overflow  from  other  water  courses,  or 
from  other  causes  which  may  be  apparent. 


416  COMPLETE   SPECIFICATIONS. 

(12)  Note  the  probability   of  ice,   drift-wood,  hay,  corn- 
stalks, fencing,  etc.,  lodging  against  the  proposed  iron  bridge. 

(13)  Take  notes  of  the  size  of  channel,  area  of  waterway 
required,  direction  of  current,  etc.     • 

(14)  Ascertain    if   there    is    to    be    provided    under    the 
bridge  a  public  or  private  roadway,  wagon-pass  or  cattle-pass, 
with  dimensions  and  conditions  controlling  the  same. 

(15)  If  any  portion  of  the  bridge  is  to  be  rilled,  make  an 
examination  of  the  ground  and  state  where  the  material  can  be 
obtained,  and  whether  inside  of  the   boundaries  of  the  right-of 
way,  or  on  land  which  will  have  to  be  purchased. 

(16)  Ascertain    whether    any    additional  right-of-way  is 
required  for  any  purpose  connected   with  the  work,   and  if  so 
note  location  and  amount. 

(17)  Examine  as  to  a  suitable  location  for  a  stone  yard, 
and  for  the  storing  of  piles,    timber  and  iron-work ;    also  as  to 
convenient  locations   for  derricks    and    what   provision  will  be 
required  for  suitable  anchorage  for  derrick  guys. 

(18)  If   the   proposed   reconstruction   involves  any  ques- 
tion of  purchasing  land  or  privileges,  report  the  situation  with 
advice,    but    avoid   conversation   with    property  owners  which 
would    in   any  way  interfere  with  relations  that  may  be  estab- 
lished later  between  them   and   an    agent    authorized   to  make 
purchases  or  settle  claims. 

(19)  Inquire  as  to  the  accommodations  for  boarding  and 
lodging  for  workmen   and   how   they  can  get  to  and  from  their 
work. 

(20)  Inquire   into   the   condition   of  train   service    at  the 
location  with  regard  to  the  frequency  of  trains  and  the  speed  at 
which  they  ordinarily  run  over  the  bridge. 

(21)  If  piles  are  to  be  driven,   make   your  recommenda- 
tion as  to  whether  they  should  be  driven  with  a  land  or  track 
driver,  and  if  with   a  track  driver,   state   the  nearest  side-track 
to  which  it  must  retreat  for  passage  of  trains. 

(22)  Make  preliminary  estimates   of  the  cost  of  the  per- 
manent structure,  taking  your  prices  from  the  tables  of  cost  of 
iron  bridges  *aid  abutments  which  are  furnished  you  and  from 
them  make  your  recommendation  for  the  permanent  bridge. 

(23)  Make    your    recommendations  as   to  the  angles  of 
piers  and  abutments,  remembering  that  a  square  span  is  one  in 
which  its  ends  are  at  right  angles   to   its   longitudinal  axis,  and 
in  a  skew  span  the  angle  of  skew  is  the  enclosed  angle  between 
the  end  of  the  span  and  a  line  at  right  angles  to  its  longitudinal 
axis. 

(24)  Make  your  recommendation  as  to  what  riprapping 
is  required,  with  the  amount  and  method  of  using  it. 


SURVEYS  FOE  BKIDGE  KENEWALS.         417 

(25)  Advise  what  is  the  best  season  of  the  year  in  which 
to  do  the  work  with  reference  to  high  water,  ice,  cold  weather, 
interruption  of  traffic,  facility  for  obtaining  labor  and  material, 
etc. 

(26)  Report  any  information  you  can  obtain  with  refer- 
ence to  using  local  material  in  the  work,  such  as  piles,  timber, 
lumber,  stone,  sand,  brick,  etc. 

(27)  Avoid  confusing  terms  in  your  notes.     For  instance 
the  term  "base  of  rail"   is  preferable  to   "grade."     See  B.  & 
B.,  Rule  7  g. 

FINALLY.  After  obtaining  information  on  the  points 
hereinbefore  mentioned  and  all  other  data  which  you  can  find 
within  your  reach,  consider  the  question  of  renewal  just  as  if 
you  had  to  make  the  full  decision  and  were  responsible  for 
building  the  best  bridge  with  the  greatest  economy  and  least 
risk;  and  make  your  report  in  such  shape  that  the  draughting 
office  will  have  all  the  instruction  which  it  requires  for  making 
the  plans.  This  information  may  be  furnished  in  writing  and 
on  a  profile  and  map,  and  you  are  cautioned  that  your  work 
will  be  judged  by  your  giving  the  fullest  accurate  information 
with  the  fewest  notes  and  the  least  amount  of  drawing. 

O.  B. 


27 


RETURN  TO  the  circulation  desk  of  any 
University  of  California  Library 
or  to  the 

NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 
Bldg.  400,  Richmond  Field  Station 
University  of  California 
Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 
2-month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling 

M&)  642-6753 
1-year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing  books 

to  NRLF 
Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made  4  days 

prior  to  due  date 


DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


MAY  2  01992 


9650 


Q^/-^U^^n. 


